Skip to main content

Full text of "California 2013 Electrical Code"

See other formats


California Code of Regulations 
Title 24, Part 3 'W^Z^W^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

Calrfornia Building Standards CQ0iniissioii 
Based on 201 1 National Efeetefcal Code* 




nfcjmpzBi 



NFR 



^ 



(For Errata and Supplements. s|§ H^^^^ 



Portions of this publication are reproduced with permission from the National Electrical Code®, 2011 
edition, copyright © 2010 National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02169. All rights reserved. 
No portions of NEC® material may be reproduced except with permission of the National Fire 
Protection Association. 



ISBN 978-1-55701-778-9 

Copyright © to 201 1 National Electrical Code Held By 

National Fire Protection Association 

1 Batterymarch Park (P.O. Box 9146) 

Quincy, MA 02269-9959 

Copyright © to all unique California State Provisions 

Held by 

California Building Standards Commission 

2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130 

Sacramento, CA 95833-2936 

Printed in The United States 

Published and Printed by BNi Publications^ Inc 



NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, NFPA, and National Fire Protection Association are registered 
trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA, 02169. 



70-ii 

2013 California Electrical Code 



Preface 



This document is the 3rd of 12 Parts of the official triennial compilation and publication of the 
adoptions, amendments and repeal of administrative regulations to California Code of Regulations, Title 
24, also referred to as the California Building Standards Code. This Part is known as the California 
Electrical Code and incorporates, by adoption, the 2011 edition of the National Electrical Code of the 
National Fire Protection Association with the California amendments 

The California Building Standards Code is published in its entirety every three years by order of the 
California legislature, with supplements published in intervening years. The California legislature 
delegated authority to various State agencies, boards, commissions and departments to create building 
regulations to implement the State's statutes. These building regulations or standards, have the same 
force of law, and take effect 180 days after their publication unless otherwise stipulated. The California 
Building Standards Code applies to occupancies in the State of California as annotated. 

A city, county or city and county may establish more restrictive building standards reasonably necessary 
because of local climatic, geological or topographical conditions. Findings of the local condition(s) and 
the adopted local building standard(s) must be filed with the California Building Standards Commission 
to become effective and may not be effective sooner than the date filed with the California Building 
Standards Commission and in no case sooner than the effective date of this edition of California 
Building Standards Code. Local building standards that were adopted and applicable to previous 
editions of the California Building Standards Code do not apply to this edition without appropriate 
adoption and the required filing. 

To familiarize yourself with the format of this code, it is suggested that users review the following 
contents: 

® How To Distinguish Model Code Language From California Amendments 

® Matrix Adoption Tables, located at the beginning of each chapter. 

Should you find publication (e.g., typographical) errors or inconsistencies in this code or wish to offer 
comments toward improving its format, please address your comments to: 



California Building Standards Commission 

2525 Natomas Park Drive, Suite 130 

Sacramento, CA 95833-2936 

Phone: (916)263-0916 
FAX: (916)263-0959 

Web Page: www.bsc.ca.gov 



2013 California Electrical Code 



Acknowledgements 



The 2013 California Building Standards Code (Code) was developed through the outstanding 
collaborative efforts of the Department of Housing and Community Development, the Division of 
State Architect, the Office of the State Fire Marshal, the Office of Statewide Health Planning and 
Development, the California Energy Commission, the California Department of Public Health, the 
California State Lands Commission, the Board of State and Community Corrections, and the 
California Building Standards Commission (Commission). 



This collaborative effort included the assistance of the Commission's Code Advisory Committees and 
many other volunteers who worked tirelessly to assist the Commission in the production of this Code. 



Governor Edmund G. Brown Jr. 

Members of the Building Standards Commission 

Secretary Anna Caballero - Chair 
James Barthman - Vice-Chair 



Stephen Jensen 
Randy Twist 

Richard Sawhill 
Kent Sasaki 



Rose Conroy 

Sheila Lee 
Richard Sierra 
Steven Winkel 



Erick Mikiten 



Jim McGowan - Executive Director 
Michael L. Nearman - Deputy Executive Director 



For questions on California state agency amendments; please refer to the contact list on the following page. 



70-iv 



2013 California Electrical Code 



California Code of Regulations^ Title 24 
California Agency Information Contact List 



California Building Standards Commission 

www.bsc.ca.gov (9 1 6) 263-09 1 6 

California Energy Commission 

www.energy.ca.gov 

Energy Hotline (800) 772-3300 

Building Efficiency Standards 

Appliance Efficiency Standards 

Compliance Manual Forms 

California State Lands Commission 

www.slc.ca.gov (562) 499-6312 

Marine Oil Terminals 



California State Library 

www.library.ca.gov 



(916)654-0266 



Board of State and Community Corrections 

www.bscc.ca.gov (916) 445-5073 

Local Adult Jail Standards 
Local Juvenile Facility Standards 



Department of Consumer Affairs: 

Acupuncture Board 

www.acupuncture.ca.gov 



Board of Pharmacy 

www.pharmacy.ca. gov 



(916)515-5200 
Office Standards 



(916)574-7900 
Pharmacy Standards 



Bureau of Barbering and Cosmetology 

www.barbercosmo.ca.gov (916) 952-5210 

Barber and Beauty Shop, 
and College Standards 

Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home 
Furnishings and Thermal Insulation 

www.bearhfti.ca.gov (9 1 6) 999-204 1 

Insulation Testing Standards 



Structural Pest Control Board 

www.pestboard.ca.gov 



(800)737-8188 
Structural Standards 



Veterinary Medical Board 

www.vmb.ca.gov 



(916)263-2610 
Veterinary Hospital Standards 



Department of Food and Agriculture 

www.cdfa.ca.gov 

Meat & Poultry Packing Plant Standards (916) 654-0509 
Dairy Standards (9 1 6) 654-0773 



Department of Housing and Community Development 

www.hcd.ca.gov 

(916)445-9471 

Residential- Hotels, Motels, Apartments, 

Single-Family Dwellings; and 

Permanent Structures in Mobilehome & 

Special Occupancy Parks 

(916)445-3338 
Factory-Built Housing, Manufactured Housing & 

Commercial Modular 

Mobilehome- Permits 8c Inspections 
Northern Region - (916) 255-2501 
Southern Region - (951) 1%1-AAlO 

(916)445-9471 
Employee Housing Standards 

Department of Public Health 

www.dph.ca.gov (916) 449-5661 

Organized Camps Standards 
Public Swimming Pools Standards 



Division of the State Architect 

www.dgs.ca.gov/dsa 



(916)445-8100 



Access Compliance 
Structural Safety 

Public Schools Standards 

Essential Services Building Standards 

Community College Standards 

State Historical Building Safety Board 

Alternative Building Standards 

Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development 

www.oshpd.ca.gov (916) 440-8356 

Hospital Standards 
Skilled Nursing Facility Standards & Clinic Standards 

Permits 

Office of the State Fire Marshal 

osfm.fire.ca.gov (9 1 6) 445-8200 

Code Development and Analysis 

Fire Safety Standards 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-V 



70- vi 2013 California Electrical Code 



How to Distinguish Between Model Code Language 

and 
California Amendments 



To distinguish between model code language and the incoiporated California amendments, including 
exclusive California standards, California amendments will appear in italics. 

Symbols in the margins indicate the status of code changes as follows: 



[SFMJ This symbol identifies which State agency(s), by its "acronym", has amended a section of the 
model code. For a complete listing of the State agency acronyms, see the Application Section 
within Chapter 1 . 



A This symbol indicates a California amendment has been made to the model code. 



This symbol indicates that a change has been made to a California amendment. 



^^^ This symbol indicates deletion of California language. 

NOTATIONS USED IN THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 

The following notation appears in the National Electrical Code to aid the user: 

Shaded text indicates that the material differs from the previous edit ion J The user 
should inspect this text carefully, as some requirements may have been changed. 

I A vertical line in the margin indicates an entirely new article. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-vii 



70-viii 

2013 California Electrical Code 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 

^ 89 General Code Provisions 70-1 

A 90 Introduction 70-22 

Chapter 1 General 

100 Definitions 70-26 

1 General 70-26 

n Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-33 

1 10 Requirements for Electrical Installations 70-34 

I General 70-34 

11 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less 70-37 

mover 600 Volts, Nominal 7(M0 

IV Tunnel Installations over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-43 

V Manholes and other Electrical Enclosures 

Intended for Personnel Entry, All Voltages 70-44 

Chapter 2 Wiring and Protection 

200 Use and Identification of Grounded Conductors 70-46 

210 Branch Circuits 70-48 

I General Provisions 70-48 

II Branch-Circuit Ratings 70-52 

m Required Outlets 70-55 

215 Feeders 70-59 

220 Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service Calculations 70-61 

I General 70-61 

U Branch Circuit Load Calculations 70-61 

III Feeders and Service Load Calculations 70-64 

IV Optional Feeder and Service Load Calculations 70-67 

V Farm Load Calculations 70-70 

225 Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders 70-71 

IGeneral.... .............^............ 70-71 

U Buildinai or Otlier Stmctures Supplied by a laxkits) or Branch 

dn:u«(^1 70-74 

mover 600 Volts 70-76 

230 Services 7(^78 

IGeneral 70-78 

n Overhead Service Cofiductors 70-79 

III Underground Ser\icd Conductors 70-81 

IV Service-Entrance Conductors 70-81 

V Service Equipment — General 70-84 

VI Service Equipment — Disconnecting Means 70-84 

VII Service Equipment — Overcurrent Protection 70-86 

VIII Services Exceeding 600 Volts, Nominal 70-87 

240 Overcun-ent Protection 70-88 

IGeneral 70-88 

li Location 70-92 

III Enclosures 70-95 

IV Disconnecting and Guarding 70-96 

V Plug Fuses, Fuseholders, and Adapters 70-96 

VI Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholders 70-97 

Vn Circuit Breakers 70-97 

Vni Supervised Industrial Installations 70-98 

IX Overcurrent Protection Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-100 



ARTICLE 

250 Grounding and Bonding lO-lQO 

IGeneral 70-100 

n System Grounding 70-103 

III Grounding Electrode System and 

Grounding Electrode Conductor 70-1 1 1 

IV Enclosure, Raceway, and Service Cable Connections 70-1 16 

V Bonding 70-1 17 

VI Equipment Grounding and Equipment 

Grounding Conductors 70-120 

vn Methods of Equipment Grounding 70-125 

VniDirect-Cun-ent Systems 70-128 

EX Instmments, Meters, and Relays 70-129 

X Grounding of Systems and Circuits of d\ er 

1 kV and Over (liigh Voltage) 70-129 

280 Surge Arresters, over IkV 7(^131 

IGeneral 70-131 

II Installation 70-132 

m Connecting Surge Arresters 70-132 

285 Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), IkV or Less 70-133 

IGeneral 70-133 

II Installation 10-\33 

HI Connecting SPDs 70-133 

Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials 

300 Wiring Methods 70-1 35 

I General Requirements 70-135 

II Requirements for Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-145 

310 Conductors for General Wiring 70-147 

I(3ei«al 70-147 

!1 liustalktiai... 70-147 

III CunsHiiction Spccifi*;atioiib. 70-168 

3 12 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures 70-173 

1 Installation 70-174 

n Construction Specifications. 70-175 

314 Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; 

Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole Enclosures 70-1 77 

I Scope and General 70-177 

II Installation 70-177 

ni Construction Specifications 70-184 

IV Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and [^andhole 
Enckwures for Use on Systems Over 6UU Volts, Nominal 70-185 

320 Armored Cable: Type AC 70-186 

IGeneral 70-186 

n Installation 70-186 

III Constmction Specifications 70-187 

322 Flat Cable Assemblies: Type FC 70-187 

IGeneral 70-187 

II Installation 70-188 

III Construction 70-188 

324 Flat Conductor Cable: Type FCC 70-189 

IGeneral 70-189 

n Installation 70-189 

III Constmction 70-190 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-ix 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 

326 Integrated Gas Spacer Cable: Type IGS 70-191 

IGeneral 70-191 

n Installation 70-191 

111 Constmction Specifications 70-191 

328 Medium Voltage Cable: Type MV 70-192 

IGeneral 70-192 

n Installation 70-192 

ni Construction Specifications 70-192 

330 Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC 70-192 

IGeneral 70-192 

n Installation 70-193 

III Construction Specifications 70-194 

332 Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable: Type MI 70-1 94 

IGeneral 70-194 

II Installation 70-195 

HI Construction Specifications 70-196 

334 Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Types NM,NMC, and NMS 70-196 

IGeneral 70-196 

n Installation 70-196 

ni Construction Specifications 70-198 

336 Power and Control Tray Cable: Type TC 70-198 

IGeneral 70-198 

U Installation 70-199 

III Construction Specifications 70-199 

338 Semce-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE 70-200 

IGeneral 70-200 

n Installation 70-200 

111 Constmction 70-201 

340 Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable: Type UF 70-201 

IGeneral 70-201 

II Installation 70-201 

HI Constmction Specifications 70-202 

342 Intermediate Metal Conduit; Type IMC 70-202 

IGeneral 70-202 

n Installation 70-202 

ni Constmction Specifications 70-203 

344 Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC 70-203 

IGeneral 70-203 

II Installation 70-203 

III Constmction Specifications 70-205 

348 Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC 70-205 

IGeneral 70-^05 

n Installation 70-205 

350 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC 70-207 

IGeneral 70-207 

n Installation 70-207 

ni Constmction Specifications 70-208 

352 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit: Type PVC 70-208 

IGeneral 70-208 

II installation 70-208 

m Constmction Specifications 70-210 



ARTICLE 

353 High Density Polyethylene Conduit: Type HDPE Conduit 70-21 1 

I General 70-^1 1 

U Installation 70-21 1 

ni Constmction Specifications 70-212 

354 Nonmetallic Underground Conduit with Conductors: TypeNUCC 70-212 

IGeneral 70-^12 

II Installation 70-212 

ni Constmction Specifications 70-213 

355 Reinforced TTiermosetting Resin Conduit: Type RTRC 70-213 

IGeneral 70-^13 

n. Installation 70-214 

III. Constmction Specifications 70-216 

356 Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Type LFNC 70-21 6 

IGeneral 70-216 

n Installation ..70-216 

ni Constmction Specifications 70-217 

358 Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT 70-218 

IGeneral 70-^18 

n Installation 70-218 

m Constmction Specifications 70-219 

360 Flexible Metallic Tubing: Type FMT 70-219 

IGeneral 70-219 

II Installation 70-219 

HI Constmction Specifications 70-220 

362 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing: Type ENT 70-220 

IGeneral 70-220 

n Installation 70-220 

III Constmction Specifications 70-222 

366 Auxiliary Gutters 70-222 

IGeneral 70-222 

n Installation 70-222 

III Constmction Specifications 70-224 

368 Busways 70-224 

1 General Requirements 70-224 

n Installation 70-224 

m Constmction 70-226 

IV Requirements for Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-226 

370 Cablebus 70-227 

372 Cellular Concrete Floor Raceways 70-228 

374 Cellular Metal Floor Raceways 70-229 

I Installation 70-229 

n Constmction Specifications 70-229 

376 Metal V/ireways 70-230 

IGeneral 70-230 

II Installation 70-230 

HI Constmction Specifications 70-231 

378 Nonmetallic Wireways 70-231 

IGeneral 70-231 

n Installation 70-231 

III Constmction Specifications 70-232 

380 Multioutlet Assembly 70-232 

lCj«wm* 70-232 

U bstailation 70-232 

382 Nonmetallic Extensions 70-233 

IGeneral 70-233 

II Instaiidtiori 70-233 

in. Consinigtion Specifkations (canceatable Nonmetailic 

Extensions only) 70-234 

384 Stmt-Type Channel Raceway 70-235 

IGeneral 70-235 

n Installation 70-235 

III Constmction Specifications 70-236 



70-x 



2013 CalifiDmia Electrical Code 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 



ARTICLE 



386 Surface Metal Raceways 70-236 

1 General 70-^36 

n Installation 70-236 

III Constaiction Specifications 70-237 

388 Surface Nonmetallic Raceways 70-237 

I General 70-^37 

II Installation 70-237 

ni Construction Specifications 70-238 

390 Underfloor Raceways 70-238 

392 Cable Trays 70-239 

1 General 70^39 

n Installation 70-239 

III Constmction Specifications 70-246 

394 Concealed Knob-and-Tube Wiring 70-246 

rCQiCTal. 70^46 

n liis4aiia(ion .....70-246 

P Consliiiction SpccifotiOii?i 70-^47 

396 Messenger Supported Wiring 70-247 

J General 70^47 

n Installation 70-248 

398 Open Wiring on Insulators 70-248 

1 General 70-248 

n Installation 70-248 

Ul Constaiction Specifications 70-250 

399 aluioo^0^crt^«adCoilductOl^ovcf 600Vdis ...- 7*>-25tJ 

Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use 

400 Flexible Cords and Cables 70-25 1 

I General 70-251 

n Construction Specifications 70-260 

III Portable Cables Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-261 

402 Fixture Wires 7(K262 

404 Switches 70-266 

Installation 70-266 

II Construction Specifications 70-270 

406 Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps) 70-270 

408 Switchboards and Panelboards 70-274 

I General 70-^74 

n Switchboards 70-275 

m Panelboanls 70-276 

IV Construction Specifications 70-277 

409 Industrial Control Panels 70-278 

I General 70-^78 

U Installation ..70-278 

ni Construction Specifications 70-279 

410 Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps 70-280 

I General 70-280 

n Luminaire Locations 70-281 

HI Provisions at Luminaire Outlet Boxes, Canopies, and Pans 70-282 

IV Luminaire Supports 70-282 

V Grounding 70-283 

VI Wiring of Luminaires 70-283 

Vn Constaiction of Luminaires 70-285 

VUl Installation of Lampholdere 70-285 

iX Lamps and Auxiliary Equipment 70-285 

?i Special Provisions for Flush and Recessed Luminaires 70-286 



XI Construction of Flush and Recessed Luminaires 70-286 

XU Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge Lighting Systems of 1000 

Volts or Less 70-286 

X tn Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge Lighting Systems of More 

Than 1000 Volts 70-288 

X[\* Lighting Track 70-289 

X\' Decorative Lighting and Similar Accessories 70-289 

41 1 Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less 70-289 

422 Appliances 70-290 

I General 70-^90 

n Installation 70-290 

ni Disconnecting Means 70-293 

IV Constmction 70-294 

VMaiking 70-^95 

424 Fixed Electric Space-Heating Equipment 70-295 

IGeneral 70-^95 

H Installation 70-296 

ni Control and Protection of Fixed Electric Space-Heating 

Equipment 70-296 

IV Marking of Heating Equipment 70-298 

V Electric Space-Heating Cables 70-298 

VIDuctHeatere 70-300 

VII Resistance-Type Boilers 70-300 

Vni Electrode-Type Boilers 70-301 

IX Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets 70-302 

426 Fixed Outdoor Electric Deicing and Snow-Melting Equipment 70-304 

IGeneral 70-304 

n Installation 70-305 

ni Resistance Heating Elements ....70-305 

rv Impedance Heating 70-306 

V Skin-Effect Heating 70-306 

VI Control and Protection 70-307 

427 Fixed Electric Heating Equipment for 

Pipelines and Vessels 70-307 

IGeneral 70-307 

U Installation 70-308 

III Resistance Heating Elements 70-308 

rv Impedance Heating 70-309 

V Induction Heating 70-309 

VI Skin-Effect Heating 70-309 

VU Control and Protection 70-309 

430 Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers 70-310 

IGeneral 70-^10 

U Motor Circuit Conductors 70-316 

HI Motor and Branch-Circuit Overload Protection 70-3 19 

rv Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection 70-322 

V Motor Feeder Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection 70-325 

VI Motor Control Circuits 70-326 

VU Motor Controllers 70-327 

Vni Motor Control Centers 70-329 

IX Disconnecting Means 70-330 

X Adjustable — Speed Drive Systems 70-333 

XI Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-334 

Xn Protection of Live Parts — All Voltages 70-335 

XIII Grounding -— All Voltages 70-335 

XIV Tables 70-336 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-xi 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 

440 Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment 70-340 

[General 70^40 

n Disconnecting Means 70-342 

m Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and 

Ground-Fault Protection 70-343 

IV Branch-Circuit Conductors 70-344 

V Controllers for Motor-Compressors 70-344 

VI Motor-Compressor and Branch-Circuit 

Overload Protection 70-345 

VII Provisions for Room Air Conditioners 70-346 

445 Generators 70-347 

450 Transformers and Transformer Vaults (Including Secondary Ties) 70-348 

I General Provisions 70-348 

II Specific Provisions Applicable to 

Different Types of Transformers 70-352 

niTransfomier Vaults 70-354 

455 Phase Converters 70-355 

I General 70-355 

n specific Provisions Applicable to 

Different Types of Phase Converters 70-356 

460 Capacitors 70-357 

1 600 Volts, Nominal, and Under 70-357 

n Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-358 

470 Resistors and Reactors , 70-358 

1 600 Volts, Nominal, and Under 70-358 

n Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-359 

480 Storage Batteries 70-359 

490 Equipment, Over 600 Volts, Nominal 70-360 

I General 70-360 

n Equipment — Specific Provisions 70-361 

HI Equipment — Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear and 
Industrial Control Assemblies 70-363 

IV Mobile and Portable Equipment 70-365 

V Electrode-Type Boilers..... 70-366 

Chapter 5 Special Occupancies 

500 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Classes 

I, n, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 70-367 

501 Class I Locations , 70-376 

IGeneral 70-^76 

n Wiling 70-376 

III Equipment 70-381 

502 Class 11 Locations 70-386 

IGeneral 70-^86 

n Wiring 70-386 

ni Equipment 70-388 

503 Class in Locations 70-391 

IGeneral 70-391 

n Wiring 70-391 

III Equipment 70-392 

504 Intrinsically Safe Systems 70-394 

505 Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations 70-397 

506 Zone 20, 21, 22 Locations for Combustible Dusts or Ignitible 

Fibas/Ryings .70412 

510 Hazardous (Classified) Locations — Specific 70-419 

511 Commercial Garages, Repair and Storage 70-419 

513 Aircraft Hangars 70-422 



ARTICLE 

514 Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities 70-425 

515 Bulk Storage Plants 70-429 

516 Spray Application, Dipping, and Coating Processes 70-434 

517 Health Care Facilities 70-440 

IGeneral 7O440 

n Wiring and Protection 70-442 

HI Essential Electrical System 70445 

rv Inhalation Anesthetizing Locations 70-452 

VX-Ray Installations 70-455 

VI Communications, Signaling Systems, Data Systems, 
Fire Alarm Systems, and Systems Less Than 120 Volts, 

Nominal 70-456 

VII Isolated Power Systems 70-457 

518 Assembly Occupancies 70-458 

520 Theaters, Audience Areas of Motion Picture and Television Studios, 
Performance Areas, and Similar Locations 70-459 

IGeneral 70-459 

n Fixed Stage Switchboards 70-461 

HI Fixed Stage Equipment Other Than Switchboards 70-462 

IV Portable Switchboards on Stage 70-463 

V Portable Stage Equipment Other Than Switchboards 70-466 

VI Dressing Rooms 70-468 

Vn Grounding 70-468 

522 Control Systems for Permanent Amusement Attractions 70-468 

IGeneral 70468 

n. Control Circuits 70468 

ni. Control Circuit Wiring Methods 70469 

525 Carnivals, Circuses, Fairs, and Similar Events 70-470 

I General Requirements 70-470 

n Power Sources 70-470 

m Wiring Methods 70-471 

IV Grounding and Bonding 70-472 

530 Motion Picture and Television Studios 

and Similar Locations 70-472 

IGeneral 70-472 

II Stage or Set 70-473 

ni Dressing Rooms 70-475 

IV Viewing, Cutting, and Patching Tables 70-475 

V Cellulose Nitrate Film Storage Vaults 70-475 

VI Substations 70-475 

540 Motion Picture Projection Rooms 70-476 

IGeneral 70-476 

n Equipment and Projectors of the Professional Type 70-476 

m Nonprofessional Projectors 70-477 

IV Audio Signal Processing, Amphfication, 

and Reproduction Equipment 70-477 

545 Manufactured Buildings 70-477 

547 Agricultural Buildings 70-478 

550 Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks ... 70-481 

IGeneral 70-481 

n Mobile and Manufactured Homes 70-482 

m Services and Feeders 70-489 

551 Recreational Vehicles and Recreational Vehicle Parks 70-490 

IGeneral 70-490 

n Combination Electrical Systems 70-491 

mother Power Sources 70492 

IV Nominal 120-Volt or 120/240-Volt Systems 70-493 

VFactory Tests 70-500 

VI Recreational Vehicle Parks 70-500 



70-xii 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 

552 Park Trailers 10-503 

I General 7(^-503 

n Low-Voltage Systems 70-503 

Hi Combination Electrical Systems 70-504 

IV Nominall20-Volt or 120/240-Volt Systems 70-505 

V Factory Tests 70-511 

553 Floating Buildings 70-512 

I General 70-512 

n Services and Feeders 70-512 

m Grounding 70-512 

555 Marinas and Boatyards 70-513 

590 Temporary Installations 70-516 

Chapter 6 Special Equipment 



600 Electric Signs and Outline Lighting 70-5 19 

1 Genera] 70-519 

U Field-Installed Skeleton Tubing, Outline Li^dng^ and 

Secondary Wiring 70-523 

604 Manufactured Wiring Systems 70-525 

605 Office Furnishings (Consisting of Lighting 

Accessories and Wired Partitions) 70-526 

610 Cranes and Hoists 70-527 

I General 70-527 

II Wiring 70-527 

III Contact Conductors 70-530 

IV Disconnecting Means 70-531 

V Overcurrent Protection 70-531 

VI Control 70-532 

VII Grounding 10-532 

620 Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, 
Moving Walks, WTieelchair Lifts, and 
Stairway Chair Lifts 70-532 

I General 70-532 

II Conductors 70-534 

III Wiring 70-536 

IV Installation of Conductors 70-538 

V Traveling Cables 70-539 

VI Disconnecting Means and Control 70-540 

VII Overcurrent Protection 70-542 

Vm Machine Rooms, Control Rooms, 

Machinery Spaces, and Control Spaces 70-542 

IX Grounding 7(^-543 

X Emergency and Standby Power Systems 70-543 

625 Electiic Vehicle Charging System 70-543 

IGeneml 70-543 

H Wiring Methods 70-544 

111 Equipment ConstRiction 70-544 

W Control and Protection 70-545 

V Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment Locations 70-545 

626 Electrified Tmck Parking Spaces 10-541 

T. General 70-547 

U. Electrified Tmck Parking Spaces Electrical Wiring Systems 70-548 

111. Electrified Tmck Parking Space Supply 70-549 

W. Transport Retrigerated Unites (TRUs) 70-551 



ARTICLE 

630 Electric Welders 70-552 

I General 70-552 

n Arc Welders 70-552 

m Resistance Weldem 70-553 

IV Welding Cable 70-554 

640 Audio Signal Processing, Amplification, 

and Reproduction Equipment 70-554 

I General 70-554 

II Permanent Audio System Installations 70-557 

III Portable and Temporary Audio System Installations 70-558 

645 Information Technology Equipment 70-559 

647 Sensitive Electronic Equipment 70-563 

650 Pipe Organs 7(^564 

660 X-Ray Equipment 70-565 

I General 70-565 

n Control 70-566 

ni Transfomiers and Capacitors 70-566 

rv Guarding and Grounding 70-566 

665 Induction and Dielectric Heating Equipment 70-567 

I General 70-567 

II Guarding, Grounding, and Labeling 70-568 

668 Electrolytic Cells 70-568 

669 Electroplating 70-571 

670 Industrial Machinery 70-572 

675 Electrically Driven or Controlled Irrigation Machines 70-573 

I General 70-573 

U Center Pivot Irrigation Machines 70-575 

680 Swimming Pools, Fountains, and Similar Installations 70-575 

IGeneral 70-575 

n Permanently Installed Pools 70-579 

III Storable Pools 70-585 

IV Spas and Hot Tubs 70-586 

V Fountains 70-588 

VT Pools and Tubs for Therapeutic Use 70-589 

VnHydromassage Bathtubs. 70-590 

682 Natural and Artifically Made Bodies of Water 70-590 

IGeneral 70-590 

H Installation 70-591 

ni Grounding and Bonding 70-592 

685 Integrated Electrical Systems 70-592 

IGeneral 70-592 

II Orderly Shutdown 70-593 

690 Solar Photovoltaic Systems 7(^593 

IGeneral 70-593 

n Circuit Requirements 70-597 

ni Disconnecting Means 70-599 

W Wiring Methods 70-^01 

V Grounding 70-603 

VI Marking 70-604 

VII Connection to Other Soui'ces 70-605 

Vni Storage Batteries 70-605 

DC Systems Over 600 Volts 70-607 

692 Fuel Cell Systems 70-607 

IGeneral 70-607 

n Circuit Requirements 70-608 

ni Disconnecting Means 70-608 

W Wiring Methods 70-609 

V Grounding 70-609 

VI Marking 70-609 

VII Connection to Other Circuits 70-609 

VIII Outputs 0\er 600 Volts 70-609 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-xiii 



CONTENTS 



ARTICLE 

694 Small Wiod Electric Systans 70-610 

I General 70-610 

n Ciiciiit Retiuinenwnts 70-61 1 

III Discamecung Means , 70-612 

IVWtraigMeihods.,.,., ,. 70-613 

V Grounding , 70-613 

VI Marking 70-614 

VII CoiMtectioii to Other Ctrcuita 70-614 

VUlStoiugeBaKcries 70-614 

IXS>'5tcfns(nia'600VQh3 70-616 

695 Fire Pumps 70-616 

Chapter 7 Special Conditions 

700 Emergency Systems 70-622 

I General 70-622 

U Circuit Wiring 70-623 

m Sources of Power 70-624 

IV Emergency System Circuits for Lighting and Power 70-626 

V Control — Emergency Lighting Circuits 70-626 

VI Overcurrent Protection 70-627 

701 Legally Required Standby Systems 70-627 

I General 70-627 

U Circuit Wiring 70-628 

m Sources of Power 70-628 

IV Overcurrent Protection 70-630 

702 Optional Standby Systems 70-630 

I General 70-630 

II Wiring 70-631 

705 Interconnected Electric Power Production Sources 70-631 

I. General 70-631 

U. Utility-Interactive Inverters 70-634 

UI. Generators 70-635 

708 Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS) 70-635 

I. General 70-636 

II. Circuit Wiring and Equipment 70-637 

Lll Ppower Sources and Connection 70-638 

IV. Overcun-ent Protection 70-640 

V. System Performance and Analysis 70-640 

720 Circuits and Equipment Operating at Less 

Than 50 Volts... 70-640 

725 Class 1 , Class 2, and Class 3 

Remote-Control, Signaling, and Power-Limited Circuits 70-641 

I General 70-641 

n Class 1 Circuits 70-642 

m Class 2 and Class 3 Circuits 70-644 

rV Listing Requirements 70-648 

727 Instrumentation Tray Cable: Type FTC 70-650 

760 Fire Alarm Systems 70-651 

I General 70-651 

n Non-Power-Limited Fire Alarm (NPLFA) Circuits 70-652 

III Power-Limited Fire Alami (PLFA) Circuits 70-654 

rV Listing Requirements 70-657 

770 Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways 70-660 

I General 70-660 

n Cables Outside and Entering Buildings 70-661 

niProtection 70-661 

IV Grounding Methods 70-661 

V Installation Methods Within Buildings 70-663 

VI Listing Requirements 70-666 

Chapter 8 Communications Systems 

800 Communications Circuits 70-669 

I General 70-669 

n Wires and Cables Outside and Entering Buildings 70-670 

niProtection 70-672 

rv Grounding Methods 70-673 

V Installation Methods Wires and Cables Within Buildings 70-675 

VI Listing Requirements 70-680 



ARTICLE 

810 Radio and Television Equipment 70-682 

I General 70-682 

II Receiving Equipment — Antenna Systems 70-682 

ni Amateur lirr* ('?!t,vtt Bar | Transmitting and Receiving 

Stations — Antenna Systems 70-685 

IV Interior Installation — Transmitting Stations 70-686 

820 Community Antenna Television and Radio 

Distribution Systems 70-686 

I General 70-686 

II Coaxial Cables Outside and Entering Buildings 70-687 

niProtection 70-688 

IV Grounding Methods 70-689 

V Installation Methods Within Buildings 70-690 

VI Listing Requirements 70-693 

830 Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems 70-695 

I General 70-695 

II Cables Outside and Entering Buildings 70-697 

niProtection 70-699 

IV Grounding Methods 70-701 

V Installation Methods Within Buildings 70-702 

VI Listing Requirements 70-705 

R40 Premises-PdttTfltd Bnoodband Coninmnicaiions Sy'stems»- 70^-7^ 

I CkneraJ „..„,...„..„.. .„. 70^707 

n Cables Outside and Enteriog Buiidings ..»-......„ ., .,.™... 70-708 

niProtection........ ,, ....™. — .,.«„«..„. 7Ch709 

IV Grounding Methods .__....„ ... 70-7W 

V Installation Mc-thods Within Buildings... -^ , .-. - .- 70-709 

VI Listing RequirenioUs ...„..„.,„., — „ ,...„ — „„ — 70-710 



TABLES 



Chapter 9 Tables 



1 Percent of Cross Section of Conduit and 

Tubing for Conductors 70-711 

2 Radius of Conduit and Tubing Bends 70-71 1 

4 Dimensions and Percent Area of Conduit and Tubing 

(Areas of Conduit or Tubing for the Combinations of Wires 

Permitted in Table 1, Chapter 9) 70-712 

5 Dimensions of Insulated Conductors and 

Fbcture Wires 70-716 

5A Compact Copper and Aluminum Building Wire 

Nominal Dimensions and Areas 70-720 

8 Conductor Properties 70-721 

9 Alternating-Current Resistance and 

Reactance for 600- Volt Cables, 3-Phase, 
60 Hz, 75°C (167T) — Three Single 
Conductors in Conduit 70-722 

10 CanduciorStnmdmg 70-723 

1 1(A) Class 2 and Class 3 Alternating-Current 

Power Source Limitations 70-724 

1 1(B) Class 2 and Class 3 Direct-Current Power 

Source Limitations 70-725 

12(A) PLFA Alternating-Current Power Source Limitations 70-726 

12(B) PLFA Direct-Current Power Source Limitations 70-726 

Annex A 70-727 

AnnexB 70-730 

Annexe 70-744 

AnnexD 70-804 

Annex E 70-814 

AnnexF 70-816 

Annex G 70-819 

Annex H 70-821 

Annex 1 70-828 

Index 70-830 



70-xiv 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



California Matrix Adoption Tables 

Format of the Matrix Adoption Tables 

The matrix adoption tables, which follow, show the user which state agencies have 
adopted and/or amended given sections of model code for applications within their 
respective authorities. See Article 89, Sections 089, J 02 through 89.114, for building 
application and enforcement responsibilities. 

The side headings identify the scope of the state agencies' adoption as follows: 

Adopt the entire NEC article without state amendments 

If there is an "X" under a particular state agency's acronym in this row, it means that 
particular state agency has adopted the entire model code chapter without any state 
amendments. 



Example: 



ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


B¥U 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


ss 


1 


2 


3 


4 


Adopt Entire Article 
























Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 








— 


— 


h 












Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


X 


- 








Article / Section 






89.101 


X 












X 










89.102 


X 












X 











Adopt the entire NEC article as amended (amendments listed below) 

If there is an "X" under a particular state agency's acronym in this row, it means that 
particular state agency has adopted the entire model code chapter, with state amendments. 

Each state-amended section that the agency has added to that particular chapter is 
listed. There will be an "X" in the column, by that particular section, under the agency's 
acronym, as well as an "X" by each section that the agency has adopted. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-xv 



CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



Example: 



ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


1 


2 


3 


4 


Adopt Entire Article 
























Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


X 






— 








- — 








Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 




, 










Article / Section 










89.101 


X 






















89.102 


X 























Example: 



Adopt only those sections which are listed below: 

If there is an "X" under a particular state agency's acronym in this row, it means that 
particular state agency is adoption only specific model code or state-amended sections 
within this chapter. There will be an "X" in the column under the agency's acronym, as 
well as an "X" by each section that the agency has adopted. 

ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


1 


2 


3 


4 


Adopt Entire Article 
























Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 
























Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


X 


1 
1 






1 
1 




Article / Section 




■ - ■■ 






















89.101 


X 






















89.102 


X 























Legend of Abbreviations of Adopting State Agencies 

BSC California Building Standards Commission 

SFM Office of the State Fire Marshal 

HCD Department of Housing and Community Development 

DSA-AC Division of the State Architect - Access Compliance 

DSA-SS Division of the State Architect - Structural Safety 

DSA-SS/CC Division of the State Architect - Structural Safety/Community Colleges 

OSHPD Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development 

DPH California Department of Public Health 



70-xvi 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 89 - CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLE 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


1-AC 


2 


AC 


ss 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 




























Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 




























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Article / Section 


89.101 


X 


X 


X 




X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


89.102 


X 


























89.107 


























X 


89.108 






X 


X 


X 


















89.109 












X 
















89.109.1 












X 
















89.109.2 














X 


X 












89.110.1 


















X 










89.110.2 




















X 








89.110.3 






















X 






89.110.4 
























X 




89.111 




X 

























2013 California Electrical Code 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 
GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 




A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 



SECTION 89.101 
GENERAL 



89.101.1 Title. These regulations shall be known as the 
California Electrical Code, may be cited as such and will be 
referred to herein as "this code. " The California Electrical 
Code is Part 3 of twelve parts of the official compilation and 
publication of the adoption, amendment, and repeal of 
electrical regulations to the California Code of Regulations, 
Title 24, also referred to as the California Building Standards 
Code. This part incorporates by adoption the 2011 National 
Electrical Code of the National Fire Protection Association 
with necessary California amendments. 

89.101.2 Purpose. The purpose of this code is to establish the 
minimum requirements to safeguard the public health, safety 
and general welfare through structural strength, means of 
egress facilities, stability, access to persons with disabilities, 
sanitation, adequate lighting and ventilation, and energy 
conservation; safety to life and property from fire and other 
hazards attributed to the built environment; and to provide 
safety to fire fighters and emergency responders during 
emergency operations. 

89.101.3 Scope. The provisions of this code shall apply to the 
construction, alteration, movement, enlargement, replacement, 
repair, equipment, use and occupancy, location, maintenance, 
removal and demolition of every building or structure or any 
appurtenances connected or attached to such building or 
structures throughout the State of California. 

89.101.3.1 Nonstate-Regulated Buildings, Structures, 
and Applications. Except as modified by local ordinance 
pursuant to Section 89.101.8, the building standards in 
the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Parts 2, 2.5, 
3, 4, 5, 6,9, 10 and 11 shall apply to all occupancies and 
applications not regulated by a state agency. 

89.101.3.2 State-Regulated Buildings, Structures, and 
Applications. TJie model code, state amendments to the 
model code, and/or state amendments where there are no 
relevant model code provisions shall apply to the 
following buildings, structures, and applications 
regulated by state agencies and as specified in Sections 
89.102 through 89.114, except where modified by local 
ordinance pursuant to Section 89.101.8. When adopted 
by a state agency, the provisions of this code .shall be 
enforced by the appropriate enforcing agency, but only to 
the extent of authority granted to such agency by the state 
legislature. 



Note: See Preface to distinguish the model code 
provisions from the California provisions. 

1. State-owned buildings, including buildings 
constructed by the Trustees of the California State 
University, and to the extent permitted by California 
laws, buildings designed and constructed by the 
Regents of the University of California, and regulated 
by the Building Standards Commission. See Section 
89. 1 02 for additional scope provisions. 

2. Reserved for Corrections Standards Authority. See 
Section 89.103 for additional scope provisions. 

3. Reserved for the Department of Consumer Affairs. 
See Section 89.104 for additional scope provisions. 

4. Reserved for the California Energy Commission. 
See Section 89.105 for additional scope provisions. 

5. Reserved for the Department of Food and Agriculture. 
See Section 89.106 for additional scope provisions. 

6. Organized camps, laboratory animal quarters, public 
swimming pools, radiation protection, commissaries serving 
mobile food preparation vehicles and wild animal 
quarantine facilities regulated by the California Department 
of Public Health (DPH). See Section 89.107 for additional 
scope provisions. 

7. Hotels, motels, lodging houses, apartment houses, 
dwellings, dormitories, condominiums, shelters for 
homeless persons, congregate residences, employee 
housing, factory-built housing, and other types of dwellings 
containing sleeping accommodations with or without 
common toilets or cooking facilities. See Section 
89. 108.2. 1. Ifor additional scope provisions. 

8. Accommodations for persons with disabilities in 
buildings containing newly constructed covered 
multifamily dwellings, new common use spaces serving 
existing covered multifamily dwellings, additions to 
existing buildings where the addition alone meets the 
definition of "COVERED MULTIFAMILY 
DWELLINGS," and common-use spaces serving 
covered multifamily dwellings which are regulated by 
the Department of Housing and Community 
Development. See Section 89.108.2.1.2 for additional 
scope provisions. 

9. Permanent buildings and permanent accessory 
buildings or structures constructed within mobilehome 
parks and special occuparicy parks regulated by the 
Department of Housing and Community Development See 
Section 89.108.2. 1.3 for additional scope provisions. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 


A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-1 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



10. Accommodations for persons with disabilities 
regulated by the Division of the State Architect. See 
Section 89. 109.1 for additional scope provisions. 

11. Public elementary and secondary schools, 
community college buildings, and state-owned or state- 
leased essential service buildings regulated by the 
Division of the State Architect. See Section 89.109.2 for 
additional scope provisions. 

12. Qualified historical buildings and structures and 
their associated sites regulated by the State Historical 
Building Safety Board with the Division of the State 
Architect. See Section 89.109.3 for additional scope 
provisions. 

13. General acute care hospitals, acute psychiatric 
hospitals, skilled nursing and/or intermediate care 
facilities, clinics licensed by the California Department 
of Public Health (DPH) and correctional treatment 
centers regulated by the Office of Statewide Health 
Planning and Development. See Section 89.110 for 
additional scope provisions. 

14. Applications regulated by the Office of the State 
Fire Marshal include, but are not limited to, the 
following in accordance with Section 89.111: 

1. Buildings or structures used or intended for use as an: 

1. 1. Asylum, jail, prison. 

1.2. Mental hospital hospital home for the elderly, 
children's nursery, children's home or institution, 
school or any similar occupancy of any capacity. 

1.3. Theater, dancehall, skating rink, auditorium, 
assembly hall, meeting hall, nightclub, fair building, or 
similar place of assemblage where 50 or more persons 
may gather together in a building, room or structure 
for the purpose of amusement, entertainment, 
instruction, deliberation, worship, drinking or dining, 
awaiting transportation, or education. 

1.4. Small family day care homes, large family day 
care homes, residential facilities and residential 
facilities for the elderly and residential care facilities. 

1.5. State institutions or other state-owned or state- 
occupied buildings. 

1. 6. High rise structures. 

1.7. Motion picture production studios. 

1.8. Organized camps. 

1.9. Residential structures. 

2. Tents, awnings or other fabric enclosures used in 
connection with any occupancy. 

3. Fire alarm devices, equipment and systems in 
connection with any occupancy. 

4. Hazardous materials, flammable and 
combustible liquids. 



5. Public school automatic fire detection, alarm, and 
sprinkler systems. 

6. Wildland-Urban Interface (WUI)fire areas. 

15. Reserved for the State Librarian. See Section 89. 1 12 for 
additional scope provisions. 

16. Reserved for the Department of Water Resources. See 
Section 89. 1 IS for additional scope provisions. 

1 7. Reserved for the California State Lands Commission. 
See Section 89.1 14 for additional scope provisions. 

89.101.3.3 Exempted from this Code. This code does 
not cover: 

(A) 1. Installations in ships, watercraft other than 
floating dwelling units, railway rolling stock, 
aircraft, automotive vehicles, commercial coaches, 
mobilehomes, and recreational vehicles. 

(B) 2. Installations underground in mines, mine 
shafts and tunnels. 

(C) 3. Installations of railways for generation, 
transformation, transmission, or distribution of 
power used exclusively for operation of rolling stock 
or installations used exclusively for signaling and 
communication purposes. 

(D) 4. Installation of communication equipment 
under the exclusive control of communication 
utilities, located outdoors or in building spaces used 
exclusively for such installations. 

(E) 5. Installations under the exclusive control of 
electrical utilities for the purpose of communication, 
or metering; or for the generation, control, 
transformation, transmission, and distribution of 
electrical energy located in buildings used 
exclusively by utilities for such purposes or located 
outdoors on property owned or leased by the utility 
or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or 
outdoors by established rights on private property. 

Exception to (D)4 and (E)5: In places of 
employment, the following shall apply: installations 
of conductors, equipment and associated enclosures 
subject to the jurisdiction of the California Public 
Utilities Commission, that are owned, operated and 
maintained by an electric, communications or 
electric railway utility, but not including conduit, 
vaults, and other like enclosures containing 
conductors and equipment of such a utility when 
located indoors or on premises not used exclusively 
for utility purposes, but do not apply to the utility 's 
conductors and equipment therein. 

(F) 6. Installations on highways or bridges. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



70-2 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



89.101.4 Annexes. Provisions contained in the annexes of 
this code shall not apply unless specifically adopted by a 
state agency or adopted by a local enforcing agency in 
compliance with Health and Safety Code Section 18901 et 
seq. for Building Standards Law, Health and Safety Code 
Section 17950 for State Housing Law and Health and 
Safety Code Section 13869.7 for Fire Protection Districts. 
See Section 89.101.8 of this code. 

89.101.5 Referenced Codes. The codes, standards and 
publications adopted and set forth in this code, including 
other codes, standards and publications referred to therein 
are, by title and date of publication, hereby adopted as 
standard reference documents of this code. When this code 
does not specifically cover any subject related to building 
design and construction, recognized architectural or 
engineering practices shall be employed. The National Fire 
Codes, standards and the Fire Protection Handbook of the 
National Fire Protection Association are permitted to be 
used as authoritative guides in determining recognized fire 
prevention engineering practices. 

89.101.6 Non-Building Standards, Orders and 
Regulations. Requirements contained in the National 
Electrical Code, or in any other referenced standard, code 
or document, which are not building standards as defined 
in Health and Safety Code Section 18909 shall not be 
construed as part of the provisions of this code. For 
nonbuilding standards, orders, and regulations, see other 
titles of the California Code of Regulations. 

89.101. 7 Order of Precedence and Use. 

89.101.7.1 Differences. In the event of any differences 
between these building standards and the standard 
reference documents, the text of these building standards 
shall govern. 

89.101.7.2 Specific Provisions. Where a specific 
provision varies from a general provision, the specific 
provision shall apply. 

89.101.7.3 Conflicts. When the requirements of this code 
conflict with the requirements of any other part of the 
California Building Standards Code, Title 24, the most 
restrictive requirements shall prevail 

89.101.8 City, County, or City and County Amendments, 
Additions or Deletions. The provisions of this code do not 
limit the authority of city, county, or city and county 
governments to establish more restrictive and reasonably 
necessary differences to the provisions contained in this 
code pursuant to complying with Section 89.101.8.1. The 
effective date of amendments, additions, or deletions to 
this code by city, county or city and county filed pursuant 
to Section 89.101.8.1 shall be the date filed. However, in 
no case shall the amendments, additions or deletions to 
this code be effective any sooner than the effective date of 
this code. 



Local modifications shall comply with Health and Safety 
Code Section 18941.5 for Building Standards Law, Health 
and Safety Code Section 1 7958 for State Housing Law or 
Health and Safety Code Section 13869.7 for Fire 
Protection Districts. 

89.101.8.1 Findings and Filings. 

1. The city, county, or city and county shall make 
express findings for each amendment, addition or 
deletion based upon climatic, topographical, or 
geological conditions. 

Exception: Hazardous building ordinances and 
programs mitigating unreinforced masonry buildings. 

2. The city, county, or city and county shall file the 
amendments, additions, or deletions expressly 

marked and identified as to the applicable findings. 
Cities, counties, cities and counties, and fire 

departments shall file the amendments, additions or 
deletions, and the findings with the California 

Building Standards Commission at 2525 Natomas 
Park Drive, Suite 130, Sacramento, CA 95833. 

3. Findings prepared by fire protection districts 
shall be ratified by the local city, county, or city and 
county and filed with the California Department of 
Housing and Community Development, Division of 
Codes and Standards, P.O. Box 1407, Sacramento, CA 
95812-1407 or at 1800 3rd Street, Room 260, 
Sacramento, CA 95811. 

89.101.9 Effective Date of this Code. Only those standards 
approved by the Califonna Building Standards Commission 
that are effective at the time an application for building permit 
is submitted shall apply to the plans and specifications for, and 
to the construction performed under, that permit For the 
effective dates of the provisions contained in this code, see the 
Histoiy Note page of this code. 

89.101.10 Availability of Codes. At least one complete 
copy each of Titles 8, 19, 20, 24, and 25 with all revisions 
shall be maintained in the office of the building official 
responsible for the administration and enforcement of this 
code. Each state department concerned and each city, 
county or city and county shall have an up-to-date copy of 
the code available for public inspection. See Health and 
Safety Code Section 18942 (d) (1) and (2). 

89.101.11 Format. This part fundamentally adopts the 
National Electrical Code by reference on a chapter-by- 
chapter basis. When a specific chapter of the National 
Electrical Code is not printed in the code and is marked 
"Reserved", such chapter of the National Electrical Code 
is not adopted as a portion of this code. When a specific 
chapter of the National Electrical Code is marked "Not 
adopted by the State of California" but appears in the 
code, it may be available for adoption by local ordinance. 



C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-3 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



Note: Matrix Adoption Tables at the front of each 
chapter may aid the code user in determining which 
chapter or sections within a chapter are applicable to 
buildings under the authority of a specific state 
agency, but they are not to be considered regulatory. 

89.101.12 Validity. If any chapter, article, section, 
subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this code is for 
any reason held to be unconstitutional, contrary to statute, 
exceeding the authority of the state as stipulated by 
statutes, or otherwise inoperative, such decision shall not 
affect the validity of the remaining portion of this code. 



SECTION 89.102 

BUILDING STANDARDS COMMISSION 

89.102.1 Specific scope of application of the agency 
responsible for enforcement, the enforcement agency, and 
the specific authority to adopt and enforce such 
provisions of this code, unless otherwise stated. 

1. State Buildings for all occupancies. 

Application - State buildings (all occupancies), including 
buildings constructed by the Trustees of the California 
State University and the Regents of the University of 
California where no state agency hai the authority to adopt 
building standards applicable to such buildings. 

Enforcing Agency - State or local agency specified by 
the applicable provisions of law. 



Authority Cited 

18934.5. 



Health and Safety Code section 



Reference - Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
2.5, commencing with section 18901. 

2. University of California, California State Universities, 
and California Community Colleges. 

Application — Standards for lighting for parking lots 
and primary campus walkways at the University of 
California, California State Universities, and 
California Community Colleges. 

Enforcing Agency - State or local agency specified by 
the applicable provisions of law. 

Authority Cited- Government Code section 1461 7. 

Reference - Government Code section 1461 7. 

3. Existing State-Owned Buildings, including those owned 
by the University of California and by the California State 
University- Building seismic retrofit standards including 
abating falling hazards of structural and nonstructural 
components and strengthening of building structures. See 
also Division of the State Architect 

Enforcing Agency - State or local agency specified by 
the applicable provisions of law. 

Authority Cited- Government Code section 16600 



Reference - Government Code sections 16600 
through 16604 

4. Unreinforced Masonry Bearing Wall Buildings. 

Application- Minimum seismic strengthening standards 
for buildings specified in Appendix Chapter 1 of the 
California Code for Building Conservation, except for 
buildings subject to building standards adopted pursuant 
to Part 1.5 (commencing with Section 17910). 

Enforcing Agency - State or local agency specified by 
the applicable provisions of law. 



Authority Cited 

18934.6 



Health and Safety Code section 



Reference - Health and Safety Code sections 18901 
through 18949 

89.102.2 Alternative Materials, Design And Methods Of 
Construction And Equipment 

The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the 
installation of any material or to prohibit any design or 
method of construction not specifically prescribed by this 
code, provided that any such alternative has been approved. 
An alternative material, design or method of construction shall 
be approved where the building official finds that the proposed 
design is satisfactory and complies with the intent of the 
provisions of this code, and that the material method or work 
offered is, for the purpose intended, at least the equivalent of 
that prescribed in this code in quality, strength, effectiveness, 
fire resistance, durability and safety. 

89.102.2.1 Research Reports. Supporting data, where 
necessary to assist in the approval of materials or 
assemblies not specifically provided for in this code, shall 
consist of valid research reports from approved sources. 

89.102.2.2 Tests. Whenever there is insufficient evidence 
of compliance with the provisions of this code, or 
evidence that a material or method does not conform to 
the requirements of this code, or in order to substantiate 
claims for alternative materials or methods, the building 
official shall have the authority to require tests as 
evidence of compliance to be made at no expense to the 
jurisdiction. Test methods shall be as specified in this 
code or by other recognized test standards. In the 
absence of recognized and accepted test methods, the 
building official shall approve the testing procedures. 
Tests shall be performed by an approved agency. Reports 
of such tests shall be retained by the building official for 
the period required for retention of public records. 

SECTION 89.103 

RESERVED FOR CORRECTIONS STANDARDS 
AUTHORITY 

SECTION 89.104 

RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF 
CONSUMER AFFAIRS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



70-4 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

•J 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



SECTION 89.105 

RESERVED FOR THE CALIFORNIA ENERGY 
COMMISSION 

SECTION 89,106 

RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF FOOD 
AND AGRIGULTURE 

SECTION 89.107 

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC 
HEALTH 

89,107 Specific scope of application of the agency 
responsible for enforcement, the enforcement agency, and 
the specific authority to adopt and enforce such 
provisions of this code, unless otherwise stated. 

Application -Commissaries serving mobile food 
preparation units and public swimming pools 

Enforcing Agency - The California Department of 
Public Health and the local health agency. 

Authority Cited - Health and Safety Code sections , 
114304, 116050, and 131200. 

Reference - Health and Safety Code sections 
114304, 116050, 116053 and 131200. 



SECTION 89,108 

DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY 
DEVELOPMENT 

89.108.1 Purpose, The purpose of this code is to 
establish minimum standards to protect the health, 
safety, and general welfare of the occupant and the 
public against hazards that may arise from the use of 
electricity by governing the design, construction, 
reconstruction, installation, quality of materials, 
location, operation, and maintenance or use of 
electrical equipment, wiring and systems. 

89.108.2 A UTHORITYAND ABBREVIA TIONS 

89,108,2,1 General, The Department of Housing 
and Community Development is authorized by law 
to promulgate and adopt building standards and 
regulations for several types of building 
applications. The applications under the authority 
of the Department of Housing and Community 
Development are listed in Sections 89.108.2.1.1 
through 89.108.2.1.3. 

89.108,2,1,1 Housing Construction, Application - 
Hotels, motels, lodging houses, apartment houses, 
dwellings, dormitories, condominiums, shelters for 
homeless persons, congregate residences, employee 
housing, factory-built housing and other types of 
dwellings containing sleeping accommodations with or 
without common toilet or cooking facilities including 
accessory buildings, facilities, and uses thereto. 



Sections of this code which pertain to applications 
listed in this section are identified using the 
abbreviation 'HCD 1 '\ 

Enforcing Agency-Local building department 
or the Department of Housing and Community 
Development. 

Authority Cited: Health and Safety Code 
Sections 17040, 17050, 17920.9, 17921, 
17921.3, 17921.6, 17921.10, 17922, 17922.6, 
17922.12, 17927, 17928, 17959.6, 18300, 18552, 
18554, 18620, 18630, 18640, 18670, 18690, 
18691, 18865, 1887L3, 18871.4, 18873, 
18873.1, 18873.2, 18873.3, 18873.4, 18873.5, 
18938.3, 18944.11, and 19990; and Government 
Code Section 12955.1. 

Reference: Health and Safety Code Sections 
17000 through 17062.5, 17910 through 17995.5, 
18200 through 18700, 18860 through 18874, and 
19960 through 19997; and Government Code 
Sections 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. 

89,108,2,1,2 Housing Accessibility, Application- 
Covered multifamily dwellings as defined in 
Chapter llA of the California Code of 
Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, also known as the 
California Building Code (CBC) including, but not 
limited to, lodging houses, dormitories, 
timeshares, condominiums, shelters for homeless 
persons, congregate residences, apartment houses, 
dwellings, employee housing, factory-built housing 
and other types of dwellings containing sleeping 
accommodations with or without common toilet or 
cooking facilities. 

Sections of this code identified by the 
abbreviation "HCD 1-AC" require specific 
accommodations for "PERSONS WITH 
DISABHITIES," as defined in CBC Chapter 
11 A. The application of such provisions shall 
be in conjunction with other requirements of 
this code and apply only to newly-constructed 
"COVERED MULTIFAMILY DWELLINGS" as 
defined in CBC Chapter llA. "HCD 1-AC" 
applications include, but are not limited to, the 
following: 

(1) All newly constructed "COVERED 
MULTIFAMILY DWELLINGS" as defined in CBC 
Chapter 11 A. 

(2) New "COMMON USE AREAS" as defined in 
CBC Chapter llA serving existing covered 
multifamily dwellings. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-5 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



(3) Additions to existing buildings, where the 
addition alone meets the definition of 
"COVERED MULTIFAMILY DWELLINGS" as 
defined in CBC Chapter 11 A. 

(4) Common use areas serving covered 
multifamily dwellings. 

(5) Where any portion of a building's exterior is 
preserved, but the interior of the building is 
removed, including all structural portions of 
floors and ceilings, the building is considered a 
new building for determining the application of 
CBC, Chapter llA. 

"HCD 1-AC" building standards generally do 
not apply to public use areas or public 
accommodations such as hotels and motels. 
Public use areas, public accommodations and 
housing which is publicly funded as defined in 
Chapter 2 of the CBC are subject to the Division 
of the State Architect (DSA-AC) and are 
referenced in Section 109.1. 

Enforcing Agency-Local building department or 
the Department of Housing and Community 
Development. 

Authority Cited: Health and Safety Code 
Sections 17040, 17050, 17920.9, 17921, 
17921.3, 17921.6, 17921.10, 17922, 17922.6, 
17922.12, 17927, 17928, 17959.6, 18300, 18552, 
18554, 18620, 18630, 18640, 18670, 18690, 
18691, 18865, 18871.3, 18871.4, 18873, 
18873.1, 18873.2, 18873.3, 18873.4, 18873.5, 
18944.11, and 19990; and Government Code 
Section 12955.1. 

Reference: Health and Safety Code Sections 
17000 through 17062.5, 17910 through 17995.5, 
18200 through 18700, 18860 through 18874, 
and 19960 through 19997; and Government 
Code Sections 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. 

89.108.2.1.3 Permanent Buildings in Mobilehome 
Parks and Special Occupancy Parks. Application - 
Permanent buildings, and permanent accessory 
buildings or structures, constructed within 
mobilehome parks and special occupancy parks that 
are under the control and ownership of the park 
operator. Sections of this code which pertain to 
applications listed in this section are identified using 
the abbreviation "HCD 2 ". 

Enforcing Agency — Local building department or 
other local agency responsible for the enforcement of 
Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, 
commencing with Section 18200 for mobilehome 
parks and Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
2.3, commencing with Section 18860 for special 



occupancy parks; or the Department of Housing and 
Community Development. 

Authority Cited: Health and Safety Code Sections 
17040, 17050, 17920.9, 17921, 17921.3, 17921.6, 
17921.10, 17922, 17922.6, 17922.12, 17927, 
17928, 17959.6, 18300, 18552, 18554, 18620, 
18630, 18640, 18670, 18690, 18691, 18865, 
18871.3, 18871.4, 18873, 18873.1, 18873.2, 
18873.3, 18873.4, 18873.5, 18944.11, and 19990; 
and Government Code Section 12955.1. 

Reference: Health and Safety Code Sections 
17000 through 17062.5, 17910 through 17995.5, 
18200 through 18700, 18860 through 18874, and 
19960 through 19997; and Government Code 
Sections 12955.1 and 12955.1.1. 

89.108.3 LOCAL ENFORCING AGENCY 

89.108.3.1 Duties and Powers. The building 
department of every city, county or city and county 
shall enforce all the provisions of law, this code, and 
the other rules and regulations promulgated by the 
Department of Housing and Community Development 
pertaining to the installation, erection, construction, 
reconstruction, movement, enlargement, conversion, 
alteration, repair, removal, demolition or 
arrangement of apartment houses, hotels, motels, 
lodging houses and dwellings, including accessory 
buildings, facilities, and uses thereto. 

The provisions regulating the erection and 
construction of dwellings and appurtenant structures 
shall not apply to existing structures as to which 
construction is commenced or approved prior to the 
effective date of these regulations. Requirements 
relating to use, maintenance and occupancy shall 
apply to all dwellings and appurtenant structures 
approved for construction or constructed before or 
after the effective date of this code. 

For additional information regarding the use and 
occupancy of existing buildings and appurtenant 
structures, see California Code of Regulations, Title 
25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, 
commencing with Article 1, Section 1. 

89.108.3.2 Laws, Rules, and Regulations. Other than 
the building standards contained in this code, and 
notwithstanding other provisions of law, the statutory 
authority and location of the laws, rules, and 
regulations to be enforced by local enforcing agencies 
are listed by statute in Sections 89.108.3.2.1 through 
89108.3.2.5 below: 

89.108.3.2.1 State Housing Law. Refer to the State 
Housing Law, California Health and Safety Code, 
Division 13, Part 1.5, commencing with Section 
17910 and California Code of Regulations, Title 
25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 1, 



C 
P 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
I- 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
/> 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
/ 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



70-6 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



commencing with Section I, for the erection, 
construction, reconstruction, movement, 

enlargement, conversion, alteration, repair, 
removal, demolition or arrangement of apartment 
houses, hotels, motels, lodging houses and 
dwellings, including accessory buildings, facilities, 
and uses thereto. 

89.108.3.2.2 Mobilehome Parks Act. Refer to 
the Mobilehome Parks Act, California Health 
and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2A, 
commencing with Section 18200 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, 
Chapter 2, commencing with Section 1000 for 
mobilehome park administrative and 
enforcement authority, permits, plans, fees, 
violations, inspections and penalties both within 
and outside mobilehome parks. 

Exception: Mobilehome parks where the 
Department of Housing and Community 
Development is the enforcing agency. 

89.108.3.2.3 Special Occupancy Parks Act Refer 
to the Special Occupancy Parks Act, California 
Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.3, 
commencing with Section 18860 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 
2.2, commencing with Section 2000 for special 
occupancy park administrative and enforcement 
authority, permits, fees, violations, inspections and 
penalties both within and outside of special 
occupancy parks. 

Exception: Special occupancy parks where the 
Department of Housing and Community 
Development is the enforcing agency. 

89.108.3.2.4 Employee Housing Act. Refer to the 
Employee Housing Act, California Health and 
Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, commencing with 
Section 1 7000 and California Code of Regulations, 
Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 3, 
commencing with Section 600 for employee 
housing administrative and enforcement authority, 
permits, fees, violations, inspections and penalties. 

89.108.3.2.5 Factory-Built Housing Law. Refer to 
the Factory-Built Housing Law, California Health 
and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 6, commencing 
with Section 19960 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, 
Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000 for 
factory-built housing administrative and 
enforcement authority, permits, fees, violations, 
inspections and penalties. 



89.108.4 PERMITS, FEES, APPLICATIONS AND 
INSPECTIONS 

89.108.4.1 Permits, (a) Except as exempted in 
paragraph (b) of this subsection, a written construction 
permit shall be obtained from the enforcing agency 
prior to the erection, construction, reconstruction, 
installation, movement, or alteration of any electrical 
system. 

(b) Consistent with the requirements of Section 1 7960 of 
the Health and Safety Code, the local enforcing agency 
shall enforce the requirements of this code, but shall 
exempt the following activities from the requirement for 
a permit or inspection. 

1. Listed cord and plug connected temporary 
decorative lighting. 

2. Reinstallation of attachment plug receptacles, but 
not the outlets therefore. 

3. Repair or replacement of branch circuit 
overcurrent devices of the required capacity in the 
same location. 

4. Installation or maintenance of communications 
wiring, devices, appliances, apparatus or equipment 

Exemptions from permit and inspection requirements 
shall not be deemed to grant authorization for arty work 
to be done in any manner in violation of any other 
provision of law or this code. 

89.108.4.2 Fees. Subject to other provisions of law, the 
governing body of any city, county or city and county 
may prescribe fees to defray the cost of enforcement of 
rules and regulations promulgated by the Department of 
Housing and Community Development. The amount of 
the fees shall not exceed the amount reasonably 
necessary to administer or process permits, certificates, 
forms, or other documents, or to defray the costs of 
enforcement. For additional information, see State 
Housing Law, Health and Safety Code, Division 13, 
Part 1.5, Section 17951 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 
1, Article 3, commencing with Section 6. 

89.108.4.3 Plan Review and Time Limitations. Subject to 
other provisions of law, provisions related to plan 
checking, prohibition of excessive delays and contracting 
with or employment of private parties to perform plan 
checking are set forth in State Housing Law, Health and 
Safety Code Section 1 7960. 1, and for employee housing, 
in Health and Safety Code Section 1 7021. 

89.108.4.3.1 Retention of Plans. The building 
department of every city, county or city and county 
shall maintain an official copy, microfdm, or 
electronic or other type of photographic copy of the 
plans of every building, during the life of the building, 
for which the department issued a building permit 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-7 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



Exceptions: 

1. Single or multiple dwellings not more than two 
stories and basement in height. 

2. Garages and other structures appurtenant to 
buildings listed in Exception (1). 

3. Farm or ranch buildings appurtenant to 
buildings listed in Exception (I). 

4. Any one-story building where the span between 
bearing walls does not exceed 25 feet (7620 mm), 
except a steel frame or concrete building. 

All plans for common interest developments as 
defined in Section 1351 of the California Civil Code 
shall be retained. For additional information 
regarding plan retention and reproduction of plans 
by an enforcing agency, see Health and Safety Code 
Sections 19850 through 19852. 

89,108.4.4 Inspections. Construction or work for which 
a permit is required shall be subject to inspection by the 
building official and such construction or work shall 
remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes 
until approved. Approval as a result of an inspection 
shall not be construed to be an approval of a violation 
of the provisions of this code or other regulations of the 
Department of Housing and Community Development. 

89.108.5 RIGHT OF ENTRY FOR ENFORCEMENT 

89.108.5.1 General Subject to other provisions of law, 
officers and agents of the enforcing agency may enter 
and inspect public and private properties to secure 
compliance with the rules and regulations promulgated 
by the Department of Housing and Community 
Development. For limitations and additional 
information regarding enforcement, see the following: 

1. For applications subject to State Housing Law as 
referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.1 of this code, refer 
to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, 
commencing with Section 17910 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, 
Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 1. 

2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks 
Act as referenced in Section 89. 108.3.2.2 of this code, 
refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
2.1, commencing with Section 18200 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, 
commencing with Section 1000. 

3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy 
Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.3 of 
this code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 
13, Part 2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and 
California Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, 
Chapter 2.2, commencing with Section 2000. 

4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing 
Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.4 of this code, 



refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
1, commencing with Section 17000 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, 
Subchapter 3, commencing with Section 600. 

5. For applications subject to the Factory-Built 
Housing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of 
this code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 
13, Part 6, commencing with Section 19960 and 
California Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, 
Chapter 3, Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 
3000. 

89.108.6 LOCAL MODIFICATION BY ORDINANCE 
OR REGULATION 

89.108.6.1 General Subject to other provisions of law, 
a city, county or city and county may make changes to 
the provisions adopted by the Department of Housing 
and Community Development. If any city, county or city 
and county does not amend, add, or repeal by local 
ordinances or regulations the provisions published in 
this code or other regulations promulgated by the 
Department of Housing and Commimity Development, 
those provisions shall be applicable and shall become 
effective 180 days after publication by the California 
Building Standards Commission. Amendments, 
additions and deletions to this code adopted by a city, 
county or city and county pursuant to California Health 
and Safety Code Sections 17958.5, 17958.7 and 
18941.5, together with all applicable portions of this 
code, shall also become effective 180 days after 
publication of the California Building Standards Code 
by the California Building Standards Commission. 

89.108.6.2 Findings, Filings, and Rejections of Local 
Modifications. Prior to making any modifications or 
establishing more restrictive building standards, the 
governing body shall make express findings andfdings, as 
required by California Health and Safety Code Section 
1 7958. 7, showing that such modifications are reasonably 
necessary due to local climatic, geological, or 
topographical conditions. No modification shall become 
effective or operative unless the following requirements 
are met: 

1. The express findings shall be made available 
as a public record. 

2. A copy of the modification and express 
finding, each document marked to cross- 
reference the other, shall be filed with the 
California Building Standards Commission for a 
city, county or city and county and with the 
Department of Housing and Community 
Development for fire protection districts. 

3. The California Building Standards Commission 
has not rejected the modification or change. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



70-8 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
IK 

A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
\ 



Nothing in this section shall limit the authority of fire 
protection districts pursuant to California Health and 
Safety Code Section 13869. 7 (a). 

89.108.7 ALTERNATE MATERIALS, DESIGNS, 
TESTS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION 

89,108,7 A General. The provisions of this code as 
adopted by the Department of Housing and 
Community Development are not intended to prevent 
the use of any alternate material, appliance, 
installation, device, arrangement, design or method 
of construction not specifically prescribed by this 
code. Consideration and approval of alternates 
shall comply with Section 89.108.7,2 for local 
building departments and Section 89.108.7.3 for the 
Department of Housing and Community 
Development. 

89 A 08.7,2 Local Building Departments. The building 
department of any city, county or city and county may 
approve alternates for use in the erection, construction, 
reconstruction, movement, enlargement, conversion, 
alteration, repair, removal, demolition or arrangement 
of an apartment house, hotel, motel, lodging house, 
dwelling, or an accessory structure, except for the 
following: 

1. Structures located in mobilehome parks as defined in 
California Health and Safety Code Section 18214. 

2. Structures located in special occupancy parks as 
defined in California Health and Safety Code Section 
18862.43. 

3. Factory-built housing as defined in California 
Health and Safety Code Section 19971. 

89A08,7.2A Approval of Alternates* The consideration 
and approval of alternates by a local building 
department shall comply with the following procedures 
and limitations: 

1 . 77?^ approval shall be granted on a case-by-case basis. 

2. Evidence shall be submitted to substantiate claims 
that the proposed alternate, in performance, safety, and 
protection of life and health, confoims to, or is at least 
equivalent to, the standards contained in this code and 
other ndes and regulations promulgated by the 
Department of Housing and Community Development 

3. The local binlding department may require 
tests performed by an approved testing agency at 
the expense of the owner or owner's agent as proof 
of compliance. 

4. If the proposed alternate is related to accessibility in 
covered multifamily dwellings or in facilities serving 
''COVERED MULTIFAMILY DWELLINGS'' as defined 
in CBC Chapter 11 A, the proposed alternate must also 
meet the threshold set for 'EQUIVALENT 
FACILITATION" as defined in CBC Chapter 11 A. 



For additional information regarding approval of 
alternates by a local building department pursuant to 
the State Housing Law, see California Health and 
Safety Code Section 17951(e) and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, 
Subchapter 1. 

89 A 08,7, 3 Department of Housing and Community 
Development, The Department of Housing and 
Community Development may approve alternates for 
use in the erection, construction, reconstruction, 
movement, enlargement, conversion, alteration, repair, 
removal or demolition of an apartment house, hotel, 
motel, lodging house, dwelling, or an accessory thereto. 
The consideration and approval of alternates shall 
comply with the following: 

1. The department may require tests at the expense of 
the owner or owner's agent to substantiate compliance 
with the California Building Standards Code. 

2. The approved alternate shall, for its intended 
purpose, be at least equivalent in performance and 
safety to the materials, designs, tests, or methods of 
construction prescribed by this code. 

89A08. 8 APPEALS BOARD 

89A 08,8,1 General, Evety city, county or city and 
county shall establish a local appeals board and a 
housing appeals board. The local appeals board and 
housing appeals board shall each be comprised of at 
least five voting members who shall serve at the 
pleasure of the city, coimty or city and county. 
Appointees shall not be employees of the jurisdiction 
and shall be qualified and specifically knowledgeable 
in the California Budding Standards Codes and 
applicable local ordinances. 

89A 08.8,2 Definitions, The following terms shall for 
the purposes of this section have the meaning shown. 

Housing Appeals Board, The board or agency of a city, 
county or city and coimty which is authorized by the 
governing body of the city, county or city and county to 
hear appeals regarding the requirements of the city, 
county or city and county relating to the use, 
maintenance and change of occupancy of buildings and 
structures, including requirements governing 
alteration, additions, repair, demolition, and moving. In 
any area in which there is no such board or agency, 
'Housing Appeals Board" means the local appeals 
board having jurisdiction over the area. 

Local Appeals Board, The board or agency of a city, county 
or city and county which is authorized by the governing 
body of the city, coimty or city and county to hear appeals 
regarding the building requirements of the city, county or 
city and coimty. In any area in which there is no such board 
or agency, "Local Appeals Board" means the governing 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



70-9 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



body of the city, county or city and county having 
jurisdiction over the area. 

89,108.8,3 Appeals, Except as otherwise provided by law, 
any person, firm, or corporation adversely affected by a 
decision, order, or determination by a city, county or city 
and county relating to the application of building standards 
published in the California Building Standards Code, or any 
other applicable mle or regulation adopted by the 
Department of Housing and Community Development, or 
any Icmfiilly enacted ordinance by a city, county or city and 
county, may appeal the issue for resolution to the local 
appeals board or housing appeals board as appropriate. 

The local appeals board shall hear appeals relating to new 
building construction and the housing appeals board shall 
hear appeals relating to existing buildings. 

89,108.9 UNSAFE BUILDINGS OR STRUCTURES 
89.108,9,1 Authority to Enforce, Subject to other 
provisions of law, the administration, enforcement, actions, 
proceedings, abatement, violations and penalties for unsafe 
buildings and structures are contained in the following 
statutes and regulations: 

1. For applications subject to State Housing Law as 
referenced in Section 89.1083.2.1 of this code, refer to 
Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, 
commencing with Section 17910 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 
L commencing with Section 1. 

2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks 
Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.2 of this code, 
refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, 
commencing with Section 18200 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, commencing 
with Section 1000. 

3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy 
Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.1083.2.3 of this 
code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2.2, 
commencing with Section 2000. 

4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing 
Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3,2.4 of this code, 
refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, 
commencing with Section 1 7000 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 
3, commencing with Section 600. 

5. For applications subject to the Factory-Built 
Housing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of this 
code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 

6. commencing with Section 19960 and California Code 
of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, 
Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000. 



89,108,9,2 Actions and Proceedings, Subject to other 
provisions of law, punishments, penalties and fines for 
violations of building standards are contained in the 
following statutes and regulations: 

1. For applications subject to State Housing Law as 
referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.1 of this code, refer to 
Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1.5, 
commencing with Section 17910 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 1, Subchapter 

1. commencing with Section 1. 

2. For applications subject to the Mobilehome Parks 
Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.2 of this code, 
refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 2.1, 
commencing with Section 18200 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, commencing 
with Section 1000. 

3. For applications subject to the Special Occupancy 
Parks Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.3 of this 
code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 
2.3, commencing with Section 18860 and California 
Code of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2.2, 
commencing with Section 2000. 

4. For applications subject to the Employee Housing 
Act as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.4 of this code, 
refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 1, 
commencing with Section 1 7000 and California Code of 
Regulations, Title 25, Division L Chapter 1, Subchapter 
3, commencing with Section 600, 

5. For applicatiorjs subject to the Factory-Built 
Housing Law as referenced in Section 89.108.3.2.5 of this 
code, refer to Health and Safety Code, Division 13, Part 

6. commencing with Section 19960 and California Code 
of Regulations, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 3, 
Subchapter 1, commencing with Section 3000. 

89,108,10 OTHER BUILDING REGULATIONS 

89.108.10.1 Existing Structures. Subject to the 
requirements of California Health and Safety Code Sections 
17912, 17920.3, 17922, 17922.3, 17958.8 and 17958.9, the 
provisions contained in Chapter 34 of the CBC relating to 
existing stmctures shall only apply as identified in the 
Matrix Adoption Table under the authority of the 
Department of Housing and Community Development as 
listed in Sections 89.108.2.1.1 through 89.108.2.1.3 of this 
code. 

89.108.10.2 Moved Structures, Subject to the requirements 
of California Health and Safety Code Sections 179223 and 
17958.9, the provisions relating to a moved residential 
structure shall, after July 1, 1978, permit the retention of 
existing materials and methods of construction so long as 
the structure does not become or continue to be a 
substandard building. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



70-10 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



SECTION 89.109 

DIVISION OF THE ST A TE ARCHITECT 

89.109.1 DSA— AC — Division of the State Architect-Access 
Compliance. 

Note: For applications listed in Section 1.9.1 of the 
California Building Code, regulated by the Division of 
the State Architect — Access Compliance see California 
Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2 (California Building 
Code), Chapter 1 (Division 1 California Administration) 
under authority cited by Government Code Section 4450 
and in reference cited by Government Code Sections 
4450, through 4461, 12955.1 and Health and Safety Code 
Sections 18949.1, 19952 through 19959. 



89.109.2 DSA-SS - Division of the State Architect 
Structural Safety. 



of the State 



89.109.2.1. DSA-SS (Division 
Architect - Structural Safety) 

1. Application - Public elementary and secondary 
schools, community college buildings, and state-owned 
or state-leased essential services buildings. 

Enforcing Agency - Division of the State Architect - 
Structural Safety (DSA-SS). 

The Division of the State Architect has been delegated 
the responsibility and authority by the Department of 
General Services to review and approve the design and 
oversee the construction of public elementary and 
secondary schools, community colleges, and state- 
owned or state-leased essential services buildings. 

Authority Cited - Education Code section 17310 and 
81142, and Health and Safety Code section 16022. 

Reference - Education Code Sections 1 7280 through 
17317 and 81130 through 81147, and Health & Safety 
Code Sections 16000 through 16023. 

89.109.2.2. DSA-SS/CC (Division of the State 
Architect - Structural Safety/Community Colleges) 

Application - Community Colleges. 

The Division of the State Architect has been 
delegated the authority by the Department of General 
Services to promulgate alternate building standards 
for application to community colleges, which a 
community college may elect to use in lieu of 
standards promulgated by DSA-SS in accordance 
with Section 89.109.2.1. Refer to Title 24, Part 2, 
Section 1.9.2.4. 

Enforcing Agency - Division of the State Architect - 
Structural Safety/Community Colleges (DSA-SS/CC) 

The Division of the State Architect has been 
delegated the authority by the Department of General 
Services to review and approve the design and 



oversee construction of community colleges electing 
to use the alternative building standards as provided 
in this section. 

Authority Cited - Education Code Section 81053. 

Reference - Education Code Sections 81052, 81053, 
and 81130 through 81147. 

89.109.3 SHB - State Historical Building Safety Board. 

See California Code of Code of Regulations, Title 24, 
Part 8 (California Historical Building Code). 

SECTION 89.110 

OFFICE OF ST A TE WIDE HEAL TH PLANNING 
AND DEVELOPMENT 

89.110.1. OSHPD 1. Specific scope of application of the 
agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, 
specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this 
code, unless otherwise stated. 

OSHPD 1 

Application - General acute-care hospitals and acute 
psychiatric hospitals, excluding distinct part units or 
distinct part freestanding buildings providing skilled 
nursing or intermediate-care services. For Structural 
Regulations: Skilled nursing facilities and/or 
intermediate-care facilities except those skilled nursing 
facilities and intermediate care facilities of single story. 
Type V, wood or light steel-frame construction. 

Enforcing Agency —Office of Statewide Health Planning 
and Development (OSHPD). The office shall enforce the 
Division of the State Architect access compliance 
regulations and the regulations of the Office of the State 
Fire Marshal for the above stated facility types. 

89.110.1.1 Applicable administrative standards. 

1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: 
Chapters 6 &7. 

2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: 
Sections 101 and 110 of California Chapter 1 and 
Appendix Chapter 1. 

89.110.1.2 Applicable building standards. 

California Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 
2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10 and 12. 

89.110.2. OSHPD 2. Specific scope of application of the 
agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, 
specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of 
this code, unless otherwise stated. 

OSHPD 2 

Application —Skilled nursing facilities and intermediate- 
care facilities, including distinct part skilled nursing and 
intermediate-care services on a general acute-care or 
acute psychiatric hospital license, provided either in a 
separate unit or a freestanding building. For Structural 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 

A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-11 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



Regulations: Single-story, Type V skilled nursing facility 
and/or intermediate-care facilities utilizing wood or light 
steel-frame construction. 

Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning 
and Development (OSHPD). The office shall also enforce the 
Division of the State Architect access compliance regulations 
and the regulations of the Office of the State Fire Marshal for 
the above stated facility type. 

89.110.2.1 Applicable administrative standards: 

1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: 
Chapter 7. 

2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: 
Sections 101 and 110 of California Chapter 1 and 
Appendix Chapter 1. 

89.110.2.2 Applicable building standards. 

California Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 
2, 3,4, 5,9, 10 and 12. 

89.110. 3. OSHPD 3. Specific scope of application of the 
agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, 
specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of 
this code, unless otherwise stated. 

OSHPD 3 

Application —Licensed clinics and any freestanding 
building under a hospital license where outpatient 
clinical services are provided. 

Enforcing Agency— Local building department. 

89.110.3.1 Applicable administrative standards. 

1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: 
Chapter 7. 

2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: 
Sections 101 and 110 of California Chapter 1 and 
Appendix Chapter 1. 

89.110.3.2 Applicable building standards. 

California Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 
2, 3,4, 5,9, 10 and 12. 

89.110.4. OSHPD 4. Specific scope of application of the 
agency responsible for enforcement, enforcement agency, 
specific authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of 
this code, unless otherwise stated. 

OSHPD 4 

Application —Correctional Treatment Centers. 

Enforcing Agency — Office of Statewide Health Planning 
and Development (OSHPD). The Office shall also enforce 
the Division of the State Architect access compliance 
regulations and the regulations of the Office of the State 
Fire Marshal for the above stated facility types. 

89.110.4.1 Applicable administrative standards, 

1. Title 24, Part 1, California Code of Regulations: 
Chapter 7. 



2. Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations: 
Sections 101 and 110 of California Chapter 1 and 
Appendix Chapter 1. 

89.110.4.2 Applicable building standards. California 
Building Standards Code, Title 24, Parts 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10 
and 12. 



SECTION 89.111 
OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL 

89.111.1 SFM— Office of the State Fire Marshal. 

Specific scope of application of the agency responsible for 
enforcement, the enforcement agency and the specific 
authority to adopt and enforce such provisions of this 
code, unless otherwise stated. 

Application: 

Institutional, educational or any similar occupancy. Any 

building or structure used or intended for use as an 
asylum, jail, mental hospital, hospital, sanitarium, home 
for the aged, children 's nursery, children 's home, school 
or any similar occupancy of any capacity. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Assembly or similar place of assemblage. Any theater, 
dancehall, skating rink, auditorium, assembly hall, 
meeting hall, nightclub, fair building or similar place of 
assemblage where 50 or more persons may gather 
together in a building, room or structure for the purpose 
of amusement, entertainment, instruction, deliberation, 
worship, drinking or dining, awaiting transportation, or 
education. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Small family day care homes. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 

1597.45, 1597.54, 13143 and 17921. 

Reference - Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 
Large family day care homes. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 

1597.46, 1597.54 and 17921. 

Reference - Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Residential facilities and residential facilities for the 
elderly. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13133. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Any state institution or other state-owned or state- 
occupied building. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13108. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



70-12 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



High-rise structures. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13211. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Motion picture production studios. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.1. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Organized camps. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 18897.3. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Residential All hotels, motels, lodging houses, apartment 
houses and dwellings, including congregate residences and 
buildings and structures accessory thereto. Multiple-story 
structures existing on January 1, 1975, let for human 
habitation, including and limited to, hotels, motels and 
apartment houses, less than 75 feet (22 860 mm) above the 
lowest floor level having building access, wherein rooms 
used for sleeping are let above the ground floor. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 
13143.2 and 17921. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Residential care facilities. Certified family care homes, 
out-of-home placement facilities, halfway houses, drug 
and/or alcohol rehabilitation facilities and any building 
or structure used or intended for use as a home or 
institution for the housing of any person of any age when 
such person is referred to or placed within such home or 
institution for protective social care and supervision 
services by any governmental agency. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.6. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Tents, awnings or other fabric enclosures used in 
connection with any occupancy. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13116. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Fire alarm devices, equipment and systems in 
connection with any occupancy. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13114. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Hazardous materials. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.9. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 

Flammable and combustible liquids. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143.6. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Section 13143. 



Public School Automatic Fire Detection, Alarm and 
Sprinkler Systems. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Section 13143 
and California Education Code Article 7.5, Sections 
1 7074.50, 1 7074.52 and 1 7074.54. 

Reference — Government Code Section 11152.5, Health 
and Safety Code Section 13143 and California Education 
Code Chapter 12.5, Leroy F. Greene School Facilities Act 
of 1998, Article I. 

Wildland-Urban Interface Fire Area. 

Authority cited — Health and Safety Code Sections 13143, 
13108.5(a) and 18949.2(b) and (c) and Government Code 
Section 51 189. 

Reference — Health and Safety Code Sections 13143, 
Government Code Sections 51176, 51177, 51178 and 
51179 and Public Resources Code Sections 4201 through 
4204. 

89.111.2 Duties and Powers of the Enforcing Agency 

89.111.2.1 Enforcement. 

89.111.2.1.1 The responsibility for enforcement of 
building standards adopted by the State Fire 
Marshal and published in the California Building 
Standards Code relating to fire and panic safety 
and other regulations of the State Fire Marshal 
shall except as provided in Section 89.11 1.2.1.2 be 
asfollows: 

1. The city, county or city and county with 
jurisdiction in the area affected by the standard 
or regulation shall delegate the enforcement of 
the building standards relating to fire and panic 
safety and other regulations of the State Fire 
Marshal as they relate to Group R-3 
occupancies, as described in Section 310.1 of 
Part 2 of the California Building Standards 
Code, to either of the following: 

1.1. The chief of the fire authority of the city, county 
or city and county, or an authorized representative. 

1.2. The chief building official of the city, county or 
city and county, or an authorized representative. 

2. The chief of any city or county fire department 
or of any fire protection district, and authorized 
representatives, shall enforce within the 
jurisdiction the building standards and other 
regulations of the State Fire Marshal, except 
those described in Item 1 or 4. 

3. The State Fire Marshal shall have authority to 
enforce the building standards and other 
regulations of the State Fire Marshal in areas 
outside of corporate cities and districts 
providing fire protection services. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 




2013 California Electrical Code 



70-13 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



4. The State Fire Marshal shall have authority to 
enforce the building standards and other 
regulations of the State Fire Marshal in 
corporate cities and districts providing fire 
protection services on request of the chief fire 
official or the governing body. 

5. Any fee charged pursuant to the enforcement 
authority of this section shall not exceed the 
estimated reasonable cost of providing the 
service for which the fee is charged pursuant to 
Section 66014 of the Government Code. 

89.111.2.1.2 Pursuant to Health and Safety Code 
Section 13108, and except as otherwise provided in 
this section, building standards adopted by the 
State Fire Marshal published in the California 
Building Standards Code relating to fire and panic 
safety shall be enforced by the State Fire Marshal 
in all state-owned buildings, state-occupied 
buildings, and state institutions throughout the 
state. Upon the written request of the chief fire 
official of any city, county or fire protection 
district, the State Fire Marshal may authorize such 
chief fire official and his or her authorized 
representatives, in their geographical area of 
responsibility, to make fire prevention inspections 
of state-owned or state-occupied buildings, other 
than state institutions, for the purpose of enforcing 
the regulations relating to fire and panic safety 
adopted by the State Fire Marshal pursuant to this 
section and building standards relating to fire and 
panic safety published in the California Building 
Standards Code. Authorization from the State Fire 
Marshal shall be limited to those fire departments 
or fire districts which maintain a fire prevention 
bureau staffed by paid personnel. 

Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13108, 
any requirement or order made by any chief fire 
official who is authorized by the State Fire 
Marshal to make fire prevention inspections of 
state-owned or state-occupied buildings, other than 
state institutions, may be appealed to the State Fire 
Marshal. The State Fire Marshal shall, upon 
receiving an appeal and subject to the provisions 
of Chapter 5 (commencing with Section 18945) of 
Part 2.5 of Division 13 of the Health and Safety 
Code, determine if the requirement or order made 
is reasonably consistent with the fire and panic 
safety regulations adopted by the State Fire 
Marshal and building standards relating to fire 
and panic safety published in the California 
Building Code. 

Any person may request a code interpretation from 
the State Fire Marshal relative to the intent of any 
regulation or provision adopted by the State Fire 



Marshal. When the request relates to a specific 
project, occupancy or building, the State Fire 
Marshal shall review the issue with the appropriate 
local enforcing agency prior to rendering such 
code interpretation. 

89.111.2.1.3 Pursuant to Health and Safety Code 
Section 13112, any person who violates any order, 
rule or regulation of the state fire marshal is guilty 
of a misdemeanor punishable by a fine of not less 
than $100.00 or more than $500.00, or by 
imprisonment for not less than six months, or by 
both. A person is guilty of a separate offense each 
day during which he or she commits, continues or 
permits a violation of any provision of or any 
order, rule or regulation of the state fire marshal 
as contained in this code. 

Any inspection authority who, in the exercise of his 
or her authority as a deputy state fire marshal, 
causes any legal complaints to be filed or any 
arrest to be made shall notify the state fire marshal 
immediately following such action. 

89.111.2.2 Right of entry. 

The fire chief of any city, county or fire-protection 
district, or such person 's authorized representative, 
may enter any state institution or any other state- 
owned or state-occupied building for the purpose of 
preparing a fire-suppression preplanning program or 
for the purpose of investigating any fire in a state- 
occupied building. 

The State Fire Marshal, his or her deputies or 
salaried assistants, the chief of any city or county fire 
department or fire protection district and his or her 
authorized representatives may enter any building or 
premises not used for dwelling purposes at any 
reasonable hour for the purpose of enforcing this 
chapter. The owner, lessee, manager or operator of 
any such building or premises shall permit the State 
Fire Marshal, his or her deputies or salaried 
assistants and the chief of any city or county fire 
department or fire-protection district and his or her 
authorized representatives to enter and inspect them 
at the time and for the purpose stated in this section. 

89.111.2.3 More Restrictive Fire and Panic Safety 
Building Standards. 

89.111.2.3.1 Any fire-protection district organized 
pursuant to Health and Safety Code Part 2.7 
(commencing with Section 13800) of Division 12 
may adopt building standards relating to fire and 
panic safety that are more stringent than those 
building standards adopted by the State Fire 
Marshal and contained in the California Building 
Standards Code. For these purposes, the district 
board shall be deemed a legislative body and the 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



70-14 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



district shall be deemed a local agency. Any 
changes or modifications that are more stringent 
than the requirements published in the California 
Building Standards Code relating to fire and panic 
safety shall be subject to 101.8.1. 

89.111.2.3.2 Any fire protection district that 
proposes to adopt an ordinance pursuant to this 
section shall, not less than 30 days prior to noticing 
a proposed ordinance for public hearing, provide a 
copy of that ordinance, together with the adopted 

findings made pursuant to Section 89.111.2.3.1, to 
the city, county, or city and county where the 
ordinance will apply. The city, county, or city and 
county, may provide the district with written 
comments, which shall become part of the fire 
protection district' s public hearing record. 

89.111.2.3.3 The fire-protection district shall 
transmit the adopted ordinance to the city, county, 
or city and county where the ordinance will apply. 
The legislative body of the city, county, or city and 
county, may ratifi>, modify or deny an adopted 
ordinance and transmit its determination to the 
district within 15 days of the determination. Any 
modification or denial of an adopted ordinance shall 
include a written statement describing the reasons 
for any modifications or denial. No ordinance 
adopted by the district shall be effective until 
ratification by the city, county, or city and county 
where the ordinance will apply. Upon ratification of 
an adopted ordinance, the city, county, or city and 
county, shall file a copy of the findings of the 
district, and any findings of the city, county, or city 
and county, together with the adopted ordinance 
expressly marked and identified to which each 
finding refers, in accordance with Section 101.8.1:3. 

89.111.2.4 Request for alternate means of protection. 

Requests for approval to use an alternative material, 
assembly or materials, equipment, method of 
construction, method of installation of equipment, or 
means of protection shall be made in writing to the 
enforcing agency by the owner or the owner's 
authorized representative and shall be accompanied 
by a fill statement of the conditions. Sufficient 
evidence or proof shall be submitted to substantiate 
any claim that may be made regarding its 
conformance. The enforcing agency may require tests 
and the submission of a test report from an approved 
testing organization as set forth in Title 19, California 
code of Regulation, to substantiate the equivalency of 
the proposed alternative means of protection. 

The authority having jurisdiction may consider 
implementation of the findings and recommendations 
identified in a Risk Management Plan (RMP) as 
developed in accordance with Title 19, Division 2, 



Chapter 3, when evaluating requests for alternative 
means of protection. 

Approval of a request for use of an alternative 
material, assembly of materials, equipment, method of 
construction, method of installation of equipment, or 
means of protection made pursuant to these provisions 
shall he limited to the particular case covered by 
request and shall not be constmed as establishing any 
precedent for any future request. 

89.111.2.5 Appeals. When a request for an alternate 
means of protection has been denied by the enforcing 
agency, the applicant may file a written appeal to the 
state fire marshal for consideration of the applicant's 
proposal. In considering such appeal, the state fire 
marshal may seek the advice of the State Board of Fire 
Services. The State Fire Marshal shall, after 
considering all of the facts presented, including any 
recommendations of the State board of Fire Services, 
determine if the proposal is for the purposes intended, 
at least equivalent to that specified in these regulations 
in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistance, 
durability and safety, and shall transmit such findings 
and any recommendations to the applicant and to the 
enforcing agency. 

89.111.3 Construction Documents. In addition to the 
provisions of this Section, see Title 24, Part 2, CaUfornia 
Building Code, Appendix Chapter 1, Section 106 for 
additional requirements. 

89.111.3.1 Public schools. Plans and specifications 
for the construction, alteration or addition to any 
building owned, leased or rented by any public school 
district shall be submitted to the Division of the State 
Architect 

89.111.3.2 Movable walls and partitions. Plans or 
diagrams shall be submitted to the enforcing agency 
for approval before the installation of, or 
rearrangement of, any movable wall or partition in 
any occupancy. Approval shall be granted only ff there 
is no increase in the fire hazard. 

89.111.3.3 New construction high-rise buildings. 

1. Complete plans or specifications, or both, shall be 
prepared covering all work required to comply with 
new construction high-rise buildings. Such plans 
and specifications shall be submitted to the 
enforcing agency having jurisdiction. 

2. All plans and specifications shall be prepared 
under the responsible charge of an architect or a 
civil or structural engineer authorized by law to 
develop construction plans and specifications, or by 
both such architect and engineer. Plans and 
specifications shall be prepared by an engineer duly 
qualified in that branch of engineering necessary to 
perform such services. Administration of the work of 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-15 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



construction shall he under the charge of the 
responsible architect or engineer except that where 
plans and specifications involve alterations or 
repairs, such work of construction may be 
administered by an engineer duly qualified to 
perform such services and holding a valid certificate 
under Chapter 7 (commencing with Section 65700) 
of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code 
for performance of services in that branch of 
engineering in which said plans, specifications and 
estimates and work of construction are applicable. 

This section shall not be construed as preventing the 
design of fire-extinguishing systems by persons 
holding a C-16 license issued pursuant to Division 
3, Chapter 9, Business and Professions Code. In 
such instances, however, the responsibility charge of 
this section shall prevail. 

89.111.3.4 Existing high-rise buildings. 1. Complete 
plans or specifications, or both, shall be prepared 
covering all work required by Section 3412, for 
existing high-rise buildings. Such plans or 
specifications shall be submitted to the enforcing 
agency having jurisdiction. 

2. Wlien new construction is required to conform 
with the provisions of these regulations, complete 
plans or specifications, or both, shall be prepared in 
accordance with the provisions of this subsection. As 
used in this section "new construction" is not 
intended to include repairs, replacements or minor 
alterations which do not disrupt or appreciably add 
to or affect the structural aspects of the building. 

89.111.3.5 Retention of Plans. Refer to Building 
Standards Law, Health and Safety Code Sections 
19850 and 19851, for permanent retention of plans. 

89.111.4 Fees 

89.111.4.1 Other fees. Pursuant to Health and Safety 
Code Section 13146.2, a city, county or district which 
inspects a hotel, motel, lodging house, or apartment 
house may charge and collect a fee for the inspection 
from the owner of the structure in an amount, as 
determined by the city, county or district, sufficient to 
pay its costs of that inspection. 

89.111.4.2 Large Family Day Care. Pursuant to 
Health and Safety Code Section 1597.46, Large 
Family Day-care Homes, the local government shall 
process any required permit as economically as 
possible, and fees charged for review shall not exceed 
the costs of the review and permit process. 

89.111.4.3 High-Rise. Pursuant to Health and Safety 
Code Section 13217, High-rise Structure Inspection: Fees 
and Costs, a local agency which inspects a high-rise 
structure pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 
1321 7 may charge and collect a fee for the inspection 



from the owner of the high-ri.se structure in an amount, as 
determined by the local agency, sufficient to pay its costs 
of that inspection. 

89.111.4.4 Fire Clearance Preinspection. Pursuant to 
Health and Safety Code Section 13235, Fire Clearance 
Preinspection, fee; upon receipt of a request from a 
prospective licensee of a community care facility, as 
defined in Section 1502, of a residential-care facility for 
the elderly, as defined in Section 1569.2, or of a child 
day-care facility, as defined in Section 1596. 750, the local 
fire enforcing agency, as defined in Section 13244, or 
state fire marshal, whichever has primary jurisdiction, 
shall conduct a preinspection of the facility prior to the 
final fire cleararKe approval At the time of the 
preinspection, the primary fire enforcing agency shall 
price consultation and interpretation of the fire safety 
regulations, and shall notify the prospective licensee of 
the facility in writing of the specific fire safety regulations 
which shall be enforced in order to obtain fire clearance 
approval A fee equal to, but riot exceeding, the actual 
cost of the preinspection services may be charged for the 
preinspection of a facility with a capacity to serve 25 or 
fewer persons. A fee equal to, but not exceeding, the 
actual cost of the preinspection services may be charged 
for a preinspection of a facility with a capacity to serve 26 
or more persons. 

89.111.4.5 Care Facilities. The primary fire enforcing 
agency shall complete the final fire clearance inspection 
for a community care facility, residential-care facility for 
the elderly, or child day-care facility within 30 days of 
receipt of the request for the final inspection, or as of the 
date the prospective facility requests the final 
prelicensure inspection by the State Department of Social 
Services, whichever is later. 

Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13235, a 
preinspection fee equal to, but not exceeding, the actual 
cost of the preinspection services may be charged for a 
facility with a capacity to serve 25 or less clients. A fee 
equal to, but not exceeding, the actual cost of the 
preinspection services may be charged for a 
preinspection of a facility with a capacity to serve 26 or 
more clients. 

Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 13131.5, a 
reasonable final inspection fee, not to exceed the actual 
cost of inspection services necessary to complete a final 
inspection may be charged for Occupancies classified as 
residential care facilities for the elderly (RCFE). 

Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 1569.84, 
neither the state fire marshal nor any local public entity 
shall charge any fee for enforcing fire inspection 
regulations pursuant to state law or regulation or local 
ordinance, with respect to residential-care facilities for 
the elderly (RCFE) which service six or fewer persons. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



70-16 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CALIFORNIA ARTICLE 89 - GENERAL CODE PROVISIONS 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



89J11J.6 Requests of the Office of the State Fire 
Marshal Requests. Whenever a local authority having 
jurisdiction requests that the State Fire Marshal 
perform plan review and/or inspection services related 
to a building permit, the applicable fees for such shall 
be payable to the Office of the State Fire Marshal 

89.1 1L5 Inspections. Work performed subject to the 
provisions of this code shall comply with the inspection 
requirements of Title 24, Part 2, California Building 
Standards Code, Sections 109.1, 109.3, 109.3.4, 1093,5, 
109.3.6, 109.3.8, 109.3.9, 109.3.10 109.5 and 109.6 as 
adopted by the Office of the State Fire Marshal. 

89.111.5.1 Existing Group J-1 or R occupancies. 

Licensed 2 4~hour care in a Group 1-1 or R occupancy 
in existence and originally classified imder 
previously adopted state codes be reinspected under 
the appropriate previous code provided there is no 
change in the use or character which would place the 
facility in a different occupancy group. 

89.111.6 Certificate of Occupancy. A Certificate of 
Occupancy shall be issued as specified in Title 24, Part 
2, California Building Code, Section 111. 



Exception: Group R, Division 3 and Group U 
occupancies. 

89.111.7 Temporary Structures and Uses. See Title 24, 
Part 2, California Building Code, Section 108. 

89.111.8 Service Utilities. See Title 24, Part 2, California 
Building Code Sectionll2. 

89.111.9 Stop Work Order. See Title 24, Part 2, 
California Building Code, Section 115. 

89.111.10 Unsafe Buildings^ Structures and Equipment See 

Title 24, Part 2, CaUfomia Building Code, Section 116. 

SECTION 89.112 

RESERVED FOR THE STATE LIBRARIAN 

SECTION 89.113 

RESERVED FOR THE DEPARTMENT OF WATER 
RESOURCES 

SECTION 89.114 

RESERVED FOR THE CALIFORNIA STATE 
LANDS COMMISSION 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-17 



ARTICLE 90 - CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLE 



70-1 8 2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 90 - CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLE 



ARTICLE 90 - INTRODUCTION 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


























Article / Section 


Coordination (Selective) 



























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-19 



70-20 2013 California Electrical Code 



INTRODUCTION 



NFPA 70® 

National Electrical Code® 
2011 Edition 



Copyright © 2010, National Fire Protection Association®. All Rights Reserved 

This edition of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, was prepared by the National Electrical Code Committee and acted on 
by NFPA at its June Association Technical Meeting held June 7-10, 2010, in Las Vegas, NV. It was issued by the Standards 
Council on August 5, 2010, with an effective date of August 25, 2010, and supersedes all previous editions. 

This edition of NFPA 70 was approved as an American National Standard on August 25, 2010. 

History and DevelopmentHistory and Development of the National Electrical Code® 

The National Fire Protection Association has acted as sponsor of the National Electrical Code since 1911. The original Code 
document was developed in 1897 as a result of the united efforts of various insurance, electrical, architectural, and allied 
interests. 

In accordance with the provisions of the NFPA Regulations Governing Committee Projects, a National Electrical Code 
Committee Report on Proposals containing proposed amendments to the 2008 National Electrical Code was published by 
NFPA in July 2009. This report recorded the actions of the various Code-Making Panels and the Correlating Committee of 
the National Electrical Code Committee on each proposal that had been made to revise the 2008 Code. The report was 
circulated to all members of the National Electrical Code Committee and was made available to other interested NFPA 
members and to the public for review and comment. Following the close of the public comment period, the Code-Making 
Panels met, acted on each comment, and reported their action to the Correlating Committee. NFPA published the National 
Electrical Code Committee Report on Comments in March 2010, which recorded the actions of the Code-Making Panels and 
the Correlating Committee on each public comment to the National Electrical Code Committee Report on Proposals. The 
National Electrical Code Committee Report on Proposals and the National Electrical Code Committee Report on Comments 
were presented to the 2010 June Association Technical Meeting for adoption. 

NFPA has an Electrical Section that provides particular opportunity for NFPA members interested in electrical safety to 
become better informed and to contribute to the development of the National Electrical Code and other NFPA electrical 
standards. At the Electrical Section Codes and Standards Review Session held at the 2010 NFPA Conference and Expo, 
Section members had opportunity to discuss and review the report of the National Electrical Code Committee prior to the 
adoption of this edition of the Code by the Association at its 2010 June Technical Session. 

This 52nd edition supersedes all other previous editions, supplements, and printings dated 1897, 1899, 1901, 1903, 1904, 
1905, 1907, 1909, 1911, 1913, 1915, 1918, 1920, 1923, 1925, 1926, 1928, 1930, 1931, 1933, 1935, 1937, 1940, 1942, 1943, 
1947, 1949, 1951, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 1962, 1965, 1968, 1971, 1975, 1978, 1981, 1984, 1987, 1990, 
1993, 1996, 1999, 2002, 2005, and 2008. 

This Code is purely advisory as far as NFPA is concerned. It is made available for a wide variety of both public and 

private uses in the interest of life and property protection* These include both use in law and for regulatory purposes, 

and use in private self-regulation and standardization activities such as insurance underwriting, building and facilities 

construction and management, and product testing and certification 



20 1 3 California Electrical Code 70-2 1 



ARTICLE 90 - INTRODUCTION 



NFPA 70 

National Electrical Code® 

2011 Edition 

IMPORTANT NOTE: This NFPA document is made 
available for use subject to important notices and legal 
disclaimers. These notices and disclaimers appear in all 
publications containing this document and may be 
found under the heading ''Important Notices and 
Disclaimers Concerning NFPA Documents, '' They can 
also be obtained on request from NFPA or viewed at 
www, nfpa, org/disclaimers. 

This 2011 edition includes the following usability 
features as aids to the user. Changes other than editorial 
are highlighted with gray shading within sections and 
with vertical ruling for large blocks of changed or new 
text and for new tables and changed or new figures. 
Where one or more complete paragraphs have been 
deleted, the deletion is indicated by a bullet («) between 
the paragraphs that remain. The index now has dictionary- 
style headers with helpful identifiers at the top of every 
index page. 



ARTICLE 90 

Introduction 

90.1 Purpose. 

(A) Practical Safeguarding. The purpose of this Code is 
the practical safeguarding of persons and property from 
hazards arising from the use of electricity. 

(B) Adequacy. This Code contains provisions that are 
considered necessary for safety. Compliance therewith 
and proper maintenance results in an installation that is 
essentially free from hazard but not necessarily efficient, 
convenient, or adequate for good service or future 
expansion of electrical use. 

Informational Note: Hazards often occur because of 
overloading of wiring systems by methods or usage not 
in conformity with this Code. This occurs because initial 
wiring did not provide for increases in the use of 
electricity. An initial adequate installation and 
reasonable provisions for system changes provide for 
future increases in the use of electricity. 

(C) Intention. This Code is not intended as a design 
specification or an instruction manual for untrained persons. 

(D) Relation to Other International Standards. The 

requirements in this Code address the fundamental 
principles of protection for safety contained in Section 
131 of International Electrotechnical Commission 
Standard 60364-1, Electrical Installations of Buildings. 



Informational Note: lEC 60364-1, Section 131, contains 
fundamental principles of protection for safety that 
encompass protection against electric shock, protection 
against thermal effects, protection against overcurrent, 
protection against fault currents, and protection against 
overvoltage. All of these potential hazards are addressed 
by the requirements in this Code. 

90.2 Scope. 

(A) Covered. This Code covers the installation of electrical 
conductors, equipment, and raceways; signaling and 
communications conductors, equipment, and raceways; and 
optical fiber cables and raceways for the following: 

(1) Public and private premises, including buildings, 
structures, mobile homes, recreational vehicles, and 
floating buildings 

(2) Yards, lots, parking lots, carnivals, and industrial 
substations 

(3) Installations of conductors and equipment that connect to 
the supply of electricity 

(4) Installations used by the electric utility, such as office 
buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops, and 
recreational buildings, that are not an integral part of a 
generating plant, substation, or control center. 

(B) Not Covered, This Code does not cover the following: 

(1) Installations in ships, watercraft other than floating 
buildings, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive 
veliicles other than mobile homes and recreational 
vehicles 

Informational Note: Although the scope of this Code 
indicates that the Code does not cover installations in ships, 
portions of this Code are incorporated by reference into Title 
46, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1 1 0-1 13. 

(2) Installations underground in mines and self-propelled 
mobile surface mining machinery and its attendant 
electrical trailing cable 

(3) Installations of railways for generation, transfonnation, 
transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively 
for operation of rolling stock or installations used 
exclusively for signaling and communications purposes 

(4) Installations of communications equipment under the 
exclusive control of communications utilities located 
outdoors or in building spaces used exclusively for such 
installations 

(5) Installations under the exclusive control of an electric 
utility where such installations 

a. Consist of service drops or service laterals, and 
associated metering, or 

b. Are on property owned or leased by the electric 
utility for the purpose of communications, metering. 



70-22 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 90 - INTRODUCTION 



generation, control, transformation, transmission, or 
distribution of electric energy, or 

c. Arc located m legaiiy established easements or 
rightSH>t-\vay, or 

d Are located by other written agreements either 
designated by or recognized by public service 
commissions, utility commissions, or otlier 
regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for such 
installations. These written agitements shall be 
limited to installations for the purpose of 
communications, metering, generation, control, 
transformation, transmission, or disnibtition of 
electric energy where legally established casements 
or rights-of-way cannot be obtained. These 
installations shall be limited to federal lands, native 
American reservations through the U.S, Department 
of the Interior Bureau of Indian Affairs, military 
bases, lands controlled by port authorities arid state 
agencies and departments, and lands owned by 
railroads. 

Tnformationa] Note to (4) and (5): Examples of utilities may 
include those entities that are typically designated or recognized 
by governmental law or regulation by public service/utility 
commissions and that install, operate, and maintain electric 
supply (such as generation, transmission, or distribution systems) 
or communicationi systems (such as telephone, CATV, Internet, 
satellite, or data sei^ces). Utilities may be subject to compliance 
with codes and standards covering their regulated activities as 
adopted under governmental law or regulation. Additional 
information can be found through consultation with the 
appropriate governmental bodies, such as state regulatory 
commissions, tlie Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, and 
the Federal Communications Commission. 

(C) Special Permission. The authority having jurisdiction for 
enforcing this Code may grant exception for the installation of 
conductors and equipment that are not under the exclusive 
control of the electric utilities and are used to connect the 
electric utility supply system to the serv ice conductors of the 
premises served, provided such installations are outside a 
building or structure, or terminate inside nearest the point of 
entmnce of the service conductors, 

90.3 Code Arrangement. This Code is divided into the 
introduction and nine chapters, as shown in Figure 90.3. 
Chapters 1, 2, 3, and 4 apply generally; Chapters 5, 6, and 7 
apply to special occupancies, special equipment, or other 
special conditions. These latter chapters supplement or modify 
the general rules. Chapters 1 through 4 apply except as 
amended by Chapters 5, 6, and 7 for the particular conditions. 
Chapter 8 covers communications systems and is not subject 
to the requirements of Chapters 1 through 7 except where the 
requirements are specifically referenced in Chapter 8. 
Chapter 9 consists of tables that are applicable as referenced. 
Informative annexes are not part of the requirements of this 
Code but are included for informational purposes only. 



Chapter 1 - General 



Chapter 2 - Wiring and Protection 



Chapter 3 - Wiring Methods and Materials 



Chapter 4 - Equipment for General Use 



Applies generally 
y to all eSectricai 
installations 



Chapter 6 - Special Occupancies 



Soppfements or modifies ^ 
Chaptifs 1 through 4 



Chapter 6 - Spscia! Equipment 



Chapter 7 - Special Conditions 



Chaplar 8 is not subject 

to the requirements of 

_, : ■ ■—■""■■ ; ■■- —7" r\ Chapters 1 through 7 except 

Chapter 8 - Communtoations Systems | f \^herel^e^t' :.' . -.■ ..^re 

spscixally refefenced m 

Chapters. 

Applicable as referenced 



Chapter 9 - Tables 



Annex A through Annex H 



. Informational only; 
not mandatory 



Figure 903 Code Arrangement 



90.4 Enforcement This Code is intended to be suitable for 
mandatory application by governmental bodies that exercise 
legal jurisdiction over electrical installations, including 
signaling and communications systems, and for use by 
insurance inspectors. The authority having jurisdiction for 
enforcement of the Code has the responsibility for making 
interpretations of the rules, for deciding on the approval of 
equipment and materials, and for granting the special 
permission contemplated in a number of the rules. 

By special permission, the authority having jurisdiction 
may waive specific requirements in this Code or permit 
altemative methods where it is assured that equivalent 
objectives can be achieved by establishing and maintaining 
effective safety. 

This Code may require new products, constructions, or 
materials that may not yet be available at the time the Code is 
adopted. In such event, the authority having jurisdiction may 
permit the use of the products, constructions, or materials that 
comply with the most recent previous edition of this Code 
adopted by the jurisdiction. 

90.5 Mandatory Rules, Permissive Rules, and Explanatory 
Material. 

(A) Mandatory Rules. Mandatory rules of this Code are those 
that identify actions that are specifically required or prohibited 
and are characterized by the use of the tenns shall or shall not. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-23 



ARTICLE 90 - INTRODUCTION 



(B) Permissive Rules. Permissive rules of this Code are 
those that identify actions that are allowed but not 
required, are normally used to describe options or 
alternative methods, and are characterized by the use of 
the terms shall be permitted or shall not be required. 

(C) Explanatory Material. Explanatory material, such as 
references to other standards, references to related 
sections of this Code, or information related to a Code 
rule, is included in this Code in the form of intbrmalionalj 
notes. Such notes are informational only and are not 
enforceable as requirements of this Code. 

Brackets containing section references to another NFPA 
document are for informational purposes only and are provided 
as a guide to indicate the source of the extracted text These 
bracketed references immediately follow the extracted text. 

Informational Note: The format and language used in 
this Code follows guidelines established by NFPA and 
published in the NEC Style Manual Copies of this 
manual can be obtained from NFPA. 



(D) Informative Annexes. Nonmandatory information 
relative lo the use of the NEC is provided in informative 
annexes. Informative annexes are nor pari of the 
enforceable requirements of the NEC. but arc included for 
information purposes only, 

90.6 Formal Interpretations. 

To promote uniformity of interpretation and application 
of the provisions of this Code, formal interpretation 
procedures have been established and are found in the 
NFPA Regulations Governing Committee Projects, 

90.7 Examination of Equipment for Safety. 

For specific items of equipment and materials referred to 
in this Code, examinations for safety made under standard 
conditions provide a basis for approval where the record 
is made generally available through promulgation by 
organizations properly equipped and qualified for 
experimental testing, inspections of the run of goods at 
factories, and service-value determination through field 
inspections. This avoids the necessity for repetition of 
examinations by different examiners, frequently with 
inadequate facilities for such work, and the confusion that 
would result from conflicting reports on the suitability of 
devices and materials examined for a given purpose. 

It is the intent of this Code that factory-installed internal 
wiring or the construction of equipment need not be 
inspected at the time of installation of the equipment, 
except to detect alterations or damage, if the equipment 
has been listed by a qualified electrical testing laboratory 
that is recognized as having the facilities described in the 
preceding paragraph and that requires suitability for 
installation in accordance with this Code. 



Informational Note No. 1: See requirements in 
110.3. 

Informational Note No. 2: Listed is defined in 
Article 100. 

Informational Note No. 3: Informative Annex A 
contains an informative list of product safety 
standards for electrical equipment. 

90.8 Wiring Planning. 

(A) Future Expansion and Convenience. Plans and 
specifications that provide ample space in raceways, spare 
raceways, and additional spaces allow for future increases 
in electric power and communications circuits. 
Distribution centers located in readily accessible locations 
provide convenience and safety of operation. 

(B) Number of Circuits in Enclosures. It is elsewhere 
provided in this Code that the number of wires and 
circuits confined in a single enclosure be varyingly 
restricted. Limiting the number of circuits in a single 
enclosure minimizes the effects from a short circuit or 
ground fault in one circuit. 

90.9 Units of Measurement. 

(A) Measurement System of Preference. For the 

purpose of this Code, metric units of measurement are in 
accordance with the modernized metric system known as 
the International System of Units (SI). 

(B) Dual System of Units. SI units shall appear first, and 
inch-pound units shall immediately follow in parentheses. 
Conversion fi*om inch-pound units to SI units shall be 
based on hard conversion except as provided in 90.9(C). 

(C) Permitted Uses of Soft Conversion. The cases given in 
90.9(C)(1) through (C)(4) shall not be required to use hard 
conversion and shall be permitted to use soft conversion. 

(1) Trade Sizes. Where the actual measured size of a 
product is not the same as the nominal size, trade size 
designators shall be used rather than dimensions. Trade 
practices shall be followed in all cases. 

(2) Extracted Material. Where material is extracted fi'om 
another standard, the context of the original material shall 
not be compromised or violated. Any editing of the 
extracted text shall be confined to making the style 
consistent with that of the NEC. 

(3) Industry Practice. Where industry pracfice is to 
express units in inch-pound units, the inclusion of SI units 
shall not be required. 

(4) Safety. Where a negative impact on safety would 
result, soft conversion shall be used. 



70-24 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 90 - INTRODUCTION 



(D) Compliance. Conversion from inch-pound units to SI 
units shall be permitted to be an approximate conversion. 
Comphance with the numbers shown in either the SI 
system or the inch-pound system shall constitute 
compliance with this Code. 

Informational Note No. 1: Hard conversion is 
considered a change in dimensions or properties of an 
item into new sizes that might or might not be 



interchangeable with the sizes used in the original 
measurement. Soft conversion is considered a direct 
mathematical conversion and involves a change in the 
description of an existing measurement but not in the 
actual dimension. 

Informational Note No. 2: SI conversions are based on 
lEEE/ASTM SI 10-1997, Standard for the Use of the 
International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric 
System. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-25 



CHAPTER 1 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



'^^"^^•^ 2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 1 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 100 "DEFINITIONS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 












Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 
















X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


























Article / Section 


Coordination (Selective) 
















X 


X 


X 


X 




ARTICLE 110- REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 












Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 
















X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


























Article / Section 


110.2 
















X 


X 


X 


X 




110.13(C) 
















X 


X 


X 


X 





2013 California Electrical Code 



70-25.2 



ARTICLE 100 -DEFINITIONS 



Chapter 1 General 



ARTICLE 100 

Definitions 

Scope. This article contains only those definitions essential 
to the proper application of this Code. It is not intended to 
include commonly defined general terms or commonly 
defined technical terms from related codes and standards. 
In general, only those terms that are used in two or more 
articles are defined in Article 100. Other definifions are 
included in the article in which they are used but may be 
referenced in Article 100. 

Part 1 of this article contains definifions intended to apply 
wherever the terms are used throughout this Code, Part II 
contains definitions applicable only to the parts of articles 
specifically covering installafions and equipment operating 
at over 600 volts, nominal. 

I. General 

Accessible (as applied to equipment). Admitting close 
approach; not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other 
effective means. 

Accessible (as applied to wiring methods). Capable of 
being removed or exposed without damaging the building 
structure or finish or not permanently closed in by the 
structure or finish of the building. 

Accessible, Readily (Readily Accessible). Capable of 
being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or 
inspections without requiring those to whom ready access 
is requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort 
to portable ladders, and so forth. 

Ampacity. The maximum current, in amperes, that a 
conductor can carry continuously under the condifions of 
use without exceeding its temperature rating. 

Appliance. Utilizafion equipment, generally other than 
industrial, that is normally built in standardized sizes or 
t3^es and is installed or connected as a unit to perform 
one or more funcfions such as clothes washing, air 
condifioning, food mixing, deep frying, and so forth. 

Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 

Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)* A device intended 
to provide protection from the efiects of arc faults by 
recognizing characteristics unique to arcijig and by functioning 
to dc-encrgi;£e the circuit when an arc fault is detected. 

AskareL A generic term for a group of nonflammable 
synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical 
insulating media. Askarels of various compositional types 
are used. Under arcing conditions, the gases produced, while 
consisting predominantly of noncombustible hydrogen 
chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases, 
depending on the askarel type. 



Attachment Plug (Plug Cap) (Plug). A device that, by 
insertion in a receptacle, establishes a connection between 
the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the 
conductors connected permanently to the receptacle. 

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). An organization, 
office, or individual responsible for enforcing the 
requirements of a code or standard, or for approving 
equipment, materials, an installation, or a procedure. 

Informational Note: The phrase "authority having 
jurisdiction," or its acronym AHJ, is used in NFPA 
documents in a broad manner, since jurisdictions and 
approval agencies vary, as do their responsibilities. 
Where public safety is primary, the authority having 
jurisdiction may be a federal, state, local, or other 
regional department or individual such as a fire chief; 
fire marshal; chief of a fire prevendon bureau, labor 
department, or health department; building official; 
electrical inspector; or others having statutory authority. 
For insurance purposes, an insurance inspection 
department, rating bureau, or other insurance company 
representative may be the authority having jurisdiction. 
In many circumstances, the property owner or his or her 
designated agent assumes the role of the authority 
having jurisdiction; at government installadons, the 
commanding officer or departmental official may be the 
authority having jurisdiction. 

Automatic. Performing a function without the necessity 
of human inlcrvention. 

Ballasted Solar Photovoltaic System [ESC, SFM, HCDl 

A HCDl] A roof mounted system composed of solar 
photovoltaic panels and supporting members that are 
unattached or partially attached to the roof and must rely 
on their weight, aerodynamics and friction to coimter the 
effect of wind and seismic forces. 

Bathroom. An area including a basin with one or more of 
the following: a toilet, a urinal, a tub, a shower, a bidet, or 
similar plumbing fixtures. 

Bonded (Bonding). Connected to establish electrical 
continuity and conductivity. 

Bonding Conductor or Jumper. A reliable conductor to 
ensure the required electrical conductivity between metal 
parts required to be electrically connected. 

Bonding Jumper, Equipment. The connection between 
two or more portions of the equipment grounding conductor. 

Bonding Jumper, Main. The connection between the 
grounded circuit conductor and the equipment grounding 
conductor at the service. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 



Bonding Jumper, System. The eonneclion bciween the 
grounded circuit conductor and the supply-side bonding 



70-26 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 100 - DEFINITIONS 



jumper, or the equip men l grounding conductor, or both, at 
a separately derived system, 

Branch Circuit. The circuit conductors between the final 
overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). 

Branch Circuit, Appliance. A branch circuit that 
suppHes energy to one or more outlets to which 
appliances are to be connected and that has no 
permanently connected luminaires that are not a part of 
an appliance. 

Branch Circuit, General-Purpose. A branch circuit that 
supplies two or more receptacles or outlets for lighting 
and appliances. 

Branch Circuit, Individual. A branch circuit that 
supplies only one utilization equipment. 

Branch Circuit, Muitiwire. A branch circuit that 
consists of two or more ungrounded conductors that have 
a voltage between them, and a grounded conductor that 
has equal voltage between it and each ungrounded 
conductor of the circuit and that is connected to the 
neutral or grounded conductor of the system. 

Building. A structure that stands alone or that is cut off 
from adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings 
therein protected by approved fire doors. 

Cabinet. An enclosure that is designed for either surface 
mounting or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, 
mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can 
be hung. 

Circuit Breaker. A device designed to open and close a 
circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit 
automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without 
damage to itself when properly applied within its rating. 

Informational Note: The automatic opening means can 
be integral, direct acting with the circuit breaker, or 
remote from the circuit breaker. 

Adjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A qualifying 
term indicating that the circuit breaker can be set to trip at 
various values of current, time, or both, within a 
predetermined range. 

Instantaneous Trip (as applied to circuit breakers). A 
qualifying term indicating that no delay is purposely 
introduced in the tripping action of the circuit breaker. 

Inverse Time (as applied to circuit breakers). A 
qualifying term indicating that there is purposely 
introduced a delay in the tripping action of the circuit 
breaker, which delay decreases as the magnitude of the 
current increases. 

Nonadjustable (as applied to circuit breakers). A 
qualifying term indicating that the circuit breaker does not 
have any adjustment to alter the value of current at which 
it will trip or the time required for its operation. 



Setting (of circuit breakers). The value of current, time, or 
both, at which an adjustable circuit breaker is set to trip. 

Clothes Closet. A non-habitable room or space intended 
primarily for storage of garments and apparel. 

Communications Equipment. The electronic equipment 
that performs the telecommunications operations for the 
transmission of audio, video, and data, and includes 
power equipment (e.g., dc converters, inverters, and 
batteries) and technical support equipment (e.g., 
computers). 

Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or 
finish of the building. Wires in concealed raceways are 
considered concealed, even though they may become 
accessible by withdrawing them. 

Conductor, Bare. A conductor having no covering or 
electrical insulation whatsoever. 

Conductor, Covered. A conductor encased within 
material of composition or thickness that is not 
recognized by this Code as electrical insulation. 

Conductor, Insulated. A conductor encased within 
material of composition and thickness that is recognized 
by this Code as electrical insulation. 

Conduit Body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing 
system that provides access through a removable cover(s) 
to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more 
sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system. 

Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal 
boxes are not classified as conduit bodies. 

Connector, Pressure (Solderless). A device that 
establishes a connection between two or more conductors 
or between one or more conductors and a terminal by 
means of mechanical pressure and without the use of 
solder. 

Continuous Load. A load where the maximum current is 
expected to continue for 3 hours or more. 

Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to 
govern, in some predetermined manner, the electric power 
delivered to the apparatus to which it is connected. 

Cooking Unit, Counter-Mounted. A cooking appliance 
designed for mounting in or on a counter and consisting 
of one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and 
built-in or mountable controls. 

Coordination (Selective). Localization of an overcurrent 
condition to restrict outages to the circuit or equipment 
affected, accomplished by the choice of overcurrent 
protective devices and their ratings or settings. 

Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. Conductors 
drawn from a copper-clad aluminum rod with the copper 
metallurgically bonded to an aluminum core. The copper 
forms a minimum of 10 percent of the cross-sectional area 
of a solid conductor or each strand of a stranded conductor. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-27 



ARTICLE 100 -DEFINITIONS 



Cutout Box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting 
that has swinging doors or covers secured directly to and 
telescoping with the walls of the box proper. 

Dead Front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the 
operating side of the equipment. 

Demand Factor. The ratio of the maximum demand of a 
system, or part of a system, to the total connected load of a 
system or the part of the system under consideration. 

Device. A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls 
electric energy as its principal fonction. 

Disconnecting Means. A device, or group of devices, or 
other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be 
disconnected from their source of supply. 

Dusttight. Constructed so that dust will not enter the 
enclosing case under specified test conditions. 

Duty, Continuous. Operation at a substantially constant load 
for an indefinitely long time. 

Duty, Intermittent. Operation for alternate intervals of (1) 
load and no load; or (2) load and rest; or (3) load, no load, 
and rest. 

Duty, Periodic. Intermittent operation in which the load 
conditions are regularly recurrent. 

Duty, Short-Time. Operation at a substantially constant load 
for a short and definite, specified time. 

Duty, Varying. Operation at loads, and for intervals of time, 
both of which may be subject to wide variation. 

Dw^elling, One-Family. A building that consists solely of 
one dwelling unit. 

Dwelling, Two-Family* A building that consists solely of 
two dwelling units. 

Dwelling, Multifamily. A building that contains three or 
more dwelling units. 

Dwelling Unit. A single unit, providing complete and 
independent living facilities for one or more persons, 
including permanent provisions for living, sleeping, cooking, 
and sanitation. 

Electric Sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained, 
electrically illuminated utilization equipment with words or 
symbols designed to convey information or attract attention. 

Electric Power Production and Distribution Network. 

Power production, distribution, and utilization equipment 
and facilities, such as electric utility systems that deliver 
electric power to the connected loads, that are external to and 
not controlled by an interactive system. 



Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) 
that prevents persons from accidentally contacting energized 
parts. 

Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or 
walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from 
accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect the 
equipment from physical damage. 

Informational Note: See Table 110.28 for examples of 
enclosure types. 

Energized. Electrically connected to, or is, a source of 
voltage. 

Equipment. A general term, including fittings, devices, 
appliances, luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like 
used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical 
installation. 



Explosionproof Equipment Equipment enclosed in a case 
that is capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified 
gas or vapor that may occur within it and of preventing the 
ignition of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure 
by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, 
and that operates at such an external temperature that a 
surrounding flammable atmosphere will not be ignited 
thereby. 

Informational Note: For further information, see ANSI/UL 
1203-2006, Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proqf 
Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) 
Locations. 

Exposed (as applied to live parts). Capable of being 
inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe 
distance by a person. It is applied to parts that are not 
suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. 

Exposed (as applied to wiring methods). On or attached to 
the surface or behind panels designed to allow access. 

Externally Operable. Capable of being operated without 
exposing the operator to contact with live parts. 

Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service 
equipment, the source of a separately derived system, or 
other power supply source and the final branch-circuit 
overcurrent device. 

Festoon Lighting. A string of outdoor lights that is 
suspended between two points. 

Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other 
part of a wiring system that is intended primarily to perform 
a mechanical rather than an electrical frinction. 

Garage. A building or portion of a building in which one or 
more self-propelled vehicles can be kept for use, sale, 
storage, rental, repair, exhibition, or demonstration purposes. 

Informational Note: For commercial garages, repair and 
storage, see Article 511. 



70-28 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 100 -DEFINITIONS 



Ground. The earth. 



Ground Fault An unintentional, electrically conducting 
connection between an ungrounded conductor of an 
electrical circuit and the nomially non-cufient-carrying 
conductors, metallic enclosures, metallic raceways, 
metallic equipment, or earth. 

Grounded (Grounding). Connected (connecting) to 
ground or to a conductive body that extends the ground 
connection. 

Grounded, Solidly. Connected to ground without 
inserting any resistor or impedance device. 

Grounded Conductor. A system or circuit conductor that 
is intentionally grounded. 

Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI). A device 
intended for the protection of personnel that functions to 
de-energize a circuit or portion thereof within an 
established period of time when a current to ground 
exceeds the values established for a Class A device. 

Informational Note: Class A ground-fault circuit 
interrupters trip when the current to ground is 6 
mA or higher and do not trip when the current to 
ground is less than 4 mA. For further 
information, see UL 943, Standard for Ground- 
Fault Circuit Interrupters. 

Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. A system 
intended to provide protection of equipment from 
damaging line-to-ground fault currents by operating to 
cause a disconnecting means to open all ungrounded 
conductors of the faulted circuit. This protection is 
provided at current levels less than those required to 
protect conductors from damage through the operation of 
a supply circuit overcurrent device. 

Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC). The 
conductive path(s) installed to connect normally non- 
current-carrying metal parts of equipment together and to 
the system grounded conductor or to the grounding 
electrode conductor, or both. 

Informational Note No. 1: It is recognized that the 
equipment grounding conductor also performs bonding. 

Informational Note No. 2: See 250.118 for a list of 
acceptable equipment grounding conductors. 

Grounding Electrode. A conducting object through 
which a direct connection to earth is established. 

Grounding Electrode Conductor. A conductor used to 
connect the system grounded conductor or the equipment 
to a grounding electrode or to a point on the grounding 
electrode system. 

Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or 
otherwise protected by means of suitable covers, casings, 
barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the 
likelihood of approach or contact by persons or objects to 
a point of danger. 



Guest Room. An accommodation combining living, 
sleeping, sanitary, and storage facilities within a 
compartment. 

Guest Suite. An accommodation with two or more 
contiguous rooms comprising a compartment, with or 
without doors between such rooms, that provides living, 
sleeping, sanitary, and storage facilities. 

Mandhole Enclosure. An enclosure for use in 
underground systems, provided with an open or closed 
bottom, and sized to allow personnel to reach into, but not 
enter, for the purpose of installing, operating, or 
maintaining equipment or wiring or both. 

Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other 
vertical opening or space in which an elevator or 
dumbwaiter is designed to operate. 

Identified (as applied to equipment). Recognizable as 
suitable for the specific purpose, function, use, 
environment, application, and so forth, where described in 
a particular Code requirement. 

Informational Note: Some examples of ways to 
determine suitability of equipment for a specific 
purpose, environment, or application include 
investigations by a qualified testing laboratory (listing 
and labeling), an inspection agency, or other 
organizations concerned with product evaluation. 

In Sight From (Within Sight From, Within Sight). 

Where this Code specifies that one equipment shall be "in 
sight from," "within sight from," or **within sight of," and 
so forth, another equipment, the specified equipment is to 
be visible and not more than 15 m (50 ft) distant from the 
other. 

Interactive System. An electric power production system 
that is operating in parallel with and capable of delivering 
energy to an electric primary source supply system. 

Interrupting Rating. The highest current at rated voltage 
that a device is idenlificd to interrupt under standard test 
conditions. 

Informational Note; Equipment intended to interrupt 
current at other than fault levels may have its 
interrupting rating implied in other ratings, such as 
horsepower or locked rotor current. 

Intersystem Bonding Termination. A device that 
provides a means for connecting bonding conductors for 
communications systems lo the grounding electrode 
system. 

Isolated (as applied to location). Not readily accessible 
to persons unless special means for access are used. 

Kitchen. An area with a sink and permanent provision^ 
for food preparation and cooking. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-29 



ARTICLE 100 - DEFINITIONS 



Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been 
attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an 
organization that is acceptable to the authority having 
jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that 
maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled 
equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the 
manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate 
standards or performance in a specified manner. 

Lighting Outlet. An outlet intended for the direct 
connection of a lampholder or luminaire. 

Listed. Equipment, materials, or services included in a 
list published by an organization that is acceptable to the 
authority having jurisdiction and concerned with 
evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic 
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials 
or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states 
that either the equipment, material, or service meets 
appropriate designated standards or has been tested and 
found suitable for a specified purpose. 

Informational Note: The means for identifying 
listed equipment may vary for each organization 
concerned with product evaluation, some of 
which do not recognize equipment as listed 
unless it is also labeled. Use of the system 
employed by the listing organization allows the 
authority having jurisdiction to identify a listed 
product. 

Live Parts. Energized conductive components. 

Location, Damp. Locations protected from weather and 
not subject to saturation with water or other liquids but 
subject to moderate degrees of moisture. Examples of 
such locations include partially protected locations under 
canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like 
locations, and interior locations subject to moderate 
degrees of moisture, such as some basements, some barns, 
and some cold-storage warehouses. 

Location, Dry. A location not normally subject to 
dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be 
temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case 
of a building under construction. 

Location, Wet. Installations underground or in concrete 
slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth; in 
locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, 
such as vehicle washing areas; and in unprotected 
locations exposed to weather. 

Luminaire. A complete lighting unit consisting of a light 
source such as a lamp or lamps, together with the parts 
designed to position the light source and connect it to the 
power supply. It may also include parts to protect the light 
source or the ballast or to distribute the light. A 
lampholder itself is not a luminaire. 



Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear. A switchgear 
assembly completely enclosed on all sides and top with 
sheet metal (except for ventilating openings and 
inspection windows) and containing primary power 
circuit switching, interrupting devices, or both, with buses 
and connections. The assembly may include control and 
auxiliary devices. Access to the interior of the enclosure is 
provided by doors, removable covers, or both. Metal- 
enclosed power switchgear is available in non-arc- 
resistant or arc-resistant constructions. 

Motor Control Center. An assembly of one or more 
enclosed sections having a common power bus and 
principally containing motor control units. 

Multioutlet Assembly. A type of surface, flush, or 
freestanding raceway designed to hold conductors and 
receptacles, assembled in the field or at the factory. 

Neutral Conductor. The conductor connected to the 
neutral point of a system that is intended to carry current 
under normal conditions. 

Neutral Point. The common point on a wye-connection 
in a polyphase system or midpoint on a single-phase, 3- 
wire system, or midpoint of a single-phase portion of a 3- 
phase delta system, or a midpoint of a 3-wire, direct- 
current system. 

Informational Note: At the neutral point of the system, 
the vectorial sum of the nominal voltages from all other 
phases within the system that utilize the neutral, with 
respect to the neutral point, is zero potential. 

Nonautomatic. Requiring human intervention to perform 
U Ai net ion- 

Nonlinear Load. A load where the wave shape of the 
steady-state current does not follow the wave shape of the 
applied voltage. 

Informational Note: Electronic equipment, 
electronic/electric-discharge lighting, adjustable-speed 
drive systems, and similar equipment may be nonlinear 
loads. 

Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is 
taken to supply utilization equipment. 

Outline Lighting. An arrangement of incandescent 
lamps, electric-discharge lighting, or other electrically 
powered light sources to outline or call attention to certain 
features such as the shape of a building or the decoration 
of a window. 

Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current 
of equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result 
from overload, short circuit, or ground fault. 

Informational Note: A cuixent in excess of rating may be 
accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a 
given set of conditions. Therefore, the mles for overcurrent 
protection are specific for particular situations. 



70-30 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 100 -DEFINITIONS 



Overcurrent Protective Device, Branch-Circuit* A 

device capable of providing protection for service, feeder, 
and branch circuits and equipment over the full range of 
overcurrents between its rated current and its interrupting 
rating. Branch-circuit overcurrent protective devices are 
provided with interrupting ratings appropriate for the 
intended use but no less than 5000 amperes. 

Overcurrent Protective Device, Supplementary* A 

device intended to provide limited overcurrent protection 
for specific applications and utilization equipment such as 
luminaires and appliances. This limited protection is in 
addition to the protection provided in the required branch 
circuit by the branch-circuit overcurrent protective device. 

Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, 
full-load rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated 
ampacity that, when it persists for a sufficient length of 
time, would cause damage or dangerous overheating. A 
fauh, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an 
overload. 

Fanelboard. A single panel or group of panel units 
designed for assembly in the form of a single panel, 
including buses and automatic overcurrent devices, and 
equipped with or without switches for the control of light, 
heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet 
or cutout box placed in or against a wall, partition, or 
other support; and accessible only from the front. 

Plenum. A compartment or chamber to which one or 
more air ducts are connected and that forms part of the air 
distribution system. 

Power Outlet, An enclosed assembly that may include 
receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, 
buses, and watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to 
supply and control power to mobile homes, recreational 
vehicles, park trailers, or boats or to serve as a means for 
distributing power required to operate mobile or 
temporarily installed equipment. 

Premises Wiring (System). Interior and exterior wiring, 
including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit 
wiring together with all their associated hardware, 
fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and 
temporarily installed. This includes (a) wiring from the 
service point or power source to the outlets or (b) wiring 
from and including the power source to the outlets where 
there is no service point. 

Such wiring does not include wiring internal to 
appliances, luminaires, motors, controllers, motor control 
centers, and similar equipment. 

Qualified Person. One who has skills and knowledge 
related to the construction and operation of the electrical 
equipment and installations and has received safety 
training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved. 



Informational Note: Refer to NFPA 70E-2009, 
Standard for Electrical Safety^ in the Workplace, for 
electrical safety training requirements. 

Raceway. An enclosed channel of metal or nonmetallic 
materials designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or 
busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this 
Code. Raceways include, but are not limited to, rigid 
metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate 
metal conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, flexible 
metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical 
nonmetallic tubing, electrical metallic tubing, underfloor 
raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal 
floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and 
busways. 

Rainproof. Constructed, protected, or treated so as to 
prevent rain from interfering with the successful operation 
of the apparatus under specified test conditions. 

Raintight. Constructed or protected so that exposure to a 
beating rain will not result in the entrance of water under 
specified test conditions. 

Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at 
the outlet for the connection of an attachment plug. A 
single receptacle is a single contact device with no other 
contact device on the same yoke. A multiple receptacle is 
two or more contact devices on the same yoke. 

Receptacle Outlet. An outlet where one or more 
receptacles are installed. 

Remote-Control Circuit. Any electrical circuit that 
controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent 
device. 

Scalable Equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or 
cabinet that is provided with a means of sealing or locking 
so that live parts cannot be made accessible without 
opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may not be 
operable without opening the enclosure. 

Separately Derived System. A premises wiring system 
whose power is derived from a source of electric energy 
or equipment other than a service. Such systems have no 
direct conncclion from circuit conductors of one system to 
circuit conductors of another system, other tlian 
connections through the earth, metal enclosures, metallic 
raceways, or equipment grounding conductors. 

Service. The conductors and equipment for dehvering 
electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring 
system of the premises served. 

Service Cable. Service conductors made up in the form 
of a cable. 

Service Conductors. The conductors from the service 
point to the service disconnecting means. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-31 



ARTICLE 100 -DEFINITIONS 



Service Conductors, Overhead. The overhead 
conductors between the service point and the first point of 
connection to the service-entrance conductors at the 
building or other structure. 

Service CooductorSf Underground. The underground 
conductors between the service point and ihc first point of 
conncclion to the service- entrance conductors in a 
terminal box, meter, or other enclosure, inside or outside 
the building wall. 

Informational Note: Where there is no terminal box, 
meter, or other enclosure, the point of connection is 
considered to bo the poiiii of entrance of the ser\ ice 
conductors into the building. 

Service Drop. The overhead conductors between the 
utility electric supply system and the semce point. 

Service-Entrance Conductors, Overhead System. The 
service conductors between the terminals of the service 
equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear 
of building walls, where joined by tap or splice to the 
service drop or overhead service conductors. 

Service-Entrance Conductors, Underground System. 

The service conductors between the terminals of the 
service equipment and the point of connection to the 
service lateral or undertiround sen, ice conductors. 

Informational Note: Where service equipment is 
located outside the building walls, there may be 
no service-entrance conductors or they may be 
entirely outside the building. 

Service Eqiiipment. The necessary equipment, usually 
consisting of a circuit breaker(s) or switch(es) and fuse(s) 
and their accessories, connected to the load end of service 
conductors to a building or other structure, or an 
otherwise designated area, and intended to constitute the 
main control and cutoff of the supply. 

Service Lateral. The underground conductors between 
the utility electric supply system and the service point. 

Service Point. The point of connection between the 
facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring. 

hitbrmaiional Note: The ser\'ice point can be described 
as the point of demarcation between where the ser\ing 
utility ends and the prcntisej* wiring begins. The ser\ ing 
utility generally specifies the location of the service 
point based on the conditions of^^en ice. 

Short-Circuit Current Rating. The prospective 
symmetrical fault current at a nominal voltage to which 
an apparatus or system is able to be connected without 
sustaining damage exceeding defined acceptance criteria. 

Show Window. Any window used or designed to be 
used for the display of goods or advertising material, 
whether it is fully or partly enclosed or entirely open at 
the rear and whether or not it has a platform raised higher 
than the street floor level. 



Signaling Circuit. Any electrical circuit that energizes 
signaling equipment. 

Solar Photovoltaic System. The total components and 
subsystems that, in combination, convert solar energy into 
electric energy suitable for connection to a utilization 
load. 

Special Permission. The written consent of the authority 
having jurisdiction. 

Structure. That which is built or constructed. 

Surge Arrester. A protective device for limiting surge 
voltages by discharging or bypassing surge current; it also 
prevents continued flow of follow current while 
remaining capable of repeating these functions. 

Surge-Protective Device (SPD). A protective device for 
limiting transient voltages by diverting or limiting surge 
current; it also prevents continued flow of follow current 
while remaining capable of repeating these functions and 
is designated as follows: 

Type I: Permanently connected SPDs intended for 
installation between the secondary of the service 
transformer and the line side of the service disconnect 
overcurrent device. 

Type 2: Permanently connected SPDs intended for 
installation on the load side of the service disconnect 
overcurrent device, including SPDs located at the branch 
panel. 

Type 3: Point of utilization SPDs. 

Type 4: Component SPDs, including discrete components, 
as well as assemblies. 

Informational Note: For further information on Type 1, 
Type 2, Type 3, and Type 4 SPDs, see UL 1449, 
Standard for Surge Protective Devices. 

Switch, Bypass Isolation. A manually operated device 
used in conjunction with a transfer switch to provide a 
means of directly connecting load conductors to a power 
source and of disconnecting the transfer switch. 

Switch, General-Use. A switch intended for use in 
general distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in 
amperes, and it is capable of interrupting its rated current 
at its rated voltage. 

Switch, General-Use Snap. A form of general-use switch 
constructed so that it can be installed in device boxes or 
on box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with 
wiring systems recognized by this Code. 

Switch, Isolating. A switch intended for isolating an 
electrical circuit from the source of power. It has no 
interrupting rating, and it is intended to be operated only 
after the circuit has been opened by some other means. 



70-32 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 100 - DEFINITIONS 



Switch, Motor-Circuit A switch rated in horsepower 
that is capable of interrupting the maximum operating 
overload current of a motor of the same horsepower rating 
as the switch at the rated voltage. 

Switch, Transfer, An automatic or nonautomatic device 
for transferring one or more load conductor connections 
from one power source to another. 

Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of 
panels on which are mounted on the face, back, or both, 
switches, overcun'ent and other protective devices, buses, 
and usually instruments. Switchboards are generally 
accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are 
not intended to be installed in cabinets. 

Thermal Protector (as applied to motors). A protective 
device for assembly as an integral part of a motor or 
motor-compressor that, when properly applied, protects 
the motor against dangerous overheating due to overload 
and failure to start. 

Informational Note: The thennal protector may consist 
of one or more sensing elements integral with the motor 
or motor-compressor and an external control device. 

Thermally Protected (as applied to motors). The words 
Thermally Protected appearing on the nameplate of a 
motor or motor-compressor indicate that the motor is 
provided with a thermal protector. 

Ungrounded. Not connected to ground or to a conductive 
body that extends the ground connection. 

Uninterruptible Power Supply. A power suppiy used lo 
provide alternaiiiig current power lo a load for some 
period of time in the event of a power failure. 

Informational Note: In addition, it may prttvide a more 
constant voUagc and trequency supply to die loai 
reducing the effects of voltage and frequency varialions. 

Utility-Interactive Inverter. An inverter intended for use 
in parallel with an electric utility to supply common loads 
that may deliver power to the utility. 

Utilization Equipment. Equipment that utilizes electric 
energy for electronic, electromechanical, chemical, 
heating, lighting, or similar purposes. 

Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation 
of air sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or 
vapors. 

Volatile Flammable Liquid, A flammable Uquid having 
a flash point below 38°C (100°F), or a flammable liquid 
whose temperature is above its flash point, or a Class II 
combustible liquid that has a vapor pressure not 
exceeding 276 kPa (40 psia) at 38°C (lOO^F) and whose 
temperature is above its flash point. 



Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square 
(nns) (effective) difference of potential between any two 
conductors of the circuit concerned. 

Informational Note: Some systems, such as 3 -phase 4- 
wire, single-phase 3-wire, and 3-wire direct current, may 
have various circuits of various voltages. 

Voltage, Nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit 
or system for the puipose of conveniently designating its 
voltage class (e,g., 120/240 volts, 480Y/277 volts, 600 
volts). The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can 
vary from the nominal within a range that permits 
satisfactory operation of equipment. 

Informational Note: See ANSI C84.1-2006, Voltage 
Ratings for Electric Power Systems and Equipment (60 

Voltage to Ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage 
between the given conductor and that point or conductor 
of the circuit that is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, 
the greatest voltage between the given conductor and any 
other conductor of the circuit. 

Watertight Constructed so that moisture will not enter 
the enclosure under specified test conditions. 

Weatherproof. Constructed or protected so that 
exposure to the weather will not interfere with successful 
operation. 

Informational Note: Rainproof, raintight, or watertight 
equipment can fulfill the requirements for weatherproof 
where varying weather conditions other than wetness, 
such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not 
a factor. 

IL Over 600 Volts, Nominal 

Whereas the preceding definitions are intended to apply 
wherever the terms are used throughout this Code, the 
following definitions are applicable only to parts of the 
article specifically covering installations and equipment 
operating at over 600 volts, nominal, 

Electronically Actuated Fuse. An overcurrent protective 
device that generally consists of a control module that 
provides current sensing, electronically derived time- 
current characteristics, energy to initiate tripping, and an 
interrupting module that interrupts current when an 
overcurrent occurs. Electronically actuated fuses may or 
may not operate in a current-limiting fashion, depending 
on the type of control selected. 

Fuse. An overcurrent protective device with a circuit- 
opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the 
passage of overcurrent through it. 

Intbrmational Note: A fuse comprises all the parts that 
form a unit capable of performing the prescribed 
functions. It may or may not be the complete device 
necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-33 



110.1 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



Controlled Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for 
controlling discharge circuit interruption such that no solid 
material may be exhausted into the surrounding atmosphere. 

Infomiational Note: The fuse is designed so that discharged 
gases will not ignite or damage insulation in the path of the 
discharge or propagate a flashover to or between grounded 
members or conduction members in the path of the discharge 
where the distance between the vent and such insulation or 
conduction members conforms to manufacturer's 
recommendations. 

Expulsion Fuse Unit (Expulsion Fuse). A vented fiise unit in 
which the expulsion effect of gases produced by the arc and 
lining of the fuseholder, either alone or aided by a spring, 
extinguishes the arc. 

Nonvented Power Fuse. A flise without intentional provision 
for the escape of arc gases, liquids, or solid particles to the 
atmosphere during circuit inteiTuption. 

Power Fuse Unit. A vented, nonvented, or controlled vented 
fiise unit in which the arc is extinguished by being drawn 
through solid material, granular material, or liquid, either alone 
or aided by a spring. 

Vented Power Fuse. A fuse with provision for the escape of 
arc gases, liquids, or solid particles to the surrounding 
atmosphere during circuit interruption. 

Multiple Fuse. An assembly of two or more single-pole fuses. 

Switching Device. A device designed to close, open, or both, 
one or more electrical circuits. 

Circuit Breaker A switching device capable of making, 
cairying, and interrupting currents under normal circuit 
conditions, and also of making, carrying for a specified time, 
and interrupting currents under specified abnormal circuit 
conditions, such as those of short circuit. 

Cutout, An assembly of a fuse support with either a 
fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The 
fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element 
(fuse link) or may act as the disconnecting blade by the 
inclusion of a nonfiasible member. 

Disconnecting Means. A device, group of devices, or other 
means whereby the conductors of a circuit can be 
disconnected from their source of supply. 

Disconnecting (or Isolating) Switch (Disconnector, Isolator). 
A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or 
equipment from a source of power. 

Interrupter Switch. A switch capable of making, carrying, and 
interrupting specified currents. 

Oil Cutout (Oil-Filled Cutout). A cutout in which all or part of 
the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade is 
mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and 
the fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link) so that 
arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of 
the contacts will occur under oil. 

Oil Switch. A switch having contacts that operate under oil (or 
askarel or other suitable liquid). 



Regulator Bypass Switch. A specific device or combination of 
devices designed to bypass a regulator. 



ARTICLE 110 

Requirements for Electrical InstaUatioiis 
I. General 

110.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements for the 
examination and approval, installation and use, access to and 
spaces about electrical conductors and equipment; enclosures 
intended for personnel entry; and tunnel installations. 

110.2 Approval The conductors and equipment required or 
permitted by this Code shall be acceptable only if approved. 

[OSHPD I, 2, 3 & 4] Equipment shall be approvable if it is C 
listed, labeled or certified for its use by a Nationally 
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as recognized by the 
US. department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health 
Administration. 

Informational Note: See 90.7, Examination of 
Equipment for Safety, and 110.3, Examination, 
Identification, Installation, and Use of Equipment. 
See definitions of Approved, Identified, Labeled, and 
Listed. 

110.3 Examination, Identification, Installation, and Use of 
Equipment 

(A) Examination. In judging equipment, considerations such 
as the following shall be evaluated: 

(1) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the 
provisions of this Code 

Informational Note: Suitability of equipment use may be 
identified by a description marked on or provided with a 
product to identify the suitability of the product for a specific 
purpose, environment, or application. Special condidtms lyi 
|j9e or other limitaiions and other pertinent infommiion may 
be marked oh the equipment, included in the product 
instnjctions, or inctuded in tiie appmprialc listing and labeling 
mfbmiation. Suitability of equipment may be evidenced by 
listing or labeling. 

(2) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts 
designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the 
adequacy of the protection thus provided 

(3) Wire-bending and connection space 

(4) Electrical insulation 

(5) Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also 
under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service 

(6) Arcing effects 

(7) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and 
specific use 

(8) Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding 
of persons using or likely to come in contact with the 
equipment 



70-34 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.13 



(B) Installation and Use, Listed or labeled equipment 
shall be installed and used in accordance with any 
instructions included in the listing or labeling. 

110.4 Voltages. Throughout this Code, the voltage 
considered shall be that at which the circuit operates. The 
voltage rating of electrical equipment shall not be less 
than the nominal voltage of a circuit to which it is 
connected. 

110.5 Conductors. Conductors normally used to carry 
current shall be of copper unless otherwise provided in 
this Code. Where the conductor material is not specified, 
the material and the sizes given in this Code shall apply to 
copper conductors. Where other materials are used, the 
size shall be changed accordingly. 

Informational Note; For aluminum and copper-clad 
aluminum conductors, see 310.15. 

110.6 Conductor Sizes. Conductor sizes are expressed in 
American Wire Gage (AWG) or in circular mils. 

110.7 Wiring Integrity. Completed wiring installations 
shall be free from short circuits, ground faults, or any 
connections to ground other than as required or permitted 
elsewhere in this Code. 

110.8 Wiring Methods. Only wiring methods recognized 
as suitable are included in this Code, The recognized 
methods of wiring shall be permitted to be installed in any 
type of building or occupancy, except as otherwise 
provided in this Code. 

110.9 Interrupting Rating. Equipment intended to 
interrupt current at fault levels shall have an interrupting 
rating not less than the nominal circuit voltage and the 
current that is available at the line terminals of the 
equipment. 

Equipment intended to interrupt current at other than 
fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal 
circuit voltage not less than the current that must be 
interrupted. 

110.10 Circuit Impedance, Sliort-Circuit Currend 

Ratings, and Other Characteristics. The overcurrent 
protective devices, the total impedance, the equipment 
short-circuit current ratings, and other characteristics of 
the circuit to be protected shall be selected and 
coordinated to permit the circuit protective devices used 
to clear a fault to do so without extensive damage to the 
electrical equipment of the circuit. This fault shall be 
assumed to be either between two or more of the circuit 
conductors or between any circuit conductor and the 
equipment grounding conductor(s) permitted in 250.118. 
Listed equipment applied in accordance with their listing 
shall be considered to meet the requirements of this 
section. 



110.11 Deteriorating Agents. Unless identified for use in 
the operating environment, no conductors or equipment shall 
be located in damp or wet locations; where exposed to gases, 
fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents that have a 
deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment; or where 
exposed to excessive temperatures. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 300.6 for protection against 

corrosion. 

Informational Note No. 2; Some cleaning and lubricating 

compounds can cause severe deterioration of many plastic 

materials used for insulating and stnictural applications in 

equipment. 

Equipment not identified for outdoor use and equipment 
identified only for indoor use, such as "dry locations," 
"indoor use only," "damp locations," or enclosure Types 1, 
2, 5, 12, 12K, and/or 13, shall be protected against damage 
from the weather during construction. 

Informational Note No. 3: See Table 1 10,28 for 

appropriate enclosure-type designations. 

110.12 Mechanical Execution of Work. Electrical 
equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike 
manner. 

Informational Note: Accepted industry practices are 
described in ANSI/NECA 1-2006, Standard Practices for 
Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting, and other 
ANSI-approved installation standards. 

(A) Unused Openings. Unused openings, other than those 
intended for the operation of equipment, those intended for 
mounting purposes, or those permitted as part of the design 
for listed equipment, shall be closed to afford protection 
substantially equivalent to the wall of the equipment. Where 
metallic plugs or plates are used with nonmetallic enclosures, 
they shall be recessed at least 6 mm (% in.) from the outer 
surface of the enclosure. 

(B) Integrity of Electrical Equipment and Connections. 
Internal parts of electrical equipment, including busbars, 
wiring terminals, insulators, and other surfaces, shall not be 
damaged or contaminated by foreign materials such as paint, 
plaster, cleaners, abrasives, or corrosive residues. There shall 
be no damaged parts that may adversely affect safe operation 
or mechanical strength of the equipment such as parts that 
are broken; bent; cut; or deteriorated by corrosion, chemical 
action, or overheating. 

110.13 Mounting and Cooling of Equipment. 

(A) Mounting. Electrical equipment shall be firmly secured 
to the surface on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs driven 
into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials 
shall not be used. 

Exception: fBSC, SFM, HCDl <& HCD2] Roof mounted C 

ballasted solar photovoltaic systems provided that the A 

wiring and interconnections are designed to ^ 

accommodate for maximum system displacement. C^ 



2013 Calitbmia Electrical Code 



70-35 



110.14 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



(B) Cooling. Electrical equipment that depends on the 
natural circulation of air and convection principles for 
cooling of exposed surfaces shall be installed so that room 
airflow over such surfaces is not prevented by walls or by 
adjacent installed equipment. For equipment designed for 
floor mounting, clearance between top surfaces and adjacent 
surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising warm air. 

(C) fOSHPD h 2,3&4] Hospitals. Electrical equipment 
A and its supporting structure installed in hospital buildings 
C shall be anchored and braced to withstand the lateral 
A forces, and shall accommodate calculated displacements as 
^ required by Part 2, Title 24, C C.R. 

Electrical equipment provided with ventilating openings 
shall be installed so that walls or other obstructions do not 
prevent the free circulation of air through the equipment. 

110.14 Electrical Connections. Because of different 
characteristics of dissimilar metals, devices such as 
pressure terminal or pressure splicing connectors and 
soldering lugs shall be identified for the material of the 
conductor and shall be properly installed and used. 
Conductors of dissimilar metals shall not be intermixed in 
a terminal or splicing connector where physical contact 
occurs between dissimilar conductors (such as copper and 
aluminum, copper and copper-clad aluminum, or 
aluminum and copper-clad aluminum), unless the device 
is identified for the purpose and conditions of use. 
Materials such as solder, fluxes, inhibitors, and 
compounds, where employed, shall be suitable for the use 
and shall be of a type that will not adversely affect the 
conductors, installation, or equipment. 

Connectors and terminals tor conductors more ilnely 
stranded than Class B and Class C stranding as shown in 
Chapter 9, Tabic 10, shall be identified for the specillq 
conductor class or classes. 

Informational Note: Many terminations and equipment 
are marked with a tightening torque. 

(A) Terminals. Connection of conductors to terminal 
parts shall ensure a thoroughly good connection without 
damaging the conductors and shall be made by means of 
pressure connectors (including set-screw type), solder 
lugs, or splices to flexible leads. Connection by means of 
wire-binding screws or studs and nuts that have upturned 
lugs or the equivalent shall be permitted for 10 AWG or 
smaller conductors. 

Terminals for more than one conductor and terminals 
used to connect aluminum shall be so identified. 

(B) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with 
splicing devices identified for the use or by brazing, 
welding, or soldering with a fusible metal or alloy. 
Soldered splices shall first be spliced or joined so as to be 
mechanically and electrically secure without solder and 
then be soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends 
of conductors shall be covered with an insulation 



equivalent to that of the conductors or with an insulating 
device identified for the purpose. 

Wire connectors or splicing means installed on 
conductors for direct burial shall be listed for such use. 

(C) Temperature Limitations. The temperature rating 
associated with the ampacity of a conductor shall be 
selected and coordinated so as not to exceed the lowest 
temperature rating of any connected termination, 
conductor, or device. Conductors with temperature ratings 
higher than specified for terminations shall be permitted 
to be used for ampacity adjustment, correction, or both. 

(1) Equipment Provisions. The determination of 
termination provisions of equipment shall be based on 
1 10.14(C)(1)(a) or (C)(1)(b). Unless the equipment is hsted 
and marked otherwise, conductor ampacities used in 
determining equipment termination provisions shall be 
based on Table 310.15(B)(16) as appropriately modified by 
310.15(B)(6). 

(a) Termination provisions of equipment for circuits 
rated 100 amperes or less, or marked for 14 AWG through 
1 AWG conductors, shall be used only for one of the 
following: 

(1) Conductors rated 60^C (140°F). 

(2) Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided 
the ampacity of such conductors is determined based 
on the 60°C (140^F) ampacity of the conductor size 
used. 

(3) Conductors with higher temperature ratings if the 
equipment is listed and identified for use with such 
conductors. 

(4) For motors marked with design letters B, C, or D, 
conductors having an insulation rating of 75*^C (167°F) 
or higher shall be permitted to be used, provided the 
ampacity of such conductors does not exceed the 75°C 
(167°F) ampacity. 

(b) Termination provisions of equipment for circuits 
rated over 100 amperes, or marked for conductors larger 
than 1 AWG, shall be used only for one of the following: 

(1) Conductors rated 75°C(167°F) 

(2) Conductors with higher temperature ratings, provided 
the ampacity of such conductors does not exceed the 
75 ^C (167°F) ampacity of the conductor size used, or 
up to their ampacity if the equipment is listed and 
identified for use with such conductors 

(2) Separate Connector Provisions. Separately installed 
pressure connectors shall be used with conductors at the 
ampacities not exceeding the ampacity at the Hsted and 
identified temperature rating of the connector. 

Informational Note: With respect to 110.14(C)(1) and 
(C)(2), equipment markings or listing information may 
additionally restrict the sizing and temperature ratings of 
connected conductors. 



70-36 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.26 



110.15 High-Leg Marking. On a 4-wire, delta-connected 
system where the midpoint of one phase winding is 
grounded, only the conductor or busbar having the higher 
phase voltage to ground shall be durably and permanently 
marked by an outer finish that is orange in color or by other 
effective means. Such identification shall be placed at each 
point on the system where a connection is made if the 
grounded conductor is also present. 

110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Electrical equipment, 
such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, 
meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that are 
in other than dwelling units, and are Hkely to require 
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while 
energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of 
potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be 
located so as to be clearly visible to quahfied persons before 
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the 
equipment. 

Infonnational Note No. 1: NFPA 70E-2009, Standard 
for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, provides 
assistance in determining severity of potential exposure, 
planning safe work practices, and selecting personal 
protective equipment. 

Informational Note No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998, Product 
Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design 
of safety signs and labels for application to products. 

110.18 Arcing Parts. Parts of electrical equipment that 
in ordinary operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or 
molten metal shall be enclosed or separated and isolated 
fi"om all combustible material. 

Informational Note: For hazardous (classified) locations, 
see Articles 500 through 517. For motors, see 430.14. 

110.19 Light and Power from Railway Conductors. 

Circuits for lighting and power shall not be connected to 
any system that contains trolley wires with a ground return. 

Exception: Such circuit connections shall be permitted in 
car houses, power houses, or passenger and freight 
stations operated in connection with electric railways. 



110.21 Marking. The manufacturer's name, trademark, or 
other descriptive marking by which the organization 
responsible for the product can be identified shall be placed 
on all electrical equipment. Other markings that indicate 
voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings shall be provided 
as specified elsewhere in this Code, The marking shall be of 
sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. 

110.22 Identification of Disconnecting Means. 

(A) General. Each disconnecting means shall be legibly 
marked to indicate its purpose unless located and arranged 
so the purpose is evident. The marking shall be of sufficient 
durability to withstand the environment involved. 



(B) Engineered Series Combination Systems. 
Equipment enclosures fori circuit breakers or fijses applied 
in compliance with series combination ratings selected 
under engineering supervision in accordance with 
240.86(A) shall be legibly marked in the field us directed 
by the engineer to indicate the equipment has been 
applied with a series combination rating. The marking 
shall be readily visible and state the following: 

CAUTION — ENGINEERED SERIES COMBINATION 

SYSTEM RATED AMPERES. IDENTIFIED 

REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS REQUIRED. 

(C) Tested Series Combination Systems. Equipment 
^enclosures for circuit breakers or tuses applied in 
compliance with the series combination ratings marked on 
the equipment by the manufacturer in accordance with 

240.86(B) shall be legibly marked in the field to indicate 
the equipment has been applied with a series combination 
rating. The marking shall be readily visible and state the 
following: 

CAUTION — SERIES COMBINATION SYSTEM 

RATED AMPERES. IDENTIFIED REPLACEMENT 

COMPONENTS REQUIRED. 

110.23 Current Transformers. 

Unused current transformers associated with potentially 
energized circuits shall be short-circuited. 

1 10.24 Available Fault Current. 

(A) Field Marking. Ser\icc equipment in other than 
dwelling units shall be legibly marked in the field with the 
maximum available fault current. The field markina[(s) 
shall include the dale the fault current calculation was 
performed and be of suJTicient durability to withstand the 
environment involved. 



(B) iMoflifications. Wlien modifications to tlie cleclrical 
installation occur that alTect the maximum available fault 
current at the ser\ice, the maximum available fault current 
shall be verified or recalculated as necessary to ensure the 
senice equipment ratings are sufficient for the maximum 
available fault current at the line icrminals of the equipment. 
The required field marking(s) in \ 10.24(A) shall be adjusted 
to reflect the new level of maximum available fault current. 

Excepiion: lite ftel J marking requiremerUs in !!0.24(A} ivid 
!!(k24(Bj shall not ba required in inJusfrial imiallatiom 
where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
thai only qualifwJ lyei^ons ser\'!ce the equipment. 

II. 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less 

110,26 Spaces About Electrical Equipment. Access and 
working space shall be provided and maintained about all 
electrical equipment to permit ready and safe operation 
and maintenance of such equipment. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-37 



110.26 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



(A) Working Space. Working space for equipment 
operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less to ground and 
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or 
maintenance while energized shall comply with the 
dimensions of 110.26(A)(1), (A)(2), and (A)(3) or as 
required or permitted elsewhere in this Code. 

(1) Depth of Working Space. The depth of the working 
space in the direction of live parts shall not be less than that 
specified in Table 110.26(A)(1) unless the requirements of 
110.26(A)(1)(a), (A)(1)(b), or (A)(1)(c) are met. Distances 
shall be measured from the exposed live parts or from the 
enclosure or opening if the live parts are enclosed. 

Table 110.26(A)(1) Working Spaces 

Minimum Clear Distance 



Nominal 
Voltage to 
Ground Condition 1 



Condition 2 Condition 3 



0-150 914 mm (3 ft) 

151-600 914 mm (3 ft) 



914 mm (3 ft) 914 mm (3 ft) 
1.07m(3ft6in.) 1.22m(4ft) 



Note: Where the conditions are as follows: 

Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space 

and no live or grounded paits on the other side of the working space, 

or exposed live parts on both sides of the working space tliat are 

effectively guarded by insulatmg materials. 

Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working space 

and grounded parts on the other side of the working space. Concrete, 

brick, or tile walls shall be considered as grounded. 

Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working 

space. 

(a) Dead-Front Assemblies, Working space shall not 
be required in the back or sides of assemblies, such as 
dead-front switchboards or motor control centers, where 
all connections and all renewable or adjustable parts, such 
as fuses or switches, are accessible from locations other 
than the back or sides. Where rear access is required to 
work on nonelectrical parts on the back of enclosed 
equipment, a minimum horizontal working space of 762 
mm (30 in.) shall be provided. 

(b) Low Voltage. By special permission, smaller 
working spaces shall be permitted where all exposed live 
parts operate at not greater than 30 volts rms, 42 volts 
peak, or 60 volts dc. 

(c) Existing Buildings. In existing buildings where 
electrical equipment is being replaced, Condition 2 
working clearance shall be permitted between dead-front 
switchboards, panelboards, or motor control centers 
located across the aisle from each other where conditions 
of maintenance and supervision ensure that written 
procedures have been adopted to prohibit equipment on 
both sides of the aisle from being open at the same time 
and qualified persons who are authorized will service the 
installation. 



(2) Width of Working Space. The width of the working 
space in front of the electrical equipment shall be the 
width of the equipment or 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is 
greater. In all cases, the work space shall permit at least a 
90 degree opening of equipment doors or hinged panels. 

(3) Height of Working Space. The work space shall be 
clear and extend from the grade, floor, or platform lo a 
height ot' 2,0 m {^Vi ft) or the heighl of the equipment, 
whichever is greater. Within the height requirements of 
this section, other equipment that is associated with the 
electrical installation and is located above or below the 
electrical equipment shall be permitted to extend not more 
than 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the front of the electrical 
equipment. 

Exception No. I: In existing dwelling units, set-vice 
equipment or panelboards that do not exceed 200 
amperes shall be permitted in spaces where the height of 
the working space is less than 2.0 m (6Vift). 

Exception No. 2: Meters that are Installed in meter 
sockets shall be permitted to extend beyond the other 
equipment. The meter socket shall he required to follow 
the rules of this section. 

(B) Clear Spaces. Working space required by this section 
shall not be used for storage. When normally enclosed 
live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the 
working space, if in a passageway or general open space, 
shall be suitably guarded. 

(C) Entrance to and Egress from Working Space. 

(1) Minimum Required. At least one entrance of 
sufficient area shall be provided to give access to and 
egress from working space about electrical equipment. 

(2) Large Equipment. For equipment rated 1200 
amperes or more and over 1.8 m (6 ft) wide that contains 
overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control 
devices, there shall be one entrance to and egress from the 
required working space not less than 610 mm (24 in.) 
wide and 2.0 m (6/2 ft) high at each end of the working 
space. 

A single entrance to and egress from the required working 
space shall be permitted where either of the conditions in 
1 10.26(C)(2)(a) or (C)(2)(b) is met. 

(a) Unobstructed Egress. Where the location 
permits a continuous and unobstructed way of egress 
travel, a single entrance to the working space shall be 
permitted. 

(b) Extra Working Space. Where the depth of the 
working space is twice that required by 110.26(A)(1), a 
single entrance shall be permitted. It shall be located such 
that the distance from the equipment to the nearest edge 
of the entrance is not less than the minimum clear 
distance specified in Table 110.26(A)(1) for equipment 
operating at that voltage and in that condition. 



70-38 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.28 



(3) Personnel Doors. Where equipment rated 1200 A or 
more that contains overcurrent devices, switching devices, or 
control devices is installed and there is a personnel door(s) 
intended for entrance to and egress from the working space 
less than 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest edge of the working 
space, the door(s) shall open in the direction of egress and be 
equipped with panic bars, pressure plates, or other devices 
that are normally latched but open under simple pressure. 

(D) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all 
working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, 
panelboards, or motor control centers installed indoors and 
jshall not be control Jed by automatic means only. Additional 
lighting outlets shall not be required where the work space is 
illuminated by an adjacent light source or as permitted by 
210.70(A)(1), Exception No. 1, for switched receptacles. 



^) Dedicated Equipment Space. All switchboards, 
panelboards, and motor control centers shall be located in 
dedicated spaces and protected from damage. 

Exception: Control equipment that by its very nature or 
because of other rules of the Code must be adjacent to or 
within sight of its operating machinery shall be permitted in 
those locations. 

(1) Indoor. Indoor installations shall comply with 
1 10.26(E)( I Xa) through (E)(1)(d). 

(a) Dedicated Electrical Space. The space equal to the 
width and depth of the equipment and extending from the 
floor to a height of 1 .8 m (6 ft) above the equipment or to the 
structural ceiling, whichever is lower, shall be dedicated to 
the electrical installation. No piping, ducts, leak protection 
apparatus, or other equipment foreign to the electrical 
installation shall be located in this zone. 

Exception: Suspended ceilings with removable panels shall 
be permitted within the 1.8-m (6-ft) zone. 

(b) Foreign Systems. The area above the dedicated 
space required by 110.26(E)(1)(a) shall be permitted to 
contain foreign systems, provided protection is installed to 
avoid damage to the electrical equipment from condensation, 
leaks, or breaks in such foreign systems. 

(c) Sprinkler Protection. Sprinkler protection shall be 
permitted for the dedicated space where the piping complies 
with this section. 

(d) Suspended Ceilings. A dropped, suspended, or 
similar ceiling that does not add strength to the building 
structure shall not be considered a structural ceiling. 

(2) Outdoor. Outdoor electrical equipment shall be installed 
in suitable enclosures and shall be protected from accidental 
contact by unauthorized personnel, or by vehicular traffic, or 
by accidental spillage or leakage from piping systems. The 



working clearance space shall include the zone described in 
1 10.26(A). No architectural appurtenance or other equipment 
shall be located in this zone. 



(F) Locked Electrical Equipment Rooms or Enclosures. 

Electrical equipment rooms or enclosures housing electrical 
apparatus that are controlled by a lock(s) shall be considered 
accessible to quahfied persons. 

110.27 Guarding of Live Parts. 

(A) Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact 

Except as elsewhere required or permitted by this Code, live 
parts of electrical equipment operating at 50 volts or more 
shall be guarded against accidental contact by approved 
enclosures or by any of the following means: 

(1) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is 
accessible only to qualified persons. 

(2) By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens 
arranged so that only qualified persons have access to 
the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in 
such partitions or screens shall be sized and located so 
that persons are not likely to come into accidental 
contact with the live parts or to bring conducting objects 
into contact with them. 

(3) By location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform 
elevated and arranged so as to exclude unqualified 
persons. 

(4) By elevation of 2.5 m (8 ft) or more above the floor or 
other working surface. 

(B) Prevent Physical Damage. In locations where electrical 
equipment is likely to be exposed to physical damage, 
enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such 
strength as to prevent such damage. 

(C) Warning Signs. Entrances to rooms and other guarded 
locations that contain exposed live parts shall be marked with 
conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to 
enter. 

Informational Note: For motors, see 430.232 and 430.233. 
For over 600 volts, see 1 10.34. 

110.28 Enclosure Types. Enclosures (other than 
surrounding fences or walls) of switchboards, panelboards, 
industrial control panels, motor control centers, meter 
sockets, enclosed switches, tnansfer switches, power outlets, 
circuit breakers, adjustaWe-speed drive s>*slems. pulloul 
switches, portable power distribution equipment, termination 
boxes, general -purpose transfonners, fire pump controllers, 
fire [jump motors, and motor controllers, rated not over 600 
volts nominal and intended for such locations, shall be 
marked with an enclosure-type number as shown in Table 
110.28] 

Table 1 10,28 shall be used for selecting these enclosures 
for use in specific locations other than hazardous (classified) 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-39 



110.30 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



locations. The enclosures are not intended to protect against 
conditions such as condensation, icing, corrosion, or 
contamination that may occur within the enclosure or enter 
via the conduit or unsealed openings 

III. Over 600 Volts, Nomina! 

110.30 General. 

Conductors and equipment used on circuits over 600 
volts, nominal, shall comply with Part I of this article and 
with 1 10.30 through 1 10.40, which supplement or modify 
Part L In no case shall the provisions of this part apply to 
equipment on the supply side of the service point. 

110.31 Enclosure for Electrical Installations. 

Electrical installations in a vault, room, or closet or in an 
area surrounded by a wall, screen, or fence, access to 
which is controlled by a lock(s) or other approved means, 
shall be considered to be accessible to qualified persons 
only. The type of enclosure used in a given case shall be 
designed and constructed according to the nature and 
degree of the hazard(s) associated with the installation. 

For installations other than equipment as described in 
110.31(D), a wall, screen, or fence shall be used to 
enclose an outdoor electrical installation to deter access 
by persons who are not qualified. A fence shall not be less 
than 2.1 m (7 ft) in height or a combination of 1 .8 m (6 ft) 
or more of fence fabric and a 300-mm (1-ft) or more 
extension utilizing three or more strands of barbed wire or 
equivalent. The distance from the fence to live parts shall 
be not less than given in Table 1 10.31. 

Table 110.31 Minimum Distance from Fence to Live Parts 

Minimum Distance to Live Parts 

Nominal Voltage m ft 



601 - 13,799 


3.05 


10 


13,800-230,000 


4.57 


15 


Over 230,000 


5.49 


18 



Note: For clearances of conductors for specific system 
voltages and typical BIL ratings, see ANSI C2-2007, National 
Electrical Safety Code. 

Informational Note: See Article 450 for 
construction requirements for transformer vaults. 

(A) Electrical Vaults. Where an electrical vault is 
required or specified for conductors and equipment 
operating at over 600 volts, nominal, the following shall 
apply. 

(I) Walls and Roof. The walls and roof shall be 

constructed of materials that have adequate structural 
strength for the conditions, with a minimum fire rating of 
3 hours. For the parpose of this section, studs and 



wallboard construction shall not be permitted, 

(2) Floors, The floors of vaults in contact with the earth 
shall be of concrete that is not less than 102 mm (4 in.) 
thick, but where the vault is constructed with a vacant 
space or other stories below it, the floor shall have 
adequate structural strength for the load imposed on it and 
a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours. 

(3) Doors. Each doonvay leading into a vault from the 
building interior shall be provided with a tight -fitting door 
that has a minimum fire rating of 3 hours. The authority 
having jurisdiction shall be permitted to require such a 
door for an exterior wall opening^ where conditions 
warrant, 

Exceprion to (I), (2), cmd (3): H^ere (he vau/t is 
protected with automatic sprinkler, water spray, carbon 
dioxide, or hahn, Cfmstriiction with a I -hour rating shall 
he permitted. 

(4) Locks. Doors shall be equipped with locks, and doors 
shall be kept locked, with access allowed only to qualified 
persons. Personnel doors shall swing out and be equipped 
with panic bars, pressure plates, or other devices that are 
normally latched but that open under simple pressure. 

(5) Transformers. Where a transformer is installed in a 
vault as required by Article 450, the vault shall be 
conslmcted in accordance with the requirements of Part 
III of Article 450. 

Informational Note No. 1: For additional infomiation, 
see ANSIMSTM El 19-1995. Method for Fire Tests of 
Building Constnulion and Mah^iah, NFPA 251-2006, 
Standard Method'^ of TeU^ of Fire Resistance of 
Buihiing Cons/ntctian and Materials^ and NFPA 80- 
2010, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opemng 
Protective^. 



Informational Note No. 2: A typical 3 -hour construction 
'S 1 50 mm (6 in,) thick rc 

(B) Indoor Installations. 

(1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons, Indoor 
electrical installations that are accessible to unqualified 
persons shall be made with metal-enclosed equipment. 
Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, 
pull boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated 
equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution signs. 
Openings in ventilated dry-type transformers or similar 
openings in other equipment shall be designed so that 
foreign objects inserted through these openings are 
deflected from energized parts. 

(2) In Places Accessible to Qualified Persons Only. 

Indoor electrical installations considered accessible only 
to qualified persons in accordance with this section shall 
comply with 110.34, 1 10.36, and 490.24. 



70-40 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.31 



Table 110,28 Enclosure Selection 



Provides a Degree of 

Protection Against the 

Following Environmental 

Conditions 



For Outdoor Use 



Enclosure-Type Number 



3R 



3S 



3X 



3RX 



3SX 



4X 



X 



X 



X 



X 



X 



X 



Incidental contact with the 
enclosed equipment 

Falling dirt 

Falling liquids and light 
splashing 

Circulating dust, lint, fibers, and 
flyings 

Settling airborne dust, lint, 
fibers, and flyings 

Hosedown and splashing water 

Oil and coolant seepage 

Oil or coolant spraying and 
splashing 

Corrosive agents 

Temporary submersion 

Prolonged submersion 



X 



X 



X 
X 
X 



X 



X 



6P 



Incidental contact with the 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


enclosed equipment 






















Rain, snow, and sleet 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Sleef^ 


— 


— 


X 


— 


— 


X 


— 


— 


— 


— 


Windblown dust 


X 


— 


X 


X 


— 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Hosedown 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Corrosive agents 


— 


— 


— 


X 


X 


X 


— 


X 


— 


X 


Temporary submersion 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


X 


X 


Prolonged submersion 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


X 


Provides a Degree of 
Protection Against the 










For Indoor Use 










Following Environmental 
Conditions 








Enciosure-Typ( 


s Number 












1 


2 


4 


4X 


5 


6 


6P 


12 


12K 


13 



X 



X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


— 


X 


X 


— 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


— 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 




X 


X 









X 
X 



'^Mechanism shall be operable when ice covered. 

Informational Note No, I : The term raintight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 4, 4X, 6, and 6P. The 
tenn rainproof \^ typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3R, and 3RX. The terni watertight is typically used in conjunction 
with Enclosure Types 4, 4X, 6, 6P. The term driptight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 2, 5, 12, 12K, and 13. The 
term dusttight is typically used in conjunction with Enclosure Types 3, 3S, 3SX, 3X, 5, 12, 12K, and 13. 

Infbnnaiional Note No- 2: Ingress protection (IP) ratings inay be found in ANSl/NEMA 60529. Df^n^i of Fmtection ProvidtU by 
Ench^iures. IP ratings are not a subsiiiute for Enclosure Type ratings. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-41 



110.32 



ARTICLE 11 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



(C) Outdoor Installations. 

(1) In Places Accessible to Unqualified Persons. 
Outdoor electrical installations that are open to 
unqualified persons shall comply with Parts I, II, and III 

of Article 225. 

(2) In Places Accessible to Qualified Persons Only, 
Outdoor electrical installations that have exposed live 
parts shall be accessible to qualified persons only in 
accordance with the first paragraph of this section and 
shall comply with 1 10.34, 1 10.36, and 490.24. 

(D) Enclosed Equipment Accessible to Unqualified 
Persons. Ventilating or similar openings in equipment 
shall be designed such that foreign objects inserted 
through these openings are deflected from energized 
parts. Where exposed to physical damage from vehicular 
traffic, suitable guards shall be provided. Nonmetallic or 
metal-enclosed equipment located outdoors and 
accessible to the general public shall be designed such 
that exposed nuts or bolts cannot be readily removed, 
permitting access to live parts. Where nonmetallic or 
metal-enclosed equipment is accessible to the general 
public and the bottom of the enclosure is less than 2.5 m 
(8 ft) above the floor or grade level, the enclosure door or 
hinged cover shall be kept locked. Doors and covers of 
enclosures used solely as pull boxes, splice boxes, or 
junction boxes shall be locked, bolted, or screwed on. 
Underground box covers that weigh over 45.4 kg (100 lb) 
shall be considered as meeting this requirement. 

110.32 Work Space About Equipment 

Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained about 
electrical equipment to permit ready and safe operation 
and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized 
parts are exposed, the minimum clear work space shall be 
not less than 2.0 m (6!/2 ft) high (measured vertically from 
the floor or platform) or not less than 914 mm (3 ft) wide 
(measured parallel to the equipment). The depth shall be 
as required in 110.34(A). In all cases, the work space 
shall permit at least a 90 degree opening of doors or 
hinged panels. 

11033 Entrance to Enclosures and Access to Working 
Space. 

(A) Entrance. At least one entrance to enclosures for 
electrical installations as described in 110.31 not less than 
610 mm (24 in.) wide and 2.0 m (GVi ft) high shall be 
provided to give access to the working space about 
electrical equipment. 

(1) Large Equipment. On switchboard and control panels 
exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) in width, there shall be one entrance 
at each end of the equipment. A single entrance to the 
required working space shall be permitted where either of 
the conditions in 1 10.33(A)(1)(a) or (A)(1)(b) is met. 



(a) Unobstructed Exit. Where the location permits 
a continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel, a single 
entrance to the working space shall be permitted. 

(b) Extra Working Space, Where the depth of the 
working space is twice that required by 110.34(A), a 
single entrance shall be permitted. It shall be located so 
that the distance from the equipment to the nearest edge 
of the entrance is not less than the minimum clear 
distance specified in Table 110.34(A) for equipment 
operating at that voltage and in that condition. 

(2) Guarding. Where bare energized parts at any voltage 
or insulated energized parts above 600 volts, nominal, to 
ground are located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be 
suitably guarded. 

(3) Personnel Doors. Where there is a personnel door(s) 
intended for entrance to and egress fi"om the working 
space less than 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest edge of the 
working space, the door(s) shall open in the direction of 
egress and be equipped with panic bars, pressure plates, 
or other devices that are normally latched but open under 
simple pressure. 

(B) Access. Permanent ladders or stairways shall be 
provided to give safe access to the working space around 
electrical equipment installed on platforms, balconies, or 
mezzanine floors or in attic or roof rooms or spaces. 

110.34 Work Space and Guarding. 

(A) Working Space. Except as elsewhere required or 
permitted in this Code, equipment likely to require 
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while 
energized shall have clear working space in the direction of 
access to live parts of the electrical equipment and shall be 
not less than specified in Table 110.34(A). Distances shall 
be measured fi-om the live parts, if such are exposed, or 
from the enclosure front or opening if such are enclosed. 

Exception: Working space shall not be required in back 
of equipment such as dead-front switchboards or control 
assemblies where there are no renewable or adjustable 
parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where 
all connections are accessible from locations other than 
the hack. Where rear access is required to work on 
nonelectrical parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a 
minimum working space of 762 mm (30 in.) horizontally 
shall be provided. 

(B) Separation from Low- Voltage Equipment. Where 
switches, cutouts, or other equipment operating at 600 
volts, nominal, or less are installed in a vault, room, or 
enclosure where there are exposed live parts or exposed 
wiring operating at over 600 volts, nominal, the high- 
voltage equipment shall be effectively separated from the 
space occupied by the low-voltage equipment by a 
suitable partition, fence, or screen. 



70-42 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.51 



Table 110.34(A) Minimuni Depth of Clear Working Space 
at Electrical Equipment 

Minimum Clear Distance 



Nominal 

Voltage to 

Ground 



Condition 1 



Condition 2 Condition 3 



601-2500 V 
2501-9000 V 
9001-25,000 V 
25,001 V-75 kV 
Above 75 kV 



900 mm (3 ft) 
1.2 m (4 ft) 
1.5 m (5 ft) 
1.8 m (6 ft) 
2.5 m (8 ft) 



1.2 m (4 ft) 
1.5 m (5 ft) 
1.8m(6ft) 
2.5 m (8 ft) 
3.0 m (10 ft) 



1.5 m (5 ft) 
1.8 m (6 ft) 
2.8 m (9 ft) 
3.0 m (10 ft) 
3.7 m (12 ft) 



Note: Where the conditions are as follows; 

Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working 

space and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the 

working space, or exposed live parts on both sides of the 

working space that are effectively guarded by insulating 

materials. 

Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side of the working 

space and grounded parts on the other side of the working space. 

Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be considered as grounded. 

Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working 

space. 

Exception: Switches or other equipment operating at 600 
volts, nominal, or less and serving only equipment within 
the high-voltage vault, room, or enclosure shall be 
permitted to be installed in the high-voltage vault, room, 
or enclosure without a partition, fence, or screen if 
accessible to qualified persons only. 

(C) Locked Rooms or Enclosures. The entrance to all 
buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing 
exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at 
over 600 volts, nominal, shall be kept locked unless such 
entrances are under the observation of a qualified person 
at all times. 

Where the voltage exceeds 600 vohs, nominal, 
permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be 
provided, reading as follows: 

DANGER — HIGH VOLTAG E — KEEP OUT 

(D) Illumination, Illumination shall be provided for all 
working spaces about electrical equipment. The lighting 
outlets shall be arranged so that persons changing lamps 
or making repairs on the lighting system are not 
endangered by live parts or other equipment. 

The points of control shall be located so that persons 
are not likely to come in contact with any live part or 
moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights. 

(E) Elevation of Unguarded Live Parts. Unguarded live 
parts above working space shall be maintained at 
elevations not less than required by Table 1 10.34(E). 



Table 110.34(E) Elevation of Ungi 

Working Space 


sarded Live Parts Above 


Elevation 


Nominal Voltage 
Between Phases m 




ft 



601-7500 V 

7501-35,000 V 

Over 35 kV 



2.8 

2.9 

2.9 m + 9.5 
mm/kV above 35 



9 

9 ft 6 in. 

9ft6in. +0.37 
in./kV above 35 



(F) Protection of Service Equipment, Metal-Eeclosed 
Power Switchgear, and Industrial Control Assemblies. 
Pipes or ducts foreign to the electrical installation and 
requiring periodic maintenance or whose malfunction 
would endanger the operation of the electrical system 
shall not be located in the vicinity of the service 
equipment, metal-enclosed power switchgear, or 
industrial control assemblies. Protection shall be provided 
where necessary to avoid damage from condensation 
leaks and breaks in such foreign systems. Piping and other 
facilities shall not be considered foreign if provided for 
fire protection of the electrical installation. 
110.36 Circuit Conductors. Circuit conductors shall be 
pemiitted to be installed in raceways; in cable trays; as 
metal-clad cable, as bare wire, cable, and busbars; or as 
Type MV cables or conductors as provided in 300.37, 
300.39, 300.40, and 300.50. Bare live conductors shall 
comply with 490.24. 

Insulators, together with their mounting and 
conductor attachments, where used as supports for wires, 
single-conductor cables, or busbars, shall be capable of 
safely withstanding the maximum magnetic forces that 
would prevail if two or more conductors of a circuit were 
subjected to short-circuit current. 

Exposed runs of insulated wires and cables that have 
a bare lead sheath or a braided outer covering shall be 
supported in a manner designed to prevent physical 
damage to the braid or sheath. Supports for lead-covered 
cables shall be designed to prevent electrolysis of the 
sheath. 

110.40 Temperature Limitations at Terminations. 
Conductors shall be permitted to be terminated based on 
the 90°C (194''F) temperature rating and ampacity as 
given in Table 310.60(C)(67) through Table 
310.60(C)(86), unless otherwise identified. 

IV. Tunnel Installations over 600 Volts, Nominal 

110.51 General. 

(A) Covered. The provisions of this part shall apply to 
the installation and use of high- voltage power distribution 
and utilization equipment that is portable, mobile, or both, 
such as substations, trailers, cars, mobile shovels, 
draglines, hoists, drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, 
conveyors, underground excavators, and the like. 



2013 Caiitbrnia Electrical Code 



70-43 



110,52 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



(B) Other Articles, The requirements of this part shall be 
additional to, or amendatory of, those prescribed in 
Articles 100 through 490 of this Code. 

(C) Protection Against Physical Damage. Conductors 
and cables in tunnels shall be located above the tunnel 
floor and so placed or guarded to protect them from 
physical damage. 

110.52 Overcurrent Protection, Motor-operated 
equipment shall be protected from overcurrent in 
accordance with Parts III, IV, and V of Article 430. 
Transformers shall be protected from overcurrent in 
accordance with 450.3. 

110.53 Conductors, High-voltage conductors in tunnels 
shall be installed in metal conduit or other metal racev^ay, 
Type MC cable, or other approved mult i conductor cable. 
Multiconductor portable cable shall be permitted to 
supply mobile equipment. 

110.54 Bonding and Equipment Grounding 
Conductors. 

(A) Grounded and Bonded. All non-current-carrying 
metal parts of electrical equipment and all metal raceways 
and cable sheaths shall be solidly grounded and bonded to 
all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at intervals not 
exceeding 300 m (1000 ft) throughout the tunnel. 

(B) Equipment Grounding Conductors, An equipment 
grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors 
inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor 
cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor shall be 
permitted to be insulated or bare. 

110.55 Transformers, Switches, and Electrical 
Equipment. All transformers, switches, motor 
controllers, motors, rectifiers, and other equipment 
installed belowground shall be protected from physical 
damage by location or guarding, 

110.56 Energized Parts, Bare terminals of transformers, 
switches, motor controllers, and other equipment shall be 
enclosed to prevent accidental contact with energized 
parts. 

110.57 Ventilation System Controls, Electrical controls 
for the ventilation system shall be arranged so that the 
airflow can be reversed. 

110.58 Disconnecting Means, A switch or circuit breaker 
that simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors of 
the circuit shall be installed within sight of each 
transformer or motor location for disconnecting the 
transformer or motor. The switch or circuit breaker for a 
transformer shall have an ampere rating not less than the 
ampacity of the transformer supply conductors. The 
switch or circuit breaker for a motor shall comply with the 
applicable requirements of Article 430. 



110.59 Enclosures. Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be 
dripproof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by 
the environmental conditions. Switch or contactor 
enclosures shall not be used as junction boxes or as 
raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to 
other switches, unless the enclosures comply with 312.8. 

V. Manholes and Other Electrical Enclosures 
Intended for Personnel Entry, All Voltages 

110.70 General. Electrical enclosures intended for 
personnel entry and specifically fabricated for this 
purpose shall be of sufficient size to provide safe work 
space about electrical equipment with live parts that is 
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or 
maintenance while energized. Such enclosures shall have 
sufficient size to permit ready installation or withdrawal 
of the conductors employed without damage to the 
conductors or to their insulation. They shall comply with 
the provisions of this part. 

Exception: Where electrical enclosures covered by Part 
V of this article are part of an industrial wiring system 
operating under conditions of maintenance and 
supervision that ensure that only qualified persons 
monitor and supei^ise the system, they shall be permitted 
to be designed and installed in accordance with 
appropriate engineering practice. If required by the 
authority having jurisdiction, design documentation shall 
be provided, 

110.71 Strength. Manholes, vaults, and their means of 
access shall be designed under qualified engineering 
supervision and shall withstand all loads likely to be 
imposed on the structures. 

Informational Note: See ANSI C2-2007, National 
Electrical Safety Code, for additional information on the 
loading that can be expected to bear on underground 
enclosures. 

110.72 Cabling Work Space. A clear work space not less 
than 900 mm (3 ft) wide shall be provided where cables 
are located on both sides, and not less than 750 mm {IVi 
ft) where cables are only on one side. The vertical 
headroom shall be not less than 1.8 m (6 ft) unless the 
opening is within 300 mm (1 ft), measured horizontally, 
of the adjacent interior side wall of the enclosure. 

Exception: A manhole containing only one or more of the 
following shall be permitted to have one of the horizontal 
work space dimensions reduced to 600 mm (2 ft) where 
the other horizontal clear work space is increased so the 
sum of the two dimensions is not less than 1.8 m (6 ft): 

(!) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 770 



70-44 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 1 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 



110.79 



(2) Power-limited fire alarm 
accordance with 760.121 



circuits supplied in 



(S) 



Class 2 
circuits, 
725 J 21 



or Class 3 remote-control and signaling 
or both, supplied in accordance with 



110.73 Equipment Work Space. Where electrical 
equipment with live parts that is likely to require 
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while 
energized is installed in a manhole, vault, or other 
enclosure designed for personnel access, the work space 
and associated requirements in 110.26 shall be met for 
installations operating at 600 volts or less. Where the 
installation is over 600 volts, the work space and 
associated requirements in 110.34 shall be met. A 
manhole access cover that weighs over 45 kg (100 lb) 
shall be considered as meeting the requirements of 
110,34(C). 



110.74 Conductor Installation. Conductors installed in 
manholes and other enclosures i mended for personirel 
entry shall be cabled, racked up, or arranged in aii 
approved manner that provides ready and sate access for 
persons to enter for installation and maintenance. Tli^ 
installation shall comply with 1 ia74(A) or 1 10,74(B), ad 
applicable. 



(A) 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Wire bending space for 
conductors operating at 600 vol is or less shall be provided 
in accordance with the requirements of 314.28. 



(B) Over 600 Volts, Nominal* Conductors operating aij 
over 600 volts shall be provided with bending space ii^ 
accordance with 3 14.71(A) and (B), as applicable. 

Exception: Where 314. 71(B) applies, each row or column 
of ducts on one wall of the enclosure shall he calculated 
individually, and the single row or column that provides 
the maximum distance shall be used. 

110.75 Access to Manholes. 

(A) Dimensions. Rectangular access openings shall not 
be less than 650 mm x 550 mm (26 in. x 22 in.). Round 
access openings in a manhole shall be not less than 650 
mm (26 in.) in diameter. 

Exception: A manhole that has a fixed ladder that does 
not obstruct the opening or that contains only one or 
more of the following shall be permitted to reduce the 
minimum cover diameter to 600 mm (2 ft): 

(1) Optical fiber cables as covered in Article 770 

(2) Power-limited fire alarm circuits supplied in 
accordance with 760A21 



(3) Class 2 or Class 
circuits, or both, 
725.121 



3 remote-control and signaling 
supplied in accordance with 



(B) Obstructions. Manhole openings shall be free of 
protrusions that could injure personnel or prevent ready 
egress. 

(C) Location. Manhole openings for personnel shall be 
located where they are not directly above electrical 
equipment or conductors in the enclosure. Where this is 
not practicable, either a protective barrier or a fixed ladder 
shall be provided. 

(D) Covers. Covers shall be over 45 kg (100 lb) or 
otherwise designed to require the use of tools to open. 
They shall be designed or restrained so they cannot fall 
into the manhole or protrude sufficiently to contact 
electrical conductors or equipment within the manhole. 

(E) Marking. Manhole covers shall have an identifying 
mark or logo that prominently indicates their function, 
such as "electric." 

110.76 Access to Vaults and Tunnels. 

(A) Location. Access openings for personnel shall be 
located where they are not directly above electrical 
equipment or conductors in the enclosure. Other openings 
shall be permitted over equipment to facilitate installation, 
maintenance, or replacement of equipment. 

(B) Locks. In addition to compliance with the 
requirements of 110.34, if applicable, access openings for 
personnel shall be arranged such that a person on the 
inside can exit when the access door is locked from the 
outside, or in the case of normally locking by padlock, the 
locking arrangement shall be such that the padlock can be 
closed on the locking system to prevent locking from the 
outside. 

110.77 Ventilation. Where manholes, tunnels, and vaults 
have communicating openings into enclosed areas used 
by the public, ventilation to open air shall be provided 
w^herever practicable. 

110.78 Guarding. Where conductors or equipment, or 
both, could be contacted by objects falling or being 
pushed through a ventilating grating, both conductors and 
live parts shall be protected in accordance with the 
requirements of 110.27(A)(2) or 110.31(B)(1), depending 
on the voltage. 

110.79 Fixed Ladders. Fixed ladders shall be corrosion 
resistant. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-45 



CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



'^^-'^^'^ 2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 200 - USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 
























X 


Article / Section 


210.50(D), (E) 
























X 



ARTICLE 215 -FEEDERS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFI\« 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are listed 
below 


























Article / Section 



ARTICLE 220" 


BRAN( 


:h-cir 


CUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCI 


JUTK 


DNS 








Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 
















X 










Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 


Table 220.42 
















X 











2013 California Electrical Code 



70-45.2 



CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 










ARTICLE 225 -OUTS 


DE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 




X 






















Article / Section 


225.19(E) 




X 






















ARTICLE 230 


» SERVICES 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFftfl 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 240 -OVERC 


URRENT PROTECTION 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-45.3 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 2 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 280 - SURGE ARRESTERS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 285 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS: TYPE TVSSs 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-45.4 



CHAPTER 2 



ARTICLE 200 - USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNED CONDUCTORS 



Chapter 2 Wiring and Protection 



ARTICLE 200 

Use and Identification of Grounded 
M Conductors 

200.1 Scope. 

This article provides requirements for the following: 

(1) Identification of terminals 

(2) Grounded conductors in premises wiring systems 

(3) Identification of grounded conductors 

Informational Note: See Article 100 for definitions of 
Grounded Conductor, EquipmcfU Groundbig 
Omdttctor, and Grounding Electrode Conductor. 

200.2 General, Grounded conductors shall comply with 
200.2(A) and (B). 

(A) Insulation. The grounded conductor, where insulated, 
shall have insulation that is (1) suitable, other than color, 
for any ungrounded conductor of the same circuit on 
circuits of less than 1000 volts or impedance grounded 
neutral systems of 1 kV and over, or (2) rated not less 
than 600 volts for solidly grounded neutral systems of 1 
kV and over as described in 250.184(A). 

(B) Continuity, The continuity of a grounded conductor 
shall not depend on a connection to a metallic enclosure, 
raceway, or cable armor. 

Informational Note: Six 300. n(B) for ihe contimiity of 
groimded conductors used in multiwirc branch circuits. 

200.3 Connection to Grounded System. Premises 
wiring shall not be electrically connected to a supply 
system unless the latter contains, for any grounded 
conductor of the interior system, a corresponding 
conductor that is grounded. For the purpose of this 
section, electrically connected shall mean connected so as 
to be capable of canying current, as distinguished from 
connection through electromagnetic induction. 

Exception: Listed utility-interactive inverters identified 
for use in distributed resource generation systems such as 
photovoltaic and fuel cell power systems shall be 
permitted to be connected to premises wiring without a 
grounded conductor where the connected premises wiring 
or utility system includes a grounded conductor. 



200.4 Neutrai Conawctors. Neuirai conductors shafi not 
be used for more than one branch circuit, for more than 
one mult i wire branch circuit, or for more than one set of 
ungrounded feeder conductors unless specifically 
permitted elsewhere in this Code. 



200.6 Means of Identifying Grounded Conductors. 

(A) Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. An insulated grounded 
conductor of 6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by one 
of the following means: 

(1) A continuous white outer finish. 

(2) K continuous gray outer finish. 

(3) Three continuous white stripes along the conductor's 
entire length on other than green insulation, 

(4) Wires that have their outer covering finished to show 
a white or gray color but have colored tracer threads 
in the braid identifying the source of manufacture 
shall be considered as meeting the provisions of this 
section. 

(5) The grounded conductor of a mineral-insulated, 
metal-sheathed cable shall be identified at the time of 
installation by distinctive marking at its terminations. 

(6) A single-conductor, sunlight-resistant, outdoor-rated 
cable used as a grounded conductor in photovoUaic 
power systems, as permitted by 690.31, shall be 
identified at the time of installation by distinctive 
white marking at all terminations. 

(7) Fixture wire shall comply with the requirements for 
grounded conductor identification as specified in 
402.8. 

(8) For aerial cable, the identification shall be as above, 
or by means of a ridge located on the exterior of the 
cable so as to identify it. 

(B) jSizes 4 AWG or Larger. An insulated grounded 
conductor 4 AWG or larger shall be identified by one of 
the following means: 

(1) A continuous white outer finish. 

(2) A continuous gray outer finish 

(3) Three continuous white stripes along its entire length 
on other than green insulation. 

(4) At the time of installation, by a distinctive white or 
gray marking at its terminations. This marking shall 
encircle the conductor or insulation. 

(C) Flexible Cords. An insulated conductor that is 
intended for use as a grounded conductor, where 
contained within a flexible cord, shall be identified by a 
white or gray outer finish or by methods permitted by 
400.22. 

(D) Grounded Conductors of Different Systems. Where 
grounded conductors of different systems are installed in 
the same raceway, cable, box, auxiliary gutter, or other 
type of enclosure, each grounded conductor shall be 
identified by system, Identification that distinguishes each 
system grounded conductor shall be permitted by one of 
the following means: 



70-46 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 200 - USE AND IDENTIFICATION OF GROUNDED CONDUCTORS 



100.10 



(1) One system grounded conductor shall have an outer 
covering conforming to 200.6(A) or (B). 

(2) The grounded conductor(s) of other systems shall 
have a different outer covering conforming to 
200.6(A) or 200.6(B) or by an outer covering of 
white or gray with a readily distinguishable colored 
stripe other than green running along the insulation. 

(3) Other and different means of identification as 
allowed by 200.6(A) or (B) that will distinguish each 
system grounded conductor. 

The means of identification shall be documented in a 
manner that is readily available or shall be pemianently 
posted where the conductors of different systems 
originate. 

(E) Grounded Conductors of Multiconduetor Cables. 

The insulated grounded conductors in a multiconduetor 
cable shall be identified by a continuous white or gray 
outer finish or by three continuous white stripes on other 
than green insulation along its entire length. 
Multiconduetor flat cable 4 AWG or larger shall be 
permitted to employ an external ridge on the grounded 
conductor. 

Exception No. I: Where the conditions of maintenance 
and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service 
the installation, grounded conductors in multiconduetor 
cables shall be permitted to be permanently identified at 
their terminations at the time of installation by a 
distinctive white marking or other equally effective 
means. 

Exception No. 2: The grounded conductor of a 
multiconduetor varnished-cloth-insulated cable shall be 
permitted to be identified at its terminations at the time of 
installation by a distinctive white marking or other 
equally effective means. 

Informational Note: The color gray may have been used 
in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be 
taken when working on existing systems. 

200.7 Use of Insulation of a White or Gray Color or 
with Three Continuous White Stripes. 

(A) General. The following shall be used only for the 
grounded circuit conductor, unless otherwise permitted in 
200.7(B) and (C): 

(1) A conductor with continuous white or gray covering 

(2) A conductor with three continuous white stripes on 
other than green insulation 

(3) A marking of white or gray color at the termination 

(B) Circuits of Less Than 50 Volts. A conductor with 
white or gray color insulation or three continuous white 
stripes or having a marking of white or gray at the 
termination for circuits of less than 50 volts shall be 
required to be grounded only as required by 250.20(A). 



(C) Circuits of 50 Volts or More. The use of insulation 
that is white or gray or that has three continuous white 
stripes for other than a grounded conductor for circuits of 
50 vohs or more shall be permitted only as in (1) and (2|. 

(1) If part of a cable assembly that has the insulation 
permanently reidentified to indicate its use as an 
ungrounded conductor by marking tape, painting, or 
other effective means at its termination and at each 
location where the conductor is visible and 
accessible. Identification shall encircle the insulation 
and shall be a color other than white, gray, or green. 
If used for singie-poie. 3-way or 4-way switch loops, 
the reidentified conductor with white or gray 
insulation or three continuous white stripes shall be 
used only for the supply to the switch, but not as a 
return conductor from the switch to the outlet, 

(2) A flexible cord, having one conductor identified by a 
white or gray outer finish or three continuous white 
stripes or by any other means permitted by 400.22, 
that is used for connecting an appliance or equipment 
permitted by 400.7. This shall apply to flexible cords 
connected to outlets whether or not the outlet is 
supplied by a circuit that has a grounded conductor. 

Informational Note: The color gray may have been used 
in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be 
taken when working on existing systems. 

200.9 Means of Identification of Terminals. The 

identification of terminals to which a grounded conductor 
is to be connected shall be substantially white in color. 
The identification of other terminals shall be of a readily 
distinguishable different color. 

Exception: Where the conditions of maintenance and 
supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the 
installations, terminals for grounded conductors shall be 
permitted to be permanently identified at the time of 
installation by a distinctive white marking or other 
equally effective means. 

200.10 Identification of Terminals. 

(A) Device Terminals. All devices, excluding 
panelboards, provided with terminals for the attachment 
of conductors and intended for connection to more than 
one side of the circuit shall have terminals properly 
marked for identification, unless the electrical connection 
of the terminal intended to be connected to the grounded 
conductor is clearly evident. 

Exception: Terminal identification shall not be required 
for devices that have a normal current rating of over 30 
amperes, other than polarized attachment plugs and 
polarized receptacles for attachment plugs as required in 
200.10(B). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-47 



200.11 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



(B) Receptacles, Plugs, and Connectors. Receptacles, 
polarized attachment plugs, and cord connectors for plugs 
and polarized plugs shall have the terminal intended for 
connection to the grounded conductor identified as 
follows: 

(1) Identification shall be by a metal or metal coating 
that is substantially white in color or by the word 
white or the letter W located adjacent to the 
identified terminal. 

(2) If the terminal is not visible, the conductor entrance 
hole for the connection shall be colored white or 
marked with the word white or the letter W, 

Informational Note: See 250.126 for identification of 
wiring device equipment grounding conductor terminals. 

(C) Screw Shells. For devices with screw shells, the 
terminal for the grounded conductor shall be the one 
connected to the screw shell. 

(D) Screw Shell Devices with Leads. For screw shell 
devices with attached leads, the conductor attached to the 
screw shell shall have a white or gray finish. The outer 
finish of the other conductor shall be of a solid color that 
will not be contused with the white or gray finish used to 
identify the grounded conductor. 

Informational Note: The color gray may have been used 
in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care should be 
taken when working on existing systems. 

(E) Appliances. Appliances that have a single-pole 
switch or a single-pole overcurrent device in the line or 
any line-connected screw shell lampholders, and that are 
to be connected by (I) a permanent wiring method or (2) 
field-installed attachment plugs and cords with three or 
more wires (including the equipment grounding 
conductor), shall have means to identify the terminal for 
the grounded circuit conductor (if any). 

200.11 Polarity of Connections. No grounded conductor 
shall be attached to any terminal or lead so as to reverse 
the designated polarity. 



ARTICLE 210 
Branch Circuits 

I. General Provisions 

210.1 Scope. This article covers branch circuits except for 
branch circuits that supply only motor loads, which are 
covered in Article 430. Provisions of this article and 
Article 430 apply to branch circuits with combination 
loads. 



210.2 Other Articles for Specific-Purpose Branch 
Circuits. Branch circuits shall comply with this article 
and also with the applicable provisions of other articles of 
this Code. The provisions for branch circuits supplying 
equipment listed in Table 210.2 amend or supplement the 
provisions in this article and shall apply to branch circuits 
referred to therein. 

210.3 Rating. Branch circuits recognized by this article 
shall be rated in accordance with the maximum permitted 
ampere rating or setting of the overcurrent device. The 
rating for other than individual branch circuits shall be 15, 
20, 30, 40, and 50 amperes. Where conductors of higher 
ampacity are used for any reason, the ampere rating or 
setting of the specified overcurrent device shall determine 
the circuit rating. 

Exception: Mult tout let branch circuits greater than 50 
amperes shall he permitted to supply nonlighting outlet 
loads on industrial premises where conditions of 
maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified 
persons service the equipment. 

210.4 Multiwire Branch Circuits. 

(A) General. Branch circuits recognized by this article 
shall be permitted as multiwire circuits. A multiwire 
circuit shall be permitted to be considered as multiple 
circuits. All conductors of a multiwire branch circuit shall 
originate from the same panelboard or similar distribution 
equipment. 

Informational Note: A 3 -phase, 4- wire, wye-connected 
power system used to supply power to nonlinear loads 
may necessitate that the power system design allow for 
the possibility of high harmonic currents on the neutral 
conductor. 

(B) Disconnecting Means. Each multiwire branch circuit 
shall be provided with a means that will simultaneously 
disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point where 
the branch circuit originates. 

Informational Note: See 240 J 5(B) for information on 
|he use of single-pole circuit breakers m the 
idisconnecting means, 

(C) Line-to-Neutral Loads. Multiwire branch circuits 
shall supply only line-to-neutral loads. 

Exception No. I: A multiwire branch circuit that supplies 
only one utilization equipment. 

Exception No. 2: Where all ungrounded conductors of 
the multiwire branch circuit are opened simultaneously 
by the branch-circuit overcurrent device. 

Informational Note: See 300.13(B) for continuity of 
grounded conductor on multiwire circuits. 



70-48 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



210.6 



Table 210.2 Specific-Purpose Branch Circuits 



Equipment 


Article 


Section 


Air-conditioning and 




440.6,440.31, 


refrigerating equipment 




440.32 


Audio signal processing, 




640.8 


amplification, and 






reproduction equipment 






Busways 




368.17 


Circuits and equipment 


720 




operating at less dian 50 






volts 






Central heating equipment 




422.12 


other than fixed electric 






space-heating equipment 






Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 


725 




remote-control, signaling. 






and power- limited circuits 






Cranes and hoists 




610.42 


Electric signs and outline 




600.6 


lighting 






Electric welders 


630 




Electrified truck parking 


626 




space 






Elevators, dumbwaiters. 




620.61 


escalators, moving walks, 






wheelchair lifts, and 






stairway chair lifts 






Fire alarm systems 


760 




Fixed electric heating 




427.4 


equipment for pipelines and 






vessels 






Fixed electric space-heating 




424.3 


equipment 






Fixed outdoor elect'ical deicing 




426.4 


and snow-melting 






equipment 






Information technology 




645.5 


equipment 






Infrared lamp industrial 




422.48, 424.3 


heating equipment 






Induction and dielectric 


665 




heating equipment 






Marinas and boatyards 




555.19 


Mobile homes, manufactured 


550 




homes, and mobile home 






parks 






Motion picture and television 


530 




studios and similar 






locations 






Motors, motor circuits, and 


430 




controllers 






Pipe organs 




650.7 


Recreational vehicles and 


551 




recreational vehicle parks 






Switchboards and 




408.52 


panelboards 






Theaters, audience areas of 




520.41, 


motion picture and 




520.52, 


television studios, and 




520.62 


similar locations 






X-ray equipment 




660.2,517.73 



(D) Grouping. The ungrounded and grounded circuit 
conductors of each multiwire branch circuit shall be 
grouped by cable lies or similar means in at least one 
location Viilhin the panciboard or other point of 
brigination. 

Exception: The requirement for grouping shall not apply 
if the circuit enters from a cable or raceway unique to the 
circuit that makes the grouping obvious. 

210.5 Identification for Branch Circuits. 

(A) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a 
branch circuit shall be identified in accordance with 
200.6. 

(B) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment 
grounding conductor shall be identified in accordance 
with 250,119. 

(C) Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. 
Ungrounded condiietors shall be identilled in accordance 
with210.5(C)(l).(2KandO). 

(1) Application. Where the premises wiring system has 
branch circuits supplied from more than one nominal 
voltage system, each ungrounded conductor of a branch 
circuit shall be identified by phase or line and system at 
all termination, connection, and splice points. 

(2) Means of Identification. The means of identification 
shall be pennitied to be by separate color coding, marking 
tape, tagging, or other approved means, 

(5) Posting of Identification Means. The method utilized 
for conductors originating within each branch-circuit 
panciboard or similar branch-circuit distribution 
equipment shall be documented in a manner that is readily 
available or shall be permanently posted at each branch- 
circuit panciboard or similar branch-circuit distribution 
equipment. 

210.6 Branch-Circuit Voltage Limitations. 

The nominal voltage of branch circuits shall not exceed 
the values permitted by 210.6(A) through (E). 

(A) Occupancy Limitation. In dwelling units and guest 
rooms or guest suites of hotels, motels, and similar 
occupancies, the voltage shall not exceed 120 volts, 
nominal, between conductors that supply the terminals of 
the following: 

(1) Luminaires 

(2) Cord-and-plug-connected loads 1440 volt-amperes, 
nominal, or less or less than % hp 

(B) 120 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits not 
exceeding 120 volts, nominal, between conductors shall 
be permitted to supply the following: 

(1) The terminals of lampholders applied within their 
voltage ratings 

(2) Auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps 

(3) Cord-and-plug-coimected or permanently connected 
utilization equipment 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-49 



210.7 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



(C) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 120 volts, 
nominal, between conductors and not exceeding 277 volts, 
nominal, to ground shall be pennitted to supply the 
following: 

(1) Listed electric-discharge br listed light-<;mitting diode- 
type luminaires 

(2) Listed incandescent luminaires, where supplied at 120 
volts or less from the output of a stepdown 
autotransformer that is an integral component of the 
luminaire and the outer shell terminal is electrically 
connected to a grounded conductor of the branch circuit 

(3) Luminaires equipped with mogul-base screw shell 
lampholders 

(4) Lampholders, other than the screw shell type, applied 
within their voltage ratings 

(5) Auxiliaiy equipment of electric-discharge lamps 

(6) Cord-and-plug-connected or permanently connected 
utilization equipment 

(D) 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding 277 
volts, nominal, to ground and not exceeding 600 volts, 
nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to supply the 
following: 

(1) The auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge lamps 
mounted in permanently installed luminaires where the 
luminaires are mounted in accordance with one of the 
following: 

a. Not less than a height of 6.7 m (22 ft) on poles or 
similar structures for the illumination of outdoor 
areas such as highways, roads, bridges, athletic 
fields, or parking lots 

b. Not less than a height of 5.5 m (18 ft) on other 
structures such as tunnels 

(2) Cord-and-plug-connected or pennanently connected 
utilization equipment other than luminaires 

(3) Luminaires powered from direct-current systems where 
the luminaire contains a listed, dc-rated ballast that 
provides isolation between the dc power source and the 
lamp circuit and protection from electric shock when 
changing lamps. 

Informational Note: See 410T38 for auxihary 
equipment limitations. 

Exception No, 1 to (B), (C), and (D): For lampholders of 
infrared industrial heating appliances as provided in 422, 14, 
Exception No. 2 to (B), (C), and (D): For railway properties 
as described in 110. 19. 

(E) Over 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits 
exceeding 600 volts, nominal, between conductors shall be 
permitted to supply utilization equipment in installations 
where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that 
only qualified persons service the installation. 



210.7 Miittipfe Brnnch Circuits. Where two or more 
branch circuits suppiy devices or equipment on the same 
yoke, a means to simiiltaneousiy disconnect the ungrounded 
conductors supplying those devices shall be provided at the 
point at which the branch circuits originate, 

210.8 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for 
Personnel Ground-ftiull circuit-interruption for personnel 
^lialt be provided as required in 210.8(A) ihrougli (C). The 
gmund-fauh circuit-interrupter shall be installed in a readily 
accessible location. 

Informational Note: See 215.9 for ground- fault circuit- 
interrupter protection for personnel on feeders, 

(A) Dwelling Units. All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- 
ampere receptacles installed in the locations specified in 
210.8(A)(1) through (8) shall have ground-fault circuit- 
interrupter protection for personnel 

(1) Bathrooms 

(2) Garages, and also accessory buildings that have a floor 
located at or below grade level not intended as habitable 
rooms and limited to storage areas, work areas, and 
areas of similar use 

(3) Outdoors 

Exception to (3): Receptacles that are not readily accessible 
and are supplied by a branch circuit dedicated to electric 
snow-melting, deicing, or pipeline and vessel Itcating 
equipment shall be permitted to be installed in accordance 
with 426.28 or 427. 22. as applicable, 

(4) Crawl spaces — at or below grade level 

(5) Unfinished basements — for purposes of this section, 
unfinished basements are defined as portions or areas of 
the basement not intended as habitable rooms and 
limited to storage areas, work areas, and the like 

Exception to (5): A receptacle supplying only a permanently 
installed fire alarm or burglar alarm system shall not be 
required to have groundfault circuit-interrupter protection. 

Informational Note: See 760.41(B) and 760.121 (B) for power 
supply requirements for fire alarm systems. 

Receptacles installed under the exception to 210.8(A)(5) shall 
not be considered as meeting the requirements of 210.52(G). 

(6) Kitchens — where the receptacles are installed to serve 
the countertop surfaces 

(7) Sinks — located in areas other liian kitchens where 
receptacles are installed within 1.8 m (6 ft) of the outside 
edge of the sink 

(8) Boathouses 



70-50 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



210.11 



(B) Other Than Dwelling Units. All 125-volt, single-phase, 
15- and 20-ampere receptacles installed in the locations 
specified in 210.8(B)(1) through (8) shall have ground-fault 
circuit-interrupter protection for personnel. 
(1) Bathrooms 

Kitchens 



(2) 
(3) 
(4) 



Rooftops 
Outdoors 



Exception No. 1 to (3) and (4): Receptacles that are not 
readily accessible and are supplied by' a bnmch circuit 
xkdicated to electric snow-melting, deiciftg. or pipeline and 
mssel heating equipment shall he permitted to be installed in 
t^fcatxkmcc with 426.28 or 427,22. as uppllcabk. 

Exception No. 2 to (4): In industrial establishments only, 
where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
that only qualified personnel are involved, an assured 
equipment grounding conductor program as specified in 
590.6(B)(2) shall bepetmittedfor only those receptacle outlets 
used to supply equipment that would create a greater hazard if 
power is intetiiApted or having a design that is not compatible 
with GFCI protection. 

(5) Sinks — where receptacles are installed within 1 .8 m (6 
ft) of the outside edge of the sink. 

Exception No. 1 to (5): In industrial laboratories, receptacles 
used to supply equipment where removal of power would 
introduce a greater hazard shall be permitted to be installed 
without GFCI protection. 

Exception No. 2 to (5): For receptacles located in patient bed 
locutions of general care or critkxil care areas of health care 
facilities other than t/tose covered under 2lOMBHlh GFCI 
ptvtection .^hall not he reqimed. 

(6) Indoor wet locations 

(7) Locker roonrts with associated showering lacililies 

(8) Gamges, ^nice bays, and similar areas where electrical 
diagnostic equipment, electrical hand tools, or portable 
lighting equipment are to be used 

(C) Boat Hoists. GFCI protection shall be provided for outlets 
not exceeding 240 volts that supply boat hoists installed in 
dwelling unit locations. 

210.9 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. Branch 
circuits shall not be derived from autotransformers unless the 
circuit supplied has a grounded conductor that is electrically 
connected to a grounded conductor of the system supplying 
the autotransformer. 

Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted 
without the connection to a grounded conductor where 
transforming fivm a nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240-volt 
supply or similarly from 240 volts to 208 volts. 



Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where conditions 
of maintenance and superyision ensure that only qualified 
persons service the installation, autotf^ansfoimers shall be 
permitted to supply nominal 600-volt loads from nominal 480- 
volt systems, and 480-volt loads from nominal 600-volt 
systems, without the connection to a similar groimded 
conductor. 

210.10 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from Grounded 
Systems. Two- wire dc circuits and ac circuits of two or more 
ungrounded conductors shall be permitted to be tapped from 
the ungrounded conductors of circuits that have a grounded 
neutral conductor. Switching devices in each tapped circuit 
shall have a pole in each ungrounded conductor. All poles of 
multipole switching devices shall manually switch together 
where such switching devices also serve as a disconnecting 
means as required by the following: 

(1) 410.93 for double-pole switched lampholders 

(2) 410.104(B) for electric-discharge lamp auxiliary 
equipment switching devices 

(3) 422.3 1(B) for an appliance 

(4) 424.20 for a fixed electric space-heating unit 

(5) 426.5 1 for electric deicing and snow-melting equipment 

(6) 430.85 for a motor controller 

(7) 430.103 for a motor 

210.11 Branch Circuits Required. Branch circuits for 
lighting and for appliances, including motor-operated 
appliances, shall be provided to supply the loads calculated in 
accordance with 220.10. In addition, branch circuits shall be 
provided for specific loads not covered by 220.10 where 
required elsewhere in this Code and for dwelling unit loads as 
specified in 210.1 1(C). 

(A) Number of Branch Circuits. The minimum number of 
branch circuits shall be determined from the total calculated 
load and the size or rating of the circuits used. In all 
installations, the number of circuits shall be sufficient to 
supply the load served. In no case shall the load on any circuit 
exceed the maximum specified by 220. 18. 

(B) Load Evenly Proportioned Among Branch Circuits. 

Where the load is calculated on the basis of volt-amperes per 
square meter or per square foot, the wiring system up to and 
including the branch-circuit panelboard(s) shall be provided to 
serve not less than the calculated load. This load shall be 
evenly proportioned among multioutlet branch circuits within 
the panelboard(s). Branch-circuit overcurrent devices and 
circuits shall be required to be installed only to serve the 
connected load. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-51 



210.12 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



(C) Dwelling Units. 

(1) Small-Appliance Branch Circuits. In addition to the 
number of branch circuits required by other parts of this 
section, two or more 20-ampere small-appliance branch 
circuits shall be provided for all receptacle outlets specified by 
210.52(B). 

(2) Laundry Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of 
branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least 
one additional 20-ampere branch circuit shall be provided to 
supply the laundry receptacle outlet(s) required by 210.52(F). 
This circuit shall have no other outlets. 

(3) Bathroom Branch Circuits. In addition to the number of 
branch circuits required by other parts of this section, at least 
one 20-ampere branch circuit shall be provided to supply 
bathroom receptacle outlet(s). Such circuits shall have no other 
outlets. 

Exception: Where the 20~ampere circuit supplies a single 
bathroom, outlets for other equipment within the same 
bathroom shall be permitted to be supplied in accordance with 
210.23(A)(1) and (A)(2). 

Infonnational Note: See Examples Dl(a), Dl(b), D2(b), and 
D4(a) in Infonnative Annex D. 

210.12 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. 

(A) Dwelling Units. All 120-voh, single phase, 15- and 20- 
ampere branch circuits supplying outlets installed in dwelling 
unit family rooms, dining rooms, living rooms, parlors, 
libraries, dens, bedrooms, sunrooms, recreation rooms, closets, 
hallways, or similar rooms or areas shall be protected by a 
listed arc-fault circuit interrupter, combination-type, installed 
to provide protection of the branch circuit. 

Informational Note No. 1: For information on types of arc- 
fault circuit interrupters, see UL 1699-1999, Standard for 
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters. 

Infonnational Note No. 2: See 11.6 .3(5) 29.6.3(5) of NFPA 
72-2010, National Fire Alann and Signaling Code, for 
information related to secondary power supply requirements 
for smoke alarms installed in dwelling units. 

Informational Note No. 3: See 760.41(B) and 76O.1210B) for 
power-supply requirements for fire alarm systems. 

Exception No. I: If RMQ IMC, EMT, ?>£' ]^fQ or steel 
armored T)peAC cables meeting the requirements of 25(1118 
and metal outlet and junction Imxes are installed for tlid 
poi^ion of the branch circuit between the branch-citvuii 
overciin^tt de\uce and the first outlet, it shall be pemiitted to 
install an outlet branch-circmt type AFC! at the first outlet to 
provide protection for the fvmaining portion (}f the ImtncH 
ciraiir 



Exception No. 2: Where a listed metal or nonmetalUc conduit 
or tubing is encased in not less than 50 mm (2 in,) of concrete 
for the portion of the branch cinuit between the hranch-cirant 
overcurrent device and the first outlet, it sliall he pennitted to 
install an outlet branch-circuit t\/K' AFCI at the first outlet to 
ptvvide protection for the remaining portion of the branch 
viraut. 



Exception No. 3: Where (m individual branch circuit to afire 
alann system installed in accordance with 760.41(B) or 
760.121(B) is installed in RMQ IMC, EMT, or steel-sheathed 
cable, Type AC or Type MC, meeting the requirements of 
250.118, with metal outlet and Junction boxes, AFCI 
protection shall be permitted to be omitted. 

(B) Branch Circuit Extensions or Modifications — 
Dwelling Units. In any of the areas specified in 210.12(A), 
where branch-circuit wiring is modified, replaced, or extended, 
the branch circuit shall be protected by one of the following: 

(1) A listed combination-type AFCI located at the origin of 
the branch circuit 

(2) A listed outlet branch-circuit type AFCI located at the 
first receptacle outlet of the existing branch circuit 

210.18 Guest Rooms and Guest Suites. 

Guest rooms and guest suites that are provided with permanent 
provisions for cooking shall have branch circuits installed to 
meet the rules for dwelling units. 

II. Branch-Circuit Ratings 

210.19 Conductors — Minimum Ampacity and Size. 

(A) Branch Circuits Not More Than 600 Volts. 

(1) General. Branch-circuit conductors shall have an ampacity 
not less than the maximum load to be served. Where a branch 
circuit supplies continuous loads or any combination of 
continuous and noncontinuous loads, the minimum branch- 
circuit conductor size, before the application of any adjustment 
or correction factors, shall have an allowable ampacity not less 
than the noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the 
continuous load. 

Exception: If the assembly, including the overcurrent devices 
protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed for operation at 100 
percent of its rating, the allowable ampacity of the branch 
circuit conductors shall be pennitted to be not less than the 
sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. 

s 

Informational Note No. 1 : See 310.15 for ampacity ratings of 
conductors. 

Informational Note No. 2: See Part II of Article 430 for 
minimum rating of motor branch-circuit conductors. 

Informational Note No. 3: See 310.15(A)(3) for temperature 
limitation of conductors. 



70-52 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



210.20 



Informational Note No. 4: Conductors tbr branch circuits 
as defined in Article 1 00, sized to prevent a voltage drop 
exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, 
heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, 
and where the maximum total voltage drop on both 
feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does not 
exceed 5 percent, provide reasonable efficiency of 
operation. See Informational Note No. 2 of 215.2(A)(3) 
for vohage drop on feeder conductors. 

(2) Branch Circuits with More than One Receptacle. 

Conductors of branch circuits supplying more than one 
receptacle for cord-and-plug-connected portable loads shall 
have an ampacity of not less than the rating of the branch 
circuit. 

(3) Household Ranges and Cooking Appliances. Branch- 
circuit conductors supplying household ranges, wall- 
mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and other 
household cooking appliances shall have an ampacity not 
less than the rating of the branch circuit and not less than 
the maximum load to be served. For ranges of SYa kW or 
more rating, the minimum branch-circuit rating shall be 40 
amperes. 

Exception No. 1: Conductors tapped from a 50-ampere 
branch circuit supplying electric ranges, wall-mounted 
electric ovens, and counter-mounted electric cooking units 
shall have an ampacity of not less than 20 amperes and 
shall be sufficient for the load to be sey^^ed. These tap 
conductors include any conductors that are a part of the 
leads supplied with the appliance that are smaller than the 
branch-circuit conductors. The taps shall not be longer 
than necessary for servicing the appliance. 

Exception No. 2: The neutral conductor of a 3-wire branch 
circuit supplying a household electric range, a wall- 
mounted oven, or a coimter-mounted cooking unit shall be 
permitted to be smaller than the ungrounded conductors 
where the maximum demand of a range of8V4-kWor more 
rating has been calculated according to Column C of Table 
220.55, but such conductor shall have an ampacity of not 
less than 70 percent of the branch-circuit rating and shall 
not be smaller than 10 A WG. 

(4) Other Loads. Branch-circuit conductors that supply 
loads other than those specified in 210.2 and other than 
cooking appHances as covered in 210.19(A)(3) shall have 
an ampacity sufficient for the loads served and shall not be 
smaller than 14 AWG. 

Exception No. 1: Tap conductors shall have an ampacity 
sufficient for the load served. In addition, they shall have 
an ampacity of not less than 15 for circuits rated less than 
40 amperes and not less than 20 for circuits rated at 40 or 
50 amperes and only where these tap conductors supply 
any of the following loads: 



(a) Individual lampholders or luminaires with taps extending 
not longer than 450 mm (18 in.) beyond any portion of 
the lampholder or luminaire. 

(b) A luminaire having tap conductors as provided in 
410.117. 

(c) Individual outlets, other than receptacle outlets, with taps 
not over 450 mm (18 in.) long. 

(d) Infrared lamp industrial heating appliances. 

(e) Nonheating leads ofdeicing and snow-melting cables and 
mats. 

Exception No. 2: Fixture wires and flexible cords shall be 
permitted to be smaller than 14 A WG as permitted by 240.5. 

(B) Branch Circuits Over 600 Volts. The ampacity of 
conductors shall be in accordance with 310.15 and 310.60, as 
applicable. Branch-circuit conductors over 600 volts shall be 
sized in accordance with 210.19(B)(1) or (B)(2). 

(1) General. The ampacity of branch-circuit conductors shall 
not be less than 125 percent of the designed potential load of 
utilization equipment that will be operated simultaneously. 

(2) Supervised Installations. For supervised installations, 
branch-circuit conductor sizing shall be permitted to be 
determined by qualified persons under engineering 
supervision. Supervised installations are defined as those 
portions of a facility where both of the following conditions 
are met: 

(1) Conditions of design and installation are provided under 
engineering supervision. 

(2) Qualified persons with documented training and 
experience in over 600-volt systems provide 
maintenance, monitoring, and servicing of the system. 

210.20 Overcurrent Protection. Branch-circuit conductors 
and equipment shall be protected by overcurrent protective 
devices that have a rating or setting that complies with 
210.20(A) through (D). 

(A) Continuous and Noncontinuous Loads. Where a branch 
circuit supphes continuous loads or any combination of 
continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the 
overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous 
load plus 125 percent of the continuous load. 

Exception: Where the assembly, including the overcurrent 
devices protecting the branch circuit(s), is listed for operation 
at 100 percent of its rating, the ampere rating of the 
overcurrent device shall be permitted to be not less than the 
sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. 

(B) Conductor Protection. Conductors shall be protected m 
accordance with 240.4. Flexible cords and fixture wires shall 
be protected in accordance with 240.5. 

(C) Equipment. The rating or setting of the overcurrent 
protective device shall not exceed that specified in the 
applicable articles referenced in Table 240.3 for equipment. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-53 



210.21 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



(D) Outlet Devices. The rating or setting shall not exceed 
that specified in 210.21 for outlet devices. 

210.21 Outlet Devices. 

Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating that is not less 
than the load to be served and shall comply with 
210.21(A) and (B). 

(A) Lampholders. Where connected to a branch circuit 
having a rating in excess of 20 amperes, lampholders shall 
be of the heavy-duty type. A heavy-duty lampholder shall 
have a rating of not less than 660 watts if of the 
admedium type, or not less than 750 watts if of any other 
type. 

(B) Receptacles. 

(1) Single Receptacle on an Individual Branch Circuit. 
A single receptacle installed on an individual branch 
circuit shall have an ampere rating not less than that of the 
branch circuit. 

Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed in accordance 
with 430.81(B). 

Exception No. 2: A receptacle installed exclusively for 
the use of a cord-and-plug-connected arc welder shall he 
permitted to have an ampere rating not less than the 
minimum branch-circuit conductor ampacity determined 
by 630.11(A) for arc welders. 

Informational Note: See the definition of receptacle in 
Article 100. 

(2) Total Cord-and-Plug-Connected Load. Where 
connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more 
receptacles or outlets, a receptacle shall not supply a total 
cord-and-plug-connected load in excess of the maximum 
specified in Table 210.21(B)(2). 

Table 210.21(B)(2) Maximum Cord-and-Plug-Connected 
Load to Receptacie 



Circuit Rating 


Receptacle 
Rating 


Maximum Load 


(Amperes) 


(Amperes) 


(Amperes) 


15 or 20 


15 


12 


20 


20 


16 


30 


30 


24 



(3) Receptacle Ratings. Where connected to a branch 
circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, 
receptacle ratings shall conform to the values listed in 
Table 210.21(B)(3), or, where rated higher than 50 
amperes, the receptacle rating shall not be less than the 
branch-circuit rating. 

Exception No. 1: Receptacles for one or more cord-and- 
plug-connected arc welders shall be permitted to have 
ampere ratings not less than the minimum branch-circuit 
conductor ampacity permitted by 630.11(A) or (B), as 
applicable for arc welders. 



Exception No. 2: The ampere rating of a receptacle 
installed for electric discharge lighting shall he permitted 
to be based on 410.62(C). 

Table 210.21(B)(3) Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits 
Circuit Rating Receptacle Rating 

(Amperes) (Amperes) 



15 
20 
30 
40 
50 



Not over 1 5 
15 or 20 

30 
40 or 50 

50 



(4) Range Receptacle Rating. The ampere rating of a 
range receptacle shall be permitted to be based on a single 
range demand load as specified in Table 220.55. 

210.23 Permissible Loads. In no case shall the load 
exceed the branch-circuit ampere rating. An individual 
branch circuit shall be permitted to supply any load for 
which it is rated. A branch circuit supplying two or more 
outlets or receptacles shall supply only the loads specified 
according to its size as specified in 210.23(A) through (D) 
and as summarized in 210.24 and Table 210.24. 

(A) 15- and 20-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 15- or 20- 

ampere branch circuit shall be permitted to supply 
lighting units or other utilization equipment, or a 
combination of both, and shall comply with 210,23(A)(1) 
and (A)(2). 

Exception: The small- appliance branch circuits, laundry 
branch circuits, and bathroom branch circuits required in 
a dwelling unit(s) by 210.11(C)(1), (C)(2), and (C)(3) 
shall supply only the receptacle outlets specified in that 
section. 

(1) Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment Not 
Fastened in Place. The rating of any one cord-and-plug- 
connected utilization equipment not fastened in place shall 
not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit ampere rating. 

(2) Utilization Equipment Fastened in Place. The total 
rating of utilization equipment fastened in place, other 
than luminaires, shall not exceed 50 percent of the 
branch-circuit ampere rating where lighting units, cord- 
and-plug-connected utilization equipment not fastened in 
place, or both, are also supplied. 

(B) 30-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 30-ampere branch 
circuit shall be permitted to supply fixed lighting units with 
heavy-duty lampholders in other than a dwelling unit(s) or 
utilization equipment in any occupancy. A rating of any 
one cord-and-plug-connected utilization equipment shall 
not exceed 80 percent of the branch-circuit ampere rating. 



70-54 



2013 Califoniia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



210.52 



(C) 40- and 50-Ampere Branch Circuits. A 40- or 50- 

ampere branch circuit shall be permitted to supply cooking 
appliances that are fastened in place in any occupancy. In 
other than dwelling units, such circuits shall be permitted to 
supply fixed lighting units with heavy-duty lampholders, 
infrared heating units, or other utilization equipment. 

(D) Branch Circuits Larger Than 50 Amperes. Branch 
circuits larger than 50 amperes shall supply only 
nonlighting outlet loads. 

210.24 Branch-Circuit Requirements — Summary. 

The requirements for circuits that have two or more 
outlets or receptacles, other than the receptacle circuits of 
210.1 1(C)(1). (C)(2), and (C)(3), are summarized in Table 
210.24. This table provides only a summary of minimum 
requirements. See 210.19, 210.20, and 210.21 for the 
specific requirements applying to branch circuits. 

210.25 Branch Circuits in Buildings with More Than 
One Occupancy. 

(A) Dwelling Unit Branch Circuits. Branch circuits in 
each dwelling unit shall supply only loads within that 
dwelling unit or loads associated only with that dwelling unit. 

(B) Common Area Branch Circuits. Branch circuits 
installed for the purpose of lighting, central alarm, signal, 
communications, or other purposes for public or common 
areas of a two-family dwelling, a multifamily dwelling, or a 
multi-occupancy building shall not be supplied from 
equipment that supplies an individual dwelling unit or 
tenant space. 

Ill, Required Outlets 

210.50 General. Receptacle outlets shall be installed as 
specified in 210,52 through 210.63. 

(A) Cord Pendants. A cord connector that is supplied by a 
permanently connected cord pendant shall be considered a 
receptacle outlet. 

(B) Cord Connections. A receptacle outlet shall be installed 
Table 210.24 Summary of Branch-Circuit Requirements 



wherever flexible cords with attachment plugs are used. Where 
flexible cords are permitted to be permanently connected, 
receptacles shall be permitted to be omitted for such cords. 

(C) Appliance Receptacle Outlets. Appliance receptacle 
outlets installed in a dwelling unit for specific appliances, 
such as laundry equipment, shall be installed within 1.8 m 
(6 ft) of the intended location of the appHance. 

(D) fDPHJ Commissary Service Outlet A commissmy which 
services food preparation units shall provide one outlet for each 
vehicle requiring electrical power for mechanical refrigeration. 

(E) [DPH w/ exceptions] Installation Height. The center of 15-, 
20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets required by sections 210- 
52(A), (B), and (C) shall be installed not less than 12 inches 
above the floor or working platform. 

Exception No. 1: Receptacle outlets installed as part of 
permanently installed baseboard heaters are exempt. 

Exception No. 2: Required receptacle outlets shall be permitted 
in floors when adjacent to sliding panels or walls. 

Exception No. 3: Baseboard electrical outlets used in relocatable 
partitions, window walls or other electrical convenience floor 
outlets are not subject to the minimum height requirements. 

210,52 Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets. This section 
provides requirements for 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere 
receptacle outlets. The receptacles required by this section 
shall be in addition to any receptacle that is: 

( 1 ) Part of a luminaire or appliance, or 

(2) Controlled by a wall switch in accordance with 
210.70(A)(1), Exception No, 1, or 

(3) Located within cabinets or cupboards, or 

(4) Located more than \.l m{5Vi ft) above the floor 

Permanently installed electric baseboard heaters equipped 
with factory-installed receptacle outlets or outlets provided 
as a separate assembly by the manufacturer shall be permitted 
as the required outlet or outlets for the wall space utilized 
by such permanently installed heaters. Such receptacle 
outlets shall not be connected to the heater circuits. 



C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 

A 



Circuit Rating 



15 A 



20 A 



30 A 



40 A 



50 A 



Conductors (min. size): 



1 
Circuit wires 




M 


Taps 




14 


ixture wires and cords - 


-see 240.5 





12 
14 



10 
14 



12 



6 
12 



Overcurrent Protection 


15 A 


20 A 


30 A 


40 A 


50 A 


Oudet devices: 
Lampholders permitted 

2 

Receptacle rating 


Any type 
1 5 max. A 


Any type 
15 or 20 A 


Heavy duty 
30 A 


Heavy duty 
40 or 50 A 


Heavy duty 
50A 


Maximum Load 


15 A 


20 A 


30 A 


40 A 


50 A 


Permissible load 


See 210.23(A) 


See 210.23(A) 


See 210.23(B) 


See210,23(C) 


See 210.23(C) 



Tliese gauges are for copper conductors. 

For receptacle rating of cord-connected electric-discharge luminaires (lighting fixtures), see ^ I (*.62(C)| 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-55 



210.52 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



Informational Note: Listed baseboard heaters include 
instructions that may not permit their installation below 
receptacle outlets. 

(A) General Provisions. In every kitchen, family room, 
dining room, living room, parlor, library, den, sunroom, 
bedroom, recreation room, or similar room or area of 
dwelling units, receptacle outlets shall be installed in 
accordance with the general provisions specified in 
210.52(A)(1) through (A)(3). 

(1) Spacing. Receptacles shall be installed such that no 
point measured horizontally along the floor line of any 
wall space is more than 1.8 m (6 ft) from a receptacle 
outlet. 

(2) Wall Space. As used in this section, a wall space shall 
include the following: 

(1) Any space 600 mm (2 ft) or more in width (including 
space measured around corners) and unbroken along 
the floor line by doorways ^nd similar openings, 
fireplaces, and fixed cabinets 

(2) The space occupied by fixed panels in exterior walls, 
excluding sliding panels 

(3) The space afforded by fixed room dividers, such as 
freestanding bar-type counters or railings 

(3) Floor Receptacles. Receptacle outlets in floors shall 
not be counted as part of the required number of 
receptacle outlets unless located within 450 mm (18 in.) 
of the wall. 

i(4) Countertop Receptacles. Receptacles installed for 
countertop surfaces as specified in 210.52(C) shall not be 
considered as the receptacles required by 210.52(A). 

(B) Small Appliances. 

(1) Receptacle Outlets Served. In the kitchen, pantry, 
breakfast room, dining room, or similar area of a dwelling 
unit, the two or more 20-ampere small-appliance branch 
circuits required by 210.11(C)(1) shall serve all wall and 
floor receptacle outlets covered by 210.52(A), all 
countertop outlets covered by 210.52(C), and receptacle 
outlets for refrigeration equipment. 

Exception No. I: In addition to the required receptacles 
specified by 210.52, switched receptacles supplied from a 
general-purpose branch circuit as defined in 
210. 70(A)(1), Exception No. 1, shall be permitted. 

Exception No. 2: The receptacle outlet for refrigeration 
equipment shall be permitted to be supplied from an 
individual branch circuit rated 15 amperes or greater, 

(2) No Other Outlets. The two or more small-appliance 
branch circuits specified in 210.52(B)(1) shall have no 
other outlets. 



Exception No. 1: A receptacle installed solely for the 
electrical supply to and support of an electric clock in any 
of the rooms specified in 210, 52(B)(1). 

Exception No. 2: Receptacles installed to provide power 
for supplemental equipment and lighting on gasfired 
ranges, ovens, or counter-mounted cooking units, 

(3) Kitchen Receptacle Requirements. Receptacles installed 
in a kitchen to serve countertop surfaces shall be supplied by 
not fewer than two small-appliance branch circuits, either or 
both of which shall also be permitted to supply receptacle 
outlets in the same kitchen and in other rooms specified in 
210.52(B)(1). Additional small-appliance branch circuits shall 
be permitted to supply receptacle outlets in the kitchen and 
other rooms specified in 210.52(B)(1). No small-appliance 
branch circuit shall serve more than one kitchen. 

(C) Countertops. In kitchens, pantries, breakfast rooms, 
dining rooms, and similar areas of dwelling units, 
receptacle outlets for countertop spaces shall be installed 
in accordance with 210.52(C)(1) through (C)(5). 

e 

(1) Wall Countertop Spaces, A receptacle outlet shall be 
installed at each wall countertop space that is 300 mm (12 in.) 
or wider. Receptacle outlets shall be installed so that no point 
along the wall line is more than 600 mm (24 in.) measured 
horizontally fi-om a receptacle outlet in that space. 

Exception: Receptacle outlets shall not be required on a 
wall directly behind a range, counter-mounted cooking 
unit, or sink in the installation described in Figure 
210.52(C)(1). 

(2) Island Countertop Spaces. At least one receptacle 
shall be installed at each island countertop space with a 
long dimension of 600 mm (24 in.) or greater and a short 
dimension of 300 mm (12 in.) or greater. 

(3) Peninsular Countertop Spaces, At least one 
receptacle outlet shall be installed at each peninsular 
countertop space with a long dimension of 600 mm (24 
in.) or greater and a short dimension of 300 mm (12 in.) 
or greater. A peninsular countertop is measured fi*om the 
connecting edge. 

(4) Separate Spaces. Countertop spaces separated by 
rangetops, refrigerators, or sinks shall be considered as 
separate countertop spaces in applying the requirements 
of 210.52(C)(1). If a range» counter-mounted cooking 
unit, or sink is installed in an island or a peninsular 
countertop and the depth of the countertop behind the 
range, counter^mounicd cooking unit, or sink is less than 
3(K) inm (12 in,), the range, counter- mounted cooking 
unit, or sink shall be considered to divide the countertop 
space into two separate countertop spaces^ Each separate 
countertop space shall comply with the applicable 
requirements in 210.52(C), 



70-56 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



210.52 



Outlet within _^ 

600 mm (24 in.) 


Space exempt from wail 
line if X< 300 mm (12 in.) 


<- 


_ Outlet within 

600 mm (24 in,) 




t 

X 

i 




r -N 

V J 













Range, counter-mounted cooking unit extending 
from face of counter 



Space exempt from wall line 
if X< 450 mm (18 in. 



<— Outlet within 600 mm (24 in.) - - 




Range, counter-mounted cooking unit mounted in corner 

Figure 210.52(C)(1) Determination of Area Behind a Range, 
or Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit or Sink. 

(5) Receptacle Outlet Location. Receptacle outlets shall 
be located on or above, but not more than 500 mm (20 in.) 
above, the counteilop. Receptacle outlet assemblies listed 
for the application shall be pennitted to be installed in 
countertops. Receptacle outlets rendered not readily 
accessible by appliances fastened in place, appliance 
garages, sinks, or rangetops as covered in 210.52(C)(1), 
Exception, or appliances occupying dedicated space shall 
not be considered as these required outlets. 

Informational Note: Sec 406J(E> for requireniencs for 
iustaliation of receptacles in countertops. 

Exception to (5): To comply with the conditions specified 
in (1) or (2), receptacle outlets shall he permitted to he 
mounted not more than 300 mm (12 in.) he low the 
counter top. Receptacles mounted below a counter top in 
accordance with this exception shall not he located where 
the countertop extends more than 150 mm (6 in.) beyond 
its support base. 



(1) Construction for the physically impaired 

(2) On island and peninsular countertops where the 
countertop is flat across its entire surface (no 
hacksplashes, dividers, etc.) and there are no means 
to mount a receptacle within 500 mm (20 in.) above 
the countertop, such as an overhead cabinet 

(D) Bathrooms. In dwelling units, at least one receptacle 
outlet shall be installed in bathrooms within 900 ram (3 ft) 
of the outside edge of each basin. The receptacle outlet 
shall be located on a wall or partition that is adjacent to 
the basin or basin countertop, located on the countertop, 
or installed on the side or face of the basin cabinet not 
more than 300 mm (12 in.) below the countertop. 
Receptacle outlet assemblies listed for the application 
shall be permitted to be installed in the countertop. 

Informational Note: See 406.5(E) for requirements for 
iiisianation of recepcacles in countertops, 

(E) Outdoor Outlets. Outdoor receptacle outlets shall be 
installed in accordance with (E)(1) through (E)(3). [See 
210.8(A)(3).] 

(1) One-Family and Two-Family Dwellings. For a one- 
family dwelling and each unit of a two-family dwelling 
that is at grade level, at least one receptacle outlet 
accessible while standing at grade level and located not 
more than 2,0 ra (6V2 ft) above grade shall be installed at 
the front and back of the dwelling. 

(2) Multifamily Dwellings. For each dwelling unit of a 
multifaraily dwelling where the dwelling unit is located at 
grade level and provided with individual exterior 
entrance/egress, at least one receptacle outlet accessible 
from grade level and not more than 2.0 m (6/4 fl) above 
grade shall be installed. 

(3) Balconies, Decks, and Porches. Balconies, decks, 
and porches that are accessible from inside the dwelling 
unit shall have at least one receptacle outlet installed 
within the perimeter of the balcony, deck, or porch. The 
receptacle shall not be located more than 2.0 m {6V2 ft) 
above the balcony, deck, or porch surface. 

e 

(F) Laundry Areas. In dwelling units, at least one 
receptacle outlet shall be installed for the laundry. 

Exception No. 1: In a dwelling unit that is an apartment 
or living area in a multifamily building where laundry 
facilities are provided on the premises and are available 
to all building occupants, a laundry receptacle shall not 
he required. 

Exception No. 2: In other than onefamily dwellings 
where laundry facilities are not to be installed or 
permitted, a laundry receptacle shall not be required. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-57 



210.60 



ARTICLE 210 - BRANCH CIRCUITS 



(G) Basements, Garagi^, and Accessory Buildings. For a 

one-family dwelling, the following provisions shall apply: 

(1) At least one receptacle outlet, in addition to those for 
specific equipment, shall be installed in each basement, 
in each attached garage, and in each detached garage or 
accessory building with electric power. 

(2) Where a portion of the basement is finished into one or 
more habitable rooms, each separate unfinished portion 
shall have a receptacle outlet installed in accordance 
with this section. 

(H) Hallways. In dwelling units, hallways of 3.0 m (10 ft) or 

more in length shall have at least one receptacle outlet. 

As used in this subsection, the hallway length shall be 

considered the length along the centerline of the hallway 

without passing through a doorway. 

(I) Foyers. Foyers that are not part of a hallway in 

accordance with 210.52(H) and that have an area that is 

greater than 5.6 wr (60 ft^) shall have a receptacle(s) located 
in each wall space 900 mm (3 ft) or more in width and 
unbroken by doorways, floor-to-ceiling windows, and 
similar openings. 

210,60 Guest Rooms, Guest Suites, Dormitories, and 
Similar Occupancies. 

(A) General. Guest rooms or guest suites in hotels, motels, 
sleeping rooms in dormitories, and similar occupancies shall 
have receptacle outlets installed in accordance with 
210.52(A) and (D). Guest rooms or guest suites provided 
with permanent provisions for cooking shall have receptacle 
outlets installed in accordance with all of the applicable rules 
in 210.52. 

(B) Receptacle Placement. In applying the provisions of 
210.52(A), the total number of receptacle outlets shall not be 
less than the minimum number that would comply with the 
provisions of that section. These receptacle outlets shall be 
permitted to be located conveniently for permanent furniture 
layout. At least two receptacle outlets shall be readily 
accessible. Where receptacles are installed behind the bed, 
the receptacle shall be located to prevent the bed fi-om 
contacting any attachment plug that may be installed or the 
receptacle shall be provided with a suitable guard. 

210.62 Show Windows. At least one receptacle outlet shall 
be installed within 450 mm (18 in.) of the top of a show 
window for each 3.7 linear m (12 linear ft) or major fraction 
thereof of show window area measured horizontally at its 
maximum width. 

210.63 Heating, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration 
Equipment Outlet. A 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20- 
ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be installed at an 
accessible location for the servicing of heating, air- 
conditioning, and refrigeration equipment. The receptacle 
shall be located on the same level and within 7.5 m (25 ft) of 
the heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration equipment. 
The receptacle outlet shall not be connected to the load side 
of the equipment disconnecting means. 



Exception: A receptacle outlet shall not be required at 
one- and two-family dwellings for the service of 
evaporative coolers. 

Informational Note: See 210.8 for ground-fault circuit- 
interrupter requirements. 

210.70 Lighting Outlets Required. Lighting outlets shall 
be installed where specified in 210.70(A), (B), and (C). 

(A) Dwelling Units. In dwelling units, lighting outlets 
shall be installed in accordance with 210.70(A)(1), (A)(2), 
and (A)(3). 

(1) Habitable Rooms. At least one wall switch- 
controlled lighting outlet shall be installed in every 
habitable room and bathroom. 

Exception No. 1: In other than kitchens and bathrooms, 
one or more receptacles controlled by a wall switch shall 
be permitted in lieu of lighting outlets. 

Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be 
controlled by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition 
to wall switches or (2) located at a customary wa// switch 
location and equipped with a manual override that will 
allow the sensor to function as a wall switch. 

(2) Additional Locations. Additional lighting outlets 
shall be installed in accordance with (A)(2)(a), (A)(2)(b), 
and (A)(2)(c). 

(a) At least one wall switch-controlled lighting 
outlet shall be installed in hallways, stairways, attached 
garages, and detached garages with electric power. 

(b) For dwelling units, attached garages, and 
detached garages with electric power, at least one wall 
switch-controlled lighting outlet shall be installed to 
provide illumination on the exterior side of outdoor 
entrances or exits with grade level access. A vehicle door 
in a garage shall not be considered as an outdoor entrance 
or exit. 

(c) Where one or more lighting outlet(s) are installed 
for interior stairways, there shall be a wall switch at each 
floor level, and landing level that includes an entryway, to 
control the lighting outlet(s) where the stairway between 
floor levels has six risers or more. 

Exception to (A)(2)(a), (A)(2)(b), and (A)(2)(c): In 
hallways, in stair-ways, and at outdoor entrances, remote, 
central, or automatic control of lighting shall be 
permitted. 

(3) Storage or Equipment Spaces. For attics, underfloor 
spaces, utility rooms, and basements, at least one lighting 
outlet containing a switch or controlled by a wall switch 
shall be installed where these spaces are used for storage 
or contain equipment requiring servicing. At least one 
point of control shall be at the usual point of entry to these 
spaces. The lighting outlet shall be provided at or near the 
equipment requiring servicing. 



70-58 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 215 -FEEDERS 



215.2 



(B) Guest Rooms or Guest Suites. In hotels, motels, or 
similar occupancies, guest rooms or guest suites shall 
have at least one wall switch-controlled lighting outlet 
installed in every habitable room and bathroom. 

Exception No. 1: In other than bathrooms and kitchens 
where provided, one or more receptacles controlled by a 
wall switch shall be permitted in lieu of lighting outlets. 

Exception No. 2: Lighting outlets shall be permitted to be 
controlled by occupancy sensors that are (1) in addition 
to wall switches or (2) located at a customary wall switch 
location and equipped with a manual override that allows 
the sensor to function as a wall switch. 

(C) Other Than Dwelling Units. For attics and 
underfloor spaces containing equipment requiring 
servicing, such as heating, air-conditioning, and 
refrigeration equipment, at least one lighting outlet 
containing a switch or controlled by a wall switch shall be 
installed in such spaces. At least one point of control shall 
be at the usual point of entry to these spaces. The lighting 
outlet shall be provided at or near the equipment requiring 
servicing. 

ARTICLE215 

_ Feeders^.^^^^^^^^^ 

215.1 Scope. This article covers the installation 
requirements, overcurrent protection requirements, 
minimum size, and ampacity of conductors for feeders 
supplying branch-circuit loads. 

Exception: Feeders for electrolytic cells as covered in 
6683(C)(1) and (C)(4). 

215.2 Minimum Rating and Size. 

(A) Feeders Not More Than 600 Volts. 

(1) General. Feeder conductors shall have an ampacity 
not less than required to supply the load as calculated in 
Parts III, IV, and V of Article 220. The minimum feeder- 
circuit conductor size, before the application of any 
adjustment or correction factors, shall have an allowable 
ampacity not less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 
percent of the continuous load. 

Exception No. I: If the assembly, Including the 
overcurrent devices protecting the feeder (s), is listed for 
operation at 100 percent of its rating, the allowable 
ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be permitted to be 
not less than the sum of the continuous load plus the 
noncontinuous load. 

Exception No. 2: Grounded conductors that are not 
connected to an overcurrent device shall be permitted to 
be sized at 100 percent of the continuous and 
noncontinuous load. 



(2) Grounded Conductor, The size of the feeder circuit 
grounded conductor shall not be smaller than that 
required by 250.122, except that 250.122(F) shall not 
apply where grounded conductors are run in parallel. 

Additional minimum sizes shall be as specified in 
215.2(A)(2) and (A)(3) under the conditions stipulated. 

(3) Ampacity Relative to Service Conductors. The 

feeder conductor ampacity shall not be less than that of 
the service conductors where the feeder conductors carry 
the total load supplied by service conductors with an 
ampacity of 55 amperes or less. 

(4) Individual Dwelling Unit or Mobile Home 
Conductors. Feeder conductors for individual dwelling 
units or mobile homes need not be larger than service 
conductors. Paragraph 310.15(B)(6) shall be permitted 
to be used for conductor size. 

Informational Note No. 1: See Examples Dl through 
Dl 1 in Informative Annex D. 

Informational Note No. 2: Conductors for feeders as 
defined in Article 100, sized to prevent a voltage drop 
exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, 
heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such 
loads, and where the maximum total voltage drop on 
both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet 
does not exceed 5 percent, will provide reasonable 
efficiency of operation. 

Informational Note No. 3: See 210.19(A), 
Informational Note No. 4, for voltage drop for branch 
circuits. 

(B) Feeders over 600 Volts. The ampacity of 
conductors shall be in accordance with 310.15 and 
310.60 as applicable. Where installed, the size of the 
feeder-circuit grounded conductor shall not be smaller 
than that required by 250.122, except that 250.122(F) 
shall not apply where grounded conductors are run in 
parallel. Feeder conductors over 600 volts shall be sized 
in accordance with 215.2(B)(1), (B)(2), or (B)(3). 

(1) Feeders Supplying Transformers. The ampacity of 
feeder conductors shall not be less than the sum of the 
nameplate ratings of the transformers supplied when 
only transformers are supplied. 

(2) Feeders Supplying Transformers and Utilization 
Equipment. The ampacity of feeders supplying a 
combination of transformers and utilization equipment 
shall not be less than the sum of the nameplate ratings of 
the transformers and 125 percent of the designed 
potential load of the utilization equipment that will be 
operated simultaneously. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-59 



215.3 



ARTICLE 215 - FEEDERS 



(3) Supervised Installations. For supervised 
installations, feeder conductor sizing shall be permitted to 
be determined by qualified persons under engineering 
supervision. Supervised installations are defined as those 
portions of a facility where all of the following conditions 
are met: 

(1) Conditions of design and installation are provided 
under engineering supervision. 

(2) Qualified persons with documented training and 
experience in over 600-volt systems provide 
maintenance, monitoring, and servicing of the 
system. 

215.3 Overcurrent Protection. Feeders shall be 
protected against overcurrent in accordance with the 
provisions of Part 1 of Article 240. Where a feeder 
supplies continuous loads or any combination of 
continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rafing of the 
overcurrent device shall not be less than the 
noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the continuous 
load. 

Exception No. 1: Where the assembly, including the 
overcurrent devices protecting the feeder (s), is listed for 
operation at 100 percent of its rating, the ampere rating 
of the overcurrent device shall be permitted to be not less 
than the sum of the continuous load plus the 
noncontinuous load. 

Exception No. 2: Overcurrent protection for feeders over 
600 volts, nominal, shall comply with Part JM of Article 
240. 

215.4 Feeders with Common Neutral Conductor. 

(A) Feeders with Common Neutral Up to three sets of 
3-wire feeders or two sets of 4-wire or 5-wire feeders 
shall be permitted to utilize a common neutral. 

(B) In Metal Raceway or Enclosure. Where installed in 
a metal raceway or other metal enclosure, all conductors 
of all feeders using a common neutral conductor shall be 
enclosed within the same raceway or other enclosure as 
required in 300.20. 

215.5 Diagrams of Feeders. If required by the authority 
having jurisdiction, a diagram showing feeder details shall 
be provided prior to the installation of the feeders. Such a 
diagram shall show the area in square feet of the building 
or other structure supplied by each feeder, the total 
calculated load before applying demand factors, the 
demand factors used, the calculated load afi;er applying 
demand factors, and the size and type of conductors to be 
used. 

215.6 Feeder Equipment Grounding Conductor. 

Where a feeder supphes branch circuits in which 
equipment grounding conductors are required, the feeder 
shall include or provide an equipment grounding 
conductor in accordance with the provisions of 250.134, 
to which the equipment grounding conductors of the 



branch circuits shall be connected. Where the feeder 
supplies a separate building or structure, the requirements 
of250.32(B) shall apply. 

215.7 Ungrounded Conductors Tapped from 
Grounded Systems. Two-wire dc circuits and ac circuits 
of two or more ungrounded conductors shall be permitted 
to be tapped from the ungrounded conductors of circuits 
having a grounded neutral conductor. Switching devices 
in each tapped circuit shall have a pole in each 
ungrounded conductor. 

215.9 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for 
Personnel. Feeders supplying 15- and 20-ampere 
receptacle branch circuits shall be permitted to be 
protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter in lieu of 
the provisions for such interrupters as specified in 210.8 
and590.6(A). 

215.10 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Each 
feeder disconnect rated 1000 amperes or more and 
installed on solidly grounded wye electrical systems of 
more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 
volts phase-to-phase, shall be provided with ground-fauh 
protection of equipment in accordance with the provisions 
of230.95. 

Informational Note: For buildings that contain health 
care occupancies, see the requirements of 517.17. 

Exception No. 1: The provisions of this section shall not 
apply to a disconnecting means for a continuous 
industrial process where a nonorderly shutdown will 
introduce additional or increased hazards. 

Exception No. 2: The provisions of this section shall not 
apply if ground fault protection of equipment is provided 
on the supply side of the feeder and on the load side of 
any transformer supplying the feeder. 

215.11 Circuits Derived from Autotransformers. 

Feeders shall not be derived from autotransformers unless 
the system supplied has a grounded conductor that is 
electrically connected to a grounded conductor of the 
system supplying the autotrans former. 

Exception No. 1: An autotransformer shall be permitted 
without the connection to a grounded conductor where 
transforming from a nominal 208 volts to a nominal 240- 
volt supply or similarly from 240 volts to 208 volts. 

Exception No. 2: In industrial occupancies, where 
conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that 
only qualified persons service the installation, 
autotransformers shall be permitted to supply nominal 
600'volt loads from nominal 480-volt systems, and 480- 
volt loads from nominal 600-volt systems, without the 
connection to a similar grounded conductor. 

215.12 Identification for Feeders. 

(A) Grounded Conductor. The grounded conductor of a 
feeder shall be idenfified in accordance with 200.6. 



70-60 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



220.14 



(B) Equipment Grounding Conductor. The equipment 
grounding conductor shall be identified in accordance 
with 250. 119. 

(C) Ungrounded Conductors. Where the premises 
wiring system has feeders supplied from more than one 
nominal voltage system, each ungrounded conductor of a 
feeder shall be identified by phase or line and system at 
all termination, connection, and splice points. The means 
of identification shall be permitted to be by separate color 
coding, marking tape, tagging, or other approved means. 
The method utilized for conductors originating within 
each feeder panelboard or similar feeder distribution 
equipment shall be documented in a manner that is readily 
available or shall be permanently posted at each feeder 
panelboard or similar feeder distribution equipment. 

ARTICLE220 

Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service 
Calculations 

I. General 

220.1 Scope. 

This article provides requirements for calculating branch- 
circuit, feeder, and service loads. Part I provides for 
general requirements for calculation methods. Part II 
provides calculation methods for branch-circuit loads. 
Parts III and IV provide calculation methods for feeders 
and services. Part V provides calculation methods for 
farms. 

Informational Note: See Figure 220.1 for 
information on the organization of Article 220. 

220.3 Application of Other Articles. 

In other articles applying to the calculation of loads in 
specialized applications, there are requirements provided 
in Table 220.3 that are in addition to, or modifications of, 
those within this article. 

220.5 Calculations. 

(A) Voltages. Unless other voltages are specified, for 
purposes of calculating branch-circuit and feeder loads, 
nominal system voltages of 120, 120/240, 208Y/120, 240, 
347, 480Y/277, 480, 600Y/347, and 600 volts shall be 
used. 

(B) Fractions of an Ampere. Calculations shall N 
pcnnilted to be rounded to the nearest whole anipere, wilhl 
decimal fractions smaller than 0.5 dropped, 

II. Branch-Circuit Load Calculations 

220.10 General. 

Branch-circuit loads shall be calculated as shown in 
220.12, 220.14, and 220.16. 



Part I General 



Part H Branch-circuit load calculations 



Part 11! 
Feeder and 
service load 
calculations 



220.61 
Neutral 
Loads 



Part fV 

Optional 

feeder and 

service load 

caiculations 



Farm dwellings 
only 



Farm dwellings 
only 



Part V Farm load calculations 



Figure 220.1 Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service 
Calculation Methods. 



220.12 Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies. 

A unit load of not less than that specified in Table 220,12 
for occupancies specified therein shall constitute the 
minimum lighting load. The floor area for each floor shall 
be calculated from the outside dimensions of the building, 
dwelling unit, or other area involved. For dwelling units, 
the calculated floor area shall not include open porches, 
garages, or unused or unfinished spaces not adaptable for 
future use. 

Informational Note: The unit values herein are based on 
minimum load conditions and 1 00 percent power factor 
and may not provide sufficient capacity for the 
installation contemplated. 

220.14 Other Loads — All Occupancies. 

In all occupancies, the minimum load for each outlet for 
general -use receptacles and outlets not used for general 
illumination shall not be less than that calculated in 
220.14(A) through (L), the loads shown being based on 
nominal branch-circuit voltages. 

Exception: The loads of outlets serving switchboards and 
switching frames in telephone exchanges shall he waived 
from the calculations, 

(A) Specific Appliances or Loads. An outlet for a 
specific appliance or other load not covered in 220.14(B) 
through (L) shall be calculated based on the ampere rating 
of the appliance or load served. 

(B) Electric Dryers and Electric Cooking Appliances 

in Dwelling Units* Load calculations shall be permitted 
as specified in 220.54 for electric dryers and in 220.55 for 
electric ranges and other cooking appliances. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-61 



220.14 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



Table 220.3 Additional Load Calculation References 



Calculation 


Article 


Section (or Part) 


Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment, Branch-Circuit 
Conductor Sizing 


440 


Part IV 


Cranes and Hoists, Rating and Size of Conductors 


610 


610.14 


Electric Welders, ampacity calculations 


630 


630T1, 630.31 


Electrically Driven or Controlled Irrigation Machines 


675 


675.7(A), 675.22(A) 


Electrified truck parking space 


626 




Electrolytic Cell Lines 


668 


668.3(C) 


Electroplating, Branch-Circuit Conductor Sizing 


669 


669.5 


Elevator Feeder Demand Factors 


620 


620.14 


Fire Pumps, Voltage Drop (mandatory calculation) 


695 


695.7 


Fixed Electric Heating Equipment for Pipelines and Vessels, Branch- 
Circuit Sizing 


427 


427.4 


Fixed Electric Space Heating Equipment, Branch-Circuit Sizing 


424 


424.3 


Fixed Outdoor Electric Deicing and Snow-Melting Equipment, 
Branch-Circuit Sizing 


426 


426.4 


Industrial Machinery, Supply Conductor Sizing 


670 


670.4(A) 


Marinas and Boatyards, Feeder and Service Load Calculations 


555 


555.12 


Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks, Total 
Load for Determining Power Supply 


550 


550.18(B) 


Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks, 
Allowable Demand Factors for Park Electrical Wiring Systems 


550 


550.31 


Motion Picture and Television Studios and Similar Locations - Sizing 
of Feeder Conductors for Television Studio Sets 


530 


530.19 


Motors, Feeder Demand Factor 


430 


430.26 


Motors, Multimotor and Combination-Load Equipment 


430 


430.25 


Motors, Several Motors or a Motor(s) and Other Load(s) 


430 


430.24 


Over 600 Volt Branch Circuit Calculations 


210 


210T9(B) 


Over 600 Volt Feeder Calculations 


215 


215.2(B) 


Phase Converters, Conductors 


455 


455.6 


Recreational Vehicle Parks, Basis of Calculations 


551 


551.73(A) 


Sensitive Electrical Equipment, Voltage Drop (mandatory calculation) 


647 


647.4(D) 


Solar Photovoltaic Systems, Circuit Sizing and Current 


690 


690.8 


Storage-T3/pe Water Heaters 


422 


422.11(E) 


Theaters, Stage Switchboard Feeders 


520 


520.27 



(C) Motor Loads. Outlets for motor loads shall be 
calculated in accordance with the requirements in 430.22, 
430.24, and 440.6. 

(D) Luminaires. An outlet supplying lurainaire(s) shall 
be calculated based on the maximum volt-ampere rating 
of the equipment and lamps for which the luminaire(s) is 
rated. 

(E) Heavy-Duty Lampholders. Outlets for heavy-duty 
lampholders shall be calculated at a minimum of 600 volt- 
amperes. 



(F) Sign and Outline Lighting. Sign and outline lighting 
outlets shall be calculated at a minimum of 1200 volt- 
amperes for each required branch circuit specified in 
600.5(A). 

(G) Siiow Windows. Show windows shall be calculated 
in accordance with either of the following: 

(1) The unit load per outlet as required in other 
provisions of this section 

(2) At 200 volt-amperes per 300 mm (1 ft) of show window 



70-62 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



220.18 



I Table 220.12 General Lighting Loads by Occupancy 



Unit Load 




Volt- 


Volt- 




Amperes 


Amperes 


Type of Occupancy 


per Square 


per Square 




Meter 


Foot 


Ai-mories and auditoriums 


11 


1 


Banks 


39b 


3V^2b 


Barber shops and beauty 


33 


3 


parlors 






Churches 


11 


1 


Clubs 


22 


2 


Court rooms 


22 


2 


Dwelling unitsa 


33 


3 


Garages — commercial 


6 


V2 


(storage) 






Hospitals 


22 


2 


Hotels and motels, including 


22 


2 


apartment houses without 






provision for cooking by 






tenants' 






Industrial commercial (loft) 


22 


2 


buildings 






Lodge rooms 


17 


P/2 


Office buildings 


39b 


V/^ 


Restaurants 


22 


2 


Schools 


33 


3 


Stores 


33 


3 


Warehouses (storage) 


3 


% 


In any of the preceding 






occupancies except one- 






family dwellings and 






individual dwelling units 






of two-family and 






multi family dwellings: 






Assembly halls and 


11 


1 


auditoriums 






Halls, corridors, closets, 


6 


Vi 


stairways 






Storage spaces 


3 


Va 



aSee220.14(J). 
bSee220.14(K). 



(H) Fixed Muitioutlet Assemblies. Fixed multioutlet 
assemblies used in other than dwelling units or the guest 
rooms or guest suites of hotels or motels shall be 
calculated in accordance with (H)(1) or (H)(2). For the 
purposes of this section, the calculation shall be permitted 
to be based on the portion that contains receptacle outlets. 

(1) Where appliances are unlikely to be used 
simultaneously, each 1.5 m (5 ft) or fraction thereof 
of each separate and continuous length shall be 
considered as one outlet of not less than 180 volt- 
amperes. 

(2) Where appliances are likely to be used 
simultaneously, each 300 mm (1 ft) or fraction 
thereof shall be considered as an outlet of not less 
than 180 volt-amperes. 



(I) Receptacle Outlets. Except as covered in 220.14(J) 
and (K), receptacle outlets shall be calculated at not less 
than 180 volt-amperes for each single or for each multiple 
receptacle on one yoke. A single piece of equipment 
consisting of a multiple receptacle comprised of four or 
more receptacles shall be calculated at not less than 90 
volt-amperes per receptacle. This provision shall not be 
applicable to the receptacle outlets specified in 
210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2). 

(J) Dwelling Occupancies. In one-family, two-family, 
and multifamily dwellings and in guest rooms or guest 
suites of hotels and motels, the outlets specified in (J)(l), 
(J)(2), and (J)(3) are included in the general lighting load 
calculations of 220.12. No additional load calculations 
shall be required for such outlets. 

(1) All general-use receptacle outlets of 20-ampere rating 
or less, including receptacles connected to the circuits 
in 210.1 1(C)(3) 

(2) The receptacle outlets specified in 210.52(E) and (G) 

(3) The lighting outlets specified in 210.70(A) and (B) 
(K) Banks and Office Buildings. In banks or office 
buildings, the receptacle loads shall be calculated to be 
the larger of (1) or (2): 

(1) The calculated load from 220.14(1) 

(2) 1 1 vo It-ampere s/m^ or 1 volt-ampere/ft^ 

(L) Other Outlets. Other outlets not covered in 
220.14(A) through (K) shall be calculated based on 180 
volt-amperes per outlet. 
220.16 Loads for Additions to Existing Installations. 

(A) Dwelling Units. Loads added to an existing dwelling 
unit(s) shall comply with the following as applicable: 

(1) Loads for structural additions to an existing dwelling 
unit or for a previously unwired portion of an existing 

dwelling unit, either of which exceeds 46.5 m^ (500 

ft^), shall be calculated in accordance with 220.12 
and 220.14. 

(2) Loads for new circuits or extended circuits in 
previously wired dwelling units shall be calculated in 
accordance with either 220.12 or 220.14, as 
applicable. 

(B) Other Than Dwelling Units. Loads for new circuits 
or extended circuits in other than dwelling units shall be 
calculated in accordance with either 220.12 or 220.14, as 
applicable. 

220.18 Maximum Loads. The total load shall not exceed 
the rating of the branch circuit, and it shall not exceed the 
maximum loads specified in 220.18(A) through (C) under 
the conditions specified therein. 

(A) Motor-Operated and Combination Loads. Where a 
circuit supplies only motor-operated loads. Article 430 shall 
apply. Where a circuit supplies only air-conditioning 
equipment, refrigerating equipment, or both. Article 440 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-63 



220.40 



ARTICLE 220 ~ BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



shall apply. For circuits supplying loads consisting of motor- 
operated utilization equipment that is fastened in place and 
has a motor larger than % hp in combination with other 
loads, the total calculated load shall be based on 1 25 percent 
of the largest motor load plus the sum of the other loads. 

(B) Inductive and LED Lighting Loads. For circuits 
supplying lighting units that have ballasts, transformers, 
autotransformers, or LED drivers, the calculated load shall 
be based on the total ampere ratings of such units and not 
on the total watts of the lamps. 

(C) Range Loads. It shall be pennissible to apply demand 
factors for range loads in accordance with Table 220.55, 
including Note 4. 

Ill Feeder and Service Load Calculations 

220.40 General 

The calculated load of a feeder or service shall not be less 
than the sum of the loads on the branch circuits supplied, as 
determined by Part II of this article, after any applicable 
demand factors permitted by Part III or IV or required by 
Part V have been applied. 

Informational Note: See Examples Dl(a) through DIO in 
Informative Annex D. See 220.18(B) for the maximum 
load in amperes pennitted for lighting units operating at 
less than 100 percent power factor. 

220.42 General Lighting. 

The demand factors specified in Table 220.42 shall apply 
to that portion of the total branch-circuit load calculated for 
general illumination. They shall not be applied in 
determining the number of branch circuits for general 
illumination. 

220.43 Show-Window and Track Lighting. 

(A) Show Windows. For show-window lighting, a load of 
not less than 660 volt-amperes/linear meter or 200 volt- 
amperes/linear foot shall be included for a show window, 
measured horizontally along its base. 

Informational Note: See 220.14(G) for branch 
circuits supplying show windows. 

(B) Track Lighting. For track lighting in other than 
dwelling units or guest rooms or guest suites of hotels or 
motels, an additional load of 150 volt-amperes shall be 
included for every 600 mm (2 ft) of lighting track or 
fraction thereof. Where multicircuit track is installed, the 
load shall be considered to be divided equally between the 
track circuits. 

Exception: If the track Ughtm^ is supplied through a 
device that limits (he cufrent fo the track, the load shall he 
permitted to he calculated hosed on the rating of the device 
used to limit the currents 



Table ll^Al Lighting Load Demand Factors 





Portion of 




Type of 
Occupancy 


Lighting Load to 
Which Demand 
Factor Applies 
(Volt-Amperes) 


Demand Factor 
(%) 


Dwelling units 


First 3000 or less 

at 


100 




From 3001 to 


35 




120,000 at 






Remainder over 


25 




120,000 at 




Hospitals* 


First 50,000 or less 
at 


40 




Remainder over 


20 




50,000 at 




Hotels and motels, 


First 20,000 or less 


50 


including 


at 




apartment 
houses without 
provision for 
cooking by 
tenants'^ 


From 20,001 to 
100,000 at 
Remainder over 
100,000 at 


40 
30 


Warehouses 


First 12,500 or less 


100 


(storage) 


at 






Remainder over 


50 




12,500 at 




All others 


Total volt-amperes 


100 



The demand factors of this table shall not apply to the calculated 
load of feeders or services supplying areas in hospitals, hotels, and 
motels where the entire lighting is likely to be used at one time, as in 
operating rooms, ballrooms, or dining rooms. 
[OSHPD 1] The factors of Table 220.42 shall not be applied 
in the following areas: surgery suite, including recovety; 
emergency department, kitchen, food service, dining, critical 
care areas as defined in Article 517, elevator lobbies, 
corridors, inpatient nurse stations, and loads connected to the 
life safety branch or the critical branch of the emergency 
system. Administrative areas shall be included in 'All others " 
Type of Occupancy. 

220A4 Receptacle Loads — Other Than Dwelling 

Units. Receptacle loads calculated in accordance with 
220.14(H) and (I) shall be permitted to be made subject to 
the demand factors given in Table 220.42 or Table 220.44. 

Table 220.44 Demand Factors for Non-Dwelling Receptacle 
Loads 



Portion of Receptacle Load to 
Which Demand Factor Applies 
(Volt-Amperes) 



Demand Factor (%) 



First 10 kVA or less at 
Remainder over 10 kVA at 



100 
50 



c 

A 
C 
A 
C 
A 
C 
A 



220.50 Motors. Motor loads shall be calculated in 
accordance with 430.24, 430.25, and 430.26 and with 
440.6 for hermetic refrigerant motor compressors. 



70-64 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



220,60 



220.51 Fixed Electric Space Heating. Fixed electric 
space-heating loads shall be calculated at 100 percent of 
the total connected load. However, in no case shall a 
feeder or service load current rating be less than the rating 
of the largest branch circuit supplied. 

Exception: Where reduced loading of the conductors 
results from units operating on duty-cycle, intermittently, 
or from all units not operating at the same time, the 
authority having jurisdiction may grant permission for 
feeder and service conductors to have an ampacity less 
than 100 percent, provided the conductors have an 
ampacity for the load so determined. 

220.52 Small-Appliance and Laundry Loads — 
Dwelling Unit 

(A) Small-Appliance Circuit Load. In each dwelling 
unit, the load shall be calculated at 1500 volt-amperes for 
each 2-wire small-appliance branch circuit as covered by 
210.11(C)(1). Where the load is subdivided through two 
or more feeders, the calculated load for each shall include 
not less than 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire small- 
appHance branch circuit. These loads shall be permitted to 
be included with the general lighting load and subjected 
to the demand factors provided in Table 220.42. 

Exception: The individual branch circuit permitted by 
210.52(B)(1), Exception No. 2, shall be permitted to be 
excluded from the calculation required by 220.52. 

(B) Laundry Circuit Load. A load of not less than 1500 
volt-amperes shall be included for each 2-wire laundry 
branch circuit installed as covered by 210.11(C)(2). This 
load shall be permitted to be included with the general 
lighting load and subjected to the demand factors 
provided in Table 220.42. 

220.53 Appliance Load — Dwelling Unit(s). It shall be 
permissible to apply a demand factor of 75 percent to the 
nameplate rating load of four or more appliances fastened 
in place, other than electric ranges, clothes dryers, space- 
heating equipment, or air-conditioning equipment, that are 
served by the same feeder or service in a one-family, two- 
family, or multifamily dwelling. 

220.54 Electric Clothes Dryers — Dwelling Unit(s). 
The load for household electric clothes dryers in a dwelling 
unit(s) shall be either 5000 watts (volt-amperes) or the 
nameplate rating, whichever is larger, for each dryer 
served. The use of the demand factors in Table 220.54 shall 
be permitted. Where two or more single-phase dryers are 
supplied by a 3-phase, 4-wire feeder or service, the total 
load shall be calculated on the basis of twice the maximum 
number connected between any two phases. Kilovolt- 
amperes (kVA) shall be considered equivalent to kilowatts 
(kW) for loads calculated in this section. 

220.55 Electric Ranges and Other Cooking Appliances 
— Dwelling Unit(s). The load for household electric 
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking 
units, and other 



Table 220.54 Demand Factors for Household Electric 
Clothes Dryers 



Number of 




Demand Factor 


Dryers 




(%) 


1-4 




100 


5 




85 


6 




75 


7 




65 


8 




60 


9 




55 


10 




50 


11 




47 


12-23 


47% minus 
exceeding 1 1 


1 1% for each dryer 


24^2 


35% minus 
exceeding 23 


0.5%) for each dryer 


43 and over 




25% 



household cooking appliances individually rated in excess 
of VA kW shall be permitted to be calculated in 
accordance with Table 220.55. Kilovolt-amperes (kVA) 
shall be considered equivalent to kilowatts (kW) for loads 
calculated under this section. 

Where two or more single-phase ranges are supplied 
by a 3-phase, 4-wire feeder or service, the total load shall 
be calculated on the basis of twice the maximum number 
connected between any two phases. 

Informational Note No, 1: See Example D5(A) in 
Informative Annex D. 



Infonnational Note No. 2: See Table 220.56 
commercial cooking equipment. 



for 



Informational Note No. 
Informative Annex D. 



3: See the examples in 



220.56 Kitchen Equipment — Other Than Dwelling 
Unit(s). It shall be permissible to calculate the load for 
commercial electric cooking equipment, dishwasher 
booster heaters, water heaters, and other kitchen 
equipment in accordance with Table 220.56. These 
demand factors shall be applied to all equipment that has 
either thermostatic control or intermittent use as kitchen 
equipment. These demand factors shall not apply to 
space-heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment. 

However, in no case shall the feeder or service 
calculated load be less than the sum of the largest two 
kitchen equipment loads. 

220.60 Noncoincident Loads. Where it is unlikely that 
two or more noncoincident loads will be in use 
simultaneously, it shall be permissible to use only the 
largest load(s) that will be used at one time for calculating 
the total load of a feeder or service. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-65 



220.60 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



Table 220.55 Demand Factors and Loads for Household Electric Ranges, Wall-Mounted Ovens, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units, and 
Other Household Cooking Appliances over VA kW Rating (Column C to be used in all cases except as otherwise permitted in Note 3.) 



Number of 
Appliances 



Demand Factor (%) (See Notes) 



Column A 
(Less than SVi kW Rating) 



Column B 

(3^2 kW through SV4 kW 
Rating) 



Column C 

Maximum Demand (kW) 

(See Notes) (Not over 12 kW Rating) 



80 
75 
70 
66 
62 



80 
65 
55 
50 

45 



11 
14 
17 
20 



6 

7 
8 
9 
10 



59 
56 
53 
51 
49 



43 
40 
36 

35 
34 



21 

22 
23 
24 
25 



12 
13 
14 
15 



47 
45 
43 
41 
40 



32 
32 

32 
32 
32 



26 

27 
28 
29 
30 



16 
17 
18 
19 
20 



39 

38 
37 
36 

35 



28 
28 
28 
28 
28 



31 

32 
33 
34 
35 



21 
22 
23 
24 

25 



34 
33 
32 
31 
30 



26 
26 
26 
26 
26 



36 

37 
38 
39 
40 



26-30 
31-40 
41-50 
51-60 
6\ and over 



30 
30 
30 
30 
30 



24 
22 
20 
18 
16 



1 5 kW + 1 kW for each range 
25 kW + Va kW for each range 



Notes: 

1 . Over 12 kW through 27 kW ranges all of same rating. For ranges individually rated more than 12 kW but not more than 27 kW, the 
maximum demand in Column C shall be increased 5 percent for each additional kilowatt of rating or major fraction thereof by which the 
rating of individual ranges exceeds 12 kW. 

2. Over SVa kW through 27 kW ranges of unequal ratings. For ranges individually rated more than SVa kW and of different ratings, but 
none exceeding 27 kW, an average value of rating shall be calculated by adding together the ratings of all ranges to obtain the total 
connected load (using 12 kW for any range rated less than 12 kW) and dividing by the total number of ranges. Then the maximum 
demand in Column C shall be increased 5 percent for each kilowatt or major fraction thereof by which this average value exceeds 12 kW. 

3. Over PA kW through SVa kW. In lieu of the method provided in Column C, it shall be permissible to add the nameplate ratings of all 
household cooking appliances rated more than VA kW but not more than SVa kW and multiply the sum by the demand factors specified in 
Column A or Column B for the given number of appliances. Where the rating of cooking appliances falls under both Column A and 
Column B, the demand factors for each colunm shall be applied to the appliances for that column, and the results added together. 

4. Branch-Circuit Load. It shall be permissible to calculate the branch-circuit load for one range in accordance with Table 220.55. The 
branch-circuit load for one wall-mounted oven or one counter-mounted cooking unit shall be the nameplate rating of the appliance. The 
branch-circuit load for a counter-mounted cooking unit and not more than two wall-mounted ovens, all supplied from a single branch 
circuit and located in the same room, shall be calculated by adding the nameplate rating of the individual appliances and treating this total 
as equivalent to one range. 

5. This table shall also apply to household cooking appliances rated over VA kW and used in instructional programs. 



70-66 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



220.82 



Table 220.56 Demand Factors for Kitchen Equipment — Other 
Than Dwelling Unit(s) 



Number of Units of 


Demand Factor 


Equipment 


(%) 


1 


100 


2 


100 


3 


90 



6 and over 



80 
70 
65 



220.61 Feeder or Service Neutral Load. 

(A) Basic Calculation. The feeder or service neutral load 
shall be the maximum unbalance of the load determined 
by this article. The maximum unbalanced load shall be the 
maximum net calculated load between the neutral 
conductor and any one ungrounded conductor. 
Exception: For 3-wire, 2-phase or 5-wire, 2-phase 
systems, the maximum unbalanced load shall be the 
maximum net calculated load between the neutral 
conductor and any one ungrounded conductor multiplied 
by 140 percent. 

(B) Permitted Reductions. A service or feeder supplying 
the following loads shall be permitted to have an 
additional demand factor of 70 percent applied to the 
amount in 220.61(B)(1) or portion of the amount in 
220.61(B)(2) determined by the basic calculation: 

(1) A feeder or service supplying household electric 
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units, and electric dryers, where the 
maximum unbalanced load has been determined in 
accordance with Table 220.55 for ranges and Table 
220.54 for dryers 

(2) That portion of the unbalanced load in excess of 200 
amperes where the feeder or service is supplied from 
a 3-wire dc or single-phase ac system; or a 4-wire, 3- 
phase, 3-wire, 2-phase system; or a 5-wire, 2-phase 
system 

(C) Prohibited Reductions. There shall be no reduction 
of the neutral or grounded conductor capacity applied to 
the amount in 220.61(C)(1), or portion of the amount in 
(C)(2), from that determined by the basic calculation: 

(1) Any portion of a 3-wire circuit consisting of 2 
ungrounded conductors and the neutral conductor of 
a 4-wire, 3 -phase, wye-connected system 

(2) That portion consisting of nonlinear loads supplied 
from a 4-wire, wye-connected, 3 -phase system 
Informational Note No. 1: See Examples Dl(a), Dl(b), 
D2(b), D4(a), and D5(a) in Informative Annex D. 
Informational Note No. 2: A 3-phase, 4-wire, wye- 
connected power system used to supply power to 
nonUnear loads may necessitate that the power system 
design allow for the possibility of high harmonic 
neutral-conductor currents. 



IV. Optional Feeder and Service Load Calculations 

220.80 General. Optional feeder and service load 
calculations shall be permitted in accordance with Part IV. 
220.82 Dwelling Unit. 

(A) Feeder and Service Load. This section applies to a 
dwelling unit having the total connected load served by a 
single 120/240-volt or 208Y/120-volt set of 3-wire service or 
feeder conductors with an ampacity of 100 or greater. It shall 
be permissible to calculate the feeder and service loads in 
accordance with this section instead of the method specified 
in Part III of this article. The calculated load shall be the 
result of adding the loads from 220.82(B) and (C). Feeder 
and service-entrance conductors whose calculated load is 
determined by this optional calculation shall be permitted to 
have the neutral load determined by 220.61 . 

(B) General Loads. The general calculated load shall be not 
less than 100 percent of the first 10 kVA plus 40 percent of 
the remainder of the following loads: 

(1) 33 volt-amperes/m^ or 3 volt-amperes/ft^ for general 
lighting and general-use receptacles. The floor area for 
each floor shall be calculated from the outside 
dimensions of the dwelling unit. The calculated floor 
area shall not include open porches, garages, or unused 
or unfinished spaces not adaptable for future use. 

(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- 
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch circuit 
covered in 210.1 1(C)(1) and (C)(2). 

(3) The naraeplate rating of the following: 

a. All appliances that are fastened in place, 
permanently connected, or located to be on a 
specific circuit 

b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units 

c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the laundry 
branch circuit specified in item (2) 

d. Water heaters 

(4) The nameplate ampere or kVA rating of all pennanently 
connected motors not included in item (3). 

(C) Heating and Air-Con ditioning Load. The largest of the 
following six selections (load in kVA) shall be included: 

(1) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the air 
conditioning and cooling. 

(2) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heat pump 
when the heat pump is used without any supplemental 
electric heating. 

(3) 100 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of the heat pump 
compressor and 65 percent of the supplemental electric 
heating for central electric space-heating systems. If the 
heat pump compressor is prevented from operating at 
the same time as the supplementary heat, it does not 
need to be added to the supplementary heat for the total 
central space heating load. 



20 J 3 California Electrical Code 



70-67 



220.83 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



(4) 65 percent of the nameplate ratmg(s) of electric space 
heating if less than four separately controlled units. 

(5) 40 percent of the nameplate rating(s) of electric space 
heating if four or more separately controlled units. 

(6) 100 percent of the nameplate ratings of electric 
thermal storage and other heating systems where the 
usual load is expected to be continuous at the full 
nameplate value. Systems qualifying under this 
selection shall not be calculated under any other 
selection in 220.82(C). 

220.83 Existing Dwelling Unit. 

This section shall be permitted to be used to determine if 
the existing service or feeder is of sufficient capacity to 
serve additional loads. Where the dwelling unit is served 
by a 120/240-voh or 208Y/120-volt, 3-wire service, it 
shall be permissible to calculate the total load in 
accordance with 220.83(A) or (B). 

(A) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or 
Electric Space-Heating Equipment Is Not to Be 

Installed. The following percentages shall be used for 
existing and additional new loads. 



Load (kVA) 



Percent of Load 



First 8 kVA of load at 
Remainder of load at 



100 
40 



Load calculations shall include the following: 

(1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 

volt-amperes/m^ or 3 volt- amperes/ft^ as determined 
by 220.12 

(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- 
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch 
circuit covered in 210.1 1(C)(1) and (C)(2) 

(3) The nameplate rating of the following: 

a. All appliances that are fastened in place, 
permanently connected, or located to be on a 
specific circuit 

b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units 

c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the 
laundry branch circuit specified in item (2) 

d. Water heaters 

(B) Where Additional Air-Conditioning Equipment or 
Electric Space-Heating Equipment Is to Be Installed. 

The following percentages shall be used for existing and 
additional new loads. The larger connected load of air- 
conditioning or space-heating, but not both, shall be used. 



Load 


Percent of Load 


Air-conditioning equipment 


100 


Central electric space heating 


100 


Less than four separately controlled 


100 


space-heating units 




First 8 kVA of ail other loads 


100 


Remainder of all other loads 


40 



Other loads shall include the following: 

(1) General lighting and general-use receptacles at 33 

volt-amp ere s/m^ or 3 volt-amperes/ft^ as determined 
by 220.12 

(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- 
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch 
circuit covered in 210.11(C)(1) and (C)(2) 

(3) The nameplate rating of the following: 

a. All appliances that are fastened in place, 
permanently connected, or located to be on a 
specific circuit 

b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units 

c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the 
laundry branch circuit specified in (2) 

d. Water heaters 
220.84 Multifamily Dwelling. 

(A) Feeder or Service Load. It shall be permissible to 
calculate the load of a feeder or service that supplies three 
or more dwelling units of a multifamily dwelling in 
accordance with Table 220.84 instead of Part III of this 
article if all the following conditions are met: 

(1) No dwelling unit is supplied by more than one feeder. 

(2) Each dwelling unit is equipped with electric cooking 
equipment. 

Exception: When the calculated load for multifamily 
dwellings without electric cooking in Part III of this 
article exceeds that calculated under Part IV for the 
identical load plus electric cooking (based on 8 kW per 
unit), the lesser of the two loads shall be permitted to be 
used. 

(3) Each dwelling unit is equipped with either electric 
space heating or air conditioning, or both. Feeders 
and service conductors whose calculated load is 
determined by this optional calculation shall be 
permitted to have the neutral load determined by 
220.61. 

(B) House Loads. House loads shall be calculated in 
accordance with Part III of this article and shall be in 
addition to the dwelling unit loads calculated in 
accordance with Table 220.84. 



70-68 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



220.87 



Table 220.84 Optional Calculations — Demand Factors for 
Three or More Multifamily Dwelling Units 



Number of 


Demand Factor 


Dwelling Units 


(%) 


3-5 


45 


6-7 


44 


8-10 


43 



11 

12-13 
14-15 
16-17 
18-20 



42 
41 
40 
39 
38 



21 

22-23 
24-25 
26-27 
28-30 



37 
36 
35 
34 
33 



31 

32-33 
34-36 
37-38 
39-42 



32 
31 
30 
29 

28 



43-45 
46-50 
51-55 
56-61 
62 and over 



27 
26 
25 
24 

23 



(C) Calculated Loads. The calculated load to which the 
demand factors of Table 220.84 apply shall include the 
following: 

(1) 33 volt-amperes/m^ or 3 volt-amperes/ft^ for general 
lighting and general-use receptacles 

(2) 1500 volt-amperes for each 2-wire, 20-ampere small- 
appliance branch circuit and each laundry branch 
circuit covered in 210.1 1(C)(1) and (C)(2) 

(3) The nameplate rating of the following: 

a. All appliances that are fastened in place, 
permanently connected, or located to be on a 
specific circuit 

b. Ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units 

c. Clothes dryers that are not connected to the 
laundry branch circuit specified in item (2) 

d. Water heaters 

(4) The nameplate ampere or kVA rating of all 
permanently connected motors not included in item (3) 

(5) The larger of the air-conditioning load or the fixed 
electric space-heating load 

220.85 Two Dwelling Units. Where two dwelling units 
are supplied by a single feeder and the calculated load 
under Part HI of this article exceeds that for three 
identical units calculated under 220.84, the lesser of the 
two loads shall be permitted to be used. 



220.86 Schools. The calculation of a feeder or service 
load for schools shall be permitted in accordance with 
Table 220.86 in lieu of Part III of this article where 
equipped with electric space heating, air conditioning, 
or both. The connected load to which the demand 
factors of Table 220.86 apply shall include all of the 
interior and exterior lighting, power, water heating, 
cooking, other loads, and the larger of the air- 
conditioning load or space-heating load within the 
building or structure. 

Feeders and service conductors whose calculated 
load is determined by this optional calculation shall be 
permitted to have the neutral load determined by 
220.61. Where the building or structure load is 
calculated by this optional method, feeders within the 
building or structure shall have ampacity as permitted 
in Part 111 of this article; however, the ampacity of an 
individual feeder shall not be required to be larger than 
the ampacity for the entire building. 

This section shall not apply to portable classroom 
buildings. 

Table 220.86 Optional Method — Demand Factors for 
Feeders and Service Conductors for Schools 



Connected Load 


Demand Factor 

(%) 


First 33 VA/m2 
Plus, 


(3 VA/ft2) at 


100 


Over 33 throuiih 
220 VA/m^ Plus, 


(3 ihraugb 20 

VA/ft2) at 


75 


Remainder over 

220 VA/m' 


(20 VA/ft2) at 


25 



220.87 Determining Existing Loads. The calculation of 
a feeder or service load for existing installations shall be 
permitted to use actual maximum demand to determine 
the existing load under all of the following conditions: 

(1) The maximum demand data is available for a 1-year 
period. 

Exception: If the maximum demand data for a 1-year 
period is not available, the calculated load shall be 
permitted to be based on the maximum demand 
(measure of average power demand over a 15-minute 
period) continuously recorded over a minimum 30-day 
period using a recording ammeter or power meter 
connected to the highest loaded phase of the feeder or 
service, based on the initial loading at the start of the 
recording. The recording shall reflect the maximum 
demand of the feeder or service by being taken when the 
building or space is occupied and shall include by 
measurement or calculation the larger of the heating or 
cooling equipment load, and other loads that may be 
periodic in nature due to seasonal or similar conditions. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-69 



220.88 



ARTICLE 220 - BRANCH-CIRCUIT, FEEDER, AND SERVICE CALCULATIONS 



(2) The maximum demand at 125 percent plus the new 
load does not exceed the ampacity of the feeder or 
rating of the service. 

(3) The feeder has overcurrent protection in accordance 
with 240.4, and the service has overload protection in 
accordance with 230.90. 

220.88 New Restaurants. 

Calculation of a service or feeder load, where the feeder 
serves the total load, for a new restaurant shall be 
permitted in accordance with Table 220.88 in lieu of Part 
III of this article. 

The overload protection of the service conductors 
shall be in accordance with 230.90 and 240.4. 

Feeder conductors shall not be required to be of 
greater ampacity than the service conductors. 

Service or feeder conductors whose calculated load is 
determined by this optional calculation shall be permitted 
to have the neutral load determined by 220.61. 

V. Farm Load Calculations 

220.100 General. 

Farm loads shall be calculated in accordance with Part V. 
220.102 Farm Loads — Buildings and Other Loads. 

(A) Dwelling Unit. The feeder or service load of a farm 
dwelling unit shall be calculated in accordance with the 
provisions for dwellings in Part 111 or IV of this article. 
Where the dwelling has electric heat and the farm has 
electric grain-drying systems, Part IV of this article shall 
not be used to calculate the dwelling load where the 
dwelling and farm loads are supplied by a common 
service. 

(B) Other Than Dwelling Unit. Where a feeder or 
service supplies a farm building or other load having two 
or more separate branch circuits, the load for feeders, 
service conductors, and service equipment shall be 
calculated in accordance with demand factors not less 
than indicated in Table 220.102. 



Table 220.102 Method for Calculating Farm Loads for 
Other Than Dwelling Unit 



Ampere Load at 240 Volts 
Maximum 



Demand Factor 
(%) 



The grealer of the following: 

All loads that ure cT^pccted to 
operate simultaneously, or 
125 percent of the full load 
current ot'lhe large^il motor, or 
First 60 amperes of the load 

Next 60 amperes of all other loads 

Remainder of other load 



100 



50 

25 



220.103 Farm Loads — Total. Where supplied by a 
common service, the total load of the farm for service 
conductors and service equipment shall be calculated in 
accordance with the farm dwelling unit load and demand 
factors specified in Table 220.103. Where there is 
equipment in two or more farm equipment buildings or 
for loads having the same function, such loads shall be 
calculated in accordance with Table 220.102 and shall be 
permitted to be combined as a single load in Table 
220.103 for calculating the total load. 

Table 220.103 Method for Calculating Total Farm Load 



Individual Loads Calculated in 
Accordance with Table 220.102 



Demand Factor (%) 



Largest load 
Second largest load 
Third largest load 
Remaining loads 



100 
75 
65 
50 



Note: To this total load, add the load of the farm dwelUng 
unit calculated in accordance with Part 111 or IV of this 
article. Where the dwelling has electric heat and the farm 
has electric grain-drying systems, Part IV of this article 
shall not be used to calculate the dwelling load. 



Table 220.88 Optional Method — Permitted Load Calculations for Service and Feeder Conductors for New Restaurants 



Total Connected 
Load (kVA) 



All Electric Restaurant 
Calculated Loads (kVA) 



Not All Electric Restaurant 
Calculated Loads (kVA) 



0-200 
201-325 
326-800 
Over 800 



80% 
10% (amount over 200) + 160.0 
50% (amount over 325) + 172.5 
50% (amount over 800) + 410.0 



100% 
50% (amount over 200) + 200.0 
45% (amount over 325) + 262.5 
20% (amount over 800) + 476.3 



Note: Add all eteclrical loads, meiudmii nom ricaiin^ and cooMng loads, to calculate the total connected load. Seieci the one demand factor 
diat applies from the table, ihetimultj ply the total connected load by this single demand factor. 



70-70 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



225.7 



ARTICLE 225 

Outside Branch Circuits and Feeden 

225.1 Scope. This article covers requirements for outside 
branch circuits and feeders run on or between buildings, 
structures, or poles on the premises; and electrical 
equipment and wiring for the supply of utilization 
equipment that is located on or attached to the outside of 
buildings, structures, or poles. 

Informational Note: For additional information 
on wiring over 600 volts, see ANSI C2-2007, 
National Electrical Safety Code. 

225.2 Definition. 

Substation. An enclosed assemblage of equipment (e.g.. 
Switches* circuit breakers, buses, and transformers) under 
tlie control of qualified persons, through which electric 
energy is passed for the purpose of switching or 
moditying its characteristics. 

2253 Other Articles. Application of other articles, 
including additional requirements to specific cases of 
equipment and conductors, is shown in Table 225. 3 i 

I. General 

9 

225.4 Conductor Covering. Where within 3.0 m (10 ft) of 
any building or structure other than supporting poles or 
towers, open individual (aerial) overhead conductors shall 
be insulated or covered. Conductors in cables or raceways, 
except Type MI cable, shall be of the rubber-covered type 
or thermoplastic type and, in wet locations, shall comply 
with 3 10.10(C). Conductors for festoon lighting shall be of 
the rubber-covered or thermoplastic type. 

Exception: Equipment grounding conductors and grounded 
circuit conductors shall be permitted to be bare or covered 
as specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code. 

225.5 Size of Conductors 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. 

The ampacity of outdoor branch-circuit and feeder 
conductors shall be in accordance with 310.15 based on 
loads as determined under 220. 10 and Part III of Article 220. 

225.6 Conductor Size and Support. 

(A) Overhead Spans. Open individual conductors shall 
not be smaller than the following: 

(1) For 600 volts, nominal, or less, 10 AWG copper or 8 
AWG aluminum for spans up to 15 m (50 ft) in 
length, and 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum for 
a longer span unless supported by a messenger wire 

(2) For over 600 volts, nominal, 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG 
aluminum where open individual conductors, and 8 
AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum where in cable 



Table 225.3 Other Articles 



Equipment/Conductors 



Article 



Branch circuits 


210 


Class I, Class 2, and Class 3 remote- 


725 


control, signaling, and power- 




limited circuits 




Communications circuits 


800 


Community antenna television and 


820 


radio distribution systems 




Conductors tbr general wiring 


310 


Electrically driven or controlled 


675 


irrigation machines 




Electric signs and outline lighting 


600 


Feeders 


215 


Fire alarm systems 


760 


Fixed outdoor electric deicing and 


426 


snow-melting equipment 




Floating buildings 


553 


Grounding bid bonding 


250 


Hazardous (classified) locations 


500 


Hazardous (classified) locations — 


510 


specific 




Marinas and boatyards 


555 


Messenger supported wiring 


396 


Mobile homes, manufactured 


550 


homes, and mobile home parks 




Open wiring on insulators 


398 


Over 600 volts, general 


490 


Overcurrent protection 


240 


Radio and television equipment 


810 


Services 


230 


Solar photovoltaic systems 


690 


Swimming pools, fountains, and 


680 


similar installations 




Use and identification of grounded 


200 


conductors 





(B) Festoon Lighting. Overhead conductors for festoon 
lighting shall not be smaller than 12 AWG unless the 
conductors are supported by messenger wires. In all spans 
exceeding 12 m (40 ft), the conductors shall be supported 
by messenger wire. The messenger wire shall be 
supported by strain insulators. Conductors or messenger 
wires shall not be attached to any fire escape, downspout, 
or plumbing equipment. 
225.7 Lighting Equipment Installed Outdoors. 

(A) General. For the supply of lighting equipment 
installed outdoors, the branch circuits shall comply with 
Article 210 and 225.7(B) through (D). 

(B) Common Neutral. The ampacity of the neutral 
conductor shall not be less than the maximum net 
calculated load current between the neutral conductor and 
all ungrounded conductors connected to any one phase of 
the circuit. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-71 



225.8 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



(C) 277 Volts to Ground. Circuits exceeding 120 volts, 
nominal, between conductors and not exceeding 277 
volts, nominal, to ground shall be permitted to supply 
luminaires for illumination of outdoor areas of industrial 
establishments, office buildings, schools, stores, and 
other commercial or public buildingsj 

(D) 600 Volts Between Conductors. Circuits exceeding 
277 volts, nominal, to ground and not exceeding 600 
volts, nominal, between conductors shall be permitted to 
supply the auxiliary equipment of electric-discharge 
lamps in accordance with 210.6(D)(1). 

225.8 CHlcuEatiOEi of Loads 600 Volts, NoniinaK pjr 
Less. 



(A) Branch Circuits. The load on outdoor branch 
circuits shall be as determined by 220,10. 

(B) Feeders. The load on outdoor feeders shall be as 
determined by Part fll of Article 220. 

225.10 Wiring on Buildings. The installation of outside 
wiring on surfaces of buildings shall be permitted for 
circuits of not over 600 volts, nominal, as open wiring 
on insulators, as multiconductor cable, as Type MC 
cable, as Type UF cable, as Type MI cable, as 
messenger- supported wiring, in rigid metal conduit, in 
intermediate metal conduit, in rigid polyvinyl chloride 
(P VC) conduit, in reinforced thermosetting resin conduit 
(RTRC), in cable trays, as cablebus, in wireways, in 
auxiliary gutters, in electrical metallic tubing, in flexible 
metal conduit, in liquidtight flexible metal conduit, in 
liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, and in busways. 
Circuits of over 600 volts, nominal, shall be installed as 
provided in 300.37. 

225.11 Circuit Exits and Entrances. Where outside 
branch and feeder circuits leave or enter a building, the 
requirements of 230.52 and 230.54 shall apply. 

225.12 Open-Conductor Supports. Open conductors 
shall be supported on glass or porcelain knobs, racks, 
brackets, or strain insulators. 

225.14 Open-Conductor Spacings. 

(A) 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of 600 
volts, nominal, or less, shall comply with the spacings 
provided in Table 230.51(C). 

(B) Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of over 600 
volts, nominal, shall comply with the spacings provided 
in 110.36 and 490.24. 

(C) Separation from Other Circuits. Open conductors 
shall be separated from open conductors of other circuits 
or systems by not less than 100 mm (4 in.). 



(D) Conductors on Poles. Conductors on poles shall 
have a separation of not less than 300 mm (1 ft) where not 
placed on racks or brackets. Conductors supported on 
poles shall provide a horizontal climbing space not less 
than the following: 

(1) Power conductors below communications conductors 
^750 mm (30 in.) 

(2) Power conductors alone or above communications 
conductors: 

a. 300 volts or less — 600 mm (24 in.) 

b. Over 300 volts — 750 mm (30 in.) 

(3) Communications conductors below power conductors 
— same as power conductors 

(4) Communications conductors alone — no requirement 

225.15 Supports over Buildings. Supports over a 
building shall be in accordance with 230.29. 

225.16 Attachment to Buildings. 

(A) Point of Attachment. The point of attachment to a 
building shall be in accordance with 230.26. 

(B) Means of Attachment. The means of attachment to a 
building shall be in accordance with 230.27. 

225.17 Masts as Supports. Where a mast is used for the 
support of final spans of feeders or branch circuits, it shall 
be of adequate strength or be supported by braces or guys 
to withstand safely the strain imposed by the overhead 
drop. Where raceway-type masts are used, all raceway 
fittings shall be identified for use with masts. Only the 
feeder or branch-circuit conductors specified within this 
section shall be permitted to be attached to the feeder 
and/or branch-circuit mast. 

225.18 Clearance for Overhead Conductors and 
Cables. 

Overhead spans of open conductors and open 
multiconductor cables of not over 600 volts, nominal, 
shall have a clearance of not less than the following: 

(1) 3.0m(10ft) — above finished grade, sidewalks, or 
fi-om any platform or projection fi-om which they 
might be reached where the voltage does not exceed 
150 volts to ground and accessible to pedestrians only 

(2) 3.7 m (12 ft) — over residential property and 
driveways, and those commercial areas not subject to 
truck traffic where the voltage does not exceed 300 
volts to ground 

(3) 4.5 m (15 ft) — for those areas Hsted in the 3.7-m 
(12-ft) classification where the voltage exceeds 300 
volts to ground 



70-72 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



225.26 



(4) 5.5 m (18 ft) — over public streets, alleys, roads, 
parking areas subject to truck traffic, driveways on 
other than residential property, and other land 
traversed by vehicles, such as cultivated, grazing, 
forest, and orchard 

(5) 7.5 m (24.5 ft) — over track rails of railroads 

225.19 Clearances from Buildings for Conductors of 
Not over 600 Volts, Nominal. 

(A) Above Roofs. Overhead spans of open conductors 
and open multiconductor cables shall have a vertical 
clearance of not less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the roof 
surface. The vertical clearance above the roof level shall 
be maintained for a distance not less than 900 mm (3 ft) in 
all directions from the edge of the roof 

Exception No. I: The area above a roof surface subject 
to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical 
clearance from the roof surface in accordance with the 
clearance requirements of 225 J 8. 

Exception No, 2: Where the voltage between conductors 
does not exceed 300, and the roof has a slope of 100 mm 
in 300 mm (4 in. in 12 in.) or greater, a reduction in 
clearance to 900 mm (3 ft) shall be permitted. 

Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors 
does not exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above only 
the overhanging portion of the roof to not less than 450 
mm (18 in,) shall be permitted if(l) not more than 1.8 m 
(6 ft) of the conductors, 1.2 m (4 ft) horizontally, pass 
above the roof overhang and (2) they are terminated at a 
through-the-roof raceway or approved support. 

Exception No. 4: The requirement for maintaining the 
vertical clearance 900 mm (3 ft) from the edge of the roof 
shall not apply to the final conductor span where the 
conductors are attached to the side of a building. 

(B) From Nonbuilding or Nonbridge Structures. From 
signs, chimneys, radio and television antennas, tanks, and 
other nonbuilding or nonbridge structures, clearances — 
vertical, diagonal, and horizontal — shall not be less than 
900 mm (3 ft). 

(C) Horizontal Clearances. Clearances shall not be less 
than 900 mm (3 ft). 

(D) Final Spans. Final spans of feeders or branch circuits 
shall comply with 225.19(D)(1), (D)(2), and (D)(3). 

(1) Clearance from Windows. Final spans to the building 
they supply, or from which they are fed, shall be permitted 
to be attached to the building, but they shall be kept not less 
than 900 mm (3 ft) from windows that are designed to be 
opened, and from doors, porches, balconies, ladders, stairs, 
fire escapes, or similar locations. 



Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a 
window shall be permitted to be less than the 900-mm (3- 
ft) requirement. 

(2) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of fmal 
spans above, or within 900 mm (3 ft) measured 
horizontally of, platforms, projections, or surfaces from 
which they might be reached shall be maintained in 
accordance with 225.18, 

(3) Building Openings. The overhead branch-circuit and 
feeder conductors shall not be installed beneath openings 
through which materials may be moved, such as openings 
in farm and commercial buildings, and shall not be 
installed where they obstruct entrance to these buildings' 
openings. 

(E) Zone for Fire Ladders. Where buildings exceed 
three stories or 15 m (50 ft) in height, overhead lines shall 
be arranged, where practicable, so that a clear space (or 
zone) at least 1.8 m (6 ft) wide will be left either adjacent 
to the buildings or beginning not over 2.5 m (8 ft) from 
them to facilitate the raising of ladders when necessary 
for fire fighting. 

225.20 Mechanical Protection of Conductors. 

Mechanical protection of conductors on buildings, 
structures, or poles shall be as provided for services in 
230.50. 

225.21 Multiconductor Cables on Exterior Surfaces of 
Buildings. Supports for multiconductor cables on exterior 
surfaces of buildings shall be as provided in 230.51. 

225.22 Raceways on Exterior Surfaces of Buildings or 

Other Structures. Raceways on exteriors of buildings or 
other structures shall be arranged to drain and shall be 
suitable for use in wet locations. 

225.24 Outdoor Lampholders. Where outdoor 
lampholders are attached as pendants, the connections to 
the circuit wires shall be staggered. Where such 
lampholders have terminals of a type that puncture the 
insulation and make contact with the conductors, they 
shall be attached only to conductors of the stranded type. 

225.25 Location of Outdoor Lamps. Locations of lamps 
for outdoor lighting shall be below all energized 
conductors, transformers, or other electric utilization 
equipment, unless either of the following apply: 

(1) Clearances or other safeguards are provided for 
relamping operations. 

(2) Equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means 
that can be locked in the open position. 

225.26 Vegetation as Support. Vegetation such as trees 
shall not be used for support of overhead conductor spans. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-73 



225.27 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



225.27 Raceway Seal Where a raceway enters a building 
pr structure from an underground distribution system, it 
Ihall be sealed in accordance with 300, 5(G). Spare or 
iinused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be 
identified for use with the cable insulation, shield^ or 
JDther components i 

11. Buildings or Other Structures Supplied by a 
Fccder(s) r Br a n c h C ircu it(s) 

225.30 Number of Supplies. A building or other structure 
that is served by a branch circuit or feeder on the load side 
of a service disconnecting means shall be supphed by only 
one feeder or branch circuit unless permitted in 225.30(A) 
through (E). iFor the purpose of this section, a miilliwire 
branch circuit shall be considered a single circuit. 

Where a branch circuit or feeder originates in these 
additional buildings or other structures, only one feeder or 
branch circuit shall be permitted to supply power back to 
the original building or structure, unless permitted in 
225.30(A) through (E). 

For the purpose of this section, a multiwire branch circuit 
shall be considered a single circuit. 

(A) Special Conditions. Additional feeders or branch 
circuits shall be permitted to supply the following: 

(1) Fire pumps 

(2) Emergency systems 

(3) Legally required standby systems 

(4) Optional standby systems 

(5) Parallel power production systems 

(6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources 
of supply for the purpose of enhanced reliabihty 

(B) Special Occupancies. By special permission, 
additional feeders or branch circuits shall be permitted for 
either of the following: 

(1) Multiple-occupancy buildings where there is no space 
available for supply equipment accessible to all occupants 

(2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large 
to make two or more supplies necessary 

(C) Capacity Requirements, Additional feeders or 
branch circuits shall be permitted where the capacity 
requirements are in excess of 2000 amperes at a supply 
voltage of 600 volts or less. 

(D) Different Characteristics. Additional feeders or 
branch circuits shall be permitted for different voltages, 
frequencies, or phases or for different uses, such as 
control of outside lighting from multiple locations. 

(E) Documented Switching Procedures. Additional 
feeders or branch circuits shall be permitted to supply 
installations under single management where documented 
safe switching procedures are established and maintained 
for disconnection. 



225.31 Disconnecting Means. Means shall be provided 
for disconnecting all ungrounded conductors that supply 
or pass through the building or structure. 

225.32 Location. The disconnecting means shall be 
installed either inside or outside of the building or 
structure served or where the conductors pass through 
the building or structure. The disconnecting means shall 
be at a readily accessible location nearest the point of 
entrance of the conductors. For the purposes of this 
section, the requirements in 230.6 shall be utilized. 

Exception No. 1: For installations under single 
management, where documented safe switching 
procedures are established and maintained for 
disconnection, and where the installation is monitored 
by qualified individuals, the disconnecting means shall 
be permitted to be located elsewhere on the premises. 

Exception No. 2: For buildings or other structures 
qualifying under the provisions of Article 685, the 
disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located 
elsewhere on the premises. 

Exception No. 3: For towers or poles used as lighting 
standards, the disconnecting means shall be permitted to 
be located elsewhere on the premises. 

Exception No, 4: For poles or similar structures used 
only for support of signs installed in accordance with 
Article 600, the disconnecting means shall be permitted 
to be located elsewhere on the premises. 

225.33 Maximum Number of Disconnects. 

(A) General. The disconnecting means for each supply 
permitted by 225.30 shall consist of not more than six 
switches or six circuit breakers mounted in a single 
enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, or in or on 
a switchboard. There shall be no more than six 
disconnects per supply grouped in any one location. 

Exception: For the purposes of this section, 
disconnecting means used solely for the control circuit 
of the ground-fault protection system, or the control 
circuit of the power-operated supply disconnecting 
means, installed as part of the listed equipment, shall 
not be considered a supply disconnecting means. 

(B) Single-Pole Units. Two or three single-pole 
switches or breakers capable of individual operation 
shall be permitted on multiwire circuits, one pole for 
each ungrounded conductor, as one muhipole 
disconnect, provided they are equipped with identified 
handle ties or a master handle to disconnect all 
ungrounded conductors with no more than six operations 
of the hand. 



70-74 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



225.39 



225.34 Grouping of Discoiinects, 

(A) General. The two to six disconnects as permitted in 
225.33 shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked 
to indicate the load served. 

Exception: One of the two to six disconnecting means 
permitted in 225.33, where used only for a water pump also 
intended to provide fire protection, shall he permitted to be 
located remote from the other disconnecting means. 

(B) Additional Disconnecting Means. The one or more 
additional disconnecting means for fire pumps or for 
emergency, legally required standby or optional standby 
system permitted by 225.30 shall be installed sufficiently 
remote from the one to six disconnecting means for 
normal supply to minimize the possibility of simultaneous 
interruption of supply. 

225.35 Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy 
building, each occupant shall have access to the 
occupant's supply disconnecting means. 

Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where 
electric supply and electrical maintenance are provided 
by the building management and where these are under 
continuous building management supervision, the supply 
disconnecting means supplying more than one occupancy 
shall be permitted to be accessible to authorized 
managem ent personnel on ly. 

225.36 Suitable for Service Equipment. The 
disconnecting means specified in 225.31 shall be suitable 
for use as service equipment. 

Exception: For garages and outbuildings on residential 
property, a snap switch or a set of 3 -way or 4-way snap 
switches shall be permitted as the disconnecting means. 

225.37 Identillcation. Where a building or structure has 
any combination of feeders, branch circuits, or services 
passing through it or supplying it, a permanent plaque or 
directory shall be installed at each feeder and branch- 
circuit disconnect location denoting all other services, 
feeders, or branch circuits supplying that building or 
structure or passing through that building or structure and 
the area served by each. 

Exception No. I: A plaque or directory shall not be 
required for large-capacity multibuilding industrial 
installations under single management, where it is 
ensured that disconnection can be accomplished by 
establishing and maintaining safe switching procedures. 

Exception No. 2: This identification shall not be 
required for branch circuits installed from a dwelling 
unit to a second building or structure. 



225.38 Disconnect Construction. Disconnecting means 
shall meet the requirements of 225.38(A) through (D). 

Exception: For garages and outbuildings on residential 
property, snap switches or 3~way or 4-way snap switches 
shall be permitted as the disconnecting means. 

(A) Manually or Power Operable. The disconnecting 
means shall consist of either (I) a manually operable 
switch or a circuit breaker equipped with a handle or other 
suitable operating means or (2) a power-operable switch 
or circuit breaker, provided the switch or circuit breaker 
can be opened by hand in the event of a power failure. 

(B) Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each building or 
structure disconnecting means shall simuhaneously 
disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors that it 
controls from the building or structure wiring system. 

(C) Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where the 
building or structure disconnecting means does not 
disconnect the grounded conductor from the grounded 
conductors in the building or structure wiring, other 
means shall be provided for this purpose at the location of 
disconnecting means. A terminal or bus to which all 
grounded conductors can be attached by means of 
pressure connectors shall be permitted for this purpose. 

In a multisection switchboard, disconnects for the grounded 
conductor shall be permitted to be in any section of the 
switchboard, provided any such switchboard section is 
marked. 

(D) Indicating. The building or structure disconnecting 
means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open or 
closed position. 

225.39 Rating of Disconnect. The feeder or branch- 
circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less 
than the calculated load to be supplied, determined in 
accordance with Parts I and II of Article 220 for branch 
circuits, Part III or IV of Article 220 for feeders, or Part V 
of Article 220 for farm loads. Where the branch circuit or 
feeder disconnecting means consists of more than one 
switch or circuit breaker, as permitted by 225.33, 
combining the ratings of all the switches or circuit 
breakers for determining the rating of the disconnecting 
means shall be permitted. In no case shall the rating be 
lower than specified in 225.39(A), (B), (C), or (D). 

(A) One-Circuit Installation. For installations to supply 
only Hmited loads of a single branch circuit, the branch 
circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less 
than 15 amperes. 

(B) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations 
consisting of not more than two 2'-wire branch circuits, 
the feeder or branch-circuit disconnecting means shall 
have a rating of not less than 30 amperes. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-75 



225.40 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



(C) One-Family Dwelling. For a one-family dwelling, 
the feeder disconnecting means shall have a rating of not 
less than 100 amperes, 3-wire. 

(D) Ail Others. For all other installations, the feeder or 
branch-circuit disconnecting means shall have a rating of 
not less than 60 amperes. 

225.40 Access to Overciirrent Protective Devices. 
Where a feeder overcurrent device is not readily 
accessible, branch-circuit overcurrent devices shall be 
installed on the load side, shall be mounted in a readily 
accessible location, and shall be of a lower ampere rating 
than the feeder overcurrent device. 

III. Over 600 Volts 

225.50 Sizing of Conductors. The sizing of conductors 
over 600 volts shall be in accordance with 210.19(B) for 
branch circuits and 215.2(B) for feeders. 

225.51 Isolating Switches. Where oil switches or air, oil, 
vacuum, or sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute 
a building disconnecting means, an isolating switch with 
visible break contacts and meeting the requirements of 
230.204(B), (C), and (D) shall be installed on the supply 
side of the disconnecting means and all associated 
equipment. 

Exception: The isolating switch shall not be required 
where the disconnecting means is mounted on removable 
truck panels or metal-enclosed switchgear units that 
cannot be opened unless the circuit is disconnected and 
that, when removed from the normal operating position, 
automatically disconnect the circuit breaker or switch 
from all energized parts. 

225.52 Disconnecting IVIeansi 

(^4.) Location. A building or structure disconnecting 
means shall be located in accordance with 225.32, or it 
shall be electrically operated by a similarly located 
remote-control device. 

(B) Type. Each building or structure disconnect shall 
simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded supply 
conductors it controls and shall have a fault-closing rating 
not less than the maximum available short-circuit current 
available at its supply terminals. 

Exception: Where the individual disconnecting means 
constats effused cutouts, the simultaneous disconnection 
of all ungrounded supply conductors shall not he required 
if there is a means to disconnect the load before opening 
the cutouts, A permanent legible sign shall be installed 
adjacent to the fused cutouts indicating the above, 
requirement. 

Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses are 
installed, the fuse characteristics shall be permitted to 
contribute to the fault closing rating of the disconnecting 
means. 



(C) Locking. Disconnecting means shall be capable of 
being locked in the open position. The provisions for 
locking shall remain in place with or without the lock 
installed. 

Exception: IVhcre an individual disconnecting means 
consists offu^ed cutouts, a suitable enclosure capable of 
being locked and sized to cmuain all cutout fuse holders 
shall be installed at a convenient location to the fused 
cutouts. 

(D) Indicating. Disconnecting means shall clearly 
indicate whether ihey are in the open "off*' or closed "on" 
position. 

(E) Uiiiform Position. Where disconnecting means 
handles are operated vertically, the **up" position of the 
handle shall be the '*on" position. 

Exception: A switching device having more than one 
\*on'' position, such as a double throw switch, shall not be 
required to comply with this requirement. 

i(F) Identificatioo. Where a building or structure has any 
combination of feeders, branch circuits, or ser\!ces 
passing through or supplying it, a permanent plaque or 
directory shall be installed at each feeder and branch^ 
circuit disconnect location ihat denotes all other servicesj 
feeders, or branch circuits supplying that building oi{ 
structure or passing tlirough that building or structure and 
the area served by each. 

225.56 Inspections and TestsJ 

(A) Pre-Energjza(ion and Operating Tests, The 
complete electrical system shall be performance tested 
when first installed on-site. Each protective* switching, 
and control circuit shall be adjusted in accordance with 
the recommendations of the protective device study and 
tested by actual operation using current injection or 
equivalent methods as necessary to ensure that each and 
every such circuit operates correctly to the satisfaction of 
the authority having jurisdiction. 

(1) Instrument Transformers. All instrument 
transformers shall be tested to verify correct polarity and 
burden. 

(2) Proteetive Relays. Bach protective relay shall be 
demonstrated to operate by injecting current or voltage, or 
both^ at the associated inslri»ment transformer output 
lenninal and observing that the associated switching and 
signaling functions occur correctly and in proper lime and 
sequence to accomplish the protective function intended. 

j(3) Switching Circuits. Each switching circuit shall be 
jobserved to operate the associated equipment being 
switched. 

1(4) Control and Signal Circuits- Each control or signal 
circuit shall be observed to perform its proper control 
fiinction or produce a correct signal output. 



70-76 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 225 - OUTSIDE BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS 



225.7a 



(5) Metering Circuits. All metering circuits shall be 
verified to operate correctly from voltage and current 
sources, similarly lo protective relay circuits, 

J6) Acceptance Tests, Complete acceptance tests shall be 
performed, after the station installation is completed, on 
^11 assemblies, equipment, conductors, and control and 
protective systems, as applicable, to vcrilfy the integrity of 
jail the systems. 



Table 225.60 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways, Rail, 
Water, and Open Land 

Clearance 



(7) Relays and Metering Utiliziiig Phase Differences. 

All relays and metering that use phase differences for 
operation shall be verified by measuring phase angles at 
the relay under acttial load conditions after operation 
conuncnces. 

(B) Test Report. A test report covering the results of the 
tests required in 225, 56(A) shall be delivered to the 
authority having jurisdiction prior to energization, 

Intbmiational Note: Por acceptance iipcci ligations, se4 
NETA ATS-2007, Accvpfance Testing Spedjicathns for 
Electrical Power DisiribiUion Eifuipmatt and Systems^ 
published by the IntcrNaEionai Electrical Testing 
Assiociation. 

225.60 Clearances over Roadways, Walkways, Rail, 
Water, and Open Land. 

(A) 22 kV, Nominal, to Ground or Less. The clearances 
over roadways, walkways, rail, water, and open land for 
conductors and live parts up to 22 kV, nominal, to 
ground or less shall be not less than the values shown in 
Table 225.60. 

(B) Over 22 kV Nominal to Ground. Clearances for the 
categories shown in Table 225.60 shall be increased by 10 
mm (0.4 in.) per kV above 22,000 volts. 

(C) Special Cases. For special cases, such as where 
crossings will be made over lakes, rivers, or areas using 
large vehicles such as mining operations, specific designs 
shall be engineered considering the special circumstances 
and shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

Informational Note: For additional information, see 
ANSI C2-2007, National Electrical Safety Code, 

225.61 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures. 

(A) 22 kV Nominal to Ground or Less. The clearances 
over buildings and other structures for conductors and live 
parts up to 22 kV, nominal, to ground or less shall be not 
less than the values shown in Table 225.61 . 

(B) Over 22 kV Nomina! to Ground. Clearances for the 
categories shown in Table 225.61 shall be increased by 10 
mm (0.4 in.) per kV above 22,000 volts. 

Informational Note: For additional information, see 
ANSI C2-2007, National Electrical Safety^ Code. 



Location 


m 


ft 


Open land subject to vehicles, 


S.6 


18.5 


cultivation, or grazing 






Roadways, driveways, parking lots, 


5.6 


18.5 


and alleys 






Walkways 


4.1 


13.5 


Rails 


8.1 


26.5 


Spaces and ways for pedestrians 


4.4 


14.5 


and restricted traffic 






Water areas not suitable for boating 


5.2 


17.0 



Table 225.61 Clearances over Buildings and Other Structures 
Horizontal Vertical 



Clearance from 

Conductors or 

Live Parts from: 



m 



ft 



ft 



Building walls, 2.3 7.5 — — 

projections, and 

windows 
Balconies, catwalks, 2.3 7.5 4.1 13.5 

and similar areas 

accessible to 

people 
Over or under roofs — — 3.8 12.5 

or projections not 

readily accessible 

to people 
Over roofs accessible — — 4.1 13.5 

to vehicles but not 

trucks 
Over roofs accessible — — 5.6 18.5 

to tmcks 
Other structures 2.3 7.5 — — 

225.70 Substations* 
(A) Warning Signs. 

(1) General. A permanent, legible warning notice 
carrying the wording "DANGER ~ HIGH VOLTAGE" 
shall be placed in a conspicuous position in the following 
areas: 

(a) Al all entrances to electrical equipment vaults 
and electrical equipmein rooms, areas, or enelosures 

(b) At points of access to conductors on alt high- 
voltage conduit sysiettis and cable systems 

(c) On al! cable trays containing high- voltage 
conductors with the maximum spacing of warning notices; 
not to exceed 3 m (10 f4.) 

(2) Isolating Equipment. Permanent legible signs shall 
be installed at isolating equipment warning against 
operation while carrying current, unless the equipment is 
interlocked so that it cannot be operated under load. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-77 



230.1 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



(3) Fuse Locations. Suitable warning signs shall be 
erected in a conspicuous place adjacent to ftises, warning 
operators not to replace fuses while the circuit is 
Energized- 

(4) Backfeed. The following steps shall be taken where 
the possibility of backfeed exists: 

(a) Each group-operated isolating switch or 
yiscoiinecting means shall bear a warning notice to the 
effect thai contacts on either side of the device might be 
energized, 

(b) A permanent, legible, single-fine diagram of 
the station switching arrangement, clearly identifying 
each point of connection to the high-voltage section, shall 
be provided in a conspicuous location within sight of each 
|)oint of connection): 



(5) iMetal-Eiiclosed and MetaUCIad Switchgear. Where 
metal-enclosed switchgear is installed, the following steps 
shall be taken; 

(a) A permanent, legible, single-line diagram of 
the switchgear shall be provided in a readily visible 
location within sight of the switchgear and this diagram 
shall clearly identity' interlocks, isolation means, and all 
possible sources of voltage to the installation under 
normal or emergency conditions, including all equipment 
contained in each cubicle, and the marking on the 
switchgear shall cross-reference the diagram. 

Exception to (a): Where the equipment comists solely of a 
single cubicle or metal-enclosed unit substation 
con tain ini^ only one set of high-voltage switching devices ^^ 
diagrams shall not he required, 

(b) Permanent, legible signs shall be installed on 
panels or doors that provide access to live parts over 600 
volts and shall carry the wording *^DANGER — HIGH 
VOLTAGE'* to warn of the danger of opening whiles 
energized. 



(c) Where the panel provides access to parts that 
can only be de-energized and visibly isolated by the 
serving utility, the warning shall include that access is 
limited to the serving utility or following an authorizations 
of the sending utility. 



ARTICLE 230 

Services 



230.1 Scope. 



This article covers service conductors and equipment for 
control and protection of services and their installation 
requirements. 

Informational Note: See Figure 230.1. 



General Part I 

Overhead Service Conductors Part II 

Underground Service Conductors Part 111 

Service-Entrance Conductors Part IV 

Service Equipment— General Part V 

Service Equipment — Disconnecting Means Part Vl 

Service Equipment— Overcurrent Protection Part Vll 

Services Exceeding 600 Volts, Nominal Part VIII 



Source 

A 



Overhead 
Last pole 



Part I 



Overhead 
service conductors 
230,24 Clearances 



Service head 



Service-entrance 
conductors 



Underground 
Street main 



Underground 
service conductors 
Depth of burial 
and protection 



Terminal box, 
meter, or other 
enclosure 



Part III 



230.49 



Part IV 



Service equipment—genera! 
Grounding and bonding 

Disconnecting means 



PartV 
Article 250 

Part VI 



Overcurrent protection 




Part Vll 










Branch circuits 
Feeders 


Articles 210, 225 
Articles 215, 225 











Figure 230.1 Services. 
L General 

230.2 Number of Services. 

A building or other structure served shall be supplied by 
only one service unless permitted in 230.2(A) through 
(D). For the purpose of 230.40, Exception No. 2 only, 
underground sets of conductors, 1/0 AWG and larger, 
running to the same location and connected together at 
their supply end but not connected together at their load 
end shall be considered to be supplying one service. 

(A) Special Conditions. Additional services shall be 
permitted to supply the following: 

(1) Fire pumps 

(2) Emergency systems 

(3) Legally required standby systems 

(4) Optional standby systems 

(5) Parallel power production systems 

(6) Systems designed for connection to multiple sources 
of supply for the purpose of enhanced reliability 



70-78 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



230.23 



(B) Special Occupancies. By special permission, 
additional services shall be permitted for either of the 
following: 

(1) Multiple -occupancy buildings where there is no 
available space for service equipment accessible to 
all occupants 

(2) A single building or other structure sufficiently large 
to make two or more services necessary 

(C) Capacity Requirements. Additional services shall be 
permitted under any of the following: 

(1) Where the capacity requirements are in excess of 
2000 amperes at a supply voltage of 600 volts or less 

(2) Where the load requirements of a single-phase 
installation are greater than the serving agency 
normally supplies through one service 

(3) By special permission 

(D) Different Characteristics. Additional services shall 
be permitted for different voltages, frequencies, or phases, 
or for different uses, such as for different rate schedules. 

(E) Identification. Where a building or structure is 
supplied by more than one service, or any combination of 
branch circuits, feeders, and services, a permanent plaque 
or directory shall be installed at each service disconnect 
location denoting all other services, feeders, and branch 
circuits supplying that building or structure and the area 
served by each. See 225.37. 

230.3 One Building or Other Structure Not to Be 
Supplied Through Another. Service conductors 
supplying a building or other structure shall not pass 
through the interior of another building or other structure. 

230.6 Conductors Considered Outside the Building. 

Conductors shall be considered outside of a building or 
other structure under any of the following conditions: 

(1) Where installed under not less than 50 mm (2 in.) of 
concrete beneath a building or other structure 

(2) Where installed within a building or other structure in 
a raceway that is encased in concrete or brick not less 
than 50 mm (2 in.) thick 

(3) Where installed in any vault that meets the 
construction requirements of Article 450, Part 111 

(4) Where installed in conduit and under not less than 
450 mm (18 in.) of earth beneath a building or other 
structure 

(5) Where installed in overhead service masts on the 
outside surface of the building traveling through the 
eavc of that building to meet the requirements of 
230.24 



230.7 Other Conductors in Raceway or Cable. 

Conductors other than service conductors shall not be 
installed in the same service raceway or service cable. 

Exception No. 1: Grounding conductors and bonding 
jumpers. 

Exception No. 2: Load management control conductors 
having overcurrent protection. 

230.8 Raceway Seal. Where a service raceway enters a 
building or structure from an underground distribution 
system, it shall be sealed in accordance with 300.5(G). 
Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants 
shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, shield, 
or other components. 

230.9 Clearances on Buildings. Service conductors and 
final spans shall comply with 230.9(A), (B), and (C). 

(A) Clearances. Service conductors installed as open 
conductors or multiconductor cable without an overall 
outer jacket shall have a clearance of not less than 900 
mm (3 ft) from windows that are designed to be opened, 
doors, porches, balconies, ladders, stairs, fire escapes, or 
similar locations. 

Exception: Conductors run above the top level of a 
window shall be permitted to be less than the 900-mm (3- 
ft) requirement. 

(B) Vertical Clearance. The vertical clearance of final 
spans above, or within 900 mm (3 ft) measured 
horizontally of, platforms, projections, or surfaces from 
which they might be reached shall be maintained in 
accordance with 230.24(B). 

(C) Building Openings. Overhead service conductors 
shall not be installed beneath openings through which 
materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and 
commercial buildings, and shall not be installed where 
they obstruct entrance to these building openings. 

230.10 Vegetation as Support. 

Vegetation such as trees shall not be used for support of 
overhead service conductors. 

II. Overhead Service Conductors 

230.22 Insulation or Covering, 

Individual conductors shall be insulated or covered. 

Exception: The grounded conductor of a multiconductor 
cable shall be permitted to be bare. 

230.23 Size and Rating. 

(A) General. Conductors shall have sufficient ampacity 
to carry the current for the load as calculated in 
accordance with Article 220 and shall have adequate 
mechanical strength. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-79 



230.24 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



(B) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller 
than 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper-clad 
aluminum. 

Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a 
single branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, 
controlled water heaters, and similar loads — shall not 
he smaller than 12 AWG hard-drawn copper or 
equivalent. 

(C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor 
shall not be less than the minimum size as required by 
250.24(C). 

230.24 Clearances. Overhead service conductors shall 
not be readily accessible and shall comply with 
230.24(A) through [E) for services not over 600 volts, 
nominal. 

(A) Above Roofs. Conductors shall have a vertical 
clearance of not less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the roof 
surface. The vertical clearance above the roof level shall 
be maintained for a distance of not less than 900 mm (3 
ft) in all directions from the edge of the roof. 

Exception No. 1: The area above a roof surface subject 
to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall have a vertical 
clearance from the roof surface in accordance with the 
clearance requirements of 230.24(B). 

Exception No. 2: Wlrere the voltage between conductors 
does not exceed 300 and the roof has a slope of 100 mm 
in 300 mm (4 in. in 12 in.) or greater, a reduction in 
clearance to 900 mm (3 ft) shall be permitted. 

Exception No. 3: Where the voltage between conductors 
does not exceed 300, a reduction in clearance above 
only the overhanging portion of the roof to not less than 
450 mm (18 in.) shall be permitted if (1) not more than 
1.8 m (6 ft) of overhead setTice conductors, 1,2 m (4 ft) 
horizontally, pass above the roof overhang, and (2) they 
are terminated at a through- the-r oof raceway or 
approved support. 

Informational Note: See 230.28 for mast supports. 

Exception No. 4: The requirement for maintaining the 
vertical clearance 900 mm (3 ft) from the edge of the 
roof shall not apply to the final conductor span where 
the service drop is attached to the side of a building. 



Exception No. 5; Where the voltage between conductors 
does not exceed 300 and the roof area is guarded or 
isolated, a reduction in clearance to 900 mm (3 ft) shall 
fie permitted. 

(B) Vertical Clearance for Overhead Service 
Conductors. Overhead service conductors, where not in 
excess of 600 volts, nominal, shall have the following 
minimum clearance from final grade: 



(1) 3.0 m (10 ft) — at the electrical service entrance to 
buildings, also at the lowest point of the drip loop of 
the building electrical entrance, and above areas or 
sidewalks accessible only to pedestrians, measured 
from final grade or other accessible surface only for 
service-drop cables supported on and cabled together 
with a grounded bare messenger where the voltage 
does not exceed 150 volts to ground 

(2) 3.7 m (12 ft) — over residential property and 
driveways, and those commercial areas not subject to 
truck traffic where the voltage does not exceed 300 
vohs to ground 

(3) 4.5 m (15 ft) — for those areas listed in the 3.7-m 
(12-ft) classification where the voltage exceeds 300 
volts to ground 

(4) 5.5 m (18 ft) — over public streets, alleys, roads, 
parking areas subject to truck traffic, driveways on 
other than residential property, and other land such as 
cultivated, grazing, forest, and orchard 

(C) Clearance from Building Openings. See 230.9. 

(D) Clearance from Swimming Pools. See 680.8. 



(E) Clearance from Communication Wires and 
Cables* Clearance from communicaiion wires and cables 
shall be in accordance with 8D0.44(AX4). 

230.26 Point of Attachment. The point of attachment of 
the service-drop conductors to a building or other 
structure shall provide the minimum clearances as 
specified in 230.9 and 230.24. In no case shall this point 
of attachment be less than 3.0 m (10 ft) above finished 
grade. 

230.27 Means of Attachment. Multiconductor cables 
used for overhead service conductors shall be attached to 
buildings or other structures by fittings identified for use 
with service conductors. Open conductors shall be 
attached to fittings identified for use with service 
conductors or to noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulators 
securely attached to the building or other structure. 

230.28 Service Masts as Supports. Where a service mast 
is used for the support of service-drop conductors, it shall 
be of adequate strength or be supported by braces or guys 
to withstand safely the strain imposed by the service drop. 
Where raceway-type service masts are used, all raceway 
fitfings shall be idenfified for use with service masts. Only 
power service-drop conductors shall be permitted to be 
attached to a service mast. 

230.29 Supports over Buildings. Service conductors 
passing over a roof shall be securely supported by 
substantial structures. Where practicable, such supports 
shall be independent of the building. 



70-80 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



230.41 



III. Underground Service Conductors 

230.30 Insulation. Service-lateral conductors shall be 
insulated for the applied voltage. 

Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to 
be uninsulated as follows: 

(1) Bare copper used in a raceway. 

(2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is 
judged to be suitable for the soil conditions. 

(3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil 
conditions where part of a cable assembly identified 
for underground use. 

(4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without 
individual insulation or covering where part of a 
cable assembly identified for underground use in a 
raceway or for direct burial. 

230.31 Size and Rating. 

(A) General. Underground service conductors shall have 
sufficient ampacity to carry the current for the load as 
calculated in accordance with Article 220 and shall have 
adequate mechanical strength. 

(B) Minimum Size. The conductors shall not be smaller 
than 8 AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper-clad 
aluminum. 

Exception: Conductors supplying only limited loads of a 
single branch circuit — such as small polyphase power, 
controlled water heaters, and similar loads — shall not be 
smaller than 12 AWG copper or 10 AWG aluminum or 
copper-clad aluminum. 

(C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor 
shall not be less than the minimum size required by 

250.24(C). 

230.32 Protection Against Damage, Underground 
service conductors shall be protected against damage in 
accordance with 300.5. Service conductors entering a 
building or other simcture shall be installed in accordance 
with 230.6 or protected by a raceway wiring method 
identified in 230.43. 

230.33 Spliced Conductors. Service conductors shall be 
permitted to be spliced or tapped in accordance with 
110.14, 300.5(E), 300.13, and 300.15. 



IV. Service-Entrance Conductors 

230.40 Number of Service-Entrance Conductor Sets. 



Each service drop, bet of overhead service conductors, set 
of underground service conductors, or service lateral shall 
supply only one set of service-entrance conductors. 



Exception No. 1: A building with more than one 
occupancy shall be permitted to have one set of service- 
entrance conductors for each service, as defined in 230.2, 
run to each occupancy or group of occupancies. If the 
number of semce disconm*ct locations for any given 
classiftcation of scnive docs not exceed six, the 
requirements of230.2(E} shall apply at each location, if 
the number of service disconnect locations exceeds six for 
any gh'en supply classification, all service disconnect 
locations for all supply characteristics, together with any 
branch circuit or feeder supply sources, if applicable, 
shall he clearly described using suitable graphics or text, 
pr both, an one or more pkuptes located in an approved, 
readily accessible location(s) on the building or structure 
Served and as near as practicable to the pointfsj of 
attachment or enoyfies) for each sej-vice drop or seryice 
lateral, and for each set of overhead or underground 
seryice e(>mhtctors. 

Exception No. 2: Where two to six service disconnecting 
means in separate enclosures are grouped at one location 
and supply separate loads from one service drop, set of 
pverhead service conductors, set of umiergrouud service 
conductors, or senicc lateral, one set of service-entrance 
conductors shall be permitted to supply each or several 
such service equipment enclosures. 

Exception No. 3: A single-family dwelling unit and ps 
accessory structures shall be permitted to have one set of 
service-entrance conductors rim to each from a single 
service drop, set of overhead service conductors^ set of 
underground sendee conductors, or service lateral. 

Exception No. 4: Two-family dwellings, multifamily 
dwellings, and multiple occupancy buildings shall be 
permitted to have one set of service-entrance conductors 
installed to supply the circuits covered in 210.25. 

Exception No. 5: One set of service-entrance conductors 
connected to the supply side of the normal service 
disconnecting means shall be permitted to supply each or 
several systems covered by 230.82(5) or 230.82(6). 

230.41 Insulation of Service-Entrance Conductors. 

Service-entrance conductors entering or on the exterior of 
buildings or other structures shall be insulated. 

Exception: A grounded conductor shall be permitted to 
be uninsulated as follows: 

(1) Bare copper used in a raceway or part of a service 
cable assembly. 

(2) Bare copper for direct burial where bare copper is 
judged to be suitable for the soil conditions. 

(3) Bare copper for direct burial without regard to soil 
conditions where part of a cable assembly identified 
for underground use. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-81 



230.42 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



(4) Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum without 
individual insidation or covering where part of a 
cable assembly or identified for underground use in a 
raceway, or for direct burial. 

(5) Bare conductors used in an auxiliary gutter, 

230.42 Minimum Size and Rating. 

(A) General. The ampacity of the service-entrance 
conductors before the application of any adjustment or 
correction factors shall not be less than either 
230.42(A)(1) or (A)(2). Loads shall be determined in 
accordance with Part III, IV, or V of Article 220, as 
applicable. Ampacity shall be determined from 310.15. 
The maximum allowable current of busways shall be that 
value for which the busway has been listed or labeled. 

(1) The sum of the noncontinuous loads plus 125 percent 
of continuous loads 

Exception: Grounded conductors that are not connected 
to an ovei current device shall be permitted to be sized at 
100 percent of the continuous and nonconlmuons load. 

(2) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the 
continuous load if the service-entrance conductors 
terminate in an overcurrent device where both the 
overcurrent device and its assembly are listed for 
operation at 100 percent of their rating 

(B) Specific Installations. In addition to the requirements 
of 230.42(A), the minimum ampacity for ungrounded 
conductors for specific installations shall not be less than 
the rating of the service disconnecting means specified in 
230.79(A) through (D). 

(C) Grounded Conductors. The grounded conductor 
shall not be smaller than the minimum size as required by 
250.24(C). 

230.43 Wiring Methods for 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. 

Service -entrance conductors shall be installed in 
accordance with the applicable requirements of this Code 
covering the type of wiring method used and shall be 
limited to the following methods: 

(1) Open wiring on insulators 

(2) Type IGS cable 

(3) Rigid metal conduit 

(4) Intermediate metal conduit 

(5) Electrical metallic tubing 

(6) Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) 

(7) Service-entrance cables 

(8) Wireways 

(9) Busways 

( 1 0) Auxiliary gutters 

(11) Rigid poIj^'inYl chloride conduit (PVC) 



(12) Cablebus 

(13) Type MC cable 

(14) Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable 

(15) Flexible metal conduit not over 1.8 m (6 ft) long or 
hquidtight flexible metal conduit not over 1.8 m (6 
ft) long between raceways, or between raceway and 
service equipment, with equipment bonding jumper 
routed with the flexible metal conduit or the 
liquidtight flexible metal conduit according to the 
provisions of 250.102(A), (B), (C), and (E) 

(16) Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit 

(17) High density polyethylene conduit (HOPE) 

(18) iNoninetalJic underground conduit with conductors 
JNUCC) 

(19) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) 

230.44 Cable Trays. 

Cable tray systems shall be permitted to support service- 
entrance conductors. Cable trays used to support service- 
entrance conductors shall contain only service-entrance 
conductors and shall be limited to the following methods: 

(1) Type SE cable 

(2) Type MC cable 

(3) Type Ml cable 

(4) Type IGS cabid 

(5) Single iherraoplasiiic- insulated conductors 1/0 and 
larger with CT rating 

Such cable trays shall be identified with permanently 
alTixed labels with the wording ''Scnice-Entrance 
Conductors." The labels shall be located so as to be 
visible after installation and placed so that the service- 
entrance conductors are able to be readily traced through 
the entire length of the cable tray. 

Exception: Conductors, other than service-entrance 
conductors, shall be permitted to be installed in a cable 
tray with service-entrance conductors, provided a solid 
fixed barrier of a material compatible with the cable tray 
is Installed to separate the service-entrance conductors 
from other conductors installed in the cable tray. 

230.46 Spliced Conductors. Service-entrance conductors 
shall be permitted to be spliced or tapped in accordance 
with 110.14, 300.5(E), 300.13, and 300.15. 

230.50 Protection Against Physical Damage, 

(A) Underground Service-Entrance Conductors. 

Underground service-entrance conductors shall be protected 
against physical damage in accordance with 300.5. 

(B) All Other Service-Entrance Conductors. All other 
service-entrance conductors, other than underground 
service entrance conductors, shall be protected against 
physical damage as specified in 230.50(B)(1) or (B)(2). 



70-82 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



230.54 



(1) Service-Entrance Cables. Service-entrance cables, 

where subject to physical damage, shall be protected by 
any of the following: 

(1) Rigid metal conduit 

(2) Intermediate metal conduit 

(3) Schedule 80 PVC conduit 

(4) Electrical metallic tubing 

(5) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC)| 

(6) Other approved means 

(2) Other Than Service-Entrance Cables. Individual 
open conductors and cables, other than service-entrance 
cables, shall not be installed within 3.0 m (10 ft) of grade 
level or where exposed to physical damage. 

Exception: Type MI and Type MC cable shall be 
permitted within 3.0 m (10 ft) of grade level where not 
exposed to physical damage or where protected in 
accordance with 300.5(D). 

230.51 Mounting Supports. Service-entrance cables or 
individual open service-entrance conductors shall be 
supported as specified in 230.51(A), (B), or (C). 

(A) Service-Entrance Cables. Service-entrance cables 
shall be supported by straps or other approved means 
within 300 mm (12 in.) of every service head, gooseneck, 
or connection to a raceway or enclosure and at intervals 
not exceeding 750 mm (30 in.). 

(B) Other Cables. Cables that are not approved for 
mounting in contact with a building or other structure 
shall be mounted on insulating supports installed at 
intervals not exceeding 4.5 m (15 ft) and in a manner that 
maintains a clearance of not less than 50 mm (2 in.) from 
the surface over which they pass. 

(C) Individual Open Conductors. Individual open 
conductors shall be installed in accordance with Table 
230.51(C). Where exposed to the weather, the conductors 
shall be mounted on insulators or on insulating supports 
attached to racks, brackets, or other approved means. 



Where not exposed to the weather, the conductors shall be 
mounted on glass or porcelain knobs. 

230.52 Individual Conductors Entering Buildings or 
Other Structures. Where individual open conductors 
enter a building or other structure, they shall enter through 
roof bushings or through the wall in an upward slant 
through individual, noncombustible, nonabsorbent 
insulating tubes. Drip loops shall be formed on the 
conductors before they enter the tubes. 

230.53 Raceways to Drain. Where exposed to the 
weather, raceways enclosing service-entrance conductors 
shall be suitable for use in wet locations and arranged to 
drain. Where embedded in masonry, raceways shall be 
arranged to drain. 

230.54 Overhead Service Locations. 

(A) Service Head. Service raceways shall be equipped 
with a service head at the point of connection to service- 
drop or overhead service conductors. The service head 
shall be listed for use in wet locations. 

(B) Service-Entrance Cables Equipped with Service 
Head or Gooseneck. Service-entrance cables shall be 
equipped with a service head. The service head shall be 
listed for use in wet locations. 

Exception: Type SE cable shall be permitted to be formed 
in a gooseneck and taped with a self-sealing weather- 
resistant thermoplastic. 

(C) Service Heads and Goosenecks Above Service- 
Drop or Overhead Service Attachment. Service heads 
and goosenecks in service-entrance cables shall be located 
above the point of attachment of the service-drop m 
overhead service conductors to the building or other 
structure. 

Exception: Where it is impracticable to locate the service 
head or gooseneck above the point of attachment, the 
service head or gooseneck location shall be permitted not 
farther than 600 mm (24 in.) from the point of attachment. 



Table 230.51(C) Supports 







Maximum Distance Between 




Minimum 


Clearance 




Between Conductors 


From Surface 






Supports 








Maximum 


Volts 


m ft 


mm 


in. 


mm in. 


600 




2.7 9 


150 


6 


50 2 


600 




4.5 15 


300 


12 


50 2 


300 




1.4 4^2 


75 


3 


50 2 


600* 




1.4=^ 4H=^ 


65^ 


2/2^ 


25* P 



'^Where not exposed to weather 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-83 



230.56 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



(D) Secured. Service^entrance cables shall be held 
securely in place. 

(E) Separately Bushed Openings. Service heads shall 
have conductors of different potential brought out through 
separately bushed openings. 

Exception: For jacketed multiconductor service -enlrunce 
cable without splice. 

(F) Drip Loops. Drip loops shall be formed on individual 
conductors. To prevent the entrance of moisture, service- 
entrance conductors shall be connected to the service- 
drop or overhead sen'ice conductors either (1) below the 
level of the service head or (2) below the level of the 
termination of the service-entrance cable sheath. 

(G) Arranged That Water Will Not Enter Service 
Raceway or Equipment. Sen ice-ontrancc and overhead 
service conductors shall be arranged so that water will not 
enter service raceway or equipment. 

230.56 Service Conductor with the Higher Voltage to 

Ground. On a 4-wire, delta-connected service where the 
midpoint of one phase winding is grounded, the service 
conductor having the higher phase voltage to ground shall 
be durably and permanently marked by an outer finish 
that is orange in color, or by other effective means, at 
each termination or junction point. 

V. Service Equipment — General 

230.62 Service Equipment — Enclosed or Guarded. 
Energized parts of service equipment shall be enclosed as 
specified in 230.62(A) or guarded as specified in 
230.62(B). 

(A) Enclosed. Energized parts shall be enclosed so that 
they will not be exposed to accidental contact or shall be 
guarded as in 230.62(B). 

(B) Guarded. Energized parts that are not enclosed shall 
be installed on a switchboard, panelboard, or control 
board and guarded in accordance with 110.18 and 110.27. 
Where energized parts are guarded as provided in 
110.27(A)(1) and (A)(2), a means for locking or seahng 
doors providing access to energized parts shall be 
provided. 

230.66 Marking. Service equipment rated at 600 volts or 
less shall be marked to identify it as being suitable for use 
as service equipment All service equipment shall be 
listed. Individual meter socket enclosures shall not be 
considered service equipment. 

VI. Service Equipment — Disconnecting Means 

230.70 General. Means shall be provided to disconnect 
all conductors in a building or other structure from the 
service-entrance conductors. 



(A) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be 
installed in accordance with 230.70(A)(1), (A)(2), and 
(A)(3). 

(1) Readily Accessible Location. The service 
disconnecting means shall be installed at a readily 
accessible location either outside of a building or structure 
or inside nearest the point of entrance of the service 
conductors, 

(2) Bathrooms. Service disconnecting means shall not be 
installed in bathrooms, 

(3) Remote Control. Where a remote control device(s) is 
used to actuate the service disconnecting means, the service 
disconnecting means shall be located in accordance with 
230.70(A)(1). 

(B) Marking. Each service disconnect shall be 
permanently marked to identify it as a service disconnect. 

(C) Suitable for Use. Each service disconnecting means 
shall be suitable for the prevaihng conditions. Service 
equipment installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall 
comply with the requirements of Articles 500 through 517. 
230.71 Maximum Number of Disconnects. 

(A) General, The service disconnecting means for each 
service permitted by 230.2, or for each set of service- 
entrance conductors permitted by 230.40, Exception No, 1, 
3, 4, or 5, shall consist of not more than six switches or sets 
of circuit breakers, or a combination of not more than six 
switches and sets of circuit breakers, mounted in a single 
enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, or in or on a 
switchboard. There shall be not more than six sets of 
disconnects per service grouped in any one location. 

For the purpose of this section, disconnecting means 
installed as part of listed equipment and used solely for the 
following shall not be considered a service disconnecting 
means: 

( 1 ) Power monitoring equipment 

(2) Surge-protective device(s) 

(3) Control circuit of the ground-fault protection system 

(4) Power-operable service disconnecting means 

(B) Single-Pole Units. Two or three single-pole switches 
or breakers, capable of individual operation, shall be 
permitted on multiwire circuits, one pole for each 
ungrounded conductor, as one multipole disconnect, 
provided they are equipped with identified handle ties or a 
master handle to disconnect all conductors of the service 
with no more than six operations of the hand. 

Informational Note: See 408.36, Exception No. 1 and 
Exception No. 3, for service equipment in certain 
panelboards, and see 430.95 for service equipment in 
motor control centers. 



70-84 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



230.82 



230.72 Groiiping of Disconnects. 

(A) General. The two to six disconnects as permitted in 
230.71 shall be grouped. Each disconnect shall be marked 
to indicate the load served. 

Exception: One of the two to six service disconnecting 
means permitted in 230 Jl, where used only for a water 
pump also intended to provide fire protection, shall be 
permitted to be located remote from the other 
disconnecting means. If remotely imtalled in occoniance 
with this exception, a plaqm shall he posted at the 
location of the remainirtg grouped disconnects denoting 
its location. 

(3) Additional Service Disconnecting Means. The one 

or more additional service disconnecting means for fire 
pumps, emergency systems, legally required standby, or 
optional standby services permitted by 230.2 shall be 
installed remote from the one to six service disconnecting 
means for normal service to minimize the possibility of 
simultaneous interruption of supply. 

(C) Access to Occupants. In a multiple-occupancy 
building, each occupant shall have access to the 
occupant's service disconnecting means. 

Exception: In a multiple-occupancy building where 
electric service and electrical maintenance are provided 
by the building management and where these are under 
continuous building management supervision, the service 
disconnecting means supplying more than one occupancy 
shall be permitted to be accessible to authorized 
management personnel only, 

230.74 Simultaneous Opening of Poles. Each service 
disconnect shall simultaneously disconnect all 
ungrounded service conductors that it controls from the 
premises wiring system. 

230.75 Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. Where 
the service disconnecting means does not disconnect the 
grounded conductor from the premises wiring, other 
means shall be provided for this purpose in the service 
equipment. A terminal or bus to which all grounded 
conductors can be attached by means of pressure 
connectors shall be permitted for this purpose. In a 
multisection switchboard, disconnects for the grounded 
conductor shall be permitted to be in any section of the 
switchboard, provided any such switchboard section is 
marked. 

230.76 Manually or Power Operable. The service 
disconnecting means for ungrounded service conductors 
shall consist of one of the following: 

(1) A manually operable switch or circuit breaker 
equipped with a handle or other suitable operating 
means 



(2) A power-operated switch or circuit breaker, provided 
the switch or circuit breaker can be opened by hand 
in the event of a power supply failure 

230.77 Indicating. The service disconnecting means shall 
plainly indicate whether it is in the open Joft) or closed 
(on) position. 

230.79 Rating of Service Disconnecting Means. The 

service disconnecting means shall have a rating not less 
than the calculated load to be carried, determined in 
accordance with Part III, IV, or V of Article 220, as 
applicable. In no case shall the rating be lower than 
specified in 230.79(A), (B), (C), or (D). 

(A) One-Circuit Installations, For installations to supply 
only hmited loads of a single branch circuit, the service 
disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 
15 amperes. 

(B) Two-Circuit Installations. For installations 
consisting of not more than two 2-wire branch circuits, 
the service disconnecting means shall have a rating of not 
less than 30 amperes. 

(C) One-Family Dwellings. For a one-family dwelling, 
the service disconnecting means shall have a rating of not 
less than 100 amperes, 3 -wire. 

(D) All Others. For all other installations, the service 
disconnecting means shall have a rating of not less than 
60 amperes. 

230.80 Combined Rating of Disconnects. Where the 
service disconnecting means consists of more than one 
switch or circuit breaker, as permitted by 230.71, the 
combined ratings of all the switches or circuit breakers 
used shall not be less than the rating required by 230.79. 

230.81 Connection to Terminals. The service conductors 
shall be connected to the service disconnecting means by 
pressure connectors, clamps, or other approved means. 
Connections that depend on solder shall not be used. 

230.82 Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of 
Service Disconnect. Only the following equipment shall 
be permitted to be connected to the supply side of the 
service disconnecting means: 

(1) Cable limiters or other current-limiting devices. 

(2) Meters and meter sockets nominally rated not in excess 
of 600 volts, provided all metal housings and service 
enclosures are grounded in accordance with Part VII 
and bonded in accordance with Part V of Article 250. 

(3) Meter disconnect switches nominally rated not in 
excess of 600 volts that have a short-circuit current 
rating equal to or greater than the available short- 
circuit current, provided all metal housings and 
service enclosures are grounded in accordance with 
Part VII and bonded in accordance with Part V of 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-85 



230.90 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



Article 250. A meter disconnect switch shall be 
capable of interrupting the load served. 

(4) Instrument transformers (current and voltage), 
impedance shunts, load management devices, surge 
arresters, and Type 1 surge-protective devices. 

(5) Taps used only to supply load management devices, 
circuits for standby power systems, fire pump 
equipment, and fire and sprinkler alarms, if provided 
with service equipment and installed in accordance 
with requirements for service-entrance conductors. 

(6) Solar photovoltaic systems, fuel cell systems, or 
interconnected electric power production sources. 

(7) Control circuits for power-operable service 
disconnecting means, if suitable overcurrent 
protection and disconnecting means are provided. 

(8) Ground-fault protection systems or Type 2 surge- 
protective devices, where installed as part of listed 
equipment, if suitable overcurrent protection and 
disconnecting means are provided. 

(9) Connections used only to supply listed 
cominiinicaiionii equipment under ihc exclusive 
control of the serving electric utility, if .suitable 
overcurrent proaxtion and disconnecting means are 
provided. For installations of equipment by the ser\ing 
electric utility, a disconnecting means is not required if 
the supply is installed as pan of a meter socket, such 
that access can only be gained with the meter removed. 

VII. Service Equipment — Overcurrent Protection 

230.90 Where Required. Each ungrounded service 
conductor shall have overload protection. 

(A) Ungrounded Conductor. Such protection shall be 
provided by an overcurrent device in series with each 
ungrounded service conductor that has a rating or setting 
not higher than the allowable ampacity of the conductor. 
A set of fuses shall be considered all the fuses required to 
protect all the ungrounded conductors of a circuit. Single- 
pole circuit breakers, grouped in accordance with 
230.71(B), shall be considered as one protective device. 

Exception No. 1: For motor-starting currents, ratings that 
comply with 430.52, 430,62, and 430.63 shall be permitted. 

Exception No. 2: Fuses and circuit breakers with a rating 
or setting that complies with 240.4(B) or (C) and 240.6 
shall be permitted. 

Exception No. 3: Two to six circuit breakers or sets of 
fuses shall be permitted as the overcurrent device to 
provide the overload protection. The sum of the ratings of 
the circuit breakers or fuses shall be permitted to exceed 
the ampacity of the service conductors, provided the 
calculated load does not exceed the ampacity of the 
service conductors. 



Exception No. 4: Overload protection for fire pump 
supply conductors shall comply with 695.4(§)(2)(a). 

Exception No. 5: Overload protection for 120/240-volt, 
3-wire, single-phase dwelling services shall be permitted 
in accordance with the requirements of 310.15(B)(6). 

(B) Not in Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent 
device shall be inserted in a grounded service conductor 
except a circuit breaker that simultaneously opens all 
conductors of the circuit. 

230.91 Location. The service overcurrent device shall 
be an integral part of the service disconnecting means or 
shall be located immediately adjacent thereto. 

230.92 Locked Service Overcurrent Devices. Where 
the service overcurrent devices are locked or sealed or 
are not readily accessible to the occupant, branch-circuit 
or feeder overcurrent devices shall be installed on the 
load side, shall be mounted in a readily accessible 
location, and shall be of lower ampere rating than the 
service overcurrent device. 



230.93 Protection of 

necessary to prevent 



Specific Circuits. Where 
tampering, an automatic 
overcurrent device that protects service conductors 
supplying only a specific load, such as a water heater, 
shall be permitted to be locked or sealed where located 
so as to be accessible. 

230.94 Relative Location of Overcurrent Device and 
Other Service Equipment. The overcurrent device shall 
protect all circuits and devices. 

Exception No. 1: The service switch shall be permitted 
on the supply side. 

Exception No. 2: High-impedance shunt circuits, surge 
arresters, Type 1 surge-protective devices, surge- 
protective capacitors, and instrument transformers 
(current and voltage) shall be permitted to be connected 
and installed on the supply side of the service 
disconnecting means as permitted by 230.82. 

Exception No. 3: Circuits for load management devices 
shall be permitted to be connected on the supply side of 
the service overcurrent device where separately 
provided with overcurrent protection. 

Exception No. 4: Circuits used only for the operation of 
fire alarm, other protective signaling systems, or the 
supply to fire pump equipment shall be permitted to be 
connected on the supply side of the service overcurrent 
device where separately provided with overcurrent 
protection. 



70-86 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 230 - SERVICES 



230.204 



Exception No. 5: Meters nominally rated not in excess of 
600 volts shall be permitted, provided all metal housings 
and service enclosures are grounded. 

Exception No. 6: Where service equipment is power 
operable, the control circuit shall be permitted to be 
connected ahead of the sennce equipment if suitable 
overcurrent protection and disconnecting means are 
provided. 

230.95 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. 
Ground-fault protection of equipment shall be provided 
for solidly grounded wye electric services of more than 
150 volts to ground but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to- 
phase for each service disconnect rated 1000 amperes or 
more. The grounded conductor for the solidly grounded 
wye system shall be connected directly to ground through 
a grounding electrode system, as specified in 250.50, 
without inserting any resistor or impedance device. 

The rating of the service disconnect shall be considered to 
be the rating of the largest fuse that can be installed or the 
highest continuous current trip setting for which the actual 
overcurrent device installed in a circuit breaker is rated or 
can be adjusted. 

Exception: The groimd fault protection provisions of this 
section shall not apply to a service disconnect for a 
continuous industrial process where a nonorderly 
shutdown will introduce additional or increased hazards. 

(A) Setting. The ground-fault protection system shall 
operate to cause the service disconnect to open all 
ungrounded conductors of the faulted circuit. The 
maximum setting of the ground-fault protection shall be 
1200 amperes, and the maximum time delay shall be one 
second for ground-fault currents equal to or greater than 
3000 amperes. 

(B) Fuses. If a switch and fuse combination is used, the 
fuses employed shall be capable of interrupting any 
current higher than the interrupting capacity of the switch 
during a time that the ground-fault protective system will 
not cause the switch to open. 

(C) Performance Testing. The ground-fault protection 
system shall be performance tested when first installed on 
site. The test shall be conducted in accordance with 
instructions that shall be provided with the equipment, A 
written record of this test shall be made and shall be 
available to the authority having jurisdiction. 

Informational Note No. 1: Ground-fault protection that 
iiinctions to open the service disconnect affords no 
protection from faults on the line side of the protective 
element. It serves only to limit damage to conductors 
and equipment on the load side in the event of an arcing 
ground fault on the load side of the protective element. 



Informational Note No. 2: This added protective 
equipment at the service equipment may make it 
necessary to review the overall wiring system for proper 
selective overcurrent protection coordination. Additional 
installations of ground-tkult protective equipment may 
be needed on feeders and branch circuits where 
maximum continuity of electric service is necessary. 

Informational Note No. 3: Where ground-fault protection 
is provided for the service disconnect and interconnection 
is made with another supply system by a transfer device, 
means or devices may be needed to ensure proper ground - 
fault sensing by the ground- fault protection equipment. 

Informational Note No. 4: See 517.17(A) for information 
on where an additional step of ground-fault protection is 
required for hospitals and other buildings with critical 
areas or life support equipment. 

VIIL Services Exceeding 600 Volts, Nominal 

230.200 General. Service conductors and equipment used 
on circuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with 
all the applicable provisions of the preceding sections of 
this article and with the following sections that supplement 
or modify the preceding sections. In no case shall the 
provisions of Part VIII apply to equipment on the supply 
side of the service point. 

Informational Note: For clearances of conductors of 
over 600 volts, nominal, see ANSI C2-2007, National 
Electrical Safety Code. 

230.202 Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance 
conductors to buildings or enclosures shall be installed to 
conform to 230.202(A) and (B). 

(A) Conductor Size. Service-entrance conductors shall not 
be smaller than 6 AWG unless in multiconductor cable. 
Multi conductor cable shall not be smaller than 8 AWG. 

(B) Wiring Methods. Service-entrance conductors shall be 
installed by one of the wiring methods covered in 300.37 
and 300.50. 

230.204 Isolating Switches. 

(A) Where Required. Where oil switches or air, oil, 
vacuum, or sulfur hexafluoride circuit breakers constitute 
the service disconnecting means, an isolating switch with 
visible break contacts shall be installed on the supply side 
of the disconnecting means and all associated service 
equipment. 

Exception: An isolating switch shall not be required where 
the circuit breaker or switch is mounted on removable 
tfuck panels or metal-enclosed switchgear units where both 
of the following conditions apply: 

(1) Cannot he opened unless the circuit is disconnected. 

(2) Where all energized parts are automatically 
disconnected when the circuit breaker or switch is 
removed from the normal operating position. 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



70-87 



230.205 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



(B) Fuses as Isolating Switch. Where fuses are of the 
type that can be operated as a disconnecting switch, a set 
of such fuses shall be permitted as the isolating switch. 

(C) Accessible to Qualified Persons Only. The isolating 
switch shall be accessible to qualified persons only. 

(D) Connection to Ground. Isolating switches shall be 
provided with a means for readily connecting the load 
side conductors to a grounding electrode system, 
equipment ground busbar, or grounded steel structure 
when disconnected from the source of supply. 

A means for grounding the load side conductors to a 
grounding electrode system, equipment grounding busbar, 
or grounded structural steel shall not be required for any 
duplicate isolating switch installed and maintained by the 
electric supply company. 

230.205 Disconnecting Means. 

(A) Location. The service disconnecting means shall be 
located in accordance with 230.70. 

For either overhead or underground primary 
distribution systems on private property, the service 
disconnect shall be permitted to be located in a location 
that is not readily accessible, if the disconnecting means 
can be operated by mechanical linkage from a readily 
accessible point, or electronically in accordance with 
230,205(0. where applicable. 

(B) Type. Each service disconnect shall simultaneously 
disconnect all ungrounded service conductors that it 
controls and shall have a fault-closing rating that is not 
less than the maximum short-circuit current available at 
its supply terminals. 

Where fused switches or separately mounted fuses 
are installed, the fuse characteristics shall be permitted to 
contribute to the fault-closing rating of the disconnecting 
means. 

(C) Remote Control. For multibuilding, industrial 
installations under single management, the service 
disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located at a 
separate building or structure. In such cases, the service 
disconnecting means shall be permitted to be electrically 
operated by a readily accessible, remote-control device. 

230.206 Overcurrent Devices as Disconnecting Means, 

Where the circuit breaker or alternative for it, as specified 
in 230.208 for service overcurrent devices, meets the 
requirements specified in 230.205, they shall constitute 
the service disconnecting means. 

230.208 Protection Requirements. A short-circuit 
protective device shall be provided on the load side of, or 
as an integral part of, the service disconnect, and shall 
protect all ungrounded conductors that it supplies. The 



protective device shall be capable of detecting and 
interrupting all values of current, in excess of its trip 
setting or melting point, that can occur at its location. A 
fuse rated in continuous amperes not to exceed three 
times the ampacity of the conductor, or a circuit breaker 
with a trip setting of not more than six times the ampacity 
of the conductors, shall be considered as providing the 
required short-circuit protection. 

Informational Note: See Table 3I0.60(CX67) through 
[Tabic 310.60{C)(86) for ampacities of conductors rated 
2001 volts and above. 

Overcurrent devices shall conform to 230.208(A) and (B). 

(A) Equipment Type. Equipment used to protect service- 
entrance conductors shall meet the requirements of 
Article 490, Part 11. 

(B) Enclosed Overcurrent Devices. The restriction to 80 
percent of the rating for an enclosed overcurrent device 
for continuous loads shall not apply to overcurrent 
devices installed in systems operating at over 600 volts. 

230.209 Surge Arresters (Lightning Arresters). Surge 
arresters installed in accordance with the requirements of 
Article 280 shall be permitted on each ungrounded 
overhead service conductor. 

230.210 Service Equipment — General Provisions. 

Service equipment, including instrument transformers, 
shall conform to Article 490, Part I. 

230.211 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. Metal-enclosed 
switchgear shall consist of a substantial metal structure 
and a sheet metal enclosure. Where installed over a 
combustible floor, suitable protection thereto shall be 
provided. 

230.212 Over 35,000 Volts. Where the voltage exceeds 
35,000 volts between conductors that enter a building, 
they shall terminate in a metal-enclosed switchgear 
compartment or a vault conforming to the requirements of 
450.41 through 450.48. 



ARTICLE 240 

Overcurrent Protection 

I. General 

240,1 Scope. Parts I through VIT of this article provide the 
general requirements for overcurrent protection and 
overcurrent protective devices not more than 600 volts, 
nominal. Part VIII covers overcurrent protection for those 
portions of supervised industrial installations operating at 
voltages of not more than 600 vohs, nominal. Part IX 
covers overcurrent protection over 600 volts, nominal. 



70-88 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.4 



Informational Note: Overcurrent protection for 
conductors and equipment is provided to open tlie circuit 
if the current reaches a value that will cause an 
excessive or dangerous temperature in conductors or 
conductor insulation. See also 1 10.9 for requirements for 
interrupting ratings and 110.10 for requirements for 
protection against fault currents. 

240.2 Definitions. 

Current-Limiting Overcurrent Protective Device. A 

device that, when interrupting currents in its current- 
limiting range, reduces the current flowing in the faulted 
circuit to a magnitude substantially less than that 
obtainable in the same circuit if the device were replaced 
with a solid conductor having comparable impedance. 

Supervised Industrial Installation. For the purposes of 
Part VIII, the industrial portions of a facility where all of 
the following conditions are met: 



Table 240.3 Other Articles 



(1) Conditions of maintenance 
supervision ensure that only 
monitor and service the system. 



and engineering 
qualified persons 



(2) The premises wiring system has 2500 kVA or greater 
of load used in industrial process(es), manufacturing 
activities, or both, as calculated in accordance with 
Article 220. 

(3) The premises has at least one service or feeder that is 
more than 150 volts to ground and more than 300 
volts phase-to-phase. 

This definition excludes installations in buildings used by 
the industrial facility for offices, warehouses, garages, 
machine shops, and recreafional facilifies that are not an 
integral part of the industrial plant, substation, or control 
center. 

Tap Conductors. As used in this article, a tap conductor 
is defined as a conductor, other than a service conductor, 
that has overcurrent protection ahead of its point of 
supply that exceeds the value permitted for similar 
conductors that are protected as described elsewhere in 
240.4. 

240.3 Other Articles. 

Equipment shall be protected against overcurrent in 
accordance with the article in this Code that covers the 
type of equipment specified in Table 240.3. 

240.4 Protection of Conductors. Conductors, other than 
flexible cords, flexible cables, and fixture wires, shall be 
protected against overcurrent in accordance with their 
ampacities specified in 310.15, unless otherwise permitted 
or required in 240.4(A) through (G). 

Informational Note: See ICEA P-32-3«2-2007 for 
tntbnuation on allowable short-circuit currenU* for 
insulated copper and aluminum conductors. 



Equipment 


Article 


Air-conditioning and refrigerating 


440 


equipment 




AppHances 


422 


Assembly occupancies 


518 


Audio signal processing, amplification, 


640 


and reproduction equipment 




Branch circuits 


210 


Busways 


368 


Capacitors 


460 


Class 1 , Class 2, and Class 3 remote- 


725 


control, signaling, and power-limited 




circuits 




Closed-loop and programmed power 


780 


distribution 




Cranes and hoists 


610 


Electric signs and oudine lighting 


600 


Electric welders 


630 


Electrolytic cells 


668 


Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, 


620 


moving walks, wheelchair lifts, and 




stairway chair lifts 




Emergency systems 


700 


Fire alarm systems 


760 


Fire pumps 


695 


Fixed electric heating equipment for 


427 


pipelines and vessels 




Fixed electric space-heating equipment 


424 


Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow- 


426 


melting equipment 




Generators 


445 


Health care facilities 


517 


Induction and dielectric heating 


665 


equipment 




Industrial machinery 


670 


Luminaires (lighting fixtures), 


410 


lampholders, and lamps 




Motion picture and television studios and 


530 


similar locations 




Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 


430 


Phase converters 


455 


Pipe organs 


650 


Receptacles 


406 


Services 


230 


Solar photovoltaic systems 


690 


Switchboards and panelboards 


408 


Theaters, audience areas of motion 


520 


picture and television studios, and 




similar locations 




Transformers and transformer vaults 


450 


X-ray equipment 


660 



(A) Power Loss Hazard. Conductor overload protection 
shall not be required where the interruption of the circuit 
would create a hazard, such as in a material-handling 
magnet circuit or fire pump circuit. Short-circuit 
protection shall be provided. 

Informational Note: See NFPA 20-2010, Standard for 
the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-89 



240.5 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



(B) Overcurrent Devices Rated 800 Amperes or Less. 
The next higher standard overcurrent device rating (above 
the ampacity of the conductors being protected) shall be 
permitted to be used, provided all of the following 
conditions are met: 

(1) The conductors being protected are not part of a 
branch circuil supplying more than one receptacle for 

cord-and-plug-connected portable loads. 

(2) The ampacity of the conductors does not correspond 
with the standard ampere rating of a fuse or a circuit 
breaker without overload trip adjustments above its 
rating (but that shall be permitted to have other trip or 
rating adjustments). 

(3) The next higher standard rating selected does not 
exceed 800 amperes. 

(C) Overcurrent Devices Rated over 800 Amperes. 

Where the overcurrent device is rated over 800 amperes, 
the ampacity of the conductors it protects shall be equal to 
or greater than the rating of the overcuiTent device 
defmed in 240.6. 

(D) Small Conductors, Unless specifically permitted in 
240.4(E) or (G), the overcurrent protection shall not 
exceed that required by (D)(1) through (D)(7) after any 
correction factors for ambient temperature and number of 
conductors have been applied. 

(1) 18 AWG Copper. 7 amperes, provided all the 
following conditions are met: 

(1) Continuous loads do not exceed 5.6 amperes. 

(2) Overcurrent protection is provided by one of the 
following; 

a. Branch-circuit-rated circuit breakers listed and 
marked for use with 18 AWG copper wire 

b. Branch-circuit-rated fuses listed and marked for 
use with 1 8 AWG copper wire 

c. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses 

(2) 16 AWG Copper. 10 amperes, provided all the 
following conditions are met: 

(1) Continuous loads do not exceed 8 amperes. 

(2) Overcurrent protection is provided by one of the 
following: 

a. Branch-circuit-rated circuit breakers listed and 
marked for use with 1 6 AWG copper wire 

b. Branch-circuit-rated fuses listed and marked for 
use with 16 AWG copper wire 

c. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses 

(3) 14 AWG Copper. 15 amperes 

(4) 12 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum. 

15 amperes 



(5) 12 AWG Copper. 20 amperes 

(6) 10 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum. 

25 amperes 

(7) 10 AWG Copper. 30 amperes 

(E) Tap Conductors. Tap conductors shall be permitted 
to be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the 
following: 

(1) 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4), Household Ranges and 
Cooking Appliances and Other Loads 

(2) 240.5(B)(2), Fixture Wire 

(3) 240.21, Location in Circuit 

(4) 368.17(B), Reduction in Ampacity Size of Busway 

(5) 368. 1 7(C), Feeder or Branch Circuits (busway taps) 

(6) 430.53(D), Single Motor Taps 

(F) Transformer Secondary Conductors. Single-phase 
(other than 2- wire) and muhiphase (other than delta-delta, 
3 -wire) transformer secondary conductors shall not be 
considered to be protected by the primary overcurrent 
protective device. Conductors supplied by the secondary 
side of a single-phase transformer having a 2-wire (single- 
voltage) secondary, or a three-phase, delta-deha 
connected transformer having a 3 -wire (single-voltage) 
secondary, shall be permitted to be protected by 
overcurrent protection provided on the primary (supply) 
side of the transformer, provided this protection is in 
accordance with 450.3 and does not exceed the value 
determined by muhiplying the secondary conductor 
ampacity by the secondary-to -primary transformer 
voltage ratio. 

(G) Overcurrent Protection for Specific Conductor 
Applications. OvercuiTent protection for the specific 
conductors shall be permitted to be provided as referenced 
m Table 240.4(G). 

240.5 Protection of Flexible Cords, Flexible Cables, 

and Fixture Wires. 

Flexible cord and flexible cable, including tinsel cord and 
extension cords, and fixture wires shall be protected 
against overcurrent by either 240.5(A) or (B). 

(A) Ampacities. Flexible cord and flexible cable shall be 
protected by an overcuiTent device in accordance with 
their ampacity as specified in Table 400.5(A)^l) and 
Table 400.5(A)(2). Fixture wire shall be protected against 
overcurrent in accordance with its ampacity as specified 
in Table 402,5. Supplementary overcurrent protection, as 
covered in 240.10, shall be permitted to be an acceptable 
means for providing this protection. 

(B) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Device. Flexible cord 
shall be protected, where supplied by a branch circuit, in 
accordance with one of the methods described in 
240.5(B)(1), (B)(3), or (B)(4). Fixture wire shall be 
protected, where supplied by a branch circuit, in 
accordance with 240.5(B)(2). 



70-90 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.10 



Table 240.4(G) Specific Conductor Applications 



Conductor 


Article 


Section 


Air-conditioning and 


440, Parts III, VI 




refrigeration 






equipment circuit 






conductors 






Capacitor circuit 


460 


460.8(B) and 


conductors 




460.25(A)-(D) 


Control and 


727 


727.9 


instrumentation 






circuit conductors 






(Type ITC) 






Electric welder circuit 


630 


630.12 and 


conductors 




630.32 


Fire alarm system 


760 


760.23, 760.24, 


circuit conductors 




760.41, and 

Chapter 9, 

Tables 12(A) 

and 12(B) 


Motor-operated 


422, Part II 




appliance circuit 






conductors 






Motor and motor- 


430, Parts III, 




control circuit 


IV, V, VI, VII 




conductors 






Phase converter supply 


455 


455.7 


conductors 






Remote-control, 


725 


725.23, 725.24, 


signaling, and power- 




725.41, and 


limited circuit 




Chapter 9, 


conductors 




Tables 11(A) 
and 11(B) 


Secondary tie 


450 


450,6 


conductors 







(1) Supply Cord of Listed Appliance or Lurainaire. 

Where flexible cord or tinsel cord is approved for and 
used with a specific listed appliance or luminaire, it shall 
be considered to be protected when applied within the 
appliance or luminaire listing requirements. For the 
purposes of this section, a luminaire may be either 
portable or permanent. 

(2) Fixture Wire. Fixture wire shall be permitted to be 
tapped to the branch-circuit conductor of a branch circuit 
in accordance with the following: 

(1) 20-ampere circuits — 18 AWG, up to 15 m (50 ft) of 
run length 

(2) 20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG, up to 30 m (100 ft) 
of run length 

(3) 20-ampere circuits — 14 AWG and larger 

(4) 30-ampere circuits — 14 AWG and larger 

(5) 40-ampere circuits — 12 AWG and larger 

(6) 50-ampere circuits — 12 AWG and larger 



(3) Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord used in listed 
extension cord sets shall be considered to be protected 
when applied within the extension cord listing 
requirements. 

(4) Field Assembled Extension Cord Sets. Flexible cord 
used in extension cords made with separately listed and 
installed components shall be permitted to be supplied by 
a branch circuit in accordance with the following: 

20-ampere circuits — 16 AWG and larger 
240.6 Standard Ampere Ratings. 

(A) Fuses and Fixed-Trip Circuit Breakers. The 
standard ampere ratings for fuses and inverse time circuit 
breakers shall be considered 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 
2000, 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000, and 6000 amperes. 
Additional standard ampere ratings for liises shall be I, 3, 
6, 10, and 601. The use of ftises and inverse time circuit 
breakers with nonstandard ampere ratings shall be 
permitted. 

(B) Adjustable-Trip Circuit Breakers. The rating of 
adjustable- trip circuit breakers having external means for 
adjusting the current setting (long-time pickup setting), 
not meeting the requirements of 240.6(C), shall be the 
maximum setting possible. 

(C) Restricted Access Adjustable-Trip Circuit 
Breakers. A circuit breaker(s) that has restricted access to 
the adjusting means shall be permitted to have an ampere 
rating(s) that is equal to the adjusted current setting (long- 
time pickup setting). Restricted access shall be defined as 
located behind one of the following: 

(1) Removable and scalable covers over the adjusting 
means 

(2) Bolted equipment enclosure doors 

(3) Locked doors accessible only to qualified personnel 

240.8 Fuses or Circuit Breakers in Parallel. Fuses and 
circuit breakers shall be permitted to be connected in 
parallel where they are factory assembled in parallel and 
listed as a unit. Individual fuses, circuit breakers, or 
combinations thereof shall not otherwise be connected in 
parallel. 

240.9 Thermal Devices. Thermal relays and other 
devices not designed to open short circuits or ground 
faults shall not be used for the protection of conductors 
against overcurrent due to short circuits or ground faults, 
but the use of such devices shall be permitted to protect 
motor branch-circuit conductors from overload if 
protected in accordance with 430,40. 

240.10 Supplementary Overcurrent Protection. 
Where supplementary overcurrent protection is used for 
luminaires, appliances, and other equipment or for 
internal circuits and components of equipment, it shall not 
be used as a substitute for required branch-circuit 
overcurrent devices or in place of the required branch- 
circuit protection. Supplementary overcurrent devices 
shall not be required to be readily accessible. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-91 



240.12 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.12 Electrical System Coordination. Where an 
orderly shutdown is required to minimize the hazard(s) to 
personnel and equipment, a system of coordination based 
on the following two conditions shall be permitted: 

( 1 ) Coordinated short-circuit protection 

(2) Overload indication based on monitoring systems or 
devices 

Informational Note: The monitoring system may cause 
the condition to go to alarm, allowing corrective action 
or an orderly shutdown, thereby minimizing personnel 
hazard and equipment damage. 

240.13 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. 

Ground- fault protection of equipment shall be provided in 
accordance with the provisions of 230.95 for solidly 
grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts to 
ground but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase for 
each individual device used as a building or structure 
main disconnecting means rated 1000 amperes or more. 

The provisions of this section shall not apply to the 
disconnecting means for the following: 

(1) Continuous industrial processes where a nonorderly 
shutdown will introduce additional or increased 
hazards 

(2) Installations where ground-fault protection is 
provided by other requirements for services or 
feeders 

(3) Fire pumps 

240.15 Ungrounded Conductors. 

(A) Overcurrent Device Required. A fuse or an 

overcurrent trip unit of a circuit breaker shall be 
connected in series with each ungrounded conductor. A 
combination of a current transformer and overcurrent 
relay shall be considered equivalent to an overcurrent trip 
unit. 

Informational Note: For motor circuits, see Parts III, IV, 
V, and XI of Article 430. 

(B) Circuit Breaker as Overcurrent Device. Circuit 
breakers shall open all ungrounded conductors of the 
circuit both manually and automatically unless otherwise 
permitted in 240.15(B)(1), (B)(2), (B)(3V and (B)(4), 

(1) Multiwire Branch Circuit. Individual single-pole 
circuit breakers, uHh identified handle ties, shall be 
permitted as the protection for each ungrounded 
conductor of multiwire branch circuits that serve only 
single-phase line-to-neutral loads. 

(2) Grounded Single-Phase Alternating-CurrenC 

Circuits. In grounded systems, individual single-pole 
circuit breakers rated 120/240 volts ac, with identified 
handle ties, shall be permitted as the protection for each 
ungrounded conductor for line-to-line connected loads for 
single-phase circuiis. 



(3) 3-Phase and 2-Phase Systems. For line-to-line loads 
in 4-wire, 3 -phase systems or 5 -wire, 2 -phase isystems, 
individual single-pole circuit breakers hiled 1 20/240 volts 
ac with identified handle ties shall be permitted as the 
protection for each ungrounded conductor, if the systems 
have a grounded neutral point and the voltage to ground 
docs not exceed 1 20 volts, 

(4) 3-Wire Direct-Current CircuiCs. Individual single- 
pole circuit breakers rated 125/250 volts dc with 
identified handle tics shall be permitted as the protection 
for each ungrounded conductor for line-to-line connected 
loads for 3-\vire, direct-cuirent circuits supplied from a 
system with a grounded neutral where the voltagp 10( 
ground docs not exceed 1 25 volts. 



11. Location 

240.21 Location in Circuit. Overcurrent protection shall 
be provided in each ungrounded circuit conductor and 
shall be located at the point where the conductors receive 
their supply except as specified in 240,2 1(A) through (fi). 
Conductors supplied under the provisions of 240.21(A) 
through (H) shall not supply another conductor except 
through an overcurrent protective device meeting the 
requirements of 240.4. 

(A) Branch-Circuit Conductors. Branch-circuit tap 
conductors meeting the requirements specified in 210.19 
shall be permitted to have overcurrent protection as 
specified in 2 10.20. 

(B) Feeder Taps. Conductors shall be permitted to be 
tapped, without overcurrent protection at the tap, to a 
feeder as specified in 240.21(B)(1) through (B)(5). The 
provisions of 240.4(B) shall not be permitted for tap 
conductors. 

(1) Taps Not over 3 m (10 ft) Long. If the length of the 
tap conductors does not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and the tap 
conductors comply with all of the following: 

(1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is 

a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on 
the circuits supplied by the tap conductors, and 

b. Not less than the rating of the device supplied by 
the tap conductors or not less than the rating of 
the overcurrent protective device at the 
termination of the tap conductors. 

(2) The tap conductors do not extend beyond the 
switchboard, panelboard, disconnecting means, or 
control devices they supply. 

(3) Except at the point of connection to the feeder, the 
tap conductors are enclosed in a raceway, which shall 
extend from the tap to the enclosure of an enclosed 
switchboard, panelboard, or control devices, or to the 
back of an open switchboard. 



70-92 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.21 



(4) For field installations, (if the tap conductors leave the 
enclosure or vault in which the tap is made, the 
bmpacity of the lap conductors is not less than one- 
lenih of the rating of the overciurcni device 
protecting the Jeeder conductors j 

Informational Note: For overcurrent protection 
requirements for panelboards, see 408.36. 

(2) Taps Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. Where the length 
of the tap conductors does not exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) and 
the tap conductors comply with all the following: 

(1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than 
one-third of the rating of the overcurrent device 
protecting the feeder conductors. 

(2) The tap conductors terminate in a single circuit 
breaker or a single set of fuses that limit the load to 
the ampacity of the tap conductors. This device shall 
be permitted to supply any number of additional 
overcurrent devices on its load side. 

(3) The tap conductors are protected from physical 
damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or 
by other approved means. 

(3) Taps Supplying a Transformer [Primary Pius 
Secondary Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long], Where the tap 
conductors supply a transformer and comply with all the 
following conditions: 

(1) The conductors supplying the primary of a 
transformer have an ampacity at least one-third the 
rating of the overcurrent device protecting the feeder 
conductors. 

(2) The conductors supplied by the secondary of the 
transformer shall have an ampacity that is not less 
than the value of the primary-to-secondary voltage 
ratio multiplied by one-third of the rating of the 
overcurrent device protecting the feeder conductors. 

(3) The total length of one primaiy plus one secondary 
conductor, excluding any portion of the primary 
conductor that is protected at its ampacity, is not over 
7.5 m (25 ft). 

(4) The primary and secondary conductors are protected 
from physical damage by being enclosed in an 
approved raceway or by other approved means. 

(5) The secondary conductors terminate in a single 
circuit breaker or set of ftises that limit the load 
current to not more than the conductor ampacity that 
is permitted by 310.15. 

(4) Taps over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. Where the feeder is in 
a high bay manufacturing building over 11 m (35 ft) high 
at walls and the installation complies with all the 
following conditions: 

(1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
that only qualified persons service the systems. 



(2) The tap conductors are not over 7.5 m (25 ft) long 
horizontally and not over 30 m (100 ft) total length. 

(3) The ampacity of the tap conductors is not less than 
one-third the rating of the overcurrent device 
protecting the feeder conductors. 

(4) The tap conductors terminate at a single circuit 
breaker or a single set of fuses that limit the load to 
the ampacity of the tap conductors. This single 
overcurrent device shall be permitted to supply any 
number of additional overcurrent devices on its load 
side. 

(5) The tap conductors are protected from physical 
damage by being enclosed in an approved raceway or 
by other approved means. 

(6) The tap conductors are continuous from end-to-end 
and contain no splices. 

(7) The tap conductors are sized 6 AWG copper or 4 
AWG aluminum or larger. 

(8) The tap conductors do not penetrate walls, floors, or 
ceilings. 

(9) The tap is made no less than 9 m (30 ft) ft-om the 
floor. 

(5) Outside Taps of Unlimited Length. Where the 
conductors are located outdoors of a building or structure, 
except at the point of load termination, and comply with 
all of the following conditions; 

(1) The conductors are protected from physical damage 
in an approved manner. 

(2) The conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker 
or a single set of fuses that limit the load to the 
ampacity of the conductors. This single overcurrent 
device shall be permitted to supply any number of 
additional overcurrent devices on its load side. 

(3) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an 
integral part of a disconnecting means or shall be 
located immediately adjacent thereto. 

(4) The disconnecting means for the conductors is 
installed at a readily accessible location complying 
with one of the following: 

a. Outside of a building or structure 

b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the 
conductors 

c. Where installed in accordance with 230.6, 
nearest the point of entrance of the conductors 

(C) Transformer Secondary Conductors. A set of 
conductors feeding a single load, or each set of 
conductors feeding separate loads, shall be permitted to 
be connected to a transformer secondary, without 
overcurrent protection at the secondary, as specified in 
240.21(C)(1) through (C)(6). The provisions of 240.4(B) 
shall not be permitted for transformer secondary 
conductors. 

Informational Note: For overcurrent protection 

requirements for transformers, see 450.3. 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



70-93 



240.21 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



(1) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. 

Conductors supplied by the secondary side of a single- 
phase transformer having a 2-wire (single-voltage) 
secondary, or a three-phase, delta-delta connected 
transformer having a 3 -wire (single- voltage) secondary, 
shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent 
protection provided on the primary (supply) side of the 
transformer, provided this protection is in accordance 
with 450.3 and does not exceed the value determined by 
multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by the 
secondary-to-primary transformer voltage ratio. 
Single-phase (other than 2-wire) and multiphase (other 
than delta-delta, 3 -wire) transformer secondary 
conductors are not considered to be protected by the 
primary overcurrent protective device. 

(2) Transformer Secondary Conductors Not over 3 m 
(10 ft) Long. If the length of secondary conductor does 
not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and complies with all of the 
following: 

(1) The ampacity of the secondary conductors is 

a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on 
the circuits supplied by the secondary 
conductors, and 

b. Not less than the rating of the device supplied by 
the secondary conductors or not less than the 
rating of the overcurrent-protective device at the 
termination of the secondary conductors 

(2) The secondary conductors do not extend beyond the 
switchboard, panelboard, disconnecting means, or 
control devices they supply. 

(3) The secondary conductors are enclosed in a raceway, 
which shall extend from the transformer to the 
enclosure of an enclosed switchboard, panelboard, or 
control devices or to the back of an open 
switchboard. 

(4) For field installations where the secondary 
conductors leave the enclosure or vault in which the 
supply connection is made, the rating of the 
overcurrent device protecting the primary of the 
transformer, multiplied by the primary to secondary 
transformer voltage ratio, shall not exceed 10 times 
the ampacity of the secondary conductor. 

Informational Note: For overcurrent protection 
requirements for panelboards, see 408.36. 

(3) Industrial Installation Secondary Conductors Not 
over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. For industrial installations only, 
where the length of the secondary conductors does not 
exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) and comphes with all of the 
following: 

(1) Conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
that only qualified persons service the systems. 

(2) The ampacity of the secondary conductors is not less 
than the secondary current rating of the transformer, 
and the sum of the ratings of the overcurrent devices 



does not exceed the ampacity of the secondary 
conductors. 

(3) All overcurrent devices are grouped. 

(4) The secondary conductors are protected from 
physical damage by being enclosed in an approved 
raceway or by other approved means. 

(4) Outside Secondary Conductors. Where the 
conductors are located outdoors of a building or structure, 
except at the point of load termination, and comply with 
all of the following conditions: 

(1) The conductors are protected from physical damage 
in an approved manner. 

(2) The conductors terminate at a single circuit breaker 
or a single set of fuses that limit the load to the 
ampacity of the conductors. This single overcurrent 
device shall be permitted to supply any number of 
additional overcurrent devices on its load side. 

(3) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an 
integral part of a disconnecting means or shall be 
located immediately adjacent thereto. 

(4) The disconnecting means for the conductors is 
installed at a readily accessible location complying 
with one of the following: 

a. Outside of a building or structure 

b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors 

c. Where installed in accordance with 230.6, nearest the 
point of entrance of the conductors 

(5) Secondary Conductors from a Feeder Tapped 

Transformer. Transformer secondary conductors 
installed in accordance with 240.21(B)(3) shall be 
permitted to have overcurrent protection as specified in 
that section. 

(6) Secondary Conductors Not over 7.5 m (25 ft) Long. 

Where the length of secondary conductor does not exceed 
7.5 m (25 ft) and complies with all of the following: 

(1) The secondary conductors shall have an ampacity 
that is not less than the value of the primary-to- 
secondary vohage ratio multiplied by one-third of the 
rating of the overcurrent device protecting the 
primary of the transformer. 

(2) The secondary conductors terminate in a single 
circuit breaker or set of fuses that limit the load 
current to not more than the conductor ampacity that 
is permitted by 3 1 0. 1 5. 

(3) The secondary conductors are protected from 
physical damage by being enclosed in an approved 
raceway or by other approved means. 

(D) Service Conductors. Service conductors shall be 
permitted to be protected by overcurrent devices in 
accordance with 230.91. 

(E) Busway Taps. Busways and busway taps shall be 
permitted to be protected against overcurrent in 
accordance with 368.17. 



70-94 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.32 



(F) Motor Circuit Taps. Motor- feeder and branch-circuit 
conductors shall be permitted to be protected against 
overcurrent in accordance with 430.28 and 430.53, 
respectively. 

(G) Conductors from Generator Terminals. 

Conductors from generator terminals that meet the size 
requirement in 445.13 shall be permitted to be protected 
against overload by the generator overload protective 
device(s) required by 445. 12. 

(H) Battery Conductors. Overcurrent protection shall be 
permitted to be installed as close as practicable to the 
storage battery terminals in an unclassified location. 
Installation of the overcurrent protection within a 
hazardous |classified) location shall also be permitted. 

240.22 Grounded Conductor. 

No overcurrent device shall be connected in series with 
any conductor that is intentionally grounded, unless one 
of the following two conditions is met: 

(1) The overcurrent device opens all conductors of the 
circuit, including the grounded conductor, and is 
designed so that no pole can operate independently. 

(2) Where required by 430.36 or 430.37 for motor 
overload protection. 

240.23 Change in Size of Grounded Conductor. Where 
a change occurs in the size of the ungrounded conductor, 
a similar change shall be permitted to be made in the size 
of the grounded conductor. 

240.24 Location in or on Premises. 

(A) Accessibility. Overcurrent devices shall be readily 
accessible and shall be installed so that the center of the 
grip of the operating handle of the switch or circuit 
breaker, when in its highest position, is not more than 2.0 
m (6 ft 7 in.) above the tloor or working platform, unless 
one of the following applies: 

(1) For busways, as provided in 368.17(C). 

(2) For supplementary overcurrent protection, as 
described in 240.10. 

(3) For overcurrent devices, as described in 225.40 and 
230,92. 

(4) For overcurrent devices adjacent to utilization 
equipment that they supply, access shall be permitted 
to be by portable means. 

(B) Occupancy. Each occupant shall have ready access to 
all overcurrent devices protecting the conductors 
supplying that occupancy, unless otherwise permitted in 
240.24(B)(1) and (B)(2). 



(1) Service and Feeder Overcurrent Devices. Where 
electric service and electrical maintenance are provided 
by the building management and where these are under 
continuous building management supervision, the service 
overcurrent devices and feeder overcurrent devices 
supplying more than one occupancy shall be permitted to 
be accessible only to authorized management personnel in 
the following: 

(1) Multiple-occupancy buildings 

(2) Guest rooms or guest suites 

(2) Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Devices. Where 
electric service and electrical maintenance are provided 
by the building management and where these are under 
continuous building management supervision, the branch- 
circuit overcurrent devices supplying any guest rooms or 
guest suites without permanent provisions for cooking 
shall be permitted to be accessible only to authorized 
management personnel. 

(C) Not Exposed to Physical Damage. Overcurrent 
devices shall be located where they will not be exposed to 
physical damage. 

Informational Note: See 1 10. 11, Deteriorating Agents. 

(D) Not in Vicinity of Easily Ignitible Material, 

Overcurrent devices shall not be located in the vicinity of 
easily ignitible material, such as in clothes closets. 

(E) Not Located in Bathrooms. Tn dwelling units, 
dormitories, and guest rooms or guest suiteS| overcurrent 
devices, other than supplementary overcurrent protection, 
shall not be located in bathrooms. 

(F) Not Located over Steps. Overcurrent devices shall 
not be located over steps of a stairway. 

in. Enclosures 

240.30 General. 

(A) Protection from Physical Damage. Overcurrent 
devices shall be protected from physical damage by one 
of the following: 

(1) Installation in enclosures, cabinets, cutout boxes, or 
equipment assemblies 

(2) Mounting on open-type switchboards, panelboards, 
or control boards that are in rooms or enclosures free 
from dampness and easily ignitible material and are 
accessible only to qualified personnel 

(B) Operating Handle. The operating handle of a circuit 
breaker shall be permitted to be accessible without 
opening a door or cover. 

240.32 Damp or Wet Locations. Enclosures for 
overcurrent devices in damp or wet locations shall comply 
with 312.2. 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



70-95 



240.33 



ARTICLE 240 ~ OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.33 Vertical Position. Enclosures for overcurrent 
devices shall be mounted in a vertical position unless that 
is shown to be impracticable. Circuit breaker enclosures 
shall be permitted to be installed horizontally where the 
circuit breaker is installed in accordance with 240.81. 
Listed busway plug-in units shall be permitted to be 
mounted in orientations corresponding to the busway 
mounting position. 

IV. Disconnecting and Guarding 

240.40 Disconnecting Means for Fuses. Cartridge fuses 
in circuits of any voltage where accessible to other than 
qualified persons, and all fuses in circuits over 150 vohs 
to ground, shall be provided with a disconnecting means 
on their supply side so that each circuit containing fuses 
can be independently disconnected from the source of 
power. A current-limiting device without a disconnecting 
means shall be permitted on the supply side of the service 
disconnecting means as permitted by 230.82. A single 
disconnecting means shall be permitted on the supply side 
of more than one set of fuses as permitted by 430.112, 
Exception, for group operation of motors and 424.22(C) 
for fixed electric space-heating equipment. 

240.41 Arcing or Suddenly Moving Parts. Arcing or 
suddenly moving parts shall comply with 240.41(A) and 
(B). 

(A) Location. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be located 
or shielded so that persons will not be burned or otherwise 
injured by their operation. 

(B) Suddenly Moving Parts. Handles or levers of circuit 
breakers, and similar parts that may move suddenly in 
such a way that persons in the vicinity are likely to be 
injured by being struck by them, shall be guarded or 
isolated. 

V. Plug Fuses, Fusehoiders, and Adapters 
240.50 General. 

(A) Maximum Voltage. Plug fuses shall be permitted to 
be used in the following circuits: 

(1) Circuits not exceeding 125 volts between conductors 

(2) Circuits supplied by a system having a grounded 
neutral point where the line -to-neutral voltage does 
not exceed 150 volts 

(B) Marking. Each fuse, fuseholder, and adapter shall be 
marked with its ampere rating. 

(C) Hexagonal Configuration. Plug fuses of 15-ampere 
and lower rating shall be identified by a hexagonal 
configuration of the window, cap, or other prominent part 
to distinguish them from fuses of higher ampere ratings. 



(D) No Energized Parts. Plug fuses, fusehoiders, and 
adapters shall have no exposed energized parts after fuses 
or fuses and adapters have been installed. 

(E) Screw Shell. The screw shell of a plug-type 
fuseholder shall be connected to the load side of the 
circuit. 

240.51 Edison-Base Fuses. 

(A) Classification. Plug fuses of the Edison-base type 
shall be classified at not over 125 volts and 30 amperes 
and below. 

(B) Replacement Only. Plug fuses of the Edison-base 
type shall be used only for replacements in existing 
installations where there is no evidence of overfusing or 
tampering. 

240.52 Edison-Base Fusehoiders. Fusehoiders of the 
Edison-base type shall be installed only where they are 
made to accept Type S fuses by the use of adapters. 

240.53 Type S Fuses. Type S fuses shall be of the plug 
type and shall comply with 240.53(A) and (B). 

(A) Classification. Type S fuses shall be classified at not 
over 125 volts and to 15 amperes, 16 to 20 amperes, and 
21 to 30 amperes. 

(B) Nonlnterchangeable. Type S fuses of an ampere 
classification as specified in 240.53(A) shall not be 
interchangeable with a lower ampere classification. They 
shall be designed so that they cannot be used in any 
fuseholder other than a Type S fuseholder or a fuseholder 
with a Type S adapter inserted. 

240.54 Type S Fuses, Adapters, and Fusehoiders. 

(A) To Fit Edison-Base Fusehoiders. Type S adapters 
shall fit Edison-base fusehoiders. 

(B) To Fit Type S Fuses Only. Type S fusehoiders and 
adapters shall be designed so that either the fuseholder 
itself or the ftiseholder with a Type S adapter inserted 
cannot be used for any fUse other than a Type S fuse. 

(C) Nonremovable. Type S adapters shall be designed so 
that once inserted in a fuseholder, they cannot be 
removed. 

(D) Nontamperable. Type S fuses, fusehoiders, and 
adapters shall be designed so that tampering or shunting 
(bridging) would be difficuh. 

(E) Interchangeability. Dimensions of Type S fiises, 
fusehoiders, and adapters shall be standardized to permit 
interchangeability regardless of the manufacturer. 



70-96 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.85 



VI. Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholders 

240.60 General. 

(A) Maximum Voltage — 300-Voit Type. Cartridge 
fuses and fuseholders of the 300-volt type shall be 
permitted to be used in the following circuits: 

(1) Circuits not exceeding 300 volts between conductors 

(2) Single-phase line-to-neutral circuits supplied from a 
3 -phase, 4-wire, solidly grounded neutral source 
where the line -to-neutral voltage does not exceed 300 
volts 

(B) Noninterchangeabie — 0-6000-Ampere Cartridge 
Fuseholders. Fuseholders shall be designed so that it will 
be difficult to put a fuse of any given class into a 
fuseholder that is designed for a current lower, or voltage 
higher, than that of the class to which the fuse belongs. 
Fuseholders for current-limiting fuses shall not permit 
insertion of fuses that are not current-limiting. 

(C) Marking. Fuses shall be plainly marked, either by 
printing on the ftise barrel or by a label attached to the 
barrel showing the following: 

(1) Ampere rating 

(2) Voltage rating 

(3) Interrupting rating where other than 10,000 amperes 

(4) Current limiting where apphcable 

(5) The name or trademark of the manufacturer 

The interrupting rating shall not be required to be 
marked on fuses used for supplementary protection. 

(D) Renewable Fuses. Class H cartridge fuses of the 
renewable type shall be permitted to be used only for 
replacement in existing installations where there is no 
evidence of overfusing or tampering. 

240.61 Classification. Cartridge fuses and fuseholders 
shall be classified according to voltage and amperage 
ranges. Fuses rated 600 volts, nominal, or less shall be 
permitted to be used for voltages at or below their ratings. 

VII. Circuit Breakers 

240.80 Method of Operation. Circuit breakers shall be 
trip free and capable of being closed and opened by 
manual operation. Their normal method of operation by 
other than manual means, such as electrical or pneumatic, 
shall be permitted if means for manual operation are also 
provided. 

240.81 Indicating. Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate 
whether they are in the open "off or closed "on" 
position. 

Where circuit breaker handles are operated vertically 
rather than rotationally or horizontally, the "up" position 
of the handle shall be the "on" position. 



240.82 Nontamperable. A circuit breaker shall be of 
such design that any aheration of its trip point 
(calibration) or the time required for its operation requires 
dismantling of the device or breaking of a seal for other 
than intended adjustments. 

240.83 Marking. 

(A) Durable and Visible. Circuit breakers shall be 
marked with their ampere rating in a manner that will be 
durable and visible after installation. Such marking shall 
be permitted to be made visible by removal of a trim or 
cover. 

(B) Location. Circuit breakers rated at 100 amperes or 
less and 600 volts or less shall have the ampere rating 
molded, stamped, etched, or similarly marked into their 
handles or escutcheon areas. 

(C) Interrupting Rating. Every circuit breaker having an 
interrupting rating other than 5000 amperes shall have its 
interrupting rating shown on the circuit breaker. The 
interrupting rating shall not be required to be marked on 
circuit breakers used for supplementary protection. 

(D) Used as Switches. Circuit breakers used as switches 
in 120-volt and 277-volt fluorescent lighting circuits shall 
be listed and shall be marked SWD or HID. Circuit 
breakers used as switches in high-intensity discharge 
lighting circuits shall be listed and shall be marked as 
HID. 

(E) Voltage Marking. Circuit breakers shall be marked 
with a voltage rating not less than the nominal system 
voltage that is indicative of their capability to interrupt 
fault currents between phases or phase to ground. 

240.85 Applications. A circuit breaker with a straight 
voltage rating, such as 240V or 480V, shall be permitted 
to be applied in a circuit in which the nominal voltage 
between any two conductors does not exceed the circuit 
breaker's voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall 
not be used for protecting a 3-phase, corner-grounded 
delta circuit unless the circuit breaker is marked lO-SO 
to indicate such suitability. 

A circuit breaker with a slash rating, such as 1 20/240 V or 
480Y/277V, shall be permitted to be applied in a solidly 
grounded circuit where the nominal voltage of any 
conductor to ground does not exceed the lower of the two 
values of the circuit breaker's voltage rating and the 
nominal voltage between any two conductors does not 
exceed the higher value of the circuit breaker's voltage 
rating. 

Informational Note: Proper application of molded case 
circuit breakers on 3-phase systems, other than solidly 
grounded wye, particularly on corner grounded delta 
systems, considers the circuit breakers' individual pole- 
interrupting capability. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-97 



240,86 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.86 Series Ratings. Where a circuit brealcer is used on 
a circuit having an available fault current higher than the 
marked interrupting rating by being connected on the load 
side of an acceptable overcurrent protective device having 
a higher rating, the circuit breaker shall meet the 
requirements specified in (A) or (B), and (C). 

(A) Selected Under Engineering Supervision in 
Existing Installations. The series rated combination 
devices shall be selected by a licensed professional engineer 
engaged primarily in the design or maintenance of electrical 
installations. The selection shall be documented and 
stamped by the professional engineer, This documentation 
shall be available to those authorized to design, install, 
inspect, maintain, and operate the system. This series 
combination rating, including identification of the upstream 
device, shall be field marked on the end use equipment. 

For calculated applications, the engineer shall ensure 
that the downstream circuit breaker(s) that are part of the 
series combination remain passive during the interruption 
period of the line side fully rated, current-limiting device. 

(B) Tested Combinations. The combination of line-side 
overcurrent device and load-side circuit breaker(s) is 
tested and marked on the end use equipment, such as 
switchboards and panelboards. 

Informational Note to (A) and (B): See 110.22 for 
marking of series combination systems. 

(C) Motor Contribution, Series ratings shall not be used 
where 

(1) Motors are connected on the load side of the higher- 
rated overcurrent device and on the line side of the 
lower-rated overcurrent device, and 

(2) The sum of the motor full-load currents exceeds 1 
percent of the interrupting rating of the lower-rated 
circuit breaker. 

240.87 Noninslantaneous Trip. Where a circuit breaker 

is used without an instantaneotis trip, documentalion shall 

be available to those authorized to design, install, operate, 

or inspect the installation as to the location of the circuit 

brcakcr(s). 

fWhcrc a circuit breaker is utilized without an 

instantaneous trip, one of the following or approved 

equivalent means shall he provided: 

(1) Zone-selective interlocking 

(2) Differential relaying 

(3) Energy-reducing maintenance switching with local 
status indicator 

Inlbrmatioiial Note: Aji energy-reducing inaintcnance 
switch at tows a worker ta set a circuit breaker trip imit 
to "no intentional delay" to reduce the clearing time 
while the worker is working within an arc- Hash 
boundary as defined in NFPA 7OE-2009, SUmdavd for 
Eiicfrica/ Sttjcfy in the Hf*rkp!acc\ and then to set the 
trip unit back to a normal siting after the potentially 
hazardous work is complete. 



VIII. Supervised Industrial Installations 

240.90 General. Overcurrent protection in areas of 
supervised industrial installations shall comply with all of 
the other applicable provisions of this article, except as 
provided in Part VIIL The provisions of Part VlII shall be 
permitted only to apply to those portions of the electrical 
system in the supervised industrial installation used 
exclusively for manufacturing or process control activities. 

240.91 Protection of Conductors. Conductors shall be 
protected in accordance with 240.91(A) or (B). 

(A) General. Conductors shall be protected in accordance 
with 240 A 

(B) Devices Rated Over 800 Amperes, Where the 
overcurrent device is rated over 800 amperes, the ampacity 
of the conductors it protects shall be equal to or greater than 
95 percent of the raling of the overcurrent device specified 
in 240.6 in accordance with (B)(1) and (2). 

|!) The conductors are protected within recognized time 
vs. current limits for short-circuit currents 

^2) AH equipment in which the conductors terminate is 
listed and marked for the application 

240.92 Location in Circuit. 

An overcurrent device shall be connected in each ungrounded 
circuit conductor as required in 240.92(A) tlirough (E). 

(A) Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors. Feeder and 
branch-circuit conductors shall be protected at the point the 
conductors receive their supply as permitted in 240.21 or as 
otherwise permitted in 240.92(B), (C), (D), or (E). 

(B) Feeder Taps. For feeder taps specified in 240.21(B)(2), 
(B)(3), and (B)(4), the tap conductors shall be permitted to 
be sized in accordance with Table 240.92(B). 

(C) Transformer Secondary Conductors of Separately 
Derived Systems. Conductors shall be permitted to be 
connected to a transformer secondary of a separately 
derived system, without overcurrent protection at the 
connection, where the conditions of 240.92(C)(1), (C)(2), 
and (C)(3) are met. 

(1) Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection. The 

conductors shall be protected from short-circuit and 
ground-fault conditions by complying with one of the 
following conditions: 

(1) The length of the secondary conductors does not 
exceed 30 m (100 ft) and the transformer primary 
overcurrent device has a rating or setting that does 
not exceed 150 percent of the value determined by 
multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by the 
secondary-to-primary transformer voltage ratio. 

(2) The conductors are protected by a differential relay 
with a trip setting equal to or less than the conductor 
ampacity. 



70-98 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 240 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 



240.92 



Table 240.92(B) Tap Conductor Short-Circuit Current Ratings. 

Tap conductors are considered to be protected under short- 
circuit conditions when their short-circuit temperature limit is 
not exceeded. Conductor heating under short-circuit 
conditions is determined by (1) or (2); 

(1) Short-Circuit Formula for Copper Conductors 
{I2IA2)t = 0.0297 logio [{Ti + 234)/(7| + 234)] 

(2) Short-Circuit Formula for Aluminum Conductors 

(P/A2)t = 0.0125 logio [(7^2 + 228)/(r] + 228)] 

where: 

/= short-circuit current in amperes 

A = conductor area in circular mils 

/ = time of short circuit in seconds (for times less than or equal 
to 10 seconds) 

T] =" initial conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. 

T2 = final conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. 

Copper conductor with paper, rubber, varnished cloth insulation, 
T2 = 200 

Copper conductor with thermoplastic insulation, T2 = 150 

Copper conductor with cross-linked polyethylene insulation, Tj 
-250 

Copper conductor with ethylene propylene rubber insulation, T2 
= 250 

Aluminum conductor with paper, rubber, varnished cloth 
insulation, T2 = 200 

Aluminum conductor with thermoplastic insulation, T2 = 150 

Aluminum conductor with cross-linked polyethylene insulation, 
T2 = 250 

Aluminum conductor with ethylene propylene rubber insulation, 
T2 = 250 

Informational Note: A differential relay is connected to 
be sensitive only to short-circuit or fault currents within 
the protected zone and is normally set much lower than 
the conductor ampacity. The differential relay is 
connected to trip protective devices that de-energize the 
protected conductors if a short-circuit condition occurs. 

(3) The conductors shall be considered to be protected if 
calculations, made under engineering supervision, 
determine that the system overcurrent devices will 
protect the conductors within recognized time vs. 
current limits for all short-circuit and ground-fault 
conditions. 



(2) Overload Protection. The conductors shall be 
protected against overload conditions by complying with 
one of the following: 

(1) The conductors terminate in a single overcurrent device 
that will limit the load to the conductor ampacity. 

(2) The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor 
termination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. 
The overcurrent devices shall consist of not more 
than six circuit breakers or sets of fuses, mounted in a 
single enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, or 
in or on a switchboard. There shall be no more than 
six overcurrent devices grouped in any one location. 

(3) Overcurrent relaying is connected [with a current 
transformer(s), if needed] to sense all of the secondary 
conductor cun-ent and limit the load to the conductor 
ampacity by opening upstream or downstream devices. 

(4) Conductors shall be considered to be protected if 
calculations, made under engineering supervision, 
determine that the system overcurrent devices will 
protect the conductors from overload conditions. 

(3) Physical Protection. The secondary conductors are 
protected from physical damage by being enclosed in an 
approved raceway or by other approved means. 

(D) Outside Feeder Taps. Outside conductors shall be 
permitted to be tapped to a feeder or to be connected at a 
transformer secondary, without overcurrent protection at 
the tap or connection, where all the following conditions 
are met: 

(1) The conductors are protected from physical damage 
in an approved manner. 

(2) The sum of the overcurrent devices at the conductor 
termination limits the load to the conductor ampacity. 
The overcurrent devices shall consist of not more 
than six circuit breakers or sets of fuses mounted in a 
single enclosure, in a group of separate enclosures, or 
in or on a switchboard. There shall be no more than 
six overcurrent devices grouped in any one location. 

(3) The tap conductors are installed outdoors of a 
building or structure except at the point of load 
termination. 

(4) The overcurrent device for the conductors is an 
integral part of a disconnecting means or shall be 
located immediately adjacent thereto. 

(5) The disconnecting means for the conductors are 
installed at a readily accessible location complying 
with one of the following: 

a. Outside of a building or structure 

b. Inside, nearest the point of entrance of the conductors 

c. Where installed in accordance with 230.6, nearest the 
point of entrance of the conductors 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-99 



240.100 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(E) Protection by Primary Overcurrent Device. 

Conductors supplied by the secondary side of a transformer 
shall be permitted to be protected by overcurrent protection 
provided on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, 
provided the primary device time-cuiTent protection 
characteristic, multiplied by the maximum effective 
primary-to-secondary transformer voltage ratio, effectively 
protects the secondary conductors. 

IX. Overcurrent Protection Over 600 Volts, Nominal 
240.100 Feeders and Branch Circuits. 

(A) Location and Type of Protection. Feeder and 
branch-circuit conductors shall have overcurrent protection 
in each ungrounded conductor located at the point where 
the conductor receives its supply or at an alternative 
location in the circuit when designed under engineering 
supervision that includes but is not limited to considering 
the appropriate fault studies and time-current coordination 
analysis of the protective devices and the conductor 
damage curves. The overcurrent protection shall be 
permitted to be provided by either 240. 100(A)(1) or (A)(2). 

(1) Overcurrent Relays and Current Transformers. 

Circuit breakers used for overcurrent protection of 3- 
phase circuits shall have a minimum of three overcurrent 
relay elements operated from three current transformers. 
The separate overcurrent relay elements (or protective 
functions) shall be permitted to be part of a single 
electronic protective relay unit. 

On 3-phase, 3-wire circuits, an overcurrent relay 
element in the residual circuit of the current transformers 
shall be permitted to replace one of the phase relay 
elements. 

An overcurrent relay element, operated from a 
current transformer that links all phases of a 3 -phase, 3- 
wire circuit, shall be permitted to replace the residual 
relay element and one of the phase-conductor current 
transformers. Where the neutral conductor is not 
regrounded on the load side of the circuit as permitted in 
250.184(B), the current transformer shall be permitted to 
link all 3 -phase conductors and the grounded circuit 
conductor (neutral). 

(2) Fuses. A fuse shall be connected in series with each 
ungrounded conductor. 

(B) Protective Devices. The protective device(s) shall be 
capable of detecting and interrupting all values of current 
that can occur at their location in excess of their trip- 
setting or melting point. 

(C) Conductor Protection. The operating time of the 
protective device, the available short-circuit current, and 
the conductor used shall be coordinated to prevent 
damaging or dangerous temperatures in conductors or 
conductor insulation under short-circuit conditions. 



240.101 Additional Requirements for Feeders. 

(A) Rating or Setting of Overcurrent Protective 

Devices. The continuous ampere rating of a fuse shall not 
exceed three times the ampacity of the conductors. The 
long-time trip element setting of a breaker or the 
minimum trip setting of an electronically actuated fuse 
shall not exceed six times the ampacity of the conductor. 
For fire pumps, conductors shall be permitted to be 
protected for overcurrent in accordance with 695.4(B)(2). 

(B) Feeder Taps. Conductors tapped to a feeder shall be 
permitted to be protected by the feeder overcurrent device 
where that overcurrent device also protects the tap 
conductor. 



ARTICLE 250 

Grounding and Bonding 



I. General 



250.1 Scope. 

This article covers general requirements for grounding 
and bonding of electrical installations, and the specific 
requirements in (1) through (6). 

(1) Systems, circuits, and equipment required, permitted, 
or not permitted to be grounded 

(2) Circuit conductor to be grounded on grounded systems 

(3) Location of grounding connections 

(4) Types and sizes of grounding and bonding 
conductors and electrodes 

(5) Methods of grounding and bonding 

(6) Conditions under which guards, isolation, or 
insulation may be substituted for grounding 
Informational Note: See Figure 250.1 for information on 
the organization of Article 250 covering grounding and 
bonding requirements. 

250.2 Definitions. 

Bonding Jumper, Supply-Side. A conductor installed on 
the supply side of a service or within a service equipment 
enclosure(s), or for a separately derived system, thai 
ensures the required electrical coiiduciiviiy between metal 
parts required to be electrically coniiecied. 



Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. An intentionally 
constructed, low-impedance electrically conductive path 
designed and intended to carry current under ground- 
fault conditions from the point of a ground fault on a 
wiring system to the electrical supply source and that 
facilitates the operation of the overcurrent protective 
device or ground-fault detectors on high-impedance 
grounded systems. 



70-100 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.4 



Part I General 



Part II System 
grounding 



Part V! II Direct-current 
systems 



PartX Grounding of 

systems and circuits of 

1 kV and over (high vottage) 



Part III Grounding electrode 

system and grounding 

electrode conductor 



Part N Enclosure, 

raceway, and service 

cable grounding 



Part V! Equipment 

grounding and equipment 

grounding conductors 




Part V Bonding 



Part VII Methods oi 
equipment grounding 



Part IX Instruments, 
meters, and relays 



Figure 250.1 Grounding and Bonding. 

Ground-Fault Current Path. An electrically conductive 
path from the point of a ground fauh on a wiring system 
through normally non-current-carrying conductors, 
equipment, or the earth to the electrical supply source. 
Informational Note: Examples of ground-fault current 
paths could consist of any combination of equipment 
grounding conductors, metallic raceways, metallic cable 
sheaths, electrical equipment, and any other electrically 
conductive material such as metal water and gas piping, 
steel framing members, stucco mesh, metal ducting, 
reinforcing steel, shields of communications cables, and 
the earth itself 

250.3 Application of Other Articles. For other articles 
applying to particular cases of installation of conductors 
and equipment, grounding and bonding requirements are 
identified in Table 250.3 that are in addition to, or 
modifications of, those of this article. 

250.4 General Requirements for Groundling and 
Bonding. The following general requirements identify 
what grounding and bonding of electrical systems are 
required to accomplish. The prescriptive methods 
contained in Article 250 shall be followed to comply with 
the performance requirements of this section. 



(A) Grounded Systems. 

(1) Electrical System Grounding. Electrical systems that 
are grounded shall be connected to earth in a manner that 
will limit the voltage imposed by lightning, line surges, or 
unintentional contact with higher-voltage lines and that 
will stabilize the vohage to earth during normal operation. 

Informational Note: An important consideration for 
limiting the imposed voltage is the routing of bonding 
and grounding cicclrodc conductors so that they are not 
any longer than necessary to complete the connection 
without disturbing the permanent parts of the installation 
and so that unnecessary bends and loops are avoided. 

(2) Grounding of Electrical Equipment. Normally non- 
current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical 
conductors or equipment, or forming part of such 
equipment, shall be connected to earth so as to limit the 
voltage to ground on these materials. 

(3) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Normally non- 
current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical 
conductors or equipment, or forming part of such 
equipment, shall be connected together and to the 
electrical supply source in a manner that establishes an 
effective ground-fault current path. 

(4) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and 
Other Equipment. Normally non-current-carrying 
electrically conductive materials that are likely to become 
energized shall be connected together and to the electrical 
supply source in a manner that establishes an effective 
ground-fault current path. 

(5) Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. Electrical 
equipment and wiring and other electrically conductive 
material likely to become energized shall be installed in a 
manner that creates a low-impedance circuit facilitating 
the operation of the overcurrent device or ground detector 
for high-impedance grounded systems. It shall be capable 
of safely carrying the maximum ground-fault current 
likely to be imposed on it from any point on the wiring 
system where a ground fault may occur to the electrical 
supply source. The earth shall not be considered as an 
effective ground- fauh current path. 

(B) Ungrounded Systems. 

(1) Grounding Electrical Equipment. Non-current- 
carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical 
conductors or equipment, or forming part of such 
equipment, shall be connected to earth in a manner that 
will limit the voltage imposed by lightning or 
unintentional contact with higher-voltage lines and limit 
the voltage to ground on these materials. 

(2) Bonding of Electrical Equipment. Non-cuiTcnt- 
carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical 
conductors or equipment, or forming part of such 
equipment, shall be connected together and to the supply 
system grounded equipment in a manner that creates a 
low-impedance path for ground- fault current that is 
capable of carrying the maximum fault current likely to 
be imposed on it. 



20 1 3 Caiifomia Electrical Code 



70-101 



250.4 



ARTICLE 250 ~ GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Table 250.3 Additional Grounding and Bonding Rec|uire ments 



Conductor/Equipment 



Article 



Section 



Agricultural buildings 

Audio signal processing, amplification, and reproduction 

equipment 
Branch circuits 
Cablebus 
Cable trays 
Capacitors 

Circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 volts 
Closed-loop and programmed power distribution 
Communications circuits 
Community antenna television and radio distribution 

systems 
Conductors for general wiring 
Cranes and hoists 

Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines 
Electric signs and outline Hghting 
Electrolytic cells 
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, moving walks, 

wheelchair lifts, and stairway chair lifts 
Fire alarm systems 

Fixed electric heating equipment for pipelines and vessels 
Fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow-melting 

equipment 
Flexible cords and cables 
Floating buildings 
Grounding-type receptacles, adapters, cord connectors, 

and attachment plugs 
Hazardous (classified) locations 
Health care facilities 

Induction and dielectric heating equipment 
Industrial machinery 
Information technology equipment 
Intrinsically safe systems 

Luminaires (lighting fixtures) and lighting equipment 
Luminaires (fixtures), lampholders, and lamps 
Marinas and boatyards 
Mobile homes and mobile home park 
Motion picture and television studios and similar 

locations 
Motors, motor circuits, and controllers 
Natural and artificially made bodies of water 
Outlet, device, pull, and junction boxes; conduit bodies; 

and fittings 
Over 600 volts, nominal, underground wiring methods 
Panelboards 
Pipe organs 

Radio and television equipment 
Receptacles and cord connectors 
Recreational vehicles and recreational vehicle parks 
Services 

Solar photovoltaic systems 

Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations 
Switchboards and panelboards 
Switches 
Theaters, audience areas of motion picture and television 

studios, and similar locations 
Transformers and transformer vaults 
Use and identification of grounded conductors 
X-ray equipment 



392 
720 
800 



310 
610 

600 
668 
620 



547.9 and 547.10 
640.7 

210.5,210.6,406.3 

370.9 

392.3(C), 392.7 

460.10,460.27 

780.3 

820.93,820.100,820.103 



675.1 1(C), 675T2, 675T3, 675.14, 675.15 



760.9 

427.29, 427.48 

426.27 

400.22, 400.23 

553.8,553.10,553.11 

406.9 



500-517 
517 
665 
670 



410 
550 

430 



645.15 

504.50 

410.17, 410.18, 410.20, 410.21, 410.105(B) 

555.15 

530.20, 530.64(B) 



682.30,682.31,682.32,682.33 
314.4,314.25 



650 
810 

551 
230 

680 



300.50(B) 
408.40 



406.3 



200 
660 



690.41, 690.42, 690.43, 690.45, 690.47 

408.3(D) 
404,12 
520,81 

450.10 

517.78 



70-102 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.20 



(3) Bonding of Electrically Conductive Materials and 

Other Equipment. Electrically conductive materials 
that are likely to become energized shall be connected 
together and to the supply system grounded equipment 
in a manner that creates a low- impedance path for 
ground- fault current that is capable of carrying the 
maximum fault current likely to be imposed on it. 

(4) Path for Fault Current. Electrical equipment, 
wiring, and other electrically conductive material likely 
to become energized shall be installed in a manner that 
creates a low-impedance circuit from any point on the 
wiring system to the electrical supply source to facilitate 
the operation of overcurrent devices should a second 
ground fault from a different phase occur on the wiring 
system. The earth shall not be considered as an effective 
fault-current path. 

250.6 Objectionable Current. 

(A) Arrangement to Prevent Objectionable Current 

The grounding of electrical systems, circuit conductors, 
surge arresters, surge-protective devices, and conductive 
normally non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment 
shall be installed and arranged in a manner that will 
prevent objectionable current. 

(B) Alterations to Stop Objectionable Current. If the 

use of multiple grounding connections resuhs in 
objectionable current, one or more of the following 
alterations shall be permitted to be made, provided that 
the requirements of 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4) are met: 

(1) Discontinue one or more but not all of such 
grounding connections. 

(2) Change the locations of the grounding connections. 

(3) Interrupt the continuity of the conductor or 
conductive path causing the objectionable current. 

(4) Take other suitable remedial and approved action. 

(C) Temporary Currents Not Classified as 
Objectionable Currents. Temporary currents resulting 
from abnormal conditions, such as ground faults, shall 
not be classified as objectionable current for the 
purposes specified in 250.6(A) and (B). 

(D) Limitations to Permissible Alterations. The 

provisions of this section shall not be considered as 
permitting electronic equipment from being operated on 
ac systems or branch circuits that are not connected to 
an equipment grounding conductor as required by this 
article. Currents that introduce noise or data errors in 
electronic equipment shall not be considered the 
objectionable currents addressed in this section. 



(E) Isolation of Objectionable Direct-Current Ground 

Currents. Where isolation of objectionable dc ground 
currents from cathodic protection systems is required, a 
listed ac coupling/dc isolating device shall be permitted in 
the equipment grounding conductor path to provide an 
effective return path for ac ground-fault current while 
blocking dc current. 

250.8 Connection of Grounding and Bonding 
Equipment. 

(A) Permitted Methods. Equipment grounding 
conductors, grounding electrode conductors, and bonding 
jumpers shall be connected by one of the following 
means: 

(1) Listed pressure connectors 

(2) Terminal bars 

(3) Pressure connectors listed as grounding and bonding 
equipment 

(4) Exothermic welding process 

(5) Machine screw-type fasteners that engage not less 
than two threads or are secured with a nut 

(6) Thread- forming machine screws that engage not less 
than two threads in the enclosure 

(7) Connections that are part of a listed assembly 

(8) Other listed means 

(B) Methods Not Permitted. Connection devices or 
fittings that depend solely on solder shall not be used. 

250.10 Protection of Ground Clamps and Fittings. 

Ground clamps or other fittings shall be approved for 
general use without protection or shall be protected from 
physical damage as indicated in (1) or (2) as follows: 

(1) In installations where they are not likely to be 
damaged 

(2) Where enclosed in metal, wood, or equivalent 
protective covering 

250.12 Clean Surfaces. Nonconductive coatings (such as 
paint, lacquer, and enamel) on equipment to be grounded 
shall be removed from threads and other contact surfaces 
to ensure good electrical continuity or be connected by 
means of fittings designed so as to make such removal 
unnecessary. 

II. System Grounding 

250.20 Alternating-Current Systems to Be Grounded. 

Alternating-cuiTent systems shall be grounded as provided 
for in 250.20(A), (B), (C). or (D). Other systems shall be 
permitted to be grounded. If such systems are grounded, 
they shall comply with the applicable provisions of this 
article. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-103 



250.21 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Informational Note: An example of a system permitted to 
be grounded is a corner-grounded delta transformer 
connection. See 250.26(4) for conductor to be grounded. 

(A) Alternating-Current Systems of Less Than 50 Volts. 

Alternating-current systems of less than 50 volts shall be 
grounded under any of the following conditions: 

(1) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer 
supply system exceeds 150 volts to ground 

(2) Where supplied by transformers, if the transformer 
supply system is ungrounded 

(3) Where installed outside as overhead conductors 

(B) Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to 1000 

Volts. Alternating-current systems of 50 volts to less thaii 
1000 volts that supply premises wiring and premises wiring 
systems shall be grounded under any of the following 
conditions: 

(1) Where the system can be grounded so that the 
maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded 
conductors does not exceed 150 volts 

(2) Where the system is 3 -phase, 4- wire, wye connected in 
which the neutral conductor is used as a circuit 
conductor 

(3) Where the system is 3 -phase, 4-wire, delta connected in 
which the midpoint of one phase winding is used as a 
circuit conductor 

(C) Alternating-Current Systems of 1 kV and Over. 

Alternating-current systems supplying mobile or portable 
equipment shall be grounded as specified in 250.188. Where 
supplying other than mobile or portable equipment, such 
systems shall be pennitted to be grounded. 

(D) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance 
grounded neutral systems shall be grounded in accordance 
with 250.36 or 250. 186. 

250.21 Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to Less 
Than 1000 Volts Not Required to Be Grounded. 
(A) General. The following ac systems of 50 volts to less 
than 1000 volts shall be permitted to be grounded but shall 
not be required to be grounded; 

(1) Electrical systems used exclusively to supply industrial 
electric furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and 
the like 

(2) Separately derived systems used exclusively for 
rectifiers that supply only adjustable-speed industrial 
drives 

(3) Separately derived systems supplied by transformers 
that have a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, 
provided that all the following conditions are met: 

a. The system is used exclusively for control circuits. 

b. The conditions of maintenance and supervision 
ensure that only qualified persons service the 
installation. 

c. Continuity of control power is required. 



(4) Other systems that are not required to be grounded in 
accordance with the requirements of 250.20(B) 

(B) Ground Detectors. Ground detectors shall be 
installed in accordance with 250.2I(B)( 1 ) and (BK2). 

(1) Ungrounded alternating current systems as permitted 
in 250.21(A)(1) through (A)(4) operafing at not less 
than 120 volts and not exceeding 1000 volts shall 
have ground detectors installed on the system. 

(2) The ground detection sensing equipment shall be 
connected as close as practicable lo where the system 
receives its supply. 

(C) Marking* Ungrounded systems shall be legibly marked 
"Ungrounded System" at the source or first disconnecting 
means of the system. The marking shall be of suHlcient 
durability to wilhsiand the environment involved. 

250.22 Circuits Not to Be Grounded. 

The following circuits shall not be grounded: 

(1) Circuits for electric cranes operating over 
combustible fibers in Class III locations, as provided 
in 503.155 

(2) Circuits in health care facilities as provided in 517.61 
and 517.160 

(3) Circuits for equipment within electrolytic cell 
working zone as provided in Article 668 

(4) Secondary circuits of lighting systems as provided in 
411.5(A) 

(5) Secondary circuits of lighting systems as provided in 
680.23(A)(2). 

250.24 Grounding Service-Supplied Alternating- 
Current Systems. 

(A) System Grounding Connections. A premises wiring 
system supplied by a grounded ac service shall have a 
grounding electrode conductor connected to the grounded 
service conductor, at each service, in accordance with 
250.24(A)(1) through (A)(5). 

(1) General. The grounding electrode conductor 
connection shall be made at any accessible point from the 
load end of the service drop or service lateral to and 
including the terminal or bus to which the grounded service 
conductor is connected at the service disconnecting means. 

Informational Note: See definitions of Service Drop and 
Service Lateral in Article 100. 

(2) Outdoor Transformer. Where the transformer 
supplying the service is located outside the building, at 
least one additional grounding connection shall be made 
from the grounded service conductor to a grounding 
electrode, either at the transformer or elsewhere outside 
the building. 



70-104 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.24 



Exception: The additional grounding electrode conductor 
connection shall not be made on high-impedance 
grounded neutral systems. The system shall meet the 
requirements of 25036. 

(3) Dual-Fed Services. For services that are dual fed 
(double ended) in a common enclosure or grouped 
together in separate enclosures and employing a 
secondary tie, a single grounding electrode conductor 
connection to the tie point of the grounded conductor(s) 
from each power source shall be permitted. 

(4) Main Bonding Jumper as Wire or Busbar. Where 
the main bonding jumper specified in 250.28 is a wire or 
busbar and is installed from the grounded conductor 
terminal bar or bus to the equipment grounding terminal 
bar or bus in the service equipment, the grounding 
electrode conductor shall be permitted to be connected to 
the equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus to which 
the main bonding jumper is connected. 

(5) Load-Side Grounding Connections. A grounded 
conductor shall not be connected to normally non- 
current-carrying metal parts of equipment, to equipment 
grounding conductor(s), or be reconnected to ground on 
the load side of the service disconnecting means except as 
otherwise permitted in this article. 

Informatioaal Note: See 250.30 for separately derived 
systems, 250.32 for connections at separate buildings or 
structures, and 250.142 for use of the grounded circuit 
conductor for grounding equipment. 

(B) Mam Bonding Jumper. For a grounded system, an 
unspliced main bonding jumper shall be used to connect 
the equipment grounding conductor(s) and the service- 
disconnect enclosure to the grounded conductor within 
the enclosure for each service disconnect in accordance 
with 250.28. 

Exception No, I: Where more than one service 
disconnecting means is located in an assembly listed for 
use as service equipment, an unspliced main bonding 
jumper shall bond the grounded conductor(s) to the 
assembly enclosure. 

Exception No. 2: Impedance grounded neutral systems 
shall be permitted to be connected as provided in 250.36 
and 250.186. 

(C) Grounded Conductor Brought to Service 
Equipment. Where an ac system operating at less than 
1000 volts is grounded at any point, the grounded 
conductor(s) shall be routed wiih the ungrounded 
conductors to each service disconnecting means and shall 
be connected to each disconnecting means grounded 
conductor(s) terminal or bus. A main bonding jumper 
shall connect the grounded conductor(s) to each service 
disconnecting means enclosure. The grounded 
conductor(s) shall be installed in accordance with 
250.24(C)(1) through (C)(4)| 



Exception: H%ere AvO or more rSetvice disconnecting means 
are located in a single assembly listed for use as service 
equipment, it shall be permitted to connect the grounded 
conductor (s) to the assembly common grounded 
conductor (s) terminal or bus. The assembly shall include 
a main bonding jumper for connecting the grounded 
conductor(s) to the assembly enclosure. 

(1) Sizing for a Single Raceway, The grounded 
conductor shall not be smaller than the required 
grounding electrode conductor specified in Table 250.66 
but shall not be required to be larger than the largest 
ungrounded serv ice-en irance conductor(s)J In addition, 
for sets of ungrounded service-entrance conductors larger 
than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the 
grounded conductor shall not be smaller than WA percent 
of the circular mil area of the largest set of service- 
entrance ungrounded conductor! s). 

(2) Parallel Conductors In Two or More Raceways, llf 
the ungrounded sen ice-enirance conductors are installed 
in parallel in two or more raceways, the grounded 
conductor shall also be installed in parallel. The size of 
the grounded conductor in each raceway shall be based on 
the total circular mil area of the parallel ungrounded 
conductors in the raceway^ as indicated Sn 250,24(0(1), 
^ not smaller than 1/0 AWG. 

Informational Note: See 310,10(11) for grounded 
conductors connected in parallel. 

(3) DeUa-Coiinectcd Serv'ice. The grounded conductor of 
a 3'phase, 3-wire delta ser\ ice shall have an ampacity not 
less than that of the ungrounded conductors. 

(4) High Impedance. The grounded conductor on a high- 
impedance grounded neutral system shall be grounded in 
accordance with 250.36. 

(D) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding 
electrode conductor shall be used to connect the 
equipment grounding conductors, the service-equipment 
enclosures, and, where the system is grounded, the 
grounded service conductor to the grounding electrode(s) 
required by Part III of this article. This conductor shall be 
sized in accordance with 250.66. 

High-impedance grounded neutral system connections 
shall be made as covered in 250.36. 

Informational Note: See 250.24(A) for ac system 

grounding connections. 

(E) Ungrounded System Grounding Connections. A 
premises wiring system that is supplied by an ac service 
that is ungrounded shall have, at each service, a 
grounding electrode conductor connected to the 
grounding electrode(s) required by Part 111 of this article. 
The grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to 
a metal enclosure of the service conductors at any 
accessible point from the load end of the service drop or 
service lateral to the service disconnecting means. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-105 



250.26 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.26 Conductor to Be Grounded — Alternating- 
Current Systems. For ac premises wiring systems, the 
conductor to be grounded shall be as specified in the 
following: 

(1) Single-phase, 2-wire — one conductor 

(2) Single-phase, 3 -wire — the neutral conductor 

(3) Multiphase systems having one wire common to all 
phases — the common conductor 

(4) Multiphase systems where one phase is grounded — 
one phase conductor 

(5) Multiphase systems in which one phase is used as in 
(2) — the neutral conductor 

250.28 Main Bonding Jumper and System Bonding 
Jumper. For a grounded system, main bonding jumpers 
and system bonding jumpers shall be installed as follows: 

(A) Material. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding 
jumpers shall be of copper or other corrosion-resistant 
material. A main bonding jumper and a system bonding 
jumper shall be a wire, bus, screw, or similar suitable 
conductor. 

(B) Construction, Where a main bonding jumper or a 
system bonding jumper is a screw only, the screw shall be 
identified with a green finish that shall be visible with the 
screw installed. 

(C) Attachment. Main bonding jumpers and system 
bonding jumpers shall be connected in the manner 
specified by the apphcable provisions of 250.8. 

(D) Size. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding 
jumpers shall be sized in accordance with 250.28(D)(1) 
through (D)(3). 

(1) General. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding 
jumpers shall not be smaller than the sizes shown in Table 
250.66. Where the supply conductors are larger than 1 100 
kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the bonding 
jumper shall have an area that is not less than 12y2 percent 
of the area of the largest phase conductor except that, 
where the phase conductors and the bonding jumper are 
of different materials (copper or aluminum), the minimum 
size of the bonding jumper shall be based on the assumed 
use of phase conductors of the same material as the 
bonding jumper and with an ampacity equivalent to that 
of the installed phase conductors. 

(2) Main Bonding Jumper for Service with More Than 
One Enclosure. Where a service consists of more than a 
single enclosure as permitted in 230.71(A), the main 
bonding jumper for each enclosure shall be sized in 
accordance with 250.28(D)(1) based on the largest 
ungrounded service conductor serving that enclosure. 



(3) Separately Derived System with More Than One 
Enclosure. Where a separately derived system supplies 
more than a single enclosure, the system bonding jumper for 
each enclosure shall be sized in accordance with 
250.28(D)(1) based on the largest ungrounded feeder 
conductor serving that enclosure, or a single system bonding 
jumper shall be installed at the souixe and sized in 
accordance with 250.28(D)(1) based on the equivalent size 
of the largest supply conductor determined by the largest 
sum of the areas of the corresponding conductors of each set. 

250.30 Grounding Separately Derived Alternating- 
Current Systems, In addition to complying with 25030(A) 
for grounded systems, or as provided in 25030(B) for 
ungrounded systems, separately derived systems shall 
comply with 250.20, 250.21 ,250.22. and 250.26. 

Informational Note No. 1: An alternate ac power source; 
sueh as aii on*site genenitor, is not a separately derived 
system if the grounded conductor is sofidly 
interconnected to a i»er\ ice-supplied syi*iem grounded 
conductor An example of such a situation is where 
alternate source [ninster equipment does not include i 
sw itching action in the grounded conductor and allows it 
to remain solidly connected to the service-suppliedj 
grounded conductor when the alternate source ii 
operaiionai and supplying! the load served. 

Informational Note No. 2: See 445.13 tor the minimum! 
size of conductors that carry fault current. 

(A) Grounded Systems. A separately derived ac system 
that is grounded shall comply with 250.30(A)(1) through 
(A)(8). Except as otherwise permitted in this article, a 
grounded conductor shall not be connected to normally 
non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, be 
connected to equipment grounding conductors, or be 
reconnected to ground on the load side of the system 
bonding jumper 

Informational Note: See 250.32 for connections at 
separate buildings or structures, and 250.142 for use of 
the grounded circuit conductor for grounding equipment. 

Exception: Impedance grounded neutral system 
grounding connections shall be made as specified in 
250, 36 or 250.186, as appticahlc 

(1) System Bonding Jumper. An unspliced system 
bonding jumper shall comply with 250.28(A) through 
^D). This connection shall be made at any single point on 
the separately derived system from the source to the first 
system disconnecting means or overcurrent device, or it 
shall be made at the source of a separately derived system 
that has no disconnecting means or overcurrent devices, in 
accordance with 250.30(AXlKa) or (b). The system 
bonding jumper shall remain within the enclosure where it 
originates. If the source is located outside the building or 
stnicture supplied, a system bonding jumper shall be 
installed at the grounding electrode connection in 
compliance with 250. 30(C)- 



70-106 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.30 



Exception No. 1: For sysiems Im tailed iff ucr on/at we wUh 
\450, 6, a single system bonding jumper connection to the tie 
point of the grounded circuit conductors from each power 
source shall be permitted. 

Exception No, 2: A system bonding jumper at both the 
source and the first disconnecting means shall be permitted 
If' doing so does not establish a parallel path for the 
grounded conductor, if a grounded conductor is used in 
this manner, it shall not be smaller than the size specified 
for the system bonding jumper but shall not be required to 
be larger than the ungrounded conductor(s). For the 
purposes of this exception, connection through the earth 
shall not be considered as providing a parallel path. 

Exception No. 3: The size of the system bonding jumper for 
a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 circuit, 
and is derived from a transformer rated not more than 
1000 volt-amperes, shall not be smaller than the derived 
ungmtmded conductors and shall not be smaller than 14 
A WG copper or 12 A WG aluminum, 

(a) Installed at the Sontce, The system bonding 
jumper sliaiJ connect the grounded conductor to the supply- 
side bonding juniper and the normally norv-current- 
canying meuil enclosure. 

(b) Installed at the First Discimnectitig Means. The 
system bonding jumper shall connect the grounded 
conductor to the supply-side bonding jumper, the 
disconnecting means enclosure, and ihe equipment 
grounding conductor(s>. 

(2) SuppEy-SJde Bonding Juniper If the source of a 
sepJiraleiy derived system and the first disconnecting means 
are located in separate enclosures, a supply-side biindin^ 
jumper shall be installed with die circuit conductors (i-ont 
the source enclosure to the first disconnecting means. A 
supply-side bonding juinper shall not be required to be 
larger than the derived ungrounded conductors, The supply- 
side bonding jumper shall be permitted to be of nontlexible 
metal raceway type or of the wire or huis, type as follows: 

(a) A supply-side bonding juniper of the wire type 
shall comply with 250,102(0, based on the size of the 
derived ungrounded conductors. 

(b) A supply-Side bonding jumper of the bus type 
shall have a cross-sect iojia I area not smaller than a supply- 
bide bonding jumper of the wire type as delerminctl in 
b0.l02(C)J 

(3) Grounded Conductor. If a grounded conductor is 
installed and the system bonding jumper connection is not 
located at the source, 250. 30(AX3)(a) through (A)(3Kd) 
shall applyj 

(a) Sizing for a Single Raceway. The grounded 
conductor shall not be smaller than the required groimding 
electrode conductor specified in Table 250,66 but shall not 



be required to be larger than the largest deri\ cd ujigroundcd 
conductors). In addition, for sets of deri\ed ungrounded 
conductors larger than 1 100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmi! 
aluminum, the grounded conductor shall not be smaller 
than 12'/2 percent of the circular mil area of the largest set 
ol derived ungrounded conductors, 

(b) Parallel Crmdttctors in Two or More Raecways. If 
the ungrounded conductors are installed in parallel in two or 
more raceways, the grounded conductor shall also be 
installed in parallel. The si/c of the grounded conductor in 
each raceway shall be based on the total circular mil aiea of 
die parallel derived tmgrounded conductors in the raceway a^ 
indicated in 250J0rA)(3)(a). but not smaller than 1/0 AWG. 

Informational Note: Sec 510.10(11) for grounded 

(c) Delia-Connected System. The grounded conductor 
of a 3-phase, 3-wJre delta system shall have an ampacity 
iipt less than that of the ungrounded conditctors. 

(d) impi'dance Grounded System. The grounded 
conductor of an impedance grounded neutral s^-stem shall be 
installed in accordance with 250.36 or 250, 1 86* as apphcable. 

(4) Groundin^t Electrode. The grounding electrode shall 
be as near as practicable to, and preferably in the same area 
as, the grounding electrode conductor conncciion to the 
system. The grounding electrode shall be the nearest of one 
of the (bllowing; 

(1) Metal water pipe grounding electrode as specified in 
250,52(AK1) 

(2) Structural meUil grounding electrode as specified iii 
250,52^A)(2) 

Exception No. I: Any of the other electrodes identified in 
2 50.5 2(A) .shall he used if the electrodes specified by 
250J0(A)f4/ are nut cfvaUahle. 

Exception No. 2 to (I) and (2): If a separately derived 
syxteni originates in listed equipment sui table for use as 
service eqtnpment, tlw grounding electrode used Jor the 
service or feeder eqttipment shall he permitted as the 
groimding electrmle for the separately derived system. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 250.104(0) for bonding 
requirements tor interior metal vvaier piping in the area 
served by separately derived sysleins. 

Informational Note No. 2: See 250.50 and 250,58 for 
requirements fur bonding ali electrodes logether if 
located at the same huilchne or structure. 

(5) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Single Separately 
Derived System. A grounding electrode conductor for a 
single separately derived system shall be sized in 
accordance with 250.66 for the derived ungrounded 
conductors, li shall be used to connect the grounded 
conductor of the derived system to the grounding electrode 
as specified in 250.30(A)|4)- This connection shall be made 
at the same point on the separately derived system where 
the system bonding jumper is connected. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-107 



250.30 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Exception No. 1: if the system bonding jumper specified 
in 250.30(A)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted 
to connect the grounding electrode conductor to the 
equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus, provided the 
equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus is of sufficient 
size for the separately derived system. 

Exception No. 2: ^a separately derived system originates 
in listed equipment suitable as service equipment, the 
grounding electrode conductor from the service or feeder 
equipment to the groimding electrode shall be permitted as 
the grounding electrode conductor for the separately 
derived system, provided the groimding electrode 
conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived 
system. !f the equipment grounding bus internal to the 
equipment is not smaller than the required grounding 
electrode conductor for the separately derived system, the 
grounding electrode connection for the separately derived 
system shall be permitted to be made to the bus. 

Exception No. 3: A grounding electrode conductor shall 
not be required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 
2, or Class 3 circuit and is derived from a transformer 
rated not more than 1000 volt-amperes, provided the 
grounded conductor is bonded to the transformer frame 
or enclosure by a jumper sized in accordance with 
250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 3, and the transformer frame 
or enclosure is grounded by one of the means specified in 
250.134. 

(i) Grounding Electrode Conductor, Multiple 
Separately Derived Systems. % common grounding 
electrode conductor for muliiple separately derived 
systems shall be permitted. If installed, the cominon 
grounding electrode conductor shall be used to connect 
ihe grounded conductor of the separately derived systems 
to the grounding electrode as spccilled in 250.30(AX4). A 
grounding electrode conductor tap shall then be installed 
from each separately derived system to the common 
grounding electrode conductor. Each tap conductor shall 
connect the grounded conductor of the separately derived 
system to the common grounding electrode conductor. 
This connection shall be made at the same point on the 
separately derived system where the system bonding 
jumper is connected. 

Exception No. 1: If the system bonding jumper specified 
in 250.30(A)(1) is a wire or busbar, it shall be permitted 
to connect the grounding electrode conductor fap to the 
equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus, provided the 
equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus is of sufficient 
size for the separately derived system. 

Exception No. 2: A grounding electrode conductor shall 
not be required for a system that supplies a Class 1, Class 
2, or Class 3 circuit and is derived from a transformer 
rated not more than 1000 volt-amperes, provided the 
system grounded conductor is bonded to the transformer 
frame or enclosure by a jumper sized in accordance with 



250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 3, and the transformer frame 
or enclosure is grounded by one of the means specified in 
250.134. 

(a) Commofi Grounding Electrode Conductor, The 
common grounding electrode conductor shall be permitledt 
to be one of the following: 

(1) A conductor of the wire type not smaller than 3/0 
AWG copper or 250 kcmil aluminum 



(2) Tlie metal frame of ihe buildnig or structure that 
complies with 250.52(AX2) or is connected to the 
grounding electrode system by a conductor that shall 
not be smaller than 3/0 AWG copper or 250 kcmil 
Aluminum 

(b) Tap Conductor Size. Each tap conductor shall 
be sized in accordance with 250.66 based on the derived 
ungrounded conductors of the separately derived system 
it serves. 

Exception: If a separately derived system originates in 
listed equipment suitable as service equipment, the 
grounding electrode conductor from the service or feeder 
equipment to the grounding electrode shall be permitted 
as the grounding electrode conductor for the separately 
derived system, provided the grounding electrode 
conductor is of sufficient size for the separately derived 
system. If the equipment ground bus internal to the 
equipment is not smaller than the required grounding 
electrode conductor for the separately derived system, the 
grounding electrode connection for the separately derived 
system shall be permitted to be made to the bus. 

(c) Connections. All tap connections to the 
common grounding electrode conductor shall be made at 
an accessible location by one of the following methods: 

(1) A connector listed as grotinding and bonding 
equipment. 

(2) Listed connections to aluminum or copper busbars 
not smaiieif than 6 mm x 50 mm (% in. x 2 in.). If 
aluminum busbars are used, the installation shall 
comply with 250.64(A). 

(3) The exothermic welding process. 

Tap conductors shall be connected to the common 
grounding electrode conductor in such a manner that the 
common grounding electrode conductor remains without 
a splice or joint. 

(7) Installation. The installation of all grounding electrode 
conductors shall comply with 250.64(A), (B), (C), and (E). 

(8) Bonding. Structural steel and metal piping shall be 
connected to the grounded conductor of a separately derived 
system in accordance with 250.104(D). 



70-108 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.32 



(B) Ungrounded Systems. The equipment of an 
ungrounded separately derived system shall be grounded 
and bonded as specified in 250.30(B)(1) jlhrougli (B)(3) 

(1) Grounding Electrode Conductor. A grounding 
electrode conductor, sized in accordance with 250.66 for 
the largest derived ungrounded conductor! s) or set of 
Berived ungrounded conductors, shall be used to connect 
the metal enclosures of the derived system to the 
grounding electrode as specified in 250.30(A)(5) or (6), 
Hs applicable. This connection shall be made at any point 
on the separately derived system from the source to the 
first system disconnecting means. If the source is located 
outside the building or structure suppiied, a grounding 
electrode connection shall be made in compliance with 
25030(C). 

(2) Grounding Electrode. Except as permitted by 
250.34 for portable and vehicle-mounted generators, the 
grounding electrode shall comply with 250.30(A)(4),| 

p) Bonding Path and Conductor. A supply-side 
bonding jumper shall be installed from the source of a 
separately derived system to the first disconnecting 
means in compliance with 250.30(A)(2), 

(C) Outdoor Source* If the source of the separately 
iderived systetn is located outside the building or 
structure supplied, a grounding electrode connection 
shall be made al the source location to one or more 
grounding electrodes in compliance with 250,50. In 
addition, the installation shall comply with 250.30(A) 
lor grounded systems or uith 250.30(B) for ungrounded 
(systems. 

Exception: The grounding electrode conductor comwction 
fi)r impedtmce grounded neutral systesm shall comply with 
§50.36 or 250 1H6^ as applicablef 

250.32 Buildings or Structures Supplied by a Feeder(s) 

or Branch Circuit(s). 

(A) Grounding Electrode. Building(s) or structure(s) 
supplied by feeder(s) or branch circuit(s) shall have a 
grounding electrode or grounding electrode system 
installed in accordance with Part III of Article 250. The 
grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be connected in 
accordance with 250.32(B) or (C). Where there is no 
existing grounding electrode, the grounding electrode(s) 
required in 250.50 shall be installed. 

Exception: A grounding electrode shall not be required 
where only a single branch circuit, including a 
multiwire branch circuit, supplies the building or 
structure and the branch circuit includes an equipment 
grounding conductor for grounding the normally non- 
cur rent- car tying metal parts of eqinpment. 



(B) Grounded Systems. 

(1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit. Arj 

equipment grounding conductor, as described in 250.118, 
shall be run with the supply conductors and be connected 
to the building or structure disconnecting means and to 
the grounding electrode(s). The equipment grounding 
conductor shall be used for grounding or bonding of 
equipment, structures, or frames required to be grounded 
or bonded. The equipment grounding conductor shall be 
sized in accordance with 250.122. Any installed grounded 
conductor shall not be connected to the equipment 
grounding conductor or to the grounding electrode(s). 

Exception: For insudlations made in compliance with 
previous editions of this Code that permitted such 
connectiotK the grounded conductor run with the supply 
to the building or structure shall be permitted to serve as 
the ground-fault return path if ail of the following 
requirements continue to be met: 

(1) An equipment grounding conductor is not run with 
the supply to the building or structure. 

(2) There are no continuous metallic paths bonded to the 
grounding system in each building or structure 
involved. 

(3) Ground-fault protection of equipment has not been 
installed on the supply side of the feeder (s). 

If the grounded conductor is used for grounding in 
accordance with the provision of this exception, the size 
of the grounded conductor shall not be smaller than the 
larger of either of the following: 

(1) That required by 220. 61 

(2) That required by 250. 122 

(2) Supplied by Separately Derived SystcmJ 

(a) With Overcurrent Protection. If overcurrent 
pmteclion is provided where the conductors originate, the 
installation shall comply with 250.32(B)(1). 

(b) Without Overcurrent Protection, If overcurrent 
protection is not provided where the conductors originate, 
the installation shall comply whh 250,30(A). If installed, 
the supply-side bonding jumper shall he connected to the 
building or stnicture disconnecting means and to the 
grounding electrode(s). 

(C) Ungrounded Systems. 

(1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit. An 

equipment grounding conductor, as described in 250.1 18, 
shall be installed with the supply conductors and be 
connected to the building or structure disconnecting 
means and to the grounding electrode(s). The grounding 
electrode(s) shall also be connected to the building or 
structure disconnecting means. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-109 



250.34 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(2) Supplied by a Separately Derived SysteitL 

(a) With Overatrrcnt Protection. If ovcrcurrent 
protection is provided where the conductors originate, the 
installation shall comply with (0(1). 

(b) Without Overcunent Protection. If overcurrent 
protection is not provided where the conductors originate, 
the instaMaiion shall comply with 250,30(B). If installed, 
Ihc supply-side bonding jumper shall be connected to the 
building or structure disconnecting means and to the 
grounding electrode(s)J 

(D) Disconnecting Means Located in Separate 
Building or Structure on the Same Premises. Where 
one or more disconnecting means supply one or more 
additional buildings or structures under single 
management, and where these disconnecting means are 
located remote from those buildings or structures in 
accordance with the provisions of 225.32, Exception No. 
1 and No. 2, 700.12(B)(6), 701.12(B)(5), or 702.12, all of 
the following conditions shall be met: 

(1) The connection of the grounded conductor to the 
grounding electrode, to normally non-current- 
carrying metal parts of equipment, or to the 
equipment grounding conductor at a separate 
building or structure shall not be made. 

(2) An equipment grounding conductor for grounding 
and bonding any normally non-current-carrying 
metal parts of equipment, interior metal piping 
systems, and building or structural metal frames is 
run with the circuit conductors to a separate building 
or structure and connected to existing grounding 
electrode(s) required in Part III of this article, or, 
where there are no existing electrodes, the grounding 
electrode(s) required in Part 111 of this article shall be 
installed where a separate building or structure is 
supplied by more than one branch circuit. 

(3) The connection between the equipment grounding 
conductor and the grounding electrode at a separate 
building or structure shall be made in a junction box, 
panelboard, or similar enclosure located immediately 
inside or outside the separate building or structure. 

(E) Grounding Electrode Conductor. The size of the 
grounding electrode conductor to the grounding 
electrode(s) shall not be smaller than given in 250.66, 
based on the largest ungrounded supply conductor. The 
installation shall comply with Part III of this article. 

250.34 Portable and Vehicle-Mounted Generators. 

(A) Portable Generators. The frame of a portable 
generator shall not be required to be connected to a 
grounding electrode as defined in 250.52 for a system 
supplied by the generator under the following conditions: 



(1) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the 
generator, cord-and-plug-connected equipment through 
receptacles mounted on the generator, or both, and 

(2) The normally non-current-carrying metal parts of 
equipment and the equipment grounding conductor 
terminals of the receptacles are connected to the 
generator frame. 

(B) Vehicle-Mounted Generators. The frame of a vehicle 
shall not be required to be connected to a grounding 
electrode as defined in 250.52 for a system suppHed by a 
generator located on this vehicle under the following 
conditions: 

(1) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle 
frame, and 

(2) The generator supplies only equipment located on the 
vehicle or cord-and-plug-connected equipment through 
receptacles mounted on the vehicle, or both equipment 
located on the vehicle and cord-and-plug-connected 
equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle 
or on the generator, and 

(3) The normally non-current-carrying metal parts of 
equipment and the equipment grounding conductor 
terminals of the receptacles are connected to the 
generator frame. 

(C) Grounded Conductor Bonding, A system conductor 
that is required to be grounded by 250.26 shall be 
connected to the generator frame where the generator is a 
component of a separately derived system. 

Informational Note: For grounding portable generators 
supplying fixed wiring systems, see 250.30. 

250.35 Permanently Installed Generators. A conductor 
that provides an effective ground-fault current path shall be 
installed with the supply conductors from a permanently 
installed generator(s) to the first disconnecting mean(s) in 
accordance with (A) or (B). 

(A) Separately Derived System. If the generator is 
installed as a separately derived system, the requirements in 
250.30 shall apply. 

(B) NoTiseparatel>^ Derived System. If the generator is 
installed as a nonseparately derived system, and 
ovcrcurrent protection is nol integral with the generator 
assembly, a supply-side bonding jumper shall be installed 
between the generator equipment grounding terminal and 
the equipment grounding terminal, bar, or bus of the 
disconjiecting mean(s). It shall be sized in accordance with 
250. 1 02(C) based on the size of the conductors supplied by 
ihe generator 

250.36 High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. 

High-impedance grounded neutral systems in which a 
grounding impedance, usually a resistor, limits the ground- 
fault current to a low value shall be permitted for 3 -phase 
ac systems of 480 volts to 1000 volts if all the following 
conditions are met: 



70-110 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.52 



(1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
that only qualified persons service the installation. 

(2) Ground detectors are installed on the system. 

(3) Line-to-neutral loads are not served. 

High-impedance grounded neutral systems shall 
comply with the provisions of 250.36(A) through (G). 

(A) Grounding Impedance Location. The grounding 
impedance shall be installed between the grounding 
electrode conductor and the system neutral point. If a 
neutral point is not available, the grounding impedance 
shall be installed between the grounding electrode 
conductor and the neutral point derived from a grounding 
transformer. 

(B) Grounded System Conductor. The grounded system 
conductor from the neutral point of the transformer or 
generator to its connection point to the grounding 
impedance shall be fully insulated. 

The grounded system conductor shall have an 
ampacity of not less than the maximum current rating of 
the grounding impedance but in no case shall the 
grounded system conductor be smaller than 8 AWG 
copper or 6 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. 

(C) System Grounding Connection. The system shall 
not be connected to ground except through the grounding 
impedance. 

Informational Note; The impedance is normally selected 
to limit the ground- fault current to a value slightly 
greater than or equal to the capacitive charging cuirent 
of the system. This value of impedance will also limit 
transient overvoltages to safe values. For guidance, refer 
to criteria for limiting transient overvoltages in 
ANSI/IEEE 142-1991, Recommended Practice for 
Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power 
Systems. 

(D) Neutral Point to Grounding Impedance Conductor 
Routing. The conductor connecting the neutral point of 
the transformer or generator to the grounding impedance 
shall be permitted to be installed in a separate raceway 
from the ungrounded conductors. It shall not be required 
to run this conductor with the phase conductors to the first 
system disconnecting means or overcurrent device. 

(E) Equipment Bonding Jumper. The equipment 
bonding jumper (the connection between the equipment 
grounding conductors and the grounding impedance) shall 
be an unspliced conductor run from the first system 
disconnecting means or overcurrent device to the 
grounded side of the grounding impedance. 

(F) Grounding Electrode Conductor Location. The 

grounding electrode conductor shall be connected at any 
point from the grounded side of the grounding impedance 
to the equipment grounding connection at the service 
equipment or first system disconnecting means. 



(G) Equipment Bonding Jumper Size. The equipment 
bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with (1) or 
(2) as follows: 

(1) If the grounding electrode conductor connection is 
made at the grounding impedance, the equipment 
bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with 
250.66, based on the size of the service entrance 
conductors for a service or the derived phase 
conductors for a separately derived system. 

(2) If the grounding electrode conductor is connected at 
the first system disconnecting means or overcurrent 
device, the equipment bonding jumper shall be sized 
the same as the neutral conductor in 250.36(B). 

III. Grounding Electrode System and Grounding 
Electrode Conductor 

250.50 Grounding Electrode System. All grounding 
electrodes as described in 250.52(A)(1) through (A)(7) 
that are present at each building or structure served shall 
be bonded together to form the grounding electrode 
system. Where none of these grounding electrodes exist, 
one or more of the grounding electrodes specified in 
250.52(A)(4) through (A)(8) shall be installed and used. 

Exception: Concrete-encased electrodes of existing 
buildings or structures shall not be required to be part of 
the grounding electrode system where the steel 
reinforcing bars or rods are not accessible for use 
without disturbing the concrete. 

250.52 Grounding Electrodes. 

(A) Electrodes Permitted for Grounding. 

(1) Metal Underground Water Pipe. A metal 
underground water pipe in direct contact with the earth 
for 3.0 m (10 ft) or more (including any metal well casing 
bonded to the pipe) and electrically continuous (or made 
electrically continuous by bonding around insulating 
joints or insulating pipe) to the points of connection of the 
grounding electrode conductor and the bonding 
conductoits) or jumpers), if installed, 

e 

(2) Metal Frame of the Building or Structure. The 
metal frame of the building or structure that is connected 
to the earth by pne or more of the following methods: 

(1) At least one siruclural metal member thai is* in direct 
contact with the earth for 3.0 m (10 ft) or more, with 
or without concrete encasement. 

(2) Hold-down bohs securing the structural steel column 
ihat are connected to a concrete -encased eleetrode 
Jhat complies with 250.52(A)(3) and is located in the 
support footing or (bundation. The hold-down bolls 
shall be connected to the concrete-encased electrode 
by welding, exothermic welding, the usual steel tic 
wires, or other approved means. 



20 1 3 California Electrical Code 



70-111 



250.53 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(3) Concrete-Encased Electrode. A concrete-encased 
electrode shall consist of at least 6.0 m (20 {{) of cither (1) 
or (2): 

(1) One or more bare or zinc galvanized or other 
electrically conductive coaled steel reinforcing bars or 
rods of not less than 13 mm ("/: in.) in diameter, 
installed in one continuous 6.0 m (20 ft) length, or if in 
mullipie pieces connected together by the usual steel tie 
wires, exothermic welding, welding, or other etTective 
means to create a 6.0 m (20 ft) or greater length; or 

(2) Bare copper conductor not smal ler than 4 A WG 

Metallic components shall be encased by at least 50 
mm (2 in.) of concrete and shall be located horizontally 
within that portion of a concrete foundation or footing 
that is in direct contact with the earth or within vertical 
foundations or structural components or members that 
are in direct contact with the earth. If muhiple 
concrete-encased electrodes are present at a building or 
structure, it shall be penni&sible to bond only one into 
the grounding electrode system. 

Informational Note: Concrete insialled vsiih insulation. 
Vapor barriers, tihns or similar items separating the 
concrete from the earth is nut considered \o be in "direct 
bontact" with the curlh. 

(4) Ground Ring. A ground ring encircling the building or 
structure, in direct contact with the earth, consisting of at 
least 6.0 m (20 ft) of bare copper conductor not smaller 
than2AWG. 

(5) Rod and Pipe Electrodes, Rod and pipe electrodes shall 
not be less than 2.44 m (8 ft) in length and shall consist of 
the following materials. 

(a) Grounding electrodes of pipe or conduit shall not 
be smaller than metric designator 21 (trade size Va) and, 
where of steel, shall have the outer surface galvanized or 
otherwise metal-coated for corrosion protection. 

(b) Rod-type grounding electrodes of stainless steel 
and copper or zinc coated steel shall be at least 15.87 mm 
(% in.) in diameter, unless ;listed. 

(6) Other Listed Electrodes. Other listed grounding 
electrodes shall be pennitted. 

(7) Plate Electrodes. Each plate electrode shall expose not 
less than 0.186 m^ (2 ft^) of surface to exterior soil. 
Electrodes of bare or conduct ively coated iron or steel plates 
shall be at least 6.4 mm (Va in.) in thickness. Solid, uncoated 
electrodes of nonferrous metal shall be at least 1.5 mm (0.06 
in.) in thickness. 

(8) Other Local Metal Underground Systems or 
Structures. Other local metal underground systems or 
structures such as piping systems, underground tanks, and 
underground metal well casings that are not bonded to a 
metal water pipe. 



(B) Not Permitted for Use as Grounding Electrodes. The 
following systems and materials shall not be used as 
grounding electrodes: 

( 1 ) Metal underground gas piping systems 

(2) Aluminum 

Informational Note: See 250.104(B) for bonding 
requirements of gas piping. 

250.53 Grounding Electrode System Installation. 

Informational Note: See 547.9 and 547.10 for special 
grounding and bonding requirements for agricultural buildings. 

(A) Rod, Pipe, and Plate Electrodes. Rod, pipe, and plate 
electrodes shall meet the requirements of 250.53(A)(1) 
through (A)t3). 

(1) Below Permanent Moisture Level. If practicable, 
rod, pipe, and plate electrodes shall be embedded below 
permanent moisture level. Rod, pipe, and plate 
electrodes shall be free from nonconductive coatings 
such as paint or enamel. 

(2) Supplemental Electrode Required. A single rod, pipe, 
or plate electrode shall be supplemented by an additional 
electrode of a type specified in 250,52(A)(2) through 
(A)(K). The supplemcnial electrode shall be permiltcd to be 
bonded to one of the following: 

( 1 ) Rod , pipe, or plaic e lect rode 

(2) Grounding electrode conductor 

(3) Grounded service-entrance conductor 

(4) Nonflexible grounded service raceway 

(5) Any grounded service enclosure 

Exception: If a single rod, pipe, or plate grounding 
decttode has a rcsLslafice to varth of 23 of mis or less, thu 
stipplemeutal electrode sliall not he reqidrcd. 

(3) Supplemental Electrode. If multiple rod, pipe, or plate 
electrodes are installed to meet the requirements of this 
section, they shall not be less than 1 .8 m (6 ft) apart. 

Informational Note: llic paralleling clTiciency of rods is 
increased by spacing them twice ihe lengdi of the 
longest rod. 

(B) Electrode Spacing. Where more than one of the 
electrodes of the type specified in 250.52(A)(5) or (A)(7) 
are used, each electrode of one grounding system 
(including that used tor strike termination devices) shall not 
be less than 1.83 m (6 ft) from any other electrode of 
another grounding system. Two or more grounding 
electrodes that are bonded together shall be considered a 
single grounding electrode system. 



70-112 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.64 



(C) Bonding Jumper. The bonding jumper(s) used to 
connect the grounding electrodes together to form the 
grounding electrode system shall be installed in accordance 
with 250.64(A), (B), and (E), shall be sized in accordance 
with 250.66, and shall be connected in the manner specified 
in 250.70. 

(D) Metal Underground Water Pipe. If used as a 
grounding electrode, metal underground water pipe shall 
meet the requirements of 250.53(D)(1) and (D)(2). 

(1) Continuity. Continuity of the grounding path or the 
bonding connection to interior piping shall not rely on 
water meters or filtering devices and similar equipment. 

(2) Supplemental Electrode Required. A metal 
undergi'ound water pipe shall be supplemented by an 
additional electrode of a type specified in 250.52(A)(2) 
through (A)(8). If the supplemental electrode is of ihc rod, 
pipe, or plate type, it shall comply with 250.53(A). The 
supplemental electrode shall be bonded to one of the 
following: 

(1) Grounding electrode conductor 



(2) Grounded service-entrance conductor 

(3) Non flexible grounded sen' ice raceway 

(4) Any grounded ser\ ice enclosure 

(5) As provided by 250J2(B) 

Exception: The supplemental electrode shall be permitted 
to he bonded to the interior metal w^ater piping at any 
convenient point as specified in 250.6tS{Q(l), Exception. 

(E) Supplemental Electrode Bonding Connection Size, 

Where the supplemental electrode is a rod, pipe, or plate 
electrode, that portion of the bonding jumper that is the sole 
connection to the supplemental grounding electrode shall 
not be required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 
AWG aluminum wire, 

(F) Ground Ring. The ground ring shall be buried at a depth 
below the earth's suiface of not less than 750 mm (30 in.). 

(G) Rod and Pipe Electrodes, The electrode shall be 
installed such that at least 2.44 m (8 ft) of length is in 
contact with the soil. It shall be driven to a depth of not less 
than 2.44 m (8 ft) except that, where rock bottom is 
encountered, the electrode shall be driven at an oblique 
angle not to exceed 45 degrees from the vertical or, where 
rock bottom is encountered at an angle up to 45 degrees, 
the electrode shall be permitted to be buried in a trench that 
is at least 750 mm (30 in.) deep. The upper end of the 
electrode shall be flush with or below ground level unless 
the aboveground end and the grounding electrode 
conductor attachment are protected against physical 
damage as specified in 250.10. 

(H) Plate Electrode. Plate electrodes shall be installed not 
less than 750 mm (30 in.) below the surface of the earth. 



250.54 Auxiliary Grounding Electrodes. One or more 
grounding electrodes shall be permitted to be connected to 
the equipment grounding conductors specified in 250.118 
and shall not be required to comply with the electrode 
bonding requirements of 250.50 or 250.53(C) or the 
resistance requirements of 250.53(A)(2) Exception, but the 
earth shall not be used as an effective ground-fault current 
path as specified in 250.4(A)(5) and 250.4(B)(4). 

250.58 Common Grounding Electrode. Where an ac 
system is connected to a grounding electrode in or at a 
building or structure, the same electrode shall be used to 
ground conductor enclosures and equipment in or on that 
building or structure. Where separate services, feeders, or 
branch circuits supply a building and are required to be 
connected to a grounding electrode(s), the same 
grounding electrode(s) shall be used. 

Two or more grounding electrodes that are bonded together 
shall be considered as a single grounding electrode system 
in this sense. 



250.60 Use of Strike Termination Devices. Conductors 

and driven pipes, rods, or plate electrodes used for 
grounding strike termination devices shall not be used in 
heu of the grounding electrodes required by 250.50 for 
grounding wiring systems and equipment. This provision 
shall not prohibit the required bonding together of 
grounding electrodes of different systems. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 250.106 for spacing from 
Strike termiiKition devices. See 800.100(D), 810.21(J), and 
820.100(D) for bonding of electrodes. 

Informational Note No. 2: Bonding together of all 
separate grounding electrodes will limit potential 
differences between them and between their associated 
wiring systems. 

250.62 Grounding Electrode Conductor Material. The 

grounding electrode conductor shall be of copper, aluminum, 
or copper-clad aluminum. The material selected shall be 
resistant to any corrosive condition existing at the installation 
or shall be protected against corrosion. The conductor shall 
be solid or stranded, insulated, covered, or bare. 

250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. 

Grounding electrode conductors at the service, at each 
building or structure where supplied by a feeder(s) or 
branch circuit(s), or at a separately derived system shall be 
installed as specified in 250.64(A) through (F). 

(A) Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors. 
Bare aluminum or copper-clad aluminum grounding 
electrodii conductors shall not be used where in direct 
contact with masonry or the earth or where subject to 
con*osive conditions. Where used outside, aluminum or 
copper-clad aluminum grounding electrode conductors 
shall not be terminated within 450 mm (1 8 in.) of the earth. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-113 



250.64 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(B) Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage. 

Where exposed, a grounding electrode conductor or its 
enclosure shall be securely fastened to the surface on which 
it is carried. Grounding electrode conductors shall be 
penniUed to be installed on or through training members^ A 

4 AWG or larger copper or aluminum grounding electrode 
conductor shall be protected if exposed to physical damage. 
A 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor that is free from 
exposure to physical damage shall be permitted to be run 
along the surface of the building construction without metal 
covering or protection if it is securely fastened to the 
construction; otherwise, it shall be protected in rigid metal 
conduit RMC, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), rigid 
polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC), reinforced thermosetting 
resin conduit (RTRC), electrical metallic tubing EMT, or 
cable armor. Grounding electrode conductors smaller than 
6 AWG shall be protected in (RMC), INdCrPVC . RTRCJ 
(EMT), or cable armor. 

(C) Continuous. Except as provided in 250.30(A)(5) and 
(A)(6)/ 250JO(B)( I), and 250.68(C), grounding electrode 
conductor(s) shall be installed in one continuous length 
without a splice or joint. If necesstiry, splices or 
connections shall be made as permitted in ( I) through (4): 

(1) Splicing of the wire-type grounding electrode conductor 

shall be permitted only by irreversible compression-type 
connectors listed as grounding and bonding equipment 
or by the exothermic welding process. 

(2) Sections of busbars shall be permitted to be connected 
together to form a grounding electrode conductor. 

(3) Bohed, riveted, or welded connections of 5tru(;)ufal 
metal frames of buildings or structures. 

(4) Tlireaded, welded, brazed, soldered or bolted-flange 
connections of metal water piping. 

(D) Service with Multiple Disconnecting Means 

Enclosures. If a service consists of more than a single 
enclosure as permitted in 230.71(A), grounding electrode 
connections shall be made in accordance with 
250.64(D)(1), (D)(2), or (D)(3). 

(1) Cammon Grounding Electrode Conductor ^ndi 

Taps. A common grounding electrode conductor and 
grounding electrode conductor taps shall be installed. The 
common grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in 
accordance with 250.66, based on the sum of the circular 
mil area of the largest ungrounded service-entrance 
conductor(s). If the service-entrance conductors connect 
directly to a service drop or service lateral, the common 
grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance 
with Table 250.66, Note 1. 

A |i3"ounding electrode conductor lap shall extend to 
the inside of each service disconnecting means enclosure. 
The grounding electrode conductor taps shall be sized in 
accordance with 250.66 for the largest service-entrance 
conductor serving the individual enclosure. The tap 



conductors shall be connected to the common grounding 
electrode conductor by one of the following methods in 
such a manner that the common grounding electrode 
conductor remains without a splice or joint: 

(1) Exothermic welding. 

(2) Connectors listed as grounding and bonding 
equipmenL 

(3) Connections to an aluminum or copper busbar not less 
than 6 mm ^ 50 mm {% in, ^ 2 in,). The busbar shall 
be securely fastened and shall be installed in an 
accessible location. Connections shall be made by a 
listed connector or by the exothermic welding process. 
If aluminum busbars are used, the installation shall 
comply with 250.64(A). 

(2) Individual Grounding Electrode Conductors. A 

grounding electrode conductor shall be connected 
between the grounded conductor in each service 
equipment disconnecting means enclosure and the 
grounding electrode system. Each grounding electrode 
conductor shall be sized in accordance with 250.66 based 
on the service-entrance conductor(s) supplying the 
individual service disconnecting means. 

(3) Common Location. A grounding electrode conductor 
shall be connected to the grounded service conductor(s) in 
a wireway or other accessible enclosure on the supply side 
of the service disconnecting means. The connection shall 
be made with exothermic welding or a connector listed as 
grounding and bonding equipment. The grounding 
electrode conductor shall be sized in accordance with 
250.66 based on the service-entrance conductor(s) at the 
common location where the connection is made. 

(E) Enclosures for Grounding Electrode Conductors. 

Ferrous metal enclosures for grounding electrode 
conductors shall be electrically continuous from the point of 
attachment to cabinets or equipment to the grounding 
electrode and shall be securely fastened to the ground clamp 
or fitting. Nonferrous metal enclosures shall not be required 
to be electrically continuous. Ferrous metal enclosures that 
are not physically continuous from cabinets or equipment to 
the grounding electrode shall be made electrically 
continuous by bonding each end of the raceway or enclosure 
to the grounding electrode conductor. Bonding methods in 
compliance with 250.92(B) for installations at service 
bquipment locations and with 250.92(B)(2) through (B)(4) 
for other than service equipment locations shall apply at 
each end and to all intervening ferrous raceways, boxes, and 
enclosures between the cabinets or equipment and the 
grounding electrode. The bonding jumper for a grounding 
electrode conductor raceway or cable armor shall be the 
same size as, or larger than, the enclosed grounding 
electrode conductor. If a raceway is used as protection for a 
grounding electrode conductor, the installation shall comply 
with the requirements of the appropriate raceway article. 



70-114 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.68 



(F) Installation to Electrode(s). Grounding electrode 
conductor(s) and bonding jumpers interconnecting 
grounding electrodes shall be installed in accordance with 
(1), (2), or (3). The grounding electrode conductor shall 
be sized for the largest grounding electrode conductor 
required among all the electrodes connected to it. 

(1) The grounding electrode conductor shall be permitted to 
be run to any convenient grounding electrode available 
in the grounding electrode system where the other 
electrode(s), if any, is connected by bonding jumpers 
thai arc installed in accordance with 250.53(C). 

(2) Grounding electrode conductor(s) shall be permitted 
to be run to one or more grounding electrode(s) 
individually. 

(3) Bonding jumper(s) from grounding electrode(s) shall 
be permitted to be connected to an aluminum or 
copper busbar not less than 6 mm x 50 mm (% in. x 2 
in.). The busbar shall be securely fastened and shall 
be installed in an accessible location. Connections 
shall be made by a listed connector or by the 
exothermic welding process. The grounding electrode 
conductor shall be permitted to be run to the busbar. 
Where aluminum busbars are used, the installation 
shall comply with 250.64(A). 

250.66 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding 
Electrode Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode 
conductor at the service, at each building or structure where 
supplied by a feeder(s) or branch circuit(s), or at a 
separately derived system of a grounded or ungrounded ac 
system shall not be less than given in Table 250.66, except 
as permitted in 250.66(A) through (C). 

Informational Note: See 250.24(C) for size of ac system 
conductor brought to service equipment. 

(A) Connections to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes. 

Where the grounding electrode conductor is connected to 
rod, pipe, or plate electrodes as permitted in 250.52(A)(5) 
or (A)(7), that portion of the conductor that is the sole 
connection to the grounding electrode shall not be 
required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 AWG 
aluminum wire. 

(B) Connections to Concrete-Encased Electrodes. 

Where the grounding electrode conductor is connected to 
a concrete-encased electrode as permitted in 
250.52(A)(3), that portion of the conductor that is the sole 
connection to the grounding electrode shall not be 
required to be larger than 4 AWG copper wire. 

(C) Connections to Ground Rings. Where the grounding 
electrode conductor is connected to a ground ring as 
permitted in 250.52(A)(4), that portion of the conductor 
that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall 
not be required to be larger than the conductor used for 
the ground ring. 



Table 250.66 Grounding Electrode Conductor for 
Alternating-Current Systems 

Size of Largest Ungrounded 

Service-Entrance 
Conductor or Equivalent 

Area for Parallel 
Conductorsa (AWG/kcmil) 



Copper 



Aluminum 
or Copper- 
Clad 
Aluminum 



Size of Grounding 
Electrode Conductor 

(AWG/kcmil) 

Aluminum 
or 
Copper- 
Copper cjad 

Aluminum 



2 or smaller 


1/0 or smaller 


8 


6 


1 or 1/0 


2/0 or 3/0 


6 


4 


2/0 or 3/0 


4/0 or 250 


4 


2 


Over 3/0 
through 350 


Over 250 
through 500 


2 


1/0 


Over 350 
through 600 


Over 500 
through 900 


1/0 


3/0 


Over 600 
through 1100 


Over 900 
through 1750 


2/0 


4/0 


Over 1100 


Over 1750 


3/0 


250 



Notes: 

1. Where multiple sets of service-entrance conductors are used 
as permitted in 230.40, Exception No. 2, the equivalent size of 
the largest service-entrance conductor shall be determined by 
the largest sum of the areas of the corresponding conductors of 
each set. 

2. Where there are no service-entrance conductors, the 
grounding electrode conductor size shall be determined by the 
equivalent size of the largest service-entrance conductor 
required for the load to be served. 

''This table also applies to the derived conductors of separately 
derived ac systems. 

^See instaUation restrictions in 250.64(A). 



250.68 Grounding Electrode Conductor and Bonding 
Jumper Connection to Grounding Electrodes. The 

connection of a grounding electrode conductor at the 
service, at each building or structure where supplied by a 
feeder(s) or branch circuit(s), or at a separately derived 
system and associated bonding jumper(s) shall be made as 
specified 250.68(A) through (C). 

(A) Accessibility, All mechanical elements used to 
terminate a grounding electrode conductor or bonding 
jumper to a grounding electrode shall be accessible. 

Exception No. 1: An encased or buried connection to a 
concrete-encased, driven, or buried grounding electrode 
shall not be required to be accessible. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-115 



250.70 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Exception No. 2: Exothermic or irreversible compression 
connections used at terminations, together with the 
mechanical means used to attach such terminations to 
fireproofed structural metal whether or not the mechanical 
means is reversible, shall not be required to be accessible. 

(B) Effective Grounding Path. The connection of a 
grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper to a 
grounding electrode shall be made in a manner that will 
ensure an effective grounding path. Where necessary to 
ensure the grounding path for a metal piping system used 
as a grounding electrode, bonding shall be provided 
around insulated joints and around any equipment likely 
to be disconnected for repairs or replacement. Bonding 
jumpers shall be of sufficient length to permit removal of 
such equipment while retaining the integrity of the 
grounding path. 

(C) Metallic Water Pipe and Structural Metal. 

Grounding electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shaJI 
be pemiitied to be connected at the ibllowing locations an(| 
used to extend the connection to an electrode(s): 

(1) Interior metal water piping located not more than 
1.52 m (5 ft) (rom the point of entrance to the 
building shall be permitted to be used as a conductor 
to interconnect electrodes that are part of the 
ground i ng e lect rode systc m. 

Exception: In industrial, commerciai and instinuiomti 
buildings or sirucfnres, if conditions of maintenance and 
supervision ensure ihaf only qimlified fyersons sei'vice the 
mstaUation, interior metal water piping located more 
than L52 m (5 ft) from the point of entrance to the 
building shall be permitted as a bonding conductor to 
interconnect electrodes that are part of the grounding 
electrode system, or as a grounding electrode conductor, 
if the entire length, other than short sections passing 
perpendicularly through walls, floors, or ceilings, of the 
interior metal water pipe that is being used for tlie 
conductor is exposed} 

(2) The structural frame of a building iliat is directly 
connected to a grounding electrode as specified in 
250.52(A)(2) or 250.68(C)(2Ka), (b), or (c) shall be 
permitted as a bonding conductor to interconnect 
electrodes that are pan of the grounding electrode 
system, or as a grounding electrode conductor. 

a. By connecting the sinictural metal fi^me to the 
reinforcing bars of a concrete-encased electrode, 
as provided in 250.52(AX3). or ground ring as 
provided in 250.52fA)(4) 

b. By bonding the structural metal frame to one or 
more of the grounding electrodes, as specified in 
230,52tA)(5) or (A)(7X (hat comply with (2) 

c. By other approved means of establishing a 
connection to earth 



250.70 Methods of Grounding and Bonding Conductor 
Connection to Electrodes. The grounding or bonding 
conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode 
by exothermic welding, listed lugs, listed pressure 
connectors, listed clamps, or other listed means. 
Connections depending on solder shall not be used. 
Ground clamps shall be listed for the materials of the 
grounding electrode and the grounding electrode 
conductor and, where used on pipe, rod, or other buried 
electrodes, shall also be listed for direct soil burial or 
concrete encasement. Not more than one conductor shall 
be connected to the grounding electrode by a single clamp 
or fitting unless the clamp or fitting is listed for multiple 
conductors. One of the following methods shall be used: 

(1) A pipe fitting, pipe plug, or other approved device 
screwed into a pipe or pipe fitfing 

(2) A listed bolted clamp of cast bronze or brass, or plain 
or malleable iron 

(3) For indoor ^oinmunications purposes only, a listed 
sheet metal strap-type ground clamp having a rigid 
metal base that seats on the electrode and having a 
strap of such material and dimensions that it is not 
likely to stretch during or after installation 

(4) An equally substantial approved means 

rV. Enclosure, Raceway, and Service Cable Connections 

250.80 Service Raceways and Enclosures. 

Metal enclosures and raceways for service conductors and 
equipment shall be connected to the grounded system 
conductor if the electrical system is grounded or to the 
grounding electrode conductor for electrical systems that 
are not grounded. 

Exception: A metal elbow that is installed in an 
underground nonmetallic racew^ and is isolated from 
possible contact by a minimum cover of 450 mm (18 in,) 
to any part of the elbow shall not be required to be 
connected to the grounded system conductor or 
grounding electrode conductor, 

250.84 Underground Service Cable or Raceway. 

(A) Underground Service Cable. The sheath or armor of a 
continuous underground metal- sheathed or armored service 
cable system that is connected to the grounded system 
conductor on the supply side shall not be required to be 
connected to the grounded system conductor at the building 
or structure. The sheath or armor shall be permitted to be 
insulated ft-om the interior metal raceway or piping. 

(B) Underground Service Raceway Containing Cable. 

An underground metal service raceway that contains a 
metal-sheathed or armored cable connected to the grounded 
system conductor shall not be required to be connected to 
the grounded system conductor at the building or structure. 
The sheath or armor shall be permitted to be insulated from 
the interior metal raceway or piping. 



70-116 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.94 



250.86 Other Conductor Enclosures and Raceways. 
Except as permitted by 250.112(1), metal enclosures and 
raceways for other than service conductors shall be 
connected to the equipment grounding conductor. 

Exception No. I: Metal enclosures and raceways for 
conductors added to existing installations of open wire, 
knoh-and-tuhe wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable 
shall not he required to be connected to the equipment 
grounding conductor where these enclosures or wiring 
methods comply with (I) through (4) as follows: 

(1) Do not provide an equipment ground 

(2) Are in runs of less than 7.5 m (25 ft) 

(3) Are free from probable contact with ground, grounded 
metal, metal lath, or other conductive material 

(4) Are guarded against contact by persons 

Exception No. 2: Short sections of metal enclosures or 
raceways used to provide support or protection of cable 
assemblies from physical damage shall not be required to 
be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. 

Exception No. 3: A metal elbow shall not be required to 
be connected to the equipment grounding conductor 
where it is installed in a run of nonmetallic raceway and 
is isolated from possible contact by a minimum cover of 
450 mm (18 in.) to any part of the elbow or is encased in 
not less than 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete. 

V. Bonding 

250.90 General. Bonding shall be provided where 
necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity 
to conduct safely any fauh current likely to be imposed. 

250.92 Services. 

(A) Bonding of Equfpraent for Services. The normally 

non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment indicated 
in 250.92(A)(1) and (A)(2) shall be bonded together. 

(1) All raceways, cable trays, cablebus framework, 
auxiliary gutters, or service cable armor or sheath that 
enclose, contain, or support service conductors, 
except as permitted in 250.80 

(2) All enclosures containing service conductors, 
including meter fittings, boxes, or the like, interposed 
in the service raceway or armor 

(B) Method of Bonding at the Service. Bonding jumpers 
meeting the requirements of this article shall be used 
around impaired connections, such as reducing washers or 
oversized, concentric, or eccendic knockouts. Standard 
lockouts or bushings shall not be the only means for the 
bonding required by this section but shall be permitted to 
be installed to make a mechanical connection of the 
raceway(s). 



Electrical continuity at service equipment, service 
raceways, and service conductor enclosures shall be 
ensured by one of the following methods: 

(1) Bonding equipment to the grounded service 
conductor in a manner provided in 250.8 

(2) Connections utilizing threaded couplings or 
threaded hubs on enclosures if made up wrenchtight 

(3) Threadless couplings and connectors M made up 
tight for metal raceways and metal-clad cables 

(4) Other listed devices, such as bonding-type locknuts, 
bushings, or bushings with bonding jumpers 

a 

250.94 Bonding for Other Systems. An intersystem 
bonding termination for connecting intersystem bonding 
jcondnctors required for other systems shall be provided 
external to enclosures at the service equipment or metering 
jequipment enclosure and at the disconnecting means for 
any additional buildings or structures. The intersystem 
bonding termination shall comply wilh the following^ 

(1) Be accessible for connection and inspection. 

(2) Consist of a set of terminals with the capacity for 
corineclion of noi less than three intersystem bonding 
conductors, 

(3) Not interfere vvith opening the enclosure for a 
service, building or structure disconnecting means, or 
metering equipment. 

(4) At the service equipment, be securely mounted and 
electrically connc^cted to an enclosure for the service 
equipment, to the meter enclosure, or to an exposed 
non flexible metallic service raceway, or be mounted 
at one of these enclosures and be connected to the 
enclosure or to the grounding electrode conductor 
with a minimum 6 AWG copper conductor 

(5) At the disconnecting means for a building or structure, 
be securely mounted and electrically connected to the 
metallic enclosure for the building or structure 
disconnecting means, or be mounted at the 
disconnecting means and be connected to the metallic 
enclosure or to the grounding electrode conductor with 
a minimum 6 AWG copper conductor. 

(6) The terminals shall be hsted as grounding and 
bonding equipment. 

Exception: In existing buildings or structures where any of 
the intersystem bonding and grounding i^lectrode 
conductors required by 770.100(B)(2). 800.I00(B)(2)\ 
8I0.21(Fg2), 820.100(BJgj, cuid S30.I00(B)f2) exist, 
installation of the intersystem bonding termination is not 
required. An accessible means external to enclosures for 
connecting intersystem bonding and grounding electrode 
conductors shall be permitted at the service equipment and 
at the disconnecting means for any additional buildings or 
structures by at least one of the following means: 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-117 



250.96 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(1) Exposed nonflexible metallic raceways 

(2) An exposed grounding electrode conductor 

(3) Approved means for the external connection of a 
copper or other corrosion-resistant bonding or 
grounding electrode conductor to the grounded 
raceway or equipment 

Informational Note No. 1; A 6 AWG copper conductor 
with one end bonded to the grounded nonflexible 
metallic raceway or equipment and with 150 mm (6 in.) 
or more of the other end made accessible on the outside 
wall is an example of the approved means covered in 
250.94, Exception item (3). 

Informational Note No. 2: See 770.100, 800.100, 
810.21, 820.100, and 830.100 for intersystem bonding 
and grounding requirements for conductive optical fiber 
cables, communications circuits, radio and television 
equipment, CATV circuits and nerwork-poueroi 
broadband comtntin teat ions systems, respect i\ el y . 

250.96 Bonding Other Enclosures. 

(A) General. Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, 
cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal 
non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as bquipmeiU 
grounding conductors, with or without the use of 
supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be 
bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity 
and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely 
to be imposed on them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, 
or similar coating shall be removed at threads, contact 
points, and contact surfaces or be connected by means of 
fittings designed so as to make such removal unnecessary. 

(B) Isolated Grounding Circuits. Where installed for the 
reduction of electrical noise (electromagnetic 
interference) on the grounding circuit, an equipment 
enclosure supplied by a branch circuit shall be permitted 
to be isolated from a raceway containing circuits 
supplying only that equipment by one or more listed 
nonmetallic raceway fittings located at the point of 
attachment of the raceway to the equipment enclosure. 
The metal raceway shall comply with provisions of this 
article and shall be supplemented by an internal insulated 
equipment grounding conductor installed in accordance 
with 250.146(D) to ground the equipment enclosure. 

Informational Note: Use of an isolated equipment 
grounding conductor does not relieve the requirement 
for grounding the raceway system. 

250.97 Bonding for Over 250 Volts. For circuits of over 
250 vohs to ground, the electrical continuity of metal 
raceways and cables with metal sheaths that contain any 
conductor other than service conductors shall be ensured 
by one or more of the methods specified for services in 
250.92(B), except for (B)(1). 

Exception: Where oversized, concentric, or eccentric 
knockouts are not encountered, or where a box or 
enclosure with concentric or eccentric knockouts is listed 



to provide a reliable bonding connection, the following 
methods shall be permitted: 

(1) Threadless couplings and connectors for cables with 
metal sheaths 

(2) Two locknuts, on rigid metal conduit or intermediate 
metal conduit, one inside and one outside of boxes 
and cabinets 

(3) Fittings with shoulders that seat firmly against the 
box or cabinet, such as electrical metallic tubing 
connectors, flexible meted conduit connectors, and 
cable connectors, with one locknut on the inside of 
boxes and cabinets 

(4) Listed fittings 

250.98 Bonding Loosely Jointed Metal Raceways. 
Expansion fittings and telescoping sections of metal 
raceways shall be made electrically continuous by 
equipment bonding jumpers or other means. 

250.100 Bonding in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 
Regardless of the voltage of the electrical system, the 
electrical continuity of non-current-carrying metal parts 
of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures in any 
hazardous (classified) location as defined in 500.5 shall 
be ensured by any of the bonding methods specified in 
250.92(B)(2) through (B)(4). One or more of these 
bonding methods shall be used whether or not equipment 
grounding conductors of the wire type are installed. 

250.102 Bonding Conductors and Jumpers. 

(A) Material. Bonding jumpers shall be of copper or 
other corrosion-resistant material, A bonding jumper shall 
be a wire, bus, screw, or similar suitable conductor. 

(B) Attachment. Bonding jumpers shall be attached in 
the manner specified by the applicable provisions of 
250.8 for circuits and equipment and by 250.70 for 
grounding electrodes. 

(C) Size — Supply-Side Bonding Jumper. 

\\) Size for Supply Conductors in a Single Raceway or 
Cable. The supply-side bonding jumper shall not be 
smaller than the sizes shown in Table 250.66 for 
grounding electrode conductors. Where the ungrounded 
$upply conductors are larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 
1750 kcmil aluminum, the supply-side bonding jumper 
shall have an area not less than I2V2 percent of the area of 
the largest sel of ungrounded supply conductors. 

(2) Slice for Parallel Conductor Installations. Where the 
ungrounded supply conductors are paralleled in two or 
more raceways or cables, and an individual supply-side 
bonding jumper is used for bonding these raceways or 
cables, the size of the supply-side bonding jumper for 
each raceway or cable shall be selected from Table 250,66 
based on the size of the ungrounded supply conductors in 
each raceway or cable. A single supply-side bonding 
jumper installed for bonding two or more raceways or 
eables shall be sized in accordance with 250J 02(C)(1) 



70-118 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.104 



(3) DiffereDt Materials. Where the ungrounded supply 
conductors and the supply-side bonding jumper are of 
different materials (copper or aiuminum), the minimum 
s\7t of the supply-side bonding jumper shall he based on 
the assumed use of ungrounded conductors of the same 
mnterial as the supply-siide bonding jumper and with an 
ampacity equivalent to that of the installed ungrounded 
supply conductors, 

(D) Size — Equipment Bonding Jumper on Load 
Side of an Overcurrenl Device^ The equipment 
bonding jumper on the load side of an overcurrent 
devicels) shall be sized in accordance with 250.122, 

A single con:imon continuous equipment bonding jumper 
shall be permitted to connect two or more raceways or 
cables if the bonding jumper is sized in accordance with 
250.122 for the largest overcurrent device supplying 
circuits therein. 

(E) Installation. Bonding jumpers or conductors and 
equipment bonding jumpers shall be permitted to be 
installed inside or outside of a raceway or an enclosure. 

(1) Inside a Raceway or an Enclosure, if installed 
inside a raceway, equipment bonding jumpers and 
bonding jumpers or conductors shall comply with the 
requirements of 250.119 and 250.148. 

(2) Outside a Raceway or an Enclosure, If installed on 
the outside, the length of the bonding jumper or 
conductor or equipment bonding jumper shall not exceed 
L8 m (6 ft) and shall be routed with the raceway or 
enclosure. 



Exception: An equipment bonding jumper or supply- 
side homiing jumper longer than 1,8 m (6 ft) shall be 
permitted at outside pole locations for the purpose of 
bonding or grounding isolated sections of metal 
raceways or elbows installed in exposed risers of metal 
condidt or other metal raceway, ami Jor bonding 
grounding electrodes, and shall run he required to be 
routed with a raceway or enclosure, 

(3) Protection. Bonding jumpers or conductors and 
equipment bonding jumpers shall be installed in 
accordance with 250.64(A) and (B). 

250,104 Bonding of Piping Systems and Exposed 
Structural Steel. 

(A) Metal Water Piping. The metal water piping 
system shall be bonded as required in (A)(1), (A)(2), or 
(A)(3) of this section. The bonding jumper(s) shall be 
installed in accordance with 250.64(A), (B), and (E). 
The points of attachment of the bonding jumper(s) shall 
be accessible. 

(1) General. Metal water piping system(s) installed in or 
attached to a building or structure shall be bonded to the 



service equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at 
the service, the grounding electrode conductor where of 
sufficient size, or to the one or more grounding 
electrodes used. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in 
accordance with Table 250.66 except as permitted in 
250.104(A)(2) and (A)(3). 

(2) Buildings of Multiple Occupancy. In buildings of 
multiple occupancy where the metal water piping 
system(s) installed in or attached to a building or 
structure for the individual occupancies is metallically 
isolated from all other occupancies by use of 
nonmetallic water piping, the metal water piping 
system(s) for each occupancy shall be permitted to be 
bonded to the equipment grounding terminal of the 
panelboard or switchboard enclosure (other than service 
equipment) supplying that occupancy. The bonding 
jumper shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.122, 
based on the rating of the overcurrent protective device 
for the circuit supplying the occupancy. 

(3) Multiple Buildings or Structures Supplied by a 
Feeder(s) or Branch Circuit(s). The metal water piping 
system(s) installed in or attached to a building or 
structure shall be bonded to the building or structure 
disconnecting means enclosure where located at the 
building or structure, to the equipment grounding 
conductor run with the supply conductors, or to the one 
or more grounding electrodes used. The bonding 
jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance with 250.66, 
based on the size of the feeder or branch circuit 
conductors that supply the building. The bonding jumper 
shall not be required to be larger than the largest 
ungrounded feeder or branch circuit conductor supplying 
the building. 

(B) Other Metal Piping. If installed in, or attached to, a 
building or structure, a metal piping systera(s), including 
gas piping, that is likely to become energized shall be 
bonded to the service equipment enclosure; the 
grounded conductor at the service; the grounding 
electrode conductor, if of sufficient size; or to one or 
more grounding electrodes used. The bonding 
conductor(s) or jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance 
with 250.122, using the rating of the circuit that is likely 
to energize the piping system(s). The equipment 
grounding conductor for the circuit that is likely to 
energize the piping shall be permitted to serve as the 
bonding means. The points of attachment of the bonding 
jumper(s) shall be accessible. 

Informational Note No. 1: Bonding all piping and 
metal air ducts within the premises will provide 
additional safety. 

Informational Note No. 2: Additional informalion for 
gas piping s\skiTih can be found in Section 7.13 ot 
NHPA 54-2009. Satioual Fiwl CA/v Code. 



2013 California Electricai Code 



70-119 



250.106 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(C) Structural Metal. Exposed structural metal that is 
interconnected to form a metal building frame and is not 
intentionally grounded br bonded and is likely to become 
energized shall be bonded to the service equipment 
enclosure; the grounded conductor at the service; iha 
disconnecting means for buildings or structures supplied by 
a feeder or branch circuit; the grounding electrode 
conductor, if of sufficient size; or to one or more grounding 
electrodes used. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in 
accordance with Table 250.66 and installed in accordance 
with 250.64(A), (B), and (E). The points of attachment of 
the bonding jumper(s) shall be accessible unless inslfilled in 
compliance with 250.68(A), Exception No. 2. 

(D) Separately Derived Systems. Metal water piping 
systems and structural metal that is interconnected to form 
a building frame shall be bonded to separately derived 
systems in accordance with (D)(1) through (D)(3). 

(1) Metal Water Piping System(s), The grounded 
conductor of each separately derived system shall be 
bonded to the nearest available point of the metal water 
piping system(s) in the area served by each separately 
derived system. This connection shall be made at the 
same point on the separately derived system where the 
grounding electrode conductor is connected. Each 
bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with Table 
250.66 based on the largest ungrounded conductor of the 
separately derived system. 

Exception No. I: A separate bonding jumper to the metal 
water piping system shall not he required where the metal 
water piping system is used as the grounding electrode 
for the separately derived system and the water piping 
system is in the area served. 

Exception No. 2: A separate water piping bonding jumper 
shall not be required where the metal frame of a building 
or structure is used as the grounding electrode for a 
separately derived system and is bonded to the metal water 
piping in the area served by the separately derived system, 

(2) Structural Metal. Where exposed structural metal 
that is interconnected to form the building frame exists in 
the area served by the separately derived system, it shall 
be bonded to the grounded conductor of each separately 
derived system. This connection shall be made at the 
same point on the separately derived system where the 
grounding electrode conductor is connected. Each 
bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with Table 
250.66 based on the largest ungrounded conductor of the 
separately derived system. 

Exception No. I: A separate bonding jumper to the 
building structural metal shall not be required where the 
metal frame of a building or structure is used as the 
grounding electrode for the separately derived system. 



Exception No. 2: A separate bonding jumper to the 
building structural metal shall not be required where the 
water piping of a building or structure is used as the 
grounding electrode for a separately derived system and is 
bonded to the building structural metal in the area served 
by the separately derived system. 

(3) Common Grounding Electrode Conductor. Where a 
common grounding electrode conductor is installed for 
multiple separately derived systems as permitted by 
250.30(A)(6), and exposed structural metal that is 
interconnected to form the building frame or interior metal 
piping exists in the area served by the separately derived 
system, the metal piping and the structural metal member 
shall be bonded to the common grounding electrode 
conductor jn the area served by the separately derived system. 

Exception: A separate bonding jumper from each derived 
system to metal water piping and to structural metal 
members shall not be required where the metal water 
piping and the structural metal members in the area served 
by the separately derived system are bonded to the common 
grounding electrode conductor. 

250.106 Lightning Protection Systems. The lightning 
protection system ground terminals shall be bonded to the 
building or structure grounding electrode system. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 250.60 for use of strike 
tennination devices* For further information, see NFPA 
780-2011, Standard for the Installation of Lightning 
Protection Systems, which contains detailed information 
on grounding, bonding, and sideflash distance from 
lightning protection systems. 

Informational Note No. 2: Metal raceways, enclosures, 
frames, and other non-current-carrying metal parts of 
electrical equipment installed on a building equipped with 
a lightning protection system may require bonding or 
spacing from the lightning protection conductors in 
accordance with NFPA 780-2011, Standard for the 
Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. 

9 

VI. Equipment Grounding and Equipment Grounding 
Conductors 

250.110 Equipment Fastened in Place |Fixed) or 
Connected by Permanent Wiring Methods. Exposed, 
iionnally non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed 
equipment supplied by or enclosing conductors or 
bomponents dial are likely to become energized shall be 
connected to an equipment grounding conductor under any 
of the following conditions: 

(1) Where within 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically or 1.5 m (5 ft) 
horizontally of ground or grounded metal objects and 
subject to contact by persons 

(2) Where located in a wet or damp location and not isolated 

(3) Where in electrical contact with metal 



70-120 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUMDING AND BONDING 



250.114 



(4) Where in a hazardous (classified) location as 
covered by Articles 500 through 517 

(5) Where supplied by a wiring method that provides an 
equipment grounding conductor, except as 
permitted by 250.86 Exception No. 2 for short 
sections of metal enclosures 

(6) Where equipment operates with any terminal at over 
150 volts to ground 

Exception No, 1: If exempted by special pennission, (h^ 
metal frame of electrically heated appliances that have 
the frame permanently and effectively insulated from 
ground shall not be required to be grounded. 

Exception No. 2: Distribution apparatus, such as 
transformer and capacitor cases, mounted on wooden 
poles at a height exceeding 2.5 m (8 ft) above ground or 
grade level kha/l not he required to be grounded. 

Exception No. 3: Listed equipment protected by a 
system of double insulation, or its equivalent, shall not 
be required to be connected to the equipment grounding 
conductor. Where such a system is employed, the 
equipment shall be distinctively marked. 

250.112 Specific Equipment Fastened in Place (Fixed) 
or Connected by Permanent Wiring Methods. Except 
as permitted in 250.112(F) and (1), exposed, normally 
non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment described 
in 250.112(A) through (K), and normally non-current- 
carrying metal parts of equipment and enclosures 
described in 250.1 12(L) and (M), shall be connected to 
an equipment grounding conductor, regardless of 
voltage. 

(A) Switchboard Frames and Structures. Switchboard 
frames and structures supporting switching equipment, 
except frames of 2-wire dc switchboards where 
effectively insulated from ground. 

(B) Pipe Organs. Generator and motor frames in an 
electrically operated pipe organ, unless effectively 
insulated from ground and the motor driving it. 

(C) Motor Frames. Motor frames, as provided by 

430.242. 

(D) Enclosures for Motor Controllers, Enclosures for 
motor controllers unless attached to ungrounded portable 
equipment. 

(E) Elevators and Cranes. Electrical equipment for 
elevators and cranes. 

(F) Garages, Theaters, and Motion Picture Studios. 

Electrical equipment in commercial garages, theaters, 
and motion picture studios, except pendant lampholders 
supplied by circuits not over 150 volts to ground. 



(G) Electric Signs. Electric signs, outline lighting, and 
associated equipment as provided in 600.7. 



(H) Motion Picture Projection Equipment. 

picture projection equipment. 



Motion 



(I) Remote-Control, Signaling, and Fire Alarm 
Circuits, Equipment supplied by Class 1 circuits shall 
be grounded unless operating at less than 50 volts. 
Equipment supplied by Class 1 power-limited circuits, 
by Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control and signaling 
circuits, and by fire alarm circuits shall be grounded 
where system grounding is required by Part II or Part 
VIII of this article. 

(J) Luminaires. Luminaires as provided in Part V of 
Article 410. 

(K) Skid-Mounted Equipment. Permanently mounted 
electrical equipment and skids shall be connected to the 
equipment grounding conductor sized as required by 
250.122. 

(L) Motor-Operated Water Pumps, Motor-operated 
water pumps, including the submersible type. 

(M) Metal Well Casings. Where a submersible pump is 
used in a metal well casing, the well casing shall be 
connected to the pump circuit equipment grounding 
conductor. 

250.114 Equipment Connected by Cord and Plug. 

Under any of the conditions described in 250.114(1) 
through (4), exposed, normally non-current-carrying 
metal parts of cord-and-plug-connected equipment shall 
be connected to the equipment grounding conductor. 

Exception: Listed tools, listed appliances, and listed 
equipment covered in 250,114(2) through (4) shall not 
be required to be connected to an equipment grounding 
conductor where protected by a system of double 
insulation or its equivalent. Double insulated equipment 
shall be distinctively marked, 

(1) In hazardous (classified) locations (see Articles 500 
through 517) 

(2) Where operated at over 150 volts to ground 

Exception No. 1: Motors, where guarded, shall not be 
required to be connected to an equipment grounding 
conductor. 

Exception No. 2: Metal frames of electrically heated 
appliances, exempted by special permission, shall not be 
required to be connected to an equipment grounding 
conductor, in which case the frames shall be 
permanently and effectively insulated from ground. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-121 



250.116 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(3) In residential occupancies: 

a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners 

b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, dish-washing 
machines; ranges; kitchen waste disposers; 
information technology equipment; sump pumps 
and electrical aquarium equipment 

c. Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and 
fixed motor-operated tools, and light industrial 
motor-operated tools 

d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: 
hedge clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and 
wet scrubbers 

e. Portable handlamps 

(4) In other than residential occupancies: 

a. Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners 

b. Clothes-washing, clothes-drying, dish-washing 
machines; information technology equipment; 
sump pumps and electrical aquarium equipment 

c. Hand-held motor-operated tools, stationary and 
fixed motor-operated tools, and light industrial 
motor-operated tools 

d. Motor-operated appliances of the following types: 
hedge clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and 
wet scrubbers 

e. Portable handlamps 

f Cord-and-plug-connected appliances used in 
damp or wet locations or by persons standing on 
the ground or on metal floors or working inside 
of metal tanks or boilers 
g. Tools likely to be used in wet or conductive locations 
Exception: Tools and portable handlamps likely to be 
used in wet or conductive locations shall not be required 
to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor 
where supplied through an isolating transformer with an 
ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts. 
250.116 Nonelectrical Equipment. 
The metal parts of the following nonelectrical equipment 
described in this section shall be connected to the 
equipment grounding conductor: 

(1) Frames and tracks of electrically operated cranes and 
hoists 

(2) Frames of nonelectrically driven elevator cars to 
which electrical conductors are attached 

(3) Hand-operated metal shifting ropes or cables of 
electric elevators 

Informational Note: Where extensive metal in or on 
buildings may become energized and is subject to 
personal contact, adequate bonding and grounding will 
provide additional safety. 

250,118 Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. 

The equipment grounding conductor run with or 
enclosing the circuit conductors shall be one or more or a 
combination of the following: 



(1) A copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum 
conductor. This conductor shall be solid or stranded; 
insulated, covered, or bare; and in the form of a wire 
or a busbar of any shape. 

(2) Rigid metal conduit, 

(3) Intermediate metal conduit. 

(4) Electrical metallic tubing. 

(5) Listed flexible metal conduit meeting all the 
following conditions: 

a. The conduit is terminated in listed fittings. 

b. The circuit conductors contained in the conduit 
are protected by overcurrent devices rated at 20 
amperes or less. 

c. The combined length of flexible metal conduit 
and flexible metallic tubing and liquidtight 
flexible metal conduit in the same ground-raull 
current path does not exceed 1 .8 m (6 ft). 

d. \i used to connect equipment y.^here flexibility is 
necessary to minimize the transmission of 
vibration from equipment or to provide flexibility 
for equipment that requires movement after 

installation, an equipment grounding conductor 
shall be installed. 

(6) Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit meeting all 
the following conditions: 

a. The conduit is terminated in listed fittings. 

b. For metric designators 12 through 16 (trade sizes 
Vg through Vi), the circuit conductors contained 
in the conduit are protected by overcurrent 
devices rated at 20 amperes or less. 

c. For metric designators 21 through 35 (trade sizes 
% through 1 Va), the circuit conductors contained in 
the conduit are protected by overcurrent devices 
rated not more than 60 amperes and there is no 
flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing, or 
liquidtight flexible metal conduit in trade sizes 
metric designators 12 through 16 (trade sizes Vg 
through Vi) in the ground* fault current path. 

d. The combined length of llexible metal conduit 
and flexible metallic tubing and liquidtight 
flexible metal conduit in the same ground-fault 
current path does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). 

e. If used to connect equipment where flexibility is 
necessary to minimize the transmission of 
vibration Brom equipment or to provide flexibility 
for equipment tJiat requires movement after 

installation, an equipment grounding conductor 
shall be installed. 

(7) Flexible metallic tubing where the tubing is terminated 
in listed fittings and meeting the following conditions: 



70-122 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250,120 



a. The circuit conductors contained in the tubing are 
protected by overcurrent devices rated at 20 
amperes or less. 

b. The combined length of flexible metal conduit 
and flexible metallic tubing and liquidtight 
flexible metal conduit in the same ground-faull 
current! path does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft). 

(8) Armor of Type AC cable as provided in 320.108. 

(9) The copper sheath of mineral-insulated, metal- 
sheathed cable. 



(10) Type MC cable ihal provides an effective groimd- 
fauit curreni path in accordance with one or more 
of the following: 

a. U contains an insulated or uninsulated equipment 
grounding conductor in compliance with 
250.118(1) 

b. The combined metallic sheath and unmsulatcd 
equipment grounding/bonding conductor of 
interlocked metal tapc^type MC cable that is listed 
and identified as an equipment grounding conductor 

c. The metallic sheath or the combined metallic 
sheath and equipment grounding conductors of 
the smooth or corrugated tube-type MC cable 
that is listed and identified as an equipment 
grounding conductor 

(1 1) Cable trays as permitted in 392J and 392.60. 

(12) Cablebus framework as permitted in 370.3, 

(13) Other listed electrically continuous metal raceways 
and listed auxiliary gutters. 

(14) Surface metal raceways listed for grounding. 

Informational Note: For effective ground- fault current 
path, see 250.2 Definition. 

250.119 Identification of Equipment Grounding 
Conductors. Unless required elsewhere in this Code, 
equipment grounding conductors shall be permitted to be 
bare, covered, or insulated. Individually covered or 
insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a 
continuous outer finish that is either green or green with 
one or more yellow stripes except as permitted in this 
section. Conductors with insulation or individual covering 
that is green, green with one or more yellow stripes, or 
otherwise identified as permitted by this section shall not 
be used for ungrounded or grounded circuit conductors. 

Exception: Power-limited Class 2 or Class 3 cables, 
power-iimi(ed fire alarm nMes, or cotnnmmcatiom 
cables containing only circuits operating at less than 50 
volts wiiere connecteil fo equipment nof required to be 
grounded iu aaordance with 250,112(1} shall be 
permitted to use a conductor with green insulation or 
grt^en with one or more vellow stripes for other than 
equipment grounding purposes. 



(A) Conductors Larger Than 6 AWG, Equipment 
grounding conductors larger than 6 AWG shall comply 
with 250.1 19(A)(1) and (A)(2). 

(1) An insulated or covered conductor larger than 6 
AWG shall be permitted, at the time of installation, to 
be permanently identified as an equipment grounding 
conductor at each end and at every point where the 
conductor is accessible. 

Exception: Conductors larger than 6 AWG shall not be 
required to be marked in conduit bodies that contain no 
splices or unused hubs. 

(2) Identification shall encircle the conductor and shall 
be accomplished by one of the following: 

a. Stripping the insulation or covering from the 
entire exposed length 

b. Coloring the insulation or covering green at the 
termination 

c. Marking the insulation or covering with green 
tape or green adhesive labels at the termination 

(B) Muiticondnctor Cable, Where the conditions of 
maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified 
persons service the installation, one or more insulated 
conductors in a muiticondnctor cable, at the time of 
installation, shall be permitted to be permanently 
identified as equipment grounding conductors at each end 
and at every point where the conductors are accessible by 
one of the following means: 

(1 ) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length 

(2) Coloring the exposed insulation green 

(3) Marking the exposed insulation with green tape or 
green adhesive labels 

(C) Flexible Cord, An uninsulated equipment grounding 
conductor shall be permitted, but, if individually covered, 
the covering shall have a continuous outer finish that is 
either green or green with one or more yellow stripes. 

250.120 Equipment Grounding Conductor Installation. 
An equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in 
accordance with 250. 120(A), (B), and (C). 

(A) Raceway, Cable Trays, Cable Armor, Cablebus, or 
Cable Sheaths. Where it consists of a raceway, cable tray, 
cable armor, cablebus framework, or cable sheath or where 
it is a wire within a raceway or cable, it shall be installed in 
accordance with the applicable provisions in this Code 
using fittings for joints and terminations approved for use 
with the typQ raceway or cable used. All connections, 
joints, and fittings shall be made tight using suitable tools. 

Informational Note: See the UL guide information on 
FHIT systems for equipment grounding conductors 
installed in a raceway that are part of an electrical circuit 
protective system or a fire-rated cable listed to maintain 
circuit integrity. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70>123 



250.121 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(B) Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum 
Conductors, Equipment grounding conductors of bare or 
insulated aluminum or copper-clad aluminum shall be 
permitted. Bare conductors shall not come in direct 
contact with masonry or the earth or where subject to 
corrosive conditions. Aluminum or copper-clad aluminum 
conductors shall not be terminated within 450 mm (18 in.) 
of the earth. 

(C) Equipment Grounding Conductors Smaller Than 

6 AWG. Where not routed with circuit conductors as 
permiucd in 250.130(C) and 250. f 34(B) Exception Na 2, 
equipment grounding conductors smaller than 6 AWG 
shall be protected from physical damage by an identified 
raceway or cable armor unless installed within hollow 
spaces of the framing members of buildings or structures 
and where not subject to physical damage. 

250.121 Use of Equipment Grounding Conductors. An 

equipment grounding conductor shall not be used as a 
l^ounding electrode conductor. 

250.122 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors. 

(A) General. Copper, aluminum, or copper-clad 
aluminum equipment grounding conductors of the wire 
type shall not be smaller than shown in Table 250.122, 
but in no case shall they be required to be larger than the 
circuit conductors supplying the equipment. Where a 
cable tray, a raceway, or a cable armor or sheath is used 
as the equipment grounding conductor, as provided in 
250.1 18 and 250.134(A), it shall comply with 250.4(A)(5) 
or (B)(4). 

Equipment grounding conductors shall be permitted 
10 be sectioned within a multiconducior cable, provided 
the combined circular mil area complies with Table 
250.122. 

(B) Increased in Size. Where ungrounded conductors are 
increased in size, equipment grounding conductors, where 
installed, shall be increased in size proportionately 
according to the circular mil area of the ungrounded 
conductors. 

(C) Multiple Circuits. Where a single equipment 
grounding conductor is run with multiple circuits in the 
same raceway, cable, or cable tray, it shall be sized for the 
largest overcurrent device protecting conductors in the 
raceway, cable, or cable tray. Equipment grounding 
conductors installed in cable trays shall meet the 
minimum requirements of 392.10(B)(1)(c). 

(D) Motor Circuits. Equipment grounding conductors for 
motor circuits shall be sized in accordance with (D)(1) or 
(D)(2). 

(1) General. The equipment grounding conductor size 
shall not be smaller than determined by 250.122(A) based 
on the rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and 
ground-fault protective device. 



(2) Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breaker and Motor 
Short-Circuit Protector. Where the overcurrent device is 
an instantaneous-trip circuit breaker or a motor short- 
circuit protector, the equipment grounding conductor shall 
be sized not smaller than that given by 250.122(A) using 
the maximum permitted rating of a dual element time- 
delay fuse selected for branch-circuit short-circuit and 
ground-fault protection in accordance with 430.52(C)(1), 
Exception No. 1. 

(E) Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. The equipment 
grounding conductor in a flexible cord with the largest 
circuit conductor 10 AWG or smaller, and the equipment 
grounding conductor used with fixture wires of any size 
in accordance with 240.5, shall not be smaller than 18 
AWG copper and shall not be smaller than the circuit 
conductors. The equipment grounding conductor in a 
flexible cord with a circuit conductor larger than 1 AWG 
shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.122. 

(F) Conductors in Parallel. Where conductors are 
installed in parallel in multiple raceways or cables as 
permitted in 310.10(H), the equipment grounding 
conductors, where used, shall be Installed in parallel in 
each raceway or cable. Where conductors are installed in 
parallel in the same raceway, cable, or cable tray ag 
permitted in 310.10(H), a single equipment grounding 
conductor shall be permitted. Equipment grounding 
conductors installed in cable tray shall meet the minimum 
requirements of 392. 1 0(B)( I )(c). 

Each equipment grounding conductor shall be sized 
in comphance with 250.122. 

(G) Feeder Taps. Equipment grounding conductors run 
with feeder taps shall not be smaller than shown in Table 
250.122 based on the rating of the overcurrent device 
ahead of the feeder but shall not be required to be larger 
than the tap conductors. 

250.124 Equipment Grounding Conductor Continuity. 

(A) Separable Connections. Separable connections such 
as those provided in drawout equipment or attachment 
plugs and mating connectors and receptacles shall provide 
for first-make, last-break of the equipment grounding 
conductor. First-make, last-break shall not be required 
where interlocked equipment, plugs, receptacles, and 
connectors preclude energization without grounding 
continuity. 

(B) Switches. No automatic cutout or switch shall be 
placed in the equipment grounding conductor of a 
premises wiring system unless the opening of the cutout 
or switch disconnects all sources of energy. 

250.126 Identification of Wiring Device Terminals. 

The terminal for the connection of the equipment 
grounding conductor shall be identified by one of the 
following: 



70-124 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.134 



Table 250.122 Minimum Size Equipment Grounding 
Conductors for Grounding Raceway and Equipment 





Size (AWG 


or kcmil) 


Rating or Setting of 
Automatic Overcurrent 
Device in Circuit Aliead 
of Equipment, Conduit, 

etc., Not Exceeding 
(Amperes) 


Copper 


Aluminum 
or Copper- 
Clad 
Aluminum* 


15 


14 


12 


20 


12 


10 


30 


10 


8 


40 


10 


8 


60 


10 


8 


100 


8 


6 


200 


6 


4 


300 


4 


2 


400 


3 


1 


500 


2 


1/0 


600 


1 


2/0 


800 


1/0 


3/0 


1000 


2/0 


4/0 


1200 


3/0 


250 


1600 


4/0 


350 


2000 


250 


400 


2500 


350 


600 


3000 


400 


600 


4000 


500 


750 


5000 


700 


1200 


6000 


800 


1200 



Note: Where necessary to comply with 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4), 
the equipment grounding conductor shall be sized larger than 
given in this table. 
*See installation restrictions in 250.120. 

(1) A green, not readily removable terminal screw w^ith a 
hexagonal head. 

(2) A green, hexagonal, not readily removable terminal nut. 

(3) A green pressure wire connector. If the terminal for 
the grounding conductor is not visible, the conductor 
entrance hole shall be marked with the word green or 
ground, the letters G or GR, a grounding symbol, or 
otherwise identified by a distinctive green color. If 
the terminal for the equipment grounding conductor 
is readily removable, the area adjacent to the terminal 
shall be similarly marked. 

Informational Note: See Informational Note Figure 
250.126. 



Informational Note Figure 250.126 One Example of a 
Symbol Used to Identify the Grounding Termination Point 
for an Equipment Grounding Conductor. 



VIL Methods of Equipment Grounding 

250.130 Equipment Grounding Conductor 
Connections. Equipment grounding conductor 
connections at the source of separately derived systems 
shall be made in accordance with 250.30(A)(1). 
Equipment grounding conductor connections at service 
equipment shall be made as indicated in 250.130(A) or 
(B). For replacement of non-grounding-type receptacles 
with grounding-type receptacles and for branch-circuit 
extensions only in existing installations that do not have 
an equipment grounding conductor in the branch circuit, 
connections shall be permitted as indicated in 250.130(C). 

(A) For Grounded Systems. The connection shall be 
made by bonding the equipment grounding conductor to 
the grounded service conductor and the grounding 
electrode conductor. 

(B) For Ungrounded Systems. The connection shall be 
made by bonding the equipment grounding conductor to 
the grounding electrode conductor. 

(C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch 
Circuit Extensions. The equipment grounding conductor 
of a grounding-type receptacle or a branch-circuit 
extension shall be permitted to be connected to any of the 
following: 

(1) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode 
system as described in 250.50 

(2) Any accessible point on the grounding electrode 
conductor 

(3) The equipment grounding terminal bar within the 
enclosure where the branch circuit for the receptacle 
or branch circuit originates 

(4) For grounded systems, the grounded service 
conductor within the service equipment enclosure 

(5) For ungrounded systems, the grounding terminal bar 
within the service equipment enclosure 

Informational Note: See 406, 4(D) for the use of a 
ground- fault circuit-interrupting type of receptacle. 

250*132 Short Sections of Raceway. Isolated sections of 
metal raceway or cable armor, where required to be 
grounded, shall be connected to an equipment grounding 
conductor in accordance with 250.134. 

250.134 Equipment Fastened in Place or Connected by 
Permanent Wiring Methods (Fixed) — Grounding. 

Unless grounded by connection to the grounded circuit 
conductor as permitted by 250.32, 250.140, and 250.142, 
non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, 
and other enclosures, if grounded, shall be connected to 
an equipment grounding conductor by one of the methods 
specified in 250.134(A) or (B). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-125 



250.136 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(A) Equipment Grounding Conductor Types. By 

connecting to any of the equipment grounding conductors 
permitted by 250.1 18. 

(B) With Circuit Conductors. By connecting to an 
equipment grounding conductor contained within the 
same raceway, cable, or otherwise run with the circuit 
conductors. 

Exception No. 1: As provided in 250.130(C), the 
equipment grounding conductor shall he permitted to he 
run separately from the circuit conductors. 

Exception No. 2: For dc circuits, the equipment 
grounding conductor shall be permitted to he run 
separately from the circuit conductors. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 250.102 and 250.168 for 
equipment bonding jumper requirements. 

Informational Note No. 2: See 400.7 for use of cords for 
fixed equipment. 

250.136 Equipment Considered Grounded. Under the 
conditions specified in 250.136(A) and (B), the normally 
non-current-carrying metal parts of the equipment shall 
be considered grounded. 

(A) Equipment Secured to Grounded Metal Supports. 

Electrical equipment secured to and in electrical contact 
with a metal rack or structure provided for its support and 
connected to an equipment grounding conductor by one of 
the means indicated in 250.134. The structural metal 
frame of a building shall not be used as the required 
equipment grounding conductor for ac equipment. 

(B) Metal Car Frames. Metal car frames supported by 
metal hoisting cables attached to or running over metal 
sheaves or drums of elevator machines that are connected 
to an equipment grounding conductor by one of the 
methods indicated in 250.134. 

250.138 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Equipment. Non- 
current-carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug-connected 
equipment, if grounded, shall be connected to an 
equipment grounding conductor by one of the methods in 
250.138(A) or (B). 

(A) By Means of an Equipment Grounding Conductor, 

By means of an equipment grounding conductor run with 
the power supply conductors in a cable assembly or 
flexible cord properly terminated in a grounding-type 
attachment plug with one fixed grounding contact. 

Exception: The grounding contacting pole of grounding- 
type plug-in groundfault circuit interrupters shall be 
permitted to be of the movable, self-restoring type on circuits 
operating at not over 150 volts between any two conductors 
or over 150 volts between any conductor and ground. 

(B) By Means of a Separate Flexible Wire or Strap. By 

means of a separate flexible wire or strap, insulated or 
bare, connected to an equipment grounding conductor, 



and protected as well as practicable against physical 
damage, where part of equipment. 

250.140 Frames of Ranges and Clothes Dryers. Frames 
of electric ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted 
cooking units, clothes dryers, and outlet or junction boxes 
that are part of the circuit for these appliances shall be 
connected to the equipment grounding conductor in the 
manner specified by 250.134 or 250.138. 

Exception: For existing branch-circuit installations only 
where an equipment grounding conductor is not present 
in the outlet or junction box, the frames of electric ranges, 
wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, 
clothes dryers, and outlet or junction boxes that are part 
of the circuit for these appliances shall be permitted to be 
connected to the grounded circuit conductor if all the 
following conditions are met. 

(1) The supply circuit is 120/240-volt, single-phase, 3- 
wire; or 208Y/120-volt derived from a 3-phase, 4- 
wire, wye-connected system. 

(2) The grounded conductor is not smaller than 10 A WG 
copper or 8 A WG aluminum. 

(3) The grounded conductor is insulated, or the 
grounded conductor is uninsulated and part of a 
Type SE service-entrance cable and the branch 
circuit originates at the service equipment. 

(4) Grounding contacts of receptacles furnished as part 
of the equipment are bonded to the equipment. 

250.142 Use of Grounded Circuit Conductor for 
Grounding Equipment. 

(A) Supply-Side Equipment. A grounded circuit 
conductor shall be permitted to ground non-current- 
carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other 
enclosures at any of the following locations: 

(1) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the ac 
service-disconnecting means 

(2) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the 
main disconnecting means for separate buildings as 
provided in 250.32(B) 

(3) On the supply side or within the enclosure of the 
main disconnecting means or overcurrent devices of a 
separately derived system where permitted by 
250.30(A)(1) 

(B) Load-Side Equipment Except as permitted in 
250.30(A)(1) and 250.32(B) nxception, a grounded 
circuit conductor shall not be used for grounding non- 
current-carrying metal parts of equipment on the load side 
of the service disconnecting means or on the load side of 
a separately derived system disconnecting means or the 
overcurrent devices for a separately derived system not 
having a main disconnecting means. 



70-126 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.148 



Exception No. 1: The frames of ranges, wall-mounted 
ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, and clothes dryers 
under the conditions permitted for existing installations 
by 250.140 shall be permitted to be connected to the 
grounded circuit conductor. 

Exception No. 2: It shall be permissible to ground meter 
enclosures by connection to the grounded circuit 
conductor on the load side of the service disconnect 
where all of the following conditions apply: 

(1) No service ground-fault protection is installed. 

(2) All meter enclosures are located immediately adjacent 
to the service disconnecting means. 

(3) The size of the grounded circuit conductor is not 
smaller than the size specified in Table 250.122 for 
equipment grounding conductors. 

Exception No. 3: Direct-current systems shall be 
permitted to be grounded on the load side of the 
disconnecting means or overcurrent device in accordance 
with 250.164. 

Exception No. 4: Electrode-type boilers operating at over 
600 volts shall be grounded as required in 490.72(E)(1) 
and 490.74. 

250.144 Multiple Circuit Connections. Where 
equipment is grounded and is supplied by separate 
connection to more than one circuit or grounded premises 
wiring system, an equipment grounding conductor 
termination shall be provided for each such connection as 
specified in 250.134 and 250.138. 

250.146 Connecting Receptacle Grounding Terminal 
to Box. An equipment bonding jumper shall be used to 
connect the grounding terminal of a grounding-type 
receptacle to a grounded box unless grounded as in 
250.146(A) through (D). The equipment bonding jumper 
shall be sized in accordance with Table 250.122 based 
on the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the 
circuit conductors. 

(A) Surface-Mounted Box. Where the box is mounted on 
the surface, direct metal-to -metal contact between the 
device yoke and the box or a contact yoke or device that 
comphes with 250.146(B) shall be permitted to ground 
the receptacle to the box. At least one of the insulating 
washers shall be removed from receptacles that do not 
have a contact yoke or device that complies with 
250.146(B) to ensure direct metal-to-metal contact. This 
provision shall not apply to cover-mounted receptacles 
unless the box and cover combination are listed as 
providing satisfactory ground continuity between the box 
and the receptacle. A listed exposed work cover shall be 
permitted to be the grounding and bonding means when 
(1) the device is attached to the cover with at least two 
fasteners that are permanent (such as a rivet) or have a 



thread locking or screw or nul locking means and (2) 
when the cover mounting holes are located on a flat non- 
raised portion of the cover. 

(B) Contact Devices or Yokes. Contact devices or 
yokes designed and listed as self-grounding shall be 
permitted in conjunction with the supporting screws to 
establish the grounding circuit between the device yoke 
and flush-type boxes. 

(C) Floor Boxes. Floor boxes designed for and listed as 
providing satisfactory ground continuity between the box 
and the device shall be permitted. 

(D) Isolated Receptacles. Where installed for the 
reduction of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference) 
on the grounding circuit, a receptacle in which the 
grounding terminal is purposely insulated from the 
receptacle mounting means shall be permitted. The 
receptacle grounding terminal shall be connected to an 
insulated equipment grounding conductor run with the 
circuit conductors. This equipment grounding conductor 
shall be permitted to pass through one or more panelboards 
without a connection to the panelboard grounding terminal 
bar as permitted in 408.40, Exception, so as to terminate 
within the same building or structure directly at an 
equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable 
derived system or service. Where installed in accordance 
with the provisions of this section, this equipment 
grounding conductor shall also be permitted to pass 
through boxes, wireways, or other enclosures without being 
connected to such enclosures. 

Informational Note: Use of an isolated equipment 
grounding conductor does not relieve the requirement 
for grounding the raceway system and outlet box. 

250.148 Continuity and Attachment of Equipment 
Grounding Conductors to Boxes. Where circuit 
conductors are spliced within a box, or terminated on 
equipment within or supported by a box, any equipment 
grounding conductor(s) associated with those circuit 
conductors shall be connected within the box or to the box 
with devices suitable for the use in accordance with 
250.148(A) through (E). 

Exception: The equipment grounding conductor permitted 
in 250.146(D) shall not be required to be connected to the 
other equipment grounding conductors or to the box. 

(A) Connections. Connections and splices shall be made 
in accordance with 110.14(B) except that insulation shall 
not be required. 

(B) Grounding Continuity. The arrangement of grounding 
connections shall be such that the disconnection or the 
removal of a receptacle, luminaire, or other device fed from 
the box does not interfere with or interrupt the grounding 
continuity. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-127 



250.160 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



(C) Metal Boxes. A connection shall be made between the 
one or more equipment grounding conductors and a metal 
box by means of a grounding screw that shall be used for no 
other purpose, equipment listed for grounding, or a listed 
grounding device. 

(D) Nonmetallic Boxes. One or more equipment grounding 
conductors brought into a nonmetallic outlet box shall be 
arranged such that a connection can be made to any fitting or 
device in that box requiring grounding. 

(E) Solder. Connections depending solely on solder shall not 
be used. 

VIII. Direct-Current Systems 

250.160 General. Direct-current systems shall comply with 
Part VIII and other sections of Article 250 not specifically 
intended for ac systems. 

250.162 Direct-Current Circuits and Systems to Be 
Grounded. Direct-current circuits and systems shall be 
grounded as provided for in 250.162(A) and (B). 

(A) Two-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. A 2-wire, dc 
system supplying premises wiring and operating at greater 
than 50 volts but not greater than 300 vohs shall be 
grounded. 

Exception No. 1: A system equipped with a ground detector 
and supplying only industrial equipment in limited areas 
shall not be required to be grounded. 

Exception No. 2: A rectifier-derived dc system supplied fi^om 
an ac system complying with 250.20 shall not be required to 
be grounded. 

Exception No. 3: Direct-current fire alarm circuits having a 
maximum current of 0.030 ampere as specified in Article 
760, Part III shall not be required to be grounded. 

(B) Three-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. The neutral 
conductor of all 3 -wire, dc systems supplying premises 
wiring shall be grounded. 

250.164 Point of Connection for Direct-Current Systems. 

(A) Off-Premises Source. Direct-current systems to be 
grounded and supplied from an off-premises source shall 
have the grounding connection made at one or more supply 
stations. A grounding connection shall not be made at 
individual services or at any point on the premises wiring. 

(B) On-Premises Source. Where the dc system source is 
located on the premises, a grounding connection shall be 
made at one of the following: 

(1) The source 

(2) The first system disconnection means or overcurrent 
device 

(3) By other means that accomplish equivalent system 
protection and that utilize equipment listed and 
identified for the use 



250.166 Size of the Direct-Current Grounding Electrode 
Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode conductor 
for a dc system shall be as specified in 250.166(A) and (B), 
except as permitted by 250.166(C) through (E). 

(A) Not Smaller Than the Neutral Conductor. Where the 
dc system consists of a 3-wire balancer set or a balancer 
winding with overcurrent protection as provided in 
445.12(D), the grounding electrode conductor shall not be 
smaller than the neutral conductor and not smaller than 8 
AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum. 

(B) Not Smaller Than the Largest Conductor. Where the 
dc system is other than as in 250.166(A), the grounding 
electrode conductor shall not be smaller than the largest 
conductor supplied by the system, and not smaller than 8 
AWG copper or 6 AWG aluminum, 

(C) Connected to Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrodes. Where 
connected to rod, pipe, or plate electrodes as in 250.52(A)(5) 
or (A)(7), that portion of the grounding electrode conductor 
that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode shall 
not be required to be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 
AWG aluminum wire. 

(D) Connected to a Concrete-Encased Electrode. Where 
connected to a concrete-encased electrode as in 250.52(A)(3), 
that portion of the grounding electrode conductor that is the 
sole connection to the grounding electrode shall not be 
required to be larger than 4 AWG copper wire. 

(E) Connected to a Ground Ring. Where connected to a 
ground ring as in 250.52(A)(4), that portion of the grounding 
electrode conductor that is the sole connection to the 
grounding electrode shall not be required to be larger than 
the conductor used for the ground ring. 

250.168 Direct-Current System Bonding Jumper. For 
direct-current systems that are to be grounded, an unspliced 
bonding jumper shall be used to connect the equipment 
grounding conductor(s) to the grounded conductor at the 
source or the first system disconnecting means where the 
system is grounded. The size of the bonding jumper shall not 
be smaller than the system grounding electrode conductor 
specified in 250.166 and shall comply with the provisions of 
250.28(A), (B), and (C). 

250.169 Ungrounded Direct-Current Separately 
Derived Systems. Except as otherwise permitted in 250.34 
for portable and vehicle-mounted generators, an ungrounded 
dc separately derived system supplied fi-om a stand-alone 
power source (such as an engine-generator set) shall have a 
grounding electrode conductor connected to an electrode that 
complies with Part III of this article to provide for grounding 
of metal enclosures, raceways, cables, and exposed non- 
current-carrying metal parts of equipment. The grounding 
electrode conductor connection shall be to the metal 
enclosure at any point on the separately derived system fi*om 
the source to the first system disconnecting means or 
overcurrent device, or it shall be made at the source of a 
separately derived system that has no disconnecting means 
or overcurrent devices. 



70-128 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



250.184 



The size of the grounding electrode conductor shall be 
in accordance with 250. 166. 

IX. Instruments, Meters, and Relays 

250.170 Instrument Transformer Circuits. Secondary 
circuits of current and potential instrument transformers 
shall be grounded where the primary windings are 
connected to circuits of 300 volts or more to ground and, 
where on switchboards, shall be grounded irrespective of 
voltage. 

Exception No. 1: Circuits where the primary windings 
are connected to circuits of less than 1000 volts with no 
live parts or wiring exposed or accessible to other than 
qualified persons. 

Exception No, 2: Current transformer secondaries 
connected in a three-phase delta configuration shall not 
be required to be grounded. 

250.172 Instrument Transformer Cases. Cases or 
frames of instrument transformers shall be connected to 
the equipment grounding conductor where accessible to 
other than qualified persons. 

Exception: Cases or frames of current transformers, the 
primaries of which are not over 150 volts to ground and 
that are used exclusively to supply current to meters. 

250.174 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays 
Operating at Less Tiian 1000 Volts. Instruments, 
meters, and relays operating with windings or working 
parts at less than 1000 volts shall be connected to the 
equipment grounding conductor as specified in 
250.174(A), (B), or (C). 

(A) Not on Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and 
relays not located on switchboards, operating with 
windings or working parts at 300 volts or more to ground, 
and accessible to other than qualified persons, shall have 
the cases and other exposed metal parts connected to the 
equipment grounding conductor. 

(B) On Dead-Front Switchboards. Instruments, meters, 
and relays (whether operated from current and potential 
transformers or connected directly in the circuit) on 
switchboards having no live parts on the front of the 
panels shall have the cases connected to the equipment 
grounding conductor. 

(C) On Live-Front Switchboards. Instruments, meters, 
and relays (whether operated from current and potential 
transformers or connected directly in the circuit) on 
switchboards having exposed live parts on the front of 
panels shall not have their cases connected to the 
equipment grounding conductor. Mats of insulating 
rubber or other suitable floor insulation shall be provided 
for the operator where the voltage to ground exceeds 150. 



250.176 Cases of Instruments, Meters, and Relays — 
Operating Voltage 1 kV and Over. Where instruments, 
meters, and relays have current-carrying parts of 1 kV and 
over to ground, they shall be isolated by elevation or 
protected by suitable barriers, grounded metal, or 
insulating covers or guards. Their cases shall not be 
connected to the equipment grounding conductor. 

Exception: Cases of electrostatic ground detectors where 
the internal ground segments of the instrument are 
connected to the instrument case and grounded and the 
ground detector is isolated by elevation. 

250.178 Instrument Equipment Grounding Conductor. 

The equipment grounding conductor for secondary circuits 
of instrument transformers and for instrument cases shall 
not be smaller than 12 AWG copper or 10 AWG aluminum. 
Cases of instrument transformers, instruments, meters, and 
relays that are mounted directly on grounded metal surfaces 
of enclosures or grounded metal switchboard panels shall be 
considered to be grounded, and no additional equipment 
grounding conductor shall be required. 

X. Grounding of Systems and Circuits of over 1 kV 

250.180 General. Where systems over 1 kV are 

grounded, they shall comply with all applicable 
provisions of the preceding sections of this article and 
with 250.182 through 250.190, which supplement and 
modify the preceding sections. 

250.182 Derived Neutral Systems. A system neutral 
point derived from a grounding transformer shall be 
permitted to be used for grounding systems over 1 kV. 

250.184 Solidly Grounded Neutral Systems. Solidly 
grounded neutral systems shall be permitted to be either 
single point grounded or multigrounded neutral. 

(A) Neutral Conductor. 

(1) Insulation Level. The minimum insulation level for 
neutral conductors of soHdly grounded systems shall be 
600 volts. 

Exception No. 1: Bare copper conductors shall be 
permitted to be used for the neutral conductor of the 
following: 

(1) Service-entrance conductors 

(2) Service laterals 

(3) Direct-buried portions of feeders. 

Exception No. 2: Bare conductors shall be permitted for the 
neutral conductor of overhead portions installed outdoors. 

Exception No. 3: The grounded neutral conductor shall 
be permitted to be a bare conductor if isolated from phase 
conductors and protected from physical damage. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-129 



250.186 



ARTICLE 250 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 



Informational Note: See 225.4 for conductor covering 
where within 3.0 m (10 ft) of any building or other 
stRicture. 

(2) Ampacity. The neutral conductor shall be of sufficient 
ampacity for the load imposed on the conductor but not less 
than 33 Vs percent of the ampacity of the phase conductors. 

Exception: In industrial and commercial premises under 
engineering supervision, it shall be permissible to size the 
ampacity of the neutral conductor to not less than 20 
percent of the ampacity of the phase conductor. 

(B) Single-Point Grounded Neutral System. Where a 
single -point grounded neutral system is used, the following 
shall apply: 

(1) A single-point grounded neutral system shall be 
permitted to be supplied from (a) or (b): 

a. A separately derived system 

b. A multigrounded neutral system with an 
equipment grounding conductor connected to the 
multigrounded neutral conductor at the source of 
the single-point grounded neutral system 

(2) A grounding electrode shall be provided for the system. 

(3) A grounding electrode conductor shall connect the 
grounding electrode to the system neutral conductor. 

(4) A bonding jumper shall connect the equipment 
grounding conductor to the grounding electrode 
conductor. 

(5) An equipment grounding conductor shall be provided 
to each building, structure, and equipment enclosure. 

(6) A neutral conductor shall only be required where 
phase-to-neutral loads are supplied. 

(7) The neutral conductor, where provided, shall be 
insulated and isolated fi-om earth except at one location. 

(8) An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with 
the phase conductors and shall comply with (a), (b), 
and (c): 

a. Shall not carry continuous load 

b. May be bare or insulated 

c. Shall have sufficient ampacity for fault current duty 

(C) Multigrounded Neutral Systems. Where a 
multigrounded neutral system is used, the following shall 
apply: 

(1) The neutral conductor of a solidly grounded neutral 
system shall be permitted to be grounded at more than 
one point. Grounding shall be permitted at one or more 
of the following locations: 

a. Transformers supplying conductors to a building 
or other structure 

b. Underground circuits where the neutral conductor 
is exposed 

c. Overhead circuits installed outdoors 



(2) The multigrounded neutral conductor shall be 
grounded at each transformer and at other additional 
locations by connection to a grounding electrode. 

(3) At least one grounding electrode shall be installed and 
connected to the multigrounded neutral conductor 
every400m(1300ft). 

(4) The maximum distance between any two adjacent 
electrodes shall not be more than 400 m (1300 ft). 

(5) In a multigrounded shielded cable system, the 
shielding shall be grounded at each cable joint that is 
exposed to personnel contact. 

250.186 Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. 

Impedance grounded neutral systems in which a grounding 
impedance, usually a resistor, hmits the ground-fault 
current shall be permitted where all of the following 
conditions are met: 

(1) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure 
that only qualified persons service the installation. 

(2) Ground detectors are installed on the system. 

(3) Line-to-neutral loads are not served. 

Impedance grounded neutral systems shall comply with the 
provisions of 250.186(A) through (D). 

(A) Location. The grounding impedance shall be inserted 
in the grounding electrode conductor between the 
grounding electrode of the supply system and the neutral 
point of the supply transformer or generator. 

(B) Identified and Insulated. The neutral conductor of an 
impedance grounded neutral system shall be identified, as 
well as fully insulated with the same insulation as the phase 
conductors. 

(C) System Neutral Conductor Connection. The system 
neutral conductor shall not be connected to ground, except 
through the neutral grounding impedance. 

(D) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment 
grounding conductors shall be permitted to be bare and 
shall be electrically connected to the ground bus and 
grounding electrode conductor. 

250.188 Grounding of Systems Supplying Portable or 
Mobile Equipment. Systems supplying portable or 
mobile Equipment over 1 kV, other than substations 
installed on a temporary basis, shall comply with 
250.188(A) through (F). 

(A) Portable or Mobile Equipment. Portable or mobile 
^uipment over 1 kV shall be supplied from a system having 
its neutral conductor grounded through an impedance. Where 
a delta-connected system over 1 kV is used to supply 
portable or mobile equipment, a system neutral point and 
associated neutral conductor shall be derived. 



70-130 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 280 - SURGE ARRESTERS, OVER 1 kV 



280.4 



(B) Exposed Non-Current-Carrying Metal Parts. 
Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable or 
mobile equipment shall be connected by an equipment 
grounding conductor to the point at which the system 
neutral impedance is grounded. 

(C) Ground-Fault Current The voltage developed 
between the portable or mobile equipment frame and 
ground by the flow of maximum ground-fault current 
shall not exceed 100 volts. 

(D) Ground-Fault Detection and Relaying. Ground- 
fauh detection and relaying shall be provided to 
automatically de-energize any component of a system 
over 1 kV that has developed a ground fauU. The 
continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be 
continuously monitored so as to de-energize automatically 
the circuit of the system over I kV to the portable or 
mobile equipment upon loss of continuity of the 
equipment grounding conductor. 

(E) Isolation. The grounding electrode to which the 
portable or mobile equipment system neutral impedance 
is connected shall be isolated from and separated in the 
ground by at least 6.0 m (20 ft) from any other system or 
equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no 
direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such 
as buried pipe and fence, and so forth. 

(F) Trailing Cable and Couplers. Trailing cable and 
couplers of systems over I kV for interconnection of 
portable or mobile equipment shall meet the requirements 
of Part III of Article 400 for cables and 490.55 for couplers, 

250.190 Grounding of Equipment. 

(A) Equipment Grounding. All non-current-carrying 
metal parts of fixed, portable, and mobile equipment and 
associated fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting 
structures shall be grounded. 

Exception: Where isolated from ground and located such 
(hat any person in contact with ground cannoi contact 
such metal parts when the equipment is energized, the 
metal parts shall not be required to be grounded. 

Informational Note: See 250.110, Exception No. 2, for 
pole-mounted distribution apparatus. 



(1) General. Equipmeni groundiny: conductors that are 
jiol an integral part of a cable assembly shall not be 
smaller than 6 AWG copper or 4 AWG aluminum. 



(B) Grounding Electrode Conduetor. If a grounding 
electrode conductor connects non-current -cany ing metal 
parts to ground, the grounding electrode conductor shall 
be sized in accordance with Table 250.66, based on the 
size of the largest ungrounded service, feeder, or branch- 
circuit conductors supplying the equipment. The 
grounding electrode conductor shall not be smaller than 6 
AWG copper or 4 AWG aluminum. 

(C) Equipment Grounding Conductor. Equipinent 
grounding conductors shall comply with 250.190(C)(1) 
through (C)(3). 



(2) Shielded Cables. The metallic insulation shield 
encircling the current carrying conductors shall be 
{lermitted to be used as an equipment grounding 
Conductor, if it is rated for clearing time of ground fault 
current protective device operation without damaging 
the metallic shield. The metallic tape insulation shield 
and drain wire insulation shield shall not be used as an 
equipment grounding conductor for solidly grounded 
systems. 

(3) Sizing. Fquipmeni grounding conductors shall be 
sized in accordance with Table 250,122 based on the 
current rating of the fuse or the overcurrent setting of the 
protective relay. 

Informational Note: tThe overcurrent rating for a circuit 
breaker is tht; combination of the current iransformer 
ratio and the current pickup setting of the protective 
relay. 

250.191 Grounding System at Allernating-CurrenI 

Substations. For ac substations^ the grounding system 
shall be in accordance with Part 111 of Article 250. 

Informational Note: For further infbnnation on outdoor 
ac substation grounding, see ANSi/IEEE 80-2000, 
IEEE Guide for Sajety in AC Substation Grounding, 



ARTICLE 280 

Surge Arresters, Over 1 kV 



I. General 

280.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, 
installation requirements, and connection requirements 
for surge arresters installed on premises wiring systems 
over 1 kV. 

280.2 Uses Not Permitted. A surge arrester shall not be 
installed where the rating of the surge arrester is less 
than the maximum continuous phase-to-ground power 
frequency voltage available at the point of application. 

280.3 Number Required. Where used at a point on a 
circuit, a surge arrester shall be connected to each 
ungrounded conductor. A single installation of such 
surge arresters shall be permitted to protect a number of 
interconnected circuits, provided that no circuit is 
exposed to surges while disconnected from the surge 
arresters. 

280.4 Surge Arrester Selection. The surge arresters 
shall comply with 280.4(A) and (B). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-131 



280.11 



ARTICLE 280 - SURGE ARRESTERS, OVER 1 kV 



(A) Rating. The rating of a surge arrester shall be equal to 
or greater than the maximum continuous operating 
voltage available at the point of application. 

(1) Solidly Grounded Systems. The maximum 
continuous operating voltage shall be the phase-to-ground 
voltage of the system. 

(2) Impedance or Ungrounded System. The maximum 
continuous operating voltage shall be the phase-to-phase 
voltage of the system. 

(B) Silicon Carbide Types. The rating of a silicon 
carbide-type surge arrester shall be not less than 125 
percent of the rating specified in 280.4(A). 

Informational Note No. 1: For further information 
on surge arresters, see ANSI/IEEE C62. 11-2005, 
Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for 
Alternating-Current Power Circuits (>I kV); and 
ANSI/IEEE C62.22-1997, Guide for the 
Application of Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for 
Alternating-Current Systems. 

Informational Note No. 2: The selection of a 
properly rated metal oxide arrester is based on 
considerations of maximum continuous operating 
voltage and the magnitude and duration of 
overvoltages at the arrester location as affected by 
phase-to-ground faults, system grounding 
techniques, switching surges, and other causes. 
See the manufacturer's application rules for 
selection of the specific arrester to be used at a 
particular location. 



II. Installation 

280.11 Location, Surge arresters shall be permitted to be 
located indoors or outdoors. Surge arresters shall be made 
inaccessible to unqualified persons, unless listed for 
installation in accessible locations. 

280.12 Routing of Surge Arrester Grounding 
Conductors. The conductor used to connect the surge 
arrester to line, bus, or equipment and to a grounding 
conductor connection point as provided in 280.21 shall 
not be any longer than necessary and shall avoid 
unnecessary bends. 

III. Connecting Surge Arresters 

280,21 Connection. The arrester shall be connected to 
one of the following: 

(1) Grounded service conductor 

(2) Grounding electrode conductor 

(3) Grounding electrode for the service 

(4) Equipment grounding terminal in the service equipment 



280.23 Surge-Arrester Conductors. The conductor 
between the surge arrester and the line and the surge 
arrester and the grounding connection shall not be 
smaller than 6 AWG copper or aluminum. 

280.24 Interconnections. The surg0 arrester protecting 
a transformer that supplies a secondary distribution 
system shall be interconnected as specified in 
280.24(A), (B), or (C). 

(A) Metallic Interconnections. A metallic 
interconnection shall be made to the secondary grounded 
circuit conductor or the secondary circuit grounding 
jelccirode conductor provided that, in addition to the 
direct grounding connection at the surge arrester, the 
following occurs: 

(1) Additional Grounding Connection. The grounded 
conductor of the secondary has elsewhere a grounding 
connection to a continuous metal underground water 
piping system. In urban water-pipe areas where there are 
at least four water-pipe connections on the neutral 
conductor and not fewer than four such connections in 
each mile of neutral conductor, the metallic 
interconnection shall be permitted to be made to the 
secondary neutral conductor with omission of the direct 
grounding connection at the surge arrester. 

(2) Multigrounded Neutral System Connection. The 

grounded conductor of the secondary system is a part of 
a multigrounded neutral system or static wire of which 
the primary neutral conductor or static wire has at least 
four grounding connections in each mile of line in 
addition to a grounding connection at each service. 

(B) Through Spark Gap or Device. Where the surge 
arrester grounding electrode conductor is not connected 
as in 280.24(A), or where the secondary is not grounded 
as in 280.24(A) but is otherwise grounded as in 250.52, 
an interconnection shall be made through a spark gap or 
listed device as required by 280.24(B)(1) or (B)(2). 

(1) Ungrounded or Unigrounded Primary System, 

For ungrounded or unigrounded primary systems, the 
spark gap or listed device shall have a 60-Hz breakdown 
voltage of at least twice the primary circuit voltage but 
not necessarily more than 10 kV, and there shall be at 
least one other ground on the grounded conductor of the 
secondary that is not less than 6.0 m (20 ft) distant from 
the surge-arrester grounding electrode. 

(2) Multigrounded Neutral Primary System. For 

multigrounded neutral primary systems, the spark gap or 
listed device shall have a 60-Hz breakdown of not more 
than 3 kV, and there shall be at least one other ground 
on the grounded conductor of the secondary that is not 
less than 6.0 m (20 ft) distant from the surge-arrester 
grounding electrode. 



70-132 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 285 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs), 1 Kv OR LESS 



285.24 



(C) By Special Permission. An interconnection of the 
surge-arrester ground and the secondary neutral 
conductor, other than as provided in 280.24(A) or (B), 
shall be permitted to be made only by special permission. 

280.25 Grounding Electrode Conductor Connections 
and Enclosures. Except as indicated in this article, surge- 
arrester grounding electrode conductor connections shall 
be made as specified in Article 250, Parts III and X. 
Grounding electrode conductors installed in metal 
enclosures shall comply with 250.64(E). 



ARTICLE 285 

Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), 
1 kV or Less 

L General 

285.1 Scope. This article covers general requirements, 
installation requirements, and connection requirements 
for SPDs [surge arresters and transient voltage surge 
suppressors (TVSSs)] permanently installed on premises 
wiring systems 1 kV or less. 

Informational Note No. 1: Surge arresters less than 1 
kV are also known as Type 1 SPDs. 

Informational Note No. 2: Transient voltage surge 
suppressors (TVSSs) are also known as Type 2 and 
Type 3 SPDs. 

285,3 Uses Not Permitted. An SPD (surge arrester or 
TVSS) device shall not be installed in the following: 

(1) Circuits exceeding 1 kV 

(2) On ungrounded systems, impedance grounded 
systems, or corner grounded delta systems unless 
listed specifically for use on these systems. 

(3) Where the rating of the SPD (surge arrester or 
TVSS) is less than the maximum continuous phase- 
to-ground power frequency voltage available at the 
point of application 

Informational Note: For further information on SPDs 
(TVSSs), see NEMA LS 1-1992, Standard for Low 
Voltage Surge Suppression Devices. The selection of a 
properly rated SPD (TVSS) is based on criteria such as 
maximum continuous operating voltage, the magnitude 
and duration of overvoltages at the suppressor location 
as affected by phase-to-ground faults, system 
grounding techniques, and switching surges. 



285.4 Number Required. Where used at a point on a 
circuit, the SPD (surge arrester or TVSS) shall be 
connected to each ungrounded conductor. 

285.5 Listing. An SPD (surge arrester or TVSS) shall be 
a listed device. 

285.6 Short-Circuit Current Rating. The SPD (surge 
arrester or TVSS) shall be marked with a short-circuit 
current rating and shall not be installed at a point on the 
system where the available fault current is in excess of 
that rating. This marking requirement shall not apply to 
receptacles. 

II. Installation 

285.11 Location. SPDs (surge arresters or TVSSs) shall 
be permitted to be located indoors or outdoors and shall 
be made inaccessible to unqualified persons, unless listed 
for installation in accessible locations. 

285.12 Routing of Connections. The conductors used to 
connect the SPD (surge arrester or TVSS) to the line or 
bus and to ground shall not be any longer than necessary 
and shall avoid unnecessary bends. 

III. Connecting SFDs 

285.21 Connection. Where an SPD (surge arrester or 
TVSS) device is installed, it shall comply with 285.23 
through 285.28. 

285.23 Type 1 SPDs (Surge Arresters). Type 1 SPDs 
shall be installed in accordance with 285.23(A) and (B). 

(A) Installation. Type 1 SPDs (surge arresters) shall be 
installed as follows: 

(1) Type 1 SPDs (surge arresters) shall be permitted to 
be connected to the supply side of the service 
disconnect as permitted in 230.82(4) or 

(2) Type 1 SPDs (surge arresters) shall be permitted to 
be connected as specified in 285.24, 

(B) At the Service. When installed at services, Type I 
SPDii shall be connected to one of the following: 

(1) Grounded service conductor 

(2) Grounding electrode conductor 

(3) Grounding electrode for the service 

(4) Equipment grounding terminal in the service 
equipment 

285.24 Type 2 SPDs (TVSSs). Type 2 SPDs (TVSSs) shall 
be installed in accordance with 285.24(A) through (C). 

(A) Service-Supplied Building or Structure. Type 2 
SPDs (TVSSs) shall be connected anywhere on the load 
side of a service disconnect overcurrent device required in 
230.91, unless installed in accordance with 230.82(8). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-133 



285.25 



ARTICLE 285 - SURGE ARRESTERS, OVER 1 Kv OR LESS 



(B) Feeder-Supplied Building or Structure. Type 2 
SPDs (TVSSs) shall be connected at the building or 
structure anywhere on the load side of the first 
overcurrent device at the building or structure. 

(C) Separately Derived System. The SPD (TVSS) 
shall be connected on the load side of the first 
overcurrent device in a separately derived system. 

285.25 Type 3 SPDs. Type 3 SPDs (TVSSs) shall be 
permitted to be installed on the load side of branch- 
circuit overcurrent protection up to the equipment 
served. If included in the manufacturer's instruetions. 
the Type 3 SPD connection shall be a minimum 10 m 
(30 ft) of conductor distance from the service or 
separately derived system disconnect. 



285.26 Conductor Size. Line and grounding conductors shall 
not be smaller than 14 AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum. 

285.27 Connection Between Conductors. An SPD (surge 
arrester or TVSS) shall be permitted to be connected between 
any two conductors — ungrounded conductor(s), grounded 
conductor, equipment grounding conductor, or grounding 
electrode conductor. The grounded conductor and the 
equipment grounding conductor shall be interconnected only 
by the normal operation of the SPD (surge arrester or TVSS) 
during a surge. 



285.28 Grounding Electrode Conductor Connections 

and Enclosures. Except as indicated in this article, SPD 
grounding connections shall be made as specified in 
Article 250, Part III. Grounding electrode conductors 
installed in metal enclosures shall comply with 250.64(E). 



70-134 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


^ 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 312 - CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET 

ENCLOSURES 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 314" OUTLET. 1 
BODIES; FITT 


DEVICE, PULL, Ah 
NGS; AND HAND 


ID JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT 
HOLE ENCLOSURES 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-134.1 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 320 "ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as annended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 322 - FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


^ 




Adopt Entire Article as annended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICL 


E 324- FLAT CONDUCTC 


>R CABLE: TYPE FCC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 326 -INT 


EGRATED GAS SPACER CABLE: TYPE 


GS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.2 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 328- 


■MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE: TYPE MV 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ART 


ICLE 33 


0~ME1 


FAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFfV! 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 332 - MINERAL-INSULAl 


FED, METAL-SHEATHED CAB 


LE: TYPE Ml 






Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 334 -N 


0NME1 


rALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: 


TYPES NM, N,( 


CAN! 


ONMJ 


% 
» 






Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 








X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 






X 


X 


















Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 


334.10 (Note) 






X 


X 


















334.10(A) 


























334.10(B) 


























334.12 (Note) 






X 


X 



















201 3 California Electrical Code 



70-1343 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 336 - POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 3 


38- SERVICE-ENTRANCE < 


CABLE: 


TYPES SE AND USE 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 340 -UNC 


lERGRi 


3UNDF 


-EEDE 


RANC 


» BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE: TYPE UF 






Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 342- 


INTER 


MEDIATE METAL CONDUIT 


: TYPE IP 


flC 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.4 



2013 Caliibmia Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 












ARTICLE 344 - RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


ss 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTI 


CLE 341 


S-FLE. 


XIBLE META 


L CONDUIT: TYPE FMC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


ss 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 35C 


-LIQL 


IDTIGH 


T FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: TYP 


ELFMC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 352 ~RI( 


310 NOI 


^METALLIC 1 


WETAL CONDUIT: TYPE RNC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-134.5 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 353 


- HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT: 
TYPE HPDE CONDUIT 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(annended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only tliose sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 354 - NONMETALLIC UNDERGROUND CONDUIT WITH 
CONDUCTORS: TYPE NUCC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as annended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 355 -F 


lEINFO 


RCEDTHERMOSETl 


riNG RESIN CONDUIT: 1 


rYPE RTRC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 
















X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 356 -LIQUIDT 


GHTF 


.EXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT: TYPE LFNC 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.6 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICL 


E358- 


ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: 


TYPE EMT 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as annended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ART 


ICLE 360 - FLEXIBLE METAL TUBING: TYPE FMT 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 


362 -E 


LECTRI 


CAL NONMETALLIC TUBING: TYPE ENT 










Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 































ARTICLE 3 


i66- AUXILIARY GUTTERS 














Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-134.7 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 368 -BUSWAYS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 370 -CABLEBUS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 372 - CELLULAR CONCRETE FLOOR RACEWAYS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 374 ™ CELLULAR METAL FLOOR RACEWAYS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.8 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 





ARTICLE 376- 


META 


LWIREWAYS 














Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFfVf 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X~^ 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 378 - NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 380 - MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


ss 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 































ARTICLE 382- 


-NONMETALLIC EXTENSIONS 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-134.9 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 384 - STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAY 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




-J 

























i 


ARTICLE 386- 


SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFiVI 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 



























ARTICLE 388 - SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS 



Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























ARTICLE 390 


-UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS 












Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.10 



2013 California Electrical Code 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 392 -CABLE TRAYS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 394 - CONCEALED KNOB-AND-TUBE WIRING 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 






X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 






X 




















Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 


394.12 Exception 






X 














































ARTICLE 396 - MESSENGER SUPPORTED WIRING 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 




























ARTICLE 398 - OPEN WIRING ON INSULATORS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


ss/cc 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 


X 




X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























2013 California Electrical Code 



70-134.11 



CHAPTER 3 CALIFORNIA MATRIX ADOPTION TABLES 



ARTICLE 399 - OUTDOOR OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS OVER 600 VOLTS 


Adopting Agency 


BSC 


SFM 


HCD 


DSA 


OSHPD 


DPH 


1 


2 


AC 


SS 


SS/CC 


1 


2 


3 


4 




Adopt Entire Article 






X 


X 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Adopt Entire Article as amended 
(amended sections listed below) 


























Adopt only those sections that are 
listed below 


























Article / Section 





























70-134.12 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.3 



Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials 



ARTICLE 300 

Wiring Methods 

I. Genera! Requirements 
300.1 Scope. 

(A) All Wiring Installations. This article covers wiring 
methods for all wiring installations unless modified by 
other articles. 

(B) Integra! Parts of Equipment. The provisions of this 
article are not intended to apply to the conductors that 
form an integral part of equipment, such as motors, 
controllers, motor control centers, or factory assembled 
control equipment or listed utilization equipment. 

(C) Metric Designators and Trade Sizes. Metric 
designators and trade sizes for conduit, tubing, and 
associated fittings and accessories shall be as designated 
in Table 300.1(C). 



Table 300.1(C) Metric Designators and Trade Sizes 



Metric 
Designator 



Trade 
Size 



12 

16 

21 

27 

35 

41 

53 

63 

78 

91 

103 

129 

155 



1 

VA 
V/i 

2 
IVi 

3 
VA 

4 

5 

6 



Note: The metric designators and trade sizes are for 
identification purposes only and are not actual dimensions. 

300.2 Limitations. 

(A) Voltage. Wiring methods specified in Chapter 3 shall 
be used for 600 volts, nominal, or less where not 
specifically limited in some section of Chapter 3. They 
shall be permitted for over 600 volts, nominal, where 
specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code. 

(B) Temperature. Temperature limitation of conductors 
shall be in accordance with 310.15(A)(3). 



300.3 Conductors. 

(A) Single Conductors. Single conductors specified in 
Table 310.1 04(A) shall only be installed where part of a 
recognized wiring method of Chapter 3. 

Exception: Individual conductors shall be permitted 
where installed as separate overhead conductors in 
accordance with 225.6. 

(B) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of 
the same circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor 
and all equipment grounding conductors and bonding 
conductors shall be contained within the same raceway, 
auxiliary gutter, cable tray, cablebus assembly, trench, 
cable, or cord, unless otherwise permitted in accordance 
with 300.3(B)(1) through (B)(4). 

(1) Paralleled Installations. Conductors shall be 
permitted to be run in parallel in accordance with the 
provisions of 3iO. 10(H>- The requirement to run all 
circuit conductors within the same raceway, auxiliary 
gutter, cable tray, trench, cable, or cord shall apply 
separately to each portion of the paralleled installation, 
and the equipment grounding conductors shall comply 
with the provisions of 250.122. Parallel runs in cable tray 
shall comply with the provisions of 392.20(C). 

Exception: Conductors installed in nonmetallic raceways 
run underground shall be permitted to be arranged as 
isolated phase installations. The raceways shall be 
installed in close proximity, and the conductors shall 
comply with the provisions of 300.20(B). 

(2) Grounding and Bonding Conductors. Equipment 
grounding conductors shall be permitted to be installed 
outside a raceway or cable assembly where in accordance 
with the provisions of 250.130(C) for certain existing 
installations or in accordance with 250.134(B), Exception 
No. 2, for dc circuits. Equipment bonding conductors 
shall be permitted to be installed on the outside of 
raceways in accordance with 250.102(E). 

(3) Nonferrous Wiring Methods. Conductors in wiring 
methods with a nonmetallic or other nonmagnetic sheath, 
where run in different raceways, auxiliary gutters, cable 
trays, trenches, cables, or cords, shall comply with the 
provisions of 300.20(B). Conductors in single-conductor 
Type MI cable with a nonmagnetic sheath shall comply 
with the provisions of 332.31. Conductors of single- 
conductor Type MC cable with a nonmagnetic sheath 
shall comply with the provisions of 330.31, 330.116, and 
300.20(B). 

(4) Enclosures. Where an auxiliary gutter runs between a 
column- width panelboard and a pull box, and the pull box 
includes neutral terminations, the neutral conductors of 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



70-135 



300,4 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



circuits supplied from the panelboard shall be permitted to 
originate in the pull box. 

(C) Conductors of Different Systems. 

(1) 600 Volts, Nominal, or Less. Conductors of ac and 
dc circuits, rated 600 volts, nominal, or less, shall be 
permitted to occupy the same equipment wiring 
enclosure, cable, or raceway. All conductors shall have 
an insulation rating equal to at least the maximum circuit 
voltage applied to any conductor within the enclosure, 
cable, or raceway. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 725.136(A) for Class 2 
and Class 3 circuit conductors. 

Informational Note No. 2: Sua 690.4(B) tor 
photovoltaic source and output circuits. 

(2) Over 600 Volts, Nominal. Conductors of circuits 
rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall not occupy the same 
equipment wiring enclosure, cable, or raceway with 
conductors of circuits rated 600 volts, nominal, or less 
unless otherwise permitted in (C)(2)(a) through 
(C)(2)(e). 

(a) Secondary wiring to electric-discharge lamps of 
1000 volts or less, if insulated for the secondary voltage 
involved, shall be permitted to occupy the same 
luminaire, sign, or outline lighting enclosure as the 
branch-circuit conductors. 

(b) Primary leads of electric-discharge lamp ballasts 
insulated for the primary voltage of the ballast, where 
contained within the individual wiring enclosure, shall be 
permitted to occupy the same luminaire, sign, or outline 
lighting enclosure as the branch-circuit conductors. 

(c) Excitation, control, relay, and ammeter 
conductors used in connection with any individual motor 
or starter shall be permitted to occupy the same 
enclosure as the motor-circuit conductors. 

(d) In motors, switchgear and control assemblies, 
and similar equipment, conductors of different voltage 
ratings shall be permitted. 

(e) In manholes, if the conductors of each system 
are permanently and effectively separated from the 
conductors of the other systems and securely fastened to 
racks, insulators, or other approved supports, conductors 
of different voltage ratings shall be permitted. 

Conductors having nonshielded insulation and 
operating at different voltage levels shall not occupy the 
same enclosure, cable, or raceway. 

300.4 Protection Against Physical Damage. Where 
subject to physical damage, conductors, raceways, and 
cables shall be protected. 



(A) Cables and Raceways Through Wood Members. 

(1) Bored Holes. In both exposed and concealed locations, 
where a cable- or raceway-type wiring method is installed 
through bored holes in joists, rafters, or wood members, 
holes shall be bored so that the edge of the hole is not less 
than 32 mm (1!4 in.) from the nearest edge of the wood 
member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, the 
cable or raceway shall be protected from penetration by 
screws or nails by a steel plate(s) or bushing(s), at least 1 .6 
mm (Vi6 in.) thick, and of appropriate length and width 
installed to cover the area of the wiring. 

Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to 
protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, 
rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. 

Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 
1.6 mm f/i6 in.) thick that provides equal or better 
protection against nail or screw penetration shall be 
permitted. 

(2) Notches In Wood. Where there is no objection because 
of weakening the building structure, in both exposed and 
concealed locations, cables or raceways shall be permitted 
to be laid in notches in wood studs, joists, rafters, or other 
wood members where the cable or raceway at those points 
is protected against nails or screws by a steel plate at least 
1.6 mm (Vi6 in.) thick, and of appropriate length and width, 
installed to cover the area of the wiring. The steel plate 
shall be installed before the building finish is applied. 

Exception No. 1: Steel plates shall not be required to 
protect rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, 
rigid nonmetallic conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. 

Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 
1.6 mm f/i6 in.) thick that provides equal or better 
protection against nail or screw penetration shall be 
permitted. 

(B) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables and Electrical 
Nonmetallic Tubing Through Metal Framing Members. 

(1) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable. In both exposed and 
concealed locations where nonmetallic-sheathed cables 
pass through either factory- or field-punched, cut, or drilled 
slots or holes in metal members, the cable shall be 
protected by listed bushings or listed grommets covering all 
metal edges that are securely fastened in the opening prior 
to installation of the cable. 

(2) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable and Electrical 
Nonmetallic Tubing. Where nails or screws are likely to 
penetrate nonmetallic-sheathed cable or electrical 
nonmetallic tubing, a steel sleeve, steel plate, or steel clip 
not less than 1.6 mm (V]6 in.) in thickness shall be used to 
protect the cable or tubing. 

Exception: A listed and marked steel plate less than 1.6 
mm ( /j^ in.) thick that provides equal or better protection 
against nail or screw penetration shall be permitted. 



70-136 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.5 



(C) Cables Through Spaces Behind Panels Designed to 
Allow Access. Cables or raceway-type wiring methods, 
installed behind panels designed to allow access, shall be 
supported according to their applicable articles. 

(D) Cables and Raceways Parallel to Framing 
Members and Furring Strips. In both exposed and 
concealed locations, where a cable- or raceway-type 
wiring method is installed parallel to framing members, 
such as joists, rafters, or studs, or is installed parallel to 
furring strips, the cable or raceway shall be installed and 
supported so that the nearest outside surface of the cable 
or raceway is not less than 32 mm (VA in.) from the 
nearest edge of the framing member or furring strips 
where nails or screws are likely to penetrate. Where this 
distance cannot be maintained, the cable or raceway shall 
be protected from penetration by nails or screws by a steel 
plate, sleeve, or equivalent at least 1.6 mm (V]6 in.) thick. 

Exception No. J: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent 
shall not be required to protect rigid metal conduit, 
intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or 
electrical metallic tubing. 

Exception No. 2: For concealed work in finished 
buildings, or finished panels for prefabricated buildings 
where such supporting is impracticable, it shall be 
permissible to fish the cables between access points. 

Exception No. 3: A listed and marked steel plate less than 
L6 mm ( li^ in.) thick that provides equal or better protection 
against nail or screw penetration shall be peimitted. 

(E) Cables, Raceways, or Boxes Installed in or Under 
Roof Decking. A cable, raceway, or box, installed in 
exposed or concealed locations under metal-corrugated 
sheet roof decking, shall be installed and supported so 
there is not less than 38 mm (IV2 in.) measured fi*om the 
lowest surface of the roof decking 10 the top of the cable, 
raceway, or box. A cable, raceway, or box shall not be 
installed in concealed locations in mctal*corrugated, sheet 
decking- type roof. 

Informational Note: Roof decking material is often 
repaired or replaced after the initial raceway or cabling 
and roofing installation and may be penetrated by the 
screws or other mechanical devices designed to provide 
"hold down" strength of the waterproof membrane or 
roof insulating material. 

Exception: Rigid metal conduit and intermediate metal 
conduit shall not be required to comply with 300.4(E). 

(F) Cables and Raceways Installed in Shallow 
Grooves. Cable- or raceway-type wiring methods 
installed in a groove, to be covered by wallboard, siding, 
paneling, carpeting, or similar fmish, shall be protected by 
1.6 mm (V16 in.) thick steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent or 
by not less than 32-mm {VA-'m,) free space for the full 
length of the groove in which the cable or raceway is 
installed. 



Exception No. 1: Steel plates, sleeves, or the equivalent 
shall not be required to protect rigid metal conduit, 
intermediate metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or 
electrical metallic tubing. 

Exception No. 2: A listed and marked steel plate less than 
1.6 mm ( /}s in.) thick that provides equal or better 
protection against nail or screw penetration shall be 
permitted. 

(G) Insulated Fittings. Where raceways contain 4 AWG 
or larger insulated circuit conductors, and these 
conductors enter a cabinet, a box, an enclosure, or a 
raceway, the conductors shall be protected by an 
identified fitting providing a smoothly rounded insulating 
surface, unless the conductors are separated from the 
fitting or raceway by idenlifiedj insulating material that is 
securely fastened in place. 

Exception: Where threaded hubs or bosses that are an 
integral part of a cabinet, box, enclosure, or raceway 
provide a smoothly rounded or flared entry for 
conductors. 

Conduit bushings constructed wholly of insulating 
material shall not be used to secure a fitting or raceway. 
The insulating fitting or insulating material shall have a 
temperature rating not less than the insulation temperature 
rating of the installed conductors. 

(H) Structural Joints* A listed expansion/dellection 
fining or other approved means shall be used where a 
raceway crosses a strucUiral joint intended lor expansion^ 
contraction or deflection> used in buildings, bridges^ 
parking garages, or other structures. 

300.5 Underground Installations. 

(A) Minimum Cover Requirements. Direct-buried cable 
or conduit or other raceways shall be installed to meet the 
minimum cover requirements of Table 300.5. 

(B) Wet Locations. The interior of enclosures or 
raceways installed underground shall be considered to be 
a wet location. Insulated conductors and cables installed 
in these enclosures or raceways in underground 
installations shall be listed for use in wet locations and 
shall comply with 310.10(C). Any connections or splices 
in an underground installation shall be approved for wet 
locations. 

(C) Underground Cables Under Buildings. Underground 
cable installed under a building shall be in a raceway. 

Exception No. I: Type Mf Cubic' shall hepermhied under 
a buddmg without imtaUatlon in a raceway where 
embedded hi concrete, filL or other nicLsamy in 
accordance with JS2, 10(6) or in underground runs where 
suitably pnytected against physical damage and corrosive 
comliiions in accotxtauce with 332.10(10). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-137 



300,5 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



Table 300.5 Minimum Cover Requirements, to 600 Volts, Nominal, Burial in Millimeters (Inches) 





Type of Wiring Method 


or Circuit 
















Column 5 












Circuits for 








Column 3 


Column 4 


Control of 








Nonmetallic 


Residential 


Irrigation and 








Raceways 


Branch Circuits 


Landscape 








Listed for 


Rated 120 Volts 


Lighting 








Direct Burial 


or Less with 


Limited to Not 






Column 2 


Without 


GFCI 


More Than 30 




Column 1 


Rigid Metal 


Concrete 


Protection and 


Volts and 




Direct Burial 


Conduit or 


Encasement 


Maximum 


Installed with 




Cables or 


Intermediate 


or Other 


Overcurrent 


Type UF or in 




Conductors 


Metal 


Approved 


Protection of 20 


Other Identified 






Conduit 


Raceways 


Amperes 


Cable or 
Raceway 


Location of Wiring Method or 












Circuit 


mm in. 


mm in. 


mm in. 


mm in. 


mm in. 


All locations not specified below 


600 24 


150 6 


450 18 


300 12 


150 6 


In trench below 50-mm (2-in.) thick 


450 18 


150 6 


300 12 


150 6 


150 6 


concrete or equivalent 












Under a building 



















(in raceway or 






(in raceway or 


(in raceway or 




Type MC or 






Ty-pe MC or 


Type MC or 




Type MI cable 






Type MI cable 


Type MI cable 




identified for 






identified for 


identified for 




direct burial) 






direct burial) 


direct burial] 


Under minimum of 102-mm (4-in,) 


450 18 


100 4 


100 4 


150 6 


150 6 


thick concrete exterior slab with 












no vehicular traffic and the slab 








(direct burial) 


(direct burial) 


extending not less than 152 mm 








100 4 


100 4 


(6 in.) beyond the underground 












installation 








(in raceway) 


(in raceway) 


Under streets, highways, roads. 


600 24 


600 24 


600 24 


600 24 


600 24 


alleys, driveways, and parking 












lots 












One- and two- family dwelling 


450 18 


450 18 


450 18 


300 12 


450 18 


driveways and outdoor parking 












areas, and used only for dwelling- 












related purposes 












In or under airport runways, 


450 18 


450 18 


450 18 


450 18 


450 18 


including adjacent areas where 












trespassing prohibited 













Notes: 

1. Cover is defined as the shortest distance in millimeters (inches) measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried 
conductor, cable, conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover. 

2. Raceways approved for burial only where concrete encased shall require concrete envelope not less than 50 mm (2 in.) thick. 

3. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required. 

4. Where one of the wiring method types listed in Columns 1-3 is used for one of the circuit types in Columns 4 and 5, the shallowest 
depth of burial shall be permitted, 

5. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in metal or nonmetallic 
raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete extending down to rock. 



70-138 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.6 



Exception No. 2: Type MC Cable listed for direct burial 
or concrete encasement shall he permitted under a 
building without installation in a raceway in accordance 
with 3 30 J 0(A)(5) and in wet locations in accordance 
with 330. 10(1 1}, 

(D) Protection from Damage. Direct-buried conductors 
and cables shall be protected from damage in accordance 
with 300.5(D)(1) through (D)(4). 

(1) Emerging from Grade. Direct-buried conductors and 
cables emerging from grade and specified in columns 1 and 
4 of Table 300.5 shall be protected by enclosures or 
raceways extending from the minimum cover distance 
below grade required by 300.5(A) to a point at least 2.5 m 
(8 ft) above finished grade. In no case shall the protection be 
required to exceed 450 mm (18 in.) below finished grade. 

(2) Conductors Entering Buildings. Conductors entering 
a building shall be protected to the point of entrance. 

(3) Service Conductors. Underground service conductors 
that are not encased in concrete and that are buried 450 mm 
(18 in.) or more below grade shall have their location 
identified by a warning ribbon that is placed in the trench at 
least 300 mm (12 in.) above the underground installation. 

(4) Enclosure or Raceway Damage. Where the enclosure 
or raceway is subject to physical damage, the conductors 
shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal 
conduit, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, or equivalent. 

(E) Splices and Taps. Direct-buried conductors or cables 
shall be permitted to be spliced or tapped without the use 
of splice boxes. The splices or taps shall be made in 
accordance with 110.1 4(B). 

(F) Backfill. Backfill that contains large rocks, paving 
materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or 
corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation 
where materials may damage raceways, cables, or other 
substructures or prevent adequate compaction of fill or 
contribute to corrosion of raceways, cables, or other 
substructures. 

Where necessary to prevent physical damage to the 
raceway or cable, protection shall be provided in the form 
of granular or selected material, suitable running boards, 
suitable sleeves, or other approved means. 

(G) Raceway Seals. Conduits or raceways through which 
moisture may contact five parts shall be sealed or plugged 
at either or both ends. 

Informational Note: Presence of hazardous gases or 
vapors may also necessitate sealing of underground 
conduits or raceways entering buildings. 

(H) Bustling. A bushing, or terminal fitting, with an 
integral bushed opening shall be used at the end of a 
conduit or other raceway that terminates underground 
where the conductors or cables emerge as a direct burial 
wiring method. A seal incorporating the physical 



protection characteristics of a bushing shall be permitted 
to be used in lieu of a bushing. 

(I) Conductors of the Same Circuit. All conductors of 
the same circuit and, where used, the grounded conductor 
and all equipment grounding conductors shall be installed 
in the same raceway or cable or shall be installed in close 
proximity in the same trench. 

Exception No. 1: Conductors shall he permitted to he 
installed in parallel in raceways, multiconductar cables, or 
direct-buried single conductor cables. Each raceway or 
multiconductar cable shall contain all conductors of the 
same circuit, including equipment grounding conductors. 
Each direct-buried single conductor cable shall be located 
in close pniximity in the trench to the other single 
conductor cables in the same parallel set of conductors in 
the circuil, including aptipment grounding conductors. 

Exception No. 2: Isolated phase, polarity, grounded 
conductor, and equipment grounding and bonding 
conductor installations shall be permitted in nonmetallic 
raceways or cables with a nonmetallic covering or 
nonmagnetic sheath in close proximity where conductors 
are paralleled as permitted in \3 J 0.10(H), and where the 
conditions of 300.20(B) are met. 

(J) Earth Movement. Where direct-buried conductors, 
raceways, or cables are subject to movement by settlement 
or fi*ost, direct-buried conductors, raceways, or cables shall 
be arranged so as to prevent damage to the enclosed 
conductors or to equipment connected to the raceways. 

Informational Note: This section recognizes "S" loops in 
underground direct burial to raceway transitions, 
expansion fittings in raceway risers to fixed equipment, 
and, generally, the provision of flexible connections to 
equipment subject to settlement or frost heaves. 

(K) Directional Boring. Cables or raceways installed 
using directional boring equipment shall be approved for 
the purpose. 

300.6 Protection Against Corrosion and Deterioration. 

Raceways, cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable 
armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, 
fittings, supports, and support hardware shall be of materials 
suitable for the environment in which they are to be installed. 

(A) Ferrous Metal Equipment. Ferrous metal raceways, 
cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor, 
boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, metal elbows, couplings, 
nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware shall be 
suitably protected against corrosion inside and outside 
(except threads at joints) by a coating of approved 
corrosion-resistant material. Where corrosion protection is 
necessary and the conduit is threaded in the field, the 
threads shall be coated with an approved electrically 
conductive, corrosion-resistant compound. 

Exception: Stainless steel shall not be required to have 
protective coatings. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-139 



300.7 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



(1) Protected from Corrosion Solely by Enamel Where 
protected from corrosion solely by enamel, ferrous metal 
raceways, cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable 
armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, metal elbows, 
couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support 
hardware shall not be used outdoors or in wet locations 
as described in 300.6(D). 

(2) Organic Coatings on Boxes or Cabinets. Where 
boxes or cabinets have an approved system of organic 
coatings and are marked"Raintight," "Rainproof," or 
"Outdoor Type," they shall be permitted outdoors. 

(3) In Concrete or in Direct Contact with the Earth. 

Ferrous metal raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable 
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, nipples, fittings, 
supports, and support hardware shall be permitted to be 
installed in concrete or in direct contact with the earth, 
or in areas subject to severe corrosive influences where 
made of material approved for the condition, or where 
provided with corrosion protection approved for the 
condition. 

(B) Aluminum Metal Equipment. Aluminum 
raceways, cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable 
armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, 
couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support 
hardware embedded or encased in concrete or in direct 
contact with the earth shall be provided with 
supplementary corrosion protection. 

(C) Nonmetallic Equipment. Nonmetallic raceways, 
cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, boxes, cables 
with a nonmetallic outer jacket and internal metal armor 
or jacket, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, 
nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware shall be 
made of material approved for the condition and shall 
comply with (C)(1) and (C)(2) as applicable to the 
specific installation. 

(1) Exposed to Sunlight. Where exposed to sunlight, 
the materials shall be listed as sunlight resistant or shall 
be identified as sunlight resistant. 

(2) Chemical Exposure. Where subject to exposure to 
chemical solvents, vapors, splashing, or immersion, 
materials or coatings shall either be inherently resistant 
to chemicals based on their listing or be identified for 
the specific chemical reagent. 

(D) Indoor Wet Locations. In portions of dairy 
processing facilities, laundries, canneries, and other 
indoor wet locations, and in locations where walls are 
frequently washed or where there are surfaces of 
absorbent materials, such as damp paper or wood, the 
entire wiring system, where installed exposed, including 
all boxes, fittings, raceways, and cable used therewith, 
shall be mounted so that there is at least a 6-mm (V4-in.) 
airspace between it and the wall or supporting surface. 



Exception: Nonmetallic raceways, boxes, and fittings 
shall be permitted to be installed without the airspace on 
a concrete, masonry, tile, or similar surface. 

Informational Note: In general, areas where 
acids and alkali chemicals are handled and 
stored may present such corrosive conditions, 
particularly when wet or damp. Severe 
corrosive conditions may also be present in 
portions of meatpacking plants, tanneries, glue 
houses, and some stables; in installations 
immediately adjacent to a seashore and 
swimming pool areas; in areas where chemical 
deicers are used; and in storage cellars or rooms 
for hides, casings, fertilizer, salt, and bulk 
chemicals. 

300.7 Raceways Exposed to Different Temperatures. 

(A) Sealing. Where portions of a raceway or sleeve are 
known to be subjected to different temperatures^ and 
where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold 
storage areas of buildings or where passing from the 
interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway or 
sleeve shall be filled with an approved material to 
prevent the circulation of warm air to a colder section of 
the raceway or sleeve. An explosionproof seal shall not 
be required for this purpose. 

(B) Expansion Fittings. Raceways shall be provided 
with expansion fittings where necessary to compensate 
for thermal expansion and contraction. 

Informational Note: Table 352.44 and Table 355.44 
provide the expansion information for polyvinyl 
chloride (PVC) and for reinforced thermosetting resin 
conduit (RTRC), respectively. A nominal number for 
steel conduit can be determined by multiplying the 
expansion length in Table 352.44 by 0.20. The 
coefficient of expansion for steel electrical metallic 
tubing, intermediate metal conduit, and rigid conduit is 

1.170X 10~^ (0.0000117 mm per mm of conduit for 

each °C in temperature change) [0.650 x 10'^ 
(0.0000065 in. per inch of conduit for each °F in 
temperature change)] . 

A nominal number for aluminum conduit and 
aluminum electrical metallic tubing can be determined 
by multiplying the expansion length in Table 352.44 
by 0.40. The coefficient of expansion for aluminum 
electrical metallic tubing and aluminum rigid metal 

conduit is 2.34 x IQ-^ (0.0000234 mm per mm of 

conduit for each °C in temperature change) [1.30 x lO" 

^ (0.000013) in. per inch of conduit for each °F in 
temperature change]. 

300.8 Installation of Conductors with Other Systems* 

Raceways or cable trays containing electrical conductors 
shall not contain any pipe, tube, or equal for steam, water, 
air, gas, drainage, or any service other than electrical. 



70-140 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.13 



300.9 Raceways in Wet Locations Abovegrade. Where 
raceways are installed in wet locations abovegrade, the 
interior of these raceways shall be considered to be a wet 
location. Insulated conductors and cables installed in 
raceways in wet locations abovegrade shall comply with 
310-IQ(C). 

300.10 Electrical Continuity of Metal Raceways and 
Enclosures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other 
metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically 
joined together into a continuous electrical conductor and 
shall be connected to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets so as 
to provide effective electrical continuity. Unless 
specifically permitted elsewhere in this Code, raceways 
and cable assemblies shall be mechanically secured to 
boxes, fittings, cabinets, and other enclosures. 

Exception No. 1: Short sections of raceways used to 
provide support or protection of cable assemblies from 
physical damage shall not be required to be made 
electrically continuous. 

Exception No. 2: Equipment enclosures to be isolated, as 
permitted by 250.96(B), shall not be required to be 
metallically joined to the metal raceway, 

300.11 Securing and Supporting. 

(A) Secured in Place. Raceways, cable assemblies, 
boxes, cabinets, and fittings shall be securely fastened in 
place. Support wires that do not provide secure support 
shall not be permitted as the sole support. Support wires 
and associated fittings that provide secure support and 
that are installed in addition to the ceiling grid support 
wires shall be permitted as the sole support. Where 
independent support wires are used, they shall be secured 
at both ends. Cables and raceways shall not be supported 
by ceiling grids. 

(1) Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within the 
cavity of a fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling 
assembly shall not be secured to, or supported by, the 
ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An 
independent means of secure support shall be provided 
and shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly. 
Where independent support wires are used, they shall be 
distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective means 
from those that are part of the fire-rated design. 

Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted 
to support wiring and equipment that have been tested as 
part of the fire-rated assembly. 

Informational Note: One method of determining fire 
rating is testing in accordance with NFPA 251-2006, 
Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of 
Building Construction and Materials . 

(2) Non-Fire-Rated Assemblies. Wiring located within 
the cavity of a non-fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling 
assembly shall not be secured to, or supported by, the 



ceiling assembly, including the ceiling support wires. An 
independent means of secure support shall be provided and 
shall be permitted to be attached to the assembly. Where 
indepcndem support wires arc used, ihcy shall be 
distinguishable by color, lagging, or other effective ij^^ns. 

Exception: The ceiling support system shall be permitted 
to support branch-circuit wiring and associated equipment 
where installed in accordance with the ceiling system 
manufacturer's instmctions. 

(B) Raceways Used as Means of Support. Raceways 
shall be used only as a means of support for other 
raceways, cables, or nonelectrical equipment under any of 
the following conditions: 

(1) Where the raceway or means of support is identified 
for the purpose 

(2) Where the raceway contains power supply 
conductors for electrically controlled equipment and 
is used to support Class 2 circuit conductors or cables 
that are solely for the purpose of connection to the 
equipment control circuits 

(3) Where the raceway is used to support boxes or 
conduit bodies in accordance with 314.23 or to 
support luminaires in accordance with 410.36(E) 

(C) Cables Not Used as Means of Support. Cable 
wiring methods shall not be used as a means of support 
for other cables, raceways, or nonelectrical equipment. 

300.12 Mechanical Continuity — Raceways and 
Cables. Metal or nonmetalUc raceways, cable armors, 
and cable sheaths shall be continuous between cabinets, 
boxes, fittings, or other enclosures or outlets. 

Exception No. I: Short sections of raceways used to provide 
support or protection of cable assemblies from physical 
damage shall not be required to be mechanically continuous. 

Exception No. 2: Raceways and cables installed into the 
bottom of open bottom equipment, such as switchboards, 
motor control centers, and floor or pad-mounted 
transformers, shall not be required to be mechanically 
secured to the equipment. 

300.13 Mechanical and Electrical Continuity — 
Conductors, 

(A) General. Conductors in raceways shall be continuous 
between outlets, boxes, devices, and so forth. There shall 
be no splice or tap within a raceway unless permitted by 
300.15; 368.56(A); 376.56; 378.56; 384.56; 386.56; 
388.56; or 390;7. 

(B) Device Removal. In multiwire branch circuits, the 
continuity of a grounded conductor shall not depend on 
device connections such as lampholders, receptacles, and 
so forth, where the removal of such devices would 
interrupt the continuity. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-141 



300.14 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.14 Length of Free Conductors at Outlets, 
Junctions, and Switch Points. At least 150 mm (6 in.) of 
free conductor, measured from the point in the box where it 
emerges from its raceway or cable sheath, shall be left at 
each outlet, junction, and switch point for splices or the 
connection of luminaires or devices. Where the opening to 
an outlet, junction, or switch point is less than 200 mm (8 
in.) in any dimension, each conductor shall be long enough 
to extend at least 75 mm (3 in.) outside the opening. 

Exception: Conductors that are not spliced or terminated 
at the outlet, junction, or switch point shall not be 
required to comply with 300.14. 

300.15 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or Fittings — Where 

Required. A box shall be installed at each outlet and 
switch point for concealed knob-and-tube wiring. 

Fittings and connectors shall be used only with the specific 
wiring methods for which they are designed and listed. 

Where the wiring method is conduit, tubing, Type 
AC cable, Type MC cable. Type MI cable, nonmetallic- 
sheathed cable, or other cables, a box or conduit body 
shall be installed at each conductor splice point, outlet 
point, switch point, junction point, termination point, or 
pull point, unless otherwise permitted in 300.15(A) 
through (L). 

(A) Wiring Methods with Interior Access, A box or 

conduit body shall not be required for each splice, 
junction, switch, pull, termination, or outlet points in 
wiring methods with removable covers, such as wire ways, 
multioutlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and surface 
raceways. The covers shall be accessible after installation. 

(B) Equipment. An integral junction box or wiring 
compartment as part of approved equipment shall be 
permitted in lieu of a box. 

(C) Protection. A box or conduit body shall not be required 
where cables enter or exit from conduit or tubing that is used 
to provide cable support or protection against physical 
damage. A fitting shall be provided on the end(s) of the 
conduit or tubing to protect the cable from abrasion. 

(D) Type MI Cable. A box or conduit body shall not be 
required where accessible fittings are used for straight- 
through splices in mineral-insulated metal- sheathed cable. 

(E) Integral Enclosure. A wiring device with integral 
enclosure identified for the use, having brackets that 
securely fasten the device to walls or ceilings of 
conventional on-site frame construction, for use with 
nonmetallic-sheathed cable, shall be permitted in lieu of a 
box or conduit body. 

Informational Note: See 334.30(C); 545.10; 
550.15(1); 551.47(E), Exception No. 1; and 
552.48(E), Exception No, 1. 

(F) Fitting, A fitting identified for the use shall be 
permitted in lieu of a box or conduit body where 



conductors are not spliced or terminated within the fitting. 
The fitting shall be accessible after installation. 

(G) Direct-Buried Conductors. As permitted in 
300.5(E), a box or conduit body shall not be required for 
splices and taps in direct-buried conductors and cables. 

(H) Insulated Devices. As permitted in 334.40(B), a box 
or conduit body shall not be required for insulated devices 
supplied by nonmetallic-sheathed cable. 

(I) Enclosures. A box or conduit body shall not be required 
where a splice, switch, terminal, or pull point is in a cabinet 
or cutout box, in an enclosure for a switch or overcurrent 
device as permitted in 312.8, in a motor controller as 
permitted in 430. 10(A), or in a motor control center. 

(J) Luminaires. A box or conduit body shall not be 
required where a luminaire is used as a raceway as 
permitted in 410.64. 

(K) Embedded. A box or conduit body shall not be 
required for splices where conductors are embedded as 
permitted in 424.40, 424.41(D), 426.22(B), 426.24(A), 
and 427.19(A). 

(L) Manholes and Handhole Enclosures. A box or 

conduit body shall not be required for conductors in 
manholes or handhole enclosures, except where 
connecting to electrical equipment. The installation shall 
comply with the provisions of Part V of Article 110 for 
manholes, and 314.30 for handhole enclosures. 

300.16 Raceway or Cable to Open or Concealed Wiring. 

(A) Box, Conduit Body, or Fitting. A box, conduit body, 
or terminal fitting having a separately bushed hole for 
each conductor shall be used wherever a change is made 
from conduit, electrical metallic tubing, electrical 
nonmetallic tubing, nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Type AC 
cable. Type MC cable, or mineral-insulated, metal- 
sheathed cable and surface raceway wiring to open wiring 
or to concealed knob-and-tube wiring. A fitting used for 
this purpose shall contain no taps or splices and shall not 
be used at luminaire outlets. A conduit body used for this 
purpose shall contain no taps or splices, unless it complies 
with 3 14, 16(C)(2). 

(B) Bushing. A bushing shall be permitted in lieu of a 
box or terminal where the conductors emerge from a 
raceway and enter or terminate at equipment, such as 
open switchboards, unenclosed control equipment, or 
similar equipment. The bushing shall be of the insulating 
type for other than lead- sheathed conductors. 

300.17 Number and Size of Conductors in Raceway. 

The number and size of conductors in any raceway shall 
not be more than will permit dissipation of the heat and 
ready installation or withdrawal of the conductors without 
damage to the conductors or to their insulation. 



70-142 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.19 



Informational Note: See the following sections of this 
Code: intermediate metal conduit, 342.22; rigid metal 
conduit, 344.22; flexible metal conduit, 348.22 
liquidtight flexible metal conduit, 350.22; PVC conduit 
352.22; HDPE conduit, 353.22; RTRC, 355.22 
liquidtight nonmetallic flexible conduit, 356.22 
electrical metallic tubing, 358.22; flexible metallic 
tubing, 360.22; electrical nonmetallic tubing, 362.22 
cellular concrete floor raceways, 372.11; cellular metal 
floor raceways, 374.5; metal wireways, 376.22 
nonmetallic wireways, 378.22; surface metal raceways, 
386.22; surface nonmetallic raceways, 388.22 
underfloor raceways, 390.6; fixture wire, 402.7; theaters, 
520.6; signs, 600.31(C); elevators, 620.33; audio signal 
processing, amplification, and reproduction equipment, 
640.23(A) and 640.24; Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 
circuits, Article 725; fire alarm circuits, Article 760; and 
optical fiber cables and raceways, Article 770. 

300.18 Raceway Installations. 

(A) Complete Runs. Raceways, other than busways or 
exposed raceways having hinged or removable covers, 
shall be installed complete between outlet, junction, or 
splicing points prior to the installation of conductors. 
Where required to facilitate the installation of utilization 
equipment, the raceway shall be permitted to be initially 
installed without a terminating connection at the 
equipment. Prewired raceway assemblies shall be 
permitted only where specifically permitted in this Code 
for the applicable wiring method. 

Exception: Short sections of raceways used to contain 
conductors or cable assemblies for protection from 
physical damage shall not be required to be installed 
complete between outlet, junction, or splicing points. 

(B) Welding. Metal raceways shall not be supported, 
terminated, or connected by welding to the raceway 
unless specifically designed to be or otherwise 
specifically permitted to be in this Code. 



300.19 Supporting Conductors in Vertical Raceways. 

(A) Spacing Intervals — Maximum. Conductors in 
vertical raceways shall be supported if the vertical rise 
exceeds the values in Table 300.19(A). One cable support 
shall be provided at the top of the vertical raceway or as 
close to the top as practical. Intermediate supports shall be 
provided as necessary to limit supported conductor 
lengths to not greater than those values specified in Table 
300.19(A). 

Exception: Steel wire armor cable shall be supported at 
the top of the riser with a cable support that clamps the 
steel wire armor. A safety device shall be permitted at the 
lower end of the riser to hold the cable in the event there 
is slippage of the cable in the wire-armored cable 
support. Additional wedge-type supports shall be 
permitted to relieve the strain on the equipment terminals 
caused by expansion of the cable under load. 

(B) Fire-Rated Cables and Conductors. Support 
methods and spacing intervals for fire-rated cables and 
conductors shall comply with any restrictions provided in 
the listing of the electrical circuit protective system used 
and in no case shall exceed the values in Table 300.19(A). 

(C) Support Methods. One of the following methods of 
support shall be used: 

(1) By clamping devices constructed of or 
employing insulating wedges inserted in the ends 
of the raceways. Where clamping of insulation 
does not adequately support the cable, the 
conductor also shall be clamped. 

(2) By inserting boxes at the required intervals in 
which insulating supports are installed and 
secured in a satisfactory manner to withstand the 
weight of the conductors attached thereto, the 
boxes being provided with covers. 



Table 300.19(A) Spacings for Conductor Supports 













Conductors 






Aluminum 


or Copj 


)er-Clad 






Support of Conductors in 




Aluminum 




Copper 


{Conductor Size^ 


m 






ft 


m ft 




Vertical Raceways 












18AWGthrough8AWG 


Not greater than 


30 






100 


30 100 


6 AWG through 1/0 AWG 


Not greater than 


60 






200 


30 100 


2/0 AWG through 4/0 AWG 


Not greater than 


55 






180 


25 80 


Over 4/0 AWG through 350 kcmil 


Not greater than 


41 






135 


18 60 


Over 350 kcmil through 500 kcmil 


Not greater than 


36 






120 


15 50 


Over 500 kcmil through 750 kcmil 


Not greater than 


28 






95 


12 40 


Over 750 kcmil 


Not greater than 


26 






85 


11 35 



20 1 3 California Electrical Code 



70-143 



300,20 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



(3) In junction boxes, by deflecting the cables not less 
than 90 degrees and carrying them horizontally to a 
distance not less than twice the diameter of the cable, 
the cables being carried on two or more insulating 
supports and additionally secured thereto by tie wires 
if desired. Where this method is used, cables shall be 
supported at intervals not greater than 20 percent of 
those mentioned in the preceding tabulation. 

(4) By a method of equal effectiveness. 

300.20 Induced Currents in Ferrous Metal Enclosures 
or Ferrous Metal Raceways. 

(A) Conductors Grouped Together. Where conductors 
carrying alternating current are installed in ferrous metal 
enclosures or ferrous metal raceways, they shall be arranged 
so as to avoid heating the surrounding ferrous metal by 
induction. To accomplish this, all phase conductors and, 
where used, the grounded conductor and all equipment 
grounding conductors shall be grouped together. 

Exception No, 1: Equipment grounding conductors for 
certain existing installations shall be permitted to be 
installed separate from their associated circuit conductors 
where run in accordance with the provisions of 250,1 30(C). 

Exception No. 2: A single conductor shall be permitted to 
be installed in a ferromagnetic enclosure and used for 
skin-effect heating in accordance with the provisions of 
426,42 and 427.47. 

(B) Individual Conductors. Where a single conductor 
carrying alternating current passes through metal with 
magnetic properties, the inductive effect shall be 
minimized by (1) cutting slots in the metal between the 
individual holes through which the individual conductors 
pass or (2) passing all the conductors in the circuit 
through an insulating wall sufficiently large for all of the 
conductors of the circuit. 

Exception: In the case of circuits supplying vacuum or 
electric-discharge lighting systems or signs or X-ray 
apparatus, the currents carried by the conductors are so 
small that the inductive heating effect can be ignored 
where these conductors are placed in metal enclosures or 
pass through metal. 

Informational Note: Because aluminum is not a 
magnetic metal, there will be no heating due to 
hysteresis; however, induced currents will be present. 
They will not be of sufficient magnitude to require 
grouping of conductors or special treatment in passing 
conductors through aluminum wall sections. 

300.21 Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion. 

Electrical installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts, 
and ventilation or air-handling ducts shall be made so that 
the possible spread of fire or products of combustion will 
not be substantially increased. Openings around electrical 



penetrations into or through fire-resistant-rated walls, 
partitions, floors, or ceilings shall be firestopped using 
approved methods to maintain the fire resistance rating. 

Informational Note: Directories of electrical construction 
materials published by qualified testing laboratories 
contain many listing installation restrictions necessary to 
maintain the fire-resistive rating of assemblies where 
penetrations or openings are made. Building codes also 
contain restrictions on membrane penetrations on opposite 
sides of a fire-resistance-rated wall assembly. An example 
is the 600-mm (24-in.) minimum horizontal separation 
that usually applies between boxes installed on opposite 
sides of the wall. Assistance in complying with 300.21 
can be found in building codes, fire resistance directories, 
and product listings. 

300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling, 
Fabricated Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other 
Spaces for Eit% iron mental Air (Plenums)* The 

provisions of this section shall apply to the installation 
and uses of electrical wiring and equipment in ducts used 
for dust, loose stock, or vapor removal; ducts specifically 
fabricated for environmenlal air: and other spaces used for 
environmental air (plenums). 

Informational Note: See Article 424, Part VI, for duct 
heaters. 

(A) Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal No 

wiring systems of any type shall be installed in ducts used 
to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapors. No 
wiring system of any type shall be installed in any duct, or 
shaft containing only such ducts, used for vapor removal or 
for ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment. 

(B) Ducts Specifically Fabricatcf} for Environmental Air, 

Only wiring methods consisting of Type MI cable. Type MC 
cable employing a smooth or corrugated impervious metal 
sheath without an overall nonmetallic covering, electrical 
metallic tubing, flexible metallic tubing, intermediate metal 
conduit, or rigid metal conduit without an overall 
nonmetallic covering shall be installed in duels specifically 
fabricated to transport environmental air. Flexible metal 
conduit shall be permitted, in lengths not to exceed 1 .2 m (4 
ft), to connect physically adjustable equipment and devices 
permitted to be in these fabricated ducts. The connectors 
used with flexible metal conduit shall effectively close any 
openings in the connection. Equipment and devices shall be 
permitted within such ducts only if necessary for the direct 
action upon, or sensing of, the contained air. Where 
equipment or devices are installed and illumination is 
necessary to facilitate maintenance and repair, enclosed 
gasketed-type luminaires shall be permitted. 

(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air 
(Plenums), This section shall apply to spaces not 
specifically fabricated for environmental air-handling 
purposes jbut used for air-handling purposes as a plenum. 



70-144 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



300.39 



This section shall not apply lo habitable rooms or areas of 
buildings, the prime purpose of which is not air handling. 

Infonnational Note No. 1: The space over a hung ceiling 
used for environmental air-handling purposes is an 
example of the type of other space to which this section 
applies. 

Infonnational Note No. 2: ffhe phrase 'Olher Spaces 
IJseil tor hnvironmcnial Air (Pknum)" as us^ed in ihis 
secuon correlates with the use of ilit* tenn *Tplenum*' in 
NFPA 90A-200f>, Standard fot (he htstalhlioii of Air- 
Comlifionin^ ami yenfihllng Systems, and otlier 
mechanical cades where the plenum is used for return 
air purposes, as well a^ sojuc other air-handling spaces. 

Exception: This section shall not apply to the Joist or stud 
spaces of dwelling units where the wiring passes through 
such spaces perpendicular to the long dimension of such 
spaces. 

(1) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods for such other 
space shall be limited to totally enclosed, nonventilated, 
insulated busway having no provisions for plug-in 
connections, Type MI cable, Type MC cable without an 
overall nonmetallic covering. Type AC cable, or other 
factory-assembled multiconductor control or power cable 
that is specifically listed tor use within an atr-handltng 
jspace, or listed prefabricated cable assemblies of metallic 
manufactured wiring systems without nonmetallic sheath. 
Other types of cables, conductors, and raceways shall be 
permitted to be installed in electrical metallic tubing, 
flexible metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, rigid 
metal conduit without an overall nonmetallic covering, 
flexible metal conduit, or, where accessible, surface metal 
raceway or metal wireway with metal ^covers. 

(2) Cable Tray Systems. The provisions in (a) or (b) 
shall apply to the use of metallic cable tray systems in 
other spaces used for environmental air (plenums), where 
accessible, as follows: 

(a) Mefal Cable Troy Systems. Metal cable iray 
systems shall be permitted to support the wiring methods 
in 300.22(C)(1). 

(b) Solid Side and Bottom Metal Cable Tray 
Systems. Solid side and bottom metal cable tray systems 
with solid metal covers shall be peniiitted to enclose 
wiring methods and cables, not already covered in 
300.22(C)( I), in accordance with 392. 10(A) and J B). 

(3) Equipment. Electrical equipment with a metal 
enclosure, or electrical equipment with a nonmetallic 
enclosure listed for iise within an air-handling space and 
having adequate fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing 
characteristics, and associated wiring material suitable for 
the ambient temperature shall be permitted to be installed in 
such other space unless prohibited elsewhere in this Code. 



Informational Note: One method of defining adequate 
fire-resistant and low-smoke producing charactcri sties 
for electrical equipment with a nonmetallic enclosure is 
in ANSl^UL 2043-200^. hre Testjor Heat and Visible 
Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their 
Accessories Im failed if i Air- Handling Spacer. 

Exception: Integral fan systems shall he permitted where 
specifically identified for use within an air-handling space. 

(D) Information Technology Equipment. Electrical 
wiring in air-handling areas beneath raised floors for 
information technology equipment shall be permitted in 
accordance with Article 645. 

300.23 Panels Designed to Allow Access. Cables, 
raceways, and equipment installed behind panels designed 
to allow access, including suspended ceiling panels, shall 
be arranged and secured so as to allow the removal of 
panels and access to the equipment. 

11. Requirements for over 600 Volts, Nominal 

300.31 Covers Required. Suitable covers shall be 
installed on all boxes, fittings, and similar enclosures to 
prevent accidental contact with energized parts or 
physical damage to parts or insulation. 

300.32 Conductors of Different Systems. See 300.3(C)(2). 

300.34 Conductor Bending Radius. The conductor shall 
not be bent to a radius less than 8 times the overall 
diameter for nonshielded conductors or 12 times the 
overall diameter for shielded or lead-covered conductors 
during or after installation. For multiconductor or 
multiplexed single-conductor cables having individually 
shielded conductors, the minimum bending radius is 12 
times the diameter of the individually shielded conductors 
or 7 times the overall diameter, whichever is greater. 

300.35 Protection Against Induction Heating. Metallic 
raceways and associated conductors shall be arranged so 
as to avoid heating of the raceway in accordance with the 
applicable provisions of 300.20. 

300.37 Aboveground Wiring Methods. Aboveground 
conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in 
intermediate metal conduit, in electrical metallic tubing, in 
RTRC and PVG conduit, in cable trays, in auxiliary gutters, 

as busways, as cablebus, in other identified raceways, or as 
exposed runs of metal-clad cable suitable for the use and 
purpose. In locations accessible to qualified persons only, 
exposed runs of Type MV cables, bare conductors, and 
bare busbars shall also be permitted. Busbars shall be 
permitted to be either copper or aluminum. 

300,39 Braid-Covered Insulated Conductors — 
Exposed Installation. Exposed runs of braid-covered 
insulated conductors shall have a flame -retardant braid. If 
the conductors used do not have this protection, a tlame- 
retardant saturant shall be applied to the braid covering 



201 3 Caiifomia Electrical Code 



70-145 



300.40 



ARTICLE 300 - WIRING METHODS 



after installation. This treated braid covering shall be 
stripped back a safe distance at conductor terminals, 
according to the operating voltage. Where practicable, 
this distance shall not be less than 25 mm (1 in.) for each 
kilo volt of the conductor- to -ground voltage of the circuit. 

300.40 Insulation Shielding. Metallic and semiconducting 
insulation shielding components of shielded cables shall be 
removed for a distance dependent on the circuit voltage and 
insulation. Stress reduction means shall be provided at all 
terminations of factory-applied shielding. 

Metallic shielding components such as tapes, wires, or 
braids, or combinations thereof, shall be connected to a 
grounding conductor, grounding busbar, or a grounding 
electrode. 



300.42 Moisture or Mechanical Protection for Metal- 
Sheathed Cables. Where cable conductors emerge from a 
metal sheath and where protection against moisture or 
physical damage is necessary, the insulation of the 
conductors shall be protected by a cable sheath 
terminating device. 

300.50 Underground Installations. 

(A) General. Underground conductors shall be 
identified for the voltage and conditions under which 
they are installed. Direct-burial cables shall comply 
with the provisions of 3I0.10(F)J Underground cables 
shall be installed in accordance with 300.50(A)(1) or 
(A)(2), and the installation shall meet the depth 
requirements of Table 300.50. 



Table 300.50 Minimum Covera Requirements 





General Conditions (not otherwise specified) 


Special Conditions (use if applicable) 




Column 1 


Column 1 


ColumnJ 


Column 4 


ColuninS 


Coluiun 6 




Direct-Buried 
Cables 


RTRC, PVC, 

and IIDPE 

Conduit^ 


Rigid Metal 

Conduit and 

Intermediate 

Metal 

Conduit 


Raceways 
under buildings 

or exterior 

concrete slabs, 

100 mm 

(4 in.) 
minimum 
thickness^ 


Cables in 

airport 

runways or 

adjacent areas 

where trespass 

is prohibited 


Areas subject 
to vehicular 
traffic, such 

as 
thoroughfare 

sand 

commercial 

parking areas 


Circuit Voltage 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


Over 600 V 

through 22 kV 


750 


30 


450 


18 


150 


6 


100 


4 


450 


18 


600 


24 


Over 22 kV 
through 40 kV 


900 


36 


600 


24 


150 


6 


100 


4 


450 


18 


600 


24 


Over 40 kV 


1000 


42 


750 


30 


150 


6 


100 


4 


450 


18 


600 


24 



General Notes: 

1. Lesser depths shall be permitted where cables and conductors rise for terminations or splices or where access is otherwise required. 

2. Where solid rock prevents compliance with the cover depths specified in this table, the wiring shall be installed in a metal or nonmetallic 
raceway permitted for direct burial. The raceways shall be covered by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete extending down to rock. 

3. In industrial establishments, where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that qualified persons will service the installation, 
the minimum cover requirements, for other than rigid metal conduit and intermediate metal conduit, shall be permitted to be reduced 150 
mm (6 in.) for each 50 mm (2 in,) of concrete or equivalent placed entirely within the trench over the underground installation. 

Specific Footnotes: 

a Cover is defined as the shortest distance in millimeters (inches) measured between a point on the top surface of any direct-buried 
conductor, cable, conduit, or other raceway and the top surface of finished grade, concrete, or similar cover. 

b Listed by a qualified testing agency as suitable for direct burial without encasement. All other nonmetallic systems shall require 50 mm 
(2 in.) of concrete or equivalent above conduit in addition to the table depth. 

c The slab shall extend a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the underground installation, and a warning ribbon or other effective means 
suitable for the conditions shall be placed above the underground installation. 

^ Underground direct-buried cables that are not encased or protected by concrete and are buried 750 mm (30 in.) or more below grade shall 
have their location identified by a warning ribbon that is placed in the trench at least 300 mm (12 in.) above the cables. 



70-146 



2013 Cahfomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



iWAO 



(1) Shielded Cables and Nonshielded Cables in Metal- 
Sheathed Cable Assemblies. Underground cables, 
including nonshielded, Type MC and moisture-impervious 
metal sheath cables, shall have those sheaths grounded 
through an effective grounding path meeting the 
requirements of 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4). They shall be direct 
buried or installed in raceways identified for the use. 

(2) Other Nonshielded Cables. Other nonshielded cables 
not covered in 300.50(A)(1) shall be installed in rigid metal 
conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or rigid nonmetallic 
conduit encased in not less than 75 mm (3 in.) of concrete. 

(B) Wet Location!!. The interior of enclosures or raceways 
installed underground shall be considered to be a wei 
location. Insulated conductors and cables instaJled in these 
enclosures or raceways in underground insla Nations shall 
be listed for use in wel locations and shall comply with 
310.10(C). Any connections or splices in an underground 
installation shall be approved lor wel locations. 

(C) Protection from Damage. Conductors emerging from 
the ground shall be enclosed in listed raceways. Raceways 
installed on poles shall be of rigid metal conduit, 
intermediate metal conduit, RTRC-XWJ Schedule 80 PVC 
conduit, or equivalent, extending from the minimum cover 
depth specified in Table 300.50 to a point 2.5 m (8 ft) 
above finished grade. Conductors entering a building shall 
be protected by an approved enclosure or raceway from the 
minimum cover depth to the point of entrance. Where 
direct-buried conductors, raceways, or cables are subject to 
movement by settlement or frost, they shall be installed to 
prevent damage to the enclosed conductors or to the 
equipment connected to the raceways. Metallic enclosures 
shall be grounded. 

(D) Splices. Direct burial cables shall be permitted to be 
spliced or tapped without the use of splice boxes, provided 
they are installed using materials suitable for the application. 
The taps and splices shall be watertight and protected from 
mechanical damage. Where cables are shielded, the 
shielding shall be continuous across the splice or tap. 

Exception: At splices of an engineered cabling system, 
metallic shields of direct-buried single-conductor cables 
with maintained spacing between phases shall be 
permitted to be interrupted and overlapped. Where 
shields are interrupted and overlapped, each shield 
section shall be grounded at one point. 

(E) Backfill. Backfill containing large rocks, paving 
materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or 
con'osive materials shall not be placed in an excavation 
where materials can damage or contribute to the conosion 
of raceways, cables, or other substructures or where it 
may prevent adequate compaction of fill. 

Protection in the form of granular or selected material or 
suitable sleeves shall be provided to prevent physical 
damage to the raceway or cable. 



(F) Raceway Seal. Where a raceway enters from an 
underground system, the end within the building shall be 
sealed with an identified compound so as to prevent the 
entrance of moisture or gases, or it shall be so arranged 
to prevent moisture from contacting live parts. 



ARTICLE 310 

Conductors for General Wiring 

I. General 



310.1 Scope. 

This article covers general requirements for conductors 
and their type designations, insulations, markings, 
mechanical strengths, ampacity ratings, and uses. These 
requirements do not apply to conductors that form an 
integral part of equipment, such as motors, motor 
controllers, and similar equipment, or to conductors 
specifically provided for elsewhere in this Code. 

Informational Note: For flexible cords and cables, see 
Article 400. For fixture wires, see Article 402. 

310.2 befinit ions : 

Electrical Ducts. Electrical conduius, or other raceways 
round in cross section, that are suitable for use 
underground or embedded in concrete. 

Thermal Resistivity* As used in this Code^ the heat 
transfer capability through a substance by conduction. It 
is ihe reciprocal of thermal conductivity and is designated 
Rho and expressed in the units ^C-cm/W. 



II. Installation 
310,10 Uses Permit ted- 



The conductors described in 310.104 shall be permitled 
for use in any of the wiring methods covered in Chapter 3 
and as specified in their respective tables or as permitted 
elsewhere in this Code, 

Informational Note: Thermoplastic insulation may 
stitTen at lemperalures lower than -iO'^C (+I4''F). 
Thermoplastic insulation may also be deformed at 
normal temperatures where subjected to pressure, such 
as at points of suppon. Thennoplastic insulation, 
whore used on dc circuits in wet locations, may result 
in elect roendosmosis between the conductor and 
insulation, 

(A) Dry Locations. Insulated conductors and cables 
used in dry locations shall be any of the types identified 
in this Code. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-147 



310.10 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



(B) Dry and Damp Locations. Insulated conductors and 
cables used in dry and damp locations shall be Types 
FEP, FEPB, MTW, PFA, RHH, RHW, RHW-2, SA, 
THHN, THW, THW-2, THHW, THWN, THWN-2, TW, 
XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, Z, or ZW. 

(C) Wet Locations. Insulated conductors and cables used 
in wet locations shall comply with one of the following: 

(1) Be moisture -impervious metal-sheathed 

(2) Be types MTW, RHW, RHW-2, TW, THW, THW-2, 
THHW, THW1S[, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW 

(3) Be of a type listed for use in wet locations 

(D) Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight. Insulated 
conductors or cables used where exposed to direct rays of 
the sun shall comply with (D)(1) or (D)(2): 

(1) Conductors and cables shall be hsted, or Hsted and 
marked, as being sunHght resistant 

(2) Conductors and cables shall be covered with insulating 
material, such as tape or sleeving, that is listed, or 
listed and marked, as being sunlight resistant 

(E) Shielding. Non-sliie!ded, ozone-rcsislanl insulated 
conductors with a maximum phase-to-phase voitage of 
5000 volts shall be permitted in Type MC cables in 
industrial esiablishmcnts where the conditions of 
maintenance and supervision ensure that only quahfied 
persons service the installation. For other establishments, 
solid dielectric insulated conductors operated above 2000 
volts in permanent installations shall have ozone-resistant 
insulation and shall be shielded. All metallic insulation 
shields shall be connected to a grounding electrode 
conductor, a grounding busbar, an equipment grounding 
conductor, or a grounding piectrode. 

Informational Note: The primary purposes of shielding 
are lo confine the voltage stresses to the insulation, 
dissipate insulation leakage current, drain olT the 
capacitive charging current, and cart) ground-fault 
curreni lo facilitate operation of ground- fault protective 
devices in ihe event of an electrical cable fault. 

Exception No. 1: Nonshielded insulated conductors listed 
by a qualified testing laboratory shall be permitted for 
use up to 2400 volts under the following conditions: 

(a) Conductors shall have insulation resistant to 
electric discharge and surface tracking, or the insulated 
conductor(s) shall be covered with a material resistant to 
ozone, electric discharge, and surface tracking. 

(b) Where used in wet locations, the insulated 
conductor(s) shall have an overall nonmetallic jacket or a 
continuous metallic sheath, 

(c) Insulation and jacket thicknesses shall be in 
accordance with Table 310.104(D). 

Exception No. 2: Nomhielded imulated conductom listed 
by a qualified testing labaratoty sliail be penniaedfor mc 



up to 5000 volts to replace e^Kisting mmshiehled comiitctors, 
tm existing cqitiptnerU in industrial establLflmients only, 
under the following conditions: 

(a) IVhere the condition of maintenance and 
supervision ensures that only qualified personnel install 
and service the installatiott. 

(b) Conductors sftall have insulation resistattf to 
electric discharge and surface tracking, or the insulated 
conductor(s) shall he covered with a material resistant to 
ozone, electric discharge, and surface tracking. 

(c) mierc used in wet locations, the insulated 
conductorfs) shall have an overall nomnetaliic jacket or a. 
continuous metallic sheath. 

(d) insulation and jacket thicknesses shall be in 
accordance with Table 310. 13(D). 

Informational Note: kelocation or replacemem of 
etjinpment may not comply with the lemi existing as 
related lo this exception. 

Exception No. 3: Where permitted in 310.10(F), Exception 

No. 2. 

(F) Direct-Burial Conductors. Conductors used for 
direct-burial applications shall be of a type identified for 
such use. 

Exception No. 1: Nonshielded multiconductor cables 
rated 2001-2400 volts shall be permitted if the cable has 
an overall metallic sheath or armor. 

The metallic shield, sheath, or armor shall be connected to 
a grounding electrode conductor, grounding busbar, or a 
grounding electrode. 

Exception No. 2: Airfield lighting cable used in series 
circuits that are rated up to 5000 volts and are powered 
by regulators shall be permitted to be nonshielded. 

Informational Note to Exception No. 2; Federal 
Aviation Administration (FAA) Advisory Circulars 
(ACs) provide additional practices and methods for 
airport lighting. 

Informational Note No. 1: See 300.5 for installation 
requirements for conductors rated 600 volts or less. 

Informational Note No, 2: See 300.50 for installation 
requirements for conductors rated over 600 volts. 

(G) Corrosive Conditions. Conductors exposed to oils, 
greases, vapors, gases, fumes, liquids, or other substances 
having a deleterious effect on the conductor or insulation 
shall be of a type suitable for the application. 

(H) Conductors in Parallel. 

(1) General, Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or 
copper conductors, for each phase, polarity, neutral, or 
grounded circuit shall be permitted to be connected in 
parallel (electrically joined at both ends) only in sizes 1/0 
AWG and larger where installed in accordance with 
3IOJO(HX2) through (H)(6). 



70-148 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.15 



Exception No. 1: Conductors in sizes smaller than I/O 
A WG shall be permitted to he run in parallel to supply 
control power to indicating instruments, contactors, relays, 
solenoids, and similar control devices, or for frequencies of 
360 Hz and higher, provided all of the following apply: 

(a) They are contained within the same raceway or 
cable. 

(b) The ampacity of each individual conductor is 
sufficient to carry the entire load current shared by the 
parallel conductors. 

(c) The overcurrent protection is such that the 
ampacity of each individual conductor will not be 
exceeded if one or more of the parallel conductors 
become inadvertently disconnected. 



Exception No, 2: Under engineering supervision, 2 A WG 
and I A WG grounded neutral conductors shall be permitted 
to be imtidled in parallel for existing installations. 

Informational Note to Exception No. 2: Exception No. 2 
can be used to alleviate overheating of neutral 
conductors in existing installations due to high content 
of triplen harmonic currents. 

(2) Conductor Characteristics. The paralleled conductors 
in each phase, polarity, neutral, grounded circuit bonductorj 
equipment grounding conductor, or equipment bonding 
jumper shall comply with all of the following: 

(1) Be the same length 

(2) Consist of the same conductor material 

(3) Be the same size in circular mil area 

(4) Have the same insulation type 

(5) Be terminated in the same manner 



(3) Separate Cables or Raceways. jWhere run in separate 
cables or raceways, the cables or raceways with 
conductors shall have the same number of conductors and 
shall have the same electrical characteristics. Conductors 
of one phase, polarity, neutral, grounded circuit 
conductor, or equipment grounding conductor shall not be 
required to have the same physical characteristics as those 
of another phase, polarity, neutral, grounded circuit 
conductor, or equipment grounding conductor.; 

(4) Ampacity Adjustment. Conductors installed in 
parallel shall comply with the provisions of 
3I0.15(BX3)(a)- 

(5) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Where parallel 
equipment grounding conductors are used, they shall be 
sized in accordance with 250.122. Sectioned equipment 
grounding conductors smaller than 1/0 AWG shall be 
permitted in multiconductor cables in accordance with 
310,104, provided the combined circular mil area ol' tht: 
sectioned equipment grounding conductors in each cable 
complies with 250.122. 



(6) Equipment Bonding Jumpers. Where parallel 
equipment bonding jumpers are installed in raceways, they 
shall be sized and installed in accordance with 250, 102. 

310.15 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0-2000 Volts. 

(A) General. 

(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision. Ampacities for 
conductors shall be permitted to be determined by tables as 
provided in 310.15(B) or under engineering supervision, as 
provided in 310.15(C). 

Informational Note No. 1: Ampacities provided by this 
section do not take voltage drop into consideration. See 
210.19(A), Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits 
and 215.2(A), Informational Note No. 2, for feeders. 

Informational Note No. 2: For the allowable ampacities 
of Type MTW wire, see Table 13.5.1 in NFPA 79- 
2007, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. 

(2) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than bne 
ampacity applies for a given circuit length, the lowest 
value shall be used. 

Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to 
adjacent portions of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall 
be permitted to be used beyond the point of transition, a 
distance equal to 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10 percent of the circuit 
length figured at the higher ampacity, whichever is less. 

Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for conductor 
temperature limitations due to termination provisions. 

(3) Temperature Limitation of Conductors. No 

conductor shall be used in such a manner that its 
operating temperature exceeds that designated for the type 
of insulated conductor involved. In no case shall 
conductors be associated together in such a way, with 
respect to type of circuit, the wiring method employed, or 
the number of conductors, that the limiting temperature of 
any conductor is exceeded. 

Informational Note No. 1: The temperature rating of a 
conductor [see Table 3 10.;I04(A) and Table 3 ] 0. 104(C)] 
is the maximum temperature, at any location along its 
length, that the conductor can withstand over a 
prolonged time period without serious degradation. The 
allowable ampacity tables, the ampacity tables of Article 
310 and the ampacity tables of Informative Annex B, the 
ambient lemperaturd correction factors in 310. I5(DM2), 
and the notes to the tables provide guidance for 
coordinating conductor sizes, types, allowable 
ampacities, ampacities, ambient temperatures, and 
number of associated conductors. The principal 
determinants of operating temperature are as follows: 

(1) Ambient temperature — ambient temperature 
may vary along the conductor length as well as 
from time to time. 

(2) Heat generated internally in the conductor as the 
result of load current flow, including fundamental 
and harmonic currents. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-149 



310.15 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



(3) The rate at which generated heat dissipates into the 
ambient medium. Thermal insulation that covers or 
surrounds conductors affects the rate of heat dissipation. 

(4) Adjacent load-carrying conductors — adjacent 
conductors have the dual effect of raising the ambient 
temperature and impeding heat dissipation. 
Informational Note No. 2: Refer to nOJ4(C) for the 
temperature I imitalioii of terminations. 

(B) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated to 2000 
volts shall be as specified in the Allowable Ampacity 
Table 310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(BK!9), and 
Ampacity Table 3 10.1 5(B)(20) and Table 3 lOJ 5(3X21) 
as modified by 310.15(B)(1) through (B)(7), 

The tcmperalure correction and adjustment factors 
shall be permined to be applied to the ampacity for the 
temperature rating of the conductor, if the corrected and 
adjusted ampacity does not exceed the ampacity for the 
temperature rating of the termination in accordance with 
the provisions of 1 10.14(C). 

Informational Note: Table 3 10,1 5(8 K 16) through Table 
5lO.I5(BXl*^)i are application tables for use in 
determining conductor sizes on loads calculated in 
accordance with Article 220. Allowable ampacities result 
from consideration of one or more of the following: 

(1) Temperature compatibility with connected 
equipment, especially the connection points. 

(2) Coordination with circuit and system overcurrent 
protection. 

(3) Compliance with the requirements of product 
Hstings or certifications. See 110.3(B). 

(4) Preservation of the safety benefits of established 
industry practices and standardized procedures. 

(1) General. For explanation of type letters used in tables 
and for recognized sizes of conductors for the various 
conductor insulations, see Table 310.104(A) and Table 
310.i04(B). For installation requirements, see 310.1 
through 310.15(A)(3) and the various articles of this 
Code. For flexible cords, see Table 400.4, Table 
400.5(A)(1), and Table 400.5(A)(2). 

(2) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors. 
Ampacities for ambient temperatures other than those 
shown in the ampacity tables shall be corrected in 
accordance with Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or Table 
3 lOJ 5(B)(2)(b), or shall be permitted to be calculated 
using the following equation: 



/'=/ ^j 



T - T 

^ c ^ a 



Tc'T, 



where: 



= ampacity corrected for ambient temperature 

^ ampacity shown in the tables 

= temperature rating of conductor (X) 

- new ambient temperature (°C) 

= ambient temperature used in the table C^C) 



Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) Ambient Temperature Correction 
Factors Based on 30°C (86 °F) 


For ambient temperatures other than 30°C (86 °F), multiply the 

allowable ampacities specified in the ampacity table by the 

appropriate correction factor shown below. 


Ambient 

Temperature 

(°C) 


Temperature Rating of Conductor 


Ambient 
Temperature 

(°F) 


60°C 


75°C 


90°C 


100 or less 


1.29 


1.20 


1.15 


50 or less 


11-15 


1.22 


1.15 


1.12 


51-59 


16-20 


1.15 


1.11 


1.08 


60-68 


21-25 


1.08 


1.05 


1.04 


69-77 


26-30 


1.00 


1.00 


1.00 


78-86 


31-35 


0.91 


0.94 


0.96 


87-95 


36-40 


0.82 


0.88 


0.91 


96-104 


41-45 


0.71 


0.82 


0.87 


105-113 


46-50 


0.58 


0.75 


0.82 


114-122 


51-55 


0.41 


0.67 


0.76 


123-131 


56-60 


- 


0.58 


0.71 


132-140 


61-65 


- 


0.47 


0.65 


141-149 


66-70 


- 


0.33 


0.58 


150-158 


71-75 


- 


- 


0.50 


159-167 


76-80 


- 


- 


0.41 


168-176 


81-85 


- 


- 


0.29 


177-185 



(3) Adjustment Factors. 

(a) More Than Three Current- Carrying Conductors 
in a Raceway or Cable, Where the number of current- 
carrying conductors in a raceway or cable exceeds three, 
or where single conductors or multiconductor cables are 
installed without maintaining spacing for a continuous 
length longer than 600 mm (24 in.) and are not installed 
in raceways, the allowable ampacity of each conductor 
shall be reduced as shown in Table 310.15(B)(3)(a). 
Each current-carrying conductor of a paralleled set of 
conductors shall be counted as a current-carrying 
conductor. 

Where conductors of different systems, as provided 
in 300.3, are installed in a common raceway or cable, the 
adjuslment factors shown in Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) shall 
apply only to the number of power and lighting 
conductors (Articles 210, 215, 220, and 230). 

Informational Note No. 1: See Annex B, Table 
B.3 10.15(B)(2)(1 1), for adjustment factors for more than 
three current-carrying conductors in a raceway or cable 
with load diversity. 



70-150 



2013 California Electrical Code 







ARTICLE 310 


- CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 




31,0.15 




Table 310.15(B)(2)(b) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors Based on 40X (104 °F) 


For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104 °F), multiply the allowable ampacities specified in the ampacity table by the appropriate 

correction factor shown below. 


Ambient 
Temperature 


Temperature Rating of Conductor 


Ambient 
Temperature 

C¥) 


60°C 


75°C 


90°C 


150°C 


200'^'C 


25(rc 


100 or less 


1,58 


1.36 


1.26 


1.13 


1.09 


1.07 


50 or less 


1M5 


1.50 


1.31 


1.22 


1.11 


1.08 


1.06 


51-59 


16-20 


1.41 


1.25 


1.18 


1.09 


1.06 


1.05 


60-68 


21-25 


1.32 


1.2 


1.14 


1.07 


1 .05 


1.04 


69-77 


26-30 


1.22 


1.13 


1.10 


1.04 


1.03 


L02 


78-86 


31-35 


1.12 


1.07 


1.05 


1.02 


1.02 


1.01 


87-95 


36-40 


1.00 


1.00 


1.00 


1.00 


1.00 


1.00 


96-104 


41-45 


0.87 


0.93 


0.95 


0.98 


0.98 


0.99 


105-113 


46-50 


0.71 


0.85 


0.89 


0.95 


0.97 


0.98 


114-122 


51-55 


0.50 


0.76 


0.84 


0.93 


0.95 


0.96 


123-131 


56-60 


- 


0.65 


0.77 


0.90 


0.94 


0.95 


132-140 


61-65 


- 


0.53 


0.71 


0.88 


0.92 


0.94 


141-149 


66-70 


- 


0.38 


0.63 


0.85 


0.90 


0.93 


150-158 


71-75 


- 


- 


0.55 


0.83 


0.88 


0.91 


159-167 


76-80 


- 


- 


0.45 


0.80 


0.87 


0.90 


168-176 


81-90 


- 


- 


- 


0.74 


0.83 


0.87 


177-194 


91-100 


- 


- 


- 


0.67 


0.79 


0.85 


195-212 


101-110 


- 


- 


- 


0.60 


0.75 


0.82 


213-230 


111-120 


- 


- 


- 


0.52 


0.71 


0.79 


231-248 


121-130 


- 


- 


- 


0.43 


0.66 


0.76 


249-266 


131-140 


- 


- 


- 


0.30 


0.61 


0.72 


267-284 


141-160 


- 


- 


- 


- 


0.50 


0.65 


285-320 


161-180 


- 


- 


- 


- 


0.35 


0.58 


321-392 


181-200 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


0.49 


357-392 


201-225 


- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


0.35 


393-437 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-151 



310.15 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) Adjustment Factors for More Than 
Three Current-Carrying Conductors in a Raceway or Cable 



Number of 
Cottdueton' 




Percent of Values in Table 
3ld.l5(B)(l6) through Table 
310.I5(B)II9) as Adjusted for 

Ambient Temperature if 
Necessary 


4-6 

7-9 

10-20 

21-30 

31^0 

41 and above 




80 
70 
50 
45 
40 
35 


"Mumber of conductors is 
racnvaj' or cable adjusted in 


the total number af conductors in the 
accoidanc* ^ ith 3 iO. 1 5(BK5) and (6). 



Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23(A) for adjustment 
factors for conductors in sheet metal auxiliary gutters 
and 376.22(B) for adjustment factors for conductors in 
metal wire ways. 

(1) Where conductors are installed in cable trays, the 
provisions of 392.80 shall apply. 

(2) iAdjustmciit factors shall not apply to conductors 
in raceways having a length not exceeding 600 
mm (24 in.). 

(3) Adjustment factors shall not apply to 
underground conductors entering or leaving an 
outdoor trench if those conductors have physical 
protection in the form of rigid metal conduit, 
intermediate metal conduit, rigid polyvinyl 
chloride conduit (PVC), or reinforced 
Ihcrmoselling resin conduit (RTRC) having a 
length not exceeding 3.05 m (10 ft), and if the 
number of conductors does not exceed four. 

(4) Adjustment factors shall not apply to Type AC 
cable or to Type MC (^ble under the following 
conditions: 

a. The cffifes dolroTlSvelirom 

b. Each cable has not more than three current- 
carrying conductors. 

c. The conductors are 12 AWG copper. 

d. Not more than 20 current-carrying conductors 
are installed without maintaining spacing, are 

stacked, or are supported on"bridle rings." 

(5) An adjustment factor of 60 percent shall be 
applied to Type AC cable or Type MC cable 
liinder the following conditions: 

a. The cables do not have an overall outer jacket. 

b. The number of current carrying conductors 
exceeds 20. 

c. The cables are stacked or bundled longer 
that 600 mm (24 in) without spacing being 
maintained. 



(b) More Than One Conduit, Tube, or Raceway. Spacing 
between conduits, tubing, or raceways shall be maintained. 

(c) Circuhr Raceways Exposed to Sunlight on Rooftops. 
Where conductors or cables are installed in circular raceway^ 
exposed to direct sunlight on or above rooftops, the 
adjustments shown in Table 3 10, 15(B)(3)(c) shall be added 
to the outdoor temperature to determine the applicable 
ambient temperature for application of the correction factors 
in Table 3 1 J 5(B)(2Xa) or Table 310,! 5{BX2Xb). 

Informational Note: One source for the average ambient 
temperatures in various locations is the ASHRAE 
Handbook — Fundamentals. 

Table 310.15(B)(3)(c) Ambient Temperature Adjustment 
for {Conduits Exposed to Sunlight On or Above Rooftops 



Temperature Adder 


Distance Above Roof to 


OQ O-p 


Bottom of Conduit 




0-13mmC/2in.) 


33 60 


Above 13 mm (Yi in.) - 90 mm 


22 40 


(3!/2in.) 




Above 90 mm (3^/2 in.) - 300 


17 30 


mm (12 in.) 




Above 300 mm (12 in.) - 900 


14 25 


mm (36 in.) 





Informational Note to Table 310.15(B)(3)(c): The 
temperature adders in Table 310.15(B)(3)(c) are based 
on the results of averaging the ambient temperatures. 

(4) Bare or Covered Conductors. Where bare or covered 
conductors are installed with insulated conductors, the 
temperature rating of the bare or covered conductor shall be 
equal to the lowest temperature rating of the insulated 
conductors for the purpose of determining ampacity. 

(5) Neutral Conductor. 

(a) A neutral conductor that carries only the 
unbalanced current from other conductors of the same 
circuit shall not be required to be counted when applying 
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a). 

(b) In a 3 -wire circuit consisting of two phase 
conductors and the neutral conductor of a 4-wire, 3-phase, 
wye-connected system, a common conductor carries 
approximately the same current as the line-to-neutral load 
currents of the other conductors and shall be counted 
when applying the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a). 

(c) On a 4-wire, 3-phase wye circuit where the 
major portion of the load consists of nonlinear loads, 
harmonic currents are present in the neutral conductor; the 
neutral conductor shall therefore be considered a current- 
carrying conductor. 

(D Grounding or Bonding Conductor. A grounding or 
bonding conductor shall not be counted when applying 
the provisions of 310.15(BX3)(a). 



70-152 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.15 



(7) 120/240-Vo!t, 3-Wire, Single-Phase Dwelling 
Services and Feeders. For individual dwelling units of 
one-family, two-family, and multifamily dwellings, 
conductors, as listed in Table 310.15(B)(7), shall be 
permitted as 120/240-volt, 3 -wire, single-phase service- 
entrance conductors, service-lateral conductors, and 
feeder conductors that serve as the main power feeder to 
each dwelling unit and are installed in raceway or cable 
with or without an equipment grounding conductor. For 
application of this section, the main power feeder shall be 
the feeder between the main disconnect and the 
panelboard that supplies, either by branch circuits or by 
feeders, or both, all loads that are part or associated with 
the dwelling unit. The feeder conductors to a dwelling 
unit shall not be required to have an allowable ampacity 
rating greater than their service-entrance conductors. The 
grounded conductor shall be permitted to be smaller than 
the ungrounded conductors, provided the requirements of 
215.2, 220.61, and 230.42 are met. 

(C) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering 
supervision, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be 
calculated by means of the following general jequation: 



Table 310.15(B)(7) Conductor Types and Sizes for 120/240- 
Volt, 3-Wire, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders. 
Conductor Types RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, 
THW, THW-2, THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, SE, 
USE, USE-2 





Conductor (AWG 


or kcmil) 


Service or Feeder 
Rating (Amperes) 


Copper 


Aluminum or 

Copper-Clad 

Aluminum 


100 


4 


2 


110 


3 


1 


125 


2 


1/0 


150 


1 


2/0 


175 


1/0 


3/0 


200 


2/0 


4/0 


225 


3/0 


250 


250 


4/0 


300 


300 


250 


350 


350 


350 


500 


400 


400 


600 






X 10 amperes 



where: 

T^, = conductor temperature in degrees Celsius (^C) 

7^ = ambient temperature in degrees Celsius (°C) 

^dc "^ ^^ resistance of conductor at temperature T^ 

Y^ = component ac resistance resulting from skin 
effect and proximity effect 

^ca ^ effective thermal resistance between conductor 
and surrounding ambient 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-153 



310.15 



ARTICLE 310 ~ CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.I5(B)(I6) (formerly Table 310.16) Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated Up to and Includtag 2000 Volts, 
60°C Through 90°C (140°F Through 194°F), Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway, Cable, or Earth 
(Directly Buried), Based on Ambient Temperature of 30°C (86^F)i 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.13.) 






60°C (I40°F) 


75°C 
(167°F) 


90°C (194°F) 


60°C 
(140°F) 


75°C 
(I67°F) 


90°C (194°F) 




Size 
AWGor 


Types TW, UF 


Types 

RHW, 

THHW, 

THW, 

THWN, 
XHHW, 

USE, ZW 


Types TBS, SA, 

SIS, FEP, FEPB, 

MI, RHH, RHW-2, 

THHN, THHW, 
THW-2, THWN-2, 

USE-2, XHH, 

XHHW, .\HHW-2, 

ZW-2 


Types TW, 

UF 


Types 
RHW, 
THHW, 
THW, 
THWN, 
XHHW, 
USE 


Types TBS, SA, 

SIS, THHN, 
THHW, THW-2, 
THWN-2, RHH, 
RHW-2, USE-2, 
XHH, XHHW, 
XHHW-2, ZW-2 


Size AWG or 


kcmil 


COPPER 


ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM 


kcmil 


18 


— 


— 


14 
18 

25 


— 


— 


— 


— 


16 

14** 


B 


20 


— 


— 


— 


— 


12** 


20 


25 


30 


1^ 


20 


25 


1 2 ♦ * 


lor- 


30 


35 


40 


25 


30 


35 


lO** 


8 


40 


50 


55 


M 


40 


45 


8 


6 


55 


65 


75 


40 


50 


._ 


6 


4 


70 


85 


95 


55 


65 


75 


4 


3 


85 


100 


US 


65 


75 


85 


3 


2 


95 


115 


130 


75 


90 


100 


2 


1 


110 


130 


145 


85 


100 


115 


1 


1/0 


125 


150 


170 


100 


120 


135 


1/0 


2/0 


145 


175 


195 


115 


135 


150 


2/0 


3/0 


165 


200 


225 


130 


155 


175 


3/0 


4/0 


195 


230 


260 


150 


180 


205 


4/0 


250 


215 


255 


290 


170 


205 


230 


250 


300 


240 


285 


320 


t**^ 


230 


zm 


300 


350 


260 


310 


350 


210 


250 


280 


350 


400 


280 


335 


380 


225 


270 


305 


400 


500 


320 


380 


430 


260 


310 


350 


500 


600 


^50 


420 


475 


285 


340 


385 


600 


700 


385 


460 


520 


315 


375 


425 


700 


750 


400 


475 


535 


320 


385 


435 


750 


800 


410 


490 


555 


330 


395 


445 


800 


900 


435 


520 


585 


355 


425 


480 


900 


1000 


455 


545 


615 


375 


445 


500 


1000 


1250 


495 


590 


665 


405 


485 


545 


1250 


1500 


525 


625 


705 


435 


520 


585 


1500 


1750 


545 


650 


735 


455 


545 


615 


1750 


2000 


555 


665 


750 


470 


560 


630 


2000 



^Refer lo 3 lOJ 5(B)(2) for the ampacity correction factors where the ambient tcitiperature \% other than 30*°C (86''F). 
** Refer to 24d.4<D) for conductor overcurrent prolection Umftfllioni* 



70-154 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.15 



Table 310.15(6X17) Allowable Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors Rated IJp to and Including 2000 Volts in Free Air, 
Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 30°C (86°FX * 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.13.) 






60°C 
(140°F) 


75°C 
(167°F) 


90°C (194°F) 


60°C (140°F) 


75°C 
(167°F) 


90°C (194°F) 




Size 
AWG 


Types TW, 

LIF 


Types 

RHW, 

THHW, 

THW, 

THWN, 

XHHW, 

ZW 


Types TBS, SA, SIS, 

FEP, FEPB, MI, 

RHH, RHW-2, 

THHN, THHW, 

THW-2, THWN-2, 

USE-2, XHH, 

XHHW, XHHW-2, 

ZW-2 


Types TW, 
UF 


Types 

RHW, 

THHW, 

THW, 

THWN, 

XHHW 


Types TBS, SA, 

SIS, THHN, 
THHW, THW- 

2, THWN-2, 
RHH, RHW-2, 
USE-2, XHH, 

XHHW, 

XHHW-2, ZW- 

2 


Size 
AWG or 


or kcmil 


COPPER 


ALUMINiM OR COPPER-CLAD ALLMINUM 


kcmil 


18 


— 


— 


18 


— 


— 


— 


— 


16 


— 


— 


24 


— 


— 


— 


— 


14** 


25 


30 


35 


— 


— 


— 


— 


12** 


30 


35 


40 


25 


30 


35 


12^* 


10** 


40 


50 


55 


35 


40 


45 


10** 


8 


60 


70 


80 


45 


55 


60 


8 


6 


80 


95 


105 


60 


75 


85 


6 


4 


105 


125 


140 


80 


100 


115 


4 


3 


120 


145 


165 


95 


115 


130 


3 


2 


140 


170 


190 


110 


135 


150 


2 


1 


165 


195 


220 


130 


155 


175 


1 


1/0 


195 


230 


260 


150 


180 


205 


1/0 


2/0 


225 


265 


300 


175 


210 


235 


2/0 


3/0 


260 


310 


350 


200 


240 


170 


3/0 


4/0 


300 


360 


405 


235 


280 


315 


4/0 


250 


340 


405 


455 


265 


315 


355 


250 


300 


375 


445 


■i 


290 


350 


395 


300 


350 


420 


505 


570 


330 


395 


445 


350 


400 


455 


545 


615 


355 


425 


480 


400 


500 


515 


620 


700 


405 


485 


545 


500 


600 


575 


690 


780 


455 


540 


615 


600 


700 


630 


755 


m 


500 


595 


67d 


700 


750 


655 


785 


885 


515 


620 


700 


750 


800 


680 


815 


920 


535 


645 


725 


800 


900 


730 


870 


m 


580 


700 


790 


900 


1000 


780 


935 


1055 


625 


750 


845 


1000 


1250 


890 


1065 


1200 


710 


855 


965 


1250 


1500 


980 


1175 


1325 


795 


950 


107Q 


1500 


1750 


1070 


1280 


1445 


875 


1050 


1185 


1750 


2000 


1155 


1385 


1560 


960 


1150 


:1295 


2000 



pRefer to 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correctjon factors 
P* Refer to 240,4(D) tor conductor overcurrent protection 



where the amtiient tempi^raliire \% other than 30°C (86°F). 
limitations. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-155 



310.15 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.15(B)(18) (formerly Table 310.18) Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated Up to and Including 2000 
Volts, 150°C Through 250°C (302°F Through 482''F). Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway or 
Cable, Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104^F) * 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.13.) 






150°C (302°F) 


200°C (392°F) 


250°C (482°F) 


150°C (302°F) 








Types FEP, FEPB, 










TypeZ 


PFA, SA 


Types PFAH, TFE 


TypeZ 








NICKEL OR 


ALUMINUM OR 








NICKEL-COATED 
COPPER 


COPPER-CLAD 

ALUMINUM 


SizeAWGorkcmil 


SizeAWGorkcmil 


COPPER 








14 


34 


36 


39 


— 


14 


12 


43 


45 


54 


30 


12 


10 


55 


60 


73 


44 


10 


8 


76 


83 


93 


57 


8 


6 


96 


110 


117 


75 


6 


4 


120 


125 


148 


94 


4 


3 


143 


152 


166 


109 


3 


2 


160 


171 


191 


124 


2 


1 


186 


197 


215 


145 


1 


1/0 


215 


229 


244 


169 


1/0 


2/0 


251 


260 


273 


198 


2/0 


3/0 


288 


297 


308 


227 


3/0 


4/0 


332 


346 


361 


260 


4/0 



pRefer lo 310.15(B)(2) for the ampacity correclioii factors where the ambient temperatare 1% other thati 40°C (104^F). 



Table 310.15(B)(19) Allowable Ampacities of Single-Insulated Conductors, Rated Up to and Including 2000 Volts, ISO^C Through 
250°C (SOl'^F Through 482°F), in Free Air, Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40^C (104°F) * 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.13.) 






150°C 

(302°F) 


200°C(392°F) 


250°C(482°F) 


150°C(302°F) 






TypeZ 


Types FEP, 
FEPB, PFA, SA 


Types PFAH, IJbE 


TypeZ 




SizeAWGorkcmil 


COPPER 


NICKF,L„ OR NICKEL- 
COATED COPPER 


ALUJVIINUM OR COPPER- 
CLAD ALUMINUM 


SizeAWGorkcmil 


14 


46 


54 


59 


— 


14 


12 


60 


68 


78 


47 


12 


10 


80 


90 


107 


63 


10 


8 


106 


124 


142 


83 


8 


6 


155 


165 


205 


112 


6 


4 


190 


220 


278 


148 


4 


3 


214 


252 


327 


170 


3 


2 


255 


293 


381 


198 


2 


1 


293 


344 


440 


228 


1 


1/0 


339 


399 


532 


263 


1/0 


2/0 


390 


467 


591 


305 


2/0 


3/0 


451 


546 


708 


351 


3/0 


4/0 


529 


629 


830 


411 


4/0 



*Rcfer to 310.15(BK2) For fbe jimpAcit> correctioD factors where ihe ambient temperature is other tban 40^C (104^F). 



70-156 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.15 



Table 310.15(8X20) Ampacities of Not More Than Three Single Insulated Conductors, Rated Up to and 
Supported on a Messenger, Based on Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F) * 


Including 2000 Volts, 




Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.13.) 






75°C(167°F) 


90°C(194°F) 


7S°C (167<^F) 


90°Ca94°F) 






Types RHW, 

THHW,THW, 

THWN,XHHW, 

ZW 


Types MI, THHN, 
THHW,THW-2, 
THWN-2,RHH, 
RHW-2,USE-2, 
XHHW,XHHW- 
2,ZW-2 


Types RHW,THW, 
THWN, THHW, XHHW 


Types THHN, THHW, 

RHH,XHHW,RHW-2, 

XHHW-2,THW-2, 

THWN-2,USE-2,ZW-2 




SizeAWGorkcmil 


COPPER 


ALUMINLTM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM 


SizeAWGorkcmil 


8 


57 


66 


44 


51 


8 


6 


16 


89 


59 


69 


6 


4 


101 


117 


78 


91 


4 


3 


118 


138 


92 


107 


3 


2 


135 


158 


106 


123 


2 


1 


158 


185 


123 


144 


1 


1/0 


183 


214 


143 


167 


1/0 


2/0 


212 


247 


165 


193 


2/0 


3/0 


245 


287 


192 


224 


3/0 


4/0 


287 


335 


224 


262 


4/0 


250 


320 


374 


251 


292 


250 


300 


359 


419 


282 


328 


300 


350 


397 


464 


312 


364 


350 


400 


430 


503 


339 


395 


400 


500 


496 


580 


392 


458 


500 


600 


553 


647 


440 


514 


600 


700 


610 


714 


488 


570 


700 


750 


638 


747 


512 


598 


750 


800 


660 


773 


532 


622 


800 


900 


704 


826 


572 


669 


900 


1000 


748 


879 


612 


716 


1000 



*Refer to 310.15(B)(2) f«r the ampacity correction factors where the imbient (eii)p^rature Is other tbiii 40''C |lp4°F). 



Table 310T5(B)(Z1) Ampacities of Bare or Covered Conductors in Free Air, Based on 40°C (104°F) Ambient, 80°C (176^F) Total 
Conductor Temperature, 610 mm/sec (2 ft/sec) Wind Velocity 





Copper 


Conductors 






AAC Aluminum Conductors 






Bare 




Covered 




Bare 


Covered 




AWGor 




AWG 




AWGor 




AWGor 




kcmil 


Amperes 


or kcmil 


Amperes 


kcmil 


Amperes 


kcmil 


Amperes 


8 


98 


8 


103 


8 


76 


8 


80 


6 


124 


6 


130 


6 


96 


6 


101 


4 


155 


4 


163 


4 


121 


4 


127 


2 


209 


2 


219 


2 


163 


2 


171 


1/0 


282 


1/0 


297 


1/0 


220 


1/0 


231 


2/0 


329 


2/0 


344 


2/0 


255 


2/0 


268 


3/0 


382 


3/0 


401 


3/0 


297 


3/0 


312 


4/0 


444 


4/0 


466 


4/0 


346 


4/0 


364 


250 


494 


250 


519 


266.8 


403 


266.8 


423 


300 


556 


300 


584 


336.4 


468 


336.4 


492 


500 


773 


500 


812 


397.5 


522 


397.5 


548 


750 


1000 


750 


1050 


477.0 


588 


477.0 


617 


1000 


1193 


1000 


1253 


556.5 


650 


556.5 


682 


— 


— 


— 


— 


636.0 


709 


636.0 


744 


— 


— 


— 


„ 


795.0 


819 


795.0 


860 


— 


— 


— 


— 


954.0 


920 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


1033.5 


968 


1033.5 


1017 


— 


— 


— 


— 


1272 


1103 


1272 


1201 


— 


— 


— 


— 


1590 


1267 


1590 


1381 


— 


— 


— 


— 


2000 


1454 


2000 


1527 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-157 



310.60 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts. 

(A) Definitions. 

Electrical Ducts. As used in Article 310, electrical ducts 
shall include any of the electrical conduits recognized in 
Chapter 3 as suitable for use underground; other raceways 
round in cross section, listed for underground use, and 
embedded in earth or concrete. 

Thermal Resistivity. As used in this Code, the heat 
transfer capability through a substance by conduction. It 
is the reciprocal of thermal conductivity and is designated 
Rho and expressed in the units °C -cm/watt. 

(B) Ampacities of Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 
Volts. Ampacities for solid dielectric-insulated 
conductors shall be permitted to be determined by tables 
or under engineering supervision, as provided in 
310.60(C) and (D). 

(1) Selection of Ampacity. Where more than one 
calculated or tabulated ampacity could apply for a given 
circuit length, the lowest value shall be used. 

Exception: Where two different ampacities apply to 
adjacent portions of a circuit, the higher ampacity shall 
be permitted to be used beyond the point of transition, a 
distance equal to 3.0 m (10 ft) or 10 percent of the circuit 
length calculated at the higher ampacity, whichever is 
less. 

Informational Note: See 110.40 for conductor 
temperature limitations due to termination provisions. 

(C) Tables. Ampacities for conductors rated 2001 to 
35,000 vohs shall be as specified in Table 310.60(C)(67) 
through Table 310.60(0X86). Ampacities for ambient 
temperatures other than those specified in the ampacity 
tables shall be corrected in accordance wilH 310.60(C)(4). 

Informational Note No. 1; For ampacities calculated in 
accordance with 310.60(B), reference IEEE 835-1994 
(IPCEA Pub. No. P-46-426), Standard Power Cable 
Ampacity Tables, and the references therein for 
availability of all factors and constants. 

Informational Note No. 2: Ampacities provided by this 
section do not take voltage drop into consideration. See 
210.19(A), Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits 
and 215.2(A), Informational Note No. 2, for feeders. 

(1) Grounded Shields. Ampacities shown in Table 
3 1 0.60(C)(69). Table 3 1 0.60( CK70X Table 
310.60(C)(8J), and Table 310.60(C)(82) are for cable 
with shields grounded at one point only. Where shields 
are grounded at more than one point, ampacities shall be 
adjusted to take into consideration the heating due to 
shield currents. 

(2) Burial Depth of Underground Circuits. Where the 
burial depth of direct burial or electrical duct bank circuits 
is modified from the values shown in a figure or table, 
ampacities shall be permitted to be modified as indicated 
in (C)(2)(a) and (C)(2)(b). 



(a) Where burial depths are increased in part(s) of an 
electrical duct run, no decrease in ampacity of the 
conductors is needed, provided the total length of parts of 
the duct run increased in depth is less than 25 percent of 
the total run length. 

(b) Where burial depths are deeper than shown in a 
specific underground ampacity table or figure, an 
ampacity derating factor of 6 percent per 300-mm (1-ft) 
increase in depth for all values of rho shall be permitted. 

No rating change is needed where the burial depth is decreased. 

(3) Electrical Ducts in Figure 310.60. At locations where 
electrical ducts enter equipment enclosures from under 
ground, spacing between such ducts, as shown in Figure 
310.60, shall be permitted to be reduced without requiring 
the ampacity of conductors therein to be reduced. 

(4) Ambient Temperature Correction. Ampacities for 
ambient temperatures other than those specified in ihe 
ampacity tables shall be corrected in accordance with 
Tabic 310,60(C)(4)(4) or shall be permitted to be 
calculated using the following equation: 



/'=/ 



V 



T -T 



T - T 



where: 

/' = ampacity corrected for ambient temperature 

/ = ampacity shown in the tables 

T^ = temperature rating of conductor C^C) 

r^' ^ new ambient temperature (*^C) 

Tq = ambient temperature used in the table C^C) 

(D) Engineering Supervision. Under engineering 
supervision, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be 
calculated by using the following general equation: 






X 10 amperes 



where: 

T^^ = conductor temperature CC) 
T^ ^ ambient temperature (°C) 
A7j= dielectric loss temperature rise 
R^ = dc resistance of conductor at temperature 7^, 
y^. = component ac resistance resulting from skin effect 
and proximity effect 



xa 



effective tliermal ivsistance between conductor 

and surrounding ambient 
Informational Note: Tlie dielectric loss temperature rise 
(AT^) is negligible for single circuit extruded dielectric 

cables rated below 46 kV. 



70-158 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 



^■(i)^' 



Detail 1 

290 mm x 290 mm 
(11.5 in.x 11.5 in.) 
Electrical duct bank 
One electrical duct 










E 
E 



190 mm (7.5 in.) 

Detail 2 

475 mm x 475 mm 
(19in.x 19 in.) 
Electrical duct bank 
Three electrical ducts 

or 



^m* 



190 mm 
(7.5 in.) 



190 mm 
(7.5 In.) 



675 mm x 290 mm 
(27 in. x 11.5 in,) 
Electrical duct bank 
Three electrical ducts 




190 mm (7.5 in.) 



Detail 3 

475 mm x 675 mm 
(19 in, x 27 in,) 
Electrical duct bank 
Six electrical ducts 
or 




190 mm 
(7.5 in.) 



190 mm 
(7.5 in.) 



675 mm x 475 mm 
(27 in, x 19 in:) 
Electrical duct bank 
Six electrical ducts 



600 mm 



Detail 5 

Buried 3 

conductor 

cable 

190 mm 
(7.5 in.) 



(24 in.; 



Detail 6 

Buried 3 

conductor 

cables 



190 mm 
(7.5 in.) 



Detail 7 

Buried triplexed 
cables (1 circuit) 

190 mm 190 mm 
(7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) 



.C 



600 mm 



600 mm 



(24 in. 



I 



Detail 8 

Buried triplexed 
cables (2 circuits) 

190 mm 190 mm 
(7.5 in.) (7.5 in.) 



(24 in.) 



Detail 9 

Buried single-conductor 
cables (1 circuit) 



Detail 10 

Buried single-conductor 
cables (2 circuits) 



Note: Minimum burial depths to top electrical ducts or cables shall be 
in accordance with 300.50. Maximum depth to the top of electrical 
duct banks shall be 750 mm (30 In.) and maximum depth to the top 
of direct buried cables shall be 900 mm (36 in.). 



Legend 

idjj Backfill (earth or concrete) 
O Electrical duct 
^ Cable or cables 



Figure 310.60 Cable Installation Dimensions for Use with Table ilOM{C)(17) Through Table 310.60(C)(86) 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-159 



310.60 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.60(C)(4) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors 

For ambient temperatures other than 40°C (104°F), multiply the 

allowable ampacities specified in the ampacity tables by the 

appropriate factor shown below. 



Ambient 
Temperature 


Temperature Rating of 
Conductor 


Ambient 
Temperature 


(°C) 


90°C 


105°C 


(°F) 


10 or less 


1.26 


1.21 


50 or less 


11-15 


1.22 


1.18 


51-59 


16-20 


1.18 


1.14 


60^8 


21-25 


1.14 


1.11 


69-77 


26-30 


1.10 


1.07 


78-86 


31-35 


1.05 


1.04 


87-95 


36^0 


1.00 


1.00 


96-104 


41^5 


0.95 


0.96 


105-113 


46-50 


0.89 


0.92 


114-122 


51-55 


0.84 


0.88 


123-131 


56-60 


0.77 


0.83 


132-140 


61-65 


0.71 


0.78 


141-149 


66-70 


0.63 


0.73 


150-158 


71-75 


0.55 


0.68 


159-167 


76-80 


0.45 


0.62 


168-176 


81-85 


0.32 


0.55 


177-185 


86-90 


_ 


0.48 


186-194 


91-95 


— 


0.39 


195-203 


96-100 


— 


0.28 


204-212 



Table 310.iO(C)(67) Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper 
Conductor Cables Triplexed in Air Based on Conductor 
Temperatures of 90^C (194°F) and 105°C (22rF) and 
Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (1Q4°F) * 

Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.13 
(Q,l 



2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 



5001-35,000 Volts 
Ampacity 



Conductor 

Size 

(AWG 

or kcmil) 



90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105°C 
(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 



90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105°C 
(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 



65 
90 

120 
160 
185 



74 
99 
130 
175 
205 



100 
130 
170 
195 



110 
140 
195 

225 



1/0 
2/0 
3/0 
4/0 



215 
250 
290 
335 



240 

275 
320 

375 



225 
260 
300 
345 



255 
295 
340 
390 



250 
350 
500 
750 
1000 



375 
465 
580 
750 
880 



415 
515 
645 
835 
980 



380 
470 
580 
730 
850 



430 
525 
650 
820 
950 



^^efer to ii^.M(Cj(4ytir the flfnpacity correcrioirfactort where the 
ambient temperature k other thaa40^C(104''F). 



Table 310.60(0(68) Ampacities of Insulated Single 
Aluminum Conductor Cables Triplexed in Air Based on 
Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105^C (22rF) 
and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F)| *i 





Temperature Rating of Conductor [See Table 310.13 








(C).l 








2001-5000 Volts 




5001 


-35,000 




Ampacity 




Volts J 
90'^C 


\mpacity 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


105°C 


Size 


(i94°r) 


(221°F) 




(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(AWG or 


Type 


Type 




Type 


Type 


kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV- 
105 




MV-90 


MV- 
105 


8 


50 


57 




— 


— 


6 


70 


77 




75 


84 


4 


90 


100 




100 


no 


2 


125 


135 




130 


150 


1 


145 


160 




150 


175 



1/0 


170 


185 


175 


200 


2/0 


195 


215 


200 


230 


3/0 


225 


250 


230 


265 


4/0 


265 


290 


270 


305 



250 


295 


325 


300 


335 


350 


365 


405 


370 


415 


500 


460 


510 


460 


515 


750 


600 


665 


590 


660 


1000 


715 


800 


700 


780 



^Refcr to 310.60(0(4} for the ampucit)' correctlaa factors where the 
iimbjent temperature U other lhfln^^^4^ 

Table 310.j&0(C)(69) Ampacities of Insulated Single Copper 
Conductor Isolated in Air Based on Conductor Temperatures of 
90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 

40°C (104°F) * 

Temperature Rating of Conductor 
(See Table 310.61.) 



2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 



5001-15,000 



15,001-35,000 



Volts Ampacity Volts Ampacity 



Conduc 90^ 

tnr (194°F) 

Siae Type 

(AWG MV-90 

kcmil) 



10S°C 
(221°F) 
Type 

MV- 
105 



90^ 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105^ 
(221°F) 
Type 

MV- 
105 



90^ 105^ 

(194°F) (22PF) 

Type T>pe 

MV-90 MV- 

105 



83 
110 
145 
190 

225 



93 
120 
160 
215 
250 



110 
150 
195 

225 



125 
165 
215 
250 



225 



250 



1/0 
2/0 
3/0 
4/0 



260 
300 
345 
400 



290 
330 
385 
445 



260 
300 
345 
400 



290 
335 
385 
445 



260 
300 
345 
395 



290 
330 
380 
445 



250 
350 
500 
750 



445 
550 
695 
900 



495 
615 

775 
1000 



445 
550 
685 
885 



495 
610 
765 
990 



440 
545 
680 

870 



490 
605 

755 
970 



1000 
1250 
1500 
1750 
2000 



1075 
1230 
1365 
1495 
1605 



1200 
1370 
1525 
1665 
1790 



1060 
1210 
1345 
1470 
1575 



1185 
1350 
1500 
1640 

1755 



1040 
1185 
1315 
1430 
1535 



1160 
1320 
1465 
1595 
1710 



*Refcr to 310.60(C)(4) Tor the ampacity 
ambient temperature Is other than 40^C 



correction factori where the 
(104*F). 



70-160 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 



Table 310.60(C)(70)i Ampacities of Insulated Single 
Aluminum Conductor Isolated in Air Based on Conductor 
Temperatures of 90°C (194^F) and I05^C (lirF) and 
Ambient Air Temperature of 40''C (104^F) * 

Temperature Rating of Conductor 

(See Table 310.61.) 



Conductor 

Size 

(AWG 

or kcmil) 



2001-5000 

Volts 
Ampacity 



90°C 
(194 

°¥) 
Type 

MV- 
90 



105°C 

(221° 

F) 
Type 
MV- 

105 



5001-15,000 

Volts 

Ampacity 



90°C 
(194 

°F) 
Type 
MV- 

90 



105°C 
(221° 

F) 
Type 
MV- 

105 



15,001-35,000 

Volts 

Ampacity 



90°C 
(194 

°F) 
Type 

MV- 
90 



105°C 
(221° 

F) 
Type 

MV- 
105 



64 
85 
115 
150 
175 



71 
95 
125 
165 
195 



87 
115 
150 

175 



97 
130 
170 
195 



175 



195 



1/0 


200 


225 


200 


225 


200 


225 


2/0 


230 


260 


235 


260 


230 


260 


3/0 


270 


300 


270 


300 


270 


300 


4/0 


310 


350 


310 


350 


310 


345 


250 


345 


385 


345 


385 


345 


380 


350 


430 


480 


430 


480 


430 


475 


500 


545 


605 


535 


600 


530 


590 


750 


710 


790 


700 


780 


685 


765 



1000 855 

1250 980 

1500 1105 

1750 1215 

2000 1320 

FRfifer to 3I0^<C)(4) for the ampadty 
bmbient temptraturv U other thaa 40^ 



950 
1095 
1230 
1355 
1475 



840 
970 
1085 
1195 
1295 



940 
1080 
1215 
1335 
1445 



825 
950 
1060 
1165 
1265 



920 
1055 
1180 
1300 
1410 



carrectloD factors where the 



Table 310.(iO(C)(71) Ampacities of an Insulated Three- 
Conductor Copper Cable Isolated in Air Based on 
Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and lOS^C (22PF) 
and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104^F) * 



Table 310.60(CK72) Ampacities of an Insulated Three- 
Conductor Aluminum Cable Isolated in Air Based on 
Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) 
and Ambient Air Temperature of 40^C (104°F) * 

Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 
310.61.) 



Conductor 

Size 

(AWG 

or kcmil) 



2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 



5001-35,000 Volts 
Ampacity 



90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105°C 

(221°F) 

Type 

MV-105 



90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105°C 

(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 



46 
61 
81 
110 

125 



51 

68 

90 

120 

140 



72 
95 
125 
145 



80 
105 
145 
165 



1/0 
2/0 


145 
170 


160 
185 


170 
190 


185 
215 


3/0 
4/0 


195 

225 


215 
250 


220 

255 


245 
285 



250 
350 
500 
750 
1000 



250 


280 


310 


345 


385 


430 


495 


550 


585 


650 



280 
345 
425 
540 
635 



315 
385 
475 
600 
705 



^Refer to M 0,60(0(4) for the ainpacity correcrion faciors where the 
ainbteni temperature » other than 4a°C (104'>^F). 



Table 310.60(C)(73) Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed or 
Three Single-Conductor Copper Cables in Isolated Conduit 
in Air Based on Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) 
and 105°C (22PF) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40^C 
(104°F)| 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 






Temperature Rating of Conductor 








310.61.) 








(See Table 310.104(C).) 






2001-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 


2001- 


5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




Ampa 


city 


Ampacity 


Conductor 


Ampacity 


Ampacity 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


or kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV-105 


MV-90 


MV-105 


or kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV-105 


MV-90 


MV-105 


8 


59 


66 


— 


— 


8 


55 


61 


— 


— 


6 


79 


88 


93 


105 


6 


75 


84 


83 


93 


4 


105 


115 


120 


135 


4 


97 


110 


110 


120 


2 


140 


154 


165 


185 


2 


130 


145 


150 


165 


1 


160 


180 


185 


210 


1 


155 


175 


170 


190 



1/0 


185 


205 


215 


240 


2/0 


215 


240 


245 


275 


3/0 


250 


280 


285 


315 


4/0 


285 


320 


325 


360 



1/0 


180 


200 


195 


215 


2/0 


205 


225 


225 


255 


3/0 


240 


270 


260 


290 


4/0 


280 


305 


295 


330 



250 


320 


355 


360 


400 


250 


315 


355 


330 


365 


350 


395 


440 


435 


490 


350 


385 


430 


395 


440 


500 


485 


545 


535 


600 


500 


475 


530 


480 


535 


750 


615 


685 


670 


745 


750 


600 


665 


585 


655 


1000 


705 


790 


770 


860 


1000 


690 


770 


675 


755 



'Refer to 3[0,60(C)(4) for the aiiipadt>' correction factors where the 
ambient temperature is other than 40^C (104**F). 



*Refer to 310.60(C)(4) for the ampacity correctfon facton where ttm 
ambient temperature H other tbao 40^C (104^F). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-161 



310.60 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.60(C)(74) Ampacities of an Insulated Triplexed 
or Three Single-Conductor Aluminum Cables in Isolated 
Conduit in Air Based on Conductor Temperatures of 90°C 

(194^F) and 105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 
40°C (104°F)* 



Table 310.<iO(C)(76) Ampacities of an Insulated Three- 
Conductor Aluminum Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air 
Based on Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 
105°C (221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40^C 
(104°F) ■ 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 




Temperat 


ure Rating of Conductor (See 


! Table 






310.61. 


) 








310.61 


) 






2001-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 


2001-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




Ampa 


city 


Ampacity 


Conductor 

Size 

(AWG 

or kcmil) 


Ampacity 


Ampacity 


Conductor 

Size 

(AWG 

or kcmil) 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 
(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 
(221 °F) 

Type 
MV-105 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 
(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 


90<=>C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 

(221 °F) 

Type 
MV-105 


g 


43 

58 


48 
65 


65 


72 




6 


8 


41 


46 


— 


— 


4 


76 


85 


84 


94 


6 


53 


59 


64 


71 


2 


TOO 


115 


115 


130 


4 


71 


79 


84 


94 


.1 


120 


135 


130 


150 


2 
1 


96 
110 


105 
125 


115 
130 


125 


I/O 


140 
160 


155 
175 


150 
175 


170 
200 


145 


2/0 


1/0 


130 


145 


150 


170 


3/0 


190 


210 


200 


225 


2/0 


150 


165 


170 


190 


4/0 


215 


240 


230 


260 


3/0 
4/0 


170 

200 


190 

225 


195 

225 


220 


250 
350 
500 
750 


250 
305 
380 
490 


280 
340 
425 
545 


255 
310 
385 
485 


290 
350 
430 
540 


255 


250 
350 


220 

275 


245 
305 


250 
305 


280 
340 


1000 


580 


645 


565 


640 


500 
750 
1000 


340 
430 
505 


380 
480 
560 


380 
470 
550 


425 


*Referfo 310.6 


HC)(4) for rhe 3iinpacie> correc 
ature is o4her than 4rC (104° 


tion factors 


where the 


520 


flmbieni icmpei 


F). 




615 



Table 310.60(C)(75j Ampacities of an Insulated Three- 
Conductor Copper Cable in Isolated Conduit in Air Based 
on Conductor Temperatures of 90^C (194^F) and 105°C 
(221°F) and Ambient Air Temperature of 40°C (104°F) * 

Temperature Rating of Conductor 
(See Table 310.61.) 



*Refer to 310.60(C)(4) for the ampacity' correclion ractors where the 
ambieiit temperature k oilier than 4fFC (104''F). 



2001-5000 
Volts Ampacity 



5001-35,000 
Volts Ampacity 



Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


Size 


(194°F) 


(22I°F) 


(194°F) 


(221 °F) 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


or kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV-105 


MV-90 


MV-105 


8 


52 


58 


— 


— 


6 


69 


77 


83 


92 


4 


91 


100 


105 


120 


2 


125 


135 


145 


165 


1 


140 


155 


165 


185 


1/0 


165 


185 


195 


215 


2/0 


190 


210 


220 


245 


3/0 


220 


245 


250 


280 


4/0 


255 


285 


290 


320 


250 


280 


315 


315 


350 


350 


350 


390 


385 


430 


500 


425 


475 


470 


525 


750 


525 


585 


570 


635 


1000 


590 


660 


650 


725 



-Kerer fo Jiu.ou^^i^ )\<^f lor ine ampaciiy correciiiii 
ambient temperature iy other ihim 40°C 004°F)* 



70-162 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 



Table 310,6(KC)(77) Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated 
Copper Conductors in Underground Electrical Ducts (Three 
Conductors per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient Earth 
Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Electrical Duct Arrangement 
in Accoitlance with Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, 
Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures 
of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) _^ 

Temperature Rating of Conductor 
(See Table 310.61.) 



2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 



5001-35,000 Volts 
Ampacity 



Conductor 
Size 

(AWG 
or kcmil) 



90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 



105°C 

(22PF) 
Type 
MV- 
105 



90°C 
(194''F) 

Type 
MV-90 



One Circuit (See Figure 310.60, Detail 1.) 



64 
85 
110 
145 
170 



69 
92 
120 
155 
180 



1/0 
2/0 
3/0 
4/0 



195 
220 
250 
290 



210 
235 
270 
310 



250 
350 
500 
750 
1000 



320 
385 
470 
585 
670 



345 
415 
505 
630 

720 



Three Circuits (See Figure 310.60, Detail 2.) 



56 
73 
95 
125 
140 



60 
79 
100 
130 
150 



1/0 
2/0 
3/0 
4/0 



160 175 

185 195 

210 225 

235 255 



250 
350 
500 
750 
1000 



260 
315 

375 
460 

525 



280 
335 
405 
495 
565 



Six Circuits (See Figure 310.60, Detail 3.) 



48 
62 
80 
105 
115 



52 
67 
86 
110 
125 



1/0 
2/0 
3/0 
4/0 



135 
150 
170 
195 



145 
160 
185 
210 



250 
350 
500 
750 
1000 



210 
250 
300 
365 
410 



225 
270 
325 
395 
445 



90 
115 
155 

175 



200 
230 
260 
295 



325 
390 
465 
565 
640 



77 
99 
130 

145 



165 
185 
210 
240 



260 
310 
370 
440 
495 



64 

82 
105 
120 



135 
150 
170 
190 



210 
245 
290 
350 
390 



105°C 

(22rF) 
Type 
MV- 
105 



97 
125 
165 
185 



215 

245 
275 
315 



345 
415 
500 
610 
690 



83 
105 
135 
155 



175 
200 
225 
255 



280 
330 
395 
475 
535 



68 
88 
115 
125 



145 
165 

185 
205 



225 
265 
310 
375 
415 



Table 310.jS0(C)(78) Ampacities of Three Single-Insulated 
Aluminum Conductors in Underground Electrical Ducts 
(Three Conductors per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient 
Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Electrical Duct 
Arrangement in Accordance with Figure 310.60, 100 Percent 



Load Factor, 


Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, 


Conductor 


Temperatures 


; of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C (221°F) 






Temperature Rating of Conductor 






(See Table 310.61.) 






2001- 


-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




Ampacity 


Ampacity 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105^C 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(194°F) 


(22rF) 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


or kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV-105 


MV-90 


MV-105 


One Circuit (See Figure 310.60, Detail 1.) 


8 


50 


54 


— 


^ 


6 


66 


71 


70 


75 


4 


86 


93 


91 


98 


2 


115 


125 


120 


130 


1 


130 


140 


135 


145 


1/0 


150 


160 


155 


165 


2/0 


170 


185 


175 


190 


3/0 


195 


210 


200 


215 


4/0 


225 


245 


230 


245 


250 


250 


270 


250 


270 


350 


305 


325 


305 


330 


500 


370 


400 


370 


400 


750 


470 


505 


455 


490 


1000 


545 


590 


525 


565 


Three Circuits (See Figure 


310.60, Detafl 2.) 






8 


44 


47 


— 


— 


6 


57 


61 


60 


65 


4 


74 


80 


77 


83 


2 


96 


105 


100 


105 


1 


110 


120 


110 


120 


1/0 


125 


135 


125 


140 


2/0 


145 


155 


145 


155 


3/0 


160 


175 


165 


175 


4/0 


185 


200 


185 


200 


250 


205 


220 


200 


220 


350 


245 


265 


245 


260 


500 


295 


320 


290 


315 


750 


370 


395 


355 


385 


1000 


425 


460 


405 


440 


Six Circuits (See Figure 


310.60, Detail 3.) 






8 


38 


41 


^ 


,^ 


6 


48 


52 


50 


54 


4 


62 


67 


64 


69 


2 


80 


86 


80 


88 


1 


91 


98 


90 


99 


1/0 


105 


110 


105 


no 


2/0 


115 


125 


115 


125 


3/0 


135 


145 


130 


145 


4/0 


150 


165 


150 


160 


250 


165 


180 


165 


175 


350 


195 


210 


195 


210 


500 


240 


255 


230 


250 


750 


290 


315 


280 


305 


1000 


335 


360 


320 


345 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-163 



310.60 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.60(C)(79) Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper 
Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three- 
Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical Ducts (One 
Cable per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient Earth 
Temperature of 20°C (68^F), Electrical Duct Arrangement 
In Accordance with Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, 
Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures 
of 90°C (194°F) and 105^C (221°C) 



Table 310.60(Q(80) Ampacities of Three Insulated 
Aluminum Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering 
(Three-Conductor Cable) in Underground Electrical Ducts 
(One Cable per Electrical Duct) Based on Ambient Earth 
Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Electrical Duct Arrangement 
in Accordance with Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, 
Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures 
of 90°C (194°F) andl05°C (22PC) 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 

310.61.) 
2001-5000 Volts 5001-35,000 Volts 




Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 
310.61.) 






2001-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




Ampacity 


Ampacity 




Ampacity 


Ampacity 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105*^C 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


Size 


(194°F) 


(22rF) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(AWG 
or kcmil) 


Type 
MV-90 


Type 
MV-105 


Type 
MV-90 


Type 
MV-105 


(AWG 
or kcmil) 


Type 
MV-90 


Type 
MV-105 


Type 
MV-90 


Type 
MV-105 


One Circuit (See Figure 310.60, Detail 1.) 






One Circuit (S 


ee Figure 


310.60, Detail 1.) 






8 


59 


64 


— 


— 


8 


46 


50 


— 


— 


6 


78 


84 


88 


95 


6 


61 


66 


69 


74 


4 


100 


110 


115 


125 


4 


80 


86 


89 


96 


2 


135 


145 


150 


160 


2 


105 


110 


115 


125 


1 


155 


165 


170 


185 


1 


120 


130 


135 


145 


1/0 


175 


190 


195 


210 


1/0 


140 


150 


150 


165 


2/0 


200 


220 


220 


235 


2/0 


160 


170 


170 


185 


3/0 


230 


250 


250 


270 


3/0 


180 


195 


195 


210 


4/0 


265 


285 


285 


305 


4/0 


205 


220 


220 


240 


250 


290 


315 


310 


335 


250 


230 


245 


245 


265 


350 


355 


380 


375 


400 


350 


280 


310 


295 


315 


500 


430 


460 


450 


485 


500 


340 


365 


355 


385 


750 


530 


570 


545 


585 


750 


425 


460 


440 


475 


1000 


600 


645 


615 


660 


1000 


495 


535 


510 


545 


Three Circuits (See Figure 310.60, Detail 2.) 




Three Circuits (See Figure 310.60, Detail 2.) 




8 


53 


57 


— 


— 


8 


41 


44 


— 


— 


6 


69 


74 


75 


81 


6 


54 


58 


59 


64 


4 


89 


96 


97 


105 


4 


70 


75 


75 


81 


2 


115 


125 


125 


135 


2 


90 


97 


100 


105 


1 


135 


145 


140 


155 


1 


105 


110 


110 


120 


1/0 


150 


165 


160 


175 


1/0 


120 


125 


125 


135 


2/0 


170 


185 


185 


195 


2/0 


135 


145 


140 


155 


3/0 


195 


210 


205 


220 


3/0 


155 


165 


160 


175 


4/0 


225 


240 


230 


250 


4/0 


175 


185 


180 


195 


250 


245 


265 


255 


270 


250 


190 


205 


200 


215 


350 


295 


315 


305 


325 


350 


230 


250 


240 


255 


500 


355 


380 


360 


385 


500 


280 


300 


285 


305 


750 


430 


465 


430 


465 


750 


345 


375 


350 


375 


1000 


485 


520 


485 


515 


1000 


400 


430 


400 


430 


Six Circuits (S 


ee Figure 

46 


310.60, Detail 3.) 

50 






Six Circuits (S 


ee Figure 


310.60, Detail 3.) 






8 


8 


36 


39 


— 


— 


6 


60 


65 


63 


68 


6 


46 


50 


49 


53 


4 


77 


83 


81 


87 


4 


60 


65 


63 


68 


2 


98 


105 


105 


110 


2 


77 


83 


80 


86 


1 


110 


120 


115 


125 


1 


87 


94 


90 


98 


I/O 


125 


135 


130 


145 


1/0 


99 


105 


105 


110 


2/0 


145 


155 


150 


160 


2/0 


110 


120 


115 


125 


3/0 


165 


175 


170 


180 


3/0 


130 


140 


130 


140 


4/0 


185 


200 


190 


200 


4/0 


145 


155 


150 


160 


250 


200 


220 


205 


220 


250 


160 


170 


160 


170 


350 


240 


270 


245 


275 


350 


190 


205 


190 


205 


500 


290 


310 


290 


305 


500 


230 


245 


230 


245 


750 


350 


375 


340 


365 


750 


280 


305 


275 


295 


1000 


390 


420 


380 


405 


1000 


320 


345 


315 


335 



70-164 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 



Table 31O.60(C)(B1) Ampacities of Single Insulated Copper 
Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Based on Ambient 
Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement jper Figure 
310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal Resistance (RHO) 
of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C (194°F) and 105°C 
(221°C) 



Table 310.60(C)(82) Ampacities of Single Insulated 
Aluminum Conductors Directly Buried in Earth Based on 
Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement 
per Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal 
Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C 
(194°F) andl05°C (221°F) 







Temperature 


Rating of Conductor 




Temperature Rating of Conductor (See 


Table 






(See Table 310.61.) 








310.61) 








2001- 


5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




2001-5000 Volts 


5001-35,000 Volts 




Ampacity 


Ampacity 




Ampacity 


Ampacity 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


Conductor 


90°C 


105°C 


90°C 


105°C 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


Size 


(194°F) 


(221 °F) 


(194°F) 


(221°F) 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


(AWG 


Type 


Type 


Type 


Type 


or kcmil) 


MY-90 


MY-IOS 


MV-90 


MV-105 


or kcmil) 


MV-90 


MV- 
105 


MV-90 


MV-105 


ifx_ _ _ /~i*_^— . Ia- 


Three Conductors (See 


Figure 310.60, Detail 9.) 




One Circuit, 


One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 9.) 




8 


110 


115 
































8 


85 


90 


— 


— 


6 


140 


150 


130 


140 






















6 


110 


115 


100 


110 


4 


180 


195 


170 


180 






















4 


140 


150 


130 


140 


2 


230 


250 


210 


225 






















2 


180 


195 


165 


175 


1 


260 


280 


240 


260 






















1 


205 


220 


185 


200 


1/0 


295 


320 


275 


295 






















1/0 


230 


250 


215 


230 


2/0 


335 


365 


310 


335 






















2/0 


265 


285 


245 


260 


3/0 


385 


415 


355 


380 






















3/0 


300 


320 


275 


295 


4/0 


435 


465 


405 


435 






















4/0 


340 


365 


315 


340 


250 


470 


510 


440 


475 






















250 


370 


395 


345 


370 


350 


570 


615 


535 


575 






















350 


445 


480 


415 


450 


500 


690 


745 


650 


700 






















500 


540 


580 


510 


545 


750 


845 


910 


805 


865 






















750 


665 


720 


635 


680 


1000 


980 


1055 


930 


1005 






















1000 


780 


840 


740 


795 


Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 10.) 


Two Circuits, 


Six Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 10. 


^ 












) 


8 


100 


110 


























8 


80 


85 


— 


— 


6 


130 


140 


120 


130 






















6 


100 


110 


95 


100 


4 


165 


180 


160 


170 






















4 


130 


140 


125 


130 


2 


215 


230 


195 


210 






















2 


165 


180 


155 


165 


1 


240 


260 


225 


240 


1 


190 


200 


175 


190 


1/0 


275 


295 


255 


275 






















1/0 


215 


230 


200 


215 


2/0 


310 


335 


290 


315 






















2/0 


245 


260 


225 


245 


3/0 


355 


380 


330 


355 






















3/0 


275 


295 


255 


275 


4/0 


400 


430 


375 


405 






















4/0 


310 


335 


290 


315 


250 


435 


470 


410 


440 






















250 


340 


365 


320 


345 


350 


520 


560 


495 


530 






















350 


410 


440 


385 


415 


500 


630 


680 


600 


645 






















500 


495 


530 


470 


505 


750 


775 


835 


740 


795 






















750 


610 


655 


580 


625 


1000 


890 


960 


855 


920 






















1000 


710 


765 


680 


730 















2013 California Electrical Code 



70-165 



310.60 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.60(C)(83) Ampacities of Three Insulated Copper 
Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering (Three- 
Conductor Cable), Directly Buried in Earth Based on 
Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement 
peH Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal 
Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C 
(194°F) and 105°C (221°F) 



Table 310.60(C)(84) Ampacities of Three Insulated 
Aluminum Conductors Cabled Within an Overall Covering 
(Three-Conductor Cable), Directly Buried in Earth Based on 
Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C (68°F), Arrangement 
per Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, Thermal 
Resistance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures of 90°C 
(194°F) and 105°C (221°F) 





Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 
310.61.) 


Conducto 

r 

Size 

(AV^G 


Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 
310.61.) 




2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 


5001-35,000 Volts 
Ampacity 


2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 


5001-35,000 Volts 
Ampacity 


Conducto 
r 

Size 

(AWG 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 

(221 °F) 
Type 

MV-105 


90<^C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105<=>C 

(22rF) 

Type 

MV-105 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105'=>C 
(221°F) 

Type 
MV-105 


or kcmil) 










or kcmil) 










One Circuit 


(See Figure 310.60, Detail 5.) 






One Circuit 


(See Figure 310.60, Detail 5.) 






8 


85 


89 


— 


— 


8 


65 


70 


— 


— 


6 


105 


115 


115 


120 


6 


80 


88 


90 


95 


4 


135 


150 


145 


155 


4 


105 


115 


115 


125 


2 


180 


190 


185 


200 


2 


140 


150 


145 


155 


1 


200 


215 


210 


225 


1 


155 


170 


165 


175 


1/0 


230 


245 


240 


255 


1/0 


180 


190 


185 


200 


2/0 


260 


280 


270 


290 


2/0 


205 


220 


210 


225 


3/0 


295 


320 


305 


330 


3/0 


230 


250 


240 


260 


4/0 


335 


360 


350 


375 


4/0 


260 


280 


270 


295 


250 


365 


395 


380 


410 


250 


285 


310 


300 


320 


350 


440 


475 


460 


495 


350 


345 


375 


360 


390 


500 


530 


570 


550 


590 


500 


420 


450 


435 


470 


750 


650 


700 


665 


720 


750 


520 


560 


540 


580 


1000 


730 


785 


750 


810 


1000 


600 


650 


620 


665 


Two Circuits (See Figure 


310.60, Detail 6.) 






Two Circuits (See Figure 


310.60, Detail 6.) 






8 


80 


84 


— 


— 


8 


60 


66 


— 


— 


6 


100 


105 


105 


115 


6 


75 


83 


80 


95 


4 


130 


140 


135 


145 


4 


100 


110 


105 


115 


2 


165 


180 


170 


185 


2 


130 


140 


135 


145 


1 


185 


200 


195 


210 


1 


145 


155 


150 


165 


1/0 


215 


230 


220 


235 


1/0 


165 


180 


170 


185 


2/0 


240 


260 


250 


270 


2/0 


190 


205 


195 


210 


3/0 


275 


295 


280 


305 


3/0 


215 


230 


220 


240 


4/0 


310 


335 


320 


345 


4/0 


245 


260 


250 


270 


250 


340 


365 


350 


375 


250 


265 


285 


275 


295 


350 


410 


440 


420 


450 


350 


320 


345 


330 


355 


500 


490 


525 


500 


535 


500 


385 


415 


395 


425 


750 


595 


640 


605 


650 


750 


480 


515 


485 


525 


1000 


665 


715 


675 


730 


1000 


550 


590 


560 


600 



70-166 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.60 



Table 310.6a(CK85) Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single 
Insulated Copper Conductors Directly Buried in Earth 
Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C {6S''¥), 
Arrangement per Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, 



Table 310.60(CK86) Ampacities of Three Triplexed Single 
Insulated Aluminum Conductors Directly Buried in Earth 
Based on Ambient Earth Temperature of 20°C (68^F), 
Arrangement per Figure 310.60, 100 Percent Load Factor, 



Thermal Resis 
90°C (194°F) 2 


stance (RHO) of 90, Conductor Temperatures 
md 105°C (22PF) 

Temperature Rating of Conductor 


Thermal Resistance (RHO) of 90, 
90°C (194°F) and 105^C (22PF) 


Conductor Temperatures 






Temperature J 


Rating of Conductoi 








(See Table 310.61.) 








(See Table 310.61.) 








2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 


5001-35,00 
Ampac 






2001-5000 Volts 
Ampacity 


5001-35,000 Vohs 
Ampacity 


Volts 
ity 




Conductor 
Size 

(AWG 
or kcmil) 


90''C 
(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 

(22rF) 

Type 

MV- 

105 


90°C 

(194°F) 

Type 

MV-90 


105°C 

(221°F) 

Type 

MV-105 


Conductor 
Size 

(AWG 
or kcmil) 


90°C 

(194°F) 

Type 
MV-90 


105°C 

(22i°r) 

Type 

MV- 
105 


90°C 
(194°F) 

Type 

MV-90 


105°C 

(221°F) 

Type 

MV- 
105 


One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 310.60, DetaO 7.) 






8 
6 


70 
90 


75 
100 


90 




One Circuit, Three Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 7.) 




95 


8 


90 


95 


— 


— 


4 


120 


130 


115 


125 


6 


120 


130 


115 


120 


2 


155 


165 


145 


155 


4 


150 
195 


165 
205 


150 
190 


160 
205 


1 


175 


190 


165 


175 


2 


1/0 


200 


210 


190 


205 


1 


225 


240 


215 


230 


2/0 
3/0 
4/0 


225 
255 
290 


240 

275 
310 


215 
245 
280 


230 
265 
305 


1/0 


255 
290 


270 
310 


245 

275 


260 
295 


2/0 


250 


320 


350 


305 


325 


3/0 


330 


360 


315 


340 


350 


385 


420 


370 


400 


4/0 


375 


405 


360 


385 


500 
750 
1000 


465 
580 
670 


500 
625 

725 


445 
550 
635 


480 


250 
350 


410 
490 
590 

725 


445 
580 
635 
780 


390 
470 
565 
685 


410 
505 
605 
740 


590 
680 


Two Circuits, Six Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 8.) 




500 
750 


8 
6 


65 

85 


70 
95 


85 


90 


1000 


825 


885 


770 


830 


4 

2 

1 


110 
140 
160 


120 
150 
170 


105 
135 
155 


115 


Two Circuits, S 

8 


lix Conductors (See Figure 310.60, Detail 8.) 

85 90 — 
110 115 105 
140 150 140 


115 
150 


145 
170 


6 
4 


1/0 

2/0 
3/0 


180 
205 

235 


195 

220 
250 


175 
200 

225 


190 
215 

245 


2 


180 
205 


195 
220 


175 
200 


190 

215 


4/0 


265 


285 


255 


275 


1 


250 
350 


290 
350 


310 

375 


280 
335 


300 


1/0 


235 


250 


225 


240 


360 


2/0 
3/0 


265 
300 
340 


285 
320 
365 


255 
290 
325 


275 
315 
350 


500 
750 
1000 


420 
520 
600 


455 
560 
645 


405 
485 
565 


435 
525 
605 


4/0 












250 


370 


395 


355 


380 




350 


445 


480 


425 


455 












500 


535 


575 


510 


545 












750 


650 


700 


615 


660 












1000 


740 


795 


690 


745 













2013 California Electrical Code 



70-167 



310.104 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



III. Construction SpedJications 

310.104 Conductor Constructions and Applications. 

Insulated conductors shall comply with the applicable 
provisions of fTabk 310.104(A) through Table 
310jia4(E). 



Informational Note: Thermoplastic insulation may 
stiffen at temperatures lower than -10°C (+14°F). 
Thermoplastic insulation may also be deformed at 
normal temperatures where subjected to pressure, such 
as at points of support. Thermoplastic insulation, where 
used on dc circuits in wet locations, may result in 
electroendosmosis between conductor and insulation. 



Table 3I0.M(A) 


Conductor Applications and Insulations Rated 600 Volts 
























Thickness of Insulation 


Outer 




Type 


Maximum 


Application 


Insulation 








Covering^ 


Trade Name 


AWG 




mm 


mils 






Letter 


Operating 
Temperature 


Provisions 




or 
kcmil 










Fluorinated ethylene 


FEP or 


90°C 


Dry and damp locations 


Fluorinated ethylene 


14-10 




0.51 


20 


None 


propylene 


FEPB 


194°F 


Dry locations — special 


propylene 


8-2 




0.76 


30 








200°C 
392°F 


applications 


Fluorinated 

ethylene 

propylene 


14-8 


0.36 


14 


Glass braid 




6-2 




0.36 


14 


Glass or other 




















suitable braid 




















material 


Mineral insulation 


MI 


90°C 


Dry and wet locations 


Magnesium oxide 


18- 




0.58 


23 


Copper or alloy 


(metal sheathed) 




]94°F 


For special 




16^ 




0.91 


36 


steel 






250X 

482°F 


applications" 




16-10 
9^ 




1.27 
1.40 


50 

55 




Moisture-, heat-, and 


MTW 


60X 


Machine tool wiring in 


Flame-retardant 


22-12 


(A 


(B) 


(A) IBJ 


(A) None 


oil-resistant 




140°F 


wet locations 
Machine tool wiring in 


moisture-, heat-, 
and oil-resistant 


10 

8 








(B) Nylon jacket 


thermoplastic 


0.76 OJS 


30 \^ 


or equivalent 








dry locations. 


thermoplastic 


6 


0.76 a 51 


30 2a 








90°C 


FPN:SeeNFPA79. 




4-2 


1.14 0,76 


45 atJ 








194°F 






1^/0 

213-500 

501- 


1.52 76 
1.52 1.02 
2.03 127 


60 m 

60 ^11 

80 m 














1000 


2.4 


1.52 


95 m 




Paper 




85°C 


For underground service 


Paper 










Lead sheath 






185°F 


conductors, or by 












Perfluoro- alkoxy 


PFA 


90"C 


Dry and damp locations 


Perfluoro- alkoxy 


14-10 


0.51 




20 


None 






l94op 


Dry locations — special 




8-2 


0.76 




30 








200°C 
392°F 


applications 




1^/0 


1.14 




45 




Perfluoro- alkoxy 


PFAH 


250X 


Dry locations only. Only 


Perfluoro- alkoxy 


14-10 


0.51 




20 


None 






482°F 


for leads within 
apparatus or within 
raceways connected 
to apparatus (nickel 




8-2 
1^/0 


0.76 
1.14 




30 

45 




Thermoset 


RHH 


90°C 


Dry and damp locations 




14-10 


1.14 




45 


\Jtmture- 






194T 






8-2 
1^/0 
213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 
For 601-2000 
see Table 


1.52 
2.03 
2.41 
2.79 
3.18 




60 
80 
95 
110 

125 


fcsiistanl, 
fljmc- 
rrtattiaot, 
ikmradiitlH: 


Moisture- resistant 


kiiw 


75°C 


Dry and wet locations 


Flame-retardant, 


14-10 


1,14 




45 


Moisture- 


thermoset 




167°F 




moisture- 


8-2 


1.52 




60 


resistant, 










resistant 


1^/0 


2.03 




80 


flame- 










thermoset 


213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 
For 601- 
7nnn 


2.41 
2.79 
3.18 




95 
110 
125 


retardant, 
nonmetallic 

covering 


Moisture- resistant 


RHW-2 


90°C 


Dry and wet locations 


Flame-retardant 


14-10 


1.14 




45 


Moisture- 


thermoset 




194°F 




moisture- 


8-2 


1.52 




60 


resistant, 










resistant 


1-4/0 


2.03 




80 


flame- 










thermoset 


213-500 
501-1000 


2.41 
2.79 




95 

110 


retardant, 
nonmetallic 


Silicone 


SA 


90°C 


Dry and damp locations 


Silicone rubber 


1^10 


1.14 




45 


Glass or other 






194°F 
200°C 


For special application 




8-2 
1^/0 


1.52 
2.03 




60 
80 


suitable braid 
material 






392°F 






213-500 
501-1000 


2.41 

2.79 




95 

110 





70-168 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.104 



Table 310J04(A) 


Continued 
















Trade Name 


Type 

Letter 


Maximum 
Operating 
Temperature 


Application 
Provisions 


Insulation 


AWGor 
kcmil 


mm 


mils 


Outer 

Covering^ 


Thermoset 


SIS 


90°C 
194°F 


Switchboard wiring only 


Flame-retardant 
thermoset 


14-10 

8-2 
1-4/0 


0.76 
1.14 
2.41 


30 

45 
95 


None 


Thermoplastic and 
fibrous outer braid 


TBS 


90<'C 
194°F 


Switchboard wiring only 


Thermoplastic 


14-10 

8 
6-2 
1-4/0 


0.76 
1.14 
1.52 

2.03 


30 
45 
60 
80 


Flame-retardant, 
nonmetallic 
covering 


Extended polytetra- 
fluoro- ethylene 


TFE 


250°C 
482°F 


Dry locations only. Only 
for leads within 
apparatus or within 
raceways connected 
to apparatus, or as 


Extruded polytetra- 
fluoro- ethylene 


14-10 

8-2 
1-4/0 


0.51 
0.76 
1.14 


20 
30 

45 


None 


Heat-resistant 
thermoplastic 


THHN 


90°C 
194°F 


Dry and damp locations 


Flame-retardant, 
heat-resistant 
thermoplastic 


14-12 
10 
8-6 

4-2 


0.38 
0.51 
0.76 
1.02 


15 
20 
30 
40 


Nylon jacket or 
equivalent 


Moisture- and heat- 
resistant 
thermoplastic 


THHW 


75°C 
167°F 
90^C 
194°F 


Wet location 
Dry location 


Flame-retardant, 
moisture- and 
heat-resistant 
thermoplastic 


14-10 

8 
6-2 
1-4/0 


0.76 
1.14 

1.52 
2.03 


30 
45 
60 
80 


None 


Moisture- and heat- 
resistant 
thermoplastic 


THW"^ 


75°C 
167°F 
90°C 
194°F 


Dry and wet locations 
Special applications 
within electric 
discharge lighting 
equipment. Limited to 


Flame-retardant, 
moisture- and 
heat-resistant 
thermoplastic 


14-10 

8 
6-2 

1-4/0 


0.76 
1.14 
1.52 

2.03 


30 
45 
60 
80 


None 


Moisture- and heat- 
resistant 
thermoplastic 


thwn"^ 


75°C 
167^F 


Dry and wet locations 


Flame-retardant, 
moisture- and 
heat-resistant 
thermoplastic 


14-12 
10 
8-6 
4-2 


0.38 
0.51 
0.76 
1.02 


15 
20 
30 
40 


Nylon jacket or 
equivalent 


Moisture- resistant 
thermoplastic 

Underground feeder 
and branch-circuit 
cable — single 
conductor (for Type 
UF cable employing 


TW 
UF 


60°C 
140°F 

140°F 

75°C 

167'^F^ 


Dry and wet locations 
See Article 340. 


Flame-retardant, 
moisture- 
resistant 
thermoplastic 

Moisture- resistant 
Moisture- and 
heat-resistant 


14-10 

8 
6-2 
1-4/0 

14-10 
8-2 
1-4/0 


0.76 
1.14 

1.52 
2.03 

1.52 
2.03 
2.41 


30 
45 
60 
80 

60-* 
80"^ 
95^ 


None 

integral with 
insulation 



(Continues) 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-169 



310.104 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.1104(A) Continued 


Trade Name 


Type Letter 


Maximum 


Application 


Insulation 


AWGor 1 


mm 


mils 


Outer Covering^ 






Operating 


Provisions 




kcmi] 










Temperature 














Underground 


USE^ 


75°C 


See Article 338. 


Heat- and 


14-10 


1.14 


45 


Moisture-resistant 


service- 




167°F 




moisture- 


8-2 


1.52 


60 


nonmetallic 


entrance cable 








resistant 


1-4/0 


2.03 


80 


covering (See 


— single 










213-500 


2.41 


95^ 
110 


338.2.) 


conductor (for 










501-1000 


2.79 




Type USE 
cable 
























1001-2000 


3.18 


125 




employing 


















more than one 


















conductor, see 


















Article 338.) 


















Themioset 


XHH 


90^C 


Dry and damp 


Flame-retardant 


1^10 


0.76 


30 


None 






194°F 


locations 


thermoset 


8-2 

1-4/0 
213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 


1.14 
1.40 
1,65 
2.03 

2.41 


45 
55 
65 
80 
95 




Moisture- 


XHHW 


90°C 


Dry and damp 


Flame-retaidant, 


14-10 


0.76 


30 


None 


resistant 




194T 


locations 


moisture- 


8-2 


1.14 


45 




thermoset 




75°C 


Wet locations 


resistant 


M/0 


1.40 


55 








167°F 




thermoset 


213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 


1.65 

2.03 
241 


65 
80 
95 




Moisture- 


XHHW-2 


90°C 


Dry and wet 


Flame-retardant, 


14-10 


0.76 


30 


None 


resistant 




194T 


locations 


moisture- 


8-2 


1.14 


45 




thermoset 








resistant 
thermoset 


1-4/0 
213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 


1.40 
1.65 

2.03 
2.41 


55 
65 
80 
95 




Modified 


Z 


90"C 


Dry and damp 


Modified 


14-12 


0.38 


15 


None 


ethylene 




194T 


locations 


ethylene 


10 


0.51 


20 




tetrafluoro- 




150°C 


Dry locations — 


tetrafluoro- 


8-4 


0.64 


25 




ethylene 




302T 


special 
applications 


ethylene 


3-1 
1/04/0 


0.89 
1.14 


35 
45 




Modified 


ZW^ 


75X 


Wet locations 


Modified 


14-10 


0.76 


30 


None 


ethylene 




167T 


Dry and damp 


e%lene 


8-2 


1.14 


45 




tetrafluoro- 




90X 


locations 


tetnifluoro- 










ethylene 




194°F 
150°C 

302°F 


Dry locations — 
special 

applications 


ethylene 










Moisture- 


XHEIW-2 


90X 


Dry and wet 


Flame-retardant, 


14-10 


0.76 


30 


None 


resistant 




194°F 


locations 


moisture- 


8-2 


1.14 


45 




thermoset 








resistant 
thermoset 


1-4/0 
213-500 
501-1000 
1001-2000 


1.40 
1.65 
2.03 
2.41 


55 
65 
80 
95 




Modified 


Z 


90°C 


Dry and damp 


Modified 


14-12 


0.38 


15 


None 


ethylene 




194T 


locations 


ethylene 


10 


0.51 


20 




tetrafluoro- 




150^C 


Dry locations — 


tetrafluoro- 


8-4 


0,64 


25 




ethylene 




302T 


special 
applications" 


ediylene 


3-1 

1/O4/0 


0.89 
1.14 


35 
45 




Modified 


ZW^ 


75°C 


Wet locations 


Modified 


1^10 


0.76 


30 


None 


ethylene 




]67°F 


Dry and damp 


ethylene 


8-2 


1.14 


45 




tetrafiuoro- 




90°C 


locations 


tetrafluoro- 










ethylene 




194°F 
ISO'^C 
302T 


Dry locations — 
special 

applications 


e%lene 











' Some insulations do not require an outer covering. 

Where design conditions require maximum conductor operating temperatures above 90°C (194°F). 

For signaling circuits permitting 300-volt insulation. 

** Includes integral jacket. 

- For ampacity limitation, see 340.80. 

^ Insulation thickness shall be permitted to be 2.03 mm (80 mils) for listed Type USE conductors that have been subjected to special investigations. The 
nonmetallic covering over individual rubber-covered conductors of aluminum-sheathed cable and of lead-sheathed or multiconductor cable shall not be 
required to be flame retardant. For Type MC cable, see 330.104. For nonmetallic-sheathed cable, see Article 334, Part III. For Type UF cable, see Article 
340, Part III 



70-170 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 10 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



310.106 



Table 310.104(8) Thickness of Insulation for Nonshielded 
Types RHH and RHW Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors 
Rated 2000 Volts 





Column A' 


Column B^ 


Conductor Size 










(AWG or kcmil) 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


14-10 


2.03 


80 


1.52 


60 


8 


2.03 


80 


1.78 


70 


6-2 


2.41 


95 


1.78 


70 


1-2/0 


2.79 


110 


2.29 


90 


3/0^/0 


2.79 


no 


2.29 


90 


213-500 


3.18 


125 


2.67 


105 


501-1000 


3.56 


140 


3.05 


120 


1001-2000 


3.56 


140 


3.56 


140 



'Column A insulations are limited to natural, SBR, and butyl mbbers. 

^Column B insulations are materials such as cross-linked polyethylene, 
ethylene propylene rubber, and composites thereof. 



310.106 Conductors. 

(A) Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of 
conductors shall be shown in Table 3 10. 106(A). except as 
permitted elsewhere in this Code, 

(B) Conductor Material. Conductors in this article shall 
be of aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or copper unless 
otherwise specified. 

Solid aluminum conductors 8, 10, and 12 AWG shall 
be made of an AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum 
alloy conductor material. Stranded aluminum conductors 
8 AWG through 1000 kcmil marked as Type RHH, RHW, 
XHHW, THW, THHW, THWN, THHN, service-entrance 
Type SE Style U and SE Style R shall be made of an AA- 
8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor 
material. 



Table 310.104(C) Conductor Application and Insulation Rated 2001 Volts and Higher 



Trade 
Name 



Type Letter 



Maximum 

Operating 

Temperature 



Application 
Provision 



Insulation 



Outer Covering 



Medium voltage solid 


MV-90 


90°C 


Dry or wet locations 


Thermo- 


Jacket, sheath, or 


dielectric 


MV-105'^ 


105°C 




plastic or thermo- 
setting 


armor 



*Where design conditions require maximum conductor temperatures above 90°C. 



Table 310.104(D) Thickness of Insulation and Jacket for Nonshielded Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors Rated 2001 to 5000 Volts 







Dry Locations, Single Conductor 








Wet or 


Dry Locations 






Without Jacket 
Insulation 




With Jacket 






Single 


Conductor 




Multicoi 
Insula 






Insulation 


Jacket 


Insulation 


Jacket 


nductor 
ition"*" 


Conductor 
Size 


















(AWG or 
kcmil) 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


mm 


mils 


8 


2.79 


110 


2.29 


90 


0,76 


30 


3.18 


125 


2.03 


80 


2.29 


90 


6 


2.79 


110 


2.29 


90 


0.76 


30 


3.18 


125 


2.03 


80 


2.29 


90 


4-2 


2.79 


110 


2.29 


90 


1.14 


45 


3.18 


125 


2.03 


80 


2.29 


90 


1-2/0 


2.79 


110 


2,29 


90 


1.14 


45 


3.18 


125 


2.03 


80 


2.29 


90 


3/0-4/0 


2.79 


no 


2.29 


90 


1.65 


65 


3.18 


125 


2.41 


95 


2.29 


90 


213-500 


3.05 


120 


2.29 


90 


1.65 


65 


3.56 


140 


2.79 


110 


2.29 


90 


501-750 


3.30 


130 


2.29 


90 


1.65 


65 


3.94 


155 


3.18 


125 


2.29 


90 


751-1000 


3.30 


130 


2.29 


90 


1.65 


65 


3.94 


155 


3.18 


125 


2.29 


90 


1001-1250 


3.56 


140 


2.92 


115 


1.65 


65 


4.32 


170 


3.56 


140 


2.92 


115 


1251-1500 


3.56 


140 


2.92 


115 


2.03 


80 


4.32 


170 


3.56 


140 


2.92 


115 


1501-2000 


3.56 


140 


2,92 


115 


2.03 


80 


4.32 


170 


3.94 


155 


3.56 


140 



*Under a common overall covering such as a jacket, sheath, or amior. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-171 



310.1Itf 



ARTICLE 310 - CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING 



Table 310.104(E) Thickness of Insulation for Shielded Solid Dielectric Insulated Conductors Rated 2001 to 35,000 Volts 

2001-5000 

Volts 5001-8000 Volts 8001-15,000 Volts 15,001-25,000 Volts 

Conductor 100 j^^ 133 173 100 133 173 100 133 173 

Size Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Percent Perc^it 

(AWG "^" **" Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation Insubtion Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation 

orkcmiO Level ^ Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Levell Level2 Level3 Levell L€vel2 LcveB 

iifl" 
nun n^ mm nik mm nib mm n^ mm uik mm ttik mm nik mm nik mm mils mm s 

I T^ % ~ z z z ~ z z z z z z z z z z z z ~ 

6A 229 90 292 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 — — — — — — — — — — _ _ 

2 229 90 292 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 — ___ _„ 

1 229 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 6,60 260 8.13 320 10.67 420 

1/O-20O0 229 90 2.92 115 3.56 140 4.45 175 4.45 175 5.59 220 6.60 260 6.60 260 8.13 320 10.67 420 







25,001-28,000 volts 






28,001-35,000 volts 






100 


133 


173 


100 


133 


173 




Percent 


Percent 


Percent 


Percent 


Percent 


Percent 




Insulation 


Insulation 


Insulation 


Insulation 


Insulation 


Insulation 




Levell 


Level 2 


Level3 


Levell 


Level2 


LeveB 


Conductor 


mm mils 


mm mils 


mm mils 


mm mils 


mm mils 


mm mils 


Size 














(AWG 














or kcmil) 














1 


7.11 280 


8.76 345 


11. .30 445 


— — 


— — 


_ __ 


1/0-2000 


7.11 280 


8.76 345 


11.30 445 


8.76 345 


10.67 420 


14.73 580 



' 100 Percent Insulation Level. Cables in this category shall be permitted to be applied where the system is provided with relay protection such that 

ground faults will be cleared as rapidly as possible but, in any case, within 1 minute. While these cables are applicable to the great majority of cable 

installations that are on grounded systems, they shall be permitted to be used also on other systems for which the application of cables is acceptable, 

provided the above clearing requirements are met in completely de-energizing the faulted section, 

^ 133 Percent Insulation Level. This insulation level corresponds to that formerly designated for ungrounded systems. Cables in this category shall be 

permitted to be applied in simations where the clearing time requirements of the 100 percent level category cannot be met and yet there is adequate 

assurance that the fauUed section will be de-energized in a time not exceeding 1 hour. Also, they shall be permitted to be used in 1 00 percent insulation 

level apphcations where additional insulation is desirable. 

^ 173 Percent Insulation Level. Cables in this category shall be permitted to be applied under all of the following conditions: 

(1) In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation 

(2) Where the fault clearing time requirements of the 133 percent level category cannot be met 

(3) Where an orderly shutdown is essential to protect equipment and personnel 

(4) There is adequate assurance that the faulted section will be de-energized in an orderly shutdown 

Also, cables with this insulation thickness shall be permitted to be used in 100 or 133 percent insulation level applications where additional insulation 
strength is desirable. 



Table 310.1 06(A) Minimum Size of Conductors 



Minimum Conductor Size (AWG) 



Service or 

Feeder Rating 

(Amperes) 

0-2000 

2001-5000 

5001-8t)00 

8001-15,000 
15,001-28,000 
28,001-35,000 



Copper 



Aluminum or 

Copper-Clad 

Aluminum 



14 
8 

I 

2 

1 
1/0 



12 

8 

I 

1 

1 

1/0 



(C) Stranded Conductors. Where installed in raceways, 
conductors 8 AWG and larger, not specifically permitted 
or required elsewhere in this Code to be solid, shall be 
stranded. 



(D) Insulated. Conductors, not specifically pcnnitted 
elsewiiere in this Code io be covered or bare, shall be 
insulated. 

Informational Note; See 250.184 for insulation of 
neutral conductors of a solidly grounded high-voltage 
system. 

310.1 10 Conductor Identification. 

(A) Grounded Conductors. Insulated or covered 
grounded conductors shall be identified in accordance 
with 200.6. 

(B) Equipment Grounding Conductors. Equipment 
grounding conductors shall be in accordance with 
250.119. 

(C) Ungrounded Conductors. Conductors that are 
intended for use as ungrounded conductors, whether used 
as a single conductor or in multiconductor cables, shall be 
finished to be clearly distinguishable from grounded and 
grounding conductors. Distinguishing markings shall not 
conflict in any manner with the surface markings required 



70-172 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 312 - CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 



312.1 



by 3I0.l2d(B)(l). Branch-circuit ungrounded conductors 
shall be identified in accordance with 2 10, 5(C), Feeders 
shall be identified in accordance with 215.12. 

Exception: Conductor identification shall he permitted in 
accordance with 200. 7. 

310.120 Marking. 

(A) Required Information. All conductors and cables 
shall be marked to indicate the following information, 
using the applicable method described in 3 10. 12d(B): 

(1) The maximum rated voltage. 

(2) The proper type letter or letters for the type of wire or 
cable as specified elsewhere in this Code. 

(3) The manufacturer's name, trademark, or other 
distinctive marking by which the organization 
responsible for the product can be readily identified. 

(4) The AWG size or circular mil area. 

Informational Note: See Conductor Properties, Table 8 
of Chapter 9, for conductor area expressed in SI units for 
conductor sizes specified in AWG or circular mil area. 

(5) Cable assemblies where the neutral conductor is smaller 
than the ungrounded conductors shall be so marked. 

(B) Method of Marking. 

(1) Surface Marking. The following conductors and 
cables shall be durably marked on the surface. The AWG 
size or circular mil area shall be repeated at intervals not 
exceeding 610 mm (24 in.). All other markings shall be 
repeated at intervals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.), 

(1) Single-conductor and multiconductor rubber- and 
thermoplastic-insulated wire and cable 

(2) Nonmetallic-sheathed cable 

(3) Service-entrance cable 

(4) Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable 

(5) Tray cable 

(6) Irrigation cable 

(7) Power-limited tray cable 

(8) Instrumentation tray cable 

(2) Marker Tape. Metal-covered multiconductor cables 
shall employ a marker tape located within the cable and 
running for its complete length. 

Exception No. 1: Type Mi cable. 

Exception No. 2: Type AC cable. 

Exception No. 3: The information required in 310. 12(I(A) 
shall he permitted to he durably marked on the outer 
nonmetallic covering of Type MC, Type ITC, or Type 
PLTC cables at internals not exceeding LOm (40 in.). 



Exception No. 4: The information required in 310. i 20(A) 
shall be permitted to he durably marked on a nonmetallic 
covering under the metallic sheath of Type ITC or Type 
PLTC cable at intervals not exceeding 1.0 m (40 in.). 

Informational Note: Included in the group of metal- 
covered cables are Type AC cable (Article 320) , Type 
MC cable (Article p30), and kad-shcalhcd cable, 

(3) Tag Marking, The following conductors and cables 
shall be marked by means of a printed tag attached to the 
coil, reel, or carton: 

(1) Type Ml cable 

(2) Switchboard wires 

(3) Metal-covered, single-conductor cables 

(4) Type AC cable 

(4) Optional Marking of Wire Size, The information 
required in 310, 120(A)(4) shall be permitted to be marked 
on the surface of the individual insulated conductors for 
the following multiconductor cables: 

(1) Type MC cable 

(2) Tray cable 

(3) Irrigation cable 

(4) Power-limited tray cable 

(5) Power-limited fire alarm cable 

(6) Instrumentation tray cable 

(C) Suffixes to Designate Number of Conductors. A 

type letter or letters used alone shall indicate a single 
insulated conductor. The letter suffixes shall be indicated 
as follows: 

(1) D — For two insulated conductors laid parallel 
within an outer nonmetallic covering 

(2) M — For an assembly of two or more insulated 
conductors twisted spirally within an outer 
nonmetallic covering 

(D) Optional Markings. All conductors and cables 
contained in Chapter 3 shall be permitted to be surface 
marked to indicate special characteristics of the cable 
materials. These markings include, but are not limited to, 
markings for limited smoke, sunlight resistant, and so forth. 



ARTICLE 312 

i Cabinets, Cutout Boxes^ and Meter Socket 
Enclosures 

312.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and 
construction specifications of cabinets, cutout boxes, and 
meter socket enclosures. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-173 



3.1.2.2 



ARTICLE 312 - CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 



I. Installation 

312.2 Damp and Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, 
surface-type enclosures within the scope of this article shall 
be placed or equipped so as to prevent moisture or water 
from entering and accumulating within the cabinet or cutout 
box, and shall be mounted so there is at least 6-mm (^-in.) 
airspace between the enclosure and the wall or other 
supporting surface. Enclosures installed in wet locations 
shall be weatherproof For enclosures in wet locations, 
raceways or cables entering above the level of uninsulated 
live parts shall use fittings listed for wet locations. 

Exception: Nonmetallic enclosures shall he permitted to 
be installed without the airspace on a concrete, masonry, 
tile, or similar surface. 

Informational Note: For protection against corrosion, see 
300.6. 

312.3 Position in Walt. In walls of concrete, tile, or other 
noncombustible material, cabinets shall be installed so 
that the front edge of the cabinet is not set back of the 
finished surface more than 6 mm (% in.). In walls 
constructed of wood or other combustible material, 
cabinets shall be flush with the finished surface or project 
therefrom. 

312.4 Repairing Noncombustible Surfaces. 

Noncombustible surfaces that are broken or incomplete 
shall be repaired so there will be no gaps or open spaces 
greater than 3 mm QA in.) at the edge of the cabinet or 
cutout box employing a flush-type cover. 

312.5 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket 
Enclosures. Conductors entering enclosures within the 
scope of this article shall be protected from abrasion and 
shall comply with 312.5(A) through (C). 

(A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which 
conductors enter shall be adequately closed. 

(B) Metal Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket 

Enclosures. Where metal enclosures within the scope of 
this article are installed with messenger- supported wiring, 
open wiring on insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube 
wiring, conductors shall enter through insulating bushings 
or, in dry locafions, through flexible tubing extending 
from the last insulating support and firmly secured to the 
enclosure. 

(C) Cables. Where cable is used, each cable shall be 
secured to the cabinet, cutout box, or meter socket 
enclosure. 

Exception: Cables with entirely nonmetallic sheaths shall 
be permitted to enter the top of a surface-mounted 
enclosure through one or more nonflexible raceways not 
less than 450 mm (18 in.) and not more than 3.0 m (I Oft) in 
length, provided all of the following conditions are met: 



(a) Each cable is fastened within 300 mm (12 in.), 
measured along the sheath, of the outer end of the raceway. 

(b) The raceway extends directly above the 
enclosure and does not penetrate a structural ceiling. 

(c) A fitting is provided on each end of the raceway 
to protect the cable(s) from abrasion and the fittings 
remain accessible after installation. 

(d) The raceway is sealed or plugged at the outer 
end using approved means so as to prevent access to the 
enclosure through the raceway. 

(e) The cable sheath is continuous through the 
raceway and extends into the enclosure beyond the fitting 
not less than 6 mm (% in.). 

(f) The raceway is fastened at its outer end and at 
other points in accordance with the applicable article. 

(g) Where installed as conduit or tubing, the 
allowable cable fill does not exceed that permitted for 
complete conduit or tubing systems by Table 1 of Chapter 
9 of this Code and all applicable notes thereto. 

Informational Note: See Table 1 in Chapter 9, including 
Note 9, for allowable cable fill in circular raceways. See 
310.15(B)(3)(a) for required ampacity reductions for 
multiple cables installed in a common raceway, 

312.6 Deflection of Conductors. Conductors at terminals 
or conductors entering or leaving cabinets or cutout boxes 
and the like shall comply with 312.6(A) through (C). 

Exception: Wire-bending space in enclosures for motor 
controllers with provisions for one or two wires per 
terminal shall comply with 430.10(B), 

(A) Width of Wiring Gutters. Conductors shall not be 
deflected within a cabinet or cutout box unless a gutter 
having a width in accordance with Table 312.6(A) is 
provided. Conductors in parallel in accordance with 
3 10. 10(H) shall be judged on the basis of the number of 
conductors in parallel. 

(B) Wire-Bending Space at Terminals. Wire-bending 
space at each terminal shall be provided in accordance 
with 312.6(B)(1) or (B)(2). 

(1) Conductors Not Entering or Leaving Opposite 
Walt. Table 312.6(A) shall apply where the conductor 
does not enter or leave the enclosure through the wall 
opposite its terminal, 

(2) Conductors Entering or Leaving Opposite Wall. 

Table 312.6(B) shall apply where the conductor does enter 
or leave the enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal. 

Exception No. 1: Where the distance between the wall 
and its terminal is in accordance with Table 312.6(A), 



70-174 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 312 - CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 



312.10 



Table 312.6(A) Minimum Wire-Bending Space 


at Terminals and Minimum Width of Wiring Gutters 








Wires per Terminal 


Wire Size 




1 




2 




3 




4 




5 


S 


(AWG or kcmil) 


mm 


in. 


mm 




in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


14-10 


Not 


specified 


— 




— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


8-6 


38.1 


VA 


_ 




— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


4-3 


50.8 


2 


— 




— 


™. 


— 


^ 


— 


— 


— 


2 


63.5 


IVj 


— 




— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


— 


1 


76.2 


3 


— 




— 


— 


^ 


— 


~ 


— 


— 


1/0-2/0 


88.9 


VA 


127 




5 


178 


7 


— 


— 


— 


— 


3/0^/0 


102 


4 


152 




6 


203 


8 


_ 


^ 


™_ 


— 


250 


114 


4/2 


152 




6 


203 


8 


254 


10 


— 


— 


300-350 


127 


5 


203 




8 


254 


10 


305 


12 


— 


— 


400-500 


152 


6 


203 




8 


254 


10 


305 


12 


356 


14 


600-700 


203 


8 


254 




10 


305 


12 


356 


14 


406 


16 


750-900 


203 


8 


305 




12 


356 


14 


406 


16 


457 


18 


1000-1250 


254 


10 


— 




— 


— 




— 


— 


^ 


— 


1500-2000 


305 


12 


— 




— 


— 


— 


— 


_ 


— 


— 



Note: Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of the lug or wire connector (in the direction that the 
wire leaves the terminal) to the wall, barrier, or obstruction. 



a conductor shall be permitted to enter or leave an 
enclosure through the wall opposite its terminal, provided 
the conductor enters or leaves the enclosure where the 
gutter joins an adjacent gutter that has a width that 
conforms to Table 312.6(B) for the conductor. 

Exception No, 2: A conductor not larger than 350 kcmil 
shall be permitted to enter or leave an enclosure 
containing only a meter socket (s) through the wall 
opposite its terminal, provided the distance between the 
terminal and the opposite wall is not less than that 
specified in Table 312.6(A) and the terminal is a lay- in 
type, where the terminal is either of the following: 

(a) Directed toward the opening in the enclosure 
and within a 45 degree angle of directly facing the 
enclosure wall 

(b) Directly facing the enclosure wall and offset not 
greater than 50 percent of the bending space specified in 
Table 3 12, 6(A) 

Informational Note: Offset is the distance measured 
along the enclosure wall from the axis of the centerline 
of the terminal to a line passing through the center of the 
opening in the enclosure. 

(C) Conductors 4 AWG or Larger, Installation shall 
comply with 300.4(G). 

312.7 Space in Enclosures, Cabinets and cutout boxes 
shall have sufficient space to accommodate all conductors 
installed in them without crowding. 



312.B SwUcb and Overcurrent Device Enclosures witb 
Splices, Taps, and Feed-Through Conductoi-s. The 

wiriag space of enclosures for switches or overcurrent 
devices shall be pcmulted for conductors feeding through^ 
spliced, or tapping off to other enclosures, switches, or 
overcurrent devices where all of the following conditions 
are met: 



(1) The total of all conductors installed at any crass 
section of the wiring space does not exceed 40 
percent of the cross-sectional area of that space. 

(2) The total area of all conductors, splices, and taps 
installed at any cross section of the wiring space does 
not exceed 75 percent of the cross-scciional area of 
that space. 

(3) A warning label is applied to the enclosure that 
identifies the closest disconnecting means tor any 
feed-through conductors, 

312.9 Side or Back Wiring Spaces or Gutters. 

Cabinets and cutout boxes shall be provided with back- 
wiring spaces, gutters, or wiring compartments as 
required by 312.1 1(C) and (D). 

11. Construction Specifications 

312.10 Material. Cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket 
enclosures shall comply with 312.1 0(A) through (C). 

(A) Metal Cabinets and Cutout Boxes. Metal enclosures 
within the scope of this article shall be protected both 
inside and outside against corrosion. 

Informational Note: For information on protection 
against corrosion, see 300.6. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-175 



312.11 



ARTICLE 3 12 - CABESfETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET ENCLOSURES 



Table 312.6(B) 


Minimum Wire-Bending Space at Terminals 
















Wires 


)er Terminal 








Wire Size (AWG or kcmil) 


1 


2 


3 


4 or More 


All Other 
Conductors 


Compact 

Stranded AA- 

8000 Aluminum 

Alloy 

Conductors 

(See Note 3.) 


mm in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


14^10 


12-8 


Not specified 


— 


__ 


— 




— 


— 


8 


6 


38.1 VA 


— 


— 


— 




— 


— 


6 


4 


50.8 2 


__ 


— 


— 




— 


— 


4 


2 


76.2 3 


— 


— 


— 




— 


— 


3 


1 


76.2 3 


— 


— 


— 




„ 


— 


2 


1/0 


88.9 3'/2 


— 


— 


__ 




— 


— 


1 


2/0 


114 4^2 


— 


— 


— 




— 


__ 


1/0 


3/0 


140 5'/2 


140 


5'/2 


178 


7 


— 


— 


2/0 


4/0 


152 6 


152 


6 


190 


7^2 


— 


— 


3/0 


250 


165^ 6'// 


165^ 


6V2^ 


203 


8 


— 


— 


4/0 


300 


178^ 7b 


190^ 


VA'' 


216^ 


8'// 


— 


— 


250 


350 


216^ 8'/a^ 


229^ 


8^2^ 


254^ 


9b 


254 


10 


300 


400 


254^ 10^ 


254^ 


10^ 


279b 


lib 


305 


12 


350 


500 


305^ 12^ 


305^ 


12^ 


330^ 


13^ 


356^ 


14^ 


400 


600 


330^ 13^ 


330^ 


13^ 


356^ 


,4e 


381^ 


15^ 


500 


700-750 


356^ 14^ 


356^ 


14e 


381^ 


15^ 


406^ 


16^ 


600 


800-900 


381^ 15^ 


406^ 


16^ 


457^ 


18^ 


483^ 


19^ 


700 


1000 


406^ 16^ 


457^ 


18^ 


508^ 


20^ 


559^ 


22e 


750 


__ 


432^ 17^ 


483^ 


19e 


559^ 


22e 


610^ 


24^ 


800 


— 


457 18 


508 


20 


559 


22 


610 


24 


900 


— 


483 19 


559 


22 


610 


24 


610 


24 


1000 


~ 


508 20 


— 


— 


— 




— 




1250 


— 


559 22 


— 


— 


„ 




— 




1500 


— 


610 24 


— 




^ 




— 




1750 


— 


610 24 


— 


— 


— 




— 




2000 


— 


610 24 


— 


— 


— 




— 





1 . Bending space at terminals shall be measured in a straight line from the end of the lug or wire connector in a direction perpendicular to the enclosure wall. 

2. For removable and lay-in wire terminals intended for only one wire, bending space shall be permitted to be reduced by the following number of 
milhmeters (inches); 

^ 12.7 mm ('A in.) ^ 50.8 mm (2 in.) 

b 25.4 mm (1 in.) ^ 76.2 mm (3 in.) 

^38.1mm(l!/2in.) 

3. This column shall be permitted to determine the required wire-bending space for compact stranded aluminum conductors in sizes up to 1000 kcmil and 

manufactured using AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy conductor material in accordance with 3 10.14. 



(B) Strength. The design and construction of enclosures 
within the scope of this article shall be such as to secure 
ample strength and rigidity. If constructed of sheet steel, 
the metal thickness shall not be less than 1.35 mm (0.053 
in.) uncoated. 

(C) Nonmetaliic Cabinets, Nonmetallic cabinets shall be 
listed, or they shall be submitted for approval prior to 
installation. 



312.11 Spacing. The spacing within cabinets and cutout 
boxes shall comply with 3 12. 11 (A) through (D). 

(A) General. Spacing within cabinets and cutout boxes 
shall be sufficient to provide ample room for the 
distribution of wires and cables placed in them and for a 
separation between metal parts of devices and apparatus 
mounted within them in accordance with (A)(1), (A)(2), 
and (A)(3). 



70-176 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 314 OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODlESflTTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 31415 



(1) Base. Other than at points of support, there shall be an 
airspace of at least 1.59 mm (0.0625 in.) between the base 
of the device and the wall of any metal cabinet or cutout 
box in which the device is mounted. 

(2) Doors. There shall be an airspace of at least 25.4 mm 
(1.00 in.) between any live metal part, including live 
metal parts of enclosed fuses, and the door. 

Exception: Where the door is lined with an approved 
insulating material or is of a thickness of metal not less 
than 236 mm (0.093 in.) uncoated, the airspace shall not 
he less than 12. 7 mm (0,500 in.). 

(3) Live Parts. There shall be an airspace of at least 12.7 
mm (0.500 in.) between the walls, back, gutter partition, if 
of metal, or door of any cabinet or cutout box and the 
nearest exposed current-carrying part of devices mounted 
within the cabinet where the voltage does not exceed 250. 
This spacing shall be increased to at least 25.4 mm (1.00 
in.) for voltages of 251 to 600, nominal. 

Exception: Where the conditions in 312.11(A)(2), 
Exception, are met, the airspace for nominal voltages 
from 251 to 600 shall be permitted to be not less than 
^12.7 mm (0.500 in.). 

(B) Switch Clearance. Cabinets and cutout boxes shall 
be deep enough to allow the closing of the doors when 
30- ampere branch-circuit panel board switches are in any 
position, when combination cutout switches are in any 
position, or when other single-throw switches are opened 
as far as their construction permits. 

(C) Wiring Space. Cabinets and cutout boxes that 
contain devices or apparatus connected within the cabinet 
or box to more than eight conductors, including those of 
branch circuits, meter loops, feeder circuits, power 
circuits, and similar circuits, but not including the supply 
circuit or a continuation thereof, shall have back-wiring 
spaces or one or more side-wiring spaces, side gutters, or 
wiring compartments. 

(D) Wiring Space — Enclosure. Side-wiring spaces, 
side gutters, or side-wiring compartments of cabinets and 
cutout boxes shall be made tight enclosures by means of 
covers, barriers, or partitions extending from the bases of 
the devices contained in the cabinet, to the door, frame, or 
sides of the cabinet. 

Exception: Side-wiring spaces, side gutters, and side- 
wiring compartments of cabinets shall not be required to 
be made tight enclosures where those side spaces contain 
only conductors that enter the cabinet directly opposite to 
the devices where they terminate. 

Partially enclosed back-wiring spaces shall be provided 
with covers to complete the enclosure. Wiring spaces that 
are required by 312.11(C) and are exposed when doors 
are open shall be provided with covers to complete the 



enclosure. Where adequate space is provided for feed- 
through conductors and for splices as required in 312.8, 
additional barriers shall not be required. 



ARTICLE 314 

Outlet^ Device, Pult, and Junction Boves; 

Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Handhole 

Enclosures 

L Scope and General 

314.1 Scope. This article covers the installation and use 
of all boxes and conduit bodies used as outlet, device, 
junction, or pull boxes, depending on their use, and 
handhole enclosures. Cast, sheet metal, nonmetallic, and 
other boxes such as FS, FD, and larger boxes are not 
classified as conduit bodies. This article also includes 
installation requirements for fittings used to join raceways 
and to connect raceways and cables to boxes and conduit 
bodies. 

314.2 Round Boxes. Round boxes shall not be used 
where conduits or connectors requiring the use of 
locknuts or bushings are to be connected to the side of the 
box. 

314.3 Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes shall be 
permitted only with open wiring on insulators, concealed 
knob-and-tube wiring, cabled wiring methods with 
entirely nonmetallic sheaths, flexible cords, and 
nonmetallic raceways. 

Exception No. 1: Where internal bonding means are 
provided betw^een all entries, nonmetallic boxes shall be 
permitted to be used with metal raceways or metal- 
armored cables. 

Exception No. 2: Where integral bonding means with a 
provision for attaching an equipment bonding jumper 
inside the box are provided between all threaded entries 
in nonmetallic boxes listed for the purpose, nonmetallic 
boxes shall be permitted to be used with metal raceways 
or metal-armored cables. 

314.4 Metal Boxes. 

Metal boxes shall be grounded and bonded in accordance 
with Parts I, IV, V, VI, VII, and X of Article 250 as 
applicable, except as permitted in 250. 1 12(1). 



II. Installation 

314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet 
locations, boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be 
placed or equipped so as to prevent moisture from 
entering or accumulating within the box, conduit body, or 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



70-177 



31416 ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BOPmSflTTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 



fitting. Boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings installed in wet 
locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. 

Informational Note No. 1: For boxes in floors, see 
314.27(B). 

Informational Note No, 2: For protection against 
corrosion, see 300.6. 

314.16 Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and 
Junction Boxes, and Conduit Bodies. 

Boxes and conduit bodies shall be of sufficient size to 
provide free space for all enclosed conductors. In no case 
shall the volume of the box, as calculated in 314.16(A), 
be less than the fill calculation as calculated in 314.16(B). 
The minimum volume for conduit bodies shall be as 
calculated in 314.16(C). 

The provisions of this section shall not apply to terminal 
housings supplied with motors or generators. 

Informational Note: For volume requirements of motor 
or generator terminal housings, see 430.12. 

Boxes and conduit bodies enclosing conductors 4 AWG 
or larger shall also comply with the provisions of 314.28. 

(A) Box Volume Calculations. The volume of a wiring 
enclosure (box) shall be the total volume of the assembled 
sections and, where used, the space provided by plaster 
rings, domed covers, extension rings, and so forth, that 
are marked with their volume or are made from boxes the 
dimensions of which are Hsted in Table 314.16(A). 

(1) Standard Boxes. The volumes of standard boxes that 
are not marked with their volume shall be as given in 
Table 314.16(A). 

(2) Other Boxes. Boxes 1650 cm^ (100 in.^) or less, 
other than those described in Table 314.16(A), and 
nonmetallic boxes shall be durably and legibly marked by 
the manufacturer with their volume. Boxes described in 
Table 314.16(A) that have a volume larger than is 
designated in the table shall be permitted to have their 
volume marked as required by this section. 

(B) Box Fill Calculations. The volumes in paragraphs 
314.16(B)(1) through (B)(5), as applicable, shall be added 
together. No allowance shall be required for small fittings 
such as locknuts and bushings. 

(1) Conductor Fill. Each conductor that originates 
outside the box and terminates or is spliced within the box 
shall be counted once, and each conductor that passes 
through the box without splice or termination shall be 
counted once. Each loop or coil of unbroken conductor 
not less than twice the minimum length required for free 
conductors in 300.14 shall be counted twice. The 
conductor fill shall be calculated using Table 314.16(B). 
A conductor, no part of which leaves the box, shall not be 
counted. 



Exception: An equipment grounding conductor or 
conductors or not over four fixture wires smaller than 14 
AWG, or both, shall be permitted to be omitted fi^om the 
calculations where they enter a box fi-om a domed 
luminaire or similar canopy and terminate within that 
box. 

(2) Clamp Fill. Where one or more internal cable clamps, 
whether factory or field supplied, are present in the box, a 
single volume allowance in accordance with Table 
314.16(B) shall be made based on the largest conductor 
present in the box. No allowance shall be required for a 
cable connector with its clamping mechanism outside the 
box. 

(3) Support Fittings Fill. Where one or more luminaire 
studs or hickeys are present in the box, a single volume 
allowance in accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall be 
made for each type of fitting based on the largest 
conductor present in the box. 

(4) Device or Equipment Fill. For each yoke or strap 
containing one or more devices or equipment, a double 
volume allowance in accordance with Table 314.16(B) 
shall be made for each yoke or strap based on the largest 
conductor connected to a device(s) or equipment 
supported by that yoke or strap. A device or utilization 
equipment wider than a single 50 mm (2 in.) device box 
as described in Table 314.16(A) shall have double volume 
allowances provided for each gang required for mounting. 

(5) Equipment Grounding Conductor Fill. Where one 
or more equipment grounding conductors or equipment 
bonding jumpers enter a box, a single volume allowance 
in accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall be made based 
on the largest equipment grounding conductor or 
equipment bonding jumper present in the box. Where an 
additional set of equipment grounding conductors, as 
permitted by 250.146(D), is present in the box, an 
additional volume allowance shall be made based on the 
largest equipment grounding conductor in the additional 
set. 

(C) Conduit Bodies. 

(1) General. Conduit bodies enclosing 6 AWG 
conductors or smaller, other than short-radius conduit 
bodies as described in 314.16(C)(2), shall have a cross- 
sectional area not less than twice the cross-sectional area 
of the largest conduit or tubing to which they can be 
attached. The maximum number of conductors permitted 
shall be the maximum number permitted by Table 1 of 
Chapter 9 for the conduit or tubing to which it is attached. 

(2) With Splices, Taps, or Devices. Only those conduit 
bodies that are durably and legibly marked by the 
manufacturer with their volume shall be permitted to 
contain splices, taps, or devices. The maximum number of 
conductors shall be calculated in accordance with 
314.16(B). Conduit bodies shall be supported in a rigid 
and secure manner. 



70-178 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES;FnTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 314.17 



Table 314.16(A) 


Metal Boxes 
























Box Trade Size 


Minimum Volume 




Max 


mum Number of Conductors* 
(arranged by AWG size) 




mm 


in. 






3 

cm 


3 

in. 


18 


16 


14 


12 


10 


8 


6 


100 X 32 


(4x VA) 


round/octagonal 


205 


12,5 


8 


7 


6 


5 


5 


5 


2 


100x38 


(4x IV2) 


round/octagonal 


254 


15.5 


10 


8 


7 


6 


6 


5 


3 


100 X 54 


(4 X 2'/8) 


round/octagonal 


353 


21.5 


14 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


4 


100x32 


(4x 1%) 




square 


295 


18.0 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


6 


3 


100x38 


(4x 1/2) 




square 


344 


21.0 


14 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


4 


100x54 


(4 X 2%) 




square 


497 


30.3 


20 


17 


15 


13 


12 


10 


6 


120 X 32 


(4"/„xl'/4) 




square 


418 


25.5 


17 


14 


12 


11 


10 


8 


5 


120 X 38 


(4'V,6X1V2) 




square 


484 


29.5 


19 


16 


14 


13 


11 


9 


5 


120x54 


(4'V,6X2%) 




square 


689 


42.0 


28 


24 


21 


18 


16 


14 


8 


75 X 50 X 38 


(3x2x v/2) 




device 


123 


7.5 


5 


4 


3 


3 


3 


2 


1 


75 X 50 >^ 50 


(3x2x2) 




device 


164 


10.0 


6 


5 


5 


4 


4 


3 


2 


75 X 50 X 57 


(3 X 2 X 2'/4) 




device 


172 


10.5 


7 


6 


5 


4 


4 


3 


2 


75 X 50 X 65 


(3 X 2 X 2V2) 




device 


205 


12.5 


8 


7 


6 


5 


5 


4 


2 


75 X 50 X 70 


(3 X 2 X I'A) 




device 


230 


14.0 


9 


8 


7 


6 


5 


4 


2 


75 X 50 X 90 


(3 X 2 X 3/2) 




device 


295 


18.0 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


6 


3 


100x54x38 


(4x2'/8x 114) 




device 


169 


10.3 


6 


5 


5 


4 


4 


3 


2 


100x54x48 


(4 X 2'/8X 1%) 




device 


213 


13.0 


8 


7 


6 


5 


5 


4 


2 


100x54x54 


(4 X 21/3 X 2Vs) 




device 


238 


14.5 


9 


8 


7 


6 


5 


4 


2 


95 X 50 X 65 


(3^4 X 2 X 2y2) 


masonry box/gang 


230 


14.0 


9 


8 


7 


6 


5 


4 


2 


95 x 50 X 90 


(3^4x2x3/2) 


masonry box/gang 


344 


21.0 


14 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


4 


min. 44.5 depth 


FS — single cover/gang 


(VA) 




221 


13.5 


9 


7 


6 


6 


5 


4 


2 


min. 60.3 depth 


FD — single cover/gang (IVs) 




295 


18.0 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


6 


3 


min. 44.5 depth 


FS — muhiple cover/gang (1%) 


295 


18.0 


12 


10 


9 


8 


7 


6 


3 


min. 60.3 depth 


FD — multiple cover/gang (IVg) 


395 


24.0 


16 


13 


12 


10 


9 


8 


4 



* Where no voume allowances are required by 314.16(B)(2) through (B)(5). 



Table 314.16(B) 
Conductor 



Volume Allowance Required per 



Free Space Within Box for Each 
Conductor 


Size of Conductor 

(AWG) 


cm-^ 




in.3 


18 


24.6 




1.50 


16 


28.7 




1.75 


14 


32.8 




2.00 


12 


36.9 




2.25 


10 


41.0 




2.50 


8 


49.2 




3.00 


6 


81.9 




5.00 



(3) Short Radius Conduit Bodies. Conduit bodies such 
as capped elbows and service-cnirance elbows thai 
enclose conductors 6 AWG or smaller, and are only 
intended to enable the installation of the raceway and the 
contained conductors, shall not contain splices, taps, or 
devices and shall be of sufficient size to provide free 
space for all conductors enclosed in the conduit body. 



314.17 Conductors Entering Boxes, Conduit Bodies, or 
Fittings. Conductors entering boxes, conduit bodies, or 
fittings shall be protected from abrasion and shall comply 
with 314.17(A) through (D). 

(A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which 
conductors enter shall be adequately closed. 

(B) Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Where metal 
boxes or conduit bodies are installed with messenger- 
supported wiring, open wiring on insulators, or concealed 
knob-and-tube wiring, conductors shall enter through 
insulating bushings or, in dry locations, through flexible 
tubing extending from the last insulating support to not 
less than 6 mm (Va in.) inside the box and beyond any 
cable clamps. Except as provided in 300.15(C), the wiring 
shall be firmly secured to the box or conduit body. Where 
raceway or cable is installed with metal boxes or conduit 
bodies, the raceway or cable shall be secured to such 
boxes and conduit bodies. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-179 



31419 ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIESflTTINGS; AND HANDHQLES 



(C) Nonmetallic Boxes and Conduit Bodies, 

Nonmetallic boxes and conduit bodies shall be suitable 
for the lowest temperature -rated conductor entering the 
box. Where nonmetallic boxes and conduit bodies are 
used with messenger-supported wiring, open wiring on 
insulators, or concealed knob-and-tube wiring, the 
conductors shall enter the box through individual holes. 
Where flexible tubing is used to enclose the conductors, 
the tubing shall extend from the last insulating support to 
not less than 6 mm (Va in.) inside the box and beyond any 
cable clamp. Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable or 
muhiconductor Type UF cable is used, the sheath shall 
extend not less than 6 mm (% in.) inside the box and 
beyond any cable clamp. In all instances, all permitted 
wiring methods shall be secured to the boxes. 

Exception: Where nonmetallic-sheathed cable or 
muhiconductor Type UF cable is used with single gang 
boxes not larger than a nominal size 57 mm x 100 mm (2V4 
in. X 4 in.) mounted in walls or ceilings, and where the 
cable is fastened within 200 mm (8 in.) of the box measured 
along the sheath and where the sheath extends through a 
cable kfjockout not less than 6 mm (% in.), securing the 
cable to the box shall not be required. Multiple cable 
entries shall be permitted in a single cable knockout 
opening. 

(D) Conductors 4 AWG or Larger. Installation shall 
comply with 300.4(G). 

Informational Note: See 110.12(A) for requirements on 
closing unused cable and raceway knockout openings. 

314.19 Boxes Enclosing Flush Devices. Boxes used to 
enclose flush devices shall be of such design that the 
devices will be completely enclosed on back and sides 
and substantial support for the devices will be provided. 
Screws for supporting the box shall not be used in 
attachment of the device contained therein. 

314.20 In Wall or Ceiling. In walls or ceilings with a 
surface of concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, or other 
noncombustible material, boxes employing a flush-type 
cover or faceplate shall be installed so that the front edge 
of the box, plaster ring, extension ring, or listed extender 
will not be set back of the finished surface more than 6 
mm (% in.). 

In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other 
combustible surface material, boxes, plaster rings, 
extension rings, or listed extenders shall be flush with the 
finished surface or project therefrom. 

314.21 Repairing JNoncombuiftible SuriFAces. 

Noncombustiblq surfaces that are broken or incomplete 
around boxes employing a flush-type cover or faceplate 
shall be repaired so there will be no gaps or open spaces 
greater than 3 mm (Vs in.) at the edge of the box. 



314.22 Surface Extensions. Surface extensions shall be 
made by mounting and mechanically securing an 
extension ring over the box. Equipment grounding shall 
be in accordance with Part VI of Article 250. 

Exception: A surface extension shall be permitted to be 
made from the cover of a box where the cover is designed 
so it is unlikely to fall off or be removed if its securing 
means becomes loose. The wiring method shall be flexible 
for a length sufficient to permit removal of the cover and 
provide access to the box interior, and arranged so that 
any grounding continuity is independent of the connection 
between the box and cover. 

314.23 Supports. Enclosures within the scope of this 
article shall be supported in accordance with one or more 
of the provisions in 314.23(A) through (H). 

(A) Surface Mounting. An enclosure mounted on a 
building or other surface shall be rigidly and securely 
fastened in place. If the surface does not provide rigid and 
secure support, additional support in accordance with 
other provisions of this section shall be provided. 

(B) Structural Mounting. An enclosure supported from a 
structural member of a building or from grade shall be 
rigidly supported either directly or by using a metal, 
polymeric, or wood brace. 

(1) Nails and Screws. Nails and screws, where used as a 
fastening means, shall be attached by using brackets on 
the outside of the enclosure, or they shall pass through 
the interior within 6 mm (% in.) of the back or ends of 
the enclosure. Screws shall not be permitted to pass 
through the box unless exposed threads in the box are 
protected using approved means to avoid abrasion of 
conductor insulation. 

(2) Braces. Metal braces shall be protected against 
corrosion and formed from metal that is not less than 
0.51 mm (0.020 in.) thick uncoated. Wood braces shall 
have a cross section not less than nominal 25 mm ^ 50 
mm (1 in. x 2 in.). Wood braces in wet locations shall be 
treated for the conditions. Polymeric braces shall be 
identified as being suitable for the use. 

(C) Mounting in Finished Surfaces. An enclosure 
mounted in a finished surface shall be rigidly secured 
thereto by clamps, anchors, or fittings identified for the 
application. 

(D) Suspended Ceilings. An enclosure mounted to 
structural or supporting elements of a suspended ceiling 

shall be not more than 1650 cm^ (100 in.^) in size and 
shall be securely fastened in place in accordance with 
either (D)(1) or (D)(2). 



70-180 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 14 - OLULET, DEVICE, PLILL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIESfnTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 314.23 



(1) Framing Members. An enclosure shall be fastened to 
the framing members by mechanical means such as bolts, 
screws, or rivets, or by the use of clips or other securing 
means identified for use with the type of ceiling framing 
member(s) and enclosure(s) employed. The framing 
members shall be adequately supported and securely 
fastened to each other and to the building structure. 

(2) Support Wires. The installation shall comply with the 
provisions of 300.11(A). The enclosure shall be secured, 
using methods identified for the purpose, to ceiling 
support wire(s), including any additional support wire(s) 
installed for that purpose. Support wire(s) used for 
enclosure support shall be fastened at each end so as to be 
taut within the ceiling cavity. 

(E) Raceway Supported Enclosure, Without Devices, 
Luminaires, or Lampholders. An enclosure that does not 
contain a device(s) other than splicing devices or support a 
luminaire(s), lampholder, or other equipment and is 

supported by entering raceways shall not exceed 1650 cm^ 
(100 in.-^) in size. It shall have threaded entries or have 
hubs identified for the purpose. It shall be supported by two 
or more conduits threaded wrenchtight into the enclosure or 
hubs. Each conduit shall be secured within 900 mm (3 ft) 
of the enclosure, or within 450 mm (18 in.) of the enclosure 
if all conduit entries are on the same side. 



Exception: The following whwg methods shall be 
permitted to support a conduit body of any size, including 
a conduit body constructed with only one conduit entry, if 
the trade size of the conduit body is not larger than the 
largest trade size of the conduit or tubing: 

(1) Intermediate metal conduit. Type IMC 

(2) Rigid metal conduit. Type RMC 

(3) Rigid polyvinyl dihride conduit, Type PVC 

(4) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit, Type RTRC 

(5) Electfical metallic tubing. Type EhfT 

(F) Raceway-Supported Enclosures, with Devices, 
Luminaires, or Lampholders. An enclosure that 
contains a device(s), other than splicing devices, or 
supports a luminaire(s), lampholder, or other equipment 
and is supported by entering raceways shall not exceed 

1650 cm^ (100 in.^) in size. It shall have threaded entries 
or have hubs identified for the purpose. It shall be 
supported by two or more conduits threaded wrenchtight 
into the enclosure or hubs. Each conduit shall be secured 
within 450 mm (18 in.) of the enclosure. 

Exception No. I: Rigid metal or intermediate metal 
conduit shall be permitted to support a conduit body of any 
size, including a conduit body constructed with only one 
conduit entry, provided the trade size of the conduit body is 
not larger than the largest trade size of the conduit. 



Exception No. 2: An unbroken length(s) of rigid or 
intermediate metal conduit shall be permitted to support a 
box used for luminaire or lampholder support, or to 
support a wiring enclosure that is an integral part of a 
luminaire and used in lieu of a box in accordance with 
3 00 A 5(B), where all of the following conditions are met: 

(a) The conduit is securely fastened at a point so 
that the length of conduit beyond the last point of conduit 
support does not exceed 900 mm (3 ft). 

(b) The unbroken conduit length before the last 
point of conduit support is 300 mm (12 in.) or greater, 
and that portion of the conduit is securely fastened at 
some point not less than 300 mm (12 in.) from its last 
point of support. 

(c) Where accessible to unqualified persons, the 
luminaire or lampholder, measured to its lowest point, is 
at least 2. 5 m (8 ft) above grade or standing area and at 
least 900 mm (3 ft) measured horizontally to the 2.5 m (8 
ft) elevation from windows, doors, porches, fire escapes, 
or similar locations. 

(d) A luminaire supported by a single conduit does 
not exceed 300 mm (12 in.) in any direction from the point 
of conduit entty. 

(e) The weight supported by any single conduit does 
not exceed 9 kg (20 lb). 

(f) At the luminaire or lampholder end, the 
conduit(s) is threaded wrenchtight into the box, conduit 
body, or integral wiring enclosure, or into hubs identified 
for the purpose. Where a box or conduit body is used for 
support, the luminaire shall be secured directly to the box 
or conduit body, or through a threaded conduit nipple not 
over 75 mm (3 in.) long. 

(G) Enclosures in Concrete or Masonry. An enclosure 
supported by embedment shall be identified as suitably 
protected from corrosion and securely embedded in 
concrete or masonry. 

(H) Pendant Boxes. An enclosure supported by a pendant 
shall comply with 314.23(H)(1) or (H)(2). 

(1) Flexible Cord. A box shall be supported from a 
multiconductor cord or cable in an approved manner that 
protects the conductors against strain, such as a strain- 
relief connector threaded into a box with a hub. 

(2) Conduit. A box supporting lampholders or luminaires, 
or wiring enclosures within luminaires used in lieu of boxes 
in accordance with 300.15(B), shall be supported by rigid 
or intermediate metal conduit stems. For stems longer than 
450 mm (18 in.), the stems shall be connected to the wiring 
system with flexible fittings suitable for the location. At the 
luminaire end, the conduit(s) shall be threaded wrenchtight 
into the box or wiring enclosure, or into hubs identified for 
the purpose. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-181 



31424 ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIESfnTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 



Where supported by only a single conduit, the 
threaded joints shall be prevented from loosening by the 
use of set-screws or other effective means, or the 
luminaire, at any point, shall be at least 2.5 m (8 ft) above 
grade or standing area and at least 900 mm (3 ft) 
measured horizontally to the 2.5 m (8 ft) elevation from 
windows, doors, porches, fire escapes, or similar 
locations. A luminaire supported by a single conduit shall 
not exceed 300 mm (12 in.) in any horizontal direction 
from the point of conduit entry. 

314.24 D€pth of Boxes. Outlet and device boxes shall 
have sufficient depth to allow equipment installed within 
them to be mounted properly and without likelihood of 
damage to conductors within the box. 

(A) Outlet Boxes Without Enclosed Devices or 
Utilization Equipment. Outlet boxes that do not enclose 
devices or utilization equipment shall have a minimum 
internal depth of 12.7 mm ('/i in.). 

(B) Outlet and Device Boxes with Enclosed Devices or 
Utilization Equipment. Outlet and device boxes that 
enclose devices or utihzation equipment shall have a 
minimum internal depth that accommodates the rearward 
projection of the equipment and the size of the conductors 
that supply the equipment. The internal depth shall 
include, where used, that of any extension boxes, plaster 
rings, or raised covers. The internal depth shall comply 
with all apphcable provisions of (B)(1) through (B)(5). 

(1) Large Equipment. Boxes that enclose devices or 
utilization equipment that projects more than 48 mm (VA 
in.) rearward from the mounting plane of the box shall 
have a depth that is not less than the depth of the 
equipment plus 6 mm (% in.). 

(2) Conductors Larger Than 4 AWG. Boxes that 
enclose devices or utilization equipment supplied by 
conductors larger than 4 AWG shall be identified for their 
specific function. 



Exception to (2): Devices or uiilizafion equipment 
suppiied by conductors larger than 4 AWG shall be 
permitted to be mounted on or in junction and pull boxes 

larger than 1650 cm^ (100 in,^) if the spacing at the 
rerminals meets the requirements of 312,6. 

(3) Conductors 8, 6, or 4 AWG. Boxes that enclose 
devices or utilization equipment supplied by 8, 6, or 4 
AWG conductors shall have an internal depth that is not 
less than 52.4 mm (2V|6 in.). 

(4) Conductors 12 or 10 AWG. Boxes that enclose 
devices or utilization equipment supplied by 12 or 10 
AWG conductors shall have an internal depth that is not 
less than 30.2 mm (lV]6 in.). Where the equipment 
projects rearward from the mounting plane of the box by 
more than 25 mm (1 in.), the box shall have a depth not 
less than that of the equipment plus 6 mm (% in.). 



(5) Conductors 14 AWG and Smaller. Boxes that 
enclose devices or utilization equipment supplied by 14 
AWG or smaller conductors shall have a depth that is not 
less than 23.8 mm (*Vi6 in.). 

Exception to (U through (5): Devices or utilization 
equipment that is listed to be installed with specified 
boxes shall be permitted. 

314.25 Covers and Canopies. In completed installations, 
each box shall have a cover, faceplate, lampholder, or 
luminaire canopy, except where the installation complies 
with 410.24(B). 

(A) Nonmetallic or Metal Covers and Plates. 

Nonmetallic or metal covers and plates shall be permitted. 
Where metal covers or plates are used, they shall comply 
with the grounding requirements of 250.110. 

Informational Note: For additional grounding 
requirements, see 410.42 for metal luminaire canopies, 
and 404.12 and 406.|(B) for metal faceplates. 

(B) Exposed Combustible Wall or Ceiling Finish. 

Where a luminaire canopy or pan is used, any 
combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the 
edge of the canopy or pan and the outlet box shall be 
covered with noncombustible material. 

(C) Flexible Cord Pendants. Covers of outlet boxes and 
conduit bodies having holes through which flexible cord 
pendants pass shall be provided with bushings designed 
for the purpose or shall have smooth, well-rounded 
surfaces on which the cords may bear. So-called hard 
rubber or composition bushings shall not be used. 

314.27 Outlet Boxes. 

(A) Boxes at Luminaire or Lampholder Outlets. Outlet 
boxes or fillings designed for the support of luminaires 
and lampholders, and installed as required by 314.23, 
shall be permitted to support a luminaire or lampholder. 

(1) Wall Outlets. Boxes used at luminaire or lampholder 
outlets in a wall shall be marked on the interior ofthe box 
to indicate the maximuin weight of the luminaire that is 
permitted to be supported by the box in the wall, if other 
than 23 kg (50 lb). 

Exception: A wall-mounted luminaire or lampholder 
weighing not more than 3 kg (6 lb) shall be permitted to 
be supported on other boxes or plaster rings that are 
secured to other boxes, provided the luminaire or its 
supporting yoke, or the lampholder, is secured to the box 
with no fewer than two No. 6 or larger screws. 

(2) Ceiling Outlets. At every outlet used exclusively for 
lightings the box shall be designed or installed so that a 
luminaire or lampholder may be attached. Boxes shall be 
required to support a luminaire weighing a minimum of 
23 kg (50 lb). A luminaire that weiglis more than 23 kg 



70-182 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AIND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT B0DIES;F1TTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 314.28 



1(50 ib) shall be supported independently of llie oullcl box, 
jiHiless the outlet box is listed and marked tor the 
jmaximum weight to be supported. 

(B) Floor Boxes. Boxes listed specifically for this 
application shall be used for receptacles located in the floor. 

Exception: Where the authority having jurisdiction 
judges them free from likely exposure to physical damage, 
moisture, and dirt, boxes located in elevated floors of 
show windows and similar locations shall be permitted to 
be other than those listed for floor applications. 
Receptacles and covers shall be listed as an assembly for 
this type of location. 

(C) Boxes at Ceiling-Suspended (Paddie) Fan Outlets. 

Outlet boxes or outlet box systems used as the sole 
support of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan shall be listed, 
shall be marked by their manufacturer as suitable for this 
purpose, and shall not support ceiling-suspended (paddle) 
fans that weigh more than 32 kg (70 lb). For outlet boxes 
or outlet box systems designed to support ceiling- 
suspended (paddle) fans that weigh more than 16 kg (35 
lb), the required marking shall include the maximum 
weight to be supported. 

Where spare, separately switched, ungrounded 
conductors are provided to a ceiling mounted outlet box, 
in a location acceptable for a ceiling-suspended (paddle) 
fan in single or muhi-faniily dwellings, the outlet box or 
outlet box system shall be listed for sole support of a 
ce i I i ng-siispended I paddle ) fan . 

(D) Utilization Equipment Boxes used for the support of 
utilization equipment other than ceiling-suspended (paddle) 
fans shall meet the requirements of 314.27(A) for the support 
of a luminaire that is the same size and weight. 

Exception: Utilization equipment weighing not more than 
3 kg (6 lb) shall be permitted to be supported on other 
boxes or plaster rings that are secured to other boxes, 
provided the equipment or its supporting yoke is secured 
to the box with no fewer than two No. 6 or larger screws. 

314.28 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies. 

Boxes and conduit bodies used as pull or junction boxes 
shall comply with 314.28(A) through (E). 

Exception: Terminal housings supplied with motors shall 
comply with the provisions of 430.12. 

(A) Minimum Size. For raceways containing conductors 
of 4 AWG or larger that are required to be insulated, and 
for cables containing conductors of 4 AWG or larger, the 
minimum dimensions of pull or junction boxes installed 
in a raceway or cable run shall comply with (A)(1) 
through (A)(3). Where an enclosure dimension is to be 
calculated based on the diameter of entering raceways, the 
diameter shall be the metric designator (trade size) 
expressed in the units of measurement employed. 



(1) Straight Pulls. In straight pulls, the length of the box 
or conduit body shall not be less than eight times the 
metric designator (trade size) of the largest raceway. 

(2) Angle or U Pulls, or Splices. Where splices or where 
angle or U pulls are made, the distance between each 
raceway entry inside the box or conduit body and the 
opposite wall of the box or conduit body shall not be less 
than six times the metric designator (trade size) of the 
largest raceway in a row. This distance shall be increased 
for additional entries by the amount of the sum of the 
diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on 
the same wall of the box. Each row shall be calculated 
individually, and the single row that provides the 
maximum distance shall be used. 

Exception: Where a raceway or cable entry is in the wall 
of a box or conduit body opposite a removable cover, the 
distance from that wall to the cover shall be permitted to 
comply with the distance required for one wire per 
terminal in Table 312.6(A). 

The distance between raceway entries enclosing the same 
conductor shall not be less than six times the metric 
designator (trade size) of the larger raceway. 

When transposing cable size into raceway size in 
314.28(A)(1) and (A)(2), the minimum metric designator 
(trade size) raceway required for the number and size of 
conductors in the cable shall be used. 

(3) Smaller Dimensions. Boxes or conduit bodies of 
dimensions less than those requii*ed in 314.28(A)(1) and 
(A)(2) shall be permitted for installations of combinations of 
conductors that are less than the maximum conduit or tubing 
fill (of conduits or tubing being used) pennitted by Table 1 of 
Chapter 9, provided the box or conduit body has been listed 
for, and is permanently marked with, the maximum number 
and maximum size of conductors permitted. 

(B) Conductors in Pull or Junction Boxes. In pull boxes or 
junction boxes having any dimension over 1.8 m (6 ft), all 
conductors shall be cabled or racked up in an approved manner. 

(C) Covers. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and conduit 
bodies shall be provided with covers compatible with the 
box or conduit body construction and suitable for the 
conditions of use. Where used, metal covers shall comply 
with the grounding requirements of 250. 1 10. 

(B) Permanent Barriers. Where permanent barriers are 
installed in a box, each section shall be considered as a 
separate box. 



(E) Power Distribution Block.^. Power distribution 
blocks shall be permitted in pull and junction boxes over 

1650 cm-^ (100 in.-^) for connections of conductors where 
installed in boxes and where the installation complies 
with (I) through (5). 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-183 



31429 ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT BODIES;FrmNGS; AND HANDHOLES 



Exception: Equipment groumltng terminal bars shall be 
permitted in smaller enclosures ■ 

(1) Installation, Power dii^tribution blocks installed in 
boxes shall be listed. 



(2) Size. In addition to the overall size requirement in the 
first sentence of 314.28(A)(2). the power distribulion 
block shall be installed in a box with dimensions not 
smaller than specified in the installation instniclions olf 
the power distribution block. 

(3) Wire Bending Space, Wire bending space at the 
terminals of power distribution blocks shall comply with 
312.6. 



(4) Live Parts- Power distribulion blocks shall not have 
uninsulated live parts exposed within a box, whether or 
not the box cover is installed, 

(5) Throngh Conductors- Where the pull or junction 
jboxes are used for conductors that do not terminate on the 
|30wer distribulion block(s), the ihrough conductors shall 
be arranged so the power distribution block terminals are 
unobstructed following installaiion. 

314.29 Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Handhole Enclosures 
to Be Accessible. Boxes, conduit bodies, and handhole 
enclosures shall be installed so that the wiring contained in 
them can be rendered accessible without removing any part 
of the building or, in underground circuits, without 
excavating sidewalks, paving, earth, or other substance that 
is to be used to establish the finished grade. 

Exception: Listed boxes and handhole enclosures shall 
be permitted where covered by gravel, light aggregate, or 
noncohesive granulated soil if their location is effectively 
identified and accessible for excavation. 

314.30 Handhole Enclosures. 

Handhole enclosures shall be designed and installed to 
withstand all loads likely to be imposed on them. They 
shall be identified for use in underground systems. 

Informational Note: See ANSI/SCTE 77-2002, 
Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity, for 
additional infomiation on deliberate and nondeliberate 
traffic loading that can be expected to bear on 
underground enclosures. 

(A) Size. Handhole enclosures shall be sized in 
accordance with 314.28(A) for conductors operating at 
600 volts or below, and in accordance with 314.71 for 
conductors operating at over 600 volts. For handhole 
enclosures without bottoms where the provisions of 
314.28(A)(2), Exception, or 314.71(B)(1), Exception No. 
1, apply, the measurement to the removable cover shall be 
taken from the end of the conduit or cable assembly. 



(B) Wiring Entries. Underground raceways and cable 
assemblies entering a handhole enclosure shall extend 
into the enclosure, but they shall not be required to be 
mechanically connected to the enclosure. 

(C) Enclosed Wiring. All enclosed conductors and any 
splices or terminations, if present, shall be listed as 
suitable for wet locations. 

(D) Covers. Handhole enclosure covers shall have an 
identifying mark or logo that prominently identifies the 
function of the enclosure, such as "electric." Handhole 
enclosure covers shall require the use of tools to open, or 
they shall weigh over 45 kg (100 lb). Metal covers and 
other exposed conductive surfaces shall be bonded in 
accordance vs^ith 250.92 if the conductors in the handhole 
are service conductors, or in accordance with 250.96(A) if 
the conductors in the handhole are feeder or branch- 
circuit conductors. 



III. Construction Specifications 

314.40 Metal Boxes, Conduit Bodies, and Fittings. 

(A) Corrosion Resistant. Metal boxes, conduit bodies, 
and fittings shall be corrosion resistant or shall be well- 
galvanized, enameled, or otherwise properly coated inside 
and out to prevent corrosion. 

Informational Note: See 300.6 for limitation in the use 
of boxes and fittings protected from corrosion solely by 
enamel. 

(B) Thickness of Metal. Sheet steel boxes not over 1650 

cm^ (100 in.^) in size shall be made from steel not less 
than 1.59 mm (0.0625 in.) thick. The wall of a malleable 
iron box or conduit body and a die-cast or permanent- 
mold cast aluminum, brass, bronze, or zinc box or conduit 
body shall not be less than 2.38 mm (V32 in.) thick. Other 
cast metal boxes or conduit bodies shall have a wall 
thickness not less than 3.17 mm (Vg in.). 

Exception No. I: Listed boxes and conduit bodies shown 
to have equivalent strength and characteristics shall be 
permitted to be made of thinner or other metals. 

Exception No. 2: The walls of listed short radius conduit 
bodies, as covered in 3 1 4. 1 6(C)(2), shall be permitted to 
be made of thinner metal 

(C) Metal Boxes Over 1650 cm^ (100 in.^). Metal boxes 
over 1650 cm^ (100 in. ^) in size shall be constructed so as 
to be of ample strength and rigidity. If of sheet steel, the 
metal thickness shall not be less than 1.35 mm (0.053 in.) 
uncoated. 



70-184 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 3 14 - OUTLET, DEVICE, PLTLL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDLUT BODIES SITTINGS; AND HANDHOLES 3 14.71 



(D) Grounding Provisions. A means shall be provided in 
each metal box for the connection of an equipment 
grounding conductor. The means shall be permitted to be 
a tapped hole or equivalent. 

314.41 Covers. Metal covers shall be of the same 
material as the box or conduit body with which they are 
used, or they shall be lined with firmly attached insulating 
material that is not less than 0.79 mm (V32 in.) thick, or 
they shall be listed for the purpose. Metal covers shall be 
the same thickness as the boxes or conduit body for which 
they are used, or they shall be listed for the purpose. 
Covers of porcelain or other approved insulating materials 
shall be permitted if of such form and thickness as to 
afford the required protection and strength. 

314.42 Bushings. Covers of outlet boxes and conduit 
bodies having holes through which flexible cord pendants 
may pass shall be provided with approved bushings or 
shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the 
cord may bear. Where individual conductors pass through 
a metal cover, a separate hole equipped with a bushing of 
suitable insulating material shall be provided for each 
conductor. Such separate holes shall be connected by a 
slot as required by 300.20. 

314.43 Nonmetallic Boxes. Provisions for supports or 
other mounting means for nonmetallic boxes shall be 
outside of the box, or the box shall be constructed so as to 
prevent contact between the conductors in the box and the 
supporting screws. 

314.44 Marking. All boxes and conduit bodies, covers, 
extension rings, plaster rings, and the like shall be durably 
and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or 
trademark. 

IV. Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies^ and 
Handhole Enclosures for Use on Systems over 600 
Volts, Nominal 

314.70 General 

(A) Pull and Junction Boxes. Where pull and junction 
boxes are used on systems over 600 volts, the installation 
shall comply with the provisions of Part IV and with the 
following general provisions of this article: 

(1) Parti, 314.2; 314.3; and 314.4 

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.20; 314.23(A), (B), or 
(G); 314.28(B); and 314.29 

(3) Partlll, 3 14.40(A) and (C); and 3 14.41 

(B) Conduit Bodiei^. Where conduit bodies are used on 
systems over 600 volts, the installation shall comply with 
the provisions of Part IV and with the following general 
provisions of this article: 



(1) Part K 314.4 



(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(A), (E), or (G): and 
314.29 

(3) Part in, 3 14.40(A); and 314.41: 

(C) Handhole Enclosures. Where handhole enclosures 
are used on systems over 600 volts, the installation shall 
comply with the provisions of Part IV and with the 
following general provisions of this article: 

(1) Part I, 314.3; and 314.4 

(2) Part II, 314.15; 314.17; 314.23(G); 314.28(B); 
314.29; and 314.30 



314.71 Size of Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit 
Bodies, and Handhole Enclosures, Pull and junction 
boxes and handhole enclosures shall provide adequate 
space and dimensions for the installation of conductors, 
and they shall comply with the specific requirements of 
this section. Conduit bodies shall be permitted if they 
meet the dimensional requirements for boxes. 

Exception: Terminal housings supplied with motors shall 
comply with the provisions of 430.12. 

(A) For Straight Pulls. The length of the box shall not be 
less than 48 times the outside diameter, over sheath, of the 
largest shielded or lead-covered conductor or cable 
entering the box. The length shall not be less than 32 
times the outside diameter of the largest nonshielded 
conductor or cable. 

(B) For Angle or U Pulls. 

(1) Distance to Opposite Wall. The distance between 
each cable or conductor entry inside the box and the 
opposite wall of the box shall not be less than 36 times the 
outside diameter, over sheath, of the largest cable or 
conductor. This distance shall be increased for additional 
entries by the amount of the sum of the outside diameters, 
over sheath, of all other cables or conductor entries 
through the same wall of the box. 

Exception No. 1: Where a conductor or cable entry is in 
the wall of a box opposite a removable cover, the distance 
from that wall to the cover shall be permitted to be not 
less than the bending radius for the conductors as 
provided in 300.34. 

Exception No. 2: Where cables are nonshielded and not 
lead covered, the distance of 36 times the outside 
diameter shall be permitted to be reduced to 24 times the 
outside diameter. 

(2) Distance Between Entry and Exit. The distance 
between a cable or conductor entry and its exit from the 
box shall not be less than 36 times the outside diameter, 
over sheath, of that cable or conductor. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-185 



314.72 



ARTICLE 320 - ARMORED CABLE: TYPE AC 



Exception: Where cables are nonshielded and not lead 
covered, the distance of 36 times the outside diameter 
shall be permitted to be reduced to 24 times the outside 
diameter. 

(C) Removable Sides. One or more sides of any pull box 
shall be removable. 

314.72 Construction and Installation Requirements. 

(A) Corrosion Protection. Boxes shall be made of 
material inherently resistant to corrosion or shall be 
suitably protected, both internally and externally, by 
enameling, galvanizing, plating, or other means. 

(B) Passing Through Partitions. Suitable bushings, 
shields, or fittings having smooth, rounded edges shall be 
provided where conductors or cables pass through 
partitions and at other locations where necessary. 

(C) Complete Enclosure. Boxes shall provide a complete 
enclosure for the contained conductors or cables. 

(D) Wiring Is Accessible. Boxes and conduit bodies shall 
be installed so that the conductors are! accessible without 
removing any fixed part of the building or structure. 

Working space shall be provided in accordance with 
110.34. 

(E) Suitable Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable 
covers securely fastened in place. Underground box 
covers that weigh over 45 kg (100 lb) shall be considered 
meeting this requirement. Covers for boxes shall be 
permanently marked "DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — 
KEEP OUT." The marking shall be on the outside of the 
box cover and shall be readily visible. Letters shall be 
block type and at least 13 mm {V2 in.) in height. 

(F) Suitable for Expected Handling. Boxes and their 
covers shall be capable of withstanding the handling to 
which they are likely to be subjected. 



ARTICLE 320 

Armored Cable: Type AC 

I. General 

320.1 Scope. 

This article covers the use, installation, and construction 
specifications for armored cable, Type AC. 

320.2 Definition. 

Armored Cable, Type AC, A fabricated assembly of 
insulated conductors in a flexible interlocked metallic 
armoi See 320.100. 



II. Installation 

320.10 Uses Permitted. Type AC cable shall be 
permitted as follows: 

(1) For feeders and branch circuits in both exposed and 
concealed installations 

(2) In cable trays 

(3) In dry locations 

(4) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other 
masonry, except in damp or wet locations 

(5) To be run or fished in the air voids of masonry block 
or tile walls where such walls are not exposed or 
subject to excessive moisture or dampness 

Informational Note: The "Uses Permitted" is not an all- 
inclusive list. 

320.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type AC cable shall not be 
used as follows: 

(1) Where subject to physical damage 

(2) In damp or wet locations 

(3) In air voids of masonry block or tile walls where such 
walls are exposed or subject to excessive moisture or 
dampness 

(4) Where exposed to corrosive bonditions 

(5) Embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry 
in damp or wet locations 

320.15 Exposed Work. Exposed runs of cable, except 
as provided in 300.11(A), shall closely follow the 
surface of the building finish or of running boards. 
Exposed runs shall also be permitted to be installed on 
the underside of joists where supported at each joist and 
located so as not to be subject to physical damage. 

320.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. 
Type AC cable shall be protected in accordance with 
300.4(A), (C), and (D) where installed through or parallel 
to framing members. 

320.23 In Accessible Attics. Type AC cables in 
accessible attics or roof spaces shall be installed as 
specified in 320.23(A) and (B). 

(A) Cables Run Across the Top of Floor Joists. Where 
run across the top of floor joists, or within 2.1 m (7 ft) of 
the floor or floor joists across the face of rafters or 
studding, the cable shall be protected by substantial 
guard strips that are at least as high as the cable. Where 
this space is not accessible by permanent stairs or 
ladders, protection shall only be required within 1.8 m (6 
ft) of the nearest edge of the scuttle hole or attic entrance. 



70-186 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 322 - FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FC 



322.1 



(B) Cable Installed Parallel to Framing Members. 

Where the cable is installed parallel to the sides of rafters, 
studs, or ceiling or floor joists, neither guard strips nor 
running boards shall be required, and the installation shall 
also comply with 300.4(D). 

320.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type AC cable shall 
be made such that the cable is not damaged. The radius of 
the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less 
than five times the diameter of the Type AC cable. 

320.30 Securing and Supporting. 

(A) General. Type AC cable shall be supported and 
secured by staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar 
fittings, designed and installed so as not to damage the 
cable. 

(B) Securing. Unless otherwise permilled. Type AC cable 
shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of every outlet 
box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not 
exceeding 1.4 m (4V2 ft) where installed on or across 
framing members. 

(C) Supporting. Unless otherwise pemiilled. Type AC 
cable shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.4 m 

(4^2 ft). 

Horizontal runs of Type AC cable installed in wooden or 
metal framing members or similar supporting means shall 
be considered supported where such support does not 
exceed 1.4-m (4y2-ft) intervals. 

(D) Unsupported Cables. Type AC cable shall be 
permitted to be unsupported where the cable complies 
with any of the following: 

(1) Is fished between access points through concealed 
spaces in finished buildings or structures and 
supporting is impracticable 

(2) Is not more than 600 mm (2 ft) in length at terminals 
where flexibility is necessary 

(3) Is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) in length from the last 
point of cable support to the point of connection to a 
luminaire(s) or other electrical equipment and the 
cable and point of connection are within an 
accessible ceiling. For the purposes of this section. 
Type AC cable fittings shall be permitted as a means 
of cable support. 

320.40 Boxes and Fittings. At all points where the 
armor of AC cable terminates, a fitting shall be provided 
to protect wires from abrasion, unless the design of the 
outlet boxes or fittings is such as to afford equivalent 
protection, and, in addition, an insulating bushing or its 
equivalent protection shall be provided between the 
conductors and the armor. The connector or clamp by 
which the Type AC cable is fastened to boxes or 
cabinets shall be of such design that the insulating 



bushing or its equivalent will be visible for inspection. 
Where change is made from Type AC cable to other 
cable or raceway wiring methods, a box, fitting, or 
conduit body shall be installed at junction points as 
required in 300.15. 

320.80 Ampacity. The ampacity shall be determined m 
accordance with 310.15. 

(A) Thermal Insulation. Armored cable installed in 
thermal insulation shall have conductors rated at 90^C 
(194°F). The ampacity of cable installed in these 
applications shall not exceed that of a 60°C (140°F) rated 
conductor. The 90'^C (194^F) rating shall be permitted to 
be used for ampacity adjustment and correction 
calculations: however, the ampacity shall not exceed that 
of a 60^C (140°F) rated conductor. 

(B) Cable Tray. The ampacity of Type AC cable 
installed in cable tray shall be determined in accordance 
with 392.80(A). 

III. Construction Specifications 

320.100 Construction. Type AC cable shall have an 
armor of flexible metal tape and shall have an internal 
bonding strip of copper or aluminum in intimate contact 
with the armor for its entire length. 

320.104 Conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of a 
type listed in Table 310. 104(A) or those identified for use 
in this cable. In addition, the conductors shall have an 
overall moisture-resistant and fire-retardant fibrous 
covering. For Type ACT, a moisture-resistant fibrous 
covering shall be required only on the individual 
conductors. 

320.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Type AC 
cable shall provide an adequate path for fault current as 
required by 250.4(A)(5) or (B)(4) to act as an equipment 
grounding conductor. 

320,120 Marking. The cable shall be marked in 
accordance with 310, 120, except that Type AC shall have 
ready identification of the manufacturer by distinctive 
external markings on the cable armor throughout its entire 
length. 



ARTICLE 322 
Flat Cable Assemblies: Type FC 

I. General 

322.1 Scope. 

This article covers the use, installation, and construction 
specifications for flat cable assemblies. Type FC. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-187 



322,2 



ARTICLE 322 - FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES TYPE FC 



322.2 Definition. 

Flat Cable Assembly, Type FC. An assembly of parallel 
conductors formed integrally with an insulating material 
web specifically designed for field installation in surface 
metal raceway. 

II. Installation 

322.10 Uses Permitted. 

Flat cable assemblies shall be permitted only as follows: 

(1) As branch circuits to supply suitable tap devices for 
lighting, small appliances, or small power loads. The 
rating of the branch circuit shall not exceed 30 
amperes. 

(2) Where installed for exposed work. 

(3) In locations where they will not be subjected to 
physical damage. Where a flat cable assembly is 
installed less than 2.5 m (8 ft) above the floor or 
fixed working platform, it shall be protected by a 
cover identified for the use. 

(4) In surface metal raceways identified for the use. The 
channel portion of the surface metal raceway systems 
shall be installed as complete systems before the flat 
cable assemblies are pulled into the raceways. 

322.12 Uses Not Permitted. 

Flat cable assemblies shall not be used as follows: 

(1) Where exposed to corrosive conditions^ unless 
suitable for the application 

(2) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators 

(3) In any hazardous (classified) location, except as 
specificafly pcrmilted by other articles in this Co</e 

(4) Outdoors or in wet or damp locations unless 
identified for the use 

322.30 Securing and Supporting. The flat cable 
assemblies shall be supported by means of their special 
design features, within the surface metal raceways. 

The surface metal raceways shall be supported as 
required for the specific raceway to be installed. 

322.40 Boxes and Fittings. 

(A) Dead Ends. Each flat cable assembly dead end shall 
be terminated in an end-cap device identified for the use. 

The dead-end fitting for the enclosing surface metal 
raceway shall be identified for the use. 

(B) Luminaire Hangers. Luminaire hangers installed 
with the flat cable assemblies shall be identified for the 
use. 

(C) Fittings. Fittings to be installed with flat cable 
assemblies shall be designed and installed to prevent 
physical damage to the cable assemblies. 



(D) Extensions. All extensions from flat cable assemblies 
shall be made by approved wiring methods, within the 
junction boxes, installed at either end of the flat cable 
assembly runs. 

322.56 Splices and Taps. 

(A) Splices. Splices shall be made in listed junction 
boxes. 

(B) Taps. Taps shall be made between any phase 
conductor and the grounded conductor or any other 
phase conductor by means of devices and fittings 
identified for the use. Tap devices shall be rated at not 
less than 15 amperes, or more than 300 volts to ground, 
and shall be color-coded in accordance with the 
requirements of 322.120(C). 

Ill, Construction 

322,100 Construction. Flat cable assemblies shall consist 
of two, three, four, or five conductors. 

322.104 Conductors. Flat cable assemblies shall have 
conductors of 10 AWG special stranded copper wires. 

322.112 Insulation. The entire flat cable assembly shall 
be formed to provide a suitable insulation covering all 
the conductors and using one of the materials recognized 
in Table 3 10. 1 64(A) for general branch-circuit wiring. 

322.120 Marking. 

(A) Temperature Rating. In addition to the provisions of 
310, 120, Type FC cable shall have the temperature rating 
durably marked on the surface at intervals not exceeding 
600 mm (24 in.). 

(B) Identification of Grounded Conductor. The 

grounded conductor shall be identified throughout its 
length by means of a distinctive and durable white or 
gray marking. 

Informational Note: The color gray may have been 
used in the past as an ungrounded conductor. Care 
should be taken when working on existing systems. 

(C) Terminal Block Identification. Terminal blocks 
identified for the use shall have distincdve and durable 
markings for color or word coding. The grounded 
conductor section shall have a white marking or other 
suitable designation. The next adjacent section of the 
terminal block shall have a black marking or other 
suitable designation. The next secfion shall have a red 
marking or other suitable designation. The final or outer 
section, opposite the grounded conductor section of the 
terminal block, shall have a blue marking or other 
suitable designation. 



70-188 



2013 Califomia Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 324 - FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES: TYPE FCC 



324.40 



ARTICLE 324 

Flat Coiiductor Cable; Type FCC 

I. General 

324.1 Scope. This article covers a field-installed wiring 
system for branch circuits incorporating Type FCC cable 
and associated accessories as defined by the article. The 
wiring system is designed for installation under carpet 
squares. 

324.2 Definitions. 

Bottom Shield. A protective layer that is installed 
between the floor and Type FCC flat conductor cable to 
protect the cable from physical damage and may or may 
not be incorporated as an integral part of the cable. 

Cable Connector. A connector designed to join Type 
FCC cables without using a junction box. 

FCC System. A complete wiring system for branch 
circuits that is designed for installation under carpet 
squares. The FCC system includes Type FCC cable and 
associated shielding, connectors, terminators, adapters, 
boxes, and receptacles. 

Insulating End. An insulator designed to electrically 
insulate the end of a Type FCC cable. 

Metal Shield Connections. Means of connection 
designed to electrically and mechanically connect a metal 
shield to another metal shield, to a receptacle housing or 
self-contained device, or to a transition assembly. 

Top Shield. A grounded metal shield covering under- 
carpet components of the FCC system for the purposes of 
providing protection against physical damage. 

Transition Assembly. An assembly to facilitate 
connection of the FCC system to other wiring systems, 
incorporating (1) a means of electrical interconnection 
and (2) a suitable box or covering for providing electrical 
safety and protection against physical damage. 

Type FCC Cable. Three or more flat copper conductors 
placed edge-to-edge and separated and enclosed within an 
insulating assembly. 

324.6 Listing Requirements. Type FCC cable and 
associated fittings shall be listed. 



II. Installation 

324.10 Uses Permitted. 

(A) Branch Circuits. Use of FCC systems shall be 
permitted both for general-purpose and apphance branch 
circuits and for individual branch circuits. 



(B) Branch-Circuit Ratings. 

(1) Voltage. Voltage between ungrounded conductors 
shall not exceed 300 volts. Voltage between ungrounded 
conductors and the grounded conductor shall not exceed 
150 volts. 

(2) Current. General-purpose and appliance branch 
circuits shall have ratings not exceeding 20 amperes. 
Individual branch circuits shall have ratings not exceeding 
30 amperes. 

(C) Floors. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on 
hard, sound, smooth, continuous floor surfaces made of 
concrete, ceramic, or composition flooring, wood, and 
similar materials. 

(D) Walls. Use of FCC systems shall be permitted on 
wall surfaces in surface metal raceways. 

(E) Damp Locations. Use of FCC systems in damp 
locations shall be permitted. 

(F) Heated Floors. Materials used for floors heated in 
excess of 30°C (86°F) shall be identified as suitable for 
use at these temperatures. 

(G) System Height. Any portion of an FCC system with 
a height above floor level exceeding 2.3 mm (0.090 in.) 
shall be tapered or feathered at the edges to floor level. 

324.12 Uses Not Permitted. FCC systems shall not be 
used in the following locations: 

(1) Outdoors or in wet locations 

(2) Where subject to corrosive vapors 

(3) In any hazardous (classified) location 

(4) In residential, school, and hospital buildings 

324.18 Crossings. Crossings of more than two Type FCC 
cable runs shall not be permitted at any one point. 
Crossings of a Type FCC cable over or under a flat 
communications or signal cable shall be permitted. In 
each case, a grounded layer of metal shielding shall 
separate the two cables, and crossings of more than two 
flat cables shall not be peniiitted at any one point. 

324.30 Securing and Supporting. All FCC system 
components shall be firmly anchored to the floor or wall 
using an adhesive or mechanical anchoring system 
identified for this use. Floors shall be prepared to ensure 
adherence of the FCC system to the floor until the carpet 
squares are placed, 

324.40 Boxes and Fittings. 

(A) Cable Connections and Insulating Ends, All Type 
FCC cable connections shall use connectors identified for 
their use, installed such that electrical continuity, 
insulation, and sealing against dampness and liquid 



201 3 California Electrical Code 



70-189 



324.41 



ARTICLE 324 - FLAT CABLE ASSEMBLIES TYPE FCC 



spillage are provided. All bare cable ends shall be 
insulated and sealed against dampness and liquid spillage 
using listed insulating ends, 

(B) Polarization of Connections. All receptacles and 
connections shall be constructed and installed so as to 
maintain proper polarization of the system. 

(C) Shields. 

(1) Top Shield. A metal top shield shall be installed over 
all floor-mounted Type FCC cable, connectors, and 
insulating ends. The top shield shall completely cover all 
cable mns, corners, connectors, and ends. 

(2) Bottom Shield. A bottom shield shall be installed 
beneath all Type FCC cable, connectors, and insulating 
ends. 

(D) Connection to Other Systems. Power feed, 
grounding connection, and shield system connection 
between the FCC system and other wiring systems shall 
be accomplished in a transition assembly identified for 
this use. 

(E) Metal-Shield Connectors, Metal shields shall be 
connected to each other and to boxes, receptacle housings, 
self-contained devices, and transition assemblies using 
metal-shield connectors. 

324.41 Floor Coverings. Floor-mounted Type FCC 
cable, cable connectors, and insulating ends shall be 
covered with carpet squares not larger than 914 mm (36 
in.) square. Carpet squares that are adhered to the floor 
shall be attached with release-type adhesives. 

324.42 Devices. 

(A) Receptacles. All receptacles, receptacle housings, 
and self-contained devices used with the FCC system 
shall be identified for this use and shall be connected to 
the Type FCC cable and metal shields. Connection from 
any grounding conductor of the Type FCC cable shall be 
made to the shield system at each receptacle. 

(B) Receptacles and Housings. Receptacle housings and 
self-contained devices designed either for floor mounting 
or for in-wall or on-wall mounting shall be permitted for 
use with the FCC system. Receptacle housings and self- 
contained devices shall incorporate means for facilitating 
entry and termination of Type FCC cable and for 
electrically connecting the housing or device with the 
metal shield. Receptacles and self-contained devices shall 
comply with 406.4. Power and communications outlets 
installed together in common housing shall be permitted 
in accordance with 800.133(A)(1)(c), Exception No. 2. 

324.56 Splices and Taps. 

(A) FCC Systems Alterations. Alterations to FCC 
systems shall be permitted. New cable connectors shall be 
used at new connection points to make alterations. It shall 



be permitted to leave unused cable runs and associated 
cable connectors in place and energized. All cable ends 
shall be covered with insulating ends. 

(B) Transition Assemblies. All transition assemblies 
shall be identified for their use. Each assembly shall 
incorporate means for facilitating entry of the Type FCC 
cable into the assembly, for connecting the Type FCC 
cable to grounded conductors, and for electrically 
connecting the assembly to the metal cable shields and to 
equipment grounding conductors. 

324.60 Grounding. All metal shields, boxes, receptacle 
housings, and self-contained devices shall be electrically 
continuous to the equipment grounding conductor of the 
supplying branch circuit. All such electrical connections 
shall be made with connectors identified for this use. The 
electrical resistivity of such shield system shall not be 
more than that of one conductor of the Type FCC cable 
used in the installation. 



III. Construction 

324.100 Construction. 

(A) Type FCC Cable. Type FCC cable shall be listed for 
use with the FCC system and shall consist of three, four, 
or five flat copper conductors, one of which shall be an 
equipment grounding conductor. 

(B) Shields. 

(1) Materials and Dimensions. All top and bottom shields 
shall be of designs and materials identified for their use. 
Top shields shall be metal Both metallic and nonmetallic 
materials shall be permitted for bottom shields. 

(2) Resistivity. Metal shields shall have cross-sectional 
areas that provide for electrical resistivity of not more 
than that of one conductor of the Type FCC cable used in 
the installation. 

324.101 Corrosion Resistance. Metal components of the 
system shall be either corrosion resistant, coated with 
corrosion-resistant materials, or insulated from contact 
with corrosive substances. 

324.112 Insulation. The insulating material of the cable 
shall be moisture resistant and flame retardant. All 
insulating materials in the FCC systems shall be identified 
for their use. 

324.120 Markings. 

(A) Cable Marking. Type FCC cable shall be clearly and 
durably marked on both sides at intervals of not more than 
610 mm (24 in.) with the information required by 
310.1120(A) and with the following additional 
information: 



70-190 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 326 - INTEGRATED GAS SPACER CABLE: TYPE IGS 



326.112 



( 1 ) Materi al of conductors 

(2) Maximum temperature rating 

(3) Ampacity 

(B) Conductor Identification. Conductors shall be 
clearly and durably identified on both sides throughout 
their length as specified in 310. 1 10. 



ARTICLE 326 

Integrated Gas Spacer Cable: Type IGS 

I. General 

326.1 Scope. 

This article covers the use, installation, and construction 
specifications for integrated gas spacer cable, Type IGS. 

326.2 Definition. 

Integrated Gas Spacer Cable, Type IGS. A factory 
assembly of one or more conductors, each individually 
insulated and enclosed in a loose fit, nonmetalHc flexible 
conduit as an integrated gas spacer cable rated through 
600 volts. 

II. Installation 

326.10 Uses Permitted. 

Type IGS cable shall be permitted for use under ground, 
including direct burial in the earth, as the following: 

(1) Service-entrance conductors 

(2) Feeder or branch-circuit conductors 

(3) Service- lateral conductors 

326.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type IGS cable shall not be 
used as interior wiring or be exposed in contact with 
buildings. 

326.24 Bending Radius. Where the coilable nonmetallic 
conduit and cable is bent for installation purposes or is 
flexed or bent during shipment or installation, the radii of 
bends measured to the inside of the bend shall not be less 
than specified in Table 326.24. 

326.26 Bends. A run of Type IGS cable between pull 
boxes or terminations shall not contain more than the 
equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees total), 
including those bends located immediately at the pull box 
or terminations. 

326.40 Fittings. Terminations and splices for Type IGS 
cable shall be identified as a type that is suitable for 
maintaining the gas pressure within the conduit. A valve 
and cap shall be provided for each length of the cable and 



Table 326.24 Minimum Radii of Bends 



Conduit Size 




Minimum Radii 


Metric Designator 


Trade Size 


mm in. 


53 


2 


600 24 


78 


3 


900 35 


103 


4 


1150 45 



conduit to check the gas pressure or to inject gas into the 
conduit. 

326.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type IGS cable shall 
not exceed the values shown in Table 326,80. 

Table 326.80 Ampacity of Type IGS Cable 



Size (kcmil) 


Amperes 


Size (kcmil) 


Amperes 


250 


119 


2500 


376 


500 


168 


3000 


412 


750 


206 


3250 


429 


1000 


238 


3500 


445 


1250 


266 


3750 


461 


1500 


292 


4000 


476 


1750 


315 


4250 


491 


2000 


336 


4500 


505 


2250 


357 


4750 


519 



III. Construction Specifications 

326.104 Conductors. The conductors shall be solid 
aluminum rods, laid parallel, consisting of one to nineteen 
12.7 mm (Yi in.) diameter rods. The minimum conductor 
size shall be 250 kcmil, and the maximum size shall be 
4750 kcmil. 

326.112 Insulation. The insulation shall be dry kraft 
paper tapes and a pressurized sulfur hexafluoride gas 
(SF^), both approved for electrical use. The nominal gas 

pressure shall be 138 kPa gauge (20 Ib/in.^ g^^g'^)' The 
thickness of the paper spacer shall be as specified in Table 
326.112. 

Table 326.112 Paper Spacer Thickness 



Thickness 


Size (kcmil) 


mm 




in. 


250-1000 
1250^750 


1.02 
1.52 




0.040 
0.060 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-191 



326.116 



ARTICLE 330 - METAL-CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC 



326.116 Conduit. The conduit shall be a medium density 
polyethylene identified as suitable for use with natural gas 
rated pipe in metric designator 53, 78, or 103 (trade size 
2, 3, or 4). The percent fill dimensions for the conduit are 
shown in Table 326.1 16. 

The size of the conduit permitted for each conductor 
size shall be calculated for a percent fill not to exceed 
those found in Table 1, Chapter 9. 

Table 326.116 Conduit Dimensions 



Conduit Size 



Actual Outside 
Diameter 



Actual Inside 
Diameter 



Metric 


Trade 










Designator 


Size 


mm 


in. 


mm 


in. 


53 


2 


60 


2.375 


49.46 


1.947 


78 


3 


89 


3.500 


73.30 


2.886 


103 


4 


114 


4.500 


94.23 


3.710 



326.120 Marking. The cable shall be marked in 
accordance with 310.120(A), 310.120(B)(1), and 
310.120(D). 



ARTICLE 328 
Medium Voltage Cable: Type MV 



I. General 



328.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications for medium voltage cable, 
Type MV. 

328.2 Definition. 

Medium Voltage Cable, Type MV. A single or 
multiconductor solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2001 
volts or higher. 



(4) Direct buried in accordance with 300.50. 

(5) In messenger- supported wiring in accordance with 
Part II of Article 396. 



(6) 



As exposed runs in accordance with 300.37. Type 
MV cable that has an overall metallic sheath or 
armor, complies with the requirements for Type MC 
cable* and is Identified as "MV or MC* shall be 
permitted to be installed as exposed runs of metal- 
clad caWe in accordance with 300.37. 



Informational Note: The "Uses Permitted" 
inclusive list. 



is not an all- 



328,12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MV cable shall not be 
used where exposed to direct sunlight, unless identified 
for the use. 

328.14 Installation. Type MV cable shall be installed, 
terminated, and tested by qualified persons. 

Informational Note: IBtE 576-2000. Recommended 
Pracliie for InstaUittion, Tcnumation, and Testing of 
insulated Power Cables as Used in Industrial ami 
Commerciid Applications, includes installation 
informaiion and testing criteria for MV cable. 

328.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MV cable shall 
be determined in accordance with 310.60. The ampacity 
of Type MV cable installed in cable tray shall be 
determined in accordance with 392.80(B). 

III. Construction Specifications 

328.100 Construction. Type MV cables shall have 
copper, aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum conductors 
and shall comply with Table 310JI04(C) and Table 
310. 1 04(D) or Table 3 1 0,T04(E). 

328.120 Marking. Medium voltage cable shall be marked 
as required by 310.120. 



IL Installation 

328.10 Uses Permitted. Type MV cable shall be 
permitted for use on power systems rated up to and 
including 35,000 volts, nominal, as follows: 

(1) In wet or dry locations. 

(2) In raceways. 

(3) In cable trays, where identified for the use, in 
accordance with 392.10, 392.20(B), (C), and (D), 
392,22(C), 392.30(B)(J), 392.46, 392.56, and 392.60. 
Type MV cable that has an overaU metallic sheath or 
armor, complies with the requirements for Type MO 
cable, and is identified as *'MV or MC" shall bei 
permitted to be installed in cable trays in accordance 
with 392.10(B)(2). 



ARTICLE 330 
Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC 

I, General 

330.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications of metal-clad cable, Type MC. 

330.2 Definition. 

Metal Clad Cable, Type MC. A factory assembly of one 
or more insulated circuit conductors with or without 
optical fiber members enclosed in an armor of 
interlocking metal tape, or a smooth or corrugated 
metallic sheath. 



70-192 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 330 - METAL -CLAD CABLE: TYPE MC 



330.24 



II. Installation 
330.10 Uses Permitted. 

(A) General Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted as 
follows: 

(1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits. 

(2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits. 

(3) Indoors or outdoors. 

(4) Exposed or concealed. 

(5) To be direct buried where identified for such use. 

(6) In cable tray where identified for such use. 

(7) In any raceway. 

(8) As aerial cable on a messenger. 

(9) In hazardous (classified) locations where specifically 
permilled by other articles in this Coile. 

(10) In dry locations and embedded in plaster finish 
on brick or other masonry except in damp or wet 
locations. 

(11) In wet locations where any of the following 
conditions are met: 

a. The metallic covering is impervious to moisture. 

b. A moisture- impervious jacket is provided under 
the metal covering. 

c. The insulated conductors under the metallic 
covering are listed for use in wet locations, and a 
corrosion-resistant jacket is provided over the 
metallic sheath. 

(12) Where single-conductor cables are used, all phase 
conductors and, where used, the grounded 
conductor shall be grouped together to minimize 
induced voltage on the sheath. 

(B) Specific Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted to 
be installed in compliance with Parts II and III of Article 
725 and 770.133 as applicable and in accordance with 
330.10(B)(1) through (B)(4). 

(1) Cable Tray. Type MC cable installed in cable tray 
shall comply with 392.10, 392.12, 392.18, 392.20, 
392.22, 392.30, 392.46, 392.56, 392.60(C), and 392.80. 

(2) Direct Buried. Direct-buried cable shall comply with 
300.5 or 300.50, as appropriate. 

(3) Installed as Service-Entrance Cable. Type MC cable 
installed as service-entrance cable shall be permitted in 
accordance with 230.43. 



(4) Installed Outside of Buildings or Structures or as 
Aerial Cable. Type MC cable installed outside of 
buildings or structures or as aerial cable shall comply with 
225.10, 396.10, and 396.12. 

Informational Note: The "Uses Permitted" is not an all- 
inclusive list. 

330.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MC cable shall not be 
used under either of the following conditions: 

(1) Where subject to physical damage 

(2) Where exposed to any of the destructive corrosive 
conditions in (a) or (b), unless the metallic sheath or 
armor is resistant to the conditions or is protected by 
material resistant to the conditions: 



a. Direct buried in the earth or embedded 
concrete unless identified for direct burial 



m 



b. Exposed to cinder fills, strong chlorides, caustic 
alkalis, or vapors of chlorine or of hydrochloric 
acids 

330.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. 

Type MC cable shall be protected in accordance with 
300.4(A), (C), and (D) where installed through or parallel 
to framing members. 

330.23 In Accessible Attics. The installation of Type MC 
cable in accessible attics or roof spaces shall also comply 
with 320.23. 

330.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MC cable shall 
be so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius 
of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less 
than required in 330.24(A) through (C). 

(A) Smooth Sheath. 

(1) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath 
for cable not more than 19 mm QA in.) in external 
diameter 

(2) Twelve times the external diameter of the metallic 
sheath for cable more than 19 mm {% in.) but not 
more than 38 mm {VA in.) in external diameter 

(3) Fifteen times the external diameter of the metallic 
sheath for cable more than 38 mm {VA in.) in 
external diameter 

(B) Interlocked-Type Armor or Corrugated Sheath. 

Seven times the external diameter of the metalHc sheath. 

(C) Shielded Conductors. Twelve times the overall 
diameter of one of the individual conductors or seven 
times the overall diameter of the multiconductor cable, 
whichever is greater. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-193 



330.30 



ARTICLE 332- MINERAL-INSULATED, METAL-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPE MI 



330.30 Securing and Supporting. 

(A) General. Type MC cable shall be supported and 
secured by staples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar 
fittings or other approved means designed and installed so 
as not to damage the cable. 

(B) Securing. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be 
secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Cables 
containing four or fewer conductors sized no larger than 
10 AWG shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of every 
box, cabinet, fitting, or other cable termination. 

(C) Supporting. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall 
be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). 

Horizontal runs of Type MC cable installed in wooden or 
metal framing members or similar supporting means shall 
be considered supported and secured where such support 
does not exceed 1 .8-m (6-ft) intervals. 

(D) Unsupported Cables. Type MC cable shall be 
permitted to be unsupported where the cable: 

(1) Is fished between access points through concealed 
spaces in finished buildings or structures and 
supporting is impractical; or 

(2) Is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft) in length from the last 
point of cable support to the point of connection to 
luminaires or other electrical equipment and the cable 
and point of connection are within an accessible 
ceiling. For the purpose of this section. Type MC 
cable fittings shall be permitted as a means of cable 
support. 

330.31 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor 
cables with a nonferrous armor or sheath are used, the 
installation shall comply with 300.20. 

330.40 Boxes and Fittings. Fittings used for connecting 
Type MC cable to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment 
shall be listed and identified for such use. 

330.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MC cable shall 
be determined in accordance with 310.15 or 310.60 for 14 
AWG and larger conductors and in accordance with Table 
402.5 for 18 AWG and 16 AWG conductors. The 
installation shall not exceed the temperature ratings of 
terminations and equipment. 

(A) Type MC Cable Installed in Cable Tray. The 

ampacities for Type MC cable installed in cable tray shall 
be determined in accordance with 392.80. 

(B) Single Type MC Conductors Grouped Together. 
Where single Type MC conductors are grouped together 
in a triangular or square configuration and installed on a 
messenger or exposed with a maintained free airspace of 
not less than 2.15 times one conductor diameter (2.15 x 
O.D.) of the largest conductor contained within the 
configuration and adjacent conductor configurations or 



cables, the ampacity of the conductors shall not exceed 
the allowable ampacities in the following tables: 

(1) Table 310.15(B)(20) for conductors rated through 
2000 volts 

(2) Table 310.60(CK67| and Table 310.60(C)(68) for 
conductors rated over 2000 volts 

III. Construction Specifications 

330.104 Conductors. Conductors shall be of copper, 
aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, nickel or nickel-coated 
copper, solid or stranded. The minimum conductor size 
shall be 18 AWG copper, nickel or nickel-coated copper, 
gg 12 AWG aluminum or copper-clad aluminum. 

330.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where 

Type MC cable is used to provide an equipment 

grounding conductor, it shall comply with 250.118(10) 
and 250.122. 

330.112 Insulation. Insulated conductors shall comply 
with 330.112(A) or (B). 

(A) 600 Volts. Insulated conductors in sizes 1 8 AWG and 
16 AWG shall be of a type listed in Table 402,3, with a 
maximum operating temperature not less than 90°C 
(194°F) and as permitted by 725.49. Conductors larger 
than 16 AWG shall be of a type listed in Table 
310.104(A) or of a type identified for use in Type MC 
cable. 

(B) Over 600 Volts. Insulated conductors shall be of a 
type listed in Table 310.ilO4(C) through Table 
310JO4(E). 

330.116 Sheath. Metallic covering shall be one of the 
following types: smooth metallic sheath, corrugated 
metallic sheath, interlocking metal tape armor. The metallic 
sheath shall be continuous and close fitting. A nonmagnetic 
sheath or armor shall be used on single conductor Type 
MC. Supplemental protection of an outer covering of 
corrosion-resistant material shall be permitted and shall be 
required where such protection is needed. The sheath shall 
not be used as a current-carrying conductor. 

Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against 
corrosion. 



ARTICLE 332 

Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed 

Cable: Type MI 

I. General 

332.1 Scope. 

This article covers the use, installation, and construction 
specifications for mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, 
Type ML 



70-194 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 332 - MINERAL-INSULATED, METAL-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPE MI 



332.80 



332.2 Definition. 

Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable, Type MI. A 
factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated 
with a highly compressed refractory mineral insulation 
and enclosed in a liquidtight and gastight continuous 
copper or alloy steel sheath. 

II. Installation 

332.10 Uses Permitted. Type MI cable shall be 
permitted as follows: 

(1) For services, feeders, and branch circuits 

(2) For power, lighting, control, and signal circuits 

(3) In dry, wet, or continuously moist locations 

(4) Indoors or outdoors 

(5) Where exposed or concealed 

(6) Where embedded in plaster, concrete, fill, or other 
masonry, whether above or below grade 

(7) in hazardous (classified) locations where specifically 
permitted by other articles in this Code 

(8) Where exposed to oil and gasoline 

(9) Where exposed to corrosive conditions not 
deteriorating to its sheath 

(10) In underground runs where suitably protected 
against physical damage and corrosive conditions 

(11) In or attached to cable tray 

Informational Note: The "Uses Permitted" is not 
an all-inclusive list. 

332.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MI cable shall not be 
used under the following conditions or in the following 
locations: 

(1) In underground runs unless protected from physical 
damage, where necessary 

(2) Where exposed to conditions that are destructive and 
corrosive to the metallic sheath, unless additional 
protection is provided 

332.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members. 
Type MI cable shall be protected in accordance with 
300.4 where installed through or parallel to framing 
members. 

332.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type MI cable shall be 
so made that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of 
the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than required 
as follows: 

(1) Five times the external diameter of the metallic 
sheath for cable not more than 19 mm (Va in.) in 
external diameter 

(2) Ten times the external diameter of the metallic sheath 
for cable greater than 19 mm (74 in.) but not more 
than 25 mm (1 in.) in external diameter 



332.30 Securing and Supporting. Type MI cable shall 
be supported and secured by staples, straps, hangers, or 
similar fittings, designed and installed so as not to damage 
the cable, at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). 

(A) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In 
other than vertical nms, cables installed in accordance 
with 300,4 shall be considered supported and secured 
where such support does not exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) intervals. 

(B) Unsupported Cable. Type MI cable shall be 
permitted to be unsupported where the cable is fished 
between access points through concealed spaces in 
finished buildings or structures and supporfing is 
impracticable. 

(C) Cable Trays. All MI cable installed in cable trays 
shall comply with 392.30(A). 

332.31 Single Conductors. Where single-conductor 
cables are used, all phase conductors and, where used, the 
neutral conductor shall be grouped together to minimize 
induced voltage on the sheath. 

332.40 Boxes and Fittings. 

(A) Fittings. Fittings used for connecting Type MI cable 
to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment shall be identified 
for such use. 

(B) Terminal Seals. Where Type MI cable terminates, an 
end seal fitting shall be installed immediately after 
stripping to prevent the entrance of moisture into the 
insulation. The conductors extending beyond the sheath 
shall be individually provided with an insulating material. 

332.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type MI cable shall 
be determined in accordance with 310.15. The conductor 
temperature at the end seal fitting shall not exceed the 
temperature rating of the listed end seal fitting, and the 
installation shall not exceed the temperature ratings of 
terminations or equipment. 

(A) Type MI Cable Installed in Cable Tray, The 
ampacities for Type MI cable installed in cable tray shall 
be determined in accordance with 3 92, 80(A). 

(B) Single Type MI Conductors Grouped Together. 

Where single Type MI conductors are grouped together in 
a triangular or square configuration, as required by 
332.31, and installed on a messenger or exposed with a 
maintained free air space of not less than 2.15 times one 
conductor diameter (2.15 x O.D.) of the largest conductor 
contained within the configuration and adjacent conductor 
configurations or cables, the ampacity of the conductors 
shall not exceed the allowable ampacities of Table 
310.I5(B)(I7)- 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-195 



332.104 



ARTICLE 334 -NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPES NM, NMC, AND NMS 



III. Construction Specifications 

332.104 Conductors. Type MI cable conductors shall be of 
solid copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper with a 
resistance corresponding to standard AWG and kcmil sizes. 

332.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Where the 
outer sheath is made of copper, it shall provide an adequate 
path to serve as an equipment grounding conductor. Where 
the outer sheath is made of steel, a separate equipment 
grounding conductor shall be provided. 

332.112 Insulation. The conductor insulation in Type MI 
cable shall be a highly compressed refractory mineral that 
provides proper spacing for all conductors. 

332.116 Sheatli. The outer sheath shall be of a continuous 
construction to provide mechanical protection and 
moisture seal. 



ARTICLE 334 

Nonmetailic-Sheathed Cable: Types NM, 
NMC, and NMS 

I. General 

334.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications of nonmetallic- sheathed cable. 

334.2 Definitions. 

Nonmetailic-Sheathed Cable. A factory assembly of two 
or more insulated conductors enclosed within an overall 
nonmetallic jacket. 

Type NM. Insulated conductors enclosed within an 
overall nonmetallic jacket. 

Type NMC. Insulated conductors enclosed within an 
overall, corrosion resistant, nonmetallic jacket. 

Type NMS. Insulated power or control conductors with 
signaling, data, and communications conductors within an 
overall nonmetallic jacket. 

334,6 Listed. Type NM, Type NMC, and Type NMS 
cables shall be listed. 

II. Installation 

334.10 Uses Permitted. Type NM, Type NMC, and Type 
NMS cables shall be permitted to be used in the 
following: 

(1) One- and two-family dwellings and their attached oij 
detached garages, and thetr storage buildings. 

(2) Multifamily dwellings permitted to be of Types III, IV, 
and V construction except as prohibited in 334. 12. 

(3) Other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and 
V construction except as prohibited in 334.12. Cables 
shall be concealed within walls, floors, or ceilings 



that provide a thermal barrier of material that has at 

least a l5-minute fmish rating as identified in listings 

of fire-rated assemblies. 

Informational Note No. I: Types of building construction 

and occupancy classifications are defined in NFPA 220- 

2009, Standard on Types of Building Constmction, or the 

applicable building code, or both. 

Informational Note No. 2: See Informative Annex E for 

determination of building types [NFPA 220, Table 3-1]. 

(4) Cable trays in structures permitted to be Types III, 
IV, or V where the cables are identified for the use. 
Informational Note: See 310.15(A)(3) for 
temperature limitation of conductors. 

(5) Types I and 11 construction where installed within 
raceways permitted to be installed in Types I and II 
construction. 

Note: [HCD 1 and HCD 2] Types I II, III, IV, and V C 
construction as referenced in Section 334.10 shall be as defined A 
in Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code. C 

(A) Type NM. Type NM cable shall be permitted as 
follows: 

(1) For both exposed and concealed work in normally 
dry locations except as prohibited in 334.10(3) 

(2) To be installed or fished in air voids in masonry 
block or tile walls 

(B) Type NMC. Type NMC cable shall be permitted as 
follows: 

(1) For both exposed and concealed work in dry, moist, 
damp, or corrosive locations, except as prohibited by 
334.10(3) 

(2) In outside and inside walls of masonry block or tile 

(3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe 
protected against nails or screws by a steel plate at 
least 1.59 mm (Vi6 in.) thick and covered with 
plaster, adobe, or similar fmish 

(C) Type NMS. Type NMS cable shall be permitted as 
follows: 

(1) For both exposed and concealed work in normally 
dry locations except as prohibited by 334.10(3) 

(2) To be installed or fished in air voids in masonry 
block or tile walls 

334.12 Uses Not Permitted. 

(A) Types NM, NMC, and NMS. Types NM, NMC, and 
NMS cables shall not be permitted as follows: 

(1) In any dwelling or structure not specifically permitted 
in 334.10(1), (2), and (3) 

(2) Exposed in dropped or suspended ceilings in other 
than one- and two-family and multifamily dwellings 



70-196 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 334 - NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE: TYPES NM, NMC, AND NMS 



334.30 



(3) As service-entrance cable 

(4) In commercial garages having hazardous (classified) 
locations as defined in 51 L3 

(5) In theaters and similar locations, except where 
permitted in 518.4(B) 

(6) In motion picture studios 

(7) In storage battery rooms 

(8) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators 

(9) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate 

(10) In hazardous (classified) locations, except where 
specifically permitted by other articles in this Code. 

(B) Types NM and NMS. Types NM and NMS cables 
shall not be used under the following conditions or in the 
following locations: 

(1) Where exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors 

(2) Where embedded in masonry, concrete, adobe, fill, or 
plaster 

(3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe 
and covered with plaster, adobe, or similar finish 

(4) In wet or damp locations 

334.15 Exposed Work. In exposed work, except as 
provided in 300.1 1(A), cable shall be installed as 
specified in 334.15(A) through (C). 

(A) To Follow Surface. Cable shall closely follow the 
surface of the building finish or of nmning boards. 

(B) Protection from Physical Damage. Cable shall be 
protected from physical damage where necessary by rigid 
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical 
metaUic tubing, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, Type RTRC 
marked with the suffK -XW, or other approved means. 
Where passing through a floor, the cable shall be enclosed 
in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, 
electrical metallic tubing. Schedule 80 PVC conduit, Type 
RTRC marked wilh die sufTix -XW, or other approved 
means extending at least 150 mm (6 in.) above the floor. 

Type NMC cable installed in shallow chases or 
grooves in masonry, concrete, or adobe shall be protected 
in accordance with the requirements in 300.4(F) and 
covered with plaster, adobe, or similar finish. 

(C) In Unfinished Basements, and Crawl Spaces. 
Where cable is run at angles with joists in unfinished 
basements and crawl spaces, it shall be permissible to 
secure cables not smaller than two 6 AWG or three 8 
AWG conductors directly to the lower edges of the joists. 
Smaller cables shall be run either through bored holes in 
joists or on running boards. Nonmetallic-sheaihed cable 
installed on the wall of an unfinished basement shall be 



permitted to be installed in a listed conduit or tubing or 
shall be protected in accordance with 300.4. Conduit or 
tubing shall be provided with a suitable insulating bushing 
or adapter at the point the cable enters the raceway. The 
Sheaih of the nonmcialiic-sheathcd cable shall extend 
through the conduit or tubing and into the outlet or device 
box not less than 6 mm (% in.). The cable shall be secured 
within 300 mm (12 in.) of the point where the cable enters 
the conduit or tubing. Metal conduit, tubing, and metal 
outlet boxes shall be connected to an equipment 
grounding conductor l^omplying wilh the provisions of 
250.86 and 250. 148. 

334.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members, 
Types NM, NMC, or NMS cable shall be protected in 
accordance with 300.4 where installed through or parallel 
to framing members. Grommets used as required in 
300.4(B)(1) shall remain in place and be listed for the 
purpose of cable protection. 

334.23 In Accessible Attics. The installafion of cable in 
accessible atdcs or roof spaces shall also comply with 
320.23. 

334.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Types NM, NMC, and 
NMS cable shall be so made that the cable will not be 
damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any 
bend during or after installation shall not be less than five 
times the diameter of the cable. 

334.30 Securing and Supporting. Nonraetallic-sheathed 
cable shall be supported and secured by staples, cable ties, 
straps, hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed 
so as not to damage the cable, at intervals not exceeding 
1.4 ra (4'/2 ft) and within 300 mm (12 in.) of every outlet 
box, junction box, cabinet, or fitfing. Flat cables shall not 
be stapled on edge. 

Sections of cable protected from physical damage by 
raceway shall not be required to be secured within the 
raceway. 

(A) Horizontal Runs Through Holes and Notches. In 
other than vertical runs, cables installed in accordance 
with 300.4 shall be considered to be supported and 
secured where such support does not exceed 1.4-m {AVi- 
ft) intervals and the nonmetallic-sheathed cable is 
securely fastened in place by an approved means within 
300 mm (12 in.) of each box, cabinet, conduit body, or 
other nonmetallic-sheathed cable termination. 

Informational Note: See 314.17(C) for support where 
nonmetallic boxes are used. 

(B) Unsupported Cables. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable 
shall be permitted to be unsupported where the cable: 

(1) Is fished between access points through concealed 
spaces in finished buildings or structures and 
supporting is impracticable. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-197 



334.40 



ARTICLE 336 - POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC 



(2) Is not more than 1.4 m (41/2 ft) from the last point of 
cable support to the point of connection to a 
luminaire or other piece of electrical equipment and 
the cable and point of connection are within an 
accessible ceihng, 

(C) Wiring Device Without a Separate Outlet Box. A 
wiring device identified for the use, without a separate 
outlet box, and incorporating an integral cable clamp shall 
be permitted where the cable is secured in place at 
intervals not exceeding L4 m (4!/2 ft) and within 300 mm 
(12 in.) from the wiring device wall opening, and there 
shall be at least a 300 mm (12 in.) loop of unbroken cable 
or 150 mm (6 in.) of a cable end available on the interior 
side of the finished wall to permit replacement. 

334.40 Boxes and Fittings. 

(A) Boxes of Insulating Material. Nonmetallic outlet 
boxes shall be permitted as provided by 314.3. 

(B) Devices of Insulating Material. Switch, outlet, and 
tap devices of insulating material shall be permitted to be 
used without boxes in exposed cable wiring and for 
rewiring in existing buildings where the cable is 
concealed and fished. Openings in such devices shall 
form a close fit around the outer covering of the cable, 
and the device shall fully enclose the part of the cable 
from which any part of the covering has been removed. 
Where connections to conductors are by binding- screw 
terminals, there shall be available as many terminals as 
conductors. 

(C) Devices with Integral Enclosures. Wiring devices 
with integral enclosures identified for such use shall be 
permitted as provided by 300.15(E). 

334.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Types NM, NMC, 
and NMS cable shall be determined in accordance with 
3 10. 15. The allowable ampacity shall not exceed that of a 
60°C (140°F) rated conductor. The 90°C (194°F) rating 
shall be permitted to be used for ampacity adjusimeni and 
correction calculations, provided the final derated 
ampacity does not exceed that of a 60°C (140°F) rated 
conductor. The ampacity of Types NM, NMC, and NMS 
cable installed in cable tray shall be determined in 
accordance with 392.80( A).| 

Where more than two NM cables containing two or 
more current-carrying conductors are installed, without 
maintaining spacing between the cables, through the same 
opening in wood framing that is to be sealed with thermal 
insulation, caulk, or sealing foam, the allowable ampacity 
of each conductor shall be adjusted in accordance with 
Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) and the provisions of 310.15(A)(2), 
Exception, shall not apply. 

Where more than two NM cables containing two or 
more current-carrying conductors are installed in contact 



with thermal insulation without maintaining spacing 
between cables, the allowable ampacity of each conductor 
shall be adjusted in accordance with Table 
3 10, 15(B)(3)(a). 

III. Construction Specifications 

334.100 Construction. The outer cable sheath of 
nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall be a nonmetallic 
material. 

334.104 Conductors. The 600-volt insulated conductors 
shall be sizes 14 AWG through 2 AWG copper 
conductors or sizes 12 AWG through 2 AWG aluminum 
or copper-clad aluminum conductors. The 
communications conductors shall comply with Part V of 
Article 800. 

334.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. In addition 
to the insulated conductors, the cable shall have an 
insulated, covered, or bare equipment grounding 
conductor. 

334.112 Insulation. The insulated power conductors shall 
be one of the types Hsted in Table 3 10.il 04(A) that are 
suitable for branch-circuit wiring or one that is identified 
for use in these cables. Conductor insulation shall be rated 
at90°C(194°F). 

Informational Note: Types NM, NMC, and NMS cable 
identified by the markings NM-B, NMC-B, and NMS-B 
meet this requirement. 

334.1 16 Sheath. The outer sheath of nonmetallic-sheathed 
cable shall comply with 334,1 16(A), (B), and (C). 

(A) Type NM. The overall covering shall be flame 
retardant and moisture resistant. 

(B) Type NMC. The overall covering shall be flame 
retardant, moisture resistant, fungus resistant, and 
corrosion resistant. 

(C) Type NMS. The overall covering shall be flame 
retardant and moisture resistant. The sheath shall be 
applied so as to separate the power conductors from the 
communications conductors. 



ARTICLE 336 
Power and Control Tray Cable: Type TC 

I. General 

336.1 Scope. 

This article covers the use, installation, and construction 
specifications for power and control tray cable, Type TC. 



70-198 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 336 - POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE: TYPE TC 



336.104 



336.2 Definition. 

Power and Control Tray Cable, Type TC. A factory 
assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or 
without associated bare or covered grounding conductors, 
under a nonmetaUic jacket. 

II. Installation 

336.10 Uses Permitted. Type TC cable shall be 
permitted to be used as follows: 

(1) For power, Hghting, control, and signal circuits. 

(2) In cable trays. 

(3) In raceways. 

(4) In outdoor locations supported by a messenger wire. 

(5) For Class 1 circuits as permitted in Parts II and III of 
Article 725. 

(6) For non-power-limited fire alarm circuits if 
conductors comply with the requirements of 760.49. 

(7) In industrial establishments where the conditions of 
maintenance and supervision ensure that only 
qualified persons sei*vice the installation, and where 
the cable is continuously supported and protected 
against physical damage using mechanical protection, 
such as struts, angles, or channels. Type TC tray 
cable that complies with the crush and impact 
requirements of Type MC cable and is identified for 
such use with the marking Type TC-ER shall be 
permitted between a cable tray and the utilization 
equipment or device. The cable shall be secured at 
intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Equipment 
grounding for the utilization equipment shall be 
provided by an equipment grounding conductor 
within the cable. In cables containing conductors 
sized 6 AWG or smaller, the equipment grounding 
conductor shall be provided within the cable or, at the 
time of installation, one or more insulated conductors 
shall be permanently identified as an equipment 
grounding conductor in accordance with 250.1 19(B). 

Exception: Where not subject to physical damage, Type 
TC-ER shall be permitted to transition between cable 
trays and bet^veen cable trays and utilization equipment 
or devices for a distance not to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft) without 
continuous support. The cable shall be mechanically 
supported where exiting the cable tray to ensure that the 
minimum bending radius is not exceeded. 

(8) Where installed in wet locations, Type TC cable shall 
also be resistant to moisture and corrosive agents. 

Informational Note: See 310.15(A)(3) for temperature 
limitation of conductors. 

336.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type TC tray cable shall not 
be installed or used as follows: 



(1) Installed where it will be exposed to physical damage 

(2) Installed outside a raceway or cable tray system, 
except as permitted [in 336.10(4) and 336.10(7) 

(3) Used where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless 
identified as sunlight resistant 

(4) Direct buried, unless identified for such use 

336.24 Beodiiig Radius. Bends in Type TC cable shall be 
made so as not to damage the cable. For Type TC cable 
without metal shielding, the minimum bending radius 
shall be as follows: 

(1) Four times the overall diameter for cables 25 mm (1 
in.) or less in diameter 

(2) Five times the overall diameter for cables larger than 
25 mm (1 in.) but not more than 50 mm (2 in.) in 
diameter 

(3) Six times the overall diameter for cables larger than 
50 mm (2 in.) in diameter 

Type TC cables with metalhc shielding shall have a 
minimum bending radius of not less than 12 times the 
cable overall diameter. 

336.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type TC tray cable 
shall be determined in accordance with 392.80(A) for 14 
AWG and larger conductors, in accordance with 402.5 for 
18 AWG through 16 AWG conductors where installed in 
cable tray, and in accordance with 310.15 where installed 
in a raceway or as messenger- supported wiring. 

III. Construction Specifications 

336.100 Construction. A metallic sheath or armor as 
defined in 330.116 shall not be permitted either under or 
over the nonmetallic jacket. Metallic shield(s) shall be 
permitted over groups of conductors, under the outer 
jacket, or both. 

336.104 Conductors. The insulated conductors of Type 
TC cables shall be in sizes 18 AWG to 1000 kcmil 
copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper, and sizes 12 
AWG through 1000 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad 
aluminum. Insulated conductors of sizes 14 AWG, and 
larger copper, nickel, or nickel-coated copper, and sizes 
12 AWG through 1000 kcmil aluminum or copper-clad 
aluminum shall be one of the types listed in Table 
310.104(A) or Table 3 10.1 04(B) that is suitable for 
branch circuit and feeder circuits or one that is identified 
for such use. 

(A) Fire Alarm Systems. Where used for fire alarm 
systems, conductors shall also be in accordance with 
760.49. 

(B) Thermocouple Circuits. Conductors in Type TC 
cable used for thermocouple circuits in accordance with 
Part III of Article 725 shall also be permitted to be any of 
the materials used for thermocouple extension wire. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-199 



336.116 



ARTICLE 338 - SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE: TYPES SE AND USE 



(C) Class 1 Circuit Conductors. Insulated conductors of 
1 8 AWG and 1 6 AWG copper shall also be in accordance 
with 725,49. 

336.116 Jacket. The outer jacket shall be a flame- 
retardant, nonmetailic material. 

336.120 Marking. There shall be no voltage marking on 
a Type TC cable employing thermocouple extension wire. 



ARTICLE 338 

Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE 

L General 

338.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications of service-entrance cable. 

338.2 Definitions. 

Service-Entrance Cable. A single conductor or 
multi conductor assembly provided with or without an 
overall covering, primarily used for services, and of the 
following types: 

Type SE. Service-entrance cable having a flame-retardant, 
moisture-resistant covering. 

Type USE. Service-entrance cable, identified for 
underground use, having a moisture-resistant covering, 
but not required to have a flame-retardant covering. 

II, Installation 

338.10 Uses Permitted. 

(A) Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance 
cable shall be permitted to be used as service-entrance 
conductors and shall be installed in accordance with 
230.6, 230.7, and Parts II, III, and IV of Article 230. 

(B) Branch Circuits or Feeders. 

(1) Grounded Conductor Insulated. Type SE service- 
entrance cables shall be permitted in wiring systems 
where all of the circuit conductors of the cable are of the 
thermoset or thermoplastic type. 



(2) Use of Uninsulated Conductor.) Type SE service- 
entrance cable shall be permitted for use where the 
insulated conductors are used for circuit wiring and the 
uninsulated conductor is used only for equipment 
grounding purposes. 



Exception: In existing installations, uninsulated 
conductors shall be permitted as a grounded conductor in 
accordance with 250.32 and 250,140, where the 
uninsulated grounded conductor of the cable originates in 
service equipment, and with 225,30 through 225.40. 

(3) Temperature Limitations. Type SE service-entrance 
cable used to supply appliances shall not be subject to 
conductor temperatures in excess of the temperature 
specified for the type of insulation involved. 

(4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits and 
Feeders. 

(a) Interior Installations. In addition to the 
provisions of this article, Type SE service-entrance cable 
used for interior wiring shall comply with the installation 
requirements of Part II of Article 334, excluding 334,80. 

Where installed in thermal insulation, the ampacity 
shall be in accordance with the 60^C (140^F) conductor 
temperature rating. The maximum conductor lemperalure 
rating shall be permitted to be used for ampacity 
adjustment and correction purposes, if the final derated 
ampacity does not exceed that for a 60^C (MC^F) rated 
conductor. 

Informational Note No, 1: See 310.15(A)(3) for 
temperature limitation of conductors. 

Informational Note No. 2: For the instalfalion of main 
power feeder conductors in dwelling units refer lo 
310.15(B)(7). 

(b) Exterior Installations. In addition to the 
provisions of this article, service-entrance cable used for 
feeders or branch circuits, where installed as exterior 
wiring, shall be installed in accordance with Part I of 
Article 225. The cable shall be supported in accordance 
with 334.30. Type USE cable installed as underground 
feeder and branch circuit cable shall comply with Part II 
of Article 340. 

338.12 Uses Not Permitted. 

(A) Service-Entrance Cable. Service-entrance cable 
(SE) shall not be used under the following conditions or 
in the following locations: 

(1) Where subject to physical damage unless protected in 
accordance with 230.50(B) 

(2) Underground with or without a raceway 

(3) For exterior branch circuits and feeder wiring unless 
the installation complies with the provisions of Part I 
of Article 225 and is supported in accordance with 
334.30 or is used as messenger-supported wiring as 
permitted in Part II of Article 396 

(B) Underground Service-Entrance Cable. Underground 
service-entrance cable (USE) shall not be used under the 
following conditions or in the following locations: 

(1) For interior wiring 



70-200 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 340 - UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CABLE: TYPE UF 



340.80 



(2) For aboveground installations except where USE 
cable emerges from the ground and is terminated in 
" an enclosure at an outdoor location and the cable is 
protected in accordance with 300.5(D) 

(3) As aerial cable unless it is a multiconductor cable 
identified for use aboveground and installed as 
messenger-supported wiring in accordance with 
225.10 and Part II of Article 396 

338.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Types USE and SE 
cable shall be so made that the cable will not be damaged. 
The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend, 
during or after installation, shall not be less than five 
times the diameter of the cable. 

III. Construction 

338.100 Construction. Cabled, single-conductor, Type 
USE constructions recognized for underground use shall 
be permitted to have a bare copper conductor cabled with 
the assembly. Type USE single, parallel, or cabled 
conductor assemblies recognized for underground use 
shall be permitted to have a bare copper concentric 
conductor applied. These constructions shall not require 
an outer overall covering. 

Informational Note: See 230.41, Exception, item (2), for 
direcdy buried, uninsulated service-entrance conductors. 

Type SE or USE cable containing two or more 
conductors shall be permitted to have one conductor 
uninsulated. 

338.120 Marking. Service-entrance cable shall be 
marked as required in 310.120, Cable with the neutral 
conductor smaller than the ungrounded conductors shall 
be so marked. 



ARTICLE 340 

Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit 
Cable: Type UF 

I. General 

340.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications for underground feeder and 
branch-circuit cable. Type UF. 

340.2 Definition. 

Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable, Type 
UF. A factory assembly of one or more insulated 
conductors with an integral or an overall covering of 
nonmetallic material suitable for direct burial in the earth. 

340.6 Listing Requirements. Type UF cable shall be 
listed. 



II. Installation 

340.10 Uses Permitted. Type UF cable shall be permitted 
as follows: 

(1) For use underground, including direct burial in the 
earth. For underground requirements, see 300.5. 

(2) As single-conductor cables. Where installed as single- 
conductor cables, all conductors of the feeder 
grounded conductor or branch circuit, including the 
grounded conductor and equipment grounding 
conductor, if any, shall be installed in accordance with 
300.3. 

(3) For wiring in wet, dry, or corrosive locations under the 
recognized wiring methods of this Code. 

(4) Installed as nonmetallic- sheathed cable. Where so 
installed, the installation and conductor requirements 
shall comply with Parts II and III of Aiticle 334 and 
shall be of the multiconductor type. 

(5) For solar photovoltaic systems in accordance with 
690.31. 

(6) As single-conductor cables as the nonheating leads for 
heating cables as provided in 424.43. 

(7) Supported by cable trays. Type UF cable supported by 
cable trays shall be of the multiconductor type. 

Informational Note: See 310.15(A)(3) for temperature 
limitation of conductors. 

340.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type UF cable shall not be 
used as follows: 

(1) As service-entrance cable 

(2) In commercial garages 

(3) In theaters and similar locations 

(4) In motion picnire studios 

(5) In storage battery rooms 

(6) In hoistways or on elevators or escalators 

(7) In hazardous (classified) location|, except as 
specifically permitted by other articles in this Code 

(8) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate, 
except where embedded in plaster as nonheating leads 
where permitted in 424.43 

(9) Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, unless 
identified as sunlight resistant 

(10) Where subject to physical damage 

(11) As overhead cable, except where installed as 
messenger-supported wiring in accordance with Part II 
of Article 396 

340.24 Bending Radius. Bends in Type UF cable shall be 
so made that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the 
curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than 
five times the diameter of the cable. 

340.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of Type UF cable shall be 
that of 60°C (HO'^F) conductors in accordance with 310.15. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-201 



340.104 



ARTICLE 342 - INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT: TYPE IMC 



III. Construction Specifications 

340.104 Conductors. The conductors shall be sizes 14 
AWG copper or 12 AWG aluminum or copper-clad 
aluminum through 4/0 AWG. 

340.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. In addition 
to the insulated conductors, the cable shall be permitted to 
have an insulated or bare equipment grounding conductor, 

340.112 Insulation. The conductors of Type UF shall be 
one of the moisture-resistant types listed in Table 
310. 104(A) that is suitable for branch-circuit wiring or 
one that is identified for such use. Where installed as a 
substitute wiring method for NM cable, the conductor 
insulation shall be rated 90°C (194^F). 

340.116 Sheath. The overall covering shall be flame 
retardant; moisture, fungus, and corrosion resistant; and 
suitable for direct burial in the earth. 



ARTICLE 342 

Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC 

I. General 

342.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications for intermediate metal conduit 
(IMC) and associated fittings. 

342.2 Definition. 

Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). A steel threadable 
raceway of circular cross section designed for the physical 
protection and routing of conductors and cables and for 
use as an equipment grounding conductor when installed 
with its integral or associated coupling and appropriate 
fittings. 

342.6 Listing Requirements. IMC, factory elbows and 
couplings, and associated fittings shall be listed. 

II. Installation 
342.10 Uses Permitted. 

(A) All Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. Use 

of IMC shall be permitted under all atmospheric 
conditions and occupancies. 

(B) Corrosion Environments. IMC, elbows, couplings, 
and fittings shall be permitted to be installed in concrete, 
in direct contact with the earth, or in areas subject to 
severe corrosive influences where protected by corrosion 
protection and judged suitable for the condition. 

(C) Cinder Fill. IMC shall be permitted to be installed in 
or under cinder fill where subject to permanent moisture 



where protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder 
concrete not less than 50 mm (2 in.) thick; where the 
conduit is not less than 450 mm (18 in.) under the fill; or 
where protected by corrosion protection and judged 
suitable for the condition. 

(D) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, 
and so forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or 
protected against corrosion by corrosion-resistant 
materials. 

Informational Note: See 300.6 for protection against 
corrosion. 

342.14 Dissimilar Metals. Where practicable, dissimilar 
metals in contact anywhere in the system shall be avoided 
to eliminate the possibility of galvanic action. 

Aluminum fittings and enclosures shall be permitted 
to be used with IMC. 

342.20 Size. 

(A) Minimum. IMC smaller than metric designator 16 
(trade size Yt) shall not be used. 

(B) Maximum. IMC larger than metric designator 103 
(trade size 4) shall not be used. 

Informational Note: See 300.1(C) for the metric 
designators and trade sizes. These are for identification 
purposes only and do not relate to actual dimensions. 

342.22 Number of Conductors. The number of 
conductors shall not exceed that permitted by the 
percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. 

Cables shall be permitted to be installed where such 
use is not prohibited by the respective cable articles. The 
number of cables shall not exceed the allowable 
percentage fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9. 

342.24 Bends — How Made. Bends of IMC shall be so 
made that the conduit will not be damaged and the 
internal diameter of the conduit will not be effectively 
reduced. The radius of the curve of any field bend to the 
centerline of the conduit shall not be less than indicated in 
Table 2, Chapter 9. 

342.26 Bends — Number in One Run. There shall not 
be more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360 
degrees total) between pull points, for example, conduit 
bodies and boxes. 

342.28 Reaming and Threading. All cut ends shall be 
reamed or otherwise finished to remove rough edges. 
Where conduit is threaded in the field, a standard cutting 
die with a taper of 1 in 16 (Va in. taper per foot) shall be 
used. 

Informational Note: See ANSI/ASME B. 1.20. 1-1 983, 
Standard for Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 



70-202 



2013 California Electrical Code 



ARTICLE 344 - RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC 



344.10 



342.30 Securing and Supporting. IMC shall be installed 
as a complete system in accordance with 300.18 and shall 
be securely fastened in place and supported in accordance 
with 342.30(A) and j[B)j 

(A) Securely Fastened. IMC shall be secured in 
iaccordaiice with one of the (bltowing: 

(1) IMC shall be securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) 
of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, 
conduit body, or other conduit termination. 

(2) Where structural members do not readily permit 
fastening within 900 mm (3 ft), fastening shall be 
permitted to be increased to a distance of 1 .5 m (5 ft). 

(3) Where approved, conduit shall not be required to be 
securely fastened within 900 mm (3 ft) of the service 
head for above- the-roof termination of a mast, 

(B) Supports. IMC shall be supported in accordance with 
one of the following: 

(1) Conduit shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 
3 m (10 ft). 

(2) The distance between supports for straight runs of 
conduit shall be permitted in accordance with Table 
344.30(B)(2), provided the conduit is made up with 
threaded couplings and such supports prevent 
transmission of stresses to termination where conduit 
is deflected between supports. 

(3) Exposed vertical risers from industrial machinery or 
fixed equipment shall be permitted to be supported at 
intervals not exceeding 6 m (20 ft) if the conduit is 
made up with threaded couplings, the conduit is 
supported and securely fastened at the top and bottom 
of the riser, and no other means of intermediate 
support is readily available. 

(4) Horizontal mns of IMC supported by openings 
through fi-aming members at intervals not exceeding 
3 m (10 ft) and securely fastened within 900 mm (3 
ft) of termination points shall be permitted. 



342.42 Couplings and Connectors. 

(A) Threadless. Threadless couplings and connectors 
used with conduit shall be made tight. Where buried in 
masonry or concrete, they shall be the concretetight type. 
Where installed in wet locations, they shall comply with 
314.15. Threadless couplings and connectors shall not be 
used on threaded conduit ends unless listed for the 
purpose. 

(B) Running Threads. Running threads shall not be used 
on conduit for connection at couplings. 



342.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or 
other enclosure, a bushing shall be provided to protect the 
wire! from abrasion unless the box, fitting, or enclosure is 
dcsigiied to provide such protection. 

Informational Note: See 300.4(G) for the protection of 
conductors 4 AWG and larger at bushings. 

342.56 Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall be made 
in accordance with 300.15. 

342.60 Grounding. IMC shall be permitted as an 
equipment grounding conductor. 

III. Construction Specifications 

342.120 Marking. Each length shall be clearly and 
durably marked at least every 1.5 m (5 ft) with the letters 
IMC. Each length shall be marked as required in 1 10.21. 

342.130 Standard Lengths. The standard length of IMC 
shall be 3.05 m (10 ft), including an attached coupling, 
and each end shall be threaded. Longer or shorter lengths 
with or without coupling and threaded or unthreaded shall 
be permitted. 



ARTICLE 344 
Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC 



I. General 

344.1 Scope. This article covers the use, installation, and 
construction specifications for rigid metal conduit (RMC) 
and associated fittings. 

344.2 Definition. 

Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC). A threadable raceway of 
circular cross section designed for the physical protection 
and routing of conductors and cables and for use as an 
equipment grounding conductor when installed with its 
integral or associated coupling and appropriate fittings. 
RMC is generally made of steel (ferrous) with protective 
coatings or aluminum (nonferrous). Special use types are 
red brass and stainless steel. 

344.6 Listing Requirements. RMC, factory elbows and 
couplings, and associated fittings shall be listed. 

II. Installation 
344.10 Uses Permitted. 

(A) Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. 

(1) Galvanized Steel and Stainless Steel RMC. 

Galvanized steel and stainless steel RMC shall be permitted 
under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies. 



2013 California Electrical Code 



70-203 



344.14 



ARTICLE 344 - RIGID METAL CONDUIT: TYPE RMC 



(2) Red Brass RMC. Red brass RMC shall be permitted 
to be installed for direct burial and swimming pool 
applications. 

(3) Aluminum RMC, Aluminum RMC shall be permitted 
to be installed where judged suitable for the environment. 
Rigid aluminum conduit encased in concrete or in direct 
contact with the earth shall be provided with approved 
supplementary corrosion protection. 

(4) Ferrous Raceways and Fittings. Ferrous raceways 
and fittings protected from corrosion solely by enamel 
shall be permitted only indoors and in occupancies not 
subject to severe corrosive influences. 

(B) Corrosive Environments. 

(1) Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, and Red Brass 
RMC, Elbows, Couplings, and Fittings. Galvanized 
steel, stainless steel, and red brass RMC elbows, 
couplings, and fittings shall be permitted to be installed 
in concrete, in direct contact with the earth, or in areas 
subject to severe corrosive influences where protected 
by corrosion protection and judged suitable for the 
condition. 

(2) Supplementary Protection of Aluminum RMC. 

Aluminum RMC shall be provided with approved 
supplementary corrosion protection where encased in 
concrete or in direct contact with the earth. 

(C) Cinder Fill. Galvanized steel, stainless steel, and 
red brass RMC shall be permitted to be installed in or 
under cinder fill where subject to permanent moisture 
where protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder 
concrete not less than 50 mm (2 in.) thick; where the 
conduit is not less than 450 mm (18 in.) under the fill; or 
where protected by corrosion protection and judged 
suitable for the condition. 

(D) Wet Locations. All supports, bolts, straps, screws, 
and so forth, shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or 
protected against corrosion by corrosion-resistant 
materials. 

Infor